% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% memoir.dtx
% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net
% Maintainer: Lars Madsen (daleif+memoir at imf dot au dot dk)
% Copyright 2001--2010 Peter R. Wilson
%
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any
% later version.
% The latest version of the license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
% LaTeX version 2003/06/01 or later.
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
% This work consists of the files listed in the README file.
%
% \fi
% \CheckSum{30174}
%
% \changes{v0.1}{2001/05/20}{First public alpha release}
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{First beta release}
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
% \changes{v0.32}{2001/08/03}{Fix for old versions of amsmath package}
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Added controllable chapter/LoF spacing}
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Fixed bug in \cs{appendixpage}}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{First production release}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Feature fixes} ^^A never released
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{More fixups}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Replaced all the subfigure code}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added sidebars}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Upgraded verse typesetting}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added extra \cs{provide} commands}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major verbatim, box and file additions}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Removed extraneous space from change marks}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Extra optarg in \cs{chapter} and \cs{chapter*}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled font sizes a little}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt bug}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Minor tweaks wrt v1.2}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Extra trimming styles}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Major extensions for indexing}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Automatically call a patch file}
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Fixed nasty figure/table bug}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added patches v1.1}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added patches v1.3}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Including current patches}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added patches v1.2}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.4}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.5}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.6}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added patches v1.7}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/30}{Added patches v1.8}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/30}{Added patches v1.9}
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/31}{Decided to issue v1.4 as v1.6 on the way to
% the golden section 1.6180339887...}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Changes to clo files, and footnotes}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Removed a potential problem with the
% hangul package}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Folded in all v1.61 patches}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/15}{Some minor extensions}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Support for glossaries}
% \changes{v1.6180}{2006/06/12}{Footnote font fix}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/05/26}{Folded in all mempatch v4.9a patches}
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Fixed(?) page layout algorithms}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Unemulated if... packages}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Folded in all mempatch v5.1 patches}
% \changes{v1.6180339a}{2008/08/07}{Removed extra space in footnotes}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/21}{Minor bug fixes and extensions}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/25}{A few more}
% \changes{v1.6180339d}{2009/02/04}{Fixed a bug in the running
% head/foot widths}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/03/16}{Start of `f' version.}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/03/16}{Fixed problem with companion pagestyle
% and added 2 col Toc}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/04/25}{Extended description lists}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/07/12}{Added three \cs{memlet...} macros}
% \changes{v1.6180339g}{2009/07/13}{Fixed a bug regading extre enties
% in the page note list}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi (RTL) support}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/27}{Fixed bug in \cs{@setclcnt}, added simple pagestyle}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/08/08}{changed the code that defined the
% main function out of \cs{newlistof}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/09/10}{fixed bug with upquote}
% \changes{v1.61803398b}{2009/09/21}{fixed typo}
% \changes{v1.61803398c}{2009/11/13}{fixed typo}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2009/11/13}{fixed infelicity with \cs{@starttoc}}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2009/12/01}{fixed bug in ifxetex, ifpdf,...}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2009/12/18}{made \cs{subcaptionref} robust}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/xx/xx}{several changes}
% \changes{v1.618033988}{2010/02/16}{bumped version to v1.618033988}
% \changes{v1.618033988b}{2010/02/17}{fixed typo that broke \cs{feetbelowfloat}}
% \changes{v1.618033988c}{2010/02/20}{fixed sporadic space in \cs{@footnotetext}}
% \changes{v1.618033988d}{2010/02/26}{fixed bug in
% \cs{marginparmargin}\{left\} in twoside mode}
%
% \changes{v3.6}{2010/04/19}{Reversioned memoir to a more suitable scheme}
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/07/01}{Various bug fixes}
% \changes{v3.6e}{2010/08/20}{Maintenance}
% \changes{v3.6f}{2010/08/22}{Bad typo}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Maintenance}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/02/13}{Various things}
% \changes{v3.6i}{2011/02/18}{Two bug fixes}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/06}{Bug fixes}
%
% \def\dtxfile{memoir.dtx}
%
% \def\fileversion{v0.1} \def\filedate{2001/05/20}
% \def\fileversion{v0.2} \def\filedate{2001/06/03}
% \def\fileversion{v0.3} \def\filedate{2001/07/14}
% \def\fileversion{v0.31} \def\filedate{2001/07/24}
% \def\fileversion{v0.32} \def\filedate{2001/08/03}
% \def\fileversion{v0.33} \def\filedate{2001/08/31}
% \def\fileversion{v1.0} \def\filedate{2001/11/17}
% \def\fileversion{v1.0a} \def\filedate{2001/12/07}
% \def\fileversion{v1.1} \def\filedate{2002/03/28}
% \def\fileversion{v1.1a} \def\filedate{2002/04/28}
% \def\fileversion{v1.2} \def\filedate{2002/08/10}
% \def\fileversion{v1.2} \def\filedate{2002/08/27}
% \def\fileversion{v1.3} \def\filedate{2002/11/14}
% \def\fileversion{v1.3a} \def\filedate{2002/11/22}
% \def\fileversion{v1.4} \def\filedate{2003/12/18}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6} \def\filedate{2004/01/31}
% \def\fileversion{v1.61} \def\filedate{2004/04/04}
% \def\fileversion{v1.618} \def\filedate{2005/09/27}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180} \def\filedate{2006/06/12}
% \def\fileversion{v1.61803} \def\filedate{2008/05/26}
% \def\fileversion{v1.618033} \def\filedate{2008/06/02}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339} \def\filedate{2008/07/23}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339a} \def\filedate{2008/08/07}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339c} \def\filedate{2009/01/21}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339c} \def\filedate{2009/01/25}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339d} \def\filedate{2009/02/04}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339e} \def\filedate{2009/02/06}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339f} \def\filedate{2009/07/12}
% \def\fileversion{v1.6180339g} \def\filedate{2009/07/13}
% \def\fileversion{v1.61803398} \def\filedate{2009/09/10}
% \def\fileversion{v1.61803398b} \def\filedate{2009/09/21}
% \def\fileversion{v1.61803398c} \def\filedate{2009/11/17}
% \def\fileversion{v1.61803398d} \def\filedate{2009/11/23}
% \def\fileversion{v1.618033988} \def\filedate{2010/02/16}
% \def\fileversion{v1.618033988b} \def\filedate{2010/02/17}
% \def\fileversion{v1.618033988c} \def\filedate{2010/02/20}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6} \def\filedate{2010/04/19}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6d} \def\filedate{2010/07/01}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6e} \def\filedate{2010/08/20}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6f} \def\filedate{2010/08/22}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6g} \def\filedate{2010/09/19}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6h} \def\filedate{2011/02/13}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6i} \def\filedate{2011/02/18}
% \def\fileversion{v3.6j} \def\filedate{2011/03/06}
% \title{The LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class for configurable book
% typesetting: Source code\thanks{This
% file (\texttt{\dtxfile}) has version number \fileversion, last revised
% \filedate.}}
%
% \author{%
% Peter Wilson\thanks{\texttt{herries dot press at earthlink dot net}}\\
% Herries Press \\
% (with the assistance of Lars Madsen)}
% \date{\filedate}
% \maketitle
%
% \begin{abstract}
% The \Lpack{memoir} class is designed for typesetting
% general books such as novels, biographies, histories,
% and so on, although as it supports all the functionality of the
% standard \Lpack{book} class it can also be used for technical writing.
% It provides more functions than the standard class as well as
% presenting a more friendly interface for the book designer.
% It can also simulate the typesetting style of the standard \Lpack{article}
% class.
%
% The class was first released in mid 2001 and has been well used ever
% since.
% \end{abstract}
%
% \tableofcontents
% \listoftables
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
%
%
% \section{Introduction}
%
% This document provides the commented source
% for the LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class, which is designed for typesetting
% general books such as novels, biographies, histories,
% and so on. It has all the functionality of the standard \Lpack{book}
% class and, as well as providing some extra functions, also provides
% a more friendly interface for the document designer. As it can encompass
% everything that the \Lpack{book} class provides it may also be used
% for technical writing.
%
% The default appearance of a document typeset with this class is
% the same as if it had been typeset with the \Lpack{book} class and
% it can be made to simulate the \Lpack{article} class..
% The class, though, includes extra facilities that make it easy to
% change the appearance of such things as the page headers and footers,
% the style of chapter and other sectional headings, and the style of
% captions. It also makes it easy to both change the style of the
% Table of Contents, List of Figures, etc., as well as creating new
% kinds of `List of\ldots'. New types of floats, if needed, can be
% created very simply. Epigraphs can be put into the document in a
% variety of styles.
%
% The class provides a variety of page, chapter and captioning
% styles that you can choose from if you don't want to create your own.
%
% Documents can be typeset in 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt or 17pt font
% sizes, and if you have scaleable fonts available they can be set at any size.
% There is a reasonably intuitive means of setting the margins
% and placement of the text on a page. There is an option to put
% trim marks on the printed pages if the stock sheets need to be trimmed
% down to the final page size. For those whose publishers like a
% manuscript to look as though it was typewritten, there is an option
% to do this (double spacing, ragged right, no hyphenation,
% fixed width font). There is also an unsophisticated means of flagging any
% revisions to the text.
%
% As this is a new class, by default it does not support the old
% LaTeX v2.09
% font commands, namely the \cs{bf}, \cs{sl}, \cs{it} and \cs{sc} commands;
% it warns about using the \cs{em} command but does support it.
%
%
% I hope that apart from the font commands the class
% is compatible with
% `standard' LaTeX.
%
% Development of this class would never have been started without
% the wonderful work done by Leslie Lamport and others~\cite{CLASSES}
% from whom I have learned a great deal and borrowed much code.
%
% Sections~\ref{sec:docstrip} through~\ref{sec:ic} describe some
% administrative elements and code for general use later in the
% specification.
% The macros forming the class file are defined in sections~\ref{sec:opt}
% through~\ref{sec:init}.
%
% This manual is typeset according to the conventions of the
% \LaTeX{} \textsc{docstrip} utility which enables the automatic
% extraction of the \LaTeX{} macro source files~\cite{GOOSSENS94}.
%
%
% \section{A driver for this document} \label{sec:docstrip}
%
% The next series of code contains the documentation driver file for
% \LaTeX, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
% currently reading. This will be extracted from this file by the
% \textsc{docstrip} program.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*driver>
\documentclass[twoside]{ltxdoc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{url}
%%\usepackage[draft=false,
%% plainpages=false,
%% pdfpagelabels,
%% bookmarksnumbered,
%% hyperindex=true
%% ]{hyperref} % Doesn't work with indexing of \DescribeMacro
\providecommand{\phantomsection}{} % just in case hyperref not used
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We do want an index, using linenumbers, but not update information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
%% \RecordChanges
% \end{macrocode}
% We had better have page headings to aid navigation, but I don't
% like Uppercased titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeatletter
\@mparswitchfalse
\makeatother
\renewcommand{\MakeUppercase}[1]{#1}
\pagestyle{headings}
% \end{macrocode}
% We may use so many \file{docstrip} modules that we set the
% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% Some commonly used abbreviations
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}} % typeset an option
\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}} % typeset a file
\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}} % typeset a counter
\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}} % typeset a pagestyle
\newcommand*{\Lenv}[1]{\texttt {#1}} % typeset an environment
\newcommand*{\Lpack}[1]{\textsf {#1}} % typeset a package
\newcommand*{\ctt}{\textsc{ctt}} % comp.text.tex
\newenvironment{PW}{\em}{}
\newcommand*{\theTeXbook}{\textit{The \TeX book}}
\let\oldllap\llap
\def\llap#1{\oldllap{#1\quad}} % might be evil
% \end{macrocode}
% We want the full details printed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begin{document}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\raggedbottom
\raggedright
\DocInput{memoir.dtx}
\PrintIndex
%% \PrintChanges
\end{document}
%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% ^^A There are some elements we do not want to appear in the index.
% \DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@addtoreset,\@arabic,\@badmath}
% \DoNotIndex{\@centercr,\@cite}
% \DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
% \DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m}
% \DoNotIndex{\@minus,\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\@set@topoint}
% \DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
% \DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
% \DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
% \DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\Alph,\alph}
% \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
% \DoNotIndex{\bullet}
% \DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
% \DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
% \DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
% \DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\endgroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
% \DoNotIndex{\fbox}
% \DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
% \DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
% \DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss}
% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\if@tempswa,\fi}
% \DoNotIndex{\ifcase,\or,\fi}
% \DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
% \DoNotIndex{\input}
% \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let}
% \DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th}
% \DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
% \DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
% \DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
% \DoNotIndex{\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
% \DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
% \DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass}
% \DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand,\reset@font}
% \DoNotIndex{\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily,\roman}
% \DoNotIndex{\roman,\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
% \DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
% \DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
% \DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
% \DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@nameuse,\csname,\endcsname}
%
%
%
% \section{Identification} \label{sec:id}
%
% The \Lpack{memoir} document class can only be used with LaTeX2e,
% so we make
% sure that an appropriate message is displayed when another \TeX{}
% format is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% ^^A Use the Golden Section as the version number (1.6180339887 4989484820 4586834365)
% \changes{v3.6}{2010/04/19}{Not any more, apparently people does not
% know the numeric value of the golden ration very well}
%
%
% Announce the name, option files and version for LaTeX2e files:
% \begin{macrocode}
%\ProvidesClass{memoir}%
% [2011/03/06 v3.6j configurable book, report, article document class]
%<9pt>\ProvidesFile{mem9.clo}%
%<9pt> [2008/01/30 v0.4 memoir class 9pt size option]
%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{mem10.clo}%
%<10pt> [2008/01/30 v0.3 memoir class 10pt size option]
%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{mem11.clo}%
%<11pt> [2008/01/30 v0.3 memoir class 11pt size option]
%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{mem12.clo}%
%<12pt> [2010/10/19 v0.4b memoir class 12pt size option]
%<14pt>\ProvidesFile{mem14.clo}%
%<14pt> [2008/01/30 v0.4 memoir class 14pt size option]
%<17pt>\ProvidesFile{mem17.clo}%
%<17pt> [2008/01/30 v0.3 memoir class 17pt size option]
%<20pt>\ProvidesFile{mem20.clo}%
%<20pt> [2008/01/31 v0.1 memoir class 20pt size option]
%<25pt>\ProvidesFile{mem25.clo}%
%<25pt> [2008/01/31 v0.1 memoir class 25pt size option]
%<30pt>\ProvidesFile{mem30.clo}%
%<30pt> [2008/01/31 v0.1 memoir class 30pt size option]
%<36pt>\ProvidesFile{mem36.clo}%
%<36pt> [2008/01/31 v0.1 memoir class 36pt size option]
%<48pt>\ProvidesFile{mem48.clo}%
%<48pt> [2008/01/31 v0.1 memoir class 48pt size option]
%<60pt>\ProvidesFile{mem60.clo}%
%<60pt> [2008/01/31 v0.1 memoir class 60pt size option]
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Initial Code} \label{sec:ic}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Note (2001/08/03): Old versions of the \Lpack{amsmath} package did odd
% things with \cs{@tempa}, \cs{@tempb} and \cs{@tempc}. I have now replaced
% any use of these with \cs{@memtempa}, etc.
%
% In this part we define a few commands that are used later on.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
% \begin{macro}{\@memptsize}
% The \cs{@ptsize} control sequence is normally used to store the
% second digit of the
% pointsize we are typesetting in. So, normally, it's value is one
% of 0, 1 or 2.
%
% \cs{@memptsize} stores the full pointsize.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{@memptsize}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@ptsize}{}
\newcommand*{\@memptsize}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any new lengths that depend on the point size option must be declared
% before the options are executed.
% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
% The length \cs{onelineskip} is the vertical space taken
% by a normal line of text. The lengths \cs{lxvchars} and \cs{xlvchars} are
% the approximate lengths required for typesetting lines with either 65 or 45
% characters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\onelineskip}
\newlength{\lxvchars}
\newlength{\xlvchars}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memcnta}
% \begin{macro}{\c@memmarkcntra}
% We need a scratch count register and a scratch counter.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/10/30}{Added @memmarkcntra scratch counter}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@memcnta
\newcounter{@memmarkcntra}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Deleted count register \cs{@memtempa}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@restonecol}
% When the document has to be printed in two columns, we sometimes
% have to temporarily switch to one column. This switch is used to
% remember to switch back.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@restonecol
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@openright}
% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on righthand (recto) pages;
% this is the default. FALSE means chapters can start on any page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@openright
\@openrighttrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@openleft}
% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on lefthand (verso) pages.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@openleft
\@openleftfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
% This is TRUE if the main part of the document is being currently procesed;
% this is the default.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@mainmatter
\@mainmattertrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@memoldfont}
% This is TRUE if the \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added \cs{if@memoldfont}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@memoldfont
\@memoldfontfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifextrafontsizes}
% This is TRUE if the \Lopt{extrafontsizes} option is used.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{ifextrafontsizes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifextrafontsizes
\extrafontsizesfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memerror}
% \begin{macro}{\@memwarn}
% Two macros to save some space when reporting errors or warnings.
% The macros take the same arguments, ignoring the first in each case,
% as \cs{ClassError} and \cs{ClassWarning}, e.g., \\
% \verb?\@memwarn{Message}? \\
% instead of \\
% \verb?\ClassWarning{memoir}{Message}?.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memerror} and \cs{@memwarn}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memerror}{\ClassError{memoir}}
\newcommand*{\@memwarn}{\ClassWarning{memoir}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifsamename}
% \begin{macro}{\nametest}
% The macro \cs{nametest}\marg{name1}\marg{name2} tests whether the
% characters forming the two arguments are the same or not. If they are the
% same then \cs{ifsamename} is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE. \meta{name1}
% and \meta{name2} must both be either macro names (including the backslash)
% or must both not be macro names. That is, you cannot do
% \verb?\nametest{\cs}{cs}?.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added some \% because the macro
% was leaking spaces}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifsamename
\newcommand{\nametest}[2]{%
\samenamefalse%
\begingroup%
\def\@memtempa{#1}\def\@memtempb{#2}%
\ifx \@memtempa\@memtempb%
\endgroup%
\samenametrue%
\else%
\endgroup%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@And}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Andtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Andfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@Or}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Ortrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Orfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@m@Xor}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Xortrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@Xorfalse}
% These are for `if A and B', `if A or B' and `if A xor B'.
%
% For A and B:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \m@m@Andfalse
% \ifA
% \ifB
% \m@mAndtrue
% \fi
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% For A or B:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \m@m@Ortrue
% \ifA
% \else
% \ifB
% \else
% \m@m@Orfalse
% \fi
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% For A xor B:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \m@m@Xortrue
% \ifA
% \ifB
% \m@m@Xfalse
% \fi
% \else
% \ifB
% \else
% \m@m@Xorfalse
% \fi
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/09}{Added \cs{ifm@m@And}, \cs{ifm@m@Or} and \cs{ifm@m@Xor}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@m@And
\newif\ifm@m@Or
\newif\ifm@m@Xor
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Deleted \cs{fillline} and \cs{makecommand} as
% they were not used}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\kill@lastcounter}
% \cs{kill@lastcounter}\marg{cntr}\footnote{With thanks to Stefan Ulrich
% (\texttt{ulrich@cis.uni-muenchen.de}) who answered a question on this
% on \ctt, 2001/07/09. (Also answered by Heiko Oberdiek,
% \texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}).}
% kills the counter \meta{cntr}. This macro is an extension to the
% suggestions as it also makes the last count register reusable.
% \emph{The macro must only be used when the last allocated counter is to
% be killed.}
% For example with:\\
% \verb?\newcounter{fred} \kill@lastcounter{fred} \newcounter{fred}? \\
% there is no error with the second \cs{newcounter}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{kill@counter}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Ensured \cs{kill@counter} zeroed the counter}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\kill@lastcounter}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Deallocate the last counter register. From \theTeXbook, \verb?\count10? is
% the number of the last register. The counter should be zeroed before being
% deallocated otherwise an immediatally following \cs{newcount} may not
% be zero when allocated\footnote{Discovered and fix provided by Robert
% Schlicht on 2005/08/31.}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\count\count10 \z@
\advance\count10 \m@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the internal counter definition to \cs{relax}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@name@p@xdf}
% \begin{macro}{\@name@unresp@xdef}
% \begin{macro}{\@namelet}
% \begin{macro}{\@namelongdef}
% Utility definition macros, along the lines of the kernel's \cs{@namedef}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@namelet} and friends (from patch v1.8)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@name@p@xdef}[1]{%
\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname #1\endcsname}
\newcommand{\@name@unresp@xdef}[1]{%
\expandafter\unrestored@protected@xdef\csname #1\endcsname}
\newcommand{\@namelet}[1]{%
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname}
\newcommand{\@namelongdef}[1]{%
\long\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memletcmdtxt}
% \begin{macro}{\memlettxttxt}
% \begin{macro}{\memlettxtcmd}
% More utility macros (for the user but perhaps better not to tell them about
% it in the manual) \\
% \verb?\memletcmdtxt{\cmd}{txt} -> \let\cmd\txt? \\
% \verb?\memlettxttxt{txta}{txtb} -> \let\txta\txtb? \\
% \verb?\memlettxtcmd{txt}{\cmd} -> \let\txt\cmd? \\
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/06/25}{Added \cs{memletcmdtxt}, \cs{memlettxttxt}
% and \cs{memlettxtcmd}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memletcmdtxt}[2]{\expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
\newcommand*{\memlettxttxt}[1]{\expandafter\memletcmdtxt\csname#1\endcsname}
\newcommand*{\memlettxtcmd}[2]{\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@nameedef}
% A shorthand for using \cs{protected@edef}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@nameedef}[1]{%
\expandafter\protected@edef\csname #1\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\memjustarg}
% \begin{macro}{\memgobble}
% Utility macros \emph{that are not to be changed by any user!}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added \cs{memjustarg} and \cs{memgobble}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memjustarg}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\memgobble}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Classes, Packages and Files}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memfakeusepackage}
% \cs{@memfakeusepackage}\marg{pack} fools \LaTeX{} into thinking
% that the \meta{pack.sty} package has been loaded.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@memfakeusepackage} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memfakeusepackage}[1]{%
\@namelet{ver@#1.sty}\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\EmulatedPackage}
% \begin{macro}{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}
% There was some discussion on CTT\footnote{\textit{Re: breakurl + pdfetex
% for generating .dvi}, March 2005.} about how to prevent loading of
% a package. My response was to use \cs{@memfakusepackage}. Donald Arseneau
% came up with this comprehensive solution (there was a little discussion
% about naming with my final suggestion as here). \\
% \cs{EmulatedPackage}\marg{package}\oarg{date} \\
% \cs{EmulatedPackageWithOptions}\marg{option-list}\marg{package}\oarg{date} \\
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Added \cs{EmulatedPackage} and
% \cs{EmulatedPackageWithOptions}}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Extended \cs{EmulatedPackage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\EmulatedPackage}{}
\renewcommand*{\EmulatedPackage}[1]{%
\@ifnextchar[{\@emulated@package{#1}}%
{\@emulated@package{#1}[\@empty]}%]
}
\providecommand*{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}{}
\renewcommand*{\EmulatedPackageWithOptions}[2]{%
\PassOptionsToPackage{#1}{#2}%
\EmulatedPackage{#2}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@emulated@package}
% The workhorse for the user commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@emulated@package#1[#2]{%
\expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname{#2}%
\@ifundefined{opt@#1.\@pkgextension}%
{\@namedef{opt@#1.\@pkgextension}{}}{}%
\wlog{Package #1 \ifx\@empty#2\else[#2] \fi
\if,\csname opt@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname,\else
(with options \csname opt@#1.\@pkgextension\endcsname) \fi
emulated by \@currname.}%
}
\@onlypreamble\EmulatedPackage
\@onlypreamble\EmulatedPackageWithOptions
\@onlypreamble\@emulated@package
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DisemulatePackage}
% \cs{DisemulatePackage}\marg{package} undoes a previous
% \cs{EmulatedPackage...}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{DisemulatePackage} from memptach v4.5}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Fixed \cs{DisemulatePackage} from mempatch v5.1}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DisemulatePackage}[1]{%
\@namelet{ver@#1.\@pkgextension}\relax}
\@onlypreamble\DisemulatePackage
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Code, based on a hint from Morten H{\o}gholm\footnote{CTT posting
% 2005/11/08, \textit{Re: Checking for packages froma class...
% revisited}} that the \Lpack{scrlfile} package from
% \Lpack{koma-script} includes commands such as \\
% \cs{AfterFile}\marg{file}\marg{code} \\
% plus before and after classes and packages.
% \changes{v1.16803}{2008/01/30}{Added various \cs{AtBegin...} and
% \cs{AtEnd...} macros (mempatch v4.2)}
%
% Extend the \cs{InputIfFileExists} macro to call hooks before and
% the actual inputting. The kernel version (as of 2005/11/21) is:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\InputIfFileExists}[2]{%
% \IfFileExists{#1}%
% {\#2\@addtofilelist{#1}\@@input \@filef@und}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists}
% Effectively all file input is handled by this macro. Extend it
% by adding pre- and post- input hooks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\InputIfFileExists}[2]{%
\IfFileExists{#1}%
{#2\@addtofilelist{#1}\m@matbeginf{#1}%
\@@input \@filef@und
\m@matendf{#1}%
\killm@matf{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@matbeginf}
% \begin{macro}{\m@matendf}
% \cs{m@matbeginf}\marg{file} calls macro \cs{file-m@mfb} if it
% is defined. Similarly \cs{m@matendf}\marg{file} calls
% \cs{file-m@mfe} if it is defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@matbeginf}[1]{\@ifundefined{#1-m@mfb}{}%
{\@nameuse{#1-m@mfb}}}
\newcommand{\m@matendf}[1]{\@ifundefined{#1-m@mfe}{}%
{\@nameuse{#1-m@mfe}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\killm@matf}
% \cs{killm@matf}\marg{file} undefines the \cs{file-m@mfb} and
% \cs{file-m@mfe} macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\killm@matf}[1]{%
\@namelet{#1-m@mfb}\relax
\@namelet{#1-m@mfe}\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginFile}
% \begin{macro}{\AtEndFile}
% \cs{AtBeginFile}\marg{file}\marg{code} inserts \meta{code}
% just before \meta{file} is input. Similarly \cs{AtEndFile} inserts
% just after input.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\AtBeginFile}[2]{\@ifundefined{#1-m@mfb}%
{\@namedef{#1-m@mfb}{#2}}%
{\expandafter\addtodef\csname #1-m@mfb\endcsname{}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\AtEndFile}[2]{\@ifundefined{#1-m@mfe}%
{\@namedef{#1-m@mfe}{#2}}%
{\expandafter\addtodef\csname #1-m@mfe\endcsname{}{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginPackage}
% \begin{macro}{\AtEndPackage}
% \begin{macro}{\RequireAtEndPackage}
% \cs{AtBeginPackage}\marg{pack}\marg{code} inserts \meta{code}
% just before the \meta{pack} package is input, and \cs{AtEndPackage}
% is the equivalent for after input. \cs{RequireAtEndPackage} inserts
% \meta{code} either at the end of \meta{pack}, or immediately if
% \meta{pack} has already been input.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\AtBeginPackage}[2]{%
\AtBeginFile{#1.\@pkgextension}{#2}}
\newcommand{\AtEndPackage}[2]{%
\AtEndFile{#1.\@pkgextension}{#2}}
\newcommand{\RequireAtEndPackage}[2]{%
\@ifpackageloaded{#1}{#2}%
{\AtEndFile{#1.\@pkgextension}{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginClass}
% \begin{macro}{\AtEndClass}
% \begin{macro}{\RequireAtEndClass}
% \cs{AtBeginClass}\marg{class}\marg{code} and friends are the class
% equivalents of \cs{AtBeginPackage} and friends.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\AtBeginClass}[2]{%
\AtBeginFile{#1.\@clsextension}{#2}}
\newcommand{\AtEndClass}[2]{%
\AtEndFile{#1.\@clsextension}{#2}}
\newcommand{\RequireAtEndClass}[2]{%
\@ifclassloaded{#1}{#2}%
{\AtEndFile{#1.\@clsextension}{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\phantomsection}
% A command needed if the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used, for putting
% before certain \cs{addcontentsline} commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\phantomsection}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nofiles}
% The kernel's \cs{nofiles}, which surprisingly may be called \emph{before}
% the class is loaded, lets \cs{makeindex} to \cs{relax}. This could
% cause problems\footnote{As reported by Heiko Oberdiek on 2005/07/09.}
% with my initial version of \cs{makeindex}.
% Here's the kernel \cs{nofiles} definition:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\nofiles{%
% \@fileswfalse% flag for suppressing \immediate \writes
% \typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
% \long\def\protected@write##1##2##3%
% {\write\m@ne{}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
% \let\makeindex\relax
% \let\makeglossary\relax}
% \end{verbatim}
% To get it to work for when \cs{makeindex}es optional argument is
% used I let \cs{makeindex} itself deal with \cs{nofiles} (and
% also \cs{makeglossary}).
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Modified the kernel's \cs{nofiles}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\nofiles}{%
\@fileswfalse% flag for suppressing \immediate \writes
\typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
\long\def\protected@write##1##2##3%
{\write\m@ne{}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsetcounter}
% A wrapper round \cs{setcounter}. I want to use this in the \texttt{aux} file.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{memsetcounter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memsetcounter}[2]{\setcounter{#1}{#2}}
\AtBeginDocument{\immediate\write\@mainaux{%
\string\providecommand*{\string\memsetcounter}[2]{}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{For package documentation}
%
% Some macros that may be useful for documenting LaTeX code. These
% have principally come from \texttt{doc.dtx}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\bs}
% Prints \verb?\?
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\bs{\texttt{\char`\\}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@nohyphenation}
% \begin{macro}{\meta}
% \begin{macro}{\meta@font@select}
% From \texttt{doc.dtx} \\
% \cs{meta}\marg{arg} prints \meta{arg}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\l@nohyphenation\undefined
\newlanguage\l@nohyphenation
\fi
\DeclareRobustCommand{\meta}[1]{%
\ensuremath\langle
\ifmmode \expandafter \nfss@text \fi
{%
\meta@font@select
\edef\meta@hyphen@restore
{\hyphenchar\the\font\the\hyphenchar\font}%
\hyphenchar\font\m@ne
\language\l@nohyphenation
#1\/%
\meta@hyphen@restore
}\ensuremath\rangle
}
\def\meta@font@select{\itshape}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\marg}
% \begin{macro}{\oarg}
% \begin{macro}{\parg}
% Robust versions of the \texttt{doc.dtx} macros. \\
% \cs{marg}\marg{arg} prints \marg{arg} \\
% \cs{oarg}\marg{arg} prints \oarg{arg} \\
% \cs{parg}\marg{arg} prints \parg{arg} \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
{\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
{\ttfamily\char`\[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\]}}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\parg}[1]{%
{\ttfamily\char`\(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\)}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cs}
% \verb?\cs{arg}? prints \cs{arg}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cmdprint}
% \begin{macro}{\cmd}
% From Heiko Oberdiek CTT 2001/05/26 (print and index a command) \\
% \verb?\cmdprint{\fred}? prints \verb?\fred? \\
% \verb?\cmd{\fred}? prints and indexes \verb?\fred?. NOTE It assumes that
% \verb!?! is the `actual' character for MakeIndex (it is normally \verb!@!
% but that is not much use if a command includes \verb!@! as part of its name).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cmdprint}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}
\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\cmdprint{#1}%
\index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1?\string\cmdprint{\string#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Checking the processor}
%
% Prior to 2008/07/22 the \Lpack{hyperref} package was modified in such a
% way as to produce warnings about versions of the \Lpack{ifpdf} and
% \Lpack{ifxetex} packages when \Lpack{hyperref} was used with versions
% v1.618033,
% v1.61803, or v1.618 mempatch v4.9 of the class.
% \Lpack{hyperref}'s author refused to
% make any changes to his package, insisting that emulating a package was
% `ugly hacking'. He did, though, provide an example code that could be
% added to memoir
% to use a package if it was available. I have used it for the emulations
% in this section. There will be no further changes to the class to accomodate
% any further changes to \Lpack{hyperref} --- it's easy for a package to
% determine what class is being used and make arrangements accordingly,
% especially as there are not all that many classes. There are hundreds
% of packages that might be used with a particular class and it would be
% senseless for a class to attempt to take account of everything that might
% be used with it.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpdf}
% \begin{macro}{\pdftrue}
% \begin{macro}{\pdffalse}
% This can be used to check whether or not a document is being processed
% by \LaTeX{} or pdf\LaTeX.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Made checking of \cs{pdfouput} more robust}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Prohibit loading the ifpdf package (mempatch v3.9)}
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Further improved pdf checking}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Use ifpdf package if available}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2009/12/01}{if \cs{ifpdf} is already
% defined, e.g. using \cs{RequirePackage} before \cs{documentclass},
% then using \cs{newif}\cs{ifpdf} will cause TeX to eat up a lot of
% code. We fix this using a hint by Will Robertson.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mifpdf
\m@mifpdffalse
\IfFileExists{ifpdf.sty}{\RequirePackage{ifpdf}\relax}{%
\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{%
Package `ifpdf' is not installed.\MessageBreak
The package is being emulated}%
\m@mifpdftrue
\expandafter\newif\csname ifpdf\endcsname
\pdffalse
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
\else
\ifx\pdfoutput\@undefined
\else
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
\else
\ifnum\pdfoutput>0\relax
\pdftrue
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
%%\EmulatedPackage{ifpdf}[2008/07/23]
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifetex}
% \begin{macro}{\etextrue}
% \begin{macro}{\etexfalse}
% Check if \texttt{etex} is being used. This is based on the check for
% \texttt{pdf(latex)}. Someone may have created a package for this,
% or perhaps not.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added check for etex (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Improved check for etex}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Use an ifetex package if available}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/27}{Changed ifetex message from Warning to Info}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mifetex
\m@mifetexfalse
\IfFileExists{ifetex.sty}{\RequirePackage{ifetex}\relax}{%
\ClassInfo{memoir}{%
An `ifetex' package is being emulated}%
\m@mifetextrue
\newif\ifetex
\etexfalse
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
\else
\ifx\eTeXversion\@undefined
\else
\ifx\eTeXversion\relax
\else
\ifnum\eTeXversion>0\relax
\etextrue
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
%%\EmulatedPackage{ifetex}[2008/07/23]
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Having supplied an \cs{ifpdf} to check if pdfLaTeX is being used,
% here's one for XeTeX.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifxetex}
% \begin{macro}{\xetextrue}
% \begin{macro}{\xetexfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\RequireXeTeX}
% Checks if XeTeX is being used.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added checks for XeTeX (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Use ifxetex package if available}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2009/12/01}{if \cs{ifxetex} is already
% defined, e.g. using \cs{RequirePackage} before \cs{documentclass},
% then using \cs{newif}\cs{ifxetex} will cause TeX to eat up a lot of
% code. We fix this using a hint by Will Robertson.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mifxetex
\m@mifxetexfalse
\IfFileExists{ifxetex.sty}{\RequirePackage{ifxetex}\relax}{%
\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{%
The `ifxetex' package is not installed.\MessageBreak
The package is being emulated}%
\expandafter\newif\csname ifxetex\endcsname
\@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}{\xetexfalse}{\xetextrue}
\m@mifxetextrue%
% \end{macrocode}
% Check for XeTeX from the \Lpack{ifxetex} package.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\EmulatedPackage{ifxetex}[2008/07/23]
}
\ifm@mifxetex%
% ifxetex package not found, emulate \RequireXeTeX
\def\RequireXeTeX{%
\ifxetex\else
\@memerror{XeTeX is required to process this document}%
{Try again with xelatex, not (pdf)latex.\MessageBreak
Or try removing any XeTeX package(s).}
\fi}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifluatex}
% \begin{macro}{\luatextrue}
% \begin{macro}{\luatexfalse}
% Check if \texttt{luatex} is being used. This is based on the check for
% \texttt{pdf(latex)}. Someone may have created a package for this, or
% perhaps not.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added check for luatex}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Use an ifluatex package if available}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/31}{It seems that Heiko Oberdiek has created an
% ifluatex package.}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2009/12/01}{if \cs{ifluatex} is already
% defined, e.g. using \cs{RequirePackage} before \cs{documentclass},
% then using \cs{newif}\cs{ifluatex} will cause TeX to eat up a lot of
% code. We fix this using a hint by Will Robertson.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mifluatex
\m@mifluatexfalse
\IfFileExists{ifluatex.sty}{\RequirePackage{ifluatex}\relax}{%
\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{%
The `ifluatex' package is not installed.\MessageBreak
The package is being emulated}%
\m@mifluatextrue
\expandafter\newif\csname ifluatex\endcsname
\luatexfalse
\ifx\luatexversion\@undefined
\else
\ifx\luatexversion\undefined
\else
\ifx\luatexversion\relax
\else
\luatextrue
\fi
\fi
\fi
%%\EmulatedPackage{ifluatex}[2008/07/23]
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Extending an existing macro}
%
%
% My usual technique for modifying the code of an existing
% macro was to use \cs{renewcommand}. However it slowly became apparent that
% many of such modifications merely consisted of adding some code at
% either the start or end of the existing definition. In June 2000 I
% posed a question
% on the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup about this, and
% Michael Downes\footnote{\texttt{epsmjd@ams.org}} and
% Heiko Oberdiek\footnote{\texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}}
% were kind enough to respond.
% The responses arrived almost simultaneously, both
% supplying methods for adding code at the end of a macro defined to take
% one argument. Michael Downes' response included a remark about it probably
% being too much effort to formulate a general way of doing this.
% Heiko Oberdiek almost immediately replied with such a generalisation.
%
% The following code, which I have extracted from a package that I
% wrote but which I did not submit to CTAN, incorporates the work of both
% Michael and Heiko. I have added a bit. All errors are my responsibility.
% Michael went on the write the \Lpack{patchcmd} package which is
% a generalisation of the facilities below and so there was no need for
% my more restricted package.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Replaced \cs{appendiarg} with \cs{addtodef}
% and friends}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@dmacro}
% Heiko Oberdiek suggested\footnote{Via email on 2000/07/12.} that
% \meta{macro} should be tested for being the name of a macro, rather than
% using the normal \LaTeX{} test against it being undefined. He supplied
% the code for performing the macro name test.
%
% \cs{wo@dmacro} is a helper for handling the string `macro:'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\wo@dmacro{%
\string m\string a\string c\string r\string o\string :%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@difmacro@begingroup}
% This seems to take two arguments:
% \cs{wo@difmacro@begingroup}\marg{macro}\marg{code}, where
% \meta{macro} should be the name of a defined macro and \meta{code}
% is code to be executed if and only if \meta{macro} \emph{is} a
% defined macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\wo@difmacro@begingroup#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Start a group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Test if \verb?#1? is a defined macro; \cs{wo@dparsemacro} does most of the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\x{%
\noexpand\wo@dparsemacro\meaning#1\wo@dmacro\string -%
}%
\x\@nil{#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@dparsemacro}
% This is called by \cs{wo@difmacro@begingroup}. If \meta{macro} is not
% a defined macro it prints a warning and closes the group begun by
% \cs{wo@difmacro@begingroup}. Otherwise it process the \meta{code} which
% \emph{must} close the group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\edef\x{\endgroup
\def\noexpand\wo@dparsemacro##1\wo@dmacro##2\string -}%
\x#3\@nil#4{%
\ifx\\#3\\%
\endgroup
\@memwarn{\string `\string #4\string ' is not a macro}%
\expandafter\@gobble
\else
\expandafter\@firstofone
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtodef}
% \begin{macro}{\addtodef*}
% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtodef}
% The command \cs{addtodef}\marg{macro}\marg{start-stuff}\marg{end-stuff}
% adds stuff at the start and/or end of an argumentless macro.
% Initially the code for appending was a reimplementation of the
% kernel \cs{g@addto@macro} command (from \file{ltclass.dtx}).
% Later, at Michael Downes' suggestion, I combined
% appending and prepending stuff into a single command.
% Actually, there is no real need to have both
% \cs{addtodef} and \cs{addtodef*} as the body of the command
% being amended has no argument,
% but both versions are provided for consistency.
%
% The kernel \cs{@star@or@long} and \cs{l@ngrel@x} commands
% (in \file{ltdefns.dtx}) are used to handle
% the potential \verb?*? after the command name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addtodef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtodef}
% \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{@star@or@long} command dealt with a possible \verb?*? and now
% \cs{wo@daddtodef} does the work. It picks up the three arguments
% that the user thinks belong to \cs{addtodef}, namely \meta{macro},
% \meta{start-stuff} and \meta{end-stuff}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\wo@daddtodef#1#2#3{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if \meta{macro} has been defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If \meta{macro} is defined then store the tokens corresponding to the
% body of \meta{macro} and the extra \meta{-stuff} in token registers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@temptokena{#2}%
\toks@\expandafter{#1#3}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do an expanded definition for \cs{x}, so that calling \cs{x}
% will \cs{def} a new version of \meta{macro}, whose body consists of the
% saved tokens (i.e., the orginal body plus the extra stuff).
% As Michael Downes noted, single letter control sequences do not take any of
% \TeX's hash table space.
% \cs{l@ngrel@x}
% has been previously set to either \cs{long} or \cs{relax} by \cs{@star@or@long},
% and so may make the new definition of \meta{macro} to be \cs{long}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\x{\endgroup
\l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, call \cs{x} to perform the new definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\x
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef}
% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef*}
% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtoiargdef}
% This adds stuff at the start and/or end of a macro that takes one argument.
% It is a modification of Michael Downes' appending
% code\footnote{Posted to \ctt{} on 15~June 2000,\\
% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635057844}.}
% which was:
% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
% \def\appendef#1#2{%
% \begingroup
% \toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}%
% \edef\x{\endgroup \def\noexpand#1####1{\the\toks@}}%
% \x}
% \end{verbatim}
% \par\end{small}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addtoiargdef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtoiargdef}
\long\def\wo@daddtoiargdef#1#2#3{%
\wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
\@temptokena{#2}%
\toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#3}%
\edef\x{\endgroup
\l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1####1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
\x
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% For the record, Heiko Oberdiek produced the following
% version\footnote{Posted to \ctt{} on 16~June 2000,\\
% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635095381}.}
% which avoids the use of a token register.
% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\appendiargdef}[2]{%
% \long\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter
% ##\expandafter1\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}}
% \end{verbatim}
% \par\end{small}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Continuing the saga, Michael came up with a pretty general solution for
% modifying a macro with any number (up to 9) of arguments which he
% sent to me on 2000/07/13; this became
% the \Lpack{patchcmd} package which is on CTAN. I'm sure that Michael
% would have given me permission to include it here if he had not tragically
% passed away in 2003. I miss his encouragement, advice, and skills.
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd}
% \cs{patchcmd}\marg{macro}\marg{start-stuff}\marg{end-stuff} inserts
% \meta{start-stuff} at the beginning of the definition of \meta{macro}
% and \meta{end-stuff} at the end of the definition. \meta{macro}
% can have 0--9 arguments and be defined by \cs{newcommand} (and associates)
% or with \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}. For macros that use \cs{futurelet}
% (e.g., those with starred forms or optional arguments) only prepending
% works --- any non-empty \meta{end-stuff} will mess things up. \cs{patchcmd}
% does not work with macros that have delimited arguments.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/05}{Added \cs{patchcmd}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Michael Downes' patchcmd 2000/07/31 v1.03 %%%%%%%%
\newcommand{\patchcommand}[1]{%
\expandafter\patchcmd@a\meaning#1??->@\@nil#1%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@a}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\patchcmd@a#1#2#3->#4#5\@nil#6{%
\ifx @#4\relax \patchcmdError#6#1%
\expandafter\@gobbletwo % discard the other two arguments
\else
\if l#2\toks@{\patchcmd@e{}#6}% l in this position means \long
\else \toks@{\patchcmd@e*#6}% not \long
\fi
\patchcmd@b #3@#4#5 ? ? ? \@nil#6%
\expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@b}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@b#1:#2@#3#4 #5#6 #7 #8\@nil#9{%
\if \ifx @#7@\expandafter
\ifx\csname #6\endcsname#9T\else F\fi\else F\fi T%
\toks@\expandafter{\expandafter\patchcommand\csname #6 \endcsname}%
\else
\ifx @#2@% No arguments
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ 0}%
\else
\patchcmd@c 0#2{\string##}0%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@c}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@c#1#2#3{%
\if\string###2% % yes it's a # token
\ifodd 0#31 % and it's followed by a number
\if 0#3\patchcmd@d#1\fi % number=0? then we're done
\else \patchcmd@d D% # not a number: must be a delimited arg
\fi
\else \patchcmd@d D% not a # token: must be a delmited arg
\fi
\patchcmd@c#3}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@d}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@d#1{%
\if D#1%
%%% \PackageError{patchcmd}{Cannot change a macro that has
%%% delimited arguments}\@ehd
\@memerror{%
Cannot change a macro that has delimited arguments}{\@ehd}
\else
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ #1}%
\fi
\begingroup
\aftergroup\@gobble
\let\patchcmd@c\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmd@e}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\patchcmd@e#1#2#3#4#5{%
\begingroup
\edef\@##1{%
\@temptokena\noexpand\expandafter{%
\noexpand#2%
\ifnum#3>0 {####1}\ifnum#3>1 {####2}\ifnum#3>2 {####3}%
\ifnum#3>3 {####4}\ifnum#3>4 {####5}\ifnum#3>5 {####6}%
\ifnum#3>6 {####7}\ifnum#3>7 {####8}\ifnum#3>8 {####9}%
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
##1%
}%
}
\@{#5}%
\edef\@##1{\endgroup
\noexpand\renewcommand#1\noexpand#2\ifcase#3 \else [#3]\fi
{##1\the\@temptokena}}%
\@{#4}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\patchcmdError}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\patchcmdError#1#2{%
\begingroup
\toks@{Not redefinable}%
\ifcat\relax\noexpand#1% Is it a control sequence?
\begingroup
\let#1=?\ifx ?\relax % Is it "\relax"?
\endgroup % accept current value of \toks@
\else \endgroup
\if\ifx\relax#1u\else #2\fi u%
\toks@{Not defined}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\edef\@{\endgroup
%%% \noexpand\PackageError{patchcmd}{%
%%% \the\toks@: \string#1}\noexpand\@ehd}%
\noexpand\@memerror{%
\the\toks@: \string#1}\noexpand\@ehd}%
\@}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% end of patchcmd code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Prevent later loading of the original \Lpack{patchcmd} package.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{patchcmd}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{Added support for bidi}
% \subsection{Support for the bidi package (RTL typesetting)}
%
% The \Lpack{bidi} package (system) enables bidirectional typesetting.
% As part of
% being able to accomplish this it often needs to exchange, for example,
% \cs{leftskip} and \cs{rightskip} depending on whether it is setting
% left-to-right (LTR) or right-to-left (RTL). In the case of \Lpack{memoir}
% the initial \Lpack{bidi} system implementation used a \Lpack{bidimemoir}
% class developed by Vafa Khalighi. Now, with Vafa's help, the necessary
% changes have been incorporated in \Lpack{memoir}; the \Lpack{bidimemoir}
% class is no longer needed.
%
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLleftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLrightskip}
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLvleftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLvrightskip}
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLraggedright}
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLraggedleft}
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLmainraggedright}
% \begin{macro}{\memRTLmainraggedleft}
% These are the hooks required to support the \Lpack{bidi} package,
% plus some we added that \Lpack{bidi} can use. The idea behind the
% \cs{XmainraggedX} macros are documents fully in RTL mode, then it
% makes sense to have the raggedness of the header and footer
% reversed. By default they do what the normally do, but in main RTL
% mode, \Lpack{bidi} can redefine them to reverse the order of the
% headers, i.e. the `left' part of the header is typeset as the
% `right' part.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/22}{Added \cs{mem@RTLmainraggedX} macros}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memRTLleftskip}{\leftskip}
\newcommand*{\memRTLrightskip}{\rightskip}
\newcommand*{\memRTLvleftskip}{\leftskip}
\newcommand*{\memRTLvrightskip}{\rightskip}
\newcommand*{\memRTLraggedright}{\raggedright}
\newcommand*{\memRTLraggedleft}{\raggedleft}
\newcommand*{\memRTLmainraggedright}{\raggedright}
\newcommand*{\memRTLmainraggedleft}{\raggedleft}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% It is expected that the \Lpack{bidi} package will redefine these as:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLleftskip}{\if@RTL\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLrightskip}{\if@RTL\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLvleftskip}{\if@RTL\vrightskip\else\vleftskip\fi}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLvrightskip}{\if@RTL\vleftskip\else\vrightskip\fi}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLraggedright}{\if@RTL\raggedleft\else\raggedright\fi}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLraggedleft}{\if@RTL\raggedright\else\raggedleft\fi}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLmainraggedright}{\if@RTLmain\raggedleft\else\raggedright\fi}
% \renewcommand*{\memRTLmainraggedleft}{\if@RTLmain\raggedright\else\raggedleft\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \section{Declaration of Options} \label{sec:opt}
%
%
% \subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}
%
% The variables \cs{paperheight} and \cs{paperwidth} should reflect the
% physical paper size after trimming.
%
% Option \Lopt{letterpaper} will be the default.
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockheight}
% \begin{macro}{\stockwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\trimtop}
% \begin{macro}{\trimedge}
% The lengths \cs{stockheight} and \cs{stockwidth} should be the height and
% width of the stock sheet before trimming. For example, this is the
% physical size
% of a single sheet that might be laser-printed. The lengths \cs{trimtop}
% and \cs{trimedge} are the amount that will be trimmed off the top and fore
% edge of the physical sheet.
% For desk printer output the size of the trimmed sheet is often the
% same as the physical sheet. In other words the \cs{paper...} and \cs{stock...}
% sizes are the same and the trims are zero. This class assumes that this
% is the normal case.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\stockheight}
\newlength{\stockwidth}
\newlength{\trimtop}
\newlength{\trimedge}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The class provides an extended range of stock sizes. It may be useful at some
% point to have macros for these.
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockdbill}
% \begin{macro}{\stockstatement}
% \begin{macro}{\stockexecutive}
% \begin{macro}{\stockletter}
% \begin{macro}{\stockold}
% \begin{macro}{\stocklegal}
% \begin{macro}{\stockledger}
% \begin{macro}{\stockbroadsheet}
% US stock sizes.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Major expansion of stock size options}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\stockdbill} {\stockheight=7in \stockwidth=3in}
\newcommand*{\stockstatement} {\stockheight=8.5in \stockwidth=5.5in}
\newcommand*{\stockexecutive} {\stockheight=10.5in \stockwidth=7.25in}
\newcommand*{\stockletter} {\stockheight=11in \stockwidth=8.5in}
\newcommand*{\stockold} {\stockheight=12in \stockwidth=9in}
\newcommand*{\stocklegal} {\stockheight=14in \stockwidth=8.5in}
\newcommand*{\stockledger} {\stockheight=17in \stockwidth=11in}
\newcommand*{\stockbroadsheet}{\stockheight=22in \stockwidth=17in}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockpottvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockfoolscapvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockcrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockpostvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stocklargecrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stocklargepostvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stocksmalldemyvo}
% Traditional British octavo sizes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\stockpottvo} {\stockheight=6.25in \stockwidth=4in}
\newcommand*{\stockfoolscapvo} {\stockheight=6.75in \stockwidth=4.25in}
\newcommand*{\stockcrownvo} {\stockheight=7.5in \stockwidth=5in}
\newcommand*{\stockpostvo} {\stockheight=8in \stockwidth=5in}
\newcommand*{\stocklargecrownvo}{\stockheight=8in \stockwidth=5.25in}
\newcommand*{\stocklargepostvo} {\stockheight=8.25in \stockwidth=5.25in}
\newcommand*{\stocksmalldemyvo} {\stockheight=8.5in \stockwidth=5.675in}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockdemyvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockmediumvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stocksmallroyalvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockroyalvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stocksuperroyalvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockimperialvo}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\stockdemyvo} {\stockheight=8.75in \stockwidth=5.675in}
\newcommand*{\stockmediumvo} {\stockheight=9in \stockwidth=5.75in}
\newcommand*{\stocksmallroyalvo}{\stockheight=9.25in \stockwidth=6.175in}
\newcommand*{\stockroyalvo} {\stockheight=10in \stockwidth=6.25in}
\newcommand*{\stocksuperroyalvo}{\stockheight=10.25in \stockwidth=6.75in}
\newcommand*{\stockimperialvo} {\stockheight=11in \stockwidth=7.5in}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockmcrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockmlargecrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockmdemyvo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockmsmallroyalvo}
% Metric stock sizes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\stockmcrownvo} {\stockheight=186mm \stockwidth=123mm}
\newcommand*{\stockmlargecrownvo} {\stockheight=198mm \stockwidth=129mm}
\newcommand*{\stockmdemyvo} {\stockheight=216mm \stockwidth=138mm}
\newcommand*{\stockmsmallroyalvo} {\stockheight=234mm \stockwidth=156mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockao}
% \begin{macro}{\stockai}
% \begin{macro}{\stockaii}
% \begin{macro}{\stockaiii}
% \begin{macro}{\stockaiv}
% \begin{macro}{\stockav}
% \begin{macro}{\stockavi}
% The A series, A0 --- A6.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Extended the A and B stock/paper size
% seies with A/B0 through A/B2}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\stockao} {\stockheight=1189mm \stockwidth=841mm}
\newcommand*{\stockai} {\stockheight=841mm \stockwidth=594mm}
\newcommand*{\stockaii} {\stockheight=594mm \stockwidth=420mm}
\newcommand*{\stockaiii}{\stockheight=420mm \stockwidth=297mm}
\newcommand*{\stockaiv} {\stockheight=297mm \stockwidth=210mm}
\newcommand*{\stockav} {\stockheight=210mm \stockwidth=148mm}
\newcommand*{\stockavi} {\stockheight=148mm \stockwidth=105mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockbo}
% \begin{macro}{\stockbi}
% \begin{macro}{\stockbii}
% \begin{macro}{\stockbiii}
% \begin{macro}{\stockbiv}
% \begin{macro}{\stockbv}
% \begin{macro}{\stockbvi}
% The B series, B0 --- B6.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\stockbo} {\stockheight=1414mm \stockwidth=1000mm}
\newcommand*{\stockbi} {\stockheight=1000mm \stockwidth=707mm}
\newcommand*{\stockbii} {\stockheight=707mm \stockwidth=500mm}
\newcommand*{\stockbiii}{\stockheight=500mm \stockwidth=353mm}
\newcommand*{\stockbiv} {\stockheight=353mm \stockwidth=250mm}
\newcommand*{\stockbv} {\stockheight=250mm \stockwidth=176mm}
\newcommand*{\stockbvi} {\stockheight=176mm \stockwidth=125mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% It will be useful also to provide macros that set the page sizes.
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagedbill}
% \begin{macro}{\pagestatement}
% \begin{macro}{\pageexecutive}
% \begin{macro}{\pageletter}
% \begin{macro}{\pageold}
% \begin{macro}{\pagelegal}
% \begin{macro}{\pageledger}
% \begin{macro}{\pagebroadsheet}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{\cs{pageheight} and \cs{pagewidth} should be
% \cs{paperheight} and \cs{paperwidth}
% (courtesy Wilhelm Muller)}
% US page sizes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pagedbill} {\paperheight=7in \paperwidth=3in}
\newcommand*{\pagestatement} {\paperheight=8.5in \paperwidth=5.5in}
\newcommand*{\pageexecutive} {\paperheight=10.5in \paperwidth=7.25in}
\newcommand*{\pageletter} {\paperheight=11in \paperwidth=8.5in}
\newcommand*{\pageold} {\paperheight=12in \paperwidth=9in}
\newcommand*{\pagelegal} {\paperheight=14in \paperwidth=8.5in}
\newcommand*{\pageledger} {\paperheight=17in \paperwidth=11in}
\newcommand*{\pagebroadsheet}{\paperheight=22in \paperwidth=17in}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagepottvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagefoolscapvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagecrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagepostvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagelargecrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagelargepostvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagesmalldemyvo}
% British traditional page sizes, octavo.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pagepottvo} {\paperheight=6.25in \paperwidth=4in}
\newcommand*{\pagefoolscapvo} {\paperheight=6.75in \paperwidth=4.25in}
\newcommand*{\pagecrownvo} {\paperheight=7.5in \paperwidth=5in}
\newcommand*{\pagepostvo} {\paperheight=8in \paperwidth=5in}
\newcommand*{\pagelargecrownvo}{\paperheight=8in \paperwidth=5.25in}
\newcommand*{\pagelargepostvo} {\paperheight=8.25in \paperwidth=5.25in}
\newcommand*{\pagesmalldemyvo} {\paperheight=8.5in \paperwidth=5.675in}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagedemyvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagemediumvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagesmallroyalvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pageroyalvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagesuperroyalvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pageimperialvo}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pagedemyvo} {\paperheight=8.75in \paperwidth=5.675in}
\newcommand*{\pagemediumvo} {\paperheight=9in \paperwidth=5.75in}
\newcommand*{\pagesmallroyalvo}{\paperheight=9.25in \paperwidth=6.175in}
\newcommand*{\pageroyalvo} {\paperheight=10in \paperwidth=6.25in}
\newcommand*{\pagesuperroyalvo}{\paperheight=10.25in \paperwidth=6.75in}
\newcommand*{\pageimperialvo} {\paperheight=11in \paperwidth=7.5in}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagemcrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagemlargecrownvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagemdemyvo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagemsmallroyalvo}
% Metric sizes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pagemcrownvo} {\paperheight=186mm \paperwidth=123mm}
\newcommand*{\pagemlargecrownvo} {\paperheight=198mm \paperwidth=129mm}
\newcommand*{\pagemdemyvo} {\paperheight=216mm \paperwidth=138mm}
\newcommand*{\pagemsmallroyalvo} {\paperheight=234mm \paperwidth=156mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pageao}
% \begin{macro}{\pageai}
% \begin{macro}{\pageaii}
% \begin{macro}{\pageaiii}
% \begin{macro}{\pageaiv}
% \begin{macro}{\pageav}
% \begin{macro}{\pageavi}
% The A series, A0 --- A6.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pageao} {\paperheight=1189mm \paperwidth=841mm}
\newcommand*{\pageai} {\paperheight=841mm \paperwidth=594mm}
\newcommand*{\pageaii} {\paperheight=594mm \paperwidth=420mm}
\newcommand*{\pageaiii}{\paperheight=420mm \paperwidth=297mm}
\newcommand*{\pageaiv} {\paperheight=297mm \paperwidth=210mm}
\newcommand*{\pageav} {\paperheight=210mm \paperwidth=148mm}
\newcommand*{\pageavi} {\paperheight=148mm \paperwidth=105mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagebo}
% \begin{macro}{\pagebi}
% \begin{macro}{\pagebii}
% \begin{macro}{\pagebiii}
% \begin{macro}{\pagebiv}
% \begin{macro}{\pagebv}
% \begin{macro}{\pagebvi}
% The B series, B0 --- B6.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pagebo} {\paperheight=1414mm \paperwidth=1000mm}
\newcommand*{\pagebi} {\paperheight=1000mm \paperwidth=707mm}
\newcommand*{\pagebii} {\paperheight=707mm \paperwidth=500mm}
\newcommand*{\pagebiii}{\paperheight=500mm \paperwidth=353mm}
\newcommand*{\pagebiv} {\paperheight=353mm \paperwidth=250mm}
\newcommand*{\pagebv} {\paperheight=250mm \paperwidth=176mm}
\newcommand*{\pagebvi} {\paperheight=176mm \paperwidth=125mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Declare the stock size options.
%
% Metric paper stock sizes.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Extended class options to include stock
% sizes A0, A1, A2, B0, B1 and B2}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{a0paper}{\stockao}
\DeclareOption{a1paper}{\stockai}
\DeclareOption{a2paper}{\stockaii}
\DeclareOption{a3paper}{\stockaiii}
\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\stockaiv}
\DeclareOption{a5paper}{\stockav}
\DeclareOption{a6paper}{\stockavi}
\DeclareOption{b0paper}{\stockbo}
\DeclareOption{b1paper}{\stockbi}
\DeclareOption{b2paper}{\stockbii}
\DeclareOption{b3paper}{\stockbiii}
\DeclareOption{b4paper}{\stockbiv}
\DeclareOption{b5paper}{\stockbv}
\DeclareOption{b6paper}{\stockbvi}
\DeclareOption{mcrownvopaper}{\stockmcrownvo}
\DeclareOption{mlargecrownvopaper}{\stockmlargecrownvo}
\DeclareOption{mdemyvopaper}{\stockmdemyvo}
\DeclareOption{msmallroyalvopaper}{\stockmsmallroyalvo}
% \end{macrocode}
% US paper stock sizes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{dbillpaper}{\stockdbill}
\DeclareOption{statementpaper}{\stockstatement}
\DeclareOption{executivepaper}{\stockexecutive}
\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\stockletter}
\DeclareOption{oldpaper}{\stockold}
\DeclareOption{legalpaper}{\stocklegal}
\DeclareOption{ledgerpaper}{\stockledger}
\DeclareOption{broadsheetpaper}{\stockbroadsheet}
% \end{macrocode}
% British octavo stock paper sizes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{pottvopaper}{\stockpottvo}
\DeclareOption{foolscapvopaper}{\stockfoolscapvo}
\DeclareOption{crownvopaper}{\stockcrownvo}
\DeclareOption{postvopaper}{\stockpostvo}
\DeclareOption{largecrownvopaper}{\stocklargecrownvo}
\DeclareOption{largepostvopaper}{\stocklargepostvo}
\DeclareOption{smalldemyvopaper}{\stocksmalldemyvo}
\DeclareOption{demyvopaper}{\stockdemyvo}
\DeclareOption{mediumvopaper}{\stockmediumvo}
\DeclareOption{smallroyalvopaper}{\stocksmallroyalvo}
\DeclareOption{royalvopaper}{\stockroyalvo}
\DeclareOption{superroyalvopaper}{\stocksuperroyalvo}
\DeclareOption{imperialvopaper}{\stockimperialvo}
% \end{macrocode}
% Ebook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{ebook}
{\setlength\stockheight {9in}%
\setlength\stockwidth {6in}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The \Lopt{landscape} option switches the values of the height and width,
% assuming that the dimensions were originally given for portrait
% orientation. (At the suggestion of Wilhelm M\"{u}ller made this independent
% of the option sequence).
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{`Stabilised' the landscape option and
% added a portrait option}.
% \begin{macro}{\ifmemlandscape}
% \begin{macro}{\memlandscapetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\memlandscapefalse}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmemlandscape
\memlandscapefalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{landscape}{\memlandscapetrue}
\DeclareOption{portrait}{\memlandscapefalse}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Choosing the type size}
%
% The type size options are handled by defining \cs{@ptsize} to contain
% the last digit of the size in question and branching on \cs{ifcase}
% statements. This is done for historical reasons to stay compatible
% with other packages that use the \cs{@ptsize} variable to select
% special actions. It makes the declarations of size options less
% than 10pt or more than 20pt difficult. In this class \texttt{9} is used
% for the \Lopt{9pt} option, assuming that the class will never define a
% \Lopt{19pt} option. For larger options the full complement of digits
% are used.
%
% In any event, \cs{@memptsize} holds the complete size.
%
% Option \Lopt{10pt} will be the default.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added pt options 20 to 60.}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Used \cs{@memptsize}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{0}
\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{10}
\DeclareOption{9pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{9}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{9}}
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{0}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{10}}
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{1}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{11}}
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{2}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{12}}
\DeclareOption{14pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{4}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{14}}
\DeclareOption{17pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{7}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{17}}
\DeclareOption{20pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{20}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{20}}
\DeclareOption{25pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{25}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{25}}
\DeclareOption{30pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{30}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{30}}
\DeclareOption{36pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{36}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{36}}
\DeclareOption{48pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{48}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{48}}
\DeclareOption{60pt}{\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{60}\renewcommand*{\@memptsize}{60}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@nyptsizeopt}
% \begin{macro}{\@nyptsizeopttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@nyptsizeoptfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\anyptfilebase}
% \begin{macro}{\anyptsize}
% For any point size:
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/02/29}{Added *pt option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@nyptsizeopt
\@nyptsizeoptfalse
\providecommand*{\anyptfilebase}{mem}
\providecommand*{\anyptsize}{10}
\DeclareOption{*pt}{\@nyptsizeopttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}
%
% For two-sided printing we use the switch \cs{if@twoside}. In
% addition we have to set the \cs{if@mparswitch} to get any margin
% paragraphs into the outside margin. The default is \Lopt{twoside}.
% \begin{macro}{\if@twoside}
% \begin{macro}{\if@mparswitch}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue \@mparswitchtrue}
\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Two column printing}
%
% Two-column and one-column printing is again realized via a switch
% which is defined in the kernel. The default is single column printing.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@twocolumnfalse}
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{draft} option}
%
% If the user requests \Lopt{draft} we show any overfull boxes,
% marginal notes are allowed, and any copyright notices are not
% printed. For symmetry, we also define a \Lopt{final} option
% which is the default.
%
% The user can use the \cs{ifdraftdoc} flag to add additional effects: \\
% \verb?\ifdraftdoc \fi?
% \begin{macro}{\ifdraftdoc}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifdraftdoc\draftdocfalse
\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
\draftdocfalse
\msdocfalse}
\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}%
\draftdoctrue
\msdocfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmsdoc}
% The \Lopt{ms} option makes the document look as though it was produced
% on a typewriter. We use a flag for remembering this. The user may also
% use the flag for specifying \Lopt{ms} effects.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmsdoc
\msdocfalse
\DeclareOption{ms}{%
\msdoctrue
\draftdocfalse
\setlength\overfullrule{\z@}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{showtrims} option}
%
% The \Lopt{showtrims} option will display crosses at the corners
% of the logical pages showing where the stock should be trimmed.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowtrims}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifshowtrims
\showtrimsfalse
\DeclareOption{showtrims}{\showtrimstrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
%
% The \Lopt{article} option typesets as a simulation of the
% \Lpack{article} class.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article option}
% \begin{macro}{\ifartopt}
% \cs{ifartopt} is a flag (TRUE) if the \Lopt{article} option is called.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifartopt
\artoptfalse
\DeclareOption{article}{\artopttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{subfigure} option}
%
% The \Lopt{subfigure} option has been made a no-op since version 1.1
% and finally removed in version 1.61803. It was:
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added subfigure option}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Effectively removed subfigure option}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Removed subfigure option}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \DeclareOption{subfigure}{%
% \ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{The subfigure option is not required}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \subsection{The openright, openleft and openany options}
%
% The \Lopt{openright} option specifies that Chapters must begin on
% recto pages. The \Lopt{openleft} option specifies that Chapters
% must begin on verso pages and the \Lopt{openany} option lets Chapters
% start on any page.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Added the openleft option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{openright}{\@openrighttrue}
\DeclareOption{openany}{\@openrightfalse}
\DeclareOption{openleft}{\@openlefttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openright}
% \begin{macro}{\openany}
% \begin{macro}{\openleft}
% Commands that can be used to change the option in the middle of the
% document\footnote{Openleft provided to meet a request by
% Vladimir G.~Ivanovic (\texttt{vladimir@acm.org}) in September 2001.}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openright}{\@openrighttrue\@openleftfalse%
\gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartorecto}}
\newcommand{\openany}{\@openrightfalse\@openleftfalse%
\gdef\clearforchapter{\clearpage}}
\newcommand{\openleft}{\@openlefttrue
\gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartoverso}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Equation numbering on the left}
%
% The \Lopt{leqno} option prints equation numbers on the left. This
% is implemented via an external class option file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Flush left math displays}
%
% The \Lopt{fleqn} option redefines the displayed math environments
% so that they are left adjusted with an indent of \cs{mathindent}
% from the current left margin. This
% is implemented via an external class option file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Open bibliography}
%
% The \Lopt{openbib} option redefines the \verb?thebibliography? so that each
% block starts on a new line, and succeeding lines in a block are
% indented by \cs{bibindent}.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Replaced \cs{AtEndOfPackage} with \cs{AtEndOfClass}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{openbib}{%
\AtEndOfClass{%
\renewcommand\@openbib@code{%
\advance\leftmargin\bibindent
\itemindent -\bibindent
\listparindent \itemindent
\parsep \z@
}%
\renewcommand\newblock{\par}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Old font commands}
%
% The \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option enables commands like \cs{bf} and friends.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added the oldfontcommands option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{oldfontcommands}{\@memoldfonttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Extra font sizes}
%
% The \Lopt{extrafontsizes} options indicates that extended font sizes (above 25pt)
% are available.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added extrafontsizes option.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{extrafontsizes}{\extrafontsizestrue}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/07/12}{Added dead man switch for etex}
% \subsection{ETeX}
%
% If found we automatically load the eTeX package right after
% executing the class options. Though, some odd \LaTeX\ installations
% may have the eTeX pacakge, but is not based on eTeX (eventhough that
% is what the LaTeX-project have recommended for several years now),
% so we add a dead mans switch to disable the loading.
% \begin{macro}{\ifmem@noetex}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@noetextrue}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@noetexfalse}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmem@noetex
\mem@noetexfalse
\DeclareOption{noetex}{\mem@noetextrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Executing Options} \label{sec:xopt}
%
% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
% variables.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ExecuteOptions{final,letterpaper,10pt,onecolumn,openright,twoside,
portrait}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The \cs{ProcessOptions} command causes the execution of the code
% for every option \Lopt{foo}
% which is declared and for which the user typed
% the \Lopt{foo} option in his
% \cs{documentclass} command. For every option \Lopt{bar} he typed,
% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
% All options will be passed as document options to any
% \cs{usepackage} command in the document preamble.
%
% \cs{ProcessOptions*} processes the options in the order they are given
% in the \cs{documentclass} command, instead of the definition order.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Change \cs{ProcessOptions} to
% \cs{ProcessOptions*} and handle landscape/portrait
% option after \cs{ProcessOptions*}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ProcessOptions*
\ifmemlandscape
\setlength\@tempdima {\stockheight}
\setlength\stockheight{\stockwidth}
\setlength\stockwidth {\@tempdima}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Load the eTeX package if found, and if the user has not explicitly
% asked us not to.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifmem@noetex\relax\else
\IfFileExists{etex.sty}{\RequirePackage{etex}}{}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\memoirpostopthook}
% A user could define this \emph{before} the \cs{documentclass} command
% to do something at this point. For example, to set up a new stock size: \\
% \verb?\def\memoirpostopthook{\stockheight=44in \stockwidth=34in}?
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Added \cs{memoirpostopthook}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\memoirpostopthook}{}
\memoirpostopthook
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartorecto}
% A repeat of \cs{cleardoublepage}; clears to a recto (odd-numbered) page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartorecto{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartoverso}
% Clears to a verso (even-numbered) page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartoverso{\clearpage\if@twoside
\ifodd\c@page\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Set \cs{clearforchapter} according to the options.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@openleft
\openleft
\else
\if@openright
\openright
\else
\openany
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ivpt}
% \begin{macro}{\@xxxpt}
% \begin{macro}{\@xxxvipt}
% \begin{macro}{\@xlviiipt}
% \begin{macro}{\@lxpt}
% \begin{macro}{\@lxxiipt}
% \begin{macro}{\@lxxxivpt}
% \begin{macro}{\@xcvipt}
% \begin{macro}{\@cviiipt}
% \begin{macro}{\@cxxpt}
% \begin{macro}{\@cxxxiipt}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added a bunch of \cs{@...pt} macros}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@ivpt}{4}
\newcommand*{\@xxxpt}{30}
\newcommand*{\@xxxvipt}{36}
\newcommand*{\@xlviiipt}{48}
\newcommand*{\@lxpt}{60}
\newcommand*{\@lxxiipt}{72}
\newcommand*{\@lxxxivpt}{84}
\newcommand*{\@xcvipt}{96}
\newcommand*{\@cviiipt}{108}
\newcommand*{\@cxxpt}{120}
\newcommand*{\@cxxxiipt}{132}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now that all the options have been executed we can load the
% chosen class option file that contains all size dependent code. The
% larger sizes are only made available for the \Lopt{extrafontsizes} option.
%
% \begin{macro}{\memfontfamily}
% \begin{macro}{\memfontenc}
% \begin{macro}{\memfontpack}
% The default font and coding as set by the kernel is \texttt{cmr} and
% \texttt{OT1} respectively, giving Knuth's original Computer Modern Roman
% font at a set of fixed sizes (maximum of 24.88pt). If we are to have
% any size font we have to go to a scaleable font. As the Latin Modern font
% is a scaleable version of Computer Modern, and all modern LaTeX distributions
% include it, I am using this by default.
%
% By defining these three macros \emph{before}
% the \cs{documentclass} any other font and package can be used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\memfontfamily}{lmr}
\providecommand*{\memfontenc}{T1}
\providecommand*{\memfontpack}{lmodern}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Deal with the `anyptsize' (\Lopt{*pt}) option first. In this case the macros
% \cs{anyptfilebase} and \cs{anyptsize} should have been defined by the
% author \emph{before} the \cs{documentclass} command, and a file \\
% \verb?\anyptfilebase\anyptsize.clo? should exist (if not the file will
% default to \verb?mem10.clo?).
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Extended the loading of \texttt{.clo} files.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@nyptsizeopt
\newcommand*{\@nyptclofile}{\anyptfilebase\anyptsize.clo}
\IfFileExists{\@nyptclofile}{\def\@memptsize{\anyptsize}}{%
\@memerror{You have used the `*pt' option but \MessageBreak
file \@nyptclofile\space can't be found}%
{I'll use mem10.clo instead}
\renewcommand*{\@nyptclofile}{mem10.clo}%
\def\@memptsize{10}%
}
\renewcommand*{\@ptsize}{\@memptsize}
\usefont{\memfontenc}{\memfontfamily}{m}{n}
\input{\@nyptclofile}
\usepackage{\memfontpack}\usepackage[\memfontenc]{fontenc}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Now for the fixed pt size options.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifextrafontsizes
\usefont{\memfontenc}{\memfontfamily}{m}{n}
\input{mem\@memptsize.clo}
\usepackage{\memfontpack}\usepackage[\memfontenc]{fontenc}
\else
\ifnum\@memptsize > 17\relax
\@memerror{The `extrafontsizes' option is required to use \MessageBreak
the `\@memptsize pt' option}%
{The 17pt option will be used instead}
\input{mem17.clo}
\else
\ifnum\@ptsize = 9\relax
\input{mem\@ptsize.clo}
\else
\input{mem1\@ptsize.clo}
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Fonts and spaces} \label{sec:docl}
% \label{sec:maincode}
%
% In this section we deal with most of the aspects that are related
% to font sizes, and spacing that is related to the size of the body font.
%
% \subsection{Fonts}
%
% \LaTeX\ offers the user commands to change the size of the font,
% relative to the `main' size. Each relative size changing command
% \cs{size} executes the command
% \verb?\@setfontsize\size? \meta{font-size} \meta{baselineskip} where:
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{font-size}] The absolute size of the font to use from
% now on.
%
% \item[\meta{baselineskip}] The normal value of \cs{baselineskip}
% for the size of the font selected. (The actual value will be
% \cs{baselinestretch} * \meta{baselineskip}.)
% \end{description}
%
% A number of commands, defined in the \LaTeX\ kernel, shorten the
% following definitions and are used throughout. They are listed in
% the first part of Table~\ref{tab:sh}. Those in the second part are introduced
% by the class.
%
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Shorthand font point size commands}\label{tab:sh}
% \begin{tabular}{ll@{\qquad}ll@{\qquad}ll} \hline
% & & & & \cs{@ivpt} & 4 \\
% \cs{@vpt} & 5 & \cs{@vipt} & 6 & \cs{@viipt} & 7 \\
% \cs{@viiipt} & 8 & \cs{@ixpt} & 9 & \cs{@xpt} & 10 \\
% \cs{@xipt} & 10.95 & \cs{@xiipt} & 12 & \cs{@xivpt} & 14.4\\
% \cs{@xviipt} & 17.28 & \cs{@xxpt} & 20.74 & \cs{@xxvpt} & 24.88\\ \hline
% \cs{@xxxpt} & 30 & \cs{@xxxvipt} & 36 & \cs{@xlviiipt} & 48 \\
% \cs{@lxpt} & 60 & \cs{@lxxiipt} & 72 & \cs{@lxxxivpt} & 84 \\
% \cs{@xcvipt} & 96 & \cs{@cviiipt} & 108 & \cs{@cxxpt} & 120 \\
% \cs{@cxxxiipt} & 132 \\ \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \end{table}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
% \begin{macro}{\@normalsize}
%
% The user level command for the main size is \cs{normalsize}.
% Internally \LaTeX\ uses \cs{@normalsize} when it refers to the
% main size. \cs{@normalsize} will be defined to work like
% \cs{normalsize} if the latter is redefined from its default
% definition (that just issues an error message). Otherwise, in the standard
% classes \cs{@normalsize} simply selects a 10pt/12pt size, but here
% it selects among the wider range.
%
% The \cs{normalsize} macro also sets new values for\\
% \cs{abovedisplayskip}, \cs{abovedisplayshortskip} and
% \cs{belowdisplayshortskip}.
%
% For the larger sizes I have set \cs{abovedisplayskip} to the font size
% and \cs{belowdisplayshortskip} to 0.5\cs{onelineskip}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt|20pt|25pt|30pt|36pt|48pt|60pt>
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed baseline skip from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added files mem20.clo through mem60.clo}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed .clo files to accomodate \cs{extrafontsizes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\normalsize}{%
%<*9pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@ixpt\@xpt
\abovedisplayskip 9\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4.5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 5.5\p@ \@plus 2.5\p@ \@minus 3\p@
%
%<*10pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
\abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*11pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
\abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*12pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*14pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xivpt{17.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 14\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus8\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*17pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xviipt{22}%
\abovedisplayskip 15\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus8\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus4\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 8\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*20pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xxpt{25}%
\abovedisplayskip 20\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus9\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus5\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 12.5\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus3\p@
%
%<*25pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xxvpt{30}%
\abovedisplayskip 25\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus10\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus6\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 15\p@ \@plus7.5\p@ \@minus4\p@
%
%<*30pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xxxpt{37}%
\abovedisplayskip 30\p@ \@plus7\p@ \@minus11\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus7\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 18\p@ \@plus9\p@ \@minus4\p@
%
%<*36pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xxxvipt{45}%
\abovedisplayskip 36\p@ \@plus8\p@ \@minus12\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus8\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 22\p@ \@plus11\p@ \@minus5\p@
%
%<*48pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xlviiipt{60}%
\abovedisplayskip 48\p@ \@plus9\p@ \@minus13\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus9\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 30\p@ \@plus15\p@ \@minus7\p@
%
%<*60pt>
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@lxpt{72}%
\abovedisplayskip 60\p@ \@plus10\p@ \@minus14\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus10\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 36\p@ \@plus18\p@ \@minus9\p@
%
% \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{belowdisplayskip} is always equal to the
% \cs{abovedisplayskip}. The parameters of the first level list are
% always given by \cs{@listI}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\let\@listi\@listI}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We initially choose the normalsize font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\normalsize
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\small}
% This code is similar to that for \cs{normalsize}.
% (Robert Schlicht\footnote{\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net}, via email on 2004/03/11.}
% noted that in some cases \% signs were missing after \verb?\@setfontsize?).
%
% For the larger sizes I have set \cs{topsep} to 2/3\cs{onelineskip}
% and \cs{parsep} to 1/2\cs{topsep}.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/12}{Added missing percent signs to some uses of
% \cs{@setfontsize}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\small}{%
%<*9pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@viiipt{9.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*10pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11}%
\abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*11pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
\abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*12pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xipt{13.6}%
\abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
\parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*14pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xiipt{14.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*17pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xivpt{17}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*20pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xviipt{22}%
\abovedisplayskip 17\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus8\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus4\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 14\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus7\p@
\parsep 7\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus3\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*25pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xxpt{25}%
\abovedisplayskip 20\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus9\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus5\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 12.5\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 16\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus8\p@
\parsep 8\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*30pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xxvpt{30}%
\abovedisplayskip 25\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus10\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus6\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 15\p@ \@plus7.5\p@ \@minus4\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 20\p@ \@plus7\p@ \@minus10\p@
\parsep 10\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus5\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*36pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xxxpt{37}%
\abovedisplayskip 30\p@ \@plus7\p@ \@minus11\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus7\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 18\p@ \@plus9\p@ \@minus4\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 24\p@ \@plus8\p@ \@minus12\p@
\parsep 12\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*48pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xxxvipt{45}%
\abovedisplayskip 36\p@ \@plus8\p@ \@minus12\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus8\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 22\p@ \@plus11\p@ \@minus5\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 30\p@ \@plus10\p@ \@minus15\p@
\parsep 15\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus7\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*60pt>
\@setfontsize\small\@xlviiipt{60}%
\abovedisplayskip 48\p@ \@plus9\p@ \@minus13\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus9\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 30\p@ \@plus15\p@ \@minus7\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 40\p@ \@plus13\p@ \@minus20\p@
\parsep 20\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus10\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
% This code is similar to that for \cs{small}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footnotesize}{%
%<*9pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viipt{8}%
\abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
\parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*10pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*11pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
\abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*12pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt\@xiipt
\abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*14pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xipt{13.6}%
\abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*17pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xiipt{14}%
\abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep
%% \itemindent\z@
}%
%
%<*20pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xivpt{17.5}%
\abovedisplayskip 14\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus8\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 12\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\parsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus3\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*25pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xviipt{22}%
\abovedisplayskip 17\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus8\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus4\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 14\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus7\p@
\parsep 7\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus3\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*30pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xxpt{25}%
\abovedisplayskip 20\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus9\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus5\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 12.5\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus3\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 16\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus8\p@
\parsep 8\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*36pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xxvpt{30}%
\abovedisplayskip 25\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus10\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus6\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 15\p@ \@plus7.5\p@ \@minus4\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 20\p@ \@plus7\p@ \@minus10\p@
\parsep 10\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus5\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*48pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xxxpt{37}%
\abovedisplayskip 30\p@ \@plus7\p@ \@minus11\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus7\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 18\p@ \@plus9\p@ \@minus4\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 24\p@ \@plus8\p@ \@minus12\p@
\parsep 12\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
%<*60pt>
\@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xxxvipt{45}%
\abovedisplayskip 36\p@ \@plus8\p@ \@minus12\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus8\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 22\p@ \@plus11\p@ \@minus5\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 30\p@ \@plus10\p@ \@minus15\p@
\parsep 15\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus7\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
%
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\miniscule}
% \begin{macro}{\scriptsize}
% \begin{macro}{\tiny}
% \begin{macro}{\large}
% \begin{macro}{\Large}
% \begin{macro}{\LARGE}
% \begin{macro}{\huge}
% \begin{macro}{\Huge}
% \begin{macro}{\HUGE}
% These are all much simpler than the previous macros, they just
% select a new fontsize, but leave the parameters for displays and
% lists alone. The class provides two additional sizes, \cs{miniscule}
% and \cs{HUGE}, with respect to the usual set. For the larger sizes (e.g.,
% 72pt and above) I have
% made the \cs{baselineskip} approximately 20 precent larger than the pt size.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{miniscule} and \cs{HUGE} font sizes}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled some font sizes to get regular steps}
% \changes{v1.2a}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt scriptsize bug}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\ifextrafontsizes
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@ivpt{5}}
\else
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
\fi
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxpt{25}}
%
%<*10pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxvpt{30}}
%
%<*11pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}}
\ifextrafontsizes
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxxpt{37}}
\else
\let\HUGE=\Huge
\fi
%
%<*12pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@ixpt\@xpt}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30}}
\ifextrafontsizes
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxxpt{37}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxxvipt{45}}
\else
\let\Huge=\huge
\let\HUGE=\huge
\fi
%
%<*14pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@ixpt{10}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxvpt{30}}
\ifextrafontsizes
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxxpt{37}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxxvipt{45}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xlviiipt{60}}
\else
\let\huge=\LARGE
\let\Huge=\LARGE
\let\HUGE=\LARGE
\fi
%
%<*17pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@ixpt{10}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxvpt{30}}
\ifextrafontsizes
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxxpt{37}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxxvipt{45}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xlviiipt{60}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@lxpt{72}}
\else
\let\LARGE=\Large
\let\huge=\Large
\let\Huge=\Large
\let\HUGE=\Large
\fi
%
%<*20pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xxvpt{30}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxxpt{37}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxxvipt{45}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xlviiipt{60}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@lxpt{72}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@lxxiipt{86}}
%
%<*25pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xivpt{17.5}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xxxpt{37}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxxvipt{45}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xlviiipt{60}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@lxpt{72}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@lxxiipt{86}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@lxxxivpt{100}}
%
%<*30pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xivpt{17.5}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xxxvipt{45}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xlviiipt{60}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@lxpt{72}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@lxxiipt{86}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@lxxxivpt{100}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xcvipt{116}}
%
%<*36pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@xivpt{17.5}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xlviiipt{60}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@lxpt{72}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@lxxiipt{86}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@lxxxivpt{100}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xcvipt{116}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@cviiipt{132}}
%
%<*48pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xxvpt{30}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@lxpt{72}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@lxxiipt{86}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@lxxxivpt{100}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xcvipt{116}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@cviiipt{132}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@cxxpt{144}}
%
%<*60pt>
\newcommand*{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand*{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xxvpt{30}}
\newcommand*{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xxxpt{37}}
\newcommand*{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@lxxiipt{86}}
\newcommand*{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@lxxxivpt{100}}
\newcommand*{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xcvipt{116}}
\newcommand*{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@cviiipt{132}}
\newcommand*{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@cxxpt{144}}
\newcommand*{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@cxxxiipt{162}}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%
%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionsize}
% This internal command holds the font size for captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionsize}{\normalsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Paragraphing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
% These parameters control \TeX's behaviour when two lines tend to
% come too close together.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}
\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
% This is used as a multiplier for \cs{baselineskip}. The default is
% to \emph{not} stretch the baselines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
%
% \cs{parskip} is additional vertical space between paragraphs; default
% is zero.
%
%
% \cs{onelineskip} is the default space between baselines.
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{onelineskip} from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@}
%
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt|20pt|25pt|30pt|36pt|48pt|60pt>
%<9pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xpt\p@}
%<10pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xiipt\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{13.6\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{14.5\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{17.5\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{22\p@}
%<20pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{25\p@}
%<25pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{30\p@}
%<30pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{37\p@}
%<36pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{45\p@}
%<48pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{60\p@}
%<60pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{72\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
% \cs{parskip} gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
% \cs{parindent} is the width of the paragraph indentation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength\parindent{1em}
\else
%<9pt> \setlength\parindent{12\p@}
%<10pt> \setlength\parindent{15\p@}
%<11pt> \setlength\parindent{17\p@}
%<12pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<14pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<17pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<20pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<25pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<30pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<36pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<48pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<60pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
\fi
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
% The values for these three parameters are set in the LaTeX kernel.
% Historically they have been size invariant, but I have changed them for
% the larger sizes (\cs{smallskipamount} is 1/4 the fontsize, and the others
% each double up on the next lower).
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{(small/med/big)skips not invraiant for larger font sizes.}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed (small/med/big)skips for 17pt}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*17pt|20pt|25pt|30pt|36pt|48pt|60pt>
%<*17pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{4\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus1\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{17\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus4\p@}
%
%<*20pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{5\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus1\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{20\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus4\p@}
%
%<*25pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{6\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus1\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{12\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{24\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus4\p@}
%
%<*30pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{5\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus1\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{20\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus4\p@}
%
%<*36pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{9\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{18\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus4\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{36\p@ \@plus8\p@ \@minus8\p@}
%
%<*48pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{24\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus6\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{48\p@ \@plus12\p@ \@minus12\p@}
%
%<*60pt>
\setlength\smallskipamount{15\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus4\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{30\p@ \@plus8\p@ \@minus8\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{60\p@ \@plus16\p@ \@minus16\p@}
%
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
% The commands \cs{nopagebreak} and \cs{nolinebreak} put in penalties
% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
% They use \cs{@lowpenalty}, \cs{@medpenalty} or \cs{@highpenalty},
% dependent on their argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\@lowpenalty 51
\@medpenalty 151
\@highpenalty 301
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
% These penalties are used to discourage club and widow lines.
% The default values are 150 each, but we want stronger discouragement.
% \begin{macrocode}
\clubpenalty 1000
\widowpenalty 1000
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
% Discourage, but do not prevent, widows in front of a math display
% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
% after a display without a penalty. The default values are
% used, therefore we only show them here.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \displaywidowpenalty 50
% \predisplaypenalty 10000
% \postdisplaypenalty 0
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \interlinepenalty 0
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \brokenpenalty 100
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Vertical spacing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
% The \cs{headheight} is the height of the box that will contain the
% running head. In this class it is point size dependent ---
% \cs{onelineskip} (normally it is a constant 12pt).
%
% The \cs{headsep} is the distance between the bottom
% of the running head and the top of the text. For the larger sizes
% this is 1.8 times the fontsize.
%
% The \cs{topskip} is the \cs{baselineskip} for the first line on a page;
% \LaTeX's output routine will not work properly if it has the
% value 0pt, so do not do that! For the lareger sizes this is the font size.
%
% The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
% running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
% by the \cs{footskip}. For the larger sizes this is 2.5 times the
% font size.
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 16pt to 17.5pt}
% \changes{v0.11 (mem11.clo)}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 13pt to 13.6pt}
% \changes{v0.4b (mem12.clo)}{2010/10/19}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 14pt to 14.5pt}
% \begin{macrocode}
%
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt|20pt|25pt|30pt|36pt|48pt|60pt>
%<*9pt>
\setlength\headheight{11\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.225in}
\setlength\topskip{9\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.33in}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\headheight{12\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.25in}
\setlength\topskip{10\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.35in}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\headheight{13.6\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.275in}
\setlength\topskip{11\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.38in}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\headheight{14.5\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.275in}
\setlength\topskip{12\p@}
\setlength\footskip{30\p@}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\headheight{17.5\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.30in}
\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.4in}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\headheight{22\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.30in}
\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.4in}
%
%<*20pt>
\setlength\headheight{25\p@}
\setlength\headsep{36\p@}
\setlength\topskip{20\p@}
\setlength\footskip{50\p@}
%
%<*25pt>
\setlength\headheight{30\p@}
\setlength\headsep{45\p@}
\setlength\topskip{25\p@}
\setlength\footskip{62\p@}
%
%<*30pt>
\setlength\headheight{37\p@}
\setlength\headsep{54\p@}
\setlength\topskip{30\p@}
\setlength\footskip{75\p@}
%
%<*36pt>
\setlength\headheight{45\p@}
\setlength\headsep{65\p@}
\setlength\topskip{36\p@}
\setlength\footskip{90\p@}
%
%<*48pt>
\setlength\headheight{60\p@}
\setlength\headsep{86\p@}
\setlength\topskip{48\p@}
\setlength\footskip{120\p@}
%
%<*60pt>
\setlength\headheight{72\p@}
\setlength\headsep{108\p@}
\setlength\topskip{60\p@}
\setlength\footskip{150\p@}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxdepth}
% \begin{macro}{\@maxdepth}
% The \TeX\ primitive register \cs{maxdepth} has a function that is
% similar to that of \cs{topskip}. The register \cs{@maxdepth} should
% always contain a copy of \cs{maxdepth}. In both plain \TeX\ and
% \LaTeX~2.09 \cs{maxdepth} had a fixed value of \texttt{4pt}; in
% native \LaTeX 2e mode we let the value depend on the typesize. We
% set it so that \cs{maxdepth} $+$ \cs{topskip} $=$ typesize $\times
% 1.5$. As it happens, in these classes \cs{topskip} is equal to the
% typesize, therefor we set \cs{maxdepth} to half the value of
% \cs{topskip}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip}
\setlength\@maxdepth\maxdepth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
% \cs{footnotesep} is the height of the strut placed at the beginning
% of every footnote. It equals the height of a normal \cs{footnotesize}
% strut, so no extra space appears between footnotes.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2007/01/30}{Changed nearly all \cs{footnotesep}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\footnotesep{5.6\p@}
%<10pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.65\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength\footnotesep{7.7\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength\footnotesep{8.4\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength\footnotesep{9.5\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength\footnotesep{10.15\p@}
%<20pt>\setlength\footnotesep{12.6\p@}
%<25pt>\setlength\footnotesep{15.4\p@}
%<30pt>\setlength\footnotesep{17.5\p@}
%<36pt>\setlength\footnotesep{21\p@}
%<48pt>\setlength\footnotesep{25.9\p@}
%<60pt>\setlength\footnotesep{31.5\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footins}
% \verb?\skip\footins? is the space between the last line of the main
% text and the top of the first footnote.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{8\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<10pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{9\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10.8\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{13\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{16\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 3\p@}
%<20pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{19\p@ \@plus 7\p@ \@minus 3\p@}
%<25pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{24\p@ \@plus 8\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%<30pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{29\p@ \@plus 10\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
%<36pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{35\p@ \@plus 12\p@ \@minus 6\p@}
%<48pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{47\p@ \@plus 16\p@ \@minus 8\p@}
%<60pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{59\p@ \@plus 20\p@ \@minus 10\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Floats}
%
% \paragraph{Floats on a text page}
%
% \begin{macro}{\floatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\textfloatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\intextsep}
% When a floating object is placed on a page with text, these
% parameters control the separation between the float and the other
% objects on the page. These parameters are used for both
% one-column mode and single-column floats in two-column mode.
%
% \cs{floatsep} is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
% to the top or bottom of the text page. For the larger sizes this is
% \cs{bigskip}.
%
% \cs{textfloatsep} is the space between the main text and floats
% at the top or bottom of the page. For the larger sizes this is
% 1.45\cs{onelineskip}.
%
% \cs{intextsep} is the space between in-text floats and the text.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\floatsep {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\floatsep {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
\intextsep \floatsep
%
%<*20pt>
\setlength\floatsep {20\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{36\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 8\p@}
\intextsep \floatsep
%
%<*25pt>
\setlength\floatsep {24\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{43\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 8\p@}
\intextsep \floatsep
%
%<*30pt>
\setlength\floatsep {30\p@ \@plus 6\p@ \@minus 6\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{54\p@ \@plus 6\p@ \@minus 12\p@}
\intextsep \floatsep
%
%<*36pt>
\setlength\floatsep {36\p@ \@plus 8\p@ \@minus 8\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{65\p@ \@plus 8\p@ \@minus 16\p@}
\intextsep \floatsep
%
%<*48pt>
\setlength\floatsep {48\p@ \@plus 12\p@ \@minus 12\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{87\p@ \@plus 12\p@ \@minus 24\p@}
\intextsep \floatsep
%
%<*60pt>
\setlength\floatsep {60\p@ \@plus 16\p@ \@minus 16\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{104\p@ \@plus 16\p@ \@minus 32\p@}
\intextsep \floatsep
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\dbltextfloatsep}
% When floating objects that span the whole \cs{textwidth} are placed
% on a text page and \LaTeX{} is in twocolumn mode the separation
% between the float and the text is controlled by \cs{dblfloatsep}
% and \cs{dbltextfloatsep}.
%
% \cs{dblfloatsep} is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
% to the top or bottom of the text page.
%
% \cs{dbltextfloatsep} is the space between the main text and floats
% at the top or bottom of the page.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
%
%<*20pt>
\dblfloatsep \floatsep
\dbltextfloatsep \textfloatsep
%
%<*25pt>
\dblfloatsep \floatsep
\dbltextfloatsep \textfloatsep
%
%<*30pt>
\dblfloatsep \floatsep
\dbltextfloatsep \textfloatsep
%
%<*36pt>
\dblfloatsep \floatsep
\dbltextfloatsep \textfloatsep
%
%<*48pt>
\dblfloatsep \floatsep
\dbltextfloatsep \textfloatsep
%
%<*60pt>
\dblfloatsep \floatsep
\dbltextfloatsep \textfloatsep
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \paragraph{Floats on their own page or column}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fptop}
% \begin{macro}{\@fpsep}
% \begin{macro}{\@fpbot}
% When floating objects are placed on separate pages the layout of
% such pages is controlled by these parameters. At the top of the
% page \cs{@fptop} amount of stretchable whitespace is inserted, at
% the bottom of the page we get an \cs{@fpbot} amount of stretchable
% whitespace. Between adjacent floats the \cs{@fpsep} is inserted.
% For the larger sizes \cs{@fpsep} is .7\cs{onelineskip}.
%
% These parameters are used for the placement of floating objects
% in one column mode, or in single column floats in two column
% mode.
%
% Note that at least one of the two parameters \cs{@fptop} and
% \cs{@fpbot} should contain a \verb?plus ...fil? to allow filling the
% remaining empty space.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{9\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*20pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{17\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\@fpbot \@fptop
%
%<*25pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{21\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\@fpbot \@fptop
%
%<*30pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{26\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\@fpbot \@fptop
%
%<*36pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{31\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\@fpbot \@fptop
%
%<*48pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{42\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\@fpbot \@fptop
%
%<*60pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{50\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\@fpbot \@fptop
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfptop}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpsep}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpbot}
% Double column floats in two column mode are handled with similar
% parameters.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{7\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*10pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*11pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*12pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*14pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*17pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%
%<*20pt>
\@dblfptop \@fptop
\@dblfpsep \@fpsep
\@dblfpbot \@dblfptop
%
%<*25pt>
\@dblfptop \@fptop
\@dblfpsep \@fpsep
\@dblfpbot \@dblfptop
%
%<*30pt>
\@dblfptop \@fptop
\@dblfpsep \@fpsep
\@dblfpbot \@dblfptop
%
%<*36pt>
\@dblfptop \@fptop
\@dblfpsep \@fpsep
\@dblfpbot \@dblfptop
%
%<*48pt>
\@dblfptop \@fptop
\@dblfpsep \@fpsep
\@dblfpbot \@dblfptop
%
%<*60pt>
\@dblfptop \@fptop
\@dblfpsep \@fpsep
\@dblfpbot \@dblfptop
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The measure}
%
% The width of a line of text (and therefore the text block) is termed
% the \emph{measure}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
% The length \cs{lxvchars} is the approximate length of a normal
% text line containing 65 characters (a typesetters rule of thumb is
% that there should be about 60--70 characters per line).
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\lxvchars{276\p@} %
%<10pt>\setlength\lxvchars{300\p@} % standard 345pt
%<11pt>\setlength\lxvchars{324\p@} % standard 360pt
%<12pt>\setlength\lxvchars{336\p@} % standard 390pt
%<14pt>\setlength\lxvchars{408\p@} %
%<17pt>\setlength\lxvchars{444\p@} %
%<20pt>\setlength\lxvchars{528\p@} %
%<25pt>\setlength\lxvchars{626\p@} %
%<30pt>\setlength\lxvchars{748\p@} %
%<36pt>\setlength\lxvchars{891\p@} %
%<48pt>\setlength\lxvchars{1177\p@} %
%<60pt>\setlength\lxvchars{1463\p@} %
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
% The length \cs{xlvchars} is the approximate length of a normal
% double column text line containing 45 characters
% (a typesetters rule of thumb is
% that there should be about 40--50 characters per column line).
% \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\xlvchars{192\p@} %
%<10pt>\setlength\xlvchars{204\p@} %
%<11pt>\setlength\xlvchars{216\p@} %
%<12pt>\setlength\xlvchars{240\p@} %
%<14pt>\setlength\xlvchars{288\p@} %
%<17pt>\setlength\xlvchars{312\p@} %
%<20pt>\setlength\xlvchars{365\p@} %
%<25pt>\setlength\xlvchars{438\p@} %
%<30pt>\setlength\xlvchars{518\p@} %
%<36pt>\setlength\xlvchars{617\p@} %
%<48pt>\setlength\xlvchars{815\p@} %
%<60pt>\setlength\xlvchars{1014\p@} %
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
% \cs{marginparsep} is the horizontal space between the text block and
% marginal notes, while \cs{marginparpush} is the minimum vertical
% separation between the notes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt>
\setlength\marginparsep{10\p@}
%
%<*17pt|20pt|25pt|30pt|36pt|48pt|60pt>
\setlength\marginparsep{1em}
%
\else
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt>
\setlength\marginparsep{7\p@}
%
%<*17pt|20pt|25pt|30pt|36pt|48pt|60pt>
\setlength\marginparsep{0.7em}
%
\fi
%<9pt|10pt|11pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{5\p@}
%<12pt|14pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{7\p@}
%<*17pt|20pt|25pt|30pt|36pt|48pt|60pt>
\setlength\marginparpush{0.5em}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%
%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Page Layout}
%
%
% \subsection{The typeblock and margins}
%
% All margin dimensions are measured from a point one inch from the
% top and lefthand side of the page.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setlxvchars}
% \begin{macro}{\setxlvchars}
% These were suggested and supplied by Morten H{\o}gholm (18 May 2003).
%
% \cs{setlxvchars}\oarg{fontspec} sets \cs{lxvchars} to the length of a line
% containing 65 characters in the \meta{fontspec}.
%
% Similarly
% \cs{setxlvchars}\oarg{fontspec} sets \cs{xlvchars} for 45 characters.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{setlxvchars} and \cs{setxlvchars}
% (from patch v1.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setlxvchars}[1][\normalfont]{\begingroup
#1
\settowidth{\lxvchars}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}%
\setlength{\lxvchars}{2.042\lxvchars}%
\addtolength{\lxvchars}{33.41pt}%
\global\lxvchars=\lxvchars
\endgroup}
\newcommand*{\setxlvchars}[1][\normalfont]{\begingroup
#1
\settowidth{\xlvchars}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}%
\setlength{\xlvchars}{1.415\xlvchars}%
\addtolength{\xlvchars}{23.03pt}%
\global\xlvchars=\xlvchars
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setrectanglesize}
% The macro \cs{setrectanglesize}\marg{H}\marg{W}\marg{r}
% calculates the height and width of a rectangle given any two out of
% the three arguments. An unvalued argument is denoted by \verb?*?.
%
% Table~\ref{tab:setrect} shows the argument combinations and the result
% for each combination.
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setrectanglesize}}\label{tab:setrect}
% \begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
% H & W & r & Result \\ \hline
% * & W & r & $H = rW$ \\{}
% * & W & * & $H = W$ \\{}
% * & * & r & ambiguous \\{}
% * & * & * & ambiguous \\{}
% H & W & r & $H, W$ \\
% H & W & * & $H, W$ \\
% H & * & r & $W = rH$ \\
% H & * & * & $W = H$ \\
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \end{table}
%
% The
% calculated height and width are stored in \cs{@tempdima} and \cs{@tempdimb}
% respectively. Both lengths are set to zero if there is an error.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Used \cs{setlength} instead of TeX syntax so that the calc package
% can be used with page layout (Morten H{\o}gholm mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setrectanglesize}[3]{%
\nametest{#1}{*}%
\ifsamename % H = *
\nametest{#2}{*}%
\ifsamename % W = *
\@memerror{%
The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{0pt}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{0pt}%
\else % W
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#2}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{\@tempdimb}%
\else % r
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#2}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#3\@tempdimb}%
\fi
\fi
\else % H
\nametest{#2}{*}%
\ifsamename % W = *
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempdima}%
\else % r
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#3\@tempdima}%
\fi
\else % W
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#2}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setfillsize}
% Consider a set of 4 lengths, $T$, $L$, $C$, and $R$, such that
% $T = L + C + R$, where $T$ is a fixed size and normally $C$ is also fixed.
% Also $L$ and $R$ may be specified independently of each other or as a
% ratio (i.e., $L = rR$ or $R = rL$).
% The macro
% \cs{setfillsize}\marg{T}\marg{C}\marg{L}\marg{R}\marg{r}
% maintains these constraints among the variables, where an unvalued
% argument is denoted by \verb?*?.
%
% Table~\ref{tab:setfill} shows the argument combinations and the result
% for each combination.
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setfillsize}}\label{tab:setfill}
% \begin{tabular}{cccc|ll} \hline
% C & L & R & r & Result & \\ \hline
% * & * & R & r & $L = rR$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & * & R & * & $L = R$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & * & * & r & ambigous & \\{}
% * & * & * & * & ambiguous & \\{}
% * & L & R & r & $L$, $R$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & L & R & * & $L$, $R$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & L & * & r & $R = rL$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% * & L & * & * & $R = L$, & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
% C & * & R & r & $L = T - C - R$ & $C$ \\
% C & * & R & * & $L = T - C - R$, & $C$ \\
% C & * & * & r & $L + R = T - C$, $R = rL$, & $C$ \\
% C & * & * & * & $L + R = T - C$, $R = L$, & $C$ \\
% C & L & R & r & ambiguous & $C$ \\
% C & L & R & * & ambiguous & $C$ \\
% C & L & * & r & $R = T - C - L$, & $C$ \\
% C & L & * & * & $R = T - C - L$, & $C$ \\
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% ^^A \MakeShortVerb{\|}
% \end{table}
%
%
% The
% calculated values of \texttt{C}, \texttt{L} and \texttt{R} are stored
% \cs{@tempdimc},
% \cs{@tempdima} and \cs{@tempdimb} respectively. If there is an error
% the lengths are set to zero.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setfillsize}[5]{%
\nametest{#2}{*}%
\ifsamename % C = *
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % L = *
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\@memerror{%
The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{0pt}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{0pt}%
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{0pt}%
\else % R
\nametest{#5}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#4}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{\@tempdimb}%
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\else % r
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#4}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#5\@tempdimb}%
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\fi
\fi
\else % L
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\nametest{#5}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#3}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempdima}
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\else % r
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#3}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#5\@tempdima}
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\fi
\else % R
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#3}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#4}%
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
\advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
\fi
\fi
\else % C is valued
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename % L = *
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\nametest{#5}{*}%
\ifsamename % r = *
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#2}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
\@tempdima = 0.5\@tempdima
\@tempdimb = \@tempdima
\else % r (CODE PERHAPS FIXED)
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#2} % C
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1} % T
\advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc % T - C
\@tempdima = 1000sp
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#5\@tempdima} % 1000r sp
\advance\@tempdima by 1000sp % 1000(1+r)sp
\@tempcnta = \@tempdima % 1000(1+r)
\@tempdima = \@tempdimb % T - C
\divide\@tempdima by \@tempcnta % (T-C)/1000(1+r) pts
\@tempdima = 1000\@tempdima % (T-C)/(1+r) pts = L
\advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima % = R
\fi
\else % R
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#2}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#4}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
\advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimb
\fi
\else % L
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename % R = *
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#2}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#3}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}%
\advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc
\advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdima
\else % R
\@memerror{%
The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{0pt}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{0pt}%
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{#2}%
\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setstocksize}
% \begin{macro}{\settrims}
% \begin{macro}{\settrimmedsize}
% \cs{setstocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width} sets the height
% and width of the stock material and
% \cs{settrims}\marg{top}\marg{edge} sets the trim lengths
% for the top and side (fore edge) of the stock.
% The macro \cs{settrimmedsize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}
% sets the size for the trimmed page, based on \cs{setrectanglesize}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setstocksize}[2]{%
\setlength{\stockheight}{#1}%
\setlength{\stockwidth}{#2}}
\newcommand{\settrims}[2]{%
\setlength{\trimtop}{#1}%
\setlength{\trimedge}{#2}}
\newcommand{\settrimmedsize}[3]{%
\setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\paperwidth}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\settypeblocksize}
% \cs{settypeblocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio}
% calulates the \cs{textheight} and \cs{textwidth} from two out of the
% three arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\settypeblocksize}[3]{%
\setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\binding}
% \begin{macro}{\setbinding}
% The length \cs{binding} is an allowance on the spine margin for
% binding. \cs{setbinding}\marg{length} sets the \cs{binding}.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/29}{Added binding offset code to the
% layout functions}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\binding}
\newcommand*{\setbinding}[1]{\setlength{\binding}{#1}}
\setbinding{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\spinemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\foremargin}
% \begin{macro}{\setlrmargins}
% \cs{setlrmargins}\marg{L}\marg{R}\marg{r} sets the Left (spine)
% and Right (fore edge) margins with constant typeblock.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/29}{Added binding to \cs{setlrmargins}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\spinemargin}
\newlength{\foremargin}
\newcommand{\setlrmargins}[3]{%
\advance\paperwidth -\binding
\setfillsize{\paperwidth}{\textwidth}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}%
\advance\paperwidth \binding
\advance\spinemargin \binding}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setlrmarginsandblock}
% \cs{setlrmarginsandblock}\marg{L}\marg{R}\marg{r} sets the Left (spine)
% and Right (fore edge) margins with variable typeblock.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/29}{Added binding to \cs{setlrmarginsandblock}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setlrmarginsandblock}[3]{%
\advance\paperwidth -\binding
\setfillsize{\paperwidth}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}%
\advance\paperwidth \binding
\advance\spinemargin \binding}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\uppermargin}
% \begin{macro}{\lowermargin}
% \begin{macro}{\setulmargins}
% \cs{setulmargins}\marg{L}\marg{R}\marg{r} sets the Left (upper)
% and Right (lower) margins with constant typeblock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\uppermargin}
\newlength{\lowermargin}
\newcommand{\setulmargins}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\paperheight}{\textheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setulmarginsandblock}
% \cs{setulmarginsandblock}\marg{L}\marg{R}\marg{r} sets the Left (upper)
% and Right (lower) margins with variable typeblock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setulmarginsandblock}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\paperheight}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headdrop}
% \begin{macro}{\setheaderspaces}
% \cs{setheaderspaces}\marg{L}\marg{R}\marg{r} sets the Left (head margin)
% and Right (headsep) spacing with constant headheight.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\headdrop}
\newcommand{\setheaderspaces}[3]{%
\setfillsize{\uppermargin}{\headheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\setlength{\headheight}{\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\headdrop}{\@tempdima}%
\setlength{\headsep}{\@tempdimb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setheadfoot}
% \cs{setheadfoot}\marg{headheight}\marg{footskip}
% sets the headheight and the footskip.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setheadfoot}[2]{%
\setlength{\headheight}{#1}%
\setlength{\footskip}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setcolsepandrule}
% \cs{setcolsepandrule}\marg{colsep}\marg{thickness}
% sets the column separation and the rule thickness.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/20}{Changed \cs{setcolseprule} to
% \cs{setcolsepandrule} to match the documentation.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setcolsepandrule}[2]{%
\setlength{\columnsep}{#1}%
\setlength{\columnseprule}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setmarginnotes}
% \cs{setmarginnotes}\marg{sep}\marg{width}\marg{push}
% sets the marginpar parameters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setmarginnotes}[3]{%
\setlength{\marginparsep}{#1}%
\setlength{\marginparwidth}{#2}%
\setlength{\marginparpush}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Initialise the paper size and trimming to their default values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\settrimmedsize{\stockheight}{\stockwidth}{*}
\settrims{\z@}{\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% What now follows is the standard class's method for setting up
% the dimensions.
%
% Set \cs{@tempdimb} to size-dependent initial line length and
% set \cs{@tempdima} to the maximum textwidth for the paper width,
% an inch margin on either side. In the standard classes the initial
% line length is about 14\% greater than \cs{lxvchars}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{1.14\lxvchars}
\setlength\@tempdima{\paperwidth}
\addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
% Now set the \cs{textwidth} depending on the number of columns. In twocolumn
% mode each column should be no wider than \cs{@tempdimb}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\ifdim\@tempdima>2\@tempdimb\relax
\setlength\textwidth{2\@tempdimb}
\else
\setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% In onecolumn
% the text should not be wider than the minumum of the paperwidth (less
% 2in for the margins) and the maximum length of the character line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimb\relax
\setlength\textwidth{\@tempdimb}
\else
\setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Adjust the width to be a whole number of points.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\textwidth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
% The \cs{textheight} is the height of the text block, excluding
% headers and footers. This is set according to the \cs{paperheight},
% to an integral number of lines, and allowing a 1in margin at the
% top and bottom and a further 1.5in for headers and footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\@tempdima{\paperheight}
\addtolength\@tempdima{-3.5in}
% \end{macrocode}
% Divide this height by the \cs{baselineskip} to get the number of lines.
% Then (re)calculate the \cs{textheight} and finally add the \cs{topskip}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\divide\@tempdima\baselineskip
\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
\setlength\textheight{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
\addtolength\textheight{\topskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The margins are calculated.
%
% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
% The margins depend on the paper size, also for two sided
% printing the inner margin is made smaller than the outer.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
\setlength\@tempdima {\paperwidth}
\addtolength\@tempdima {-\textwidth}
\setlength\oddsidemargin {.4\@tempdima}
\addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
\setlength\marginparwidth {.6\@tempdima}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.4in}
\else
\setlength\@tempdima {\paperwidth}
\addtolength\@tempdima {-\textwidth}
\setlength\oddsidemargin {.5\@tempdima}
\addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
\setlength\marginparwidth {.5\@tempdima}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
\addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.8in} % don't know why this isn't .4
\fi
\ifdim\marginparwidth>2in
\setlength\marginparwidth{2in}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Set these values to integer numbers of points, and afterwards calculate the
% \cs{evensidemargin}.
% Jonathon Stickel (\url{jjstickel@vcn.com}) on 2008/05/30 noted that
% \cs{marginparwidth} had to be positive for the initial setting of the sidebar
% geometry through \cs{setsidebars}.
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Ensured initial value of \cs{marginparwidth}
% was positive}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\oddsidemargin
\@settopoint\marginparwidth
\ifdim\marginparwidth<1pt \setlength\marginparwidth{1pt}\fi
\setlength\evensidemargin {\paperwidth}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-2in}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\textwidth}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\oddsidemargin}
\@settopoint\evensidemargin
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
% The \cs{topmargin} is the distance below the top of the printable
% area (1in below the top of the paper) and the top of the box
% containing the running head.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\topmargin {\paperheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-2in}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\headheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\headsep}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\textheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\footskip}
\addtolength\topmargin{-.5\topmargin}
\@settopoint\topmargin
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% That is the end of the classical algorithm. Now calculate the
% user-friendly dimensions. The calculations are simpler than in
% the general case as the \cs{paperwidth} and \cs{paperheight} is the
% same as the \cs{stockwidth} and \cs{stockheight}.
%
% We can get the spine
% and edge margins from the \cs{oddsidemargin}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\spinemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
\addtolength{\spinemargin}{1in}
\setlrmargins{\spinemargin}{*}{*}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Similarly we can get the upper and lower margins from the
% \cs{topmargin}, \cs{headheight} and \cs{headskip}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\uppermargin}{\topmargin}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{1in}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headheight}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headsep}
\setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memznegtest}
% DA suggested this in a private email (2003/002/13) to make error
% checking and reporting a bit more (space) efficient. Use like \\
% \verb?\@memznegtest{\marginparsep}? instead of \\
% \begin{verbatim}
% \ifdim\marginparsep>\z@\else
% \@memerror{\protect\marginparsep\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
% \fi
% \end{verbatim}
% If its length variable argument is zero or less it reports an error.
%
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memznegtest}}
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Changed \cs{@memznegtest} and
% \cs{@memnegtest} to issue warnings instead of errors}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memznegtest}[1]{%
\ifdim#1>\z@\else
%%%% \@memerror{\protect#1\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
\@memwarn{\protect#1\space is zero or negative}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memnegtest}
% Reports an error if its length variable argument is negative.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memnegtest}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memnegtest}[1]{%
\ifdim#1<\z@
%%%% \@memerror{\protect#1\space is negative}{\@ehd}%
\@memwarn{\protect#1\space is negative}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mclassicht}
% The classic adjustment of the \cs{textheight} to get an integral number
% of lines (given an integral number of baselineskips returns a height
% giving one more line in the block).
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{m@mclassicht}, \cs{m@mlinesht}
% and \cs{m@mnearestht} (mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mclassicht}{%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{\textheight}%
\divide\@tempdima \baselineskip
\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}%
\addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mlinesht}
% The adjustment of the \cs{textheight} to get an integral number
% of lines (given an inegral number of baselineskips returns a height
% giving that number of lines).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mlinesht}{%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{\textheight}%
\advance\@tempdima -\baselineskip
\divide\@tempdima \baselineskip
\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}%
\addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnearestht}
% The adjustment of the \cs{textheight} to get an integral number
% of lines with the calculated height being as the closest to the given
% height. Algorithm supplied by Lars Madsen and Morten H{\o}gholm on
% 2006/07/27.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mnearestht}{%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{\textheight}%
\advance\@tempdima -\topskip
\advance\@tempdima 0.5\baselineskip
\divide\@tempdima \baselineskip
\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
\setlength{\textheight}{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}%
\addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkthelayout}
% \cs{checkthelayout}\oarg{text} is the user level macro for
% checking the layout. The \meta{text} argument controls which
% algorithm should be used to calculate the \cs{textheight}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Extended \cs{checkthelayout} to include a choice
% of algorithms (mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed some page layout tests to negative from zero or negative
% (mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\checkthelayout}[1][classic]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First check the dimensions are not (zero or) negative.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@memnegtest{\trimedge}
\@memnegtest{\trimtop}
\@memznegtest{\stockwidth}
\@memznegtest{\paperwidth}
\@memznegtest{\textwidth}
%%% \@memznegtest{\spinemargin}
\@memnegtest{\spinemargin}
%%% \@memznegtest{\foremargin}
\@memnegtest{\foremargin}
\@memznegtest{\marginparsep}
\@memznegtest{\marginparwidth}
\@memznegtest{\stockheight}
\@memznegtest{\paperheight}
\@memznegtest{\textheight}
%%% \@memznegtest{\uppermargin}
\@memnegtest{\uppermargin}
%%% \@memznegtest{\lowermargin}
\@memnegtest{\lowermargin}
%%% \@memznegtest{\headheight}
\@memnegtest{\headheight}
%%% \@memznegtest{\headsep}
\@memnegtest{\headsep}
%%% \@memznegtest{\footskip}
\@memnegtest{\footskip}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Carry on regardless. We may need to adjust the \cs{textheight}
% to get an integral number of lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{#1}{classic}%
\ifsamename
\m@mclassicht
\else
\nametest{#1}{lines}%
\ifsamename
\m@mlinesht
\else
\nametest{#1}{nearest}%
\ifsamename
\m@mnearestht
\else
\nametest{#1}{fixed}
\ifsamename
\else% not classic, lines, nearest, or fixed
\@memerror{Optional argument is not one of:\MessageBreak
classic, fixed, lines, or nearest. \MessageBreak
I will assume the default}%
{\@ehc}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
\setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Check that all the sums add up correctly, or
% at least to within a small (\cs{@tempdimb}) error.
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Added more information about problematic
% layout values}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempdimb = -1pt
\@tempdima=\stockwidth
\advance\@tempdima -\trimedge
\advance\@tempdima -\paperwidth
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\paperwidth\space (\the\paperwidth) and/or
\protect\trimedge\space (\the\trimedge)
are too large for \protect\stockwidth\space (\the\stockwidth)
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \paperwidth
\advance\@tempdima -\foremargin
\advance\@tempdima -\textwidth
\advance\@tempdima -\spinemargin
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\spinemargin\space (\the\spinemargin) and/or
\protect\textwidth\space (\the\textwidth) and/or
\protect\foremargin\space (\the\foremargin)
are too large for \protect\paperwidth\space (\the\paperwidth)
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \stockheight
\advance\@tempdima -\trimtop
\advance\@tempdima -\paperheight
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\paperheight\space (\the\paperheight) and/or
\protect\trimtop\space (\the\trimtop)
are too large for \protect\stockheight\space (\the\stockheight)
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \paperheight
\advance\@tempdima -\uppermargin
\advance\@tempdima -\textheight
\advance\@tempdima -\lowermargin
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\uppermargin\space (\the\uppermargin) and/or
\protect\textheight\space (\the\textheight) and/or
\protect\lowermargin\space (\the\lowermargin)
are too large for \protect\paperheight\space (\the\paperheight)
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \uppermargin
\advance\@tempdima -\headheight
\advance\@tempdima -\headsep
\ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\headheight\space (\the\headheight) and/or
\protect\headsep\space (\the\headsep)
are too large for \protect\uppermargin\space (\the\uppermargin)
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi
\@tempdima = \lowermargin
\advance\@tempdima -\footskip
\ifdim\@tempdima<\z@
\@tempdima = -\@tempdima
\@memerror{\protect\footskip\space (\the\footskip)
is too large for \protect\lowermargin\space (\the\lowermargin)
by \the\@tempdima}%
{\@ehd}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fixthelayout}
% Calculate the normal
% \LaTeX{} page layout parameter values. We'll do the heights first
% as they are independent of the number of columns and the side printing.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{fixthelayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fixthelayout}{%
\topmargin = \trimtop
\advance\topmargin \uppermargin
\advance\topmargin -\headsep
\advance\topmargin -\headheight
\advance\topmargin -1in\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now the \cs{oddsidemargin}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\oddsidemargin = \stockwidth
\advance\oddsidemargin -\trimedge
\advance\oddsidemargin -\paperwidth
\advance\oddsidemargin \spinemargin
\advance\oddsidemargin -1in\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
% And the \cs{evensidemargin}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\evensidemargin = \trimedge
\advance\evensidemargin \foremargin
\advance\evensidemargin -1in\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% Set the values to the nearest whole point.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\textwidth
\@settopoint\oddsidemargin
\@settopoint\evensidemargin
% \end{macrocode}
% Fix standard page layouts after possible change of \cs{textwidth}.
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/03/16}{Added \cs{fixheaderwidths} to \cs{fixthelayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fixheaderwidths}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\typeoutlayout}
% \begin{macro}{\settypeoutlayoutunit}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@typeouttwolengths}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@typeoutonelength}
% Why not type out the calculated versions of the designed values?
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{typeoutlayout}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added column info to \cs{typeoutlayout}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added sidecap and sidebar data to \cs{typeoutlayout}
% (mempatch v4.6)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/04}{Added information about side feet}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/17}{Added feature such that user can change
% the unit used by \cs{typeoutlayout}, requested by Rasmus Villemoes}
% Using the macro \cs{settypeoutlayoutunit}\marg{unit} before
% \cs{typeoutlayout} (or more often \cs{checkandfixthelayout}), the
% user can choose the unit in which the list is typeset. The code is
% inspired by the \texttt{printlen} package.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\settypeoutlayoutunit[1]{
\nametest{#1}{pt}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{1.0}
\else
\nametest{#1}{pc}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{0.083333}
\else
\nametest{#1}{in}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{0.013837}
\else
\nametest{#1}{mm}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{0.351459}
\else
\nametest{#1}{cm}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{0.0351459}
\else
\nametest{#1}{bp}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{0.996264}
\else
\nametest{#1}{dd}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{0.9345718}
\else
\nametest{#1}{cc}
\ifsamename
\def\mem@tl@unit{#1}
\def\mem@tl@unitperpt{0.0778809}
\else
\@memerror{Unknown unit '#1' not suitable for layout listing}{}
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Default value is \texttt{pt}, other supported are \texttt{mm},
% \texttt{cm}, \texttt{in}, \texttt{bp}, \texttt{dd} and \texttt{cc}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\settypeoutlayoutunit{pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% To help with the typesetting, we need to helper macros:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@typeouttwolengths[4]{
% #1 = text before
% #2 = first length
% #3 = text between
% #4 = second length
\setlength\@tempdimc{\mem@tl@unitperpt #2}
\edef\l@first{\strip@pt\@tempdimc}%
\setlength\@tempdimc{\mem@tl@unitperpt #4}
\edef\l@second{\strip@pt\@tempdimc}%
\typeout{#1: \l@first\mem@tl@unit\space#3\space\l@second\mem@tl@unit}
}
\newcommand\mem@typeoutonelength[2]{
% #1 = text before
% #2 = first length
\setlength\@tempdimc{\mem@tl@unitperpt #2}
\edef\l@first{\strip@pt\@tempdimc}%
\typeout{#1: \l@first\mem@tl@unit}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Thirdly \cs{typeoutlayout} need to be rewritten to take care of the
% extra convertions
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\typeoutlayout}{%
\typeout{}
\typeout{******************************************************}
% \typeout{Stock height and width:
% \the\stockheight\space by \the\stockwidth}
% \typeout{Top and edge trims:
% \the\trimtop\space and \the\trimedge}
% \typeout{Page height and width:
% \the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
% \typeout{Text height and width:
% \the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
% \typeout{Spine and edge margins:
% \the\spinemargin\space and \the\foremargin}
% \typeout{Upper and lower margins:
% \the\uppermargin\space and \the\lowermargin}
% \typeout{Headheight and headsep:
% \the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
% \typeout{Footskip:
% \the\footskip}
% \typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule:
% \the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
% \typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth:
% \the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
% \typeout{Sidecapsep and sidecapwidth:
% \the\sidecapsep\space and \the\sidecapwidth}
% \typeout{Sidebarhsep and sidebarwidth:
% \the\sidebarhsep\space and \the\sidebarwidth}
% \typeout{Sidebarvsep and sidebartopsep:
% \the\sidebarvsep\space and \the\sidebartopsep}
% \typeout{Sidebarheight:
% \the\dimen\sideins}
% \typeout{Sidefoothsep and sidefootwidth:
% \the\sidefoothsep\space and \the\sidefootwidth}
% \typeout{Sidefootvsep and sidefootheight:
% \the\sidefootvsep\space and \the\sidefootheight}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Stock height and width}{\stockheight}{by}{\stockwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Top and edge trims}{\trimtop}{and}{\trimedge}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Page height and width}{\paperheight}{by}{\paperwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Text height and width}{\textheight}{by}{\textwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Spine and edge margins}{\spinemargin}{and}{\foremargin}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Upper and lower margins}{\uppermargin}{and}{\lowermargin}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Headheight and headsep}{\headheight}{and}{\headsep}
\mem@typeoutonelength{Footskip}{\footskip}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Columnsep and columnseprule}{\columnsep}{and}{\columnseprule}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Marginparsep and marginparwidth}{\marginparsep}{and}{\marginparwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Sidecapsep and sidecapwidth}{\sidecapsep}{and}{\sidecapwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Sidebarhsep and sidebarwidth}{\sidebarhsep}{and}{\sidebarwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Sidebarvsep and sidebartopsep}{\sidebarvsep}{and}{\sidebartopsep}
\mem@typeoutonelength{Sidebarheight}{\dimen\sideins}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Sidefoothsep and sidefootwidth}{\sidefoothsep}{and}{\sidefootwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Sidefootvsep and sidefootheight}{\sidefootvsep}{and}{\sidefootheight}
\typeout{******************************************************}
\typeout{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkandfixthelayout}
% This macro checks and fixes the layout, and reports the result. It takes the
% same optional argument as \cs{checkthelayout}.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced \cs{fixpagelayout} by \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Partitioned \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{checkandfixthelayout}
% for the extended \cs{checkthelayout} (mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\checkandfixthelayout}[1][classic]{%
\checkthelayout[#1]%
\fixthelayout
\typeoutlayout}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fixpdflayout}
% \begin{macro}{\fixdvipslayout}
% Page layout with pdf\LaTeX{} seems a bit iffy.
% At the suggestion of Lars Madsen, help with
% setting viewer (e.g., ghostview)
% window sizes for dvi/ps. \cs{fixdvipslayout} does for \file{dvi} output
% as \cs{fixpdflayout} does for \file{pdf} output.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{fixpdflayout} (from patch v1.6)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/01}{Added \cs{fixdvipslayout} }
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/08/17}{on ctt dynamotwain suggested a
% change to \cs{fixpdflayout} and the following \cs{AtBeginDocument}
% such that the \cs{special} is not outputtet when running xelatex}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fixpdflayout}{%
\pdfpageheight=\the\stockheight
\pdfpagewidth=\the\stockwidth
\ifxetex\else
\ifdim\pdfvorigin=0pt\pdfvorigin=1in\fi
\ifdim\pdfhorigin=0pt\pdfhorigin=1in\fi
\fi}
\newcommand*{\fixdvipslayout}{%
\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\stockwidth,\the\stockheight}}}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\ifxetex
\fixpdflayout
\else
\ifpdf
\ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
\fixdvipslayout
\else
\fixpdflayout
\fi
\else
\fixdvipslayout
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% With a landscape document when going \texttt{latex -> dvips} the
% resulting \file{.ps} file
% may apear upside down in \texttt{ghostview}. If this happens, try putting
% the following in the document preamble:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \addtodef{\fixdvipslayout}{}{%
% \special{!TeXDict begin /landplus90{true}store end }}
% \end{verbatim}
% See \texttt{http://www.radicaleye.com.dvips.html} (DVIPS Home Page) for
% an explanation.
%
% Some other potential specials for PostScript printing may be
% (at least for an HP 5SiMx LaserJet duplex printer):
% \begin{verbatim}
% \special{!TeXDict begin <>
% setpagedevice end} % duplex
% \special{!TeXDict begin <>
% setpagedevice end} % short side binding
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\typeoutstandardlayout}
% Types out the current values of the standard page layout parameters.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added \cs{typeoutstandardlayout}}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/17}{changed such that the user can change
% the unit being used}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\typeoutstandardlayout}{%
\typeout{}
\typeout{******************************************************}
% \typeout{Page height and width:
% \the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Page height and width}{\paperheight}{by}{\paperwidth}
% \typeout{Text height and width:
% \the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Text height and width}{\textheight}{by}{\textwidth}
% \typeout{Oddside and evenside margins:
% \the\oddsidemargin\space and \the\evensidemargin}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Oddside and evenside margins}{\oddsidemargin}{and}{\evensidemargin}
% \typeout{Topmargin and footskip:
% \the\topmargin\space and \the\footskip}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Topmargin and footskip}{\topmargin}{and}{\footskip}
% \typeout{Headheight and headsep:
% \the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Headheight and headsep}{\headheight}{and}{\headsep}
% \typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule:
% \the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Columnsep and columnseprule}{\columnsep}{and}{\columnseprule}
% \typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth:
% \the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
\mem@typeouttwolengths{Marginparsep and marginparwidth}{\marginparsep}{and}{\marginparwidth}
\typeout{******************************************************}
\typeout{}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Some predefined layouts}
%
% A few predefined layouts for the textblock are presented. The \cs{checkandfixthelayout}
% macro \emph{must} be called afterwards.
%
% \begin{macro}{\medievalpage}
% This implements Jan Tschichold's reconstruction of the page and textblock
% layout used by medieval scribes and the early printers~\cite{}.
% The spine, top, edge and bottom margins are in the ratios 2:3:4:6.
%
% \cs{medievalpage}\oarg{num} positions the typeblock on the page with the
% margins in the above ratios. The spine margin is (page width)/\meta{num}
% (default 9). This must be an integer.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{medievalpage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%% s = w/#1, t = 1.5s, e = 2s, f = 3s
\newcommand*{\medievalpage}[1][9]{%
\spinemargin=\paperwidth
\divide\spinemargin #1\relax
\uppermargin = 1.5\spinemargin
\setlrmarginsandblock{\spinemargin}{*}{2}
\setulmarginsandblock{\uppermargin}{*}{2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\isopage}
% An implementation of Bringhurst's layout for ISO proportioned pages.
% It works for any page though. The edge margin is twice the spine,
% and the bottom margin is twice the top.
%
% \cs{isopage}\oarg{num} positions and sizes the typeblock on the page
% according to the above ratios. The spine is (page width)/\meta{num}
% and the top margin id (page height)/\meta{num}. \meta{num} must be
% an integer.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{isopage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
% s = w/#1, e = 2s, t = h/#1, f = 2h
\newcommand*{\isopage}[1][9]{%
\spinemargin=\paperwidth
\divide\spinemargin #1\relax
\uppermargin=\paperheight
\divide\uppermargin #1\relax
\setlrmarginsandblock{\spinemargin}{*}{2}
\setulmarginsandblock{\uppermargin}{*}{2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\semiisopage}
% An variation on Bringhurst's layout for ISO proportioned pages.
% It works for any page though. The top margin is the same as the spine,
% and the edge and bottom margins are twice the spine.
%
% \cs{semiisopage}\oarg{num} positions and sizes the typeblock on the page
% according to the above ratios. The spine is (page width)/\meta{num}.
% \meta{num} must be an integer.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{isopage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% s = w/#1, t = s, e = 2s, f = e
\newcommand*{\semiisopage}[1][9]{%
\spinemargin=\paperwidth
\divide\spinemargin #1\relax
\uppermargin=\spinemargin
\setlrmarginsandblock{\spinemargin}{*}{2}
\setulmarginsandblock{\uppermargin}{*}{2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setpagebl}
% \begin{macro}{\setpageml}
% \begin{macro}{\setpagetl}
% \begin{macro}{\setpagetm}
% \cs{setpagebl}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} sets a page smaller than
% the stock size at the bottom left of the stock. The arguments are the
% the same as for \cs{settrimmedsize};
% \meta{height}, \meta{width} and \meta{ratio} of height and width
% (choose any two) of the desired page size. The trims are adjusted to suit.
% \cs{setpagetl} puts the page at the top left, \cs{setpageml} at the
% middle left, and \cs{setpagetm} at the top middle.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{setpagebl}, \cs{setpageml}, and
% \cs{setpagetl}}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Added \cs{setpagetm}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setpagebl}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\trimtop=\stockheight \advance\trimtop -\paperheight
\trimedge=\stockwidth \advance\trimedge -\paperwidth}
\newcommand*{\setpageml}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}
\trimtop=\stockheight \advance\trimtop -\paperheight
\advance\trimtop -0.5\trimtop
\trimedge=\stockwidth \advance\trimedge -\paperwidth}
\newcommand*{\setpagetl}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}
\trimtop=0pt
\trimedge=\stockwidth \advance\trimedge -\paperwidth}
\newcommand*{\setpagetm}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\trimtop=0pt
\trimedge=\stockwidth \advance\trimedge -\paperwidth
\advance\trimedge -0.5\trimedge}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setpagetr}
% \begin{macro}{\setpagemr}
% \begin{macro}{\setpagebr}
% \begin{macro}{\setpagebm}
% \begin{macro}{\setpagecc}
% Similar to those above, these macros set the page on the stock
% at the top right, middle right, bottom right, bottom middle, and centered.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Added \cs{setpagetr}, \cs{setpagemr}, \cs{setpagebr},
% \cs{setpagebm} and \cs{setpagecc}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setpagetr}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\trimtop=0pt
\trimedge=0pt}
\newcommand*{\setpagemr}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\trimtop=\stockheight \advance\trimtop -\paperheight
\advance\trimtop -0.5\trimtop
\trimedge=0pt}
\newcommand*{\setpagebr}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\trimtop=\stockheight \advance\trimtop -\paperheight
\trimedge=0pt}
\newcommand*{\setpagebm}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\trimtop=\stockheight \advance\trimtop -\paperheight
\trimedge=\stockwidth \advance\trimedge -\paperwidth
\advance\trimedge -0.5\trimedge}
\newcommand*{\setpagecc}[3]{%
\settrimmedsize{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\trimtop=\stockheight \advance\trimtop -\paperheight
\advance\trimtop -0.5\trimtop
\trimedge=\stockwidth \advance\trimedge -\paperwidth
\advance\trimedge -0.5\trimedge}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Float placement parameters}
%
%
% All float parameters are given default values in the \LaTeX{}
% kernel. For this reason counters only need to be set with
% \cs{setcounter} and other parameters are set using \cs{renewcommand}.
%
% \paragraph{Limits for the placement of floating objects}
%
% The settings here make it easier to place floats than with the
% standard classes.
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@topnumber}
% The \Lcount{topnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
% floats that can appear on the top of a text page (classically 2)
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{topnumber}{3}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\topfraction}
% This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
% occupied by floats at the top (classically 0.7).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.85}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@bottomnumber}
% The \Lcount{bottomnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
% floats that can appear on the bottom of a text page (classically 1).
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bottomfraction}
% This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
% occupied by floats at the bottom (classically 0.3).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.5}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@totalnumber}
% This indicates the maximum number of floats that can appear on
% any text page (classically 3).
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textfraction}
% This indicates the minimum part of a text page that has to be
% occupied by text (classically 0.2).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\floatpagefraction}
% This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
% occupied by floating objects before a `float page' is
% produced (classically 0.5).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.7}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@dbltopnumber}
% The \Lcount{dbltopnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
% two column floats that can appear on the top of a two column text
% page (classically 2).
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{3}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
% This indicates the maximum part of a two column text page that
% can be occupied by two column floats at the top (classically 0.7).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{.85}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
% This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
% occupied by two column wide floating objects before a `float
% page' is produced (classically 0.5).
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\dblfloatpagefraction}{.7}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Page Styles}
%
% The page style \pstyle{foo} is defined by defining the command
% \cs{ps@foo}. This command should make only local definitions.
% There should be no stray spaces in the definition, since they
% could lead to mysterious extra spaces in the output.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@evenhead}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddhead}
% \begin{macro}{\@evenfoot}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddfoot}
% The \cs{ps@...} command defines the macros \cs{@oddhead},
% \cs{@oddfoot}, \cs{@evenhead}, and \cs{@evenfoot} to define the running
% heads and feet---e.g., \cs{@oddhead} is the macro to produce the
% contents of the heading box for odd-numbered pages. It is called
% inside an \cs{hbox} of width \cs{textwidth}.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Marking conventions}
%
% To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page
% style defines the commands \cs{chaptermark}, \cs{sectionmark},
% \ldots,\\
% where \cs{chaptermark}\marg{TEXT} is called by
% \cs{chapter} to set a mark, and so on.
%
% The \cs{...mark} commands and the \cs{...head} macros are defined
% with the help of the following macros. (All the \cs{...mark}
% commands should be initialized to no-ops.)
%
% \LaTeX{} extends \TeX's \cs{mark} facility by producing two kinds
% of marks, a `left' and a `right' mark, using the following
% commands:
% \begin{flushleft}
% \cs{markboth}\marg{LEFT}\marg{RIGHT}: Adds both marks.
%
% \cs{markright}\marg{RIGHT}: Adds a `right' mark.
%
% \cs{leftmark}: Used in the \cs{@oddhead}, \cs{@oddfoot}, \cs{@evenhead}
% or \cs{@evenfoot} macros, it gets the current `left'
% mark. \cs{leftmark} works like \TeX's \cs{botmark}
% command.
%
% \cs{rightmark}: Used in the \cs{@oddhead}, \cs{@oddfoot}, \cs{@evenhead}
% or \cs{@evenfoot} macros, it gets the current
% `right' mark. \cs{rightmark} works like \TeX's
% \cs{firstmark} command.
% \end{flushleft}
%
% The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks
% `numbered within' left marks--e.g., the left mark is changed by a
% \cs{chapter} command and the right mark is changed by a \cs{section}
% command. However, it does produce somewhat anomalous results if
% two \cs{markboth}'s occur on the same page.
%
%
% Commands like \cs{tableofcontents} that should set the marks in some
% page styles use a \cs{@mkboth} command, which is \cs{let} by the
% pagestyle command (\cs{ps@...}) to \cs{markboth} for setting the
% heading or to \cs{@gobbletwo} to do nothing.
%
%
%
% \subsection{Defining the page styles}
%
% This class provides a set of commands for the user to define new
% pagestyles. Essentially defining a pagestyle consists of defining the
% macros \cs{@evenhead}, \cs{@oddhead}, \cs{@evenfoot}, and \cs{@oddfoot}.
% For this class, each header and footer is treated as three parts: a left,
% center, and right part. In this case, defining a pagestyle consists of
% specifying these 12 portions of the running headers and footers. The
% width of the headers/footers may also be specified, rules may be drawn
% below the headers and/or above the footers, and the complete header and/or
% footer may be offset with respect to the textblock when the width is not
% the same as the textwidth.
%
% In the following \meta{style} is the name of a pagestyle being defined
% (e.g., \verb?ruled?).
%
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added the following three macros}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@set@ps@xtra@info}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@ps@find@real}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@ps@safe@change}
% The class supports an aliasing feature, where a page style name can
% actually call the code from another. Quite handy. But There might be
% problems if a use try to modify an alias page style. We care for
% this by storing some information about each page style, and throwing
% an error if the user atempts to alter a page style marked as an
% alias.
%
% \verb?\mem@set@ps@xtra@info? store two things: the name of the style
% we are an alias for (if we are not an alias it will be blank) and an
% indicator whether we are an alias (00 if we are and 01 if we are not).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@set@ps@xtra@info[3]{%
\@namedef{ps@#1@aliasfor}{#2}%
\@namedef{ps@#1@isalias}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \verb?\mem@ps@find@real? starts at a given page style, if it is
% marked as an alias, it will recursively go down the chain of aliases
% and save the name of the first real page style in \verb?\@tempa?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@ps@find@real[1]{%
\if\@nameuse{ps@#1@isalias}\relax
\mem@ps@find@real{\@nameuse{ps@#1@aliasfor}}
\else\def\@tempa{#1}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \verb?\mem@ps@safe@change? takes a page style name, checks to see if
% it is defined, if it is, it checks to see if it is safe to change it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@ps@safe@change[1]{%
\@ifundefined{ps@#1}{%
\@memerror{Undefined pagestyle '#1', so I cannot change it}{}}{}
\if\@nameuse{ps@#1@isalias}\relax \mem@ps@find@real{#1}
\@memerror{The pagestyle '#1' is marked as an alias page style.^^J
Modifying an alias page style may give unexpected results.^^J The
alias chain resolves to the real page style '\@tempa', so try
issuing^^J \string\copypagestyle{#1}{\@tempa}^^J before before
modifying '#1'}{} \fi }
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeevenhead}
% The command
% \cs{makeevenhead}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right}
% specifies that the left, center and right portions of the even header for
% pagestyle \meta{style} are defined as the other three arguments, respectiveley.
% Internally it defines the commands \cs{styleeheadl}, \cs{styleeheadc} and
% \cs{styleeheadr} to be \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} respectively.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeevenhead}[4]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}
\@namedef{#1eheadl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1eheadc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1eheadr}{#4}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeoddhead}
% \begin{macro}{\makeevenfoot}
% \begin{macro}{\makeoddfoot}
% These three macros are similar to \cs{makeevenhead} except that they are
% for the oddhead, evenfoot and oddfoot.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeoddhead}[4]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}
\@namedef{#1oheadl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1oheadc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1oheadr}{#4}
}
\newcommand{\makeevenfoot}[4]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}
\@namedef{#1efootl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1efootc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1efootr}{#4}
}
\newcommand{\makeoddfoot}[4]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}
\@namedef{#1ofootl}{#2}
\@namedef{#1ofootc}{#3}
\@namedef{#1ofootr}{#4}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makerunningwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\makerunningheadwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\makerunningfootwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mhfstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mopthfwidth}
% The macro \cs{makerunningwidth}\marg{style}\oarg{ftlength}\marg{length}
% sets the
% width of the headers and footers of pagestyle \meta{style} to
% be \meta{length}, but if \meta{ftlength} is present the footer
% width is set to \meta{ftlength}. The lengths are stored as the
% macros \cs{styleheadrunwidth} and \cs{stylefootrunwidth}. The two
% widths can be set individually using
% \cs{makerunningheadwidth}\marg{style}\marg{length} and
% \cs{makerunningfootwidth}\marg{style}\marg{length}.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Enabled the width of headers and footers
% to be different
% (requested by Wilhelm M\"{u}ller).}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/13}{Added \cs{makerunningheadwidth}
% and \cs{makerunningfootwidth}}.
% \changes{v1.6180339d}{2009/02/04}{Fixed a mental bug, /daleif}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\makerunningwidth}[1]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
\def\m@mhfstyle{#1}%
\m@mopthfwidth}
\newcommand*{\m@mopthfwidth}[2][\@mpty]{%
% \setlength\@tempdima{#2}
\@namedef{\m@mhfstyle headrunwidth}{#2}%
% \expandafter\edef\csname \m@mhfstyle headrunwidth\endcsname{\the\@tempdima}
\ifx\@mpty #1
\@namedef{\m@mhfstyle footrunwidth}{#2}%
% \expandafter\edef\csname \m@mhfstyle footrunwidth\endcsname{\the\@tempdima}
\else
\@namedef{\m@mhfstyle footrunwidth}{#1}%
% \setlength\@tempdima{#1}
% \expandafter\edef\csname \m@mhfstyle footrunwidth\endcsname{\the\@tempdima}
\fi}
\newcommand*{\makerunningheadwidth}[2]{%
% \setlength\@tempdima{#2}%
% \expandafter\edef\csname \m@mhfstyle headrunwidth\endcsname{\the\@tempdima}%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
\@namedef{#1headrunwidth}{#2}%
}
\newcommand*{\makerunningfootwidth}[2]{%
% \setlength\@tempdima{#2}%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
\@namedef{#1footrunwidth}{#2}%
% \expandafter\edef\csname \m@mhfstyle footrunwidth\endcsname{\the\@tempdima}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalrulethickness}
% \begin{macro}{\footruleheight}
% \begin{macro}{\footruleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadrule}
% \begin{macro}{\makefootrule}
% \cs{normalrulethickness} is the thickness of a normal horizontal
% or vertical rule.
% \cs{footruleheight} is the height of a normal rule above a footer (actually zero).
% \cs{footruleskip} is a distance sufficient to ensure that a foot rule
% will appear between the bottom of the textblock and above any actual footer.
%
% (There was a \ctt{} thread \textit{ngerman, fancyhdr and \cs{footrulewidth} --- bug?}
% in December 2002 that bears on the definitions below).
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Make \cs{normalrulethickness} a length,
% not a macro (patch 1.1)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Initialise \cs{footruleheight} to 0pt, not
% \cs{z@skip} (patch 1.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\normalrulethickness}
\setlength{\normalrulethickness}{0.4pt}
\newcommand{\footruleheight}{0pt}
\newcommand{\footruleskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% The macro \cs{makeheadrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{height}
% specifies the width and height of the header rule for \meta{style}.
%
% Similarly
% \cs{makefootrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{height}\marg{skip}
% specifies the width, height and skip for the footrule.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeheadrule}[3]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
\@namedef{#1headrule}{%
\@nameuse{#1headruleprefix}\hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip-#3}}
\newcommand{\makefootrule}[4]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
\@namedef{#1footrule}{%
\vskip-#4\vskip-#3%
\@nameuse{#1footruleprefix}\hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip #4}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/25}{Added this macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadfootruleprefix}
% We insert a maro at the start of the head and foot rule. By default
% it does nothing, but it can be ised to specify a different color to
% the head or foot rules.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\makeheadfootruleprefix[3]{%
\@namedef{#1headruleprefix}{#2}%
\@namedef{#1footruleprefix}{#3}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadposition}
% \cs{makeheadposition}\marg{style}\marg{eheadpos}\marg{oheadpos}\marg{efootpos}\marg{ofootpos}
% specifies the horizontal positioning of the even and odd headers and footers,
% respectively,
% for the pagestyle \meta{style}. Each of the \meta{...pos} arguments may be
% either \verb?flushleft?, \verb?center? or \verb?flushright?, with the obvious meanings.
% An empty argument (or an unrecognised one) is equivalent to \verb?center?.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeheadposition}[5]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the even head position first.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{flushleft}{#2}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#2}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% And similarly for the odd head and even \& odd footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{flushleft}{#3}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#3}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi
\nametest{flushleft}{#4}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#4}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi
\nametest{flushleft}{#5}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
\else
\nametest{flushright}{#5}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\relax}
\else
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makepsmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\makepshook}
% The macro \cs{makepsmarks}\marg{style}\marg{code} specifies that
% \meta{code} is the definition of the hook for pagestyle \meta{style}.
% \cs{makepshook} was a deprecated version of \cs{makepsmarks} and is
% now deleted.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{makepsmarks} and deprecated
% \cs{makepshook}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/14}{Deleted \cs{makepshook}}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makepsmarks}[2]{\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}\@namedef{#1pshook}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mhe@dreset}
% To cater for potential baselineskip changes, such as \verb?\linespread{2}?,
% we have to ensure they don't percolate into the header/footer.
% (See CTT thread \textit{memoir + linespread}, 2004/02/11)
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{m@mhe@dreset}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mhe@dreset}{\def\baselinestretch{1}\normalsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadfootvposition}
% The headers and footers are typeset inside \cs{parbox}'es, using
% \cs{makeheadfootvposition}\marg{style}\marg{headvpos}\marg{footvpost}
% users can specify whether the alignment should be b,t or~c.The
% default is~b.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/13}{Added support for
% controlling the alignment of the headers and footers}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\makeheadfootvposition[3]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
\@namedef{#1headvplacement}{#2}\@namedef{#1footvplacement}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@maxheadheight}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@maxfootheight}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@sayonce@head}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@sayonce@foot}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@hf@measure@vbox}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@toolarge@header@message}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@toolarge@footer@message}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/21}{Added the above seven macros to be able
% to measure the headers and warn users if their design takes them outside.}
% \verb?\mem@maxheadheight? and \verb?\mem@maxfootheight? globally
% stores the max measured head and foot heights. Actually the footer
% ought to be measuring the total height and depth. We may add this
% later. The two XsayonceX macros are toggles used such that we can
% add a warning at only the first bad head/foot. We repeat the message
% at the end of the document.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\mem@maxheadheight
\newlength\mem@maxfootheight
\newcommand\mem@sayonce@head{00}
\newcommand\mem@sayonce@foot{00}
% \end{macrocode}
% This is the work horse of this construction. First argument is the
% height to compare against, second should be \texttt{head} or
% \texttt{foot}, third is the warning message, and the fourth is the
% material to be measured. The idea to taken from \Lpack{fancyhdr}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@hf@measure@vbox[4]{%
\setbox0\vbox{#4}%
\ifdim\ht0>#1\relax%
\setlength\@tempdima{\@nameuse{mem@max#2height}}%
\ifdim\ht0>\@tempdima\relax%
\expandafter\global\@nameuse{mem@max#2height}=\ht0%
\expandafter\if\@nameuse{mem@sayonce@#2}\relax%
\@memwarn{#3}%
\global\@namedef{mem@sayonece@#2}{01}%
\fi%
\fi%
\fi%
\box0%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Warning messages
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@toolarge@header@message{%
The material used in the headers is too large^^J%
(\the\mem@maxheadheight) for the given head height
(\the\headheight), it is recommended to^^J%
either increase the head height or redesign the header^^J%
(in both cases you will find help in the memoir manual).%
}
\newcommand\mem@toolarge@footer@message{%
The material used in the footer is too large^^J%
(\the\mem@maxfootheight) for the given foot skip
(\the\footskip), it is recommended to^^J%
either increase the foot skip or redesign the fotoer^^J%
(in both cases you will find help in the memoir manual).%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% To make things easier to read we make two short cut macros
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@hvboxm[1]{%
\mem@hf@measure@vbox\headheight{head}\mem@toolarge@header@message{#1}}
\newcommand\mem@fvboxm[1]{%
\mem@hf@measure@vbox\footskip{foot}\mem@toolarge@footer@message{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Make sure to repeat the message at the end of the document. This
% will show the max value up until the point where the end of document
% stuff is executed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{
\ifdim\mem@maxheadheight>\headheight
\@memwarn{\mem@toolarge@header@message}
\fi
\ifdim\mem@maxfootheight>\footskip
\@memwarn{\mem@toolarge@footer@message}
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@ps@entry@wrap}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/06}{Added this to help bidi control the
% typesetting direction of the header and footer}
% This macro is wrapped around eash entry in the headers and
% footers. By default it does nothing, but can be redefined by
% packages such as \Lpack{bidi} to control the typesetting direction
% in the header. Bidi for example has two modes such that headers
% can be RTL locally while the header stay at LTR. If this macro is
% changed, it will be a good idea to coordinate it with the bidi
% maintainer.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@ps@entry@wrap{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@ps@HLH}
% \changes{v3.6d}{201010/06/24}{Factored \cs{makepagestyle}}
% The entries in the header used in \cs{makepagestyle} (below) are
% more or less the same. It depends on \emph{head/foot},
% \emph{odd/even} and a shorter \emph{o/e}. So to make the code more
% maintainable we factor this out into a generator macro. The
% explanation for the code being used is kept below (see
% \cs{makepagestyle}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@ps@HLH[4]{%
% #1 ps name
% #2 type: head, foot
% #3 odd/even
% #4 odd/even short (o,e)
\@namedef{#1@#3#2}{%
\@nameuse{#1#3hpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1#2runwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
% \end{macrocode}
% In footers the line goes before the text, so we test and add the
% footline if \texttt{\#2} equals \texttt{foot}.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/06}{added the entry wrapper}
% \changes{v3.6h}{201010/10/21}{Added the header/footer measuring feature.}
% For the header/footer measuring stuff we look at \#2 and make the
% suiting macro from that value.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/22}{Added \cs{memRTLmainraggedX} macros such
% that \Lpack{bidi} can also change the order of the header if RTL is
% the main direction of the document.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{#2}{head}\ifsamename\let\mem@hfboxer\mem@hvboxm\else\let\mem@hfboxer\mem@fvboxm\fi%
\mem@hfboxer{\nametest{#2}{foot}\ifsamename\@nameuse{#1#2rule}\fi%
\hbox{%
\rlap{%
\parbox[\@nameuse{#1#2vplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1#2runwidth}}{%
\memRTLmainraggedright\@nameuse{#1ps#2strut}%
\mem@ps@entry@wrap{\@nameuse{#1#4#2l}}%
\@nameuse{#1ps#2strut}}}\hfill
\parbox[\@nameuse{#1#2vplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1#2runwidth}}{%
\centering\@nameuse{#1ps#2strut}%
\mem@ps@entry@wrap{\@nameuse{#1#4#2c}}%
\@nameuse{#1ps#2strut}}\hfill
\llap{%
\parbox[\@nameuse{#1#2vplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1#2runwidth}}{%
\memRTLmainraggedleft\@nameuse{#1ps#2strut}%
\mem@ps@entry@wrap{\@nameuse{#1#4#2r}}%
\@nameuse{#1ps#2strut}}}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% In the header the line goes under the text, so we test and add the
% headline if \texttt{\#2} equals \texttt{head}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{#2}{head}\ifsamename\@nameuse{#1#2rule}\fi%
}}\@nameuse{#1#3hpr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% And end by letting the LaTeX head/foot use our version
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{@#3#2}{\@nameuse{#1@#3#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makepagestyle}
% At last we can put everything together for defining a new pagestyle,
% via the macro \cs{makepagestyle}\marg{style} which initially sets up
% a new pagestyle \meta{style} corresponding the the \LaTeX{} \verb?empty?
% pagestyle. The prior macros can then be used to make modifications
% to the style.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Now 2 stage process for defining \cs{@evenhead}
% and friends}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{m@mhe@dreset} at several points in
% \cs{makepagestyle} (from patch 2.1)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Removed extraneous spaces from pagestyle code
% (mempatch v4.6)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added storing extra information
% about page styles}
% We also make sure to specify that this is a `real' page style, and
% thus sets the empty alias name and the alias test to 01.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makepagestyle}[1]{%
\mem@set@ps@xtra@info{#1}{}{01}%
% \end{macrocode}
% First define the macro \cs{ps@style}, which in turn defines the macros
% \cs{@evenhead}, \cs{@oddhead}, \cs{@evenfoot} and \cs{@oddfoot}.
% \changes{v3.6d}{20101/06/24}{Factored \cs{makepagestyle}, such
% that \cs{#1@evenhead} and friends are made using \emph{one} single
% macro. We keep the original code just in case.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ps@#1}{%
\mem@ps@HLH{#1}{head}{even}{e}%
\mem@ps@HLH{#1}{head}{odd}{o}%
\mem@ps@HLH{#1}{foot}{even}{e}%
\mem@ps@HLH{#1}{foot}{odd}{o}%
% \@namedef{#1@evenhead}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The code for the definition of \cs{@evenhead} and friends is based on code
% from Piet van Oostrum's \Lpack{fancyhdr} package~\cite{FANCYHDR}. The three
% parts of the header are put into parboxes, with fills between them, and
% the whole lot is put into a box the width of the header. Fillers are put
% before and after the main box which control the header position.
%
% First the left filler which is either \cs{relax} or \cs{hss}, and then
% start the main box.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Replaced \cs{...runwidth} by \cs{...headrunwidth}
% or \cs{...footrunwidth}, as appropriate for headers and footers.}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/13}{Replaced \cs{parbox}\texttt[b]
% with \cs{parbox}\texttt{[\cs{nameuse{#1headvplacement}}]} etc.}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \@nameuse{#1evenhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
% \vbox{\hbox{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The left part of the header.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \rlap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1headvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedright\@nameuse{#1eheadl}\strut}}\hfill
% \end{macrocode}
% The center part of the header.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \parbox[\@nameuse{#1headvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}}{%
% \centering\@nameuse{#1eheadc}\strut}\hfill
% \end{macrocode}
% The right part of the header.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \llap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1headvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1eheadr}\strut}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, the header rule and finish with the right filler, which
% is either \cs{relax} or \cs{hss}.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1evenhpr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The code for the \cs{@oddhead}, \cs{@evenfoot} and \cs{@oddfoot} follows
% a similar pattern. Here is \cs{@oddhead}.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \@namedef{#1@oddhead}{%
% \@nameuse{#1oddhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
% \vbox{\hbox{%
% \rlap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1headvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedright\@nameuse{#1oheadl}\strut}}\hfill
% \parbox[\@nameuse{#1headvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}}{%
% \centering\@nameuse{#1oheadc}\strut}\hfill
% \llap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1headvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1headrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1oheadr}\strut}}}%
% \@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1oddhpr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% And \cs{@evenfoot}. For the footers the rules come \emph{before} any foot
% entries.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \@namedef{#1@evenfoot}{%
% \@nameuse{#1evenfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
% \vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
% \rlap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1footvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedright\@nameuse{#1efootl}\strut}}\hfill
% \parbox[\@nameuse{#1footvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}}{%
% \centering\@nameuse{#1efootc}\strut}\hfill
% \llap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1footvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1efootr}\strut}}}%
% }}\@nameuse{#1evenfpr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Lastly the \cs{@oddfoot}.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \@namedef{#1@oddfoot}{%
% \@nameuse{#1oddfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}{\m@mhe@dreset%
% \vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
% \rlap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1footvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedright\@nameuse{#1ofootl}\strut}}\hfill
% \parbox[\@nameuse{#1footvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}}{%
% \centering\@nameuse{#1ofootc}\strut}\hfill
% \llap{\parbox[\@nameuse{#1footvplacement}]{\@nameuse{#1footrunwidth}}{%
% \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1ofootr}\strut}}}%
% }}\@nameuse{#1oddfpr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we define \cs{@evenhead} etc., in terms of \verb?#1@evenhead?.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \def\@evenhead{\@nameuse{#1@evenhead}}%
% \def\@oddhead{\@nameuse{#1@oddhead}}%
% \def\@evenfoot{\@nameuse{#1@evenfoot}}%
% \def\@oddfoot{\@nameuse{#1@oddfoot}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% To finish off the definition of \cs{ps@style}, add in a hook which can be
% defined so that it adds additional code, if required.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{#1pshook}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/06/24}{Added strut initialization} Next we
% initialize the struts being used. Remember the for the
% \pstyle{empty} style, the strut should be empty.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{#1}{empty}%
\ifsamename%
\@namedef{#1psheadstrut}{}\@namedef{#1psfootstrut}{}%
\else%
\@namedef{#1psheadstrut}{\strut}\@namedef{#1psfootstrut}{\strut}%
\fi%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The final part of setting up the new pagestyle
% is defining all the macros called by \cs{ps@style}, and giving them
% default values. Make the headers and footers empty.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenhead{#1}{}{}{}%
\makeoddhead{#1}{}{}{}%
\makeevenfoot{#1}{}{}{}%
\makeoddfoot{#1}{}{}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the headers/footers the same width as the \cs{textwidth},
% center them, and ensure that the rules have zero height so that they
% will be invisible. Also initialize the head/foot prefixes.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/25}{Added the \cs{makeheadfootruleprefix}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makerunningwidth{#1}{\textwidth}%
\makeheadposition{#1}{}{}{}{}%
\makeheadrule{#1}{\textwidth}{0pt}%
\makefootrule{#1}{\textwidth}{\footruleheight}{\footruleskip}%
\makeheadfootruleprefix{#1}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the initial vertical header and footer positions.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/13}{Added head/foot position initialisation}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadfootvposition{#1}{b}{b}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, there is no addtional code needed, so make the hook empty, and
% we are done.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepsmarks{#1}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\aliaspagestyle}
% The command \cs{aliaspagestyle}\marg{alias}\marg{original}
% defines the \meta{alias} pagestyle to be an alias for the
% \meta{original} pagestyle.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added page style storing info}
% We remember to set the stored alias name, and sets the alias test to
% true (00).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\aliaspagestyle}[2]{%
\mem@set@ps@xtra@info{#1}{#2}{00}%
\@namedef{ps@#1}{\@nameuse{ps@#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\copypagestyle}
% The command \cs{copypagestyle}\marg{new}\marg{original}
% defines the \meta{new} pagestyle to be a copy of the
% \meta{original} pagestyle.
%
% It first makes the \meta{new} (empty) pagestyle then defines the internals
% in terms of the \meta{original} internals.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{copypagestyle}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added missing elements to \cs{copypagestyle}
% (per Erik Quaeghebeur mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\copypagestyle}[2]{%
\makepagestyle{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the headers and footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2eheadl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2eheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2eheadr}}%
\makeoddhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2oheadl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2oheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2oheadr}}%
\makeevenfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2efootl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2efootc}}{\@nameuse{#2efootr}}%
\makeoddfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2ofootl}}%
{\@nameuse{#2ofootc}}{\@nameuse{#2ofootr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makerunningwidth{#1}[\@nameuse{#2footrunwidth}]{\@nameuse{#2headrunwidth}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify the \cs{headposition}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenhpl}}%
\@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddhpl}}%
\@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\@nameuse{#2evenhpr}}%
\@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\@nameuse{#2oddhpr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Also vertically
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/01/13}{Also copy the vertical positions}
% \changes{v1.6180339e}{2008/02/06}{Bug fix, reported by Per
% Starb\"ack on ctt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadfootvposition{#1}{\@nameuse{#2headvplacement}}{\@nameuse{#2footvplacement}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify the feet
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenfpl}}%
\@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddfpl}}%
\@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\@nameuse{#2evenfpr}}%
\@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\@nameuse{#2oddfpr}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify the head and foot rules and the prefixes.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/25}{Added the \cs{makeheadfootruleprefix}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1headrule}{\@nameuse{#2headrule}}%
\@namedef{#1footrule}{\@nameuse{#2footrule}}%
\@namedef{#1headruleprefix}{\@nameuse{#2headruleprefix}}%
\@namedef{#1footruleprefix}{\@nameuse{#2footruleprefix}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/06/24}{Added strut copying to \cs{copypagestyle}}
% And remember the struts
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1psheadstrut}{\@nameuse{#2psheadstrut}}
\@namedef{#1psfootstrut}{\@nameuse{#2psfootstrut}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% And pick up the hook. We end the macro here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepsmarks{#1}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonlyfloats}
% \cs{ifonlyfloats}\marg{yes}\marg{no} processes \meta{yes} if the macro is
% called on a page consisting only of floats, otherwise \meta{no} is
% processed. \cs{if@fcolmade} is specified in \file{ltoutput.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/14}{Added \cs{ifonlyfloats}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ifonlyfloats}[2]{\if@fcolmade #1\else #2\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mergepagefloatstyle}
% \cs{mergepagefloatstyle}\marg{style}\marg{textstyle}\marg{floatstyle}
% makes a new page style \meta{style} that is \meta{textstyle} on normal
% pages but uses \meta{floatstyle} on float-only pages. Both \meta{textstyle}
% and \meta{floatstyle} must have been previously defined.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{mergepagefloatstyle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mergepagefloatstyle}[3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Make sure that the two styles have been called, otherwise we get some
% undefined errors.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{ps@#3}\@nameuse{ps@#2}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify the pagestyle's headers and footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ps@#1}{%
\def\@evenhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenhead}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@evenhead}}}%
\def\@oddhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddhead}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@oddhead}}}%
\def\@evenfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenfoot}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@evenfoot}}}%
\def\@oddfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddfoot}}%
{\@nameuse{#2@oddfoot}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the hook to the \meta{textstyle} on the assumption that that is
% more complex that required for a float page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1pshook}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% That's it.
% \begin{macrocode}
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadfootstrut}
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/06/24}{Added \cs{makeheadfootstrut}}
% In each `field' of the header a strut is added to keep alignment
% right. This macro can be used to change a particular strut
% configuration. Each combination is initialy set by
% \cs{makepagestyle} to be equal to \cs{strut}, except the
% \pstyle{empty} style, where the strut is empty by default.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\makeheadfootstrut[3]{%
\@namedef{#1psheadstrut}{#2}\@namedef{#1psfootstrut}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The pagestyles \pstyle{empty} and \pstyle{plain} are defined
% in \file{latex.dtx}. However, I will redefine them here, just in
% case someone takes a fancy to modifying them.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@empty}
% The \pstyle{empty} pagestyle is simple, it's just what we get when
% we call \cs{makepagestyle}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
% The \pstyle{plain} pagestyle is also simple, it just puts the
% page number at the bottom middle of the page.
% We call \verb?\makepagestyle{plain}? and then adjust as required.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{plain}
\makeevenfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
\makeoddfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@simple}
% The \pstyle{simple} page style simply puts the page number in the header
% at the outer margin.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/26}{PW: Added the `simple' pagestyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{simple}
\makeevenhead{simple}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddhead{simple}{}{}{\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nouppercaseheads}
% \begin{macro}{\uppercaseheads}
% \begin{macro}{\memUChead}
% Spurred by Lars Madsen's \Lpack{memexsupp} v0.5 package here is a
% way of switching uppercasing in the headings pagestyle.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{(no)uppercaseheads} and
% \cs{memUChead} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\nouppercaseheads}{\let\memUChead\relax}
\newcommand*{\uppercaseheads}{\let\memUChead\MakeUppercase}
\uppercaseheads
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The macros \cs{createplainmark}, \cs{createmark} and \cs{addtopsmarks}
% are modified versions of code supplied by Lars Madsen.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added, and used, \cs{createplainmark},
% \cs{createmark} and \cs{addtopsmarks}}
% \begin{macro}{\createplainmark}
% \cs{createplainmark}\marg{type}\marg{marks}\marg{text} creates a
% \cs{typemark} (\meta{type} is \texttt{toc}, \texttt{bib}, etc)
% with \meta{marks} (left, both, right) whose contents are \meta{text}.
% For example \verb?\createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}?. The
% difference between plain and regular marks, is that plain marks use
% a fixed text, whereas regular marks recieve dynamic text and thus
% is given an argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\createplainmark}[3]{%
\nametest{#2}{left}%
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1mark}{\markboth{\memUChead{#3}}{}}%
\else
\nametest{#2}{right}%
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1mark}{\markright{\memUChead{#3}}}%
\else
\nametest{#2}{both}%
\ifsamename\else
\@memerror{%
Unknown mark setting type `#2' for #1mark}{%
I expected `left', `both' or `right'. \MessageBreak
I will assume you meant `both'}%
\fi
\@namedef{#1mark}{\markboth{\memUChead{#3}}{\memUChead{#3}}}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\createmark}
% \cs{createmark}\marg{division}\marg{marks}\marg{show}\marg{prefix}\marg{postfix}
% creates a \cs{divisionmark} with \meta{marks} (= \texttt{left}, \texttt{both}
% or \texttt{right}) controlling which marks are set,
% \meta{show} (= \texttt{shownumber} or \texttt{nonumber}) controls the
% display of the divison number in \cs{mainmatter}, \meta{prefix} is text
% before the number and \meta{postfix} is text after the number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\createmark[5]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Handle \texttt{(show/no)number}, fails to \texttt{shownumber}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tempa{00}
\nametest{#3}{nonumber}%
\ifsamename
\def\@tempa{01}%
\else
\nametest{#3}{shownumber}
\ifsamename\else
\@memerror{Unknown numbering value `#3' for #1mark}%
{I expected `shownumber' or `nonumber'.\MessageBreak
I will assume you meant `shownumber'}%
\fi
\fi
\expandafter\if\@tempa% compares the two \@tempa digits
\@namedef{#1marksn}##1{##1}%
\else
\@namedef{#1marksn}{\@gobble}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% The three \meta{marks} cases, \texttt{left}, \texttt{both} and
% \texttt{right}; fails to \texttt{both}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\nametest{#2}{left}%
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1mark}##1{%
\@setclcnt{#1}{@memmarkcntra}%
\advance\c@@memmarkcntra\m@ne
\markboth{%
\memUChead{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \c@@memmarkcntra
\if@mainmatter
\@nameuse{#1marksn}{#4\@nameuse{the#1}#5}%
\fi
\fi
##1}}{}}%
\else
\nametest{#2}{right}
\ifsamename
\@namedef{#1mark}##1{%
\@setclcnt{#1}{@memmarkcntra}
\advance\c@@memmarkcntra\m@ne
\markright{%
\memUChead{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \c@@memmarkcntra
\if@mainmatter%
\@nameuse{#1marksn}{#4\@nameuse{the#1}#5}%
\fi%
\fi%
##1}}}%
\else
\nametest{#2}{both}%
\ifsamename\else
\@memerror{%
Unknown mark setting type `#2' for #1mark}{%
I expected `left', `both' or `right'. \MessageBreak
I will assume you meant `both'}%
\fi
\@namedef{#1mark}##1{%
\@setclcnt{#1}{@memmarkcntra}
\advance\c@@memmarkcntra\m@ne
\markboth{%
\memUChead{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \c@@memmarkcntra
\if@mainmatter
\@nameuse{#1marksn}{#4\@nameuse{the#1}#5}%
\fi
\fi
##1}}{%
\memUChead{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \c@@memmarkcntra
\if@mainmatter
\@nameuse{#1marksn}{#4\@nameuse{the#1}#5}%
\fi
\fi
##1}}}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtopsmarks}
% \cs{addtopsmarks}\marg{pagestyle}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} inserts
% \meta{prepend} and \meta{append} at the start and end of the current
% definition of \cs{pagestylepshook}.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/09}{Added safe to change test}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\addtopsmarks[3]{%
\mem@ps@safe@change{#1}%
\expandafter\addtodef\expandafter{\csname #1pshook\endcsname}{#2}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\clearplainmark}
% \begin{macro}{\clearmark}
% For some page styles it is handy to be able to make sure that no
% section or otherwise add data to the \cs{left-} and
% \cs{rightmark}. The macros \cs{clearplainmark} and \cs{clearmark}
% will take one argument specifying which mark to clear, and then
% redefine this mark to do nothing or to gobble its given argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\clearplainmark[1]{%
\@namedef{#1mark}{}}
\newcommand\clearmark[1]{%
\@namedef{#1mark}{\@gobble}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
% The \pstyle{headings} pagestyle behaves differently for
% twosided and onesided printing. This is a rewrite of the
% standard style.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@headings}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Used \cs{memUChead} in \cs{ps@headings}
% (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{For twosided docs set both marks for ToC, etc. (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Eliminated \cs{@mkboth} as never used
% (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{glossarymark} to \cs{ps@headings}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
% \end{macrocode}
% The footer is empty and the header contains the page number and
% one of the marks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{headings}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
\def\chaptermark##1{%
\markboth{\memUChead{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
\fi
\fi
##1}}{}}%
\def\tocmark{\markboth{\memUChead{\contentsname}}{\memUChead{\contentsname}}}%
\def\lofmark{\markboth{\memUChead{\listfigurename}}{\memUChead{\listfigurename}}}%
\def\lotmark{\markboth{\memUChead{\listtablename}}{\memUChead{\listtablename}}}%
\def\bibmark{\markboth{\memUChead{\bibname}}{\memUChead{\bibname}}}%
\def\indexmark{\markboth{\memUChead{\indexname}}{\memUChead{\indexname}}}%
\def\sectionmark##1{%
\markright{\memUChead{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \z@
\thesection. \ %
\fi
##1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% And here's a version of the above \cs{makepsmarks} using \cs{createmark} and
% \cs{createplainmark}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
\createmark{chapter}{left}{shownumber}{\@chapapp\ }{. \ }
\createmark{section}{right}{shownumber}{}{. \ }
\createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}
\createplainmark{lof}{both}{\listfigurename}
\createplainmark{lot}{both}{\listtablename}
\createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
\createplainmark{index}{both}{\indexname}
\createplainmark{glossary}{both}{\glossaryname}
}
\makeevenhead{headings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% For one sided printing even and odd pages are treated the same,
% so no need to bother with the evenhead, and
% just the \cs{rightmark} is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{headings}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
\def\chaptermark##1{%
\markright{\memUChead{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
\fi
\fi
##1}}}%
\def\tocmark{\markright{\memUChead{\contentsname}}}%
\def\lofmark{\markright{\memUChead{\listfigurename}}}%
\def\lotmark{\markright{\memUChead{\listtablename}}}%
\def\bibmark{\markright{\memUChead{\bibname}}}%
\def\indexmark{\markright{\memUChead{\indexname}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% And here's a version of the above \cs{makepsmarks} using \cs{createmark} and
% \cs{createplainmark}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepsmarks{headings}{%
\createmark{chapter}{right}{shownumber}{\@chapapp\ }{. \ }
\createplainmark{toc}{right}{\contentsname}
\createplainmark{lof}{right}{\listfigurename}
\createplainmark{lot}{right}{\listtablename}
\createplainmark{bib}{right}{\bibname}
\createplainmark{index}{right}{\indexname}
\createplainmark{glossary}{right}{\glossaryname}
}
\makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
% The \pstyle{myheadings} page style is simpler because the user
% has to specify the contents using \cs{markboth} and \cs{markright}
% commands. This is the definition used in the standard classes.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@myheadings}}
% \begin{verbatim}}
% \newcommand{\ps@myheadings}{%
% \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
% \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark}}%
% \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
% \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
% \let\chaptermark\@gobble
% \let\sectionmark\@gobble
% }
% \end{verbatim}
% Translating that into our terms we get:
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Changed the code for creating the myheadings pagestyle}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Further change to myheadings pagestyle code}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{myheadings}
\makepsmarks{myheadings}{%
\let\chaptermark\@gobble
\let\sectionmark\@gobble
\def\tocmark{}%
\def\lofmark{}%
\def\lotmark{}%
\def\bibmark{}%
\def\indexmark{}%
\def\glossarymark{}}
\makeevenhead{myheadings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{myheadings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% (Kai von Fintel (\texttt{fintel@mit.edu}) emailed me on 2003/02/24
% saying that the original \verb?\let\tocmark\@gobble? in the myheadings
% pagestyle did nasty things
% to the ToC, etc. Now using \verb?\def\tocmark{}?.)
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@part}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@cleared}
% The standard classes use the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle for the first page
% of a chapter. This class uses the \pstyle{chapter} instead, which is
% aliased to \pstyle{plain}. Similarly for parts.
% Further, \cs{cleardoublepage} uses whatever
% pagestyle is in effect for the empty verso page. I find that this
% looks odd if the header contains a chapter name. This class uses
% the \pstyle{cleared} pagestyle in this case. I have aliased this
% to \pstyle{empty}; the \pstyle{plain} would be another reasonable choice.
% \begin{macrocode}
\aliaspagestyle{chapter}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{part}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{cleared}{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
% A slight adjustment to the kernel definition to set a pagestyle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@ruled}
% Partly to show how it is done, the class provides a \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
% In this style the headers and footers are the same width as the textblock,
% there is a rule under the header, page numbers are set in the footers
% at the outside of the page. Even page headers have the chapter number
% and title at the left, and odd page headers have the section title
% at the right.
%
% Start by making the (empty) \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{ruled}
% \end{macrocode}
% There is no need to change the default width (which is the \cs{textwidth}),
% nor the default positions (centered),
% nor to make the footrule visible. We do, though, have to put the page
% numbers into the footers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenfoot{ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the header rule visible and equal to the \cs{textwidth}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadrule{ruled}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ruledmarks}
% We have to make sure that the \cs{chapter} and \cs{section} commands make
% the appropriate marks for use in the headers. We use the hook for this.
% Note that contrary to normal \LaTeX{} practice, the titles are not
% automatically upper-cased. The marks for the tocbibinds also need adjusting.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@ruledmarks} to cater for tocbibind}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@ruledmarks}{%
\def\chaptermark##1{%
\markboth{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\thechapter. \ %
\fi
\fi
##1}{}}
\def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}
\def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{}}
\def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{}}
\def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{}}
\def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{}}
\def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{}}
\def\glossarymark{\markboth{\glossaryname}{}}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% And here's a version using \cs{createmark} and friends.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\@ruledmarks}{%
\nouppercaseheads
\createmark{chapter}{left}{shownumber}{}{. \space}
\createmark{section}{right}{shownumber}{}{. \space}
\createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}
\createplainmark{lof}{both}{\listfigurename}
\createplainmark{lot}{both}{\listtablename}
\createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
\createplainmark{index}{both}{\indexname}
\createplainmark{glossary}{both}{\glossaryname}}
\makepsmarks{ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We can now define the even page header which is to have the chapter title
% at the left. As the chapter mark did no upper-casing we will print it
% using small caps, but just use the normal font for section title on
% the odd page header.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenhead{ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
\makeoddhead{ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% This is all that we need to do for the \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@Ruled}
% Also define a \pstyle{Ruled} pagestyle similar to \pstyle{ruled} except that the
% headers and footers are 10\% wider than the textblock, sticking out
% into the fore edge.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{Ruled}
\makerunningwidth{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}
\makeheadposition{Ruled}{flushright}{flushleft}{flushright}{flushleft}
\makeevenfoot{Ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{Ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
\makeheadrule{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makepsmarks{Ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
\makeevenhead{Ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
\makeoddhead{Ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@companion}
% A \pstyle{companion} pagestyle like the one in the
% \textit{\LaTeX{} Companion} series.
% We need the \cs{headwidth} length for this.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@companion}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\headwidth}
\makepagestyle{companion}
\setlength{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
\addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparsep}
\addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparwidth}
\makerunningwidth{companion}{\headwidth}
\makeheadrule{companion}{\headwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makeheadposition{companion}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
\makepsmarks{companion}{%
\def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}} % left mark & right marks
\def\sectionmark##1{\markright{%
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth>\z@
\thesection. \ %
\fi
##1}}
\def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}}
\def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{\listfigurename}}
\def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{\listtablename}}
\def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{\bibname}}
\def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% And here's a version of the above \cs{makepsmarks} using \cs{createmark} and
% \cs{createplainmark}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepsmarks{companion}{%
\nouppercaseheads
\createmark{chapter}{both}{nonumber}{}{}
\createmark{section}{right}{shownumber}{}{. \space}
\createplainmark{toc}{both}{\contentsname}
\createplainmark{lof}{both}{\listfigurename}
\createplainmark{lot}{both}{\listtablename}
\createplainmark{bib}{both}{\bibname}
\createplainmark{index}{both}{\indexname}
\createplainmark{glossary}{both}{\glossaryname}}
\makeevenhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}{}%
{\normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}{}%
{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Another pagestyle called \pstyle{showlocs} can be used to show the
% locations of the header, footer and textblock. I would expect that
% this would be mainly used as an example for authors to create their
% own similar styles.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/28}{Added the showlocs pagestyle and supporting
% macros}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/25}{Added more supporting macros for the
% showlocs pagestyle}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowheadfootloc}
% \begin{macro}{\showheadfootloctrue}
% \begin{macro}{\showheadfootlocfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\showheadfootlocon}
% \begin{macro}{\showheadfootlocoff}
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowtextblockloc}
% \begin{macro}{\showtextblockloctrue}
% \begin{macro}{\showtextblocklocfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\showtextblocklocon}
% \begin{macro}{\showtextblocklocoff}
% Booleans controlling the appearance, or not, of the header/footer lines
% and text frame in \pstyle{showlocs}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifshowheadfootloc
\showheadfootloctrue
\newcommand*{\showheadfootlocon}{\showheadfootloctrue}
\newcommand*{\showheadfootlocoff}{\showheadfootlocfalse}
\newif\ifshowtextblockloc
\showtextblockloctrue
\newcommand*{\showtextblocklocon}{\showtextblockloctrue}
\newcommand*{\showtextblocklocoff}{\showtextblocklocfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\framepichead}
% For producing a zero-sized picture of a line at the base of the header.
% It is meant to be used as the left part of the header for a pagestyle.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/28}{Added \cs{framepichead}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\framepichead}{%
\ifshowheadfootloc
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1pt
\put(0,0){\line(1,0){\strip@pt\textwidth}}
\end{picture}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\framepictextfoot}
% For producing a zero-sized picture of a line at the base of the footer
% and a frame around the text block. It is meant to be used as the left
% part of a footer for a pagestyle.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/28}{Added \cs{framepictextfoot}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\framepictextfoot}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1pt
\ifshowheadfootloc
\put(0,0){\line(1,0){\strip@pt\textwidth}}
\fi
\ifshowtextblockloc
\put(0,\strip@pt\footskip)%
{\framebox(\strip@pt\textwidth,\strip@pt\textheight){}}
\fi
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@showlocs}
% The \pstyle{showlocs} pagestyle. This is more to show what can be done.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/28}{Added the showlocs pagestyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{showlocs}
\makeevenhead{showlocs}{\framepichead\thepage}{\thepage}{\thepage}
\makeoddhead{showlocs}{\framepichead\thepage}{\thepage}{\thepage}
\makeevenfoot{showlocs}{\framepictextfoot\thepage}{\thepage}{\thepage}
\makeoddfoot{showlocs}{\framepictextfoot\thepage}{\thepage}{\thepage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fixheaderwidths}
% The companion pagestyle, at least, needs adjusting (at \cs{fixthelayout} time)
% if the \cs{textwidth} has changed from its initial value.
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/03/16}{Added \cs{fixheaderwidths}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fixheaderwidths}{%
% companion pagestyle
\setlength{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
\addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparsep}
\addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparwidth}
\makerunningwidth{companion}{\headwidth}
\makeheadrule{companion}{\headwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makefootrule{companion}{\textwidth}{\footruleheight}{\footruleskip}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Page numbering}
%
% The kernel includes the \cs{pagenumbering} command for setting the
% style (arabic, roman, etc.) of the page numbers, and at the same
% time it resets the page counter. I want a version that resets the style
% but not the number\footnote{Added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) September 2001.}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering*}
% \cs{pagenumbering}\marg{style} is the normal version whereas
% the starred version does not reset the counter.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{pagenumbering} and \cs{pagenumbering*} }
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\pagenumbering}{%
\@ifstar{\@smempnum}{\@mempnum}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@smempnum}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smempnum}[1]{%
\gdef\thepage{\csname @#1\endcsname \c@page}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@mempnum}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mempnum}[1]{%
\@smempnum{#1}\global\c@page \@ne}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@storedpagenumber}
% A counter to store the page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{storedpagenumber}
\setcounter{storedpagenumber}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\savepagenumber}
% \begin{macro}{\restoregenumber}
% \cs{savepagenumber} saves the current page number and \cs{restorepagenumber}
% sets the page number to the stored value.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/24}{Added \cs{savepagenumber} and \cs{restorepagenumber}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\savepagenumber}{\global\c@storedpagenumber \c@page}
\newcommand{\restorepagenumber}{\global\c@page \c@storedpagenumber}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% \section{Non-traditional spacing}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added non-traditional spacing
% (mempatch v4.6)}
%
% \subsection{Double spacing}
%
% This is an embedding and extension of the code from the \Lpack{setspace}
% package, with
% names changed.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setSpacing}
% \cs{setSpacing}\marg{num} effectively increases the \cs{baselineskip} to
% \meta{num}*\cs{baselineskip}.
% (In package was \cs{setstretch}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setSpacing}[1]{%
\def\baselinestretch{#1}%
\@currsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setSingleSpace}
% \begin{macro}{\setFootnoteSpacing}
% \begin{macro}{\setFloatSpacing}
% \cs{setSingleSpace}\marg{num} effectively increases the \cs{baselineskip} for
% single spacing to \meta{num}*\cs{baselineskip} (\meta{num} should be
% close to 1.0). (In package was \cs{SetSinglespace}). We extend with
% two extra macros \cs{setFootnoteSpacing} and \cs{setFloatSpacing}
% which can be used to explicitly set the spacing inside page notes
% (fotnotes and friends) and inside floats. Changing
% \cs{setSingleSpace} will also set page note and float spacings to
% the same value.
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Added two extra 'single' spacing macros}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setSingleSpace}[1]{%
\def\m@m@singlespace{#1}%
\def\m@m@footnote@spacing{#1}%
\def\m@m@float@spacing{#1} %
}
\setSingleSpace{1}
\newcommand*\setPagenoteSpacing[1]{\def\m@m@footnote@spacing{#1}}
\newcommand*\setFloatSpacing[1] {\def\m@m@float@spacing{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\SingleSpacing}
% \cs{SingleSpacing} starts single spacing. (In package was \cs{singlespacing}).
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Added reset of the float and page note spacings}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SingleSpacing}{%
\setSpacing{\m@m@singlespace}%
\edef\m@m@footnote@spacing{\baselinestretch}%
\edef\m@m@float@spacing{\baselinestretch}%
\vskip\baselineskip% correction for coming into single spacing
}
\SingleSpacing
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@OnehalfSpacing}
% \begin{macro}{\OnehalfSpacing}
% \cs{OnehalfSpacing} starts `one and a half' spacing, which to most
% thesis nitpickers will look like double spacing.
% (In package was \cs{onehalfspacing}). The starred version
% \cs{OnehalfSpacing*} will also give page notes and floats the same spacing
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Made \cs{OnehalfSpacing} into a starred
% version such that the starred version makes everything one half
% spaced including page notes and floats}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@OnehalfSpacing}{
\setSpacing{1.25}% default (10pt)
\ifcase \@ptsize \relax % 10pt
\setSpacing{1.25}%
\or% 11pt
\setSpacing{1.213}%
\or% 12pt
\setSpacing{1.241}%
\or\or% 14pt
\setSpacing{1.20}%
\or\or\or% 17pt
\setSpacing{1.16}%
\or\or% 9pt
\setSpacing{1.35}%
\else% the extended sizes
\setSpacing{1.16}%
\fi}
\newcommand*\OnehalfSpacing{%
\@ifstar{%
\@OnehalfSpacing%
\edef\m@m@footnote@spacing{\baselinestretch}%
\edef\m@m@float@spacing{\baselinestretch}%
}{\@OnehalfSpacing}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DoubleSpacing}
% \begin{macro}{\@DoubleSpacing}
% \cs{DoubleSpacing} starts double spacing, which to most thesis nitpickers
% will look far too spaced out. (In package was
% \cs{doublespacing}). The starred version will also set the page note
% and float spacing to the same value.
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Extended with a starred version.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@DoubleSpacing}{
\setSpacing{1.667}% default (10pt)
\ifcase \@ptsize \relax % 10pt
\setSpacing{1.667}%
\or% 11pt
\setSpacing{1.618}%
\or% 12pt
\setSpacing{1.655}%
\or\or% 14pt
\setSpacing{1.60}%
\or\or\or% 17pt
\setSpacing{1.545}%
\or\or% 9pt
\setSpacing{1.8}%
\else% larger sizes
\setSpacing{1.5}%
\fi}
\newcommand*\DoubleSpacing{%
\@ifstar{%
\@DoubleSpacing%
\edef\m@m@footnote@spacing{\baselinestretch}%
\edef\m@m@float@spacing{\baselinestretch}%
}{\@DoubleSpacing}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setsize}
% Modify the kernel command.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% check what this does!!!!!!!!
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\@setsize}[4]{%
\@nomath#1%
\let\@currsize#1%
\baselineskip #2%
\baselineskip \baselinestretch\baselineskip
\parskip \baselinestretch\parskip
\setbox\strutbox \hbox{%
\vrule height.7\baselineskip
depth .3\baselineskip
width \z@}%
\skip\footins \baselinestretch\skip\footins
\normalbaselineskip\baselineskip#3#4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{SingleSpace}
% Environment form of \cs{SingleSpacing}. (In package was \texttt{singlespace}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{SingleSpace}{%
\vskip\baselineskip
\setSpacing{\m@m@singlespace}%
\vskip -\baselineskip
}{\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{SingleSpace*}
% Don't use this; it's only here to match the \Lpack{setspace} package.
% (In package was \texttt{singlespace*}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{SingleSpace*}{%
%% \vskip\baselineskip
\setSpacing{\m@m@singlespace}%
\vskip 0.5\baselineskip
}{\vskip -0.5\baselineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mrestore@spacing}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mrestore@spacing}{%
\par
\vskip \parskip
\vskip \baselineskip
\endgroup
\vskip -\parskip
\vskip -\baselineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{Spacing}
% \verb?\begin{Spacing}{num}? increases the \cs{baselineskip}
% to \verb?num*\baselineskip?. (In package was \texttt{spacing}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{Spacing}[1]{%
\par
\begingroup
\setSpacing{#1}}{\m@mrestore@spacing}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{OnehalfSpace}
% Environment form of \cs{OnehalfSpacing}. (In package was \texttt{onehalfspace}).
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Added starred version of environment to
% complement the starred macro version}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{OnehalfSpace}{%
\begingroup
\OnehalfSpacing}{\m@mrestore@spacing}
\newenvironment{OnehalfSpace*}{%
\begingroup
\OnehalfSpacing*}{\m@mrestore@spacing}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{DoubleSpace}
% Environment form of \cs{DoubleSpacing}. (In package was \texttt{doublespace}).
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Added starred version of environment to
% complement the starred macro version}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{DoubleSpace}{%
\begingroup
\DoubleSpacing}{\m@mrestore@spacing}
\newenvironment{DoubleSpace*}{%
\begingroup
\DoubleSpacing}{\m@mrestore@spacing}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% Deal with spacing around displays.
%
% \begin{macro}{\memdskipstretch}
% \begin{macro}{\setDisplayskipStretch}
% \begin{macro}{\noDisplayskipStretch}
% \cs{setDisplayskipStretch}\marg{num} changes space around displays by the
% factor (1+\meta{num}). \cs{noDisplaydkipStretch} keeps the regular
% spacing around displays. (In package were \cs{setdisplayskipstretch} and
% the \texttt{nodisplayskipstretch} option).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memdskipstretch}{0.0}
\newcommand*{\setDisplayskipStretch}[1]{%
\renewcommand*{\memdskipstretch}{#1}}
\newcommand*{\noDisplayskipStretch}{\setDisplayskipStretch{0.0}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memdskips}
% Macro added to the kernel hook \cs{everydisplay}, changing the settings
% of displayskips
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memdskips}{%
\advance\abovedisplayskip \memdskipstretch\abovedisplayskip
\advance\belowdisplayskip \memdskipstretch\belowdisplayskip
\advance\abovedisplayshortskip \memdskipstretch\abovedisplayshortskip
\advance\belowdisplayshortskip \memdskipstretch\belowdisplayshortskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\everydisplay}
% \begin{macrocode}
\everydisplay\expandafter{%
\the\everydisplay
\memdskips}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat}
% Reset \cs{baselinestretch} in floats.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\m@m@xfloat\@xfloat
\def\@xfloat #1[#2]{%
\m@m@xfloat #1[#2]%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@float@spacing}%
\normalsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The extra spacing does not add space before and after a minipage.
% The solution, hinted at by Donald Arseneau, is to create a new
% environment. I came up with a solution which DA then much improved upon
% (CTT \textit{setspace and minipages}, 2006/11/28).
% This is like minipage from an author's view, except that it is
% always top positioned and acts like a paragraph.
% \begin{macro}{\memPD}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\memPD
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{environment}{vminipage}
% The user view, just as for \texttt{minipage}, but ensures the \texttt{t}
% position and as a new paragraph. It is like \texttt{minipage} but with
% better fore and aft spacing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{vminipage}{%
\par
\@ifnextchar[%]
\@ivminipage
{\@iiiminipage t\relax[s]}
}{%
\par\global\memPD=\prevdepth
\endminipage
\par
\kern-\memPD% no pagebreak allowed here
\hbox{\vrule depth \memPD width \z@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ivminipage}
% Deal with first optional argument to \texttt{vminipage}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ivminipage[#1]{%
\@ifnextchar[%]
{\@iiminipage{t}}{\@iiiminipage{t}\relax[s]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Abnormal parskips}
%
% Non-zero, positive \cs{parskip}, which is not to be encouraged. Code
% based on Robin Fairbairns \Lpack{parskip} package and the NTG classes.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mnzpskip}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnzpskiptrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnzpskipfalse}
% \cs{ifm@mnzpskip} is TRUE if \cs{parskip} set to anything but 0pt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mnzpskip
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\traditionalparskip}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mabparskip}
% \begin{macro}{\abnormalparskip}
% \begin{macro}{\nonzeroparskip}
% \cs{traditionalparskip} sets \cs{parskip} to 0pt.
% \cs{abnormalparskip}\marg{length} sets \cs{parskip} to \meta{length}.
% \cs{nonzeroparskip} sets \cs{parskip} to a non-zero value that might be
% not too bad (any non-zero \cs{parskip} is not good).
% \changes{v1.61803398c}{2009/11/13}{\cs{parskip} was set to \cs{z@},
% thus the stretch was missing, this broke \cs{flushbottom}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\traditionalparskip}{%
\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@}
\m@mnzpskipfalse}
\newskip\m@mabparskip
\newcommand*{\abnormalparskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\parskip}{#1}\m@mabparskip=#1\relax
\m@mnzpskiptrue}
\newcommand*{\nonzeroparskip}{\abnormalparskip{%
0.5\baselineskip
\@plus .1\baselineskip \@minus .1\baselineskip% NTG
%% 0.5/baselineskip \@plus 2pt% RF
}}
\traditionalparskip
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@minpagerestore}
% This needs extending: here's what NTG does, but I've put the
% appropriate code later.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \providecommand*{\@minipagerestore}{%
% \parskip=.5\baselineskip \@plus .1\baselineskip \@minus .1\baselineskip}
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Titles}
%
% For books the title is usually designed specifically for the particular
% work, so originally the class did not provide a \cs{maketitle} command or
% any of the \cs{title} and other commands that normally go along with this.
% After some thought I decided to add in the code from the
% \Lpack{titling} package~\cite{TITLING}. However, in this case life
% is a bit simpler as there is no pre-existing class code.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added titling code}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pretitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspretitle}
% \begin{macro}{\posttitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsposttitle}
% \begin{macro}{\preauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspreauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\postauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspostauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\predate}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspredate}
% \begin{macro}{\postdate}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspostdate}
% To provide some flexibilty in the titling style of the document,
% user level commands are provided that can be changed to reconfigure
% the appearance resulting from \cs{maketitle}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pretitle}[1]{\def\@bspretitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\posttitle}[1]{\def\@bsposttitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\preauthor}[1]{\def\@bspreauthor{#1}}
\newcommand{\postauthor}[1]{\def\@bspostauthor{#1}}
\newcommand{\predate}[1]{\def\@bspredate{#1}}
\newcommand{\postdate}[1]{\def\@bspostdate{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% These are defined initially
% to mimic the normal \LaTeX{} style.
% \begin{macrocode}
\pretitle{\begin{center}\LARGE}
\posttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip 0.5em}
\preauthor{\begin{center}
\large \lineskip .5em%
\begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
\postauthor{\end{tabular}\par\end{center}}
\predate{\begin{center}\large}
\postdate{\par\end{center}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehooka}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookb}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookc}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookd}
% The four hooks which will be called by \cs{maketitle}. These are initially
% vacuous.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitlehooka}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookb}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookc}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookd}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkseries}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsmarkseries}
% \begin{macro}{\symbolthanksmark}
% These are for specifying the kind of series for thanks markers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksmarkseries}[1]{%
\def\@bsmarkseries{\renewcommand{\thefootnote}%
{\@nameuse{#1}{footnote}}}}
\newcommand{\symbolthanksmark}{\thanksmarkseries{\fnsymbol}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\continuousmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\@bscontmark}
% These are for (non) zeroing of the footnote counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bscontmark}{\setcounter{footnote}{0}}
\newcommand{\continuousmarks}{\def\@bscontmark{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksheadextra}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpre}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpost}
% These are for inserting stuff before and after a mark in the titling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksheadextra}[2]{%
\def\@bsthanksheadpre{#1}%
\def\@bsthanksheadpost{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Deprecated \cs{thanksfootextra}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Removed \cs{thanksfootpre} and \cs{thanksfootpost}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/14}{Removed \cs{thanksfootextra}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmark}
% This adds a thanks mark. The \cs{footnotemark} could have been used directly
% but it is fragile in a moving argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\thanksmark}[1]{\footnotemark[#1]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksgap}
% This specifies some horizontal space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{\hspace{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tamark}
% This stores the current definition of \cs{@thefnmark}. For some reason
% using \cs{@thefnmark} directly only gave the last value.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tamark}{\@thefnmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkwidth}
% A length determining the size of the box for typesetting
% a thanks marker.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\thanksmarkwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarksep}
% A length determining the inset of thanks footnotes.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Replaced \cs{thanksmargin} by \cs{thanksmarksep}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\thanksmarksep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\thanksscript}
% \cs{thanksscript} is a wrapper round the actual mark stuff to be typeset.
% The user can define this via \cs{thanksmarkstyle}\marg{code}.
% The default is a superscript mark.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{thanksmarkstyle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksmarkstyle}[1]{\def\thanksscript##1{#1}}
\thanksmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmarkhook}
% A vacuous macro used as a hook into \cs{makethanksmark}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksfootmark}
% This typesets the thanks footnote mark.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Complete rewrite of \cs{thanksfootmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksfootmark}{%
\ifdim\thanksmarkwidth < \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\llap{\hb@xt@ -\thanksmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
\hspace*{-\thanksmarkwidth}}%
\else
\ifdim\thanksmarkwidth = \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Positive width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hb@xt@\thanksmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmark}
% This sets the general indentations for the thanks footnote,
% and typesets the mark. The code is a simplified version of that
% for typesetting ToC entries.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Minor changes to \cs{makethanksmark}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{makethanksmark}}
% \changes{v1.61803398b}{2009/09/21}{fixed typo, \cs{thanksmarksep}
% not \cs{thanksmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmark}{%
\leavevmode%
\parindent 1em\noindent
%%% \leftskip\thanksmarksep\relax
\memRTLleftskip\thanksmarksep\relax
%%% \advance\leftskip\thanksmarkwidth
\advance\memRTLleftskip\thanksmarkwidth
%%% \null\nobreak\hskip-\leftskip\relax
\null\nobreak\hskip-\memRTLleftskip\relax
\makethanksmarkhook\relax
\thanksfootmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\usethanksrule}
% \begin{macro}{\cancelhanksrule}
% Simple macros that let \cs{footnoterule} to another rule definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\usethanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\thanksrule}
\newcommand{\cancelthanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\@bsfootnoterule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Now set up the rest of the thanks defaults, styling having been
% done earlier.
% \begin{macrocode}
\thanksmarkseries{fnsymbol} % symbols
\thanksheadextra{}{}
\setlength{\thanksmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{-\thanksmarkwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\thanksrule}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsfootnoterule}
% These are saved versions of the \cs{footnoterule} definition as it
% is at the end of the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\let\thanksrule\footnoterule
\let\@bsfootnoterule\footnoterule
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\droptitle}
% A titling block has \cs{droptitle} amount of additional vertical space
% above it (normally zero).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\droptitle}
\setlength{\droptitle}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
% The following is a
% modification of \cs{maketitle} as in the \Lpack{article}, \Lpack{report},
% and \Lpack{book} classes. It sets the pagestyle to \pstyle{title}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2004/01/21}{Removed the \cs{rlap} from \cs{@makefnmark}
% in \cs{maketitle} so multiple \cs{thanks}
% work per \cs{footnote}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fix to remove extra blank page when
% \cs{maketitle} (and \cs{@maketitle}) is used within adjustwidth
% inside a titlingpage (mempatch v3.2)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitle}{\par
\begingroup
\@bsmarkseries
\def\@makefnmark{\@textsuperscript{%
\normalfont\@bsthanksheadpre \tamark \@bsthanksheadpost}}%
\long\def\@makefntext##1{\makethanksmark ##1}
\if@twocolumn
\ifnum \col@number=\@ne
\@maketitle
\else
\twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
\fi
\else
\ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
\newpage
\fi
\global\@topnum\z@
\@maketitle
\fi
\thispagestyle{title}\@thanks
\endgroup
\@bscontmark % \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
}
\aliaspagestyle{title}{plain}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@titlefootkill}
% \cs{@mem@titlefootkill}\marg{note} Warn about footnotes in titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@mem@titlefootkill}[1]{%
\@memwarn{Do not use \string\footnote\space in
\string\maketitle.\MessageBreak
Use \protect\thanks\space instead}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
% Our version of \cs{@maketitle}.
% Footnotes are killed in the title; see the thread `\cs{title}, \cs{author}
% and \cs{footnote} feature in memoir class', February 2003.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Killed footnote in titles (from patch v1.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@maketitle}{%
\let\footnote\@mem@titlefootkill
\ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
\newpage
\fi
\null
\vskip 2em%
\vspace*{\droptitle}
\maketitlehooka
{\@bspretitle \@title \@bsposttitle}
\maketitlehookb
{\@bspreauthor \@author \@bspostauthor}
\maketitlehookc
{\@bspredate \@date \@bspostdate}
\maketitlehookd
\par
\vskip 1.5em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{titlingpage}
% The \Lenv{titlingpage} environment sets the pagestyle to be \pstyle{titlingpage},
% disables the footnote rule and ensures that the page is single
% column. At the end it switches back to twocolumn if neccessary,
% and then starts a new page as number 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{titlingpage}%
{\let\footnoterule\relax
\let\footnotesize\small
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
\else
\@restonecolfalse
\fi
\thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
\setcounter{page}{\@ne}%
}{%
\thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
\if@restonecol \twocolumn \fi
\if@twoside \cleardoublepage \else \clearpage \fi
\setcounter{page}{\@ne}}
\aliaspagestyle{titlingpage}{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\emptythanks}
% This macro discards all prior \cs{thanks} texts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\emptythanks}{\global\let\@thanks\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\andnext}
% The kernel \cs{and} macro puts space between author's names. The
% \cs{andnext} macro puts a newline between the names.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{andnext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\andnext}{%
\end{tabular}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bsmtitlempty}
% \cs{@bsmtitlempty} is a helper macro to save some macro space.
% It empties some elements of \cs{maketitle}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bsmtitlempty}{%
\global\let\maketitle\relax
\global\let\@maketitle\relax
\global\let\title\relax
\global\let\author\relax
\global\let\date\relax
\global\let\thanksmarkseries\relax
\global\let\thanksheadextra\relax
\global\let\thanksfootextra\relax
\global\let\thanksmark\relax
\global\let\thanksgap\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\keepthetitle}
% This macro undefines all the titling commands except for
% \cs{thetitle}, \cs{theauthor} and \cs{thedate}.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{changed \cs{keepthetitle} to cater for \cs{andnext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\keepthetitle}{%
\@bsmtitlempty
\global\let\thanks\relax
\global\let\and\relax
\global\let\andnext\relax
\global\let\@thanks\@empty
\global\let\@title\@empty
\global\let\@author\@empty
\global\let\@date\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\killtitle}
% \cs{killtitle} undefines the remaining macros of \cs{maketitle}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\killtitle}{%
\keepthetitle
\global\let\thetitle\relax
\global\let\theauthor\relax
\global\let\thedate\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\thetitle}
% \begin{macro}{\theauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\thedate}
% In order to make the \cs{title}, etc., values available for printing
% their definitions (in \file{ltsect.dtx}) need extending to save their
% arguments. We have to make sure that extraneous material,
% like \cs{thanks}, is excluded from the saved texts.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Gobble footnotes in \cs{title}, \cs{author}
% and \cs{date} (from patch v1.4)}
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{andnext} handling to \cs{author}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\addtoiargdef{\title}{%
\begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
\protected@xdef\thetitle{#1}
\endgroup\endgroup}
\addtoiargdef{\author}{%
\begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\and}{\unskip, }
\renewcommand{\andnext}{\unskip, }
\renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
\protected@xdef\theauthor{#1}
\endgroup\endgroup}
\addtoiargdef{\date}{%
\begingroup\let\footnote\@gobble}{%
\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
\protected@xdef\thedate{#1}
\endgroup\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{Parts, chapters and other divisions}
%
% \subsection{Building blocks} The definitions in this part of a
% class file usually make use of two internal macros, \cs{@startsection} and
% \cs{secdef}. To understand
% what is going on here, we describe their syntax.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@startsection}
% The macro \cs{@startsection} has 6 required arguments, optionally
% followed by a $*$, an optional argument and a required argument:
%
% \cs{@startsection}\meta{name}\meta{level}\meta{indent}^^A
% \meta{beforeskip}\meta{afterskip}\meta{style}
% optional * %\\
% \null\hphantom{\bslash @startsection}^^A
% \oarg{altheading}\meta{heading}
%
% It is a generic command to start a section, the arguments have
% the following meaning:
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{name}] The name of the user level command, e.g.,
% `section'.
% \item[\meta{level}] A number, denoting the depth of the section
% --- e.g., chapter = 0, section = 1, etc. A section number
% will be printed if and only if \meta{level} $<=$ the value
% of the \Lcount{secnumdepth} counter.
% \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation of the heading from the left
% margin
% \item[\meta{beforeskip}] The absolute value of this argument
% gives the skip to leave above the heading. If it is
% negative, then the paragraph indent of the text following
% the heading is suppressed.
% \item[\meta{afterskip}] If positive, this gives the skip to leave
% below the heading, else it gives the skip to leave to the
% right of a run-in heading.
% \item[\meta{style}] Commands to set the style of the heading.
% \item[$*$] When this is missing the heading is numbered and the
% corresponding counter is incremented.
% \item[\meta{altheading}] Gives an alternative heading to use in
% the table of contents and in the running heads. This should
% be present when the $*$ form is used.
% \item[\meta{heading}] The heading of the new section.
% \end{description}
% A sectioning command is normally defined to \cs{@startsection} and
% its first six arguments.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\secdef}
% The macro \cs{secdef} can be used when a sectioning command is
% defined without using \cs{@startsection}. It has two arguments:
%
% \cs{secdef}\meta{unstarcmds}\meta{starcmds}
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{unstarcmds}] Used for the normal form of a
% sectioning command.
% \item[\meta{starcmds}] Used for the $*$-form of a
% sectioning command.
% \end{description}
%
% You can use \cs{secdef} as follows:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\chapter { ... \secdef \CMDA \CMDB }
% \def\CMDA [#1]#2{ ... } % Command to define
% % \chapter[...]{...}
% \def\CMDB #1{ ... } % Command to define
% % \chapter*{...}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@hangfrom}
% Internally the \cs{@startsection} macro uses \verb?\@hangfrom{NUM}?, where
% \verb?NUM? is the sectional number, to produce a hanging paragraph. That is,
% the second and later lines of a multiline title are indented from the
% left margin by the width of the number.
% The definition of \cs{@hangfrom}, from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@hangfrom#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
% \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% To get a normal paragraphed title you can do: \\
% \verb?\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}? \\
% or as a block paragraph: \\
% \verb?\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}}? \\
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@seccntformat}
% The \cs{@startsection} macro also uses \verb?\@seccntformat{NUM}? to format
% the section number, including the space after it. Its definition,
% from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
% \end{verbatim}
% This is the command to change if you need different number formatting. For
% example the combination
% \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\llap{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}}
% \renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}
% \end{verbatim}
% will hang the section numbers in the margin.
%
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Document division levels}\label{tab:levels}
% \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
% Division & Level \\ \hline
% book & -2 \\
% part & -1 \\
% chapter & 0 \\
% section & 1 \\
% subsection & 2 \\
% subsubsection & 3 \\
% paragraph & 4 \\
% subparagraph & 5 \\
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \end{table}
%
% The values used for the document division levels are the same
% as defined by the standard \LaTeX{} classes, with the exception
% of the book division which is a memoir addition, and are given in
% Table~\ref{tab:levels}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added book division (from mempatch v4.4)}
% \subsection{Mark commands}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bookpagemark}
% \begin{macro}{\partmark}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphmark}
% The default initialisations of the \cs{...mark} commands for use in
% the pagestyles. Most are already defined in the kernel but they are
% all noted here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bookpagemark}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\partmark}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\sectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subsectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subsubsectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\paragraphmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subparagraphmark}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibmark}
% Marks for the bibliography, which may be filled with \cs{bibname}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{bibmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bibmark}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexmark}
% Marks for the index, which may be filled with \cs{indexname}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{indexmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\indexmark}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossarymark}
% Marks for the glossary, which may be filled with \cs{glossaryname}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added \cs{glossarymark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossarymark}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Define Counters}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@secnumdepth}
% The value of the counter \Lcount{secnumdepth} gives the depth of
% the highest-level sectioning command that is to produce section
% numbers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@book}
% \begin{macro}{\c@part}
% \begin{macro}{\c@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\c@section}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subsection}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\c@paragraph}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subparagraph}
% These counters are used for the sectioning numbers. The macro\\
% \cs{newcounter}\marg{newctr}\oarg{oldctr}\\
% defines\meta{newctr} to be a counter, which is reset to zero when
% counter \meta{oldctr} is stepped. Counter \meta{oldctr} must
% already be defined.
%
% Book, part and chapter are the top level document divisions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{book} \setcounter{book}{0}
\newcounter{part} \setcounter{part}{0}
\newcounter{chapter} \setcounter{chapter}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% The lower level divisions get reset by higher level divisions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{section}[chapter]
\newcounter{subsection}[section]
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thebook}
% \begin{macro}{\thepart}
% \begin{macro}{\thechapter}
% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubparagraph}
% For any counter \Lcount{CTR}, \cs{theCTR} is a macro that defines
% the printed version of counter \Lcount{CTR}. It is defined in
% terms of the following macros:
%
% \cs{arabic}\marg{COUNTER} prints the value of
% \meta{COUNTER} as an arabic numeral.
%
% \cs{roman}\marg{COUNTER} prints the value of
% \meta{COUNTER} as a lowercase roman numeral.
%
% \cs{Roman}\marg{COUNTER} prints the value of
% \meta{COUNTER} as an uppercase roman numeral.
%
% \cs{alph}\marg{COUNTER} prints the value of \meta{COUNTER}
% as a lowercase letter: $1 =$~a, $2 =$~ b, etc.
%
% \cs{Alph}\marg{COUNTER} prints the value of \meta{COUNTER}
% as an uppercase letter: $1 =$~A, $2 =$~B, etc.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\thebook}{\@Roman\c@book}
\renewcommand*{\thepart}{\@Roman\c@part}
\renewcommand*{\thechapter}{\@arabic\c@chapter}
\renewcommand*{\thesection}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@section}
\renewcommand*{\thesubsection}{%
\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
\renewcommand*{\thesubsubsection}{%
\thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection}
\renewcommand*{\theparagraph}{%
\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}
\renewcommand*{\thesubparagraph}{%
\theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chapapp}
% \cs{@chapapp} is initially defined as \cs{chaptername}. The \cs{appendix}
% command redfines it as \cs{appendixname}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@chapapp}{\chaptername}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Front, main and back matter}
%
% These are the three main logical divisions in a book. As noted earlier,
% the boolean \cs{if@mainmatter} is TRUE iff the main matter is being
% processed. Chapters will be unnumbered when \cs{if@mainmatter} is FALSE.
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter*}
% The \cs{frontmatter} command starts roman numbering and turns off
% chapter numbering.
% It ensures that lower level divisions will not have chapter numbers,
% nor will figures or tables. It
% also ensures that the next page will be recto.
% The starred version makes no changes to the page numbering\footnote{The
% starred versions were added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) in September 2001.}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{frontmatter} switches off numbering via
% the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{frontmatter*} command}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\frontmatter}{%
\@ifstar{\@smemfront}{\@memfront}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@memfront@floats}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{Added \cs{@memfront@floats}}
% Factoring out the float counter domination, in case someone wants
% something added or changed
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\@memfront@floats{%
\counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithout{table}{chapter}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@smemfront}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smemfront}{%
\cleardoublepage
\@mainmatterfalse
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
\@memfront@floats
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@memfront}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memfront}{%
\@smemfront\pagenumbering{roman}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter}
% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter*}
% The \cs{mainmatter} command starts arabic numbering and turns on chapter numbering.
% It sets numbering to the normal state. It
% also ensures that the next page will be recto. The starred version does
% not change the page numbering.
%
% Romano Giannetti suggested that \cs{mainmatter} (and \cs{backmatter}) should
% be almost no-ops with the article option.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{mainmatter} switches on section numbering
% via the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{mainmatter*} command}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mainmatter}{%
\@ifstar{\@smemmain}{\@memmain}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memmain@floats}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{Added \cs{@memmain@floats}}
% Factoring out the float counter domination, in case someone wants
% something added or changed
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\@memmain@floats{%
\counterwithin{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithin{table}{chapter}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@smemmain}
% If \cs{frontmatter} and \cs{mainmatter} are used with the article option,
% then a page numbering / margin problem can occur if the frontmatter ends
% on an odd page --- the first mainmatter next page is odd as well which throws
% puts two odd-margined pages together.
%
% One fix from Morten is to always \cs{cleardoublepage} for twosided articles.
%
% One fix from me is for the ...matter macros to just switch on/off section
% numbering.
%
% Morten's is simpler to implement.
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Modified \cs{@smemmain} to reset the secnumdepth
% counter to maxsecnumdepth}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Included cognizance of article option in \cs{@smemmain}
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed timing of \cs{clear[double]page} in
% \cs{@smemmain} (David Wilson, mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed clear pages in \cs{@smemmain}
% (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@smemmain}{%
\@mainmattertrue
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}
\ifartopt
\if@twoside
\cleardoublepage
\else
\clearpage
\fi
\else
\cleardoublepage
\@memmain@floats
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memmain}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memmain}{%
\@smemmain\pagenumbering{arabic}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memback@floats}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{Added \cs{@memback@floats}}
% Factoring out the float counter domination, in case someone wants
% something added or changed
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\@memback@floats{%
\counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithout{table}{chapter}
\setcounter{figure}{0}
\setcounter{table}{0}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\backmatter}
% This command turns off chapter numbering but leaves the page numbering alone.
% It twiddles the numbering caption numbering.
% The back matter may start on any new page.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{backmatter} uses the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Included cognizance of article option in \cs{backmatter}
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\backmatter}{%
\ifartopt
\clearpage
\else
\if@openright
\cleardoublepage
\else
\clearpage
\fi
\fi
\@mainmatterfalse
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
\ifartopt\else
\@memback@floats
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Book}
%
% This was added at the request of Frederic Connes who said that in
% Frency typography there was often a division above the \cs{part} level.
%
% \begin{macro}{\theHbook}
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@book}
% These are needed if the \Lpack{hyperref} is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\theHbook}{\arabic{book}}
\newcommand*{\toclevel@book}{-2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\book}
% \begin{macro}{\book*}
% \cs{book}\marg{title} starts a new book division called \meta{title}.
% The actual typesetting of the title is done by \cs{@book} or \cs{@sbook}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{book} and its entourage (mempatch v4.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\book}{%
\@setupbook
\secdef\@book\@sbook}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforebookskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midbookskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterbookskip}
% These three macros are the skips before, in the middle, and after the
% Book heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\beforebookskip}{\null\vfil}
\newcommand*{\midbookskip}{\par\vskip 2\onelineskip}
\newcommand*{\afterbookskip}{\vfil\newpage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setupbook}
% This macro does the work of setting up for the \cs{book} command.
% A single column page, normally recto, with a \pstyle{book} pagestyle is
% started.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@setupbook}{%
\if@openright
\cleardoublepage
\else
\clearpage
\fi
\thispagestyle{book}%
\if@twocolumn
\onecolumn
\@tempswatrue
\else
\@tempswafalse
\fi
\beforebookskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\booknamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\booknumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\booktitlefont}
% These three macros specify the fonts for the book name and number, and
% for the book title, respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\booknamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand*{\booknumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand*{\booktitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printbookname}
% \begin{macro}{\booknamenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printbooknum}
% \begin{macro}{\printbooktitle}
% Macros to print the various books of a Book heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\printbookname}{\booknamefont \bookname}
\newcommand*{\booknamenum}{\space}
\newcommand*{\printbooknum}{\booknumfont \thebook}
\newcommand*{\printbooktitle}[1]{\booktitlefont #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\membookinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\membookstarinfo}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\membookinfo}[3]{}
\newcommand{\membookstarinfo}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@book}
% \cs{@book}\oarg{short}\marg{long} typesets the title of a \cs{book}
% book. There is a number if \cs{secnumdepth} is greater than -3.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@book[#1]#2{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\phantomsection
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-3\relax
\refstepcounter{book}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{book}%
{\protect\booknumberline{\thebook}#1}%
\membookinfo{\thebook}{#1}{#2}%
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{book}{#1}%
\membookinfo{}{#1}{#2}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Empty the marks, center the title on the page, and set the normal font.
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/03}{Set \cs{parskip} to zero, such that a
% non-zero \cs{parskip} does not interfer with the title layout}
% \begin{macrocode}
\bookpagemark{#1}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\parskip\z@
\normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% Print the number, if there is one, then the title below. Macro \cs{@endbook}
% tidies everything up at the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-3\relax
\printbookname \booknamenum \printbooknum
\midbookskip
\fi
\printbooktitle{#2}\par}%
\@endbook}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sbook}
% \cs{@sbook}\marg{long} formats the title of a \cs{book*} book. It is
% simpler than \cs{@book} because there is no number to print.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@sbook}}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/03}{Set \cs{parskip} to zero here as well}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@sbook#1{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\phantomsection
\membookstarinfo{#1}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\parskip\z@
\normalfont
\printbooktitle{#1}\par}%
\@endbook}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mnobooknewpage}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnobooknewpagetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnobooknewpagefalse}
% \begin{macro}{\bookblankpage}
% \begin{macro}{\nobookblankpage}
% The declaration \cs{nobookblankpage} prevents \cs{book} from
% outputting a further (blank) page when it finishes. The default is set by
% \cs{bookblankpage}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mnobooknewpage
\m@mnobooknewpagefalse
\newcommand*{\bookblankpage}{\m@mnobooknewpagefalse}
\newcommand*{\nobookblankpage}{\m@mnobooknewpagetrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bookpageend}
% \begin{macro}{\@endbook}
% This finishes off both \cs{@book} and \cs{@sbook}.
% Following a \cs{nobookblankpage} nothing is done, otherwise
% (after \cs{bookblankpage}) the current page is flushed,
% and an extra blank page is created if both \Lopt{twoside} and
% \Lopt{openright} are in effect.
% At the end, if necessary, two column mode is switched back on.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/26}{PW: Added \cs{bookpageend} as cover for \cs{@endbook}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bookpageend}{\afterbookskip
\ifm@mnobooknewpage
\else
\if@twoside
\if@openright
\null
\thispagestyle{afterbook}%
\newpage
\fi
\fi
\fi
\if@tempswa
\twocolumn
\fi}
\def\@endbook{\bookpageend}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@book}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@afterbook}
% Pagestyles for the book page and the (blank) page after a book page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\aliaspagestyle{book}{empty}
\aliaspagestyle{afterbook}{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Part}
%
% \begin{macro}{\part}
% \cs{part}\marg{title} starts a new Part called \meta{title}.
% The actual typesetting of the title is done by \cs{@part} or \cs{@spart}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\part}{%
\@setuppart
\secdef\@part\@spart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforepartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midpartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterpartskip}
% These three macros are the skips before, in the middle, and after the
% Part heading.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{midpartskip} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}
\newcommand{\midpartskip}{\par\vskip 2\onelineskip}
\newcommand{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setuppart}
% This macro does the work of setting up for the \cs{part} command.
% A single column page, normally recto, with a \pstyle{part} pagestyle is started.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@setuppart}{%
\if@openright
\cleardoublepage
\else
\clearpage
\fi
\thispagestyle{part}%
\if@twocolumn
\onecolumn
\@tempswatrue
\else
\@tempswafalse
\fi
\beforepartskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\partnumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\parttitlefont}
% These three macros specify the fonts for the part name and number, and
% for the part title, respectively.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Rewrote the typesetting for Part titles}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printpartname}
% \begin{macro}{\partnamenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printpartnum}
% \begin{macro}{\printparttitle}
% Macros to print the various parts of a Part heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\printpartname}{\partnamefont \partname}
\newcommand{\partnamenum}{\space}
\newcommand{\printpartnum}{\partnumfont \thepart}
\newcommand{\printparttitle}[1]{\parttitlefont #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mempartinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\mempartstarinfo}
% \verb?\mempartinfo{\thepart}{short}{long}? \\
% \verb?\mempartstarinfo{long}? \\
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Made \cs{mempartinfo} long (mempatch v4.9).}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mempartinfo}[3]{}
\newcommand{\mempartstarinfo}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@part}
% \cs{@part}\oarg{short}\marg{long} typesets the title of a \cs{part}
% part. There is a number if \cs{secnumdepth} is greater than -2.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Used \cs{partnumberline} in \cs{@part}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@part}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Replaced \cs{markboth} by \cs{partmark}
% in \cs{@part} courtesy of Frederic Connes (mempatch v3.11)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@part[#1]#2{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\phantomsection
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
\refstepcounter{part}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{part}%
{\protect\partnumberline{\thepart}#1}%
\mempartinfo{\thepart}{#1}{#2}%
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
\mempartinfo{}{#1}{#2}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Empty the marks, center the title on the page, and set the normal font.
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/03}{Set \cs{parskip} to zero inside the
% group, such that a non-zero \cs{parskip} does not interfer with the
% title layout}
% \begin{macrocode}
\partmark{#1}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\parskip\z@
\normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% Print the number, if there is one, then the title below. Macro \cs{@endpart}
% tidies everything up at the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
\printpartname \partnamenum \printpartnum
\midpartskip
\fi
\printparttitle{#2}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
% \cs{@spart}\marg{long} formats the title of a \cs{part*} part. It is
% simpler than \cs{@part} because there is no number to print.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@spart}}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/03}{Set \cs{parskip} to zero here as well}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@spart#1{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\phantomsection
\mempartstarinfo{#1}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\parskip\z@
\normalfont
\printparttitle{#1}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mnopartnewpage}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnopartnewpagetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnopartnewpagefalse}
% \begin{macro}{\partblankpage}
% \begin{macro}{\nopartblankpage}
% The declaration \cs{nopartblankpage} prevents \cs{part} from
% outputting a blank page when it finishes. The default is set by
% \cs{partblankpage}. This code was originally supplied by Frederic Connes.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{partblankpage} and
% \cs{nopartblankpage} (mempatch v v4.4).}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mnopartnewpage
\m@mnopartnewpagefalse
\newcommand*{\partblankpage}{\m@mnopartnewpagefalse}
\newcommand*{\nopartblankpage}{\m@mnopartnewpagetrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partpageend}
% \begin{macro}{\@endpart}
% This finishes off both \cs{@part} and \cs{@spart}.
% Following a \cs{nopartblankpage} nothing is done, otherwise
% (after \cs{partblankpage}) the current page is flushed.
% In the standard \Lpack{book} class if
% two-sided mode is on a blank page is then produced. I think that this looks
% odd when the \Lopt{openany} option is in force, so here it only produces
% an extra blank page if both \Lopt{twoside} and \Lopt{openright} are
% in effect.
%
% At the end, if necessary, two column mode is switched back on.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Used the afterpart pagestyle in \cs{@endpart}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/26}{PW: Added \cs{partpageend} as cover for \cs{@endpart}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\partpageend}{\afterpartskip
\ifm@mnopartnewpage
\else
\if@twoside
\if@openright
\null
\thispagestyle{afterpart}%
\newpage
\fi
\fi
\fi
\if@tempswa
\twocolumn
\fi}
\def\@endpart{\partpageend}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@afterpart}
% Pagestyle for the (blank) page after a part page.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added afterpart pagestyle (mempatch v4.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\aliaspagestyle{afterpart}{empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Chapter}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
% The command to start a new chapter. Chapters always start on a new page
% with a \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle. Floats are not allowed at the top of the page.
% The typesetting is done by either \cs{@chapter} or \cs{@schapter}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{chapter} for article option}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Changed chapter page clearing to \cs{clearforchapter}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{New optarg in \cs{chapter} for short heading}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Made article chapter start on a newline (mempatch v3.5)}
% \changes{v3.6e}{2010/07/16}{Factored out the \cs{@afterindentfalse}}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/02/07}{Added the chapter block}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\chapter{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The block macro can be defined to execute a \cs{FloatBlock} when we
% are in article mode. Outside article mode \cs{clearforchapter} is
% expected to be used for this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt\par\@nameuse{chapterblock}\else
\clearforchapter
\thispagestyle{chapter}
\global\@topnum\z@
\fi
% \@afterindentfalse
\m@mindentafterchapter
\@ifstar{\@m@mschapter}{\@m@mchapter}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mindentafterchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\indentafterchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\noindentafterchapter}
% In order to make whether to indent the first paragraph after af
% chapter configurable, we store \verb?\@afterindenttrue/false? in
% \verb?\m@mindentafterchapter?, and provide
% \verb?\indentafterchapter? and \verb?\noindentafterchapter? to set
% it to a suitable value.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\indentafterchapter{\def\m@mindentafterchapter{\@afterindenttrue}}
\newcommand*\noindentafterchapter{\def\m@mindentafterchapter{\@afterindentfalse}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Default is not to indent.
% \begin{macrocode}
\noindentafterchapter
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\ch@pt@c}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@empty}
% Intermediate and support macros for the extra optional argument
% to \cs{chapter}. Have to do this long windedly otherwise dear old
% \Lpack{hyperref} barfs.
%
% The code for two optional arguments is based on a posting
% to \ctt{} by Robin Fairbairns (1997/04/12 \textit{Re: Several optional
% arguments for macro?}).
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Major changes to \cs{chapter} macros (from Morten Hogholm 2005/08/30)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{%
\def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
\@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}%
}
\def\m@m@empty{\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memchapinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memchapstarinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memappchapinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memappchapstarinfo}
% \verb?\memchapinfo{num}{toc}{head}{full}? \\
% \verb?\memchapstarinfo{short}{full}?
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/06}{Added \cs{memchapinfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memchapinfo}[4]{}
\newcommand{\memchapstarinfo}[2]{}
\newcommand{\memappchapinfo}[4]{}
\newcommand{\memappchapstarinfo}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mpn@new@chap}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mpn@new@chapfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mpn@new@chaptrue}
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mpn@new@schap}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mpn@new@schapfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mpn@new@schaptrue}
% These are for supporting the [age/end notes, flagging that a
% \verb?\chapter(*)? has been called.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{ifm@mpn@new@chap} and
% \cs{ifm@mpn@new@chap} (mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mpn@new@chap
\m@mpn@new@chapfalse
\newif\ifm@mpn@new@schap
\m@mpn@new@schapfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rtoc}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rhdr}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rbody}
% \cs{@chapter}\oarg{tocmark}\marg{title}
% typesets the title of a \cs{chapter}.
% There is a number if \cs{secnumdepth} is greater than -1 and \cs{@mainmatter}
% is TRUE.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Complete rewrite of \cs{@chapter}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{numberline} to \cs{chapternumberline}
% in \cs{@chapter}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{f@rbody} to \cs{@chapter},
% plus newchapter flag (mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.6180339g}{2009/07/13}{added \cs{m@mpn@new@schapfalse}
% otherwise both might end up true at the same time}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
\m@mpn@new@chaptrue%
\m@mpn@new@schapfalse%
\def\f@rbdy{#2}%
\ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty % no optional args
\def\f@rtoc{#2}%
\def\f@rhdr{#2}%
\else % at least one opt arg
\let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c
\ifx\@empty#1\@empty
\let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c
\else
\def\f@rhdr{#1}%
\fi
\fi
\m@m@Andfalse
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
\if@mainmatter
\m@m@Andtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifm@m@And
\refstepcounter{chapter}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Deal with the \Lopt{article} option.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt
\@makechapterhead{#2}%
\@afterheading
\chaptermark{\f@rhdr}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Store the (short) title via \cs{chaptermark}, and add some whitespace to
% the LoF and LoT. Then fiddle when we are using two columns, calling
% \cs{@makechapterhead} to do the typesetting.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@chapter} for article option}
% \begin{macrocode}
\chaptermark{\f@rhdr}
\insertchapterspace
\if@twocolumn
\@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
\else
\@makechapterhead{#2}%
\fi
\@afterheading
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Vittorio De Martino (\texttt{demartino.vittoria@grtn.it}) on
% 31 March 2003 reported that for articled chapters, which do not do
% any \cs{clearpage}, \cs{addcontents} had to come after the title.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Changed \cs{@chapter} to match patches v1.n}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\ifanappendix
\addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{%
\protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
\memappchapinfo{\thechapter}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%
\protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
\memchapinfo{\thechapter}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
\ifanappendix
\memappchapinfo{}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\memchapinfo{}{\f@rtoc}{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Add hook for title referencing.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@chapter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{chapter}. Leave some whitespace and prepare to
% set \cs{raggedright}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to
% \cs{@makechapterhead}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{@makechapterhead}}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/01}{Set \cs{parskip} to zero such that a
% non-zero \cs{parskip} to not interfer with the placement of the title}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
\chapterheadstart% \vspace*{50\p@}%
{%\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
\parskip \z@
\parindent \z@ \memRTLraggedright \normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% If there is a number, typeset it, otherwise call \cs{printchapternonum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\printchaptername \chapternamenum \printchapternum
\afterchapternum % \par\nobreak \vskip 20\p@
\else
\printchapternonum
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeset the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printchaptertitle{#1} % \Huge \bfseries #1
\afterchaptertitle % \par\nobreak \vskip 40\p@
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\insertchapterspace}
% By default, a \cs{chapter} inserts some vertical space into the LoF and LoT.
% The macro \cs{insertchapterspace} performs the insertion.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Added \cs{insertchapterspace}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\insertchapterspace}{%
\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
\addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforechapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midchapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchapskip}
% Lengths separating the various parts of a chapter heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforechapskip}\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
\newlength{\midchapskip}\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
\newlength{\afterchapskip}\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chs@def@ult}
% This sets up all the definitions and defaults used in \cs{@makechapterhead}
% and \cs{@makeschapterhead}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to \cs{@chs@def@ult}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Made \cs{@chs@def@ult} set all default chapter values}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\printchaptername}
% \begin{macro}{\chapternamenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternonum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchaptertitle}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchaptertitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@chs@def@ult}{%
\def\chapterheadstart{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}}%
\def\printchaptername{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}%
\def\chapternamenum{\space}%
\def\printchapternum{\chapnumfont \thechapter}%
\def\afterchapternum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}%
\def\printchapternonum{}%
\def\printchaptertitle##1{\chaptitlefont ##1}%
\def\afterchaptertitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\chapnumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptitlefont}
% Fonts for setting chapter name, number, and title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\chapnamefont{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}%
\def\chapnumfont{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}%
\def\chaptitlefont{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}%
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}%
\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}%
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mschapter}
% This deals with the new optional argument for starred chapters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mschapter}[2][\@empty]{%
\@schapter{#2}%
\ifx \@empty#1
\def\f@rhdr{#2}%
\else% opt arg
\def\f@rhdr{#1}%
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}%
\chaptermark{#1}%
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}%
\fi
\ifanappendix
\memappchapstarinfo{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\memchapstarinfo{\f@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi
\ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{#2}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rbdy}
% \cs{@schapter}\marg{long} typesets the title of a
% \cs{chapter*}. It is easier than the \cs{@chapter} as there is no number
% to worry about.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@schapter} for article option}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major rewrite of \cs{@schapter}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@schapter}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{@schapter} like
% \cs{@chapter} (mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.6180339g}{2009/07/13}{added \cs{m@mpn@new@chapfalse}
% otherwise both might end up true at the same time}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@schapter}[1]{%
\m@mpn@new@schaptrue%
\m@mpn@new@chapfalse%
\def\f@rbdy{#1}%
\ifartopt
\@makeschapterhead{#1}%
\else
\if@twocolumn
\@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
\else
\@makeschapterhead{#1}%
\fi
\fi
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makeschapterhead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{chapter*}, and is similar to \cs{@makechapterhead}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to
% \cs{@makeschapterhead}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{@makeschapterhead}}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/0301}{Made sure the \cs{parskip} is zero inside
% the title area, otherwise placement might come out wrong}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
\chapterheadstart
{%\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
\parskip \z@%
\parindent \z@ \memRTLraggedright \normalfont
\printchapternonum
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printchaptertitle{#1}%
\afterchaptertitle}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Chapter styling}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\makechapterstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterstyle}
% \cs{chapterstyle}\marg{style} is like \cs{pagestyle}, except it's for
% chapters.
%
% \cs{makechapterstyle}\marg{style}\marg{text} creates
% or overrides the \meta{style} chapter style defining it as \meta{text}
% So, \verb?\makechapterstyle{fred}{code}? specifies that the chapter style
% \pstyle{fred}
% is defined as the macro \verb?\chs@fred{code}?,
% and \verb?\chapterstyle{fred}? calls the macro \cs{chs@fred}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makechapterstyle}[2]{\@namedef{chs@#1}{\@chs@def@ult #2}}
\newcommand{\chapterstyle}[1]{\@nameuse{chs@#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Set the \pstyle{default} chapter style.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added code when making the default chapterstyle}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Simplified specification of the default chapterstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{default}{}%
%% \setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
%% \def\chapterheadstart{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}}
%% \def\chapnamefont{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
%% \def\printchaptername{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
%% \def\chapternamenum{\space}
%% \def\chapnumfont{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
%% \def\printchapternum{\chapnumfont \thechapter}
%% \setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
%% \def\afterchapternum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}
%% \def\printchapternonum{}
%% \def\chaptitlefont{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
%% \def\printchaptertitle##1{\chaptitlefont ##1}
%% \setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
%% \def\afterchaptertitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}}
\chapterstyle{default}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@section}
% The \pstyle{section} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
% were a section.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in section
% chapterstyle explicit}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{section}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@article}
% The \pstyle{article} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
% were a section in an \Lpack{article} class document.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article chapterstyle}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in article chapterstyle explicit}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Replaced \cs{space} by \cs{quad} in article chapterstyle
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{article}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace{\beforechapskip}}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
\renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\quad}
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@reparticle}
% The \pstyle{reparticle} chapter style. It replicates the appearance
% of a \cs{section} in an \Lpack{article} class document.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added reparticle chapterstyle (mempatch v4.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{reparticle}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace{\beforechapskip}}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\@hangfrom{\chapnumfont \thechapter\quad}}%
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\reparticle}
% Call this to get division heads to replicate the \Lopt{article} class.
% For example: \\
% \verb?\ifartopt \reparticle \fi? \\
% The \cs{chapter} commands must still be used, though.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{reparticle} (mempatch v4.3)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{reparticle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\reparticle}{%
\chapterstyle{reparticle}
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\large\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\large\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@hangnum}
% The \pstyle{hangnum} style puts the chapter number in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{hangnum}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
\settowidth{\chapindent}{\chapnumfont 999}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\noindent\llap{\makebox[\chapindent][l]{\chapnumfont \thechapter}}}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapindent}
% \begin{macro}{\chs@companion}
% The \pstyle{companion} style is like that in the \textit{\LaTeX{} Companion}
% series. It requires the \cs{chapindent} length. The user needs
% to be careful to have a wide enough spine margin on verso pages
% if the title may appear on a verso page.
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed adjustwidth* to adjustwidth in companion chapterstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\chapindent}
\makechapterstyle{companion}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\scshape}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{\raggedleft\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge}
\setlength{\chapindent}{\marginparsep}
\addtolength{\chapindent}{\marginparwidth}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\begin{adjustwidth}{}{-\chapindent}
\raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1\par\nobreak
\end{adjustwidth}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@demo}
% An exotic chapter style for demonstration purposes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{demo}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{\centering}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \numtoName{\c@chapter}}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\hrule\vskip\onelineskip \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1}
\renewcommand*{\afterchaptertitle}%
{\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip \afterchapskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added chapterstyles: bianchi, bringhurst,
% brotherton, chappel, culver, dash, demo2, ell, Ger,
% lyhne, madsen, pedersen, southall, thatcher, veelo,
% verville, demo3 (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macro}{\chs@bianchi}
% Posted to CTT on 2003/12/09, \textit{New chapter style: chapter vs chapter*}
% by Stefano Bianchi.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{bianchi}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\Large\sffamily\itshape}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{%
\chapnamefont\centering\@chapapp}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \textit{\thechapter}}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\hrule\vskip\onelineskip \centering \chaptitlefont\textbf{##1}\par}
\renewcommand*{\afterchaptertitle}{\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip
\afterchapskip}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\vphantom{\chapnumfont \textit{9}}\afterchapternum}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@bringhurst}
% My bringhurst style.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to bringhurst chapterstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{bringhurst}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
%%% \raggedright\Large\scshape\MakeLowercase{##1}}
\memRTLraggedright\Large\scshape\MakeLowercase{##1}}
\renewcommand*{\afterchaptertitle}{%
\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip\onelineskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@brotherton}
% An extremely simple chapterstyle created by William Adams for Mike
% Brotherton's science fiction novel \textit{Star Dragon}, posted to CTT
% 2006/12/09, \textit{An example of a novel?}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{brotherton}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont
\ifanappendix \thechapter \else \numtoName{\c@chapter}\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@chappell}
% My Chappell style
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{chappell}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{0pt}
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\large\centering}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\large}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\vphantom{\printchaptername \chapnumfont 1}
\afterchapternum
\vskip \onelineskip \vskip -\topskip}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\Large\itshape}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\hrule\vskip\onelineskip \centering\chaptitlefont ##1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@culver}
% By me in an answer to Christopher Culver on CTT,
% \textit{"Biblical" formatting, how?} on 2004/03/29,where I called it
% the `biblical' style.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{culver}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\chapterstyle{article}%
\renewcommand*{\thechapter}{\Roman{chapter}}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{% center number/title
\centering\chapnumfont \thechapter\space\space}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{\centering}
\renewcommand*{\clearforchapter}{}% no new page
\aliaspagestyle{chapter}{headings}}% no special pagestyle
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@dash}
% A very simple style of mine but I couldn't think of a good name for it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{dash}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{5\onelineskip}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\large}
\settoheight{\midchapskip}{\chapnumfont 1}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\centering \chapnumfont
\rule[0.5\midchapskip]{1em}{0.4pt} \thechapter\
\rule[0.5\midchapskip]{1em}{0.4pt}}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{\par\nobreak\vskip 0.5\onelineskip}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{\centering
\vphantom{\chapnumfont 1}\afterchapternum}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Large}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{\centering \chaptitlefont ##1}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{2.5\onelineskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@demo2}
% My second version of the demo chapterstyle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{demo2}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{\centering}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont
\ifanappendix \thechapter \else \numtoName{\c@chapter}\fi}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\hrule\vskip\onelineskip \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1}
\renewcommand*{\afterchaptertitle}{%
\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip \afterchapskip}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{3\baselineskip}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\vphantom{\chapnumfont One}
\afterchapternum%
\vskip\topskip}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{2\onelineskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@demo3}
% My third version of the demo chapterstyle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{demo3}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{\centering}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE\itshape}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont
\ifanappendix \thechapter \else \numtoName{\c@chapter}\fi}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\hrule\vskip\onelineskip \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1}
\renewcommand*{\afterchaptertitle}{%
\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip \afterchapskip}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{0pt}
\setlength{\midchapskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{2\onelineskip}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\vphantom{\chapnumfont One}
\afterchapternum%
\vskip\topskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@ell}
% Another of my styles which I'll probably use for my next book.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{ell}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\settowidth{\chapindent}{\chapnumfont 111}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{\begingroup
\vspace*{\beforechapskip}%
\begin{adjustwidth}{}{-\chapindent}%
\hrulefill
\smash{\rule{0.4pt}{15mm}}
\end{adjustwidth}\endgroup}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\begin{adjustwidth}{}{-\chapindent}
\hfill
\raisebox{10mm}[0pt][0pt]{\chapnumfont \thechapter}%
\hspace*{1em}
\end{adjustwidth}\vspace*{-3.0\onelineskip}}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\vskip\onelineskip
\raggedleft {\chaptitlefont ##1}\par\nobreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@ger}
% Posted to CTT on 2002/04/12 \textit{Fancy Headings, Chapter Headings} by Gerardo Garcia.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{ger}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}
\mbox{}\\\mbox{}\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{0.4pt}\par}
\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{\chaptitlefont ##1
\\\mbox{}\rule[5pt]{\textwidth}{0.4pt}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@lyhne}
% Posted to CTT 2006/02/09 \textit{Glossary}, by Anders Lyhne.
% It requires the \Lpack{graphicx} package. I have modified it to remove the
% new length and adjusted the unnumbered appearance.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{lyhne}{% needs graphicx package
\chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{1.5cm}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{1cm}
\setlength{\midchapskip}{2cm}
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\normalsize\scshape\raggedleft}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\sffamily\raggedleft}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{0.2em}%
\resizebox{!}{2ex}{\chapnamefont\bfseries\sffamily\thechapter}}}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{\par\hspace{1.5cm}\hrule\vspace{0.2cm}}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{\vphantom{\chapnamefont 1}\afterchapternum}
\renewcommand*{\afterchaptertitle}{\vskip 0.2cm
\hrule\vskip\afterchapskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@madsen}
% Posted to CTT on 2003/12/09, \textit{New chapter style: chapter vs chapter*}
% by Lars Madsen.
% This requires the \Lpack{graphicx} package,
% \changes{v1.61803398c}{2009/11/15}{Updated to provide a better
% unnumbered look}
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/05/13}{the unnumbered version may be executed
% in a context where \cs{thechapter} is not weldefined, replaced with
% a 1}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{madsen}{% requires graphicx package
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{%
\normalfont\Large\scshape\raggedleft}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{%
\normalfont\Huge\bfseries\sffamily\raggedleft}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{0.4em}%
\resizebox{!}{4ex}{%
\chapnamefont\bfseries\sffamily\thechapter}%
}%
}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\chapnamefont \phantom{\printchaptername \chapternamenum%
\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{0.4em}%
\resizebox{!}{4ex}{%
\chapnamefont\bfseries\sffamily 1}%
}%
}%
\afterchapternum %
}%
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{%
\par\hspace{1.5cm}\hrule\vskip\midchapskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\colorchapnum}
% \begin{macro}{\colorchaptitle}
% \begin{macro}{\chs@pedersen}
% Posted to CTT 2006/01/31, \textit{Chapter style}, by Troels Pedersen.
% It requires the \Lpack{graphicx} package and possibly the \Lpack{color}
% package. I have used a \cs{sidebar} instead of the original \cs{marginpar},
% and eliminated a new length. The original color specification, the same for
% the title and nunmber, can now be set via \cs{colorchapnum} and
% \cs{colorchaptitle}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\colorchapnum}{}
\newcommand*{\colorchaptitle}{}
\makechapterstyle{pedersen}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{-20pt}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{10pt}
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\itshape}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE\itshape\colorchapnum}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\huge\itshape\colorchaptitle}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\setlength{\midchapskip}{20mm}% was \numberheight
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\sidebar{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\makebox[0pt][l]{%
\resizebox{!}{\midchapskip}{\chapnumfont\thechapter}}}}}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{\chaptitlefont ##1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@southall}
% Style provided by Thomas Dye. I have modified the original to eliminate
% the use of new lengths.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to southall chapterstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
%% Thomas Dye's southall chapter style
\makechapterstyle{southall}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{5\baselineskip}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{36pt}% \headindent
\setlength{\midchapskip}{\textwidth}% \rightblock
\addtolength{\midchapskip}{-\beforechapskip}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace*{2\baselineskip}}
%%% \renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\huge\rmfamily\raggedright}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\huge\rmfamily\memRTLraggedright}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\begin{minipage}[t][\baselineskip][b]{\beforechapskip}
{\vspace{0pt}\chapnumfont%%%\figureversion{lining}
\thechapter}
\end{minipage}}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\hfill\begin{minipage}[t]{\midchapskip}
{\vspace{0pt}\chaptitlefont ##1\par}\end{minipage}}
\renewcommand*{\afterchaptertitle}{%
\par\vspace{\baselineskip}%
\hrulefill \par\nobreak\noindent \vskip \afterchapskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@thatcher}
% Original posted to CTT on 2006/01/18 by Scott Thatcher,
% \textit{memoir: chapter headings capitalize math symbols}. I have modified
% it to cater for multiline titles, appendices, and unnumbered chapters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{thatcher}{%
\chapterstyle{default}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{%
\centerline{\chapnumfont{\@chapapp\ \thechapter}}}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\scshape\MakeLowercase}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{%
\par\centerline{\parbox{0.5in}{\hrulefill}}\par}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\vphantom{\chapnumfont \@chapapp 1}\par
\parbox{0.5in}{}\par}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\large}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
\centering \chaptitlefont\MakeUppercase{##1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@veelo}
% This, from Baastian Veelo, has been noted in the documentation for
% quite a time.
% I have modified the original to eliminate the need for extra lengths.
% It well suits trimmed documents.
% We are scaling the chapter number, which most DVI viewers
% will not display accurately. It requires the graphicx package.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{veelo}{%
% \chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace*{40pt}}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{\par\nobreak\vskip 25pt}
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\flushright}
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\HUGE\bfseries\flushright}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{%
\chapnamefont\MakeUppercase{\@chapapp}}
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}
% \setlength{\numberheight}{18mm}
% \setlength{\barlength}{\paperwidth}
% \addtolength{\barlength}{-\textwidth}
% \addtolength{\barlength}{-\spinemargin}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{18mm}% \numberheight
\setlength{\midchapskip}{\paperwidth}% \barlength
\addtolength{\midchapskip}{-\textwidth}
\addtolength{\midchapskip}{-\spinemargin}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\makebox[0pt][l]{%
\hspace{.8em}%
\resizebox{!}{\beforechapskip}{\chapnumfont \thechapter}%
\hspace{.8em}%
\rule{\midchapskip}{\beforechapskip}%
}%
}%
\makeoddfoot{plain}{}{}{\thepage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@verville}
% I posted the original to CTT on 2005/01/18, \textit{Headers and special
% formatting of sections}, in answer to a question by
% Guy Verville. This version caters for unnumbered chapters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{verville}{%
% \chapterstyle{default}
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{0pt}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\hrule \vskip 0.5\onelineskip
\Huge \centering \thechapter.\ }
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\hrule \vskip 0.5\onelineskip
\Huge \centering}
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}
\setlength{\midchapskip}{0pt}
\renewcommand*{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
##1 \par
\vskip 0.5\onelineskip
\hrule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@crosshead}
% A centered chapterstyle (from Bringhurst)
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added chapterstyles: crosshead, dowding,
% komalike, ntglike, tandh, and wilsondob}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{crosshead}{%
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{2\onelineskip}%
\renewcommand*{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace{\beforechapskip}}%
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{2\onelineskip \@plus .2\onelineskip
\@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\LARGE\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\chapnumfont}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{%
\centering\chapnumfont \thechapter\quad}%
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{\centering}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@dowding}
% A centered chapterstyle (from Dowding's \textit{Finer Points})
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{dowding}{%
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{2\onelineskip}%
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{1.5\onelineskip \@plus .1\onelineskip
\@minus 0.167\onelineskip}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\chapnamefont}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\centering\chapnumfont \ifanappendix \thechapter
\else \numtoName{\c@chapter}\fi}%
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\itshape\huge\centering}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{%
\vphantom{\printchaptername}\vskip\midchapskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@komalike}
% A chapterstyle approximating the KOMA script style (\texttt{scrbook.cls})
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{komalike}{%
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{2\onelineskip}%
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{1.5\onelineskip \@plus .1\onelineskip
\@minus 0.167\onelineskip}%
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\LARGE\sffamily\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}%
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\sffamily\bfseries}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@ntglike}
% A chapterstyle approximating the NTG style (\texttt{boek.cls})
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{ntglike}{%
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt \@plus 20pt}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@tandh}
% A chapterstyle based on Thames \& Hudson \textit{Typography}.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to tandh chapterstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{tandh}{%
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{1\onelineskip}%
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{2\onelineskip \@plus .1\onelineskip
\@minus 0.167\onelineskip}%
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\quad}%
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}%
%%% \renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\chapnumfont\raggedright}}
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\chapnumfont\memRTLraggedright}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@wilsondob}
% A chapterstyle based on Adrian Wilson's \textit{Design of books}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{wilsondob}{%
\setlength{\beforechapskip}{2\onelineskip}%
\setlength{\afterchapskip}{4\onelineskip \@plus .1\onelineskip
\@minus 0.167\onelineskip}%
\renewcommand*{\printchaptername}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapternamenum}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge\itshape}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternum}{\raggedleft\chapnumfont \thechapter\quad}%
\renewcommand*{\afterchapternum}{}%
\renewcommand*{\chaptitlefont}{\chapnumfont}%
\renewcommand*{\printchapternonum}{\raggedleft}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Lower level headings}
%
% These commands all make use of \cs{@startsection}. However,
% for the purposes of the class the kernel version needs modification
% to support:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item make short pages (where a section heading is moved to the top
% of the next page) ragged bottom;
% \item provide headings with two optional arguments.
% \end{itemize}
%
%
% We will tweak \cs{@startsection} so that a short page (where a section
% heading is moved from the bottom of the page to the top of the next)
% can be set \cs{raggedbottom}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifraggedbottomsection}
% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottomsectiontrue}
% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottomsectionfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottomsection}
% \begin{macro}{\normalbottomsection}
% \cs{raggedbottomsectiontrue} for ragged short pages.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{ifraggedbottomsection}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{raggedbottomsection} and
% \cs{normalbottomsection}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifraggedbottomsection
\raggedbottomsectionfalse
\newcommand*{\raggedbottomsection}{\raggedbottomsectiontrue}
\newcommand*{\normalbottomsection}{\raggedbottomsectionfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bottomsectionskip}
% Decreasing this length increases short page bottom flushness.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{bottomsectionskip}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\bottomsectionskip}
\setlength{\bottomsectionskip}{10mm}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We will add a second optional argument for \cs{section}, etc.
% See the \ctt{} thread \textit{`Long headers'} 15 Jan 2003.
%
% The kernel \cs{@dblarg} is used in situations where the default
% value for an optional argument is the same as the required argument.
% Schematically, \\
% \verb?\@dblarg -> Main, Main? \\
% The macros \cs{@trplargomm} and \cs{@trplargoom} are extensions to this
% idea for two optional arguments.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@trplargomm}
% \begin{macro}{\@xtrplargomm}
% \begin{macro}{\@xxtrplarg}
% \verb?\@trplargomm -> Opt, Main, Main?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@trplargomm}[1]{%
\@ifnextchar[{\@xtrplargomm{#1}}%
{\@xxtrplarg{#1}}}
\long\def\@xtrplargomm#1[#2]{\@dblarg{#1[#2]}}
\newcommand{\@xxtrplarg}[2]{#1[{#2}][{#2}]{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@trplargoom}
% \begin{macro}{\@xtrplargoom}
% \verb?\@trplargoom -> Opt, Opt, Main?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@trplargoom}[1]{%
\@ifnextchar[{\@xtrplargoom{#1}}%
{\@xxtrplarg{#1}}}
\long\def\@xtrplargoom#1[#2]{%
\@ifnextchar[{#1[{#2}]}%
{#1[{#2}][{#2}]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsecinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memsecstarinfo}
% \verb?\memsecinfo{secname}{\thenum}{toc}{head}{title}? \\
% \verb?\memsecstarinfo{secname}{title}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsecinfo}[5]{}
\newcommand{\memsecstarinfo}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msecn@me}
% Change kernel \cs{@startsection} to: \\
% \begin{itemize}
% \item Make short pages raggedbottom. This is based on the thread
% \textit{Can \cs{flushbottom} and \cs{section} be made to live together?}
% on \ctt{} in September 2002.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Modified \cs{@startsection} for raggedbottoming}
% \item add an extra optional argument.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added extra optional arg to \cs{@startsection}
% (from patch v1.4)}
% \item make sure it is not effected by a non-zero \cs{parskip}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/02}{added the above feature}
% \end{itemize}
% The original is in \file{ltsect.dtx}. \\
% \cs{@startsection}\marg{name}\marg{level}\marg{indent} \\
% \hspace*{1.5in} \marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@startsection}[6]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/02/07}{Added float block hook}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{#1block}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do raggedbottom stuff.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifraggedbottomsection\if@nobreak\else
\vskip\z@\@plus\bottomsectionskip
\penalty\z@
\vskip\z@\@plus -\bottomsectionskip
\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the section name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\m@msecn@me{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The original code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
\par
\@tempskipa #4\relax
\@afterindenttrue
\ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
\@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
\fi
\if@nobreak
\everypar{}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Slight change such that the effect of \cs{parskip} is cancelled
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/02}{Adding a negative \cs{parskip} seem to
% be able to remove the effect of a non-zero \cs{parskip}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
\addvspace{-\parskip}% <--- added 2011/03/02
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% For the extra optional argument, change the original \verb?\@dblarg{\@sect{...?
% below to \verb?\@trplargoom{\M@sect{...?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifstar
{\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
{\@trplargoom{\M@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/02}{Added the change of the kernel \cs{@xsect}}
% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}
% In order to fulfill removing the effect that a non-zero
% \cs{parskip} has on the sectional spacing, we also have to patch
% the kernel \cs{@xsect}. (The original is found in latex.ltx)
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xsect#1{%
\@tempskipa #1\relax
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
\par \nobreak
\vskip \@tempskipa
\vskip-\parskip%<--- added 2011/03/02
\@afterheading
\else
\@nobreakfalse
\global\@noskipsectrue
\everypar{%
\if@noskipsec
\global\@noskipsecfalse
{\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
\clubpenalty\@M
\begingroup \@svsechd \endgroup
\unskip
\@tempskipa #1\relax
\hskip -\@tempskipa
\else
\clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
\everypar{}%
\fi}%
\fi
\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% %
% \begin{macro}{\M@sect}
% At least the \Lpack{hyperref} and \Lpack{nameref} packages, and
% possibly other packages, modify the kernel \cs{@sect} assuming 8 args.
% That's why I've called my version, which has 9 args, something
% else (i.e., \cs{M@sect}). This version also has the support
% for title referencing. \\
% \cs{M@sect}\marg{name}\marg{level}\marg{indent}\marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}\\ \hspace*{0.5in} \oarg{toc}\oarg{head}\marg{title}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{M@sect}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\M@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7][#8]#9{%
\ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{#8}\else\M@gettitle{#7}\fi
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
\let\@svsec\@empty
\memsecinfo{#1}{}{#7}{#8}{#9}%
\else
\refstepcounter{#1}%
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
\memsecinfo{#1}{\@nameuse{the#1}}{#7}{#8}{#9}%
\fi
\@tempskipa #5\relax
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
\begingroup
#6{%
\@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
\interlinepenalty \@M #9\@@par}%
\endgroup
\csname #1mark\endcsname{#8}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
\fi
#7}%
\else
\def\@svsechd{%
#6{\hskip #3\relax
\@svsec #9}%
\csname #1mark\endcsname{#8}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
\fi
#7}}%
\fi
\@xsect{#5}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
% Add hook for name reference to \cs{section*} etc. \\
% \cs{@ssect}\marg{indent}\marg{beforeskip}\marg{afterskip}\marg{style}\marg{title}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Used corrected number of arguments to
% \cs{memsecstarinfo} in \cs{@ssect} (Gabriel Guernik, mempatch v4.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@mem@old@ssect\@ssect
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
\M@gettitle{#5}%
\memsecstarinfo{\m@msecn@me}{#5}%
\@mem@old@ssect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\section}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a \verb?\Large\bfseries? font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\section}{%
\sechook%
\@startsection{section}{1}% level 1
{\secindent}% heading indent
{\beforesecskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersecskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\secheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsechook}
% \cs{sechook} is called at the start of a \cs{section} and
% \cs{setsechook}\marg{code} redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\sechook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\secindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\secheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsecheadstyle}
% \cs{secindent} is the indentation of the section heading from the left margin,
% \cs{beforesecskip} and \cs{aftersecskip} specify the white space before
% and after the heading, and \cs{secheadstyle} specifies the heading style.
% These are set to the default values for the \Lpack{book} class,
% except that the heading will be \cs{raggedright}, thus preventing
% hyphenation. The
% \cs{set...} commands are for the user to change the values.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{@009/07/17}{Added bidi support to default secheadstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\secindent}
\newcommand{\setsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\secindent}{#1}}
\setsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesecskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesecskip{-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersecskip}{#1}}
\setaftersecskip{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\secheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\secheadstyle}{#1}}
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a \verb?\large\bfseries? font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsection}{%
\subsechook%
\@startsection{subsection}{2}% level 2
{\subsecindent}% heading indent
{\beforesubsecskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersubsecskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\subsecheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsechook}
% \cs{subsechook} is called at the start of a \cs{subsection} and
% \cs{setsubsechook}\marg{code} redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsechook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subsecheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling \cs{subsection} headings.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to default subsec headstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subsecindent}
\newcommand{\setsubsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\subsecindent}{#1}}
\setsubsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesubsecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesubsecskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersubsecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersubsecskip}{#1}}
\setaftersubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{#1}}
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a \verb?\normalsize\bfseries? font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsubsection}{%
\subsubsechook%
\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}% level 3
{\subsubsecindent}% heading indent
{\beforesubsubsecskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersubsubsecskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\subsubsecheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsechook}
% \cs{subsubsechook} is called at the start of a \cs{subsubsection} and
% \cs{setsubsubsechook}\marg{code} redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsubsechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsubsechook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling \cs{subsubsection} headings.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to default subsubsec headstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subsubsecindent}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsecindent}[1]{%
\setlength{\subsubsecindent}{#1}}
\setsubsubsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesubsubsecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\beforesubsubsecskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersubsubsecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubsubsecskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\aftersubsubsecskip}{#1}}
\setaftersubsubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}[1]{%
\renewcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{#1}}
%%% \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
% By default the heading is set in a \verb?\normalsize\bfseries? font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paragraph}{%
\parahook%
\@startsection{paragraph}{4}% level 4
{\paraindent}% heading indent
{\beforeparaskip}% skip before the heading
{\afterparaskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\paraheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parahook}
% \begin{macro}{\setparahook}
% \cs{parahook} is called at the start of a \cs{paragraph} and
% \cs{setparahook}\marg{code} redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\parahook}{}
\newcommand{\setparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\parahook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\paraindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforeparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\paraheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforeparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setafterparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setparaheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling \cs{paragraph} headings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\paraindent}
\newcommand{\setparaindent}[1]{\setlength{\paraindent}{#1}}
\setparaindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforeparaskip
\newcommand{\setbeforeparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforeparaskip}{#1}}
\setbeforeparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newskip\afterparaskip
\newcommand{\setafterparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\afterparaskip}{#1}}
\setafterparaskip{-1em}
\newcommand{\paraheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setparaheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\paraheadstyle}{#1}}
\setparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
% By default the heading is set in a \verb?\normalsize\bfseries? font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subparagraph}{%
\subparahook%
\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}% level 5
{\subparaindent}% heading indent
{\beforesubparaskip}% skip before the heading
{\aftersubparaskip}% skip after the heading
{\normalfont\subparaheadstyle}} % font
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparahook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparahook}
% \cs{subparahook} is called at the start of a \cs{subparagraph} and
% \cs{setsubparahook}\marg{code} redefines it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subparahook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subparahook}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subparaheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling \cs{subparagraph} headings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subparaindent}
\newcommand{\setsubparaindent}[1]{%
\setlength{\subparaindent}{#1}}
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}
\newskip\beforesubparaskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubparaskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\beforesubparaskip}{#1}}
\setbeforesubparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newskip\aftersubparaskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubparaskip}[1]{%
\setlength{\aftersubparaskip}{#1}}
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}
\newcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubparaheadstyle}[1]{%
\renewcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{#1}}
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sethangfrom}
% The macro \cs{sethangfrom}\marg{code} is a user-level command
% for changing the definition of \cs{@hangfrom}. Use \verb?#1? in \meta{code}
% for the argument to \cs{@hangfrom} (or \verb?##1? if used inside another macro).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{sethangfrom}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sethangfrom}[1]{\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumformat}
% The macro \cs{setsecnumformat}\marg{code} is a user-level command
% for changing the definition of \cs{@seccntformat}. Use \verb?#1? in \meta{code}
% for the argument to \cs{@seccntformat} (or \verb?##1? if used inside another macro).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{setsecnumformat}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsecnumformat}[1]{\renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangsecnum}
% \begin{macro}{\defaultsecnum}
% These are declarations for putting sectional numbers in the margin,
% or the default sectional number formatting.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{hangsecnum} and \cs{defaultsecnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangsecnum}{%
\def\@seccntformat##1{\llap{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}}
\newcommand{\defaultsecnum}{%
\def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Anonymous headings}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainbreak}
% \cs{plainbreak}\marg{num} generates \meta{num} blanks lines and
% suppresses the indentation of a following paragraph. The starred
% version, \cs{plainbreak*}, does not suppress paragraph indentation.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{plainbreak}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spbreak}{\@pbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@spbreak}
% These are the internal forms for the two versions of \cs{plainbreak}.
% The code for \cs{@pbreak} is almost a straight copy of code posted to
% \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 2001/03/26.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@pbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
\penalty -20
\vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
\@afterindentfalse
\@afterheading}
\newcommand*{\@spbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
\penalty -20
\vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
\@afterindenttrue
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fancybreak}
% \cs{fancybreak}\marg{text} typesets \meta{text} centered. For example,
% \verb?\fancybreak{{*}\\{* * *}\\{*}}?. It suppresses indentation of the
% following paragraph. The starred version leaves indentation as is.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{fancybreak}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Tweaked \cs{fancybreak} to remove underfull hbox}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed fancybreak code to end the paragraph
% it started (Dan Leucking mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\fancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@sfbreak}{\@fbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@sfbreak}
% These are the internal forms for the two versions of \cs{fancybreak}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@fbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}%%\null
\par
%% \penalty -20
%% \vskip -\onelineskip
\@afterindentfalse
\@afterheading}
\newcommand{\@sfbreak}[1]{\par
\penalty -100
\noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}%%\null
\par
%% \penalty -20
%% \vskip -\onelineskip
\@afterindenttrue
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainfancybreak}
% The \cs{plainfancybreak}\marg{space}\marg{num}\marg{text} acts
% like \cs{plainbreak}\marg{num} in the middle of a page and like
% \cs{fancybreak}\marg{text} at the bottom of a page. The \meta{space}
% argument is the vertical space required for the \meta{num} blank lines
% and some additional lines of text. From experiments, it seems that
% \meta{space} should be at least (3+\meta{num}) lines (\cs{onelineskip}).
% There is also a starred version, \cs{plainfancybreak*}, to match the other
% starred break commands.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{plainfancybreak} and supporting macros}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainfancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreak}{\@pfbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreak}
% These are the internal macros for the unstarred and starred versions
% of \cs{plainfancybreak}. They essentially do the same thing, except they call,
% respectively, the unstarred and starred internal versions of \cs{plainbreak}
% and \cs{fancybreak}. The code for checking the amount of space left on the
% page is from an early, and abandoned, version of the code for \cs{needspace}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pfbreak}[3]{\par
\@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
\ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@fbreak{#3}\else \@pbreak{#2}\fi}
\newcommand{\@spfbreak}[3]{\par
\@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
\ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@sfbreak{#3}\else \@spbreak{#2}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% From the thread \textit{Customizing section hooks in memoir.cls} on \ctt{}
% in October 2002 it appeared that \cs{plainfancybreak} may be fragile.
% Donald Arseneau said that \cs{plainfancybreak} guessed at the amount
% of space available and gave code based on a modified output routine
% to make it more robust. The following code is based on that thread.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lots of code for new \cs{pfbreak}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltyabovepfbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltybelowpfbreak}
% Penalities for communication with the output routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pen@ltyabovepfbreak}{2}
\newcommand*{\pen@ltybelowpfbreak}{-4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakskip}
% The vertical space taken by the plain and fancy breaks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\pfbreakskip}
\setlength{\pfbreakskip}{2\baselineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakdisplay}
% This is the fancybreak display, which must fit into \cs{pfbreakskip}
% vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{*\quad*\quad*}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbre@kdispl@y}
% Typesets \cs{pfbreakdisplay} vertically and horizontally centered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\pfbre@kdispl@y{\vbox to 1\pfbreakskip{\vss
\hb@xt@ \columnwidth{\hss \pfbreakdisplay \hss}%
\vss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nopfbreakOutput}
% Save the current output routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\nopfbreakOutput{\the\output}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakOutput}
% Special output to handle the \cs{pfbreak}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\pfbreakOutput{%
\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
\nopfbreakOutput
\pfbre@kdispl@y
\nobreak
\vskip-\pfbreakskip
\else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
\unvbox 255\relax
\nobreak
\vskip-\pfbreakskip
\pfbre@kdispl@y
\break
\else
\nopfbreakOutput
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\output}
% Use the new \cs{pfbreak} output routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\output={\pfbreakOutput}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreak}
% Typesets a plain break in the middle of the page, otherwise
% a fancybreak at either the bottom or top of the page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pfbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreakgap}{\@pfbreakgap}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreakgap}
% Unstarred version of \cs{pfbreak}.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/06}{fixed \cs{@pfbreakgab} kudos to DA for
% the fix}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pfbreakgap}{%
\par {%
\skip@\lastskip
\nobreak
\vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
\else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
\else\ifinner 0pt
\else \pagedepth
\fi \fi \fi
\vskip -\skip@
\ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
\advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
\fi
\penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
\prevdepth\z@ % added
\vskip\skip@
\penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
}
\@afterindentfalse
\@afterheading
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreakgap}
% Starred version of \cs{pfbreak}.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/06}{fixed \cs{@pfbreakgab} kudos to DA for
% the fix}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@spfbreakgap}{%
\par {%
\skip@\lastskip
\nobreak
\vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
\else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
\else\ifinner 0pt
\else \pagedepth
\fi \fi \fi
\vskip -\skip@
\ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
\advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
\fi
\penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
\prevdepth\z@ % added
\vskip\skip@
\penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
}
\@afterindenttrue
\@afterheading
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% While on the subject of breaks\ldots
%
% \begin{macro}{\noprelistbreak}
% Putting this immediately before a list (e.g., \Lenv{itemize}) should
% prevent a page break at that point.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{noprelistbreak}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\noprelistbreak}{\@nobreaktrue\nopagebreak}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Division head styles}
%
% The styles of the division heads should go together. As an aid the
% class supplies some ready made collections.
% \changes{v1.6180}{2008/01/30}{Added division head styles}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadstyles}
% \begin{macro}{\headstyles}
% \begin{macro}{\@hds@def@ult}
% \begin{macro}{\hds@default}
% \cs{makeheadstyles}\marg{name}\marg{code} creates the \meta{name} collection
% of division head styles, defined by \meta{code}. \cs{headstyles}\marg{name}
% makes the \meta{name} division head styles the current styles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeheadstyles}[2]{%
\@namedef{hds@#1}{\@hds@def@ult #2}}
\newcommand*{\headstyles}[1]{\@nameuse{hds@#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{@hds@def@ult} is the default set of division head styles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@hds@def@ult}{%
% Default \cs{book} style
% \begin{macrocode}
% book
\renewcommand*{\beforebookskip}{\null\vfil}%
\renewcommand*{\midbookskip}{\par\vskip 20pt}%
\renewcommand*{\afterbookskip}{\vfil\newpage}%
\renewcommand*{\booknamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\booknumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\booktitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\printbookname}{\booknamefont \bookname}%
\renewcommand*{\booknamenum}{\space}%
\renewcommand*{\printbooknum}{\booknumfont \thebook}%
\renewcommand*{\printbooktitle}[1]{\booktitlefont{##1}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Default \cs{part} style
% \begin{macrocode}
% part
\renewcommand*{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}%
\renewcommand*{\midpartskip}{\par\vskip 20pt}%
\renewcommand*{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}%
\renewcommand*{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\printpartname}{\partnamefont \partname}%
\renewcommand*{\partnamenum}{\space}%
\renewcommand*{\printpartnum}{\partnumfont \thepart}%
\renewcommand*{\printparttitle}[1]{\parttitlefont{##1}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Default \cs{chapter} style.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@chs@def@ult% default chapterstyle
% \end{macrocode}
% Default \cs{section} style
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to default sec headstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
% section
\setsechook{}
\setsecindent{\z@}%
\setbeforesecskip{-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
\setaftersecskip{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}%
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Default \cs{subsection} style
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to default subsec headstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
% subsection
\setsubsechook{}%
\setsubsecindent{\z@}%
\setbeforesubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
\setaftersubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Default \cs{subsubsection} style
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to default subsubsec headstyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
% subsubsection
\setsubsubsechook{}%
\setsubsubsecindent{\z@}%
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
%%% \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Default \cs{paragraph} style
% \begin{macrocode}
% paragraph
\setparahook{}%
\setparaindent{\z@}%
\setbeforeparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Default \cs{paragraph} style
% \begin{macrocode}
% subparagraph
\setsubparahook{}%
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Set up and use the default head styles
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{default}{}
\headstyles{default}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addperiod}
% Puts a period at the end of its argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addperiod}[1]{#1.}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@memman}
% Head styles used in the \textit{The Memoir Class} user guide. In this,
% as the later ones, only changes from the defaults need specifying.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to the memman headstyles}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{memman}{%
% book changes
\renewcommand*{\booknamefont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\booknumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\booktitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\midbookskip}{\par\vskip 2\onelineskip}%
% part changes
\renewcommand*{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand*{\midpartskip}{\par\vskip 2\onelineskip}%
% chapter
\chapterstyle{demo3}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-1.333\onelineskip
\@plus -0.5\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
\setaftersecskip{0.667\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\scshape\raggedright}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\scshape\memRTLraggedright}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\raggedright}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\memRTLraggedright}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@bringhurst}
% Head styles based on Bringhurst's book
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to bringhurst headstyles}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{bringhurst}{%
% chapter
\chapterstyle{bringhurst}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-1\onelineskip
\@plus -0.5\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
\setaftersecskip{1\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\raggedright\scshape\MakeLowercase}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\memRTLraggedright\scshape\MakeLowercase}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-1.0\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsecskip{1.0\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\sethangfrom{\noindent ####1}\normalfont\itshape\raggedright}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\sethangfrom{\noindent ####1}\normalfont\itshape\memRTLraggedright}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{-1em}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\scshape\MakeLowercase}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@crosshead}
% Head styles based on one of Bringhurst's suggestions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{crosshead}{%
\chapterstyle{crosshead}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-1.25\onelineskip
\@plus -0.5\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
\setaftersecskip{0.75\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\centering\MakeUppercase}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-1.25\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsecskip{0.75\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\centering\bfseries}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-.667\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape\MakeLowercase}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{-.667\onelineskip
\@plus -02.5\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setafterparaskip{.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\itshape}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\scshape\MakeLowercase}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@dowding}
% Head styles based on Dowding's \textit{Finer Points}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{dowding}{%
% chapter
\chapterstyle{dowding}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-2\onelineskip
\@plus -0.5\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
\setaftersecskip{1\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\centering\MakeUppercase}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-1.2\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsecskip{0.8\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\scshape\centering\MakeLowercase}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\itshape}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@komalike}
% Head styles based on KOMA script classes (\texttt{scrbook.cls}).
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to komalike headstyles}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{komalike}{%
% part
\renewcommand*{\partnamefont}{\huge\sffamily\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\partnumfont}{\huge\sffamily\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\parttitlefont}{\huge\sffamily\bfseries}%
% chapter
\chapterstyle{komalike}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
\setaftersecskip{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}%
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\Large\sffamily\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\Large\sffamily\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
\setaftersubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
%%% \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@ntglike}
% Head styles based on the NTG classes (\texttt{boek.cls}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{ntglike}{%
% part
\renewcommand*{\partnamefont}{\Large\bfseries\MakeUppercase}%
\renewcommand*{\partnumfont}{\Large\bfseries}%
\renewcommand*{\parttitlefont}{\Large\MakeUppercase}%
% chapter
\chapterstyle{ntglike}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-2\onelineskip
\@plus -1\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
\setaftersecskip{0.5\onelineskip}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\large\bfseries}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-1\onelineskip
\@plus -.5\onelineskip \@minus -.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsecskip{0.01\onelineskip}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-1\onelineskip
\@plus -.5\onelineskip \@minus -.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{0.01\onelineskip}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\slshape}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\slshape}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\slshape}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@tandh}
% Head styles based on Thames \& Hudson \textit{Typography}.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to tandh headstyles}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{tandh}{%
% chapter
\chapterstyle{tandh}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-2\onelineskip
\@plus -0.5\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
\setaftersecskip{1\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\raggedright\MakeUppercase}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\memRTLraggedright\MakeUppercase}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-1.2\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsecskip{0.8\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\Large\itshape\raggedright}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\Large\itshape\memRTLraggedright}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\memRTLraggedright}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hds@wilsondob}
% Head styles based on Adrian Wilson's \textit{The Design of Books}.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to wilsondob headstyles}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadstyles{wilsondob}{%
% chapter
\chapterstyle{wilsondob}
% section
\setbeforesecskip{-1.333\onelineskip
\@plus -0.5\onelineskip \@minus -.5\onelineskip}%
\setaftersecskip{0.667\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\raggedright\MakeUppercase}%
\setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\memRTLraggedright\MakeUppercase}%
% subsection
\setbeforesubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\Large\itshape\raggedright}%
\setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\Large\itshape\memRTLraggedright}%
% subsubsection
\setbeforesubsubsecskip{-0.667\onelineskip
\@plus -0.25\onelineskip \@minus -0.25\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubsubsecskip{0.333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip}%
%%% \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\raggedright\scshape\MakeLowercase}%
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\memRTLraggedright\scshape\MakeLowercase}%
% paragraph
\setbeforeparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setafterparaskip{-1em}%
\setparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}%
% subparagraph
\setsubparaindent{\parindent}%
\setbeforesubparaskip{1.0\onelineskip
\@plus 0.5\onelineskip \@minus 0.2\onelineskip}%
\setaftersubparaskip{-1em}%
\setsubparaheadstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape\addperiod}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Appendices}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifanappendix}
% \begin{macro}{\anappendixtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\anappendixfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
% In the standard \Lpack{book} class the \cs{appendix} command does the
% following:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item Resets the chapter and section counters to zero
% \item Sets \cs{@chapapp} to \cs{appendixname}.
% \item Redefines \cs{thechapter} to produce alphabetic appendix numbers.
% \end{itemize}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{ifanappendix} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifanappendix
\anappendixfalse
\newcommand{\appendix}{\par
\setcounter{chapter}{0}%
\setcounter{section}{0}%
\gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
\gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
\anappendixtrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% This class provides additional appendixing capabilities.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage*}
% The command to typeset a page announcing the start of the appendices.
% It is based on the \cs{part} definition. The normal version
% makes an entry in the ToC but the starred version does not.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Changed implementation of \cs{appendixpage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\appendixpage}{%
\@ifstar{\@sapppage}{\@apppage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memapppageinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memapppagestarinfo}
% \verb?\memapppageinfo{\appendixpagename}? \\
% \verb?\memapppagestarinfo{\appendixpagename}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memapppageinfo}[1]{}
\newcommand{\memapppagestarinfo}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@apppage}
% \cs{@apppage} typesets an appendix page and makes an entry in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@apppage{%
\@setuppart
\addappheadtotoc
\partmark{\appendixpagename}%
\memapppageinfo{\appendixpagename}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sapppage}
% \cs{@sapppage} typesets an appendix page and does not make an entry in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@sapppage{%
\@setuppart
\partmark{\appendixpagename}%
\memapppagestarinfo{\appendixpagename}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
\@endpart}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc}
% This command adds an `appendices' line to the ToC. The style is the same
% as used in \Lpack{tocbibind} for the `List of figures' line. That is,
% as a Chapter heading.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{phantomsection} to \cs{addappheadtotoc}
% (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addappheadtotoc{%
\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\appendixtocname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ppsavesec}
% \begin{macro}{\@pprestoresec}
% \begin{macro}{\@ppsaveapp}
% \begin{macro}{\restoreapp}
% For the \Lenv{appendices} environment we need to save and restore the
% main document division number and the appendix number. The \cs{restoreapp}
% command is the one for the user.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{@ppsavesec}
\newcounter{@ppsaveapp}
\setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{0}
\newcommand{\@ppsavesec}{%
\setcounter{@ppsavesec}{\value{chapter}}}
\newcommand{\@pprestoresec}{%
\setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsavesec}}}
\newcommand{\@ppsaveapp}{%
\setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{\value{chapter}}}
\newcommand{\restoreapp}{%
\setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsaveapp}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@resets@pp}
% Resets the appropriate sectioning counters and names. This does almost
% exactly
% what the default \cs{appendix} command does, except that it saves and
% restores sectional numbering. It saves the sectional number at the start
% and restores the appendix number at the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@resets@pp}{%
\par
\@ppsavesec
\setcounter{section}{0}%
\setcounter{chapter}{0}%
\renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
\renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
\restoreapp
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{appendices}
% This is the heart of the package. Start it off by doing the resetting
% done by the \cs{appendix} command but also save the main counters. At the
% end of the environment save the appendix number and restore the main counters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{appendices}%
{\@resets@pp\anappendixtrue}%
{\@ppsaveapp\@pprestoresec\anappendixfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setthesection}
% The user commands for specifying the numbering style for subappendices.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setthesection}{\thechapter.\Alph{section}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@resets@ppsub}
% Similar to \cs{@resets@pp} except that it is for use within the
% \Lenv{subappendices} environment; as such, it is a bit simpler.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@resets@ppsub}{
\par
\setcounter{section}{0}
\renewcommand{\thesection}{\setthesection}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnamesubappendix}
% \begin{macro}{\namesubappendixtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\namesubappendixfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\namedsubappendices}
% \begin{macro}{\unnamedsubappendices}
% Switch for adding an `appendix' name before subappendix numbers.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Added \cs{ifnamesubappendix}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{namedsubappendices} and
% \cs{unnamedsubappendices}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnamesubappendix
\namesubappendixfalse
\newcommand*{\namedsubappendices}{\namesubappendixtrue}
\newcommand*{\unnamedsubappendices}{\namesubappendixfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{subappendices}
% The environment for subappendices. Start it off by doing the resetting
% of the \cs{section} command.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Modified subappendices environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subappendices}{%
\@resets@ppsub
% \end{macrocode}
% Change the definition of \cs{addappheadtotoc} to give a \texttt{section} entry.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed bookmark for \cs{appendixpage} (mempatch v2.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addappheadtotoc{\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixtocname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% To implement the naming we do cunning things with the
% \cs{@seccntformat} command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnamesubappendix
\def\sectionname{\appendixname}
\def\@seccntformat##1{\@ifundefined{##1name}%
{}{\csname ##1name\endcsname\ }%
\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% That's it.
% \begin{macrocode}
}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@formatsecmark@pp}
% Formats the page header for a redefined \cs{sectionmark}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@formatsecmark@pp}[1]{%
\MakeUppercase{\appendixname\space
\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
\thesection\quad
\fi
#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Appendixpage-like pages}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{newleadpage} and friends (mempatch v3.0)}
%
%
% This capability was suggested to me by Lars Madsen on 2004/11/28.
%
% \begin{macro}{\leadpagetoclevel}
% \begin{macro}{\newleadpage}
% \begin{macro}{\renewleadpage}
% \verb?\newleadpage[]{}{}? creates new macros
% called \verb?\cmdname? and \verb?\cmdname*? that when called typeset a
% page like an Appendixpage, with a title \verb?<title>? using
% page style \verb?<page-style>? (default empty). The
% plain version adds an entry to the ToC but the starred \verb?\cmdname*?
% does not. \cs{renewleadpage} changes the definitions.
%
% The ToC entry style is set by \cs{leadpagetoclevel} (default chapter). To have a part-type entry: \\
% \verb?\renewcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{part}?. \\
% The \cs{partmark} command is used if you need to mark the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\leadpagetoclevel}{chapter}
\newcommand*{\newleadpage}[3][empty]{%
\@namedef{#2}{\@ifstar{\dlfm@msapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
{\dlfm@mapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}}}
\newcommand*{\renewleadpage}[3][empty]{%
\@namedef{#2}{\@ifstar{\dlfm@msapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
{\dlfm@mapppage{#1}{#2}{#3}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memleadpageinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memleadpagestarinfo}
% \verb?\memleadpageinfo{pstyle}{name}{title}? \\
% \verb?\memleadpagestarinfo{pstyle}{name}{title}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memleadpageinfo}[3]{}
\newcommand{\memleadpagestarinfo}[3]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@msapppage}
% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@mapppage}
% Implement the starred and regular versions of \verb?\(re)newleadpage?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\dlfm@msapppage}[3]{%
\@setuppart
\partmark{#3}%
\memleadpagestarinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{#3}\par
\thispagestyle{#1}}%
\dlfm@m@endpart{#1}}
\newcommand*{\dlfm@mapppage}[3]{%
\@setuppart
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{\leadpagetoclevel}{#3}%
\partmark{#3}%
\memleadpageinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
{\centering
\interlinepenalty \@M
\normalfont
\printparttitle{#3}\par
\thispagestyle{#1}}%
\dlfm@m@endpart{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dlfm@m@endpart}
% Finishes off a part-like page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\dlfm@m@endpart}[1]{%
\if@twoside
\if@openright
\null
\thispagestyle{#1}%
\newpage
\fi
\fi
\if@tempswa
\twocolumn
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Paragraphs}
%
% Much of the code in this section is taken from my \textit{Glisterings}
% columns~\cite{GLISTER07,GLISTER08}.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added several new paragraph types}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memorigdbs}
% \begin{macro}{\memorigpar}
% \begin{macro}{\atcentercr}
% \cs{memorigdbs} saves the original definition of \verb?\\? and
% \cs{memorigpar} saves the original \cs{par}. The macro \cs{atcentercr}
% provides a user call to \cs{@centercr}. These could come in handy for
% odd paragraph shapes.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{memorigdbs} and
% \cs{memorigpar} \cs{atcentercr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\memorigdbs\\
\let\memorigpar\par
\let\atcentercr\@centercr
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Normal (block) paragraphs}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\flushleftright}
% Sets the paragraphing to \LaTeX's normal form.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Used \cs{@flushglue} in \cs{flushleftright} and
% \cs{centerlastline} (mempatch v4.7)}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Extended \cs{flushleftright} to set all
% the regular paragraphing controls}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\flushleftright}{%
\let\\\memorigdbs
\leftskip\z@skip
\rightskip\leftskip
\parfillskip\@flushglue
\everypar{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenottooshort}
% This declaration \cs{linenottooshort}\oarg{length} specifies paragraphs
% such that the last line is at least about \meta{length} long (the default
% is 4em).
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{linenottooshort} paragraph}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\linenottooshort}[1][4em]{%
\@tempdima=\hsize
\advance\@tempdima -#1
\leftskip\z@skip
\rightskip\leftskip
\parfillskip=\@tempdima \@minus \@tempdima}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\russianpar}
% Using \cs{russianpar} instead of \cs{par} to end a paragraph causes it
% to be set according to Russian typography, where the last line of a
% multiline paragraph must be either at least as
% long as \cs{parindent} and have at least \cs{parindent} space at the
% right, or it must be flushleft and flushright.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{russianpar} paragraph}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\russianpar}{\ifhmode\unskip
\strut\vadjust{}\nobreak
\discretionary{}%
{\hbox{\hskip2\parindent
\vrule depth 273sp width 0sp height \ht\strutbox}}%
{\hbox{\hskip\parindent}}%
\hskip-2\parindent \@minus 2\parindent
\hskip\hsize \@minus \hsize
\kern\z@ \parfillskip\z@
\memorigpar
\ifdim\prevdepth=273sp
\nobreak
\vskip-2\baselineskip
\hbox{\strut}%
\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lastlineparrule}
% \begin{macro}{\lastlinerulefill}
% Using \cs{lastlinerulefill} instead of \cs{par} to end a paragraph
% causes all short lines to be filled at the right by a rule
% (\cs{lastlineparrule}) extending to the righthand margin.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{lastlineparrule} and
% \cs{lastlinerulefill} paragraph}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\lastlineparrule}{%
\hrule height 0.5ex depth \@tempdimb\relax}
\newcommand*{\lastlinerulefill}{%
\let\\\@centercr
\@tempdimb=-0.5ex \advance\@tempdimb 0.4pt
\unskip\nobreak\space
\leaders\lastlineparrule\hskip\@flushglue
\vadjust{}{\parfillskip\z@\memorigpar}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Centered lines}
%
% \begin{macro}{\centerlastline}
% This declaration specifies normal paragraphs except that the last line of
% each is centered.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{centerlastline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\centerlastline}{%
%%% \leftskip\@flushglue
\memRTLleftskip\@flushglue
%%% \rightskip=\z@ plus -1fil
\memRTLrightskip=\z@ plus -1fil
\parfillskip=\z@ plus 2fil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\leftcenterright}
% This declaration specifies paragraphs where the first line is flushleft
% (raggedright), the
% last is flushright (raggedleft) and all inbetween are centered.
% Set \verb?\everypar{}? afterwards.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{leftcenterright} paragraph}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\leftcenterright}{%;
\let\\\break
\parindent\z@
\leftskip\@flushglue
\rightskip\leftskip
\parfillskip \z@ \@plus -1fil
\everypar={\hskip \z@ \@plus -1fil}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\centerfloat}
% This is a version of \cs{centering} that can be used to center a wide
% float with respect to the text block (normally the left of a wide float
% is aligned with the left of the textblock). This can only be used for
% centering something where LaTeX knows the width (e.g., a figure or a
% table / tabular).
%
% This is a modified version of code by Robin Fairbairns
% (CTT, \textit{Re: Centering a table: problem with rotating.sty, maybe
% a strange document class?}, 3 Jan 2009).
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/11}{Added \cs{centerfloat}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\centerfloat}{%
\parindent \z@
\leftskip \z@ \@plus 1fil \@minus \textwidth
\rightskip\leftskip
\parfillskip \z@skip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Ragged}
%
% The kernel code for raggedright (in \file{ltmiscen.dtx}):
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\raggedright{%
% \let\\\@centercr\@rightskip\@flushglue \rightskip\@rightskip
% \leftskip\z@skip
% \parindent\z@}
% %% \@flushglue = 0pt plus 1fil %% from ltalloc.dtx
% %% \z@skip = 0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt %%
% \end{verbatim}
% produces very ragged text with no paragraph indent.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ragrparindent}
% \begin{macro}{\raggedyright}
% \cs{raggedyright}\oarg{plus} provides controllable ragged right paragraphs.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/10}{Added \cs{raggedyright}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{raggedyright}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\ragrparindent
\setlength{\ragrparindent}{\parindent}
\newcommand{\raggedyright}[1][2em]{%
\let\\\@centercr\@rightskip \z@ \@plus #1\relax
%%% \rightskip\@rightskip
\memRTLrightskip\@rightskip
%%% \leftskip\z@skip
\memRTLleftskip\z@skip
\parindent\ragrparindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\justlastraggedleft}
% This declaration specifies paragraphs where the lines are justified,
% except for the last which is raggedleft (flushright)..
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{justlastraggedleft} paragraph}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{justlastraggedleft}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\justlastraggedleft}{%
%%% \leftskip\@flushglue
\memRTLleftskip\@flushglue
%%% \rightskip-\leftskip
\memRTLrightskip-\memRTLleftskip
\parfillskip\leftskip
\parindent \z@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedrightthenleft}
% This declaration specifies paragraphs where the first line is raggedright
% (flushleft) and all the rest are raggedleft (flushright). Note that
% this alters \cs{everpar}, which may need to be reset afterwards to
% \verb?\everypar{}?.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{raggedrightthenleft} paragraph}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{raggedrightthenleft}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\raggedrightthenleft}{%
\parindent \z@
%%% \leftskip \z@ \@plus 1fill
\memRTLleftskip \z@ \@plus 1fill
%%% \rightskip\@flushglue
\memRTLrightskip\@flushglue
\parfillskip \z@
\everypar{\hskip \z@ \@plus -1fill}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Hanging}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangfrom}
% This is a user-level
% version of the kernel \cs{@hangfrom} macro (only the name is
% changed) as defined in \file{ltsec.dtx}.
%
% \cs{hangfrom}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} in a box and makes a hanging
% paragraph of the following material (a bit like a description item).
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{hangfrom} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangfrom}[1]{%
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
\hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangpara}
% \cs{hangpara}\marg{indent}\marg{afternum} at the start of a
% paragraph will make it hung. If \meta{indent} is positive the left
% will be indented, otherwise the right. If \meta{afternum}, say N,
% is positive the N+1 th lines onwards will be indented. For N negative,
% the first N lines will be indented.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangpara}[2]{\hangindent#1\hangafter#2\noindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{hangparas}
% \verb?\begin{hangparas}?\marg{indent}\marg{afternum} hangs
% a series of paragraphs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{hangparas}[2]{\setlength{\parindent}{\z@}
\everypar={\hangpara{#1}{#2}}}{\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsubsection{Miscellaneous}
%
% \begin{macro}{\leftspringright}
% \cs{leftspringright}\marg{leftfrac}\marg{rightfrac}\marg{lefttext}\marg{righttext}
% sets the \meta{lefttext} flushleft (raggedright) in a column \meta{leftfrac}
% of the current textwidth and the \meta{righttext} flushright (raggedleft)
% in a column \meta{rightfrac} of the textwidth, with space
% (1.0 - \meta{leftfrac} - \meta{rightfrac})
% of the textwidth between them. Both \meta{leftfrac} and \meta{rightfrac}
% must be given as decimal numbers (e.g., \texttt{0.25} not \texttt{1/4}).
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{leftspringright} paragraph}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\leftspringright}[4]{%
\@tempdimb=\hsize
\par\noindent\hbox to\@tempdimb{%
\vtop{\hsize=#1\@tempdimb \flushleft#3\par}\hss
\vtop{\hsize=#2\@tempdimb \flushright#4\par}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sourceatright}
% Putting \cs{sourceatright}\oarg{length}\marg{text} at the end of a
% paragraph will set \meta{text} flushright on the same line provided the line
% is short enough to allow \meta{length} (default 2em) between the end of the
% line and \meta{text}. If there is not enough space then \meta{text} is
% set flushright on the following line.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/09}{Added \cs{sourceatright} paragraph}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sourceatright}[2][2em]{{%
\unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50
\hskip#1\hbox{}\nobreak\hfil{#2}
\parfillskip\z@\finalhyphendemerits=0\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Lists}
%
% \subsection{General List Parameters}
%
% The following commands are used to set the default values for the list
% environment's parameters. See the \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation
% of the meanings of the parameters. Defaults for the list
% environment are set as follows. First, \cs{rightmargin},
% \cs{listparindent} and \cs{itemindent} are set to 0pt. Then, for a Kth
% level list, the command \cs{@listK} is called, where `K' denotes `i',
% '`i', ... , `vi'. (I.e., \cs{@listiii} is called for a third-level
% list.) By convention, \cs{@listK} should set \cs{leftmargin} to
% \cs{leftmarginK}.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
% For efficiency, level-one list's values are defined at top level, and
% \cs{@listi} is defined to set only \cs{leftmargin}.
%
% In two column mode the margins should be smaller than in one column typesetting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength{\leftmargini}{2em}
\else
\setlength{\leftmargini}{2.5em}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% The value of \cs{leftmargin} has to be set at this outer level.
% \begin{macrocode}
\leftmargin \leftmargini
% \end{macrocode}
% Lower level list margins are calculated so that they are indented
% more than the label in an outer list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\leftmarginii}{2.2em}
\setlength{\leftmarginiii}{1.87em}
\setlength{\leftmarginiv}{1.7em}
\if@twocolumn
\setlength{\leftmarginv}{.5em}
\setlength{\leftmarginvi}{.5em}
\else
\setlength{\leftmarginv}{1em}
\setlength{\leftmarginvi}{1em}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
% Here we set the \cs{itemindent} which is the extra indentation before
% a label.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelsep}
% \begin{macro}{\labelwidth}
% \cs{labelsep} is the distance between the label and the text of an
% item; \cs{labelwidth} is the width of the label.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
\setlength{\labelwidth}{\leftmargini}
\addtolength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@beginparpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@endparpenalty}
% These penalties are inserted before and after a list or paragraph
% environment. They are set to a bonus value to encourage page
% breaking at these points.
% \begin{macro}{\@itempenalty}
% This penalty is inserted between list items.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% \begin{macro}{\everylistparindent}
% \begin{macro}{\list}
% The kernel sets \cs{listparindent} to zero within a \cs{list}, where it
% can be overridden in \cs{list}'s second argument. Here it is set to
% \cs{everyparlistindent} by default, which in turn is 0pt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\everylistparindent
\everylistparindent \z@
\renewcommand*{\list}[2]{%
\ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax
\@toodeep
\else
\global\advance\@listdepth\@ne
\fi
\rightmargin\z@
\listparindent\everylistparindent
\itemindent\z@
\csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
\def\@itemlabel{#1}%
\let\makelabel\@mklab
\@nmbrlistfalse
#2\relax
\@trivlist
\parskip\parsep
\parindent\listparindent
\advance\linewidth -\rightmargin
\advance\linewidth -\leftmargin
\advance\@totalleftmargin \leftmargin
\parshape \@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\parsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\itemsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\parsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepiii}
% Lists may be nested and the exact layout depends on the level
% of nesting. These lengths are used to control the nesting-level
% aspects.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\parsepi}
\newlength{\topsepi}
\newlength{\itemsepi}
\newlength{\parsepii}
\newlength{\topsepii}
\newlength{\topsepiii}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\itemsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\itemsepiii}
% \begin{macro}{\partopsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\partopsepii}
% We need some new lengths for lists to cater for non-zero \cs{parskip}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{itemsepii}, \cs{itemsepiii} and
% \cs{partopsepii} (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\itemsepii}
\newlength{\itemsepiii}
\newlength{\partopsepii}
\newlength{\partopsepiii}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setnzplist}
% Common code for non-zero \cs{parskip} in lists.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setnzplist}{%
\partopsep \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@
\topsepi\z@
\parsepi\parskip
\itemsepi\z@
\topsepii\z@
\parsepii\parskip
\itemsepii\z@
\topsepiii\z@
%% \parsepiii\parskip
\itemsepiii\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\defaultlists}
% The standard \LaTeX\ classes have list parameters that give some
% separation between lists and \cs{item}s in lists. This macro sets
% those values. This is a simplification of memoir's original, and will
% apply to any font size.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Complete replacement of \cs{defaultlists}
% (mempatch 4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\defaultlists}{%
\setlength{\partopsep}{0.2\onelineskip \@plus 0.1\onelineskip
\@minus 0.1\onelineskip}%
\parsepi = 0.3333\onelineskip \@plus 0.1667\onelineskip \@minus \p@
\itemsepi = \parsepi
\topsepi = 0.6667\onelineskip \@plus 0.3333\onelineskip
\@minus 0.2\onelineskip
\parsepii = 0.1667\onelineskip \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\topsepii = \parsepi
\topsepiii = \parsepii
\everylistparindent \listparindent
% \end{macrocode}
% Additional code to cater for non-zero \cs{parskip}s.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Modified \cs{defaultlists} for
% non-zero \cs{parskip} (memptach v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\itemsepii\parsepii
\itemsepiii\topsepiii
\partopsepiii \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@
\ifm@mnzpskip
\setnzplist
\fi}
\defaultlists
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firmlists}
% \begin{macro}{\firmlists*}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msfirmlists}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mfirmlists}
% These give approximately half the vertical spacing of the default lists,
% with all spaces equal. The starred version allows slightly less space
% before and after the list when it is preceded by a blank line.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{firmlists}, etc. (mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\firmlists}{%
\@ifstar{\m@msfirmlists}{\m@mfirmlists}}
\newcommand*{\m@msfirmlists}{
\setlength{\partopsep}{\z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@}%
\parsepi = 0.1667\onelineskip \@plus 0.0833\onelineskip \@minus \p@
\itemsepi = \parsepi
\topsepi = \parsepi
\parsepii = 0.0833\onelineskip \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\topsepii = \parsepi
\topsepiii = \parsepii
\everylistparindent\listparindent}
\newcommand*{\m@mfirmlists}{
\setlength{\partopsep}{0.1\onelineskip \@plus 0.05\onelineskip
\@minus 0.05\onelineskip}%
\parsepi = 0.1667\onelineskip \@plus 0.0833\onelineskip \@minus \p@
\itemsepi = \parsepi
\topsepi = \parsepi
\parsepii = 0.0833\onelineskip \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\topsepii = \parsepi
\topsepiii = \parsepii
\everylistparindent\listparindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tightlists}
% \begin{macro}{\tightlists*}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mstightlists}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mtightlists}
% This macro sets the parameters for lists that have less open vertical
% space in them. I think that these look neater than the defaults.
% Effectively, no additional vertical space is added.
% The starred version allows slightly no extra space
% before and after the list when it is preceded by a blank line,
% whereas the unstarred version puts half a \cs{onelineskip}
% before \emph{and} after.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Revised \cs{tightlists}, etc. (mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Revised \cs{tightlists} for non-zero
% \cs{parskip}(mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tightlists}{%
\@ifstar{\m@mstightlists}{\m@mtightlists}}
\newcommand*{\m@mstightlists}{%
\setlength{\partopsep}{\z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@}%
\parsepi = \z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\itemsepi = \parsepi
\topsepi = \z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\parsepii = \z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\topsepii = \parsepi
\topsepiii = \parsepii
\everylistparindent\parindent
\ifm@mnzpskip
\setnzplist
\partopsepiii\partopsep
\fi}
\newcommand*{\m@mtightlists}{%
\setlength{\partopsep}{0.5\onelineskip \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@}%
\parsepi = \z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\itemsepi = \parsepi
\topsepi = \z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\parsepii = \z@ \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@
\topsepii = \parsepi
\topsepiii = \parsepii
\everylistparindent\parindent
\ifm@mnzpskip
\setnzplist
\partopsepiii\partopsep
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firmlist}
% \begin{macro}{\tightlist}
% These two macros can be used at the start of a list environment to
% reduce the vertical gaps. \cs{tightlist} removes all interior spaces
% while \cs{firmlist} only removes some.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{firmlist} and reimplemented the
% original \cs{tightlist}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firmlist}{%
\setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\itemsep}\setlength{\parskip}{0.5\parskip}}
\newcommand{\tightlist}{%
\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The space before and after a \Lenv{trivlist} environment is controlled
% by the \cs{topsep} and \cs{partopsep} skips. There are several environments,
% such as \Lenv{center}, that are defined as a \Lenv{trivlist}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@msavetopsep}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msavepartopsep}
% \begin{macro}{\savetrivseps}
% \begin{macro}{\restoretrivseps}
% Two skips to store the \cs{topsep} and \cs{partopsep} values and a means
% of setting them and restoring them.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added methods for adjusting the space around
% a trivlist}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\m@msavetopsep
\newskip\m@msavepartopsep
\newcommand*{\savetrivseps}{%
\m@msavetopsep\topsep
\m@msavepartopsep\partopsep}
\newcommand*{\restoretrivseps}{%
\topsep\m@msavetopsep
\partopsep\m@msavepartopsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the initial \cs{topsep} and \cs{partopsep} values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\savetrivseps
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\zerotrivseps}
% A macro to zero \cs{topsep} and \cs{partopsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\zerotrivseps}{%
\topsep\z@
\partopsep\z@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@listI}
% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
% \cs{@listI} defines top level and \cs{@listi} values of
% \cs{leftmargin}, \cs{parsep}, \cs{topsep}, and \cs{itemsep}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\parsep\parsepi
\topsep\topsepi
\itemsep\itemsepi}
\let\@listI\@listi
% \end{macrocode}
% We should initialise these parameters to the standard defaults
% \begin{macrocode}
\defaultlists
\@listi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
% Here are the same macros for the lower level lists.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
\labelwidth\leftmarginii
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
\topsep\topsepii
\parsep\parsepii
\itemsep\parsepii}
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
\labelwidth\leftmarginiii
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
\topsep\topsepiii
\parsep\z@
%%% \itemsep\topsep
%%% \partopsep \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep\itemsepiii
\partopsep\partopsepiii}
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
\labelwidth\leftmarginiv
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
\labelwidth\leftmarginv
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
\labelwidth\leftmarginvi
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Enumerate}
%
%
% The enumerate environment uses four counters: \Lcount{enumi},
% \Lcount{enumii}, \Lcount{enumiii} and \Lcount{enumiv}, where
% \Lcount{enumN} controls the numbering of the Nth level
% enumeration.
%
% \begin{macro}{\theenumi}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
% The counters are already defined in \file{latex.dtx}, but their
% representation is changed here.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\theenumi}{\@arabic\c@enumi}
\renewcommand{\theenumii}{\@alph\c@enumii}
\renewcommand{\theenumiii}{\@roman\c@enumiii}
\renewcommand{\theenumiv}{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
% The label for each item is generated by the commands\\
% \cs{labelenumi} \ldots\ \cs{labelenumiv}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\labelenumi}{\theenumi.}
\newcommand{\labelenumii}{\theenumii)}
\newcommand{\labelenumiii}{\theenumiii.}
\newcommand{\labelenumiv}{\theenumiv.}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
% The expansion of \verb?\p@enumN\theenumN? defines the output of a
% \cs{ref} command when referencing an item of the Nth level of an
% enumerated list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\p@enumii}{\theenumi}
\renewcommand{\p@enumiii}{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
\renewcommand{\p@enumiv}{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% The following is taken directly from David Carlisle's
% \Lpack{enumerate} package.
%
% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
%
% This package gives the enumerate environment an optional argument
% which determines the style in which the counter is printed.
%
% An occurence of one of the tokens \verb?A a I i? or \verb?1? produces the value
% of the counter printed with (respectively) \verb?\Alph \alph \Roman \roman?
% or \cs{arabic}.
%
% These letters may be surrounded by any strings involving any other
% \TeX\ expressions, however the tokens \verb?A a I i 1? must be inside a
% \verb?{ }? group if they are not to be taken as special.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enlab}
% Internal token register used to build up the label command from the
% optional argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\@enLab
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enQmark}
% This just expands to a `?'. \cs{ref} will produce this, if no counter
% is printed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enQmark{?}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next four macros build up the command that will print the item
% label. They each gobble one token or group from the optional argument,
% and add corresponding tokens to the register \cs{@enLab}. They each end
% with a call to \cs{@enloop}, which starts the processing of the next
% token.
% \begin{macro}{\@enLabel}
% Add the counter to the label. \verb?#2? will be one of the `special'
% tokens \verb?A a I i 1?, and is thrown away. \verb?#1? will be a command
% like \cs{Roman}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enLabel#1#2{%
\edef\@enThe{\noexpand#1{\@enumctr}}%
\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname}%
\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enSpace}
% \begin{macro}{\@enSp@ce}
% Add a space to the label. The tricky bit is to gobble the space token,
% as you can not do this with a macro argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enSpace{\afterassignment\@enSp@ce\let\@memtempa= }
\def\@enSp@ce{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\space}\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enGroup}
% Add a \verb?{ }? group to the label.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enGroup#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab{#1}}\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enOther}
% Add anything else to the label
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enOther#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab#1}\@enloop}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enloop}
% \begin{macro}{\@enloop@}
% The body of the main loop.
% Eating tokens this way instead of using \cs{@tfor} lets you see
% spaces and \textbf{all} braces. \cs{@tfor} would treat \verb?a? and
% \verb?{a}? as special, but not \verb?{{a}}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enloop{\futurelet\@entemp\@enloop@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enloop@{%
\ifx A\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Alph }\else
\ifx a\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\alph }\else
\ifx i\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\roman }\else
\ifx I\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Roman }\else
\ifx 1\@entemp \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\arabic}\else
\ifx \@sptoken\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@enSpace \else
\ifx \bgroup\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@enGroup \else
\ifx \@enum@\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@gobble \else
\let\@memtempa\@enOther
% \end{macrocode}
% Hook for possible extensions
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enhook
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Process the current token, then look at the next.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@memtempa}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enhook}
% Hook for possible extensions.
% Some packages may want to extend the number of special characters
% that are associated with counter representations. This feature
% was requested to enable Russian alphabetic counting, but here
% I give an example of a footnote symbol counter, triggered by \verb?*?.
%
% To enable a new counter type based on a letter, you just need
% to add a new \cs{ifx} clause by analogy with the code above.
% So for example to make \verb?*? trigger footnote symbol counting.
% a package should do the following.
%
% Initialise the hook, in case the package is loaded before
% \textsf{enumerate}.
%\begin{verbatim}
% \providecommand\@enhook{}
%\end{verbatim}
%
% Add to the hook a new \cs{ifx} clause that associates \verb?*? with the
% \cs{fnsymbol} counter command.
%\begin{verbatim}
% \g@addto@macro\@enhook{%
% \ifx *\@entemp
% \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\fnsymbol}%
% \fi}
%\end{verbatim}
% This code sequence should work whether it is loaded before or after
% this enumerate package. Any number of new counter types may be added
% in this way.
%
% At this point we just need initialise the hook, taking care not
% to over write any definitions another package may already have added.
% (PRW: as this is now in a class, it can be defined instead of
% \cs{provide}d).
% \begin{macrocode}
%% \providecommand\@enhook{}
\newcommand\@enhook{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\enumerate}
% The new \Lenv{enumerate} environment. This is the first half of the
% original enumerate environment. If there is an optional argument, call
% \cs{@@enum@} to define the label commands, otherwise call
% \cs{@enum@} which is the second half of the original definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\enumerate{%
\ifnum \@enumdepth >3 \@toodeep\else
\advance\@enumdepth \@ne
\edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}\fi
\@ifnextchar[{\@@enum@}{\@enum@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@enum@}
% Handle the optional argument..
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@enum@[#1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Initialise the loop which will break apart the optional argument.
% The command to print the label is built up in \cs{@enlab}.
% \cs{@enThe} will be used to define \cs{theenum}\,$n$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enLab{}\let\@enThe\@enQmark
% \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{@enum@} below is never expanded, it is used to detect the end
% of the token list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enloop#1\@enum@
% \end{macrocode}
% Issue a warning if we did not find one of the `special' tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@enThe\@enQmark\@warning{The counter will not be printed.%
^^J\space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces The label is: \the\@enLab}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Define \cs{labelenum}$\,n$ and \cs{theenum}$\,n$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\edef\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{\the\@enLab}%
\expandafter\let\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname\@enThe
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the counter to 7 so that we get the width of `vii' if roman
% numbering is in force then set \cs{leftmargin}$\,n$. to the width of the
% label plus \cs{labelsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\csname c@\@enumctr\endcsname7
\expandafter\settowidth
\csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@enumdepth\endcsname
{\the\@enLab\hspace{\labelsep}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally call \cs{@enum@} which is the second half of the original
% definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@enum@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enum@}
% All the list parameters have now been defined, so call \cs{list}. This
% is taken straight from the original definition of \cs{enumerate}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enum@{\list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}%
{\usecounter{\@enumctr}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
%
%
%
% \subsection{Itemize}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
% Itemization is controlled by the commands: \cs{labelitemi},
% \cs{labelitemii}, etc., which define
% the labels of the various itemization levels: the symbols used are:
% bullet (\textbullet), bold en-dash (\textbf{\textendash}),
% centered asterisk (\textasteriskcentered), and centered dot
% (\textperiodcentered).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\labelitemi}{\textbullet}
\newcommand{\labelitemii}{\normalfont\bfseries \textendash}
\newcommand{\labelitemiii}{\textasteriskcentered}
\newcommand{\labelitemiv}{\textperiodcentered}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% It seems like a reasonable idea to give the \Lenv{itemize} environment
% an optional argument to match \Lenv{enumerate}. Fortunately this seems
% to be much simpler and I might even be able to work it out for myself.
%
% \begin{environment}{itemize}
% This is a hack at the kernel code for \Lenv{itemize}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\itemize}[1][\@empty]{%
\ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
\advance\@itemdepth\@ne
\ifx \@empty #1\else % optional argument
\@namedef{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}{#1}%
\fi
\edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
\expandafter
\list
\csname\@itemitem\endcsname
{\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
\fi}
\let\enditemize =\endlist
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Description}
%
% The class defines two description environment, the standard one and a `block'
% one, and also two semi-configurable versions.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Now two `description' environments.}
%
% \begin{environment}{description}
% The description environment is defined here -- while the default itemize
% and enumerate environments are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{The \texttt{description} environment now matches
% the standard layout.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{description}%
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
\let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
% To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
% \cs{descriptionlabel}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
\normalfont\bfseries #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{blockdescription}
% The `block' description environment.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Renamed original \texttt{description} environment
% to \texttt{blockdescription}.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{blockdescription}%
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent 0.5em \labelsep 0.5em
\let\makelabel\blockdescriptionlabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\blockdescriptionlabel}
% In order to change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
% the macro \cs{blockdescriptionlabel}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\blockdescriptionlabel}[1]{%%% \hspace\labelsep
\normalfont\bfseries #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{labelled}
% This is a version of the description environment which takes the
% name, without the backslash, of some \cs{labelcode} as its argument.
% For example:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand*{\sflabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep \normalfont\sffamily #1}
% \begin{labelled}{sflabel}
% \item[label] using a sans font for the labels
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/04/25}{Added labelled environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{labelled}[1]%
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
\def\m@malabel{\@nameuse{#1}} \let\makelabel\m@malabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{flexlabelled}
% \verb?\begin{flexlabelled}{labelcode}{labelwidth}{labelsep}{itemindent}{leftmargin}{rightmargin}?
% lets you specify some of the parameters for a description-like list.
% The first argument is as for the labelled environment. The others are all
% lengths for the various parameters; a \verb?*? instead of a length means
% that that argument is to be ignored.
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/04/25}{Added flexlabelled environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{flexlabelled}[6]%
{\list{}{\nametest{#2}{*}%
\ifsamename\else \labelwidth #2 \fi
\nametest{#3}{*}%
\ifsamename\else \labelsep #3 \fi
\nametest{#4}{*}%
\ifsamename\else \itemindent #4 \fi
\nametest{#5}{*}%
\ifsamename\else \leftmargin #5 \fi
\nametest{#6}{*}%
\ifsamename\else \rightmargin #6 \fi
\def\m@malabel{\@nameuse{#1}} \let\makelabel\m@malabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Quotation}
%
% \begin{environment}{quotation}
% The quotation environment is defined by making clever use of
% the list environment's parameters. The lines in the environment
% are set smaller than \cs{textwidth}. The first line of a paragraph
% inside this environment is indented.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quotation}%
{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em%
\itemindent \listparindent
\rightmargin \leftmargin
\parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}%
\item[]}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Quote}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{quote}
% The quote environment is like the quotation environment except
% that paragraphs are not indented.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quote}%
{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
\item[]}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Theorem}
%
% This document class does not define it's own theorem environments,
% the defaults, supplied by \file{latex.dtx} are available.
%
% \subsection{Listing of symbols and abbreviations}
%
% Another element is the listing of symbols
% and abbreviations.
%
% \begin{environment}{symbols}
% \begin{macro}{\symbollabel}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\symbollabel}[1]{{#1 \hfill}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{symbols}{\list{}%
{\itemindent 0em \leftmargin 8em
\labelsep 1em \labelwidth 5em
\let\makelabel\symbollabel}}%
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\symboldef}
% Within a \Lenv{symbols} environment the command
% \cs{symboldef}\marg{symbol}\marg{meaning}
% is used to specify and explain each symbol or abbreviation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\symboldef}[2]{\item[#1] #2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Abstracts}
%
% Books usually do not have abstracts, but I decided to add in the code
% from the \Lpack{abstract}
% package~\cite{ABSTRACT}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added code for abstracts}
%
%
% We just have the \Lpack{report} or \Lpack{article} style for the
% abstract with no \Lopt{titlepage} option. The original code,
% from \file{classes.dtx} for this is:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newenvironment{abstract}{%
% \if@twocolumn
% \section*{\abstractname}
% \else
% \small
% \begin{center}%
% {\bfseries \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}%%
% \end{center}%
% \quotation
% \fi}%
% {\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% The following \cs{if...} commands are for implementing various options.
% \begin{macro}{\if@bsonecol}
% \begin{macro}{\ifadd@bstotoc}
% \begin{macro}{\ifnumber@bs}
% \begin{macro}{\if@bsrunin}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@bsonecol
\@bsonecoltrue
\newif\ifadd@bstotoc
\add@bstotocfalse
\newif\ifnumber@bs
\number@bsfalse
\newif\if@bsrunin
\@bsruninfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractcol}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractnum}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractrunin}
% These are the use-level commands for setting the options. If
% the abstract is runin, then it must not be numbered otherwise
% adding it to the ToC might result in something peculiar.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abstractcol}{\@bsonecolfalse}
\newcommand{\abstractintoc}{\add@bstotoctrue}
\newcommand{\abstractnum}{\number@bstrue\@bsruninfalse}
\newcommand{\abstractrunin}{\@bsrunintrue\number@bsfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% The next set of macros comprise the
% implementation of the \Lenv{abstract} environment.
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\abstracttextfont}
% These two macros are for specifying the fonts for typesetting the
% abstract's title and text. They are initialised for the default case
% (i.e., no class options).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\small\bfseries}
\newcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont\small}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abscolnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\abscoltextfont}
% These two macros are for specifying the fonts for typesetting the
% abstract's title and text in a two column document where the abstarct
% is part of a column.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{abscolnamefont} and
% \cs{abscoltextfont} (mempatch v4.8)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abscolnamefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
\newcommand{\abscoltextfont}{\normalfont}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\absnamepos}
% \begin{macro}{\abstitleskip}
% \cs{absnamepos} specifies the environment in which the abstract's title
% name will be typeset, and the length \cs{abstitleskip} is an adjustement
% to the vertical space between the title and the abstract's text. These
% are initialised for the default case.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\absnamepos}{center}
\newlength{\abstitleskip} \setlength{\abstitleskip}{-0.5em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\absleftindent}
% \begin{macro}{\abs@leftindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absrightindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absparindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absparsep}
% The abstract's text is typeset as a single item list, called
% \texttt{@bstr@ctlist}. These lengths set the left and right margin indents, the
% paragraph indentation, and the inter-paragraph vertical space. Their
% initial values are all class option-dependent.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{abs@leftindent} per Lars Madsen (mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\absleftindent}
\absleftindent=\leftmargin
\newdimen\abs@leftindent
\abs@leftindent=\leftmargin
\newlength{\absrightindent}
\absrightindent=\leftmargin
\newlength{\absparindent}
\newlength{\absparsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abslabeldelim}
% \begin{macro}{\@bslabeldelim}
% The contents of \cs{abslabeldelim} are typeset after a run-in heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abslabeldelim}[1]{\def\@bslabeldelim{#1}}
\abslabeldelim{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bsrunintitle}
% This macro typeset the run-in heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bsrunintitle}{%
\hspace*{\abstitleskip}{\abstractnamefont\abstractname\@bslabeldelim}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setup@bstract}
% Now arrange to set all the class option-dependent values.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Used \cs{abs@leftindent} in \cs{setup@bstract} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{setup@bstract} to cater for
% \cs{abscolnamefont}, etc., and don't set
% \cs{absrightindent} to \cs{absleftindent}.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setup@bstract}{%
\abs@leftindent=\absleftindent
\if@twocolumn
% \end{macrocode}
% Values for the \Lopt{twocolumn} class option.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@bsonecol
\else
\abs@leftindent=\z@
\absrightindent=\z@
\renewcommand*{\abstractnamefont}{\abscolnamefont}
\renewcommand*{\abstracttextfont}{\abscoltextfont}
\renewcommand*{\absnamepos}{flushleft}
\setlength{\abstitleskip}{-2ex}
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\absparindent}{\parindent}
\setlength{\absparsep}{\parskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{environment}{@bstr@ctlist}
% The abstract's text is typeset within the \Lenv{@bstr@ctlist} list environment.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Used \cs{abs@leftindent} in \cs{@bstr@ctlist} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{@bstr@ctlist}{%
\list{}{%
%%\topsep \z@
\partopsep \z@
\listparindent \absparindent
\itemindent \listparindent
\leftmargin \abs@leftindent
\rightmargin \absrightindent
\parsep \absparsep}%
\item\relax}
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\put@bsintoc}
% This macro adds the abstract's title to the ToC. It does nothing if
% the abstract is being numbered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\put@bsintoc}{%
\ifadd@bstotoc
\ifnumber@bs\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\abstractname}
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\num@bs}
% This macro generates a numbered abstract heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\num@bs}{\chapter{\abstractname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{abstract}
% At last we are in position to define the \Lenv{abstract} environment. This
% follows very much along the lines of the standard class definitions, but with
% macros inserted at strategic points.
%
% The \Lopt{twocolumn} option and the default case. These use the same code
% as any style differences are embedded in the new macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{abstract}{%
\setup@bstract
\if@bsrunin\else
\ifnumber@bs \num@bs \else
\begin{\absnamepos}\abstractnamefont\abstractname\end\absnamepos%
\vspace{\abstitleskip}%
\fi
\fi
\put@bsintoc%
\begin{@bstr@ctlist}\if@bsrunin\@bsrunintitle\fi\abstracttextfont}%
{\par\end{@bstr@ctlist}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{onecolabstract}
% An environment for typesetting a single column abstract,
% particularly as the optional argument to the \cs{twocolumn} command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{onecolabstract}{%
\begin{@twocolumnfalse}\begin{abstract}}{%
\end{abstract}\end{@twocolumnfalse}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
% \begin{macro}{\@bs@thanks}
% We have to keep the contents of the \cs{thanks} commands as normally these
% are emptied by the \cs{maketitle} command. I do this by extending the definition
% of the \cs{thanks} (from \file{ltsect.dtx}) command,
% so that \cs{@bs@thanks} has a copy of the contents
% of \cs{@thanks}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\addtoiargdef{\thanks}{}{%
\protected@xdef\@bs@thanks{\@bs@thanks
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1}}%
}
\let\@bs@thanks\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\saythanks}
% This macro typesets any \cs{thanks} commands \emph{after} using
% \texttt{onecolabstract}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\saythanks}{\begingroup
\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}\@bs@thanks
\endgroup\global\let\@bs@thanks\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Verse}
%
% The class provides a more flexible \Lenv{verse} environment than the
% standard classes. This is based on the \Lpack{verse}
% package~\cite{VERSE}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Complete rewrite of verse typesetting}
%
% \subsection{Environments}
%
% Before proceeding with the main, here are some macros for aspects
% of line numbering.
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@vslineno}
% \begin{macro}{\c@poemline}
% \begin{macro}{\c@modulo@vs}
% \begin{macro}{\c@memfvsline}
% We need counters for stanza and poem lines. The \texttt{memfvsline}
% counter is for adjusting the starting line for verse line numbers.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added poemline and modulo@vs counters}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added memfvsline counter (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{vslineno}
\newcounter{poemline}
\newcounter{modulo@vs}
\newcounter{memfvsline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemlines}
% \cs{poemlines}\marg{nth} specifies that every \meta{nth} line of
% a poem is to be numbered.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{poemlines}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{\cs{poemlines} now just calls \cs{linenumberfrequency}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Deleted \cs{poemlines}.}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%\newcommand{\poemlines}[1]{\linenumberfrequency{#1}%
%%% \@memwarn{Use \string\linenumberfrequency\space
%%% instead of \string\poemlines}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfont}
% \begin{macro}{\vlvnumfont}
% Set line numbering font(s).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\linenumberfont}[1]{\def\vlvnumfont{#1}}
%%% \linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountlines}
% \begin{macro}{\bvcountlinestrue}
% \begin{macro}{\bvcountlinesfalse}
% Looking ahead, TRUE for (boxed) verbatim line numbers to be printed. Default
% is not to print them. Not that \cs{linenumberfrequency} twiddles with this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvcountlines% TRUE to print line numbers of (boxed) verbatim lines
\bvcountlinesfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfrequency}
% \begin{macro}{\linemodnum}
% Set numbering intervals (number modulo). Default is modulus 0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\linenumberfrequency}[1]{%
\ifnum #1< \@ne
\def\linemodnum{0\relax}
\bvcountlinesfalse
\else
\def\linemodnum{#1\relax}
\bvcountlinestrue
\fi}
%%%%\linenumberfrequency{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setverselinenums}
% \cs{setverselinenums}\marg{firstline}\marg{startnumsat} sets the first line
% number to \meta{firstline} and the first line number to be printed is
% \meta{startnumsat}. Use within the \Lenv{verse} environment before the
% first verse. Note that \\
% \verb?firstline <= startnumsat < firstline + linenumberfrequency?
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{setverselinenums} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setverselinenums}[2]{%
\c@poemline #1\relax \advance\c@poemline \m@ne
\refstepcounter{poemline}%
\ifnum\z@<\linemodnum% we are printing line numbers
\@tempcnta #2\relax
\divide\@tempcnta\linemodnum
\multiply\@tempcnta\linemodnum
\c@memfvsline #2\relax
\advance\c@memfvsline-\@tempcnta
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Using \cs{getthelinenumber} instead of \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\getthelinenumber}
% \cs{getthelinenumber}\marg{counter}\marg{start} returns \cs{thecounter}
% if it is exactly divisible by \cs{linenumberfrequency}, provided this is
% not zero. \meta{start} is the first number.
% \changes{v1.61802}{2008/01/30}{Generalised \cs{getthelinenumber} to cater
% for set of first line number.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getthelinenumber}[2]{%
\ifnum\@ne>\linemodnum% no line numbers
\else
\ifnum\@ne=\linemodnum% every line numbered
\@nameuse{the#1}%
\else
\@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}%
\advance\@tempcnta -\@nameuse{c@#2}%
\divide\@tempcnta \linemodnum
\multiply\@tempcnta \linemodnum
\advance\@tempcnta \@nameuse{c@#2}%
\ifnum\@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}\@nameuse{the#1}\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifaltindent}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting alternate lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifaltindent
\altindentfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpattern}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according to a pattern.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpattern
\patternfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstarpattern}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according in a \Lenv{patverse*}
% environment.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/8}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifstarpattern
\starpatternfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vleftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\vrightskip}
% Skips to the left and right of a line of verse.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed defaults for \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\vleftskip}
\setlength{\vleftskip}{3em}
\newlength{\vrightskip}
\setlength{\vrightskip}{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stanzaskip}
% Skip between stanzas.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{stanzaskip}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\stanzaskip}
\setlength{\stanzaskip}{\onelineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\flagverse}
% \cs{flagverse}\marg{flag} inserts \meta{flag} at the left (of a line).
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{flagverse}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi suport to \cs{flagverse}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\flagverse}[1]{%
%%% \hskip-\vleftskip\llap{#1}\hskip\vleftskip\ignorespaces}
\hskip-\memRTLvleftskip\llap{#1}\hskip\memRTLvleftskip\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\versewidth}
% The length \cs{versewidth} is a convenience length for the user.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\versewidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vgap}
% \begin{macro}{\vin}
% \begin{macro}{\vindent}
% The length \cs{vgap} is used as the basis for spacing. \cs{vin} makes
% a horizontal space of \cs{vgap} and \cs{vindent} is the indentation
% of wrapped lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\vgap} \setlength{\vgap}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\vin}{\hspace*{\vgap}}
\newlength{\vindent} \setlength{\vindent}{2\vgap}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vinphantom}
% Macro to leave blank space coresponding to a string.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{vinphantom} (patch 1.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\vinphantom}[1]{\leavevmode\phantom{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vleftofline}
% Macro to insert something immediately to the left of the start
% of the line.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/14}{Added \cs{vleftofline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\vleftofline}[1]{\leavevmode\llap{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vleftmargin}
% Length to adjust the default left margin within a verse environment.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/18}{Added \cs{vleftmargin}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\vleftmargin
\vleftmargin=\leftmargini
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verselinebreak}
% Break a verse line by inserting \cs{newline}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Modified \cs{verselinebreak}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Removed extraneous space from \cs{verselinebreak} (mempatch v4.4, Aaron Rendahl)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verselinebreak}[1][\z@]{\newline\hspace*{#1}\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\incr@vsline}
% Increment the line counters.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added poemline counter to \cs{incr@vsline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\incr@vsline}{%
\refstepcounter{poemline}%
\stepcounter{vslineno}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsifbang}
% Like the kernel \cs{@ifstar} except it looks for an exclamation mark!
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsifbang}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsifbang}[1]{\@ifnextchar !{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsifgt}
% Like the kernel \cs{@ifstar} except it looks for a \verb?>? character.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{@vsifgt}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsifgt}[1]{\@ifnextchar >{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verselinenumbersright}
% \begin{macro}{\verselinenumbersleft}
% \begin{macro}{\@vstypelinenum}
% Declarations for setting line numbers at the right (the default)
% or the left..
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{verselinenumbersright} and
% \cs{verselinenumbersleft} (mempatch v4.4, v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\verselinenumbersright}{\def\@vstypelinenum{\@vslnumright}}
\newcommand*{\verselinenumbersleft}{\def\@vstypelinenum{\@vslnumleft}}
\verselinenumbersright
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vslnumright}
% \begin{macro}{\@vslnumleft}
% Internal code for right/left line numbers.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{@vslnumright}
% and \cs{@vslnumleft}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@vslnumright}{%
\hfill\rlap{%\kern\vrightskip\kern\rightmargin%
\kern\memRTLvrightskip\kern\rightmargin%
\vlvnumfont\getthelinenumber{poemline}{memfvsline}}}
\newcommand*{\@vslnumleft}{%
\hfill\rlap{%\kern-\textwidth\kern-\vrightskip%
\kern-\textwidth\kern-\memRTLvrightskip%
\vlvnumfont\getthelinenumber{poemline}{memfvsline}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vscentercr}
% This puts the poem line number in the margin, increments
% the line numbers, and then deals with the options. It is based
% on the kernel \cs{@centercr}.
% This has to handle various forms of the \verb?\\? command: \verb?\\?,
% \verb?\\*?, \verb?\\!?, and \verb?\\>?, together with an optional length argument.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Major rewrite of \cs{@vscentercr} and friends}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed \cs{@vscentercr} to use general
% linenumbering}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{@vscentercr} for left/right numbers
% (mempatch v4.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vscentercr}{%
\ifhmode \unskip\else \@nolnerr\fi
\@vstypelinenum%
% \end{macrocode}
% For \verb?>? call \cs{verselinebreak} to process it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@vsifgt{\verselinebreak}{%
\incr@vsline
% \end{macrocode}
% If the call is \verb?\\*...? call \cs{@vsxcentercr} to handle the \verb?*...?.
% If the call is \verb?\\!?, do nothing.
% If the call is \verb?\\![...]?, call \cs{@vsicentercr} to handle the \verb?[...]?.
% Otherwise, call \cs{@vsxcentercr}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\par\@ifstar{\nobreak\@vsxcentercr}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@vsifbang{\@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{}}{\@vsxcentercr}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsxcentercr}
% Processes \verb?\\*?, and either calls cs{@vsicentercr} to handle a \verb?[length]?,
% or \cs{start@vsline}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsxcentercr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsxcentercr}{\addvspace{-\parskip}%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{\start@vsline}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsicentercr}
% Processes \verb?(\\...)[length]? and then calls \cs{start@vsline}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsicentercr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vsicentercr[#1]{\vskip #1\ignorespaces \start@vsline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\start@vsline}
% This is called at the start of every verse line except the first.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern} to \cs{start@vsline}}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Used counter for vslineno, not \cs{thevslineno}
% in \cs{start@vsline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\start@vsline}{%
\ifaltindent\ifodd\c@vslineno\else\vin\fi\fi%
\ifpattern\get@vsindent\fi%
\ifstarpattern\getstar@vsindent\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theHpoemline}
% For the \Lpack{hyperref} package need a way of distinguishing
% lines of a poem. See the thread \textit{PDFTEX/Hyperef hates memoir verse
% environment?} on \ctt{} October 2002.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added verse counter and \cs{theHpoemline}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{verse}
\setcounter{verse}{0}
\newcommand{\theHpoemline}{\theverse.\thepoemline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{verse}
% The extended \Lenv{verse} environment. It sets the verse line counter,
% then defines the particular list environment adjusting the margins
% to center according to the length parameter. If the length parameter
% is at least the \cs{linewidth} then the `centering' defaults to
% the original \Lenv{verse} layout.
% \changes{v1.1}{2001/08/03}{Initialise the line counter to 1, not 0, in
% all cases}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Changes to verse environment for line numbering}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changes to verse environment for hyperref}
% \changes{v1.4}{2002/02/27}{Let verses wider than the \cs{linewidth}
% take the full width (patch(1.1)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fix vertical spacing in the verse environment (mempatch v3.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{verse}[1][\linewidth]{%
\refstepcounter{verse}%
\setcounter{poemline}{0}\refstepcounter{poemline}%
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
\let\\=\@vscentercr
\list{}{\itemsep \z@
\itemindent -\vindent
\listparindent\itemindent
\leftmargin \vleftmargin
\parsep \stanzaskip
\ifdim #1<\linewidth% %% short line
\rightmargin \z@
\leftmargin \linewidth
\advance\leftmargin -#1\relax
\advance\leftmargin -0.5\leftmargin
\advance\leftmargin \vindent
\else
\ifdim #1>\linewidth% %% long line
\rightmargin \z@
\leftmargin \vindent
\else% %% default
\rightmargin \leftmargin
\advance\leftmargin \vindent
\fi
\fi}
\item[]}{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{altverse}
% This sets \cs{altindenttrue} (afterwards false) and initialises the line counter.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to altverse}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{altverse}%
{\starpatternfalse\patternfalse\altindenttrue
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
{\altindentfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Patterns}
%
% The pattern code is based on the idea of converting a string of
% digits to an array of digits, and then being able to access the
% digit at a particular position in the array.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbounderror}
% A flag set TRUE if an attempt is made to access an array element outside
% the array limits.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbounderror
\bounderrorfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifinteger}
% A flag to indicate if a `number' is an integer (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifinteger
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@chrsinstr}
% A counter for the number of characters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{chrsinstr} % CHARactersINSTRing
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newarray}
% \cs{newarray}\marg{arrayname}\marg{low}\marg{high} defines
% an array called \meta{arrayname} (no backslash e.g. \verb?MyArray?),
% with low and high limts \meta{low} and \meta{high}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newarray}[3]{%
\@nameedef{#1-low}{#2}%
\@nameedef{#1-high}{#3}%
\ifnum #3<#2
\@memerror{Limits for array #1 are in reverse order}{\@ehc}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\stringtoarray}
% \cs{stringtoarray}\marg{arrayname}\marg{string} puts each character
% from \meta{string} sequentially into the \meta{arrayname} array, starting
% with \meta{low} = 1. It checks for an empty \meta{string} and handles that
% specially.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stringtoarray}[2]{%
\def\@vsarrayname{#1}%
\protected@edef\the@vsstring{#2}%
\newarray{\@vsarrayname}{1}{1}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{%
\c@chrsinstr \z@
\@namedef{\@vsarrayname-1}{}
}{%
\c@chrsinstr \@ne
\expandafter\@vsstringtoarray \the@vsstring\@vsend
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsstringtoarray}
% Recursively adds characters to the array \cs{@vsarrayname}, incrementing
% the array's high limit.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vsstringtoarray #1#2\@vsend{%
\@namedef{\@vsarrayname-\the\c@chrsinstr}{#1}
\@nameedef{\@vsarrayname-high}{\the\c@chrsinstr}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{%
\def\@vsinext{}%
}{%
\advance\c@chrsinstr \@ne
\def\@vsinext{%
\@vsstringtoarray #2\@vsend%
}%
}
\@vsinext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setarrayelement}
% \cs{setarrayelement}\marg{arrayname}\marg{index}\marg{value} sets
% the \meta{arrayname} array's element at \meta{index} to \meta{value}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setarrayelement}[3]{%
\checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
\@nameedef{#1-#2}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\getarrayelement}
% \cs{getarrayelement}\marg{arrayname}\marg{index}\marg{value}
% defines the parameterless macro \meta{value} (e.g., \cs{result}) to be
% the value at \meta{index} in the \meta{arrayname} array.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getarrayelement}[3]{%
\checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
\protected@edef#3{\@nameuse{#1-#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkarrayindex}
% \cs{checkarrayindex}\marg{arrayname}\marg{index} checks that
% the \meta{index} of the \meta{arrayname} array is valid. \cs{ifbounderror}
% is set FALSE if everything is OK, otherwise it is set TRUE.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkarrayindex}[2]{%
\bounderrorfalse
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1-low\endcsname\relax%
\ifpattern\else
\@memerror{No array called #1}{\@ehc}%
\fi
\bounderrortrue
\fi
\ifnum #2<\@nameuse{#1-low}\relax%
\ifpattern\else
\@memerror{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
\fi
\bounderrortrue
\fi
\ifnum #2>\@nameuse{#1-high}\relax%
\ifpattern\else
\@memerror{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
\fi
\bounderrortrue
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraytostring}
% \cs{arraytostring}\marg{arrayname}\marg{string} converts the
% characters in the \meta{arrayname} array into the parameterless macro
% \meta{string} (e.g., \cs{MyString}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\arraytostring}[2]{%
\def#2{}%
\c@chrsinstr = \@nameuse{#1-low}%
\@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsarraytostring}
% \cs{@vsarraytostring}\marg{arrayname}\marg{string} recursively
% adds the (character) elements from \meta{arrayname} to \meta{string}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsarraytostring}[2]{%
\ifnum\c@chrsinstr>\@nameuse{#1-high}\else
\protected@edef#2{#2\@nameuse{#1-\thechrsinstr}}%
\advance\c@chrsinstr\@ne%
\@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkifinteger}
% \cs{checkifinteger}\marg{num} checks if \meta{num} is an integer.
% If it is, then \cs{ifinteger} is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE.
% (Code based on Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{cite} package).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkifinteger}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@vsa{#1}%
\ifcat _\ifnum9<1\gobm{#1} _\else A\fi
\integertrue%
\else
\integerfalse%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\gobm}
% \cs{gobm}\marg{num} is defined as \meta{num}. It could be defined as: \\
% \verb?\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{\ifx-#1\expandafter\gobm\else#1\fi}? \\
% which would remove a leading minus sign (hyphen) from its argument
% (\verb?gobm? = gobble minus sign).
% (Code from a posting to \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 1997/07/21).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indentpattern}
% \cs{indentpattern}\marg{digits} stores \meta{digits} for use as
% a verse indentation pattern.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\indentpattern}[1]{%
\stringtoarray{Array@vs}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\get@vsindent}
% \cs{get@vsindent} gets the indent pattern digit for the \cs{thevslineno},
% then uses this to specify the line indentation as \verb?digit*\vgap?.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{Changed \cs{get@vsindent} to use counter
% value number instead of \cs{thevslineno}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\get@vsindent}{%
\getarrayelement{Array@vs}{\number\value{vslineno}}{\@vspat}%
\ifbounderror
\arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
\@memwarn{%
Index `\thevslineno' for pattern `\@vsp@t' is out of bounds}%
\def\@vspat{0}%
\else
\checkifinteger{\@vspat}%
\ifinteger\else
\arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
\@memwarn{%
`\@vspat' at index `\thevslineno' in pattern `\@vsp@t'
is not a digit}%
\def\@vspat{0}%
\fi
\fi
\ifcase\@vspat\else\hspace*{\@vspat\vgap}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\getstar@vsindent}
% \cs{getstar@vsindent} gets the indent pattern digit for the \Lenv{patverse*}
% environment,
% then uses this to specify the line indentation as \verb?digit*\vgap?.
% It lets the pattern repeat by resetting the \texttt{vslineno} counter.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{getstar@vsindent}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getstar@vsindent}{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname Array@vs-high\endcsname\relax
\@memerror{A pattern has not been specified}{\@ehc}
\else
\ifnum\c@vslineno>\@nameuse{Array@vs-high}%
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
\fi
\get@vsindent
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{patverse}
% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a pattern.
% It starts by setting \cs{ifpattern} TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting \cs{ifpattern} FALSE.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to patverse}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{patverse}%
{\starpatternfalse\patterntrue\altindentfalse
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
{\patternfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{patverse*}
% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a repeating
% pattern.
% It starts by setting \cs{ifstarpattern} TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting \cs{ifstarpattern} FALSE.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added patverse* environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{patverse*}%
{\starpatterntrue\patternfalse\altindentfalse
\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
{\starpatternfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Titles}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitle}
% Typeset a poem title (like \cs{section} or other). The actual work
% is done by \cs{@vsptitle} (plain) or \cs{@vssptitle} (starred).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitle}{\par%
\secdef\@vsptitle\@vssptitle}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtoc}
% The kind of entry \cs{poemtitle} is to make in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtoc}{section}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mempoeminfo}
% \begin{macro}{\mempoemstarinfo}
% \verb?\mempoeminfo{title}? \\
% \verb?\mempoemstarinfo{title}? \\
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Made \cs{mempoeminfo} and fiends \cs{long}
% (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mempoeminfo}[1]{}
\newcommand{\mempoemstarinfo}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsptitle}
% Typeset a \cs{poemtitle}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{phantomsection} to \cs{@vsptitle}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@vsptitle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@vsptitle[#1]#2{%
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{#1}%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\mempoeminfo{#1}%
\poemtitlemark{#1}%
\@vstypeptitle{#2}%
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vssptitle}
% Typeset a \cs{poemtitle*}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@vssptitle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@vssptitle#1{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\mempoemstarinfo{#1}%
\@vstypeptitle{#1}%
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vstypeptitle}
% This \emph{really} typesets the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vstypeptitle}[1]{%
\vspace{\beforepoemtitleskip}%
{\poemtitlefont #1\par}%
\vspace{\afterpoemtitleskip}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlefont}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlemark}
% Sets the appearance to the title of a poem, and something for a header.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\centering}
\newcommand{\poemtitlemark}[1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforepoemtitleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterpoemtitleskip}
% Lengths before and after a poem title, using approximately \cs{section}
% values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}
\setlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}
\setlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}{2.3ex \@plus.2ex}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@numptitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@numptitletrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@numptitlefalse}
% \begin{macro}{\NumberPoemTitle}
% \begin{macro}{\PlainPoemTitle}
% Following the \cs{NumberPoemTitle} declaration \cs{PoemTitle}s are numbered.
% The \cs{PlainPoemTitle} declaration produces unnumbered titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@numptitle
\newcommand*{\NumberPoemTitle}{\@numptitletrue}
\newcommand*{\PlainPoemTitle}{\@numptitlefalse}
\NumberPoemTitle
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@poem}
% \begin{macro}{\thepoem}
% \begin{macro}{\theHpoem}
% Counter for poem titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{poem}\setcounter{poem}{0}
\renewcommand*{\thepoem}{\@arabic\c@poem}
\newcommand*{\theHpoem}{\arabic{poem}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlestarmark}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlepstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlestarpstyle}
% \cs{poemtitlemark}\marg{poemf@rhdr} is used for marks for a \cs{PoemTitle} and
% \cs{poemtitlestarmark}\marg{poemf@hdr} is for marks for \cs{PoemTitle*}.
% The \cs{poemtitlepstyle} and \cs{poemtitlestarpstyle} macros are provided
% as hooks so that, for example, pagestyles can be set for the regular
% and starred versions of \cs{PoemTitle}. By default these macros do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\poemtitlestarmark}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\poemtitlepstyle}{}
\newcommand*{\poemtitlestarpstyle}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitle}
% The command to produce a article style chapter-like (numbered) poem title.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/09}{Added \cs{PoemTitle}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\PoemTitle{%
\par
\@afterindentfalse
\@ifstar{\@m@msPoemTitle}{\@m@mPoemTitle}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mPoemTitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemt@c}
% Intermediate and support macros for the extra optional argument
% to \cs{PoemTitle}. Have to do this long windedly otherwise dear old
% \Lpack{hyperref} barfs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mPoemTitle}[1][]{%
\def\poemt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
\@ifnextchar[{\@PoemTitle}{\@PoemTitle[]}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memPoemTitleinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\memPoemTitlestarinfo}
% \verb?\memPoemTitleinfo{num}{toc}{head}{full}? \\
% \verb?\memPoemTitlestarinfo{short}{full}?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memPoemTitleinfo}[4]{}
\newcommand{\memPoemTitlestarinfo}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@PoemTitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemf@rtoc}
% \begin{macro}{\poemf@rhdr}
% \cs{@PoemTitle}\oarg{tocmark}\marg{title}
% typesets the title of a \cs{PoemTitle}.
% There is a number for \cs{@numptitletrue} and \cs{@mainmattertrue}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@PoemTitle[#1]#2{%
\phantomsection
\ifx\poemt@c\@empty % no optional args
\def\poemf@rtoc{#2}%
\def\poemf@rhdr{#2}%
\else % at least one opt arg
\let\poemf@rtoc\poemt@c
\ifx\@empty#1\@empty
\let\poemf@rhdr\poemt@c
\else
\def\poemf@rhdr{#1}%
\fi
\fi
\m@m@Andfalse
\if@numptitle
\if@mainmatter
\m@m@Andtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifm@m@And
\refstepcounter{poem}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Store the (short) title via \cs{poemtitlemark} and call
% \cs{\@makePoemTitlehead} to do the typesetting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@makePoemTitlehead{#2}%
\@afterheading
\poemtitlemark{\poemf@rhdr}%
\poemtitlepstyle
% \end{macrocode}
% Add the title to the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{%
\protect\numberline{\thepoem}\poemf@rtoc}%
\memPoemTitleinfo{\thepoem}{\poemf@rtoc}{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
\else
\addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{\poemf@rtoc}%
\memPoemTitleinfo{}{\poemf@rtoc}{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Add hook for title referencing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\poemf@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\poemf@rtoc}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makePoemTitlehead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{PoemTitle}. Leave some whitespace.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makePoemTitlehead#1{{%
\PoemTitleheadstart
\parindent \z@ \normalfont
% \end{macrocode}
% If there is a number, typeset it, otherwise call \cs{printPoemTitlenonum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@m@And
\printPoemTitlenum
\afterPoemTitlenum
\else
\printPoemTitlenonum
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeset the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printPoemTitletitle{#1}%
\afterPoemTitle}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@PTchs@def@ult}
% This sets up all the definitions used in \cs{@makePoemTitlehead}
% and \cs{@makesPoemTitlehead}.
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitleheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitlenum}
% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitlenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitlenonum}
% \begin{macro}{\printPoemTitletitle}
% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@PTchs@def@ult}{%
\def\PoemTitleheadstart{\vspace{\beforePoemTitleskip}}
\def\printPoemTitlenum{\PoemTitlenumfont \thepoem}
\def\afterPoemTitlenum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midPoemTitleskip}
\def\printPoemTitlenonum{}
\def\printPoemTitletitle##1{\PoemTitlefont ##1}
\def\afterPoemTitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterPoemTitleskip}}
\@PTchs@def@ult
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitlenumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\PoemTitlefont}
% Fonts for setting the Poem Title number and title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\PoemTitlenumfont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
\newcommand*{\PoemTitlefont}{\normalfont\large\centering}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforePoemTitleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midPoemTitleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterPoemTitleskip}
% Lengths separating the various parts of a Poem Title heading.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}
\setlength{\beforePoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
\newlength{\midPoemTitleskip}
\setlength{\midPoemTitleskip}{0pt}
\newlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}
\setlength{\afterPoemTitleskip}{1\onelineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@msPoemTitle}
% This deals with the optional argument for starred PoemTitles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@msPoemTitle}[2][\@empty]{%
\@sPoemTitle{#2}%
\ifx \@empty#1
\def\poemf@rhdr{#2}%
\else % opt arg
\def\poemf@rhdr{#1}%
\fi
\poemtitlestarmark{\poemf@rhdr}%
\poemtitlestarpstyle
\memPoemTitlestarinfo{\poemf@rhdr}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sPoemTitle}
% \cs{@sPoemTitle}\marg{long} typesets the title of a
% \cs{PoemTitle*}. It is easier than the \cs{@PoemTitle} as there is no number
% or ToC entry to worry about.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@sPoemTitle}[1]{%
\@makesPoemTitlehead{#1}%
\@afterheading
\M@gettitle{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makesPoemTitlehead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a \cs{PoemTitle*}, and is similar to
% \cs{@makePoemTitlehead}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makesPoemTitlehead#1{{%
\PoemTitleheadstart
\parindent \z@ \normalfont
\printPoemTitlenonum
\interlinepenalty\@M
\printPoemTitletitle{#1}
\afterPoemTitle}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Setting parameters for existing environments}
%
% \subsection{Array and tabular}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
% The columns in an array environment are separated by
% 2\cs{arraycolsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\arraycolsep{5\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
% The columns in an tabular environment are separated by
% 2\cs{tabcolsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
% The width of rules in the array and tabular environments is given
% by\\ \cs{arrayrulewidth}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
% The space between adjacent rules in the array and tabular
% environments is given by \cs{doublerulesep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Tabbing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
% This controls the space that the \verb?\'? command puts in. (See
% \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Minipage}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% The macro \cs{@minipagerestore} is called upon entry to a minipage
% environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
% inside a minipage environment. In the standard styles it does
% nothing, as was the case originally for memoir.
%
% Memoir extends it to support verbatim footnotes (see later) in minipages
% and also for abnormal parskips (see later).
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Collected \cs{@minipagerestore} modifications together}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@minipagerestore}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% For \cs{verbfootnote} to work in a minipage we have to use
% \cs{@verbmpfootnotetext} instead of \cs{@verbfootnotetext}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@verbfootnotetext\@verbmpfootnotetext
% \end{macrocode}
% The next is for enabling the extended footnotes in a minipage.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@mdoextrafeetmini
% \end{macrocode}
% And this is for abnormal parskips.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@mnzpskip \parskip=\m@mabparskip\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
% Minipages have their own footnotes; \verb?\skip\@mpfootins? plays
% the same r\^ole for footnotes in a minipage as \verb?\skip\footins? does
% for ordinary footnotes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Framed boxes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
% The space left by \cs{fbox} and \cs{framebox} between the box and the
% text in it.
% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
% The width of the rules in the box made by \cs{fbox} and \cs{framebox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@}
\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Equation and eqnarray}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
% The equation counter will be reset at beginning of a new chapter
% and the equation number will be prefixed by the chapter number.
%
% This code must follow the \cs{chapter} definition, or more exactly
% the definition of the chapter counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtoreset{equation}{chapter}
\renewcommand{\theequation}{%
\ifnum \c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@equation}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\jot}
% \cs{jot} is the extra space added between lines of an eqnarray
% environment. The default value is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \setlength\jot{3pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
% The macro \cs{@eqnnum} defines how equation numbers are to appear in
% equations. Again the default is used.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
% \def\@eqnnum{(\theequation)}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Array and tabular}
%
% \subsection{Array}%
%
% The description and code are essentially copied from the \Lpack{array}
% package~\cite{ARRAY}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Array package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% Frank Mittelbach & David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The construction of the preamble}
%
% \begin{PW}
% PW: The original \Lpack{array} package has redundant code (caused by a quick
% mashing of an early \Lpack{array} and the \Lpack{newarray} packages). I
% have tried to remove the redundancies and overlaps.
% \end{PW}
%
% It is obvious that those environments will consist mainly of an
% \cs{halign}, because \TeX\ typesets tables using this primitive.
% That is why we will now take a look at the algorithm which determines
% a preamble for a \cs{halign} starting with a given user preamble
% using the options mentioned above.
%
% The most interesting macros of this implementation are without doubt
% those which are responsible for the construction of the preamble for
% the \cs{halign}. The underlying algorithm was developed by
% \textsc{Lamport} (resp.\ \textsc{Knuth}, see texhax V87\#??), and it
% has been extended and improved.
%
% The user preamble will be read \textsf{token} by \textsf{token}. A
% \textsf{token} is a single character like \texttt{c} or a block
% enclosed in \verb?{...}?. For example the preamble of
% \verb?\begin{tabular}?\linebreak[0]\verb?{lc||c@{\hspace{1cm}}}? consists of
% the \textsf{token} \texttt{l}, \texttt{c}, \verb?|?, \verb?|?,
% \texttt{@} and \verb?\hspace{1cm}?.
%
% The currently used \textsf{token} and the one, used before, are needed
% to decide on how the construction of the preamble has to be
% continued.
% In the example mentioned above the \texttt{l} causes the preamble
% to begin with \verb?\hskip\tabcolsep?. Furthermore
% \verb?# \hfil? would be appended to define a flush left column.
% The next \textsf{token} is a \texttt{c}. Because it was preceded by an
% \texttt{l} it generates a new column. This is done with
% \verb?\hskip \tabcolsep & \hskip \tabcolsep?. The column which is to
% be centered will be appended with \verb?\hfil # \hfil?.
% The \textsf{token} \verb?|? would then add a space of
% \verb?\hskip \tabcolsep?
% and a vertical line because the last
% \textsf{tokens} was a \texttt{c}.
% The following \textsf{token} \verb?|? would only add a space
% \verb?\hskip \doublerulesep? because it was preceded by the
% \textsf{token} \verb?|?. We will not discuss our example further but
% rather take a look at the general case of constructing preambles.
%
% The example shows that the desired preamble for the
% \cs{halign} can be constructed as soon as the action of all
% combinations
% of the preamble \textsf{tokens} are specified. There are 18 such
% \textsf{tokens}
% so we have $19 \cdot 18 = 342$ combinations if we count the
% beginning of
% the preamble as a special \textsf{token}. Fortunately, there are many
% combinations which generate the same spaces, so we can define
% \textsf{token} classes. We will identify a
% \textsf{token} within a class with a number, so we can insert the
% formatting (for example of a column).
% Table~\ref{tab:Klassen} lists all \textsf{token} classes and
% their corresponding numbers.
% \begin{table}[ht]
% \begin{center} \ttfamily
% ^^A \begin{tabular}[t]{>{\ttfamily}ccc}
% \begin{tabular}[t]{ccc}
% \textsf{token} & \cs{@chclass} & \cs{@chnum} \\[2mm]
% c & 0 & 0 \\
% l & 0 & 1 \\
% r & 0 & 2 \\
% p-arg & 0 & 3 \\
% t-arg & 0 & 4 \\
% b-arg & 0 & 5 \\
% \verb?|? & 1 & 0 \\
% !-arg & 1 & 1 \\
% <-arg & 2 & --- \\
% >-arg & 3 & ---
% \end{tabular}
% \kern3mm \vrule \kern3mm%
% ^^A \begin{tabular}[t]{>{\ttfamily}ccc}
% \begin{tabular}[t]{ccc}
% \textsf{token} & \cs{@chclass} & \cs{@chnum} \\[2mm]
% Start & 4 & --- \\
% @-arg & 5 & --- \\
% ! & 6 & --- \\
% @ & 7 & --- \\
% < & 8 & --- \\
% > & 9 & --- \\
% p & 10 & 3 \\
% t & 10 & 4 \\
% b & 10 & 5
% \end{tabular}
% \end{center}
% \caption{Classes of preamble \textsf{tokens}}
% \label{tab:Klassen}
% \end{table}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chclass}
% \begin{macro}{\@chnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@lastchclass}
% The class and the number of the current \textsf{token} are saved in
% the
% \textsf{count} registers \cs{@chclass}
% and \cs{@chnum}, while the class of the previous
% \textsf{token} is stored in the
% \textsf{count} register \cs{lastchclass}.
% All of the mentioned registers are already allocated in
% \texttt{latex.tex},
% which is the reason why the following three lines of code are
% commented out.
% Later throughout the text I will not mention it again explicitely
% whenever I use a \verb?%? sign. These parts are already defined in
% \texttt{latex.tex}.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcount \@chclass
% \newcount \@chnum
% \newcount \@lastchclass
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@addtopreamble}
% We will save the already constructed preamble for
% the \cs{halign}
% in the global macro \cs{@preamble}. This will then be
% enlarged with
% the command \cs{@addtopreamble}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@addtopreamble#1{\xdef\@preamble{\@preamble #1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@testpach}
% With the help of \cs{@lastchclass} we can now define a macro
% which determines the class and the number of a given preamble
% \textsf{token}
% and assigns them to the registers
% \cs{@chclass} and \cs{@chnum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@testpach{\@chclass
% \end{macrocode}
% First we deal with the cases in which the \textsf{token}
% (\verb?#1?) is the argument of \texttt{!}, \texttt{@}, \texttt{<} or
% \texttt{>}. We can see this from the value of \cs{@lastchclass}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \@lastchclass=6 \@ne \@chnum \@ne \else
\ifnum \@lastchclass=7 5 \else
\ifnum \@lastchclass=8 \tw@ \else
\ifnum \@lastchclass=9 \thr@@
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we will assume that the \textsf{token} belongs to the
% class 0
% and assign the corresponding number to \cs{@chnum} if our
% assumption is correct.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last \textsf{token} was a \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or a
% \texttt{b}, \cs{@chnum} already has the right value. This is the
% reason for the somewhat curious choice of the \textsf{token}
% numbers in class 10.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \@lastchclass = 10 \else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we will check if \cs{@nextchar} is either a \texttt{c},
% \texttt{l} or an \texttt{r}. Some applications change the
% catcodes of certain characters like ``\texttt{@}'' in
% \texttt{amstex.sty}. As a result the tests below would fail since
% they assume non-active character tokens. Therefore we evaluate
% \cs{@nextchar} once thereby turning the first token of its
% replacement text into a char. At this point here this should have
% been the only char present in \cs{@nextchar} which put into via a
% \cs{def}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\@nextchar{\expandafter\string\@nextchar}%
\@chnum
\if \@nextchar c\z@ \else
\if \@nextchar l\@ne \else
\if \@nextchar r\tw@ \else
% \end{macrocode}
% If it is a different \textsf{token}, we know that the class was
% not 0. We assign the value 0 to \cs{@chnum} because this value
% is needed for the \verb?|?--\textsf{token}. Now we must check
% the remaining classes. Note that the value of \cs{@chnum} is
% insignificant here for most classes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\z@ \@chclass
\if\@nextchar |\@ne \else
\if \@nextchar !6 \else
\if \@nextchar @7 \else
\if \@nextchar <8 \else
\if \@nextchar >9 \else
% \end{macrocode}
% The remaining permitted \textsf{tokens} are \texttt{p},
% \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} (class 10).
% \begin{macrocode}
10
\@chnum
\if \@nextchar m\thr@@\else
\if \@nextchar p4 \else
\if \@nextchar b5 \else
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the only remaining possibility is a forbidden \textsf{token},
% so we choose class 0 and number 0 and give an error message.
% Then we finish the macro by closing all \cs{if}'s.
% \begin{macrocode}
\z@ \@chclass \z@ \@preamerr \z@ \fi \fi \fi \fi
\fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The preamble will be enlarged with the help of \cs{xdef}, but the
% arguments of \texttt{>}, \texttt{<},~\texttt{!}\ and \texttt{@} are
% not supposed to be expanded during the construction (we want an
% implementation that doesn't need a \cs{protect}). So we have to find a
% way to inhibit the expansion of those arguments.
%
% We will solve this problem with \textsf{token} registers. We need
% one register for every \texttt{!}\ and \texttt{@}, while we need two
% for every \texttt{c}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{m}, \texttt{p}
% or \texttt{b}. This limits the number of columns of a table because
% there are only 256 \textsf{token} registers. But then, who needs
% tables with more than 100 columns?
%
% So how do we proceed? Let us assume that we had \verb?!{foo}? in the
% user preamble and say we saved \texttt{foo} in
% \textsf{token} register 5. Then we call
% \verb?\@addtopreamble{\the@toks5}? where
% \cs{the@toks} is defined in a way that it does not expand
% (for example it could be equivalent to \cs{relax}). Every
% following call
% of \cs{@addtopreamble} leaves \cs{the@toks5} unchanged in
% \cs{@preamble}. If the construction of the preamble is completed
% we change the definition of \cs{the@toks} to
% \verb?\the\toks? and expand \cs{@preamble} for the last time.
% During this process all parts of the form
% \cs{the@toks}\meta{Number}
% will be substituted by the contents of the respective \textsf{token}
% registers.
%
% As we can see from this informal discussion the construction of the
% preamble has to take place within a group, so that the
% \textsf{token} registers we use will be freed later on. For that
% reason we keep all assignments to \cs{@preamble} global; therefore the
% replacement text of this macro will remain the same after we leave
% the group.
%
% \begin{macro}{\count@}
% We further need a \textsf{count} register to remember which
% \textsf{token} register is to be used next. This will be
% initialized with -1 if we want to begin with the \textsf{token}
% register 0. We use the \PlainTeX\ scratch register \cs{count@}
% because everything takes place locally. All we have to do is
% insert \cs{the@toks} \cs{the} \cs{count@} into the preamble.
% \cs{the@toks} will remain unchanged and \verb?\the\count@? expands into
% the saved number.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prepnext@tok}
% The macro \cs{prepnext@tok} is in charge of preparing the next
% \textsf{token} register. For that purpose we increase
% \cs{count@} by 1:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\prepnext@tok{\advance \count@ \@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we locally delete any contents the
% \textsf{token} register might have.
% \begin{macrocode}
\toks\count@{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\save@decl}
% During the construction of the preamble the current
% \textsf{token} is always saved in the macro \cs{@nextchar} (see the
% definition of \cs{@mkpream}). The macro
% \cs{save@decl} saves it into the next free \textsf{token} register,
% i.e.\ in \verb?\toks\count@?.
% We do not assume that the token register is free, we add the new
% declarations to the front of the register. This is to allow user
% preambles of the form, \verb?>{foo}>{bar}..?. Users are not encouraged to
% enter such expressions directly, but they may result from the
% rewriting of \cs{newcolumntype}'s.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\save@decl{\toks \count@ = \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
{\expandafter\@nextchar\the\toks\count@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% How does the situation look like, if we want to add another column
% to the preamble, i.e.\ if we have found a \texttt{c}, \texttt{l},
% \texttt{r}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} in the user
% preamble? In this case we have the problem of the \textsf{token}
% register from \verb?>{..}? and \verb?<{..}? having to be inserted at this
% moment because formating instructions like \cs{hfil} have to be set
% around them. On the other hand it is not known yet, if any \verb?<{..}?
% instruction will appear in the user preamble at all.
%
% We solve this problem by adding two \textsf{token} registers at a
% time. This explains, why we have freed the \textsf{token} registers
% in \cs{prepnext@tok}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\insert@column}
% \begin{macro}{\@sharp}
% We now define the macro \cs{insert@column} which will do
% this work for us.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\insert@column{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Here, we assume that the \textsf{count} register
% \cs{@tempcnta} has saved the value \verb?\count@?-1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\the@toks \the \@tempcnta
% \end{macrocode}
% Next follows the \verb?#? sign which specifies the place
% where the text of the column shall be inserted. To avoid
% errors during the expansions in
% \cs{@addtopreamble} we hide this sign in the command
% \cs{@sharp} which is temporarily occupied with
% \cs{relax} during the build-up of the preamble.
% To remove unwanted spaces before and after the column text, we set
% an \cs{ignorespaces} in front and a \cs{unskip} afterwards.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ignorespaces \@sharp \unskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Then the second \textsf{token} register follows whose number should
% be saved in \cs{count@}.
% We make sure that there will be no further expansion after reading
% the number, by finishing with \cs{relax}. The case above is not
% critical since it is ended by \cs{ignorespaces}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\the@toks \the \count@ \relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@addamp}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@addamp}
% \begin{macro}{\@addamp}
%
% In the preamble a \verb?&? has to be inserted between any two columns;
% before the first column there should not be a \verb?&?. As the user
% preamble may start with a \verb?|? we have to remember somehow
% if we have already inserted a \verb?#? (i.e.\ a column). This is done
% with the boolean variable \cs{if@firstamp} that we test in
% \cs{@addamp}, the macro that inserts the \verb?&?.
%
% \begin{PW}
% PW: Later on, for horizontal lines in `continuous' tabulars,
% I need to know how many columns there are in a tabular. I need a modified
% kernel's \cs{@addamp} to do this and use the kernel's \cs{@curtab}
% (a counter used in tabbing) to store the number of columns.
%
% \cs{m@mold@addamp} stores the kernel's definition of \cs{@addamp}, and
% \cs{m@m@addamp} is the revised definition.
% \end{PW}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newif \@iffirstamp
\let\m@mold@addamp\@addamp
\newcommand*{\m@m@addamp}{%
\if@firstamp
\@firstampfalse
\global\@curtab\@ne
\else
\@addtopreamble{&}
\global\advance\@curtab\@ne
\fi}
\let\@addamp\m@m@addamp
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@acol}
% \begin{macro}{\@acolampacol}
% \begin{macro}{\col@sep}
% We will now define some abbreviations for the extensions,
% appearing most often in the preamble build-up.
% Here \cs{col@sep} is a \textsf{dimen} register which is set
% equivalent to \cs{arraycolsep} in an \textsf{array}--environment,
% otherwise it is set equivalent to \cs{tabcolsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\col@sep
\def\@acol{\@addtopreamble{\hskip\col@sep}}
% \def\@acolampacol{\@acol\@addamp\@acol}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream}
% \begin{macro}{\the@toks}
% Now we can define the macro which builds up the preamble for the
% \cs{halign}.
% First we initialize \cs{@preamble}, \cs{@lastchclass}
% and the boolean variable \cs{if@firstamp}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@mkpream#1{\gdef\@preamble{}\@lastchclass 4 \@firstamptrue
% \end{macrocode}
% During the build-up of the preamble we cannot directly use the
% \verb?#? sign; this would lead to an error message in the next
% \cs{@addtopreamble} call.
% Instead, we use the command \cs{@sharp} at places where later
% a \verb?#? will be.
% This command is at first given the meaning \cs{relax};
% therefore it will not be expanded when the preamble
% is extended.
% In the macro \cs{@array}, shortly before the \cs{halign}
% is carried out, \cs{@sharp} is given its final meaning.
%
% In a similar way,
% we deal with the commands \cs{@startpbox} and
% \cs{@endpbox}, although the reason is different here: these
% macros expand in many \textsf{tokens} which would delay the
% build-up of the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@sharp\relax \let\@startpbox\relax \let\@endpbox\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we remove possible \verb?*?-forms and user-defined column
% specifiers in the user preamble by repeatedly executing the list
% \cs{NC@list} until the re-writes have no more effect. The
% expanded preamble will then be in the token register
% \cs{@temptokena}. Actually we need to know at this point that
% this is not \cs{toks0}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@temptokena{#1}\@tempswatrue
\@whilesw\if@tempswa\fi{\@tempswafalse\the\NC@list}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Afterwards we initialize all registers and macros, that we need
% for the build-up of the preamble.
% Since we want to start with the \textsf{token} register 0,
% \cs{count@} has to contain the value -1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\count@\m@ne
\let\the@toks\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we call up \cs{prepnext@tok} in order to prepare the
% \textsf{token} register 0 for use.
% \begin{macrocode}
\prepnext@tok
% \end{macrocode}
% Having expanded all tokens defined using \cs{newcolumntype} (including
% \verb?*?), we evaluate the remaining tokens, which are saved in
% \cs{@temptokena}. We use the \LaTeX--macro \cs{@tfor} to inspect each
% token in turn.
% The strange appearing construction with \cs{expandafter} is
% based on the fact that we have to put the replacement text of
% \cs{@tempa} and not the macro \cs{@tempa} to this
% \LaTeX--macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter \@tfor \expandafter \@nextchar
\expandafter :\expandafter =\the\@temptokena \do
% \end{macrocode}
% The body of this loop (the group after the \cs{do})
% is executed for one \textsf{token} at a time, whereas
% the current \textsf{token} is saved in \cs{@nextchar}.
% At first we evaluate the current \textsf{token} with the already
% defined macro \cs{@testpach}, i.e.\ we assign to
% \cs{@chclass} the character class and to \cs{@chnum}
% the character number of this \textsf{token}.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\@testpach
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we branch out depending on the value of \cs{@chclass} into
% different macros that extend the preamble respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase \@chclass \@classz \or \@classi \or \@classii
\or \save@decl \or \or \@classv \or \@classvi
\or \@classvii \or \@classviii
% \end{macrocode}
% Class 9 is equivalent to class 10.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or \@classx
\or \@classx \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Two cases deserve our special attention: Since the current
% \textsf{token} cannot have the character class 4 (start) we
% have skipped this possibility. If the character class is 3,
% only the content of \cs{@nextchar} has to be saved into the current
% \textsf{token} register; therefore we call up \cs{save@decl}
% directly and save a macro name. After the preamble has been
% extended we assign the value of \cs{@chclass} to the counter
% \cs{@lastchclass} to assure that this information will be available
% during the next run of the loop.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@lastchclass\@chclass}%
% \end{macrocode}
% After the loop has been finished space must still be added to
% the created preamble, depending on the last \textsf{token}.
% Depending on the value of \cs{@lastchclass} we perform
% the necessary operations.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\@lastchclass
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last class equals 0 we add a
% \verb?\hskip \col@sep?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% If it equals 1 we do not add any additional space so that the
% horizontal lines do not exceed the vertical ones.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class 2 is treated like class 0 because a \verb?<{...}? can
% only directly follow after class 0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Most of the other possibilities can only appear if the user
% preamble was defective. Class 3 is not allowed since after a
% \verb?>{..}? there must always follow a \texttt{c}, \texttt{l},
% \texttt{r}, \texttt{p},\texttt{m} or \texttt{b}. We report an
% error and ignore the declaration given by \verb?{..}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@preamerr \thr@@ \or
% \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{@lastchclass} is 4 the user preamble has been empty.
% To continue, we insert a \verb?#? in the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@preamerr \tw@ \@addtopreamble\@sharp \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class 5 is allowed again. In this case
% (the user preamble ends with \verb?@{..}?) we need not
% do anything.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
% Any other case means that the arguments to \verb?@?, \texttt{!},
% \texttt{<}, \texttt{>}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} have
% been forgotten. So we report an error and ignore the last
% \textsf{token}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \@preamerr \@ne \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now that the build-up of the preamble is almost finished we can
% insert the \textsf{token} registers and therefore redefine
% \cs{the@toks}. The actual insertion, though, is performed
% later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\the@toks{\the\toks}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The preamble is extended by the macros \cs{@classz} to
% \cs{@classx} which are called by \cs{@mkpream}
% depending on \cs{@lastchclass}
% (i.e. the character class of the last \textsf{token}).
% \begin{macro}{\@classx}
% First we define \cs{@classx} because of its important r\^ole.
% When it is called we find that the current
% \textsf{token} is \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b}.
% That means that a new column has to start.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classx{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Depending on the value of \cs{@lastchclass} different actions
% must take place:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase \@lastchclass
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last character class was 0 we separate the columns by
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep? followed by \verb?&? and another
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acolampacol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% If the last class was class 1 --- that means that a vertical
% line was
% drawn, --- before this line a \verb?\hskip\col@sep? was inserted.
% Therefore there has to be only a \verb?&? followed by
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep?. But this \verb?&? may be inserted only
% if this is not the first column. This process is controlled
% by \cs{if@firstamp} in the macro \cs{addamp}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addamp \@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class 2 is treated like class 0 because \verb?<{...}? can only
% follow after class 0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acolampacol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class 3 requires no actions because all things necessary have
% been done by the preamble \textsf{token} \texttt{>}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
% Class 4 means that we are at the beginning of the preamble.
% Therefore we start the preamble with \verb?\hskip\col@sep? and
% then call \cs{@firstampfalse}. This makes sure that a later
% \cs{@addamp} inserts the character
% \verb?&? into the preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@acol \@firstampfalse \or
% \end{macrocode}
% For class 5 \textsf{tokens} only the character \verb?&? is inserted
% as a column separator. Therefore we call \cs{@addamp}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addamp
% \end{macrocode}
% Other cases are impossible. For an example
% \verb?\@lastchclass = 6? ---a s it might appear in a
% preamble of the form \verb?...!p...? --- \texttt{p} would have
% been taken as an argument of \texttt{!} by \cs{@testpach}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classz}
% If the character class of the last \textsf{token} is 0 we have
% \texttt{c}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{r} or an argument of \texttt{m},
% \texttt{b} or\ \texttt{p}. In the first three cases the preamble
% must be extended the same way as if we had class 10. The
% remaining two cases do not require any action because the space
% needed was generated by the last \textsf{token} (i.e.\
% \texttt{m}, \texttt{b} or \texttt{p}). Since \cs{@lastchclass} has
% the value 10 at this point nothing happens when \cs{@classx} is
% called. So the macro \cs{@chlassz} may start like this:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classz{\@classx
% \end{macrocode}
% According to the definition of \cs{insert@column} we must store
% the number of the \textsf{token} register in which a preceding
% \verb?>{..}? might have stored its argument into
% \cs{@tempcnta}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempcnta \count@
% \end{macrocode}
% To have \verb?\count@ = \@tmpcnta + 1? we prepare
% the next \textsf{token} register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\prepnext@tok
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the preamble must be extended with the column whose format
% can be determinated by \cs{@chnum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtopreamble{\ifcase \@chnum
% \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{@chnum} has the value 0 a centered column has to be
% generated.
% So we begin with stretchable space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hfil
% \end{macrocode}
% The command \cs{d@llarbegin} follows expanding into \cs{begingroup}
% (in the \textsf{tabular}--environment) or into \verb?$?. Doing this
% (provided an appropriate setting of \cs{d@llarbegin}) we achieve
% that the contents of the columns of an \textsf{array}--environment
% are set in math mode while those of a \textsf{tabular}--environment
% are set in LR mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\d@llarbegin
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we insert the contents of the two \textsf{token} registers
% and the symbol
% for the column entry (i.e.\ \verb?#? or
% more precise \cs{@sharp}) using \cs{insert@column}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\insert@column
% \end{macrocode}
% We end this case with \cs{d@llarend} and \cs{hfil} where \cs{d@llarend}
% again is either \verb?$? or \cs{endgroup}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\d@llarend \hfil \or
% \end{macrocode}
% The templates for \texttt{l} and \texttt{r} (i.e.\ \cs{@chnum} 1
% or 2) are generated the same way. Since one \cs{hfil} is
% missing the text is moved to the relevant side.
% The \verb?\kern\z@? is needed in case of an empty column
% entry. Otherwise
% the \cs{unskip} in \cs{insert@column} removes the
% \cs{hfil}. Changed to \verb?\hskip1sp? so that it interacts better with
% \cs{@bsphack}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \hfil \or
\hfil\hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \or
% \end{macrocode}
% The templates for \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} mainly
% consist of a \textsf{box}. In case of \texttt{m} it is generated
% by \cs{vcenter}. This command is allowed only in math
% mode. Therefore we start with a~\verb?$?.
% \begin{macrocode}
$\vcenter%$
% \end{macrocode}
% The part of the templates which is the same in all three cases
% (\texttt{p}, \texttt{m} and \texttt{b})
% is built by the macros \cs{@startpbox} and
% \cs{@endpbox}. \cs{@startpbox} has an argument:
% the width of the column which is stored in the current
% \textsf{token} (i.e.\ \cs{@nextchar}).
% Between these two macros we find the well known
% \cs{insert@column}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox $\or%$
% \end{macrocode}
% The templates for \texttt{p} and \texttt{b} are generated in the
% same way though we do not need the \verb?$? characters because we use
% \cs{vtop} or \cs{vbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\vtop \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox \or
\vbox \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
% \end{macrocode}
% Other values for \cs{@chnum} are impossible. Therefore we
% end the arguments to \cs{@addtopreamble} and \cs{ifcase}.
% Before we come to the end of \cs{@classz} we have to
% prepare the next \textsf{token} register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi}\prepnext@tok}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classix}
% Class 9 (\texttt{>}--\textsf{token}) prevented repeated
% \verb?>? declarations for the same column. This restriction has been eased,
% making class 9 equivalent to class 10.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Let \cs{@classix} to \cs{relax} (mempatch v3.10)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@classix\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classviii}
% If the current \textsf{token} is a \texttt{<} the last character
% class must be 0, or 2 (as repeated \verb?<? expressions are allowed).
% In this case it is not necessary to extend the
% preamble. Otherwise we output an error message, set \cs{@chclass}
% to 6 and call \cs{@classvi}. By doing this we achieve that
% \texttt{<} is treated like \texttt{!}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classviii{\ifnum \@lastchclass >\z@\ifnum\@lastchclass=\tw@\else
\@preamerr 4\@chclass 6 \@classvi \fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@arrayrule}
% There is only one incompatibility with the original definition:
% the definition of \cs{@arrayrule}. In the original a line without
% width (e.g., the space between \verb?cc? and \verb?c|c?
% is equal) is created by multiple insertions of
% \verb?\hskip .5\arrayrulewidth?.
% We only insert a vertical line into the
% preamble. This is done to prevent problems with \TeX's main
% memory when generating tables with many vertical lines in them
% (especially in the case of \textsf{floats}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arrayrule{\@addtopreamble \vline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classvii}
% As a consequence it follows that in case of class 7
% (\verb?@? \textsf{token}) the preamble need not to be extended.
% In the original definition \verb?\@lastchclass = 1?
% is treated by inserting \verb?\hskip .5\arrayrulewidth?.
% We only check if the last \textsf{token} was of class 3 which is
% forbidden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classvii{\ifnum \@lastchclass = \thr@@
% \end{macrocode}
% If this is true we output an error message and
% ignore the declarations stored
% by the last \verb?>{...}?, because these are overwritten
% by the argument of \texttt{@}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@preamerr \thr@@ \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classvi}
% If the current \textsf{token} is a regular \texttt{!}\ and the
% last class was 0 or 2 we extend the preamble with
% \verb?\hskip\col@sep?. If the last \textsf{token} was of class 1
% (for instance \verb?|?) we extend with \verb?\hskip \doublerulesep?
% because the construction \verb?!{...}? has to be treated like
% \verb?|?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classvi{\ifcase \@lastchclass
\@acol \or
\@addtopreamble{\hskip \doublerulesep}\or
\@acol \or
% \end{macrocode}
% Now \verb?\@preamerr...? should follow because a
% user preamble of the form \verb?..>{..}!.? is not allowed.
% To save memory we call \cs{@classvii} instead which also
% does what we want.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@classvii
% \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{@lastchclass} is 4 or 5 nothing has to be done.
% Class 6 to 10 are not possible.
% So we finish the macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classii}
% \begin{macro}{\@classiii}
% In the case of character classes 2 and 3 (i.e.\ the argument
% of \texttt{<} or \texttt{>}) we only have to store the current
% \textsf{token} (\cs{@nextchar}) into the corresponding
% \textsf{token} register since the preparation and
% insertion of these registers
% are done by the macro \cs{@classz}.
% This is equivalent to calling \cs{save@decl} in the case of
% class 3. To save command identifiers we do this call up
% in the macro \cs{@mkpream}.
%
% Class 2 exhibits a more complicated situation: the
% \textsf{token} registers have already been inserted by
% \cs{@classz}. So the value of \cs{count@} is too high
% by one. Therefore we decrease \cs{count@} by 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classii{\advance \count@ \m@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Next we store the current \textsf{token} into the correct
% \textsf{token} register by calling \cs{save@decl} and then
% increase the value of \cs{count@} again. At this point we
% can save memory once more (at the cost of time) if we use the
% macro \cs{prepnext@tok}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\save@decl\prepnext@tok}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classv}
% Class 5 is \texttt{@}-expressions (and is also called by class 1)
% We do not expand the
% \verb?@?-expression, but instead explicitly replace an
% \cs{extracolsep} command by an assignment to \cs{tabskip} by a
% method similar to the \cs{newcolumntype} system described later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classv{\save@decl
\expandafter\NC@ecs\@nextchar\extracolsep{}\extracolsep\@@@
\@addtopreamble{\d@llarbegin\the@toks\the\count@\relax\d@llarend}%
\prepnext@tok}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\NC@ecs}
% Rewrite the first occurrence of \verb?\extracolsep{1in}? to
% \verb?\tabskip1in\relax?. As a side effect discard any tokens after a
% second \cs{extracolsep}, there is no point in the user entering two of
% these commands anyway, so this is not really a restriction.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@ecs#1\extracolsep#2#3\extracolsep#4\@@@{\def\@tempa{#2}%
\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\toks\count@={#1\tabskip#2\relax#3}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@classi}
% In the case of class 0 we were able to generate the necessary
% space between columns by using the macro \cs{@classx}.
% Analogously the macro \cs{@classvi} can be used for class 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@classi{\@classvi
% \end{macrocode}
% Depending on \cs{@chnum} a vertical line
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase \@chnum \@arrayrule \or
% \end{macrocode}
% or (in case of \verb?!{...}?) the current \textsf{token} --- stored
% in \cs{@nextchar} --- has to be inserted into the preamble.
% This corresponds to calling \cs{@classv}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@classv \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@startpbox}
% In \cs{@classz} the macro \cs{@startpbox} is used.
% The width of the \textsf{parbox} is passed as an argument.
% \cs{vcenter}, \cs{vtop} or \cs{vbox} are already in the
% preamble. So we start with the braces for the wanted box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@startpbox#1{\bgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% The argument is the width of the box. This information has to be
% assigned to \cs{hsize}.
% Then we assain default values to several parameters used in a
% \textsf{parbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\hsize{#1}\@arrayparboxrestore
% \end{macrocode}
% Our main problem is to obtain the same distance between succeeding
% lines of the \textsf{parbox}.
% We have to remember that the distance between two \textsf{parboxes}
% should be defined by \cs{@arstrut}. That means that it can be
% greater than the distance in a \textsf{parbox}.
% Therefore it is not enough to set a \cs{@arstrut} at the
% beginning and at the end of the \textsf{parbox}. This would
% dimension the distance
% between first and second line and the distance between the two
% last lines of the \textsf{parbox} wrongly.
% To prevent this we set an invisible rule of height
% \cs{@arstrutbox}
% at the beginning of the \textsf{parbox}. This has no effect on the
% depth of the first line. At the end of the \textsf{parbox} we set
% analogously another invisible rule which only affects the depth
% of the last line. It is necessary to wait inserting this strut
% until the paragraph actually starts to allow for things like
% \cs{parindent} changes via \verb?>{...}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\everypar{%
\vrule \@height \ht\@arstrutbox \@width \z@
\everypar{}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@endpbox}
% If there are any declarations defined by \verb?>{...}?
% and \verb?<{...}?
% they now follow in the macro \cs{@classz} --- the contents
% of the column in between.
% So the macro \cs{@endpbox} must insert the \textsf{specialstrut}
% mentioned earlier and then close the group opened by
% \cs{@startpbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endpbox{\@finalstrut\@arstrutbox \egroup\hfil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Building and calling \texttt{\textbackslash halign}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@array}
% After we have discussed the macros needed for the evaluation
% of the user preamble we can define the macro \cs{@array}
% which uses these macros to create a \cs{halign}.
% It has two arguments. The first one is a position argument
% which can be \texttt{t}, \texttt{b} or \texttt{c}; the
% second one describes the wanted preamble,
% e.g.\ it has the form \verb?|c|c|c|?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@array[#1]#2{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we define a \textsf{strut} whose size basically corresponds
% to a normal \textsf{strut} multiplied by the factor
% \cs{arraystretch}.
% This \textsf{strut} is then inserted into every row and enforces
% a minimal distance between two rows.
% Nevertheless, when using horizontal lines, large letters
% (like accented capital letters) still collide with such lines.
% Therefore at first we add to the height of a normal \textsf{strut}
% the value of the parameter \cs{extrarowheight}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempdima \ht \strutbox
\advance \@tempdima by\extrarowheight
\setbox \@arstrutbox \hbox{\vrule
\@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
\@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
\@width \z@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we open a group, in which the user preamble is evaluated by
% the macro \cs{@mkpream}. As we know this must happen locally.
% This macro creates a preamble for a \cs{halign} and saves
% its result globally in the control sequence \cs{@preamble}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\@mkpream{#2}%
% \end{macrocode}
% We again redefine \cs{@preamble} so that a call up of \cs{@preamble}
% now starts the \cs{halign}. Thus also the arguments of \texttt{>},
% \texttt{<}, \texttt{@} and \texttt{!}, saved in the
% \textsf{token} registers are inserted into the preamble. The
% \cs{tabskip} at the beginning and end of the preamble is set to
% \textsf{0pt} (in the beginning by the use of \cs{ialign}). Also the
% command \cs{@arstrut} is build in, which inserts the
% \cs{@arstrutbox}, defined above. Of course, the opening brace after
% \cs{ialign} has to be implicit as it will be closed in \cs{endarray}
% or another macro.
%
% The \cs{noexpand} in front of \cs{ialign} does no harm in standard \LaTeX{}
% and was added since some experimental support for using text glyphs in math
% redefines \cs{halign} with the result that is becomes expandable with
% disastrous results in cases like this.
% In the kernel definition for this macro the problem does
% not surface because there \cs{protect} is set (which is not necessary in this
% implementation as there is no arbitrary user input that can get expanded) and
% the experimental code made the redefinition robust. Whether this is the right
% approach is open to question; consider the \cs{noexpand} a curtesy to allow an
% unsupported redefinition of a \TeX{} primitive for the moment (as people rely
% on that experimental code).
% \begin{macrocode}
\xdef\@preamble{\noexpand \ialign \@halignto
\bgroup \@arstrut \@preamble
\tabskip \z@ \cr}%
% \end{macrocode}
% What we have not explained yet is the macro \cs{@halignto}
% that was just used. Depending on its replacement text the
% \cs{halign} becomes a \cs{halign} \texttt{to} \meta{dimen}.
% Now we close the group again. Thus
% \cs{@startpbox} and \cs{@endpbox} as well as all
% \textsf{token} registers get their former meaning back.
% \begin{macrocode}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% To support other packages we include a hook
% into this part of the code which is a no-op in the main package.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@arrayleft
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we decide depending on the position argument in which
% \textsf{box} the \cs{halign} is to be put. (\cs{vcenter} may be used
% because we are in math mode.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now another implicit opening brace appears; then definitions
% which shall stay local follow. While constructing the
% \cs{@preamble} in \cs{@mkpream} the \verb?#? sign must be
% hidden in the macro \cs{@sharp} which is \cs{let} to
% \cs{relax} at that moment (see definition of \cs{@mkpream}).
% All these now get their actual meaning.
% \begin{macrocode}
\bgroup
\let \@sharp ##\let \protect \relax
% \end{macrocode}
% With the above defined \textsf{struts} we fix down the distance
% between rows by setting \cs{lineskip} and \cs{baselineskip}
% to \textsf{0pt}. Since there have to be set \verb?$?'s
% around every column in the \textsf{array}--environment
% the parameter \cs{mathsurround} should
% also be set to \textsf{0pt}. This prevents additional space between
% the rows. The
% \PlainTeX--macro \cs{m@th} does this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\lineskip \z@
\baselineskip \z@
\m@th
% \end{macrocode}
% Beside, we have to assign a special meaning (which we still have
% to specify) to the line separator \verb?\\?. We also have to
% redefine the command \cs{par} in such a way that empty lines in
% \cs{halign} cannot do any damage. We succeed in doing so
% by choosing something that will disappear when expanding.
% After that we only have to call up \cs{@preamble} to
% start the wanted \cs{halign}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\\\@arraycr \let\tabularnewline\\\let\par\@empty \@preamble}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\extrarowheight}
% The \textsf{dimen} parameter used above also needs to be
% allocated. As a default value we use \textsf{0pt}, to ensure
% compatibility with standard \LaTeX.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen \extrarowheight
\extrarowheight=0pt
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut}
% Now the insertion of \cs{@arstrutbox} through \cs{@arstut}
% is easy since we know exactly in which mode \TeX\ is while working
% on the \cs{halign} preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arstrut{\unhcopy\@arstrutbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The line separator \texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
% In the macro \cs{@array} the line separator \verb?\\? is
% \cs{let} to the command \cs{@arraycr}.
% Its definition starts with a special brace which I have directly
% copied from the original definition. It is
% necessary, because the \cs{futurlet} in \cs{@ifnextchar}
% might
% expand a following \verb?&? \textsf{token} in a construction like
% \verb?\\ &?. This would otherwise end the alignment template at a
% wrong time. On the other hand we have to be careful to avoid
% producing a real group, i.e., \verb?{}?, because the command will also
% be used for the array environment, i.e., in math mode. In that
% case an extra \verb?{}? would produce an ord atom which could mess up
% the spacing. For this reason we use a combination that does not
% really produce a group at all but modifies the master counter so
% that a \verb?&? will not be considered belonging to the current
% \cs{halign} while we are looking for a \verb?*? or \verb?[?.
% For further information see
% \cite[Appendix D]{bk:knuth}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arraycr{\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we test whether the user is using the star form and ignore
% a possible star (I also disagree with this procedure, because a
% star does not make any sense here).
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifstar \@xarraycr \@xarraycr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xarraycr}
% In the command \cs{@xarraycr} we test if an optional argument
% exists.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xarraycr{\@ifnextchar [%
% \end{macrocode}
% If it does, we branch out into the macro \cs{@argarraycr} if
% not we close the special brace (mentioned above) and end the row
% of the \cs{halign} with a \cs{cr}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@argarraycr {\ifnum 0=`{}\fi\cr}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@argarraycr}
% If additional space is requested by the user this case is treated
% in the macro \cs{@argarraycr}. First we close the special brace
% and then we test if the additional space is positive.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@argarraycr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{}\fi\ifdim #1>\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% If this is the case we create an invisible vertical rule with
% depth \verb?\dp\@arstutbox?${}+{}$\meta{wanted\ space}.
% Thus we achieve that all vertical lines specified
% in the user preamble by a \verb?|? are now
% generally drawn.
% Then the row ends with a \cs{cr}.
%
% If the space is negative we end the row at once with a \cs{cr}
% and move back up with a \cs{vskip}.
%
% While testing these macros I found out that the
% \cs{endtemplate}
% created by \cs{cr} and \verb?&? is something like an
% \cs{outer} primitive and therefore it should not appear in
% incomplete \cs{if} statements. Thus the following solution was
% chosen which hides the \cs{cr} in other macros when \TeX\
% is skipping conditional text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@xargarraycr\else
\expandafter\@yargarraycr\fi{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xargarraycr}
% \begin{macro}{\@yargarraycr}
% The following macros were already explained above.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xargarraycr#1{\unskip
\@tempdima #1\advance\@tempdima \dp\@arstrutbox
\vrule \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@ \cr}
\def\@yargarraycr#1{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Spanning several columns}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multicolumn}
% If several columns should be held together with a special format
% the command \cs{multicolumn} must be used. It has three
% arguments: the number of columns to be covered; the format for
% the result column and the actual column entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\multicolumn#1#2#3{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we combine the given number of columns into a single one;
% then we start a new block so that the following definition is kept
% local.
% \begin{macrocode}
\multispan{#1}\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Since a \cs{multicolumn} should only describe the format of a
% result column, we redefine \cs{@addamp} in such a way that one gets
% an error message if one uses more than one \texttt{c},
% \texttt{l}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or \texttt{b} in
% the second argument. One should consider that this definition is
% local to the build-up of the preamble; an \textsf{array}-- or
% \textsf{tabular}--environment in the third argument of the
% \cs{multicolumn} is therefore worked through correctly as well.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@addamp{\if@firstamp \@firstampfalse \else
\@preamerr 5\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we evaluate the second argument with the help of
% \cs{@mkpream}.
% Now we still have to insert the contents of the \textsf{token}
% register into the \cs{@preamble}, i.e.\ we have to say
% \verb?\xdef\@preamble{\@preamble}?. This is achieved shorter by
% writing:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@mkpream{#2}\@addtopreamble\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% After the \cs{@preamble} is created we forget all local
% definitions and occupations of the \textsf{token} registers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% In the special situation of \cs{multicolumn} \cs{@preamble}
% is not needed as preamble for a \cs{halign} but it is directly
% inserted into our table. Thus instead of \cs{sharp}
% there has to be the column entry (\verb?#3?) wanted by the user.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@sharp{#3}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we can pass the \cs{@preamble} to \TeX\ . For safety
% we start with an \cs{@arstrut}. This should usually be in the
% template for the first column however we do not know if this
% template was overwritten by our \cs{multicolumn}.
% We also add a \cs{null} at the right end to prevent any following
% \cs{unskip} (for example from \verb?\\[..]?) to remove the \cs{tabcolsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@arstrut \@preamble
\null
\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{The environment definitions}
%
% After these preparations we are able to define the environments. They
% only differ in the initialisations of \cs{d@llar...}, \cs{col@sep}
% and \cs{@halignto}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@halignto}
% \begin{macro}{\d@llarbegin}
% \begin{macro}{\d@llarend}
% In order to relieve the \textsf{save stack} we assign the
% replacement texts for \cs{@halignto} globally. \cs{d@llar} has to be
% local since otherwise nested \textsf{tabular} and \textsf{array}
% environments (via \cs{multicolumn}) are impossible.
% When the new font selection scheme is in force we have to
% we surround all \cs{halign} entries
% with braces. See remarks in TUGboat 10\#2. Actually we are going
% to use \cs{begingroup} and \cs{endgroup}. However, this is only
% necessary when we are in text mode. In math the surrounding
% dollar signs will already serve as the necessary extra grouping
% level. Therefore we switch the settings of \cs{d@llarbegin} and
% \cs{d@llarend} between groups and dollar signs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
\let\d@llarend\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\array}
% Our new definition of \cs{array} then reads:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\array{\col@sep\arraycolsep
\def\d@llarbegin{$}\let\d@llarend\d@llarbegin\gdef\@halignto{}%$
% \end{macrocode}
% Since there might be an optional argument we call another
% macro which is also used by the other environments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tabarray}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tabarray}
% This macro tests for an optional bracket and then calls up
% \cs{@@array} or \verb?\@@array[c]? (as default).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tabarray{\@ifnextchar[{\@@array}{\@@array[c]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@@array}
% This macro could then test an optional delimiter before the
% left brace of the main preamble argument. At this point
% it simply is let to be \cs{@array}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@@array\@array
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabular}
% \begin{macro}{\tabular*}
% The environments \textsf{tabular} and \textsf{tabular*} differ
% only in the initialisation of the command \cs{@halignto}. Therefore
% we define
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabular{\gdef\@halignto{}\@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% and analoguesly for the star form. We evalute the argument first
% using \cs{setlength} so that users of the \texttt{calc} package can
% write code like\\ \verb?\begin{tabular*}{(\columnwidth-1cm)/2}...?
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\def\csname tabular*\endcsname#1{%
\setlength\dimen@{#1}%
\xdef\@halignto{to\the\dimen@}\@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tabular}
% The rest of the job is carried out by the \cs{@tabular} macro:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tabular{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First of all we have to make sure that we start out in
% \textsf{hmode}. Otherwise we might find our table dangling by
% itself on a line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\leavevmode
% \end{macrocode}
% It should be taken into consideration that the macro \cs{@array}
% must be called in math mode. Therefore we open a \textsf{box},
% insert a \verb?$? and then assign the correct values to \cs{col@sep} and
% \cs{d@llar...}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hbox \bgroup $\col@sep\tabcolsep \let\d@llarbegin\begingroup%$
\let\d@llarend\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Now everything \textsf{tabular} specific is done and we are able to
% call the \cs{@tabarray} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tabarray}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
% \begin{macro}{\@arrayleft}
% \begin{macro}{\@arrayright}
% When the processing of \textsf{array} is finished we have to
% close the \cs{halign}
% and afterwards the surrounding \textsf{box} selected by
% \cs{@array}. To save \textsf{token} space we then redefine
% \cs{@preamble}
% because its replacement text isn't longer needed.
% We have to declare the hook, \cs{@arrayleft}, we put into \cs{@array} above.
% A similar hook `\cs{@arrayright}' is inserted into the
% \cs{endarray} to gain control. Both defaults to empty.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endarray{\crcr \egroup \egroup \@arrayright \gdef\@preamble{}}
\let\@arrayleft\@empty
\let\@arrayright\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
% \begin{macro}{\endtabular*}
% To end a \textsf{tabular} or \textsf{tabular*} environment we
% call up \cs{endarray}, close the math mode and then the surrounding
% \cs{hbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endtabular{\endarray $\egroup}%$
\expandafter\let\csname endtabular*\endcsname=\endtabular
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% We should \cs{let} all macros
% to \cs{relax} that were used in the kernel but are no longer
% necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@ampacol=\relax \let\@expast=\relax
\let\@arrayclassiv=\relax \let\@arrayclassz=\relax
\let\@tabclassiv=\relax \let\@tabclassz=\relax
\let\@arrayacol=\relax \let\@tabacol=\relax
\let\@tabularcr=\relax \let\@@endpbox=\relax
\let\@argtabularcr=\relax \let\@xtabularcr=\relax
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@preamerr}
% We also have to redefine the error routine \cs{@preamerr} since
% new kind of errors are possible.
% The code for this macro is not perfect yet;
% it still needs too much memory.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@preamerr#1{\def\@tempd{{..} at wrong position: }%
\ClassError{memoir}{%
\ifcase #1 Illegal pream-token (\@nextchar): `c' used\or %0
Missing arg: token ignored\or %1
Empty preamble: `l' used\or %2
>\@tempd token ignored\or %3
<\@tempd changed to !{..}\or %4
Only one column-spec. allowed.\fi}\@ehc} %5
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Defining your own column specifiers}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newcolumntype}
% In \texttt{newarray.sty} the macro for specifying new columns was
% named \cs{newcolumn}. When the functionality was added to
% \texttt{array.sty} the command was renamed \cs{newcolumntype}.
% The \cs{newcolumntype} macro gives users the chance
% to define letters, to be used in the same way as the primitive
% column specifiers, `c' `p' etc.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\newcolumntype#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{NC@char} is so that active characters, like \verb?@? in
% AMS\LaTeX\ may be used. Note that we need to use the possibly active token,
% \verb?#1?, in several places, as that is the token that actually
% appears in the preamble argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\NC@char{\string#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we check whether there is already a definition for this column.
% Unlike \cs{newcommand} we give a warning rather than an error if it is
% defined. If it is a new column, add \cs{NC@do} \meta{column} to
% the list \cs{NC@list}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{NC@find@\NC@char}%
{\@tfor\next:=<>clrmbp@!|\do{\if\noexpand\next\NC@char
\@memwarn{Redefining primitive column \NC@char}\fi}%
\NC@list\expandafter{\the\NC@list\NC@do#1}}%
{\@memwarn{Column \NC@char\space is already defined}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we define a macro with an argument delimited by the new column
% specifier, this is used to find occurences of this specifier in the
% user preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{NC@find@\NC@char}##1#1{\NC@{##1}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If an optional argument was not given, give a default argument of 0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifnextchar[{\newcol@{\NC@char}}{\newcol@{\NC@char}[0]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\newcol@}
% We can now define the macro which does the rewriting,
% \cs{@reargdef} takes the same arguments as \cs{newcommand}, but
% does not check that the command is new. For a column, say `D' with
% one argument, define a command \cs{NC@rewrite@D} with one
% argument, which recursively calls \cs{NC@find} on the user preamble
% after replacing the first token or group with the replacement text
% specified in the \cs{newcolumntype} command. \cs{NC@find} will find the
% next occurrence of `D' as it will be \cs{let} equal to
% \cs{NC@find@D} by \cs{NC@do}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\newcol@#1[#2]#3{\expandafter\@reargdef
\csname NC@rewrite@#1\endcsname[#2]{\NC@find#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@}
% Having found an occurence of the new column, save the preamble
% before the column in \cs{@temptokena}, then check to see if we
% are at the end of the preamble. (A dummy occurrence of the column
% specifier will be placed at the end of the preamble by \cs{NC@do}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@#1{%
\@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#1}\futurelet\next\NC@ifend}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@ifend}
% We can tell that we are at the end as \cs{NC@do} will place a \cs{relax}
% after the dummy column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@ifend{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If we are at the end, do nothing. (The whole preamble will now be in
% \cs{@temptokena}.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\next\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise set the flag \cs{if@tempswa}, and rewrite the column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\@tempswatrue\expandafter\NC@rewrite\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@do}
% If the user has specified `C' and `L' as new columns, the list of
% rewrites (in the token register \cs{NC@list}) will look like
% \verb?\NC@do *? \verb?\NC@do C? \verb?\NC@do L?.
% So we need to define \cs{NC@do} as a one argument macro which
% initialises the rewriting of the specified column. Let us assume that
% `C' is the argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@do#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First we let \cs{NC@rewrite} and \cs{NC@find} be
% \cs{NC@rewrite@C} and \cs{NC@find@C} respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\expandafter\NC@rewrite
\csname NC@rewrite@\string#1\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\NC@find
\csname NC@find@\string#1\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Clear the token register \cs{@temptokena} after putting the present
% contents of the register in front of the token \cs{NC@find}. At the
% end we place the tokens `\verb?C\relax?' which \cs{NC@ifend} will use
% to detect the end of the user preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\expandafter}%
\expandafter\NC@find\the\@temptokena#1\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\showcols}
% This macro is useful for debugging \cs{newcolumntype} specifications,
% it is the equivalent of the primitive \cs{show} command for macro
% definitions. All we need to do is locally redefine \cs{NC@do} to take
% its argument (say `C') and then \cs{show} the (slightly modified)
% definition of \cs{NC@rewrite@C}. Actually as the the list always
% starts off with \verb?\NC@do *? and we do not want to print the
% definition of the *-form, define \cs{NC@do} to throw away the first
% item in the list, and then redefine itsef to print the rest of the
% definitions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\showcols{{\def\NC@do##1{\let\NC@do\NC@show}\the\NC@list}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@show}
% If the column `C' is defined as above, then
% \verb?\show\NC@rewrite@C? would output\\
% \verb?\long macro: ->\NC@find >{$}c<{$}?.
% We want to strip the \verb?\long macro: ->? and the \cs{NC@find}. So first we
% use \cs{meaning} and then apply the macro \cs{NC@strip} to the tokens so
% produced and then \cs{typeout} the required string.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@show#1{%
\typeout{Column #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\NC@strip
\expandafter\meaning\csname NC@rewrite@#1\endcsname\@@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@strip}
% Delimit the arguments to \cs{NC@strip} with `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{->}',
% a space, and \cs{@@} to pull out the required parts of the output from
% \cs{meaning}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\NC@strip#1:#2->#3 #4\@@{#2 -> #4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@list}
% Allocate the token register used for the rewrite list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\NC@list
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The *--form}
% We view the *-form as a slight generalisation of the system
% described in the previous subsection. The idea is to define a *
% column by a command of the form:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcolumntype{*}[2]{%
% \count@=#1\ifnum\count@>0
% \advance\count@ by -1 #2*{\count@}{#2}\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\NC@rewrite@*}\label{NC@rewrite@*}
% This does not work however as \cs{newcolumntype} takes great care not
% to expand anything in the preamble, and so the \cs{if} is never
% expanded. \cs{newcolumntype} sets up various other parts of the
% rewrite correctly though so we can define:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcolumntype{*}[2]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we must correct the definition of \cs{NC@rewrite@*}. The
% following is probably more efficient than a direct translation of
% the idea sketched above, we do not need to put a * in the preamble
% and call the rewrite recursively, we can just put \verb?#1? copies of
% \verb?#2? into \cs{@temptokena}. (Nested * forms will be expanded
% when the whole rewrite list is expanded again, see \cs{@mkpream})
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fixed original bug in \cs{NC@rewrite@*} (mempatch v3.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\@namedef{NC@rewrite@*}#1#2{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Store the number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\count@#1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Put \verb?#1? copies of \verb?#2? in the token register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\loop
\ifnum\count@>\z@
\advance\count@\m@ne
\@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#2}%
\repeat
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{NC@do} will ensure that \cs{NC@find} is \cs{let} equal
% to \cs{NC@find@*}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\NC@find}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Getting the spacing around rules right}
%
% The Companion~\cite[p.137]{GOOSSENS94} suggests two additional
% commands to control the allignments in case of tabulars with
% horizontal lines. They are now added to this package.
%
% \begin{macro}{\extratabsurround}
% The extra space around a table when \cs{firsthline} or \cs{lasthline}
% are used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\extratabsurround}
\setlength{\extratabsurround}{2pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\backup@length}
% This register will be used internally by \cs{firsthline} and
% \cs{lasthline}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\backup@length}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firsthline}
% This code can probably be improved but for the moment it should
% serve.
%
% We start by producing a single tabular row without any visible
% content that will produce the external reference point in case
% \verb?[t]? is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firsthline}{%
\multicolumn1c{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Within this row we calculate \cs{backup@length} to be the height
% plus depth of a standard line. In addition we have to add the
% width of the \cs{hline}, something that was forgotten in the
% original definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\backup@length\ht\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length\dp\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length\arrayrulewidth
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we do want to make the height of this first line be a bit
% larger than usual, for this we place the standard array strut
% into it but raised by \cs{extratabsurround}
% \begin{macrocode}
\raise\extratabsurround\copy\@arstrutbox
% \end{macrocode}
% Having done all this we end the line and back up by the value of
% \cs{backup@length} and then finally place our \cs{hline}. This should
% place the line exactly at the right place but keep the reference
% point of the whole tabular at the baseline of the first row.
% \begin{macrocode}
}\\[-\backup@length]\hline
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lasthline}
% For \cs{lasthline} the situation is even worse and I got it
% completely wrong initially.
%
% The problem in this case is that if the optional argument \verb?[b]?
% is used we do want the reference point of the tabular be at the
% baseline of the last row but at the same time do want the the
% depth of this last line increased by \cs{extratabsurround} without
% changing the placement \cs{hline}.
%
% We start by placing the rule followed by an invisible row.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\lasthline}{\hline\multicolumn1c{%
% \end{macrocode}
% We now calculate \cs{backup@length} to be the height and depth of
% two lines plus the width of the rule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\backup@length2\ht\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length2\dp\@arstrutbox
\global\advance\backup@length\arrayrulewidth
% \end{macrocode}
% This will bring us back to the baseline of the second last row:
% \begin{macrocode}
}\\[-\backup@length]%
% \end{macrocode}
% Thus if we now add another invisible row the reference point of
% that row will be at the baseline of the last row (and will be the
% reference for the whole tabular). Since this row is invisible we
% can enlarge its depth by the desired amount.
% \begin{macrocode}
\multicolumn1c{%
\lower\extratabsurround\copy\@arstrutbox
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Beside a larger functionality \file{array.sty} has one
% important difference to the standard \texttt{tabular} and
% \texttt{array} environments: horizontal and vertical rules make a
% table larger or wider, e.g., \cs{doublerulesep} really denotes
% the space between two rules and isn't measured from the middle of
% the rules.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xhline}
% For vertical rules this is implemented by the definitions above,
% for horizontal rules we have to take out the backspace.
% \begin{macrocode}
\CheckCommand*\@xhline{\ifx\reserved@a\hline
\vskip\doublerulesep
\vskip-\arrayrulewidth
\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
\renewcommand*\@xhline{\ifx\reserved@a\hline
\vskip\doublerulesep
\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%% end Array package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{D column specifiers} \label{sec:dcolumns}
%
% The description and code are essentially copied from the
% \Lpack{dcolumn} package~\cite{DCOLUMN}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Dcolumn package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% The \Lpack{dcolumn} package~\cite{DCOLUMN} defines \texttt{D}
% to be a column specifier
% with three arguments.\\
% \verb?D?\marg{sep.tex}\marg{sep.dvi}\marg{decimal places}
% for columns which are to be aligned on a `decimal point'.
%
%
% The basic ideas behind these macros have been explained earlier.
% However they use three
% tricks which may be useful in other contexts.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item The separator is surrounded in extra \verb?{ }?, so that it is set
% with \cs{mathord} spacing, otherwise, for instance a `,' would have
% extra space after it.
% \item The separator is not given its special definition by making it
% active, as this would not work for an entry such as \verb?& .5 &?, as the
% first token of an alignment entry is read \emph{before} the preamble
% part, incase it is an \cs{omit}, in which case the preamble is to be
% omitted. Instead we switch the mathcode to (hex) 8000, which makes the
% token act as if it were active.
% \item Although \verb?\mathcode`.="8000? makes \texttt{.} act as if it
% were active, it is still not allowed in constructions such as
% \verb?\def.{}?, even in math-mode, so we have to construct an active
% version of the separator, this is done by making it the uppercase of
% \verb?~?, and then using the construct\\
% \verb?\uppercase{\def~}?\marg{definition}.\\
% Note that the \meta{definition} is not uppercased, so the definition
% can refer to the standard, non-active use of the separator.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@}
% Set up uppercase tables as required, and then grab the first part of
% the numerical argument into \cs{count@}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@#1#2#3{%
\uccode`\~=`#1\relax
\m@th
\afterassignment\DC@x\count@#3\relax{#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@x}
% If \cs{count@} is negative, centre on the decimal point. If it is
% positive either \verb?#1? will be empty in which case bad out decimal
% part to the number of digits specified by \cs{count@} or
% it is none empty in which case \cs{count@} contains the
% number of digits to the left of the point, and \verb?#1? contains a junk
% token (probably \verb?.?) followed by the number of digits to the right
% of the point. In either of these latter cases, \cs{DC@right} is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@x#1\relax#2#3{%
\ifnum\z@>\count@
\expandafter\DC@centre
\else
\expandafter\DC@right
\fi
{#2}{#3}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@centre}
% If centering on the decimal point, just need to box up the two halves.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@centre#1#2#3{%
\let\DC@end\DC@endcentre
\uppercase{\def~}{$\egroup\setbox\tw@=\hbox\bgroup${#2}}%$
\setbox\tw@=\hbox{${\phantom{{#2}}}$}%
\setbox\z@=\hbox\bgroup$\mathcode`#1="8000 }%$
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@endcentre}
% and then pad out the smaller of the two boxes so there is the same
% amount of stuff either side of the point.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@endcentre{$\egroup%$
\ifdim \wd\z@>\wd\tw@
\setbox\tw@=\hbox to\wd\z@{\unhbox\tw@\hfill}%
\else
\setbox\z@=\hbox to\wd\tw@{\hfill\unhbox\z@}\fi
\box\z@\box\tw@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@right}
% This deals with both the cases where a specified number of decimal
% places is given.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@right#1#2#3{%
\ifx\relax#3\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% If \verb?#3? is empty, add \cs{hfill} to right align the column, and
% Just set \cs{DC@rl} to begin a group, so nothing fancy is done with
% the whole number part.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hfill
\let\DC@rl\bgroup
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise set \cs{DC@rl} so that the whole number part is put in a
% box \cs{count@} times as wide as a digit.
% In order to share code with the other branch, then move \verb?#3? (the
% number of decimal places) into \cs{count@} throwing away the `.' from
% the user syntax.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\DC@rl{to\the\count@\dimen@ii\bgroup\hss\hfill}%
\count@\@gobble#3\relax
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\DC@end\DC@endright
% \end{macrocode}
% Box 2 contains the decimal part, set to \cs{dimen@} which is
% calculated below to be \cs{count@} times the width of a digit, plus
% the width of the `decimal point'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\uppercase{\def~}{$\egroup\setbox\tw@\hbox to\dimen@\bgroup${#2}}%
\setbox\z@\hbox{$1$}\dimen@ii\wd\z@
\dimen@\count@\dimen@ii
\setbox\z@\hbox{${#2}$}\advance\dimen@\wd\z@
\setbox\tw@\hbox to\dimen@{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Box 0 contains the whole number part, either just at its natural
% size for right aligned columns, or set to (the old value of)
% \cs{count@} times the width of a digit. \cs{DC@rl} defined above
% determines the two cases.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setbox\z@\hbox\DC@rl$\mathcode`#1="8000 }%$
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DC@endright}
% Just finish off the second box, and then put out both boxes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DC@endright{$\hfil\egroup\box\z@\box\tw@}%$
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{D}
% The user interface, define the {\tt D} column to take three arguments.
% For special purposes, you may need to directly access \cs{DC@} rather
% than the \verb?D? column, eg to get a bold version you could use
%\begin{verbatim}
% \newcolumntype{E}[3]{>{\boldmath\DC@{#1}{#2}{#3}}c<{\DC@end}}
%\end{verbatim}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcolumntype{D}[3]{>{\DC@{#1}{#2}{#3}}c<{\DC@end}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% end Dcolumn package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Support for delimeters}
%
% The description and code are essentially from the
% \Lpack{delarray} package~\cite{DELARRAY}, v1.01 1994/03/14.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Delarray package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% The array syntax is extended by
% supporting the notation of delimiters. To this end we extend the
% array parsing mechanism to include a hook which can be used by this
% (or another) package to do some additional parsing.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@array}
% This macro tests for an optional delimiter before the left brace
% of the main preamble argument. If there is no delimiter,
% \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright} are made a no-ops, and
% \cs{@array} is called with the positional argument. Otherwise
% call \cs{@del@array}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@array[#1]{\@ifnextchar\bgroup
{\let\@arrayleft\relax\let\@arrayright\relax\@array[#1]}%
{\@del@array[#1]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@del@array}
% We now know that we have an {\tt array} (or {\tt tabular}) with
% delimiters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@del@array[#1]#2#3#4{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The following line is completely redundant but it does catch errors
% involving delimiters before the processing of the alignment begins.
% A common error is likely to be omiting the `.' in a
% \cs{cases}-type construction. This causes the first token of the
% alignment to be gobbled, possibly causing lots of spurious errors
% before the cause of the error, the missing delimiter, is discovered as
% \cs{@arrayright} puts the alignment and the delimiters together.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setbox\z@\hbox{$\left#2\right#4$}%
% \end{macrocode}
% In the case of a `c' argument we do not need to rebox the alignment,
% so we can define \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright} just to
% insert the delimiters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if#1c\def\@arrayleft{\left#2}\def\@arrayright{\right#4}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we (should) have a {\tt[t]} or {\tt[b]} argument, so first we
% store the alignment, without delimiters in box0.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\def\@arrayleft{\setbox\z@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then after the alignment is finished:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@arrayright{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Calculate the amount the box needs to be lowered (this will be
% negative in the case of \verb?[b]?). A little bit of arithmetic cf.\
% \theTeXbook, Appendix G, rule 8. We calculate the amount this
% way, rather than just taking the difference between the depth of box0
% and the depth of the box defined below, as the depth of that box may
% be affected by the delimiters if \cs{delimitershortfall} or
% \cs{delimiterfactor} have non-standard values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\dimen@=\dp\z@
\advance\dimen@-\ht\z@
\divide \dimen@ by \tw@
\advance\dimen@ by\fontdimen22 \textfont\tw@
% \end{macrocode}
% Now lower the alignment and the delimiters into place.
% \begin{macrocode}
\lower\dimen@\hbox{$\left#2\vcenter{\unvbox\z@}\right#4$}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% End the \verb?\if#1c?
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now that we have defined \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright}, call
% \cs{@array}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@array[#1]{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% end Delarray package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The tabularx environment}
%
% The code and description are essentially from David Carlisle's
% \Lpack{tabularx} package~\cite{TABULARX}, v2.07 1999/01/07.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Tabularx package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% With acknowledgements to David Carlisle %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% The \Lpack{tabularx} package~\cite{TABULARX} implements a version of the \texttt{tabular}
% environment in which the widths of certain columns are calculated so
% that the table is is a specified width. The columns that may stretch are
% marked by an \texttt{X} in the preamble argument.
%
%
% First some registers etc.\ that we need.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\TX@col@width
\newdimen\TX@old@table
\newdimen\TX@old@col
\newdimen\TX@target
\newdimen\TX@delta
\newcount\TX@cols
\newif\ifTX@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now a trick to get the body of an environment into a token register,
% without doing any expansion. This does not do any real checking of
% nested environments, so if you should need to nest one {\ttfamily
% tabularx} inside another, the inner one must be surrounded by \verb?{ }?.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabularx}
% Just save
% the width specification separately, then clear the token register
% \cs{toks@}.
% Finally call \cs{TX@get@body} to begin saving the body of the table.
% The \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? allows \verb?tabularx? to appear
% inside a \cs{halign}.^^A
% \setbox0=\hbox{\footnotesize\verb?\iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi?}^^A
% \setbox2=\hbox{\footnotesize\verb?\ifnum0=`{}\fi?}^^A
% \footnote{This adds an extra level of grouping,
% which is not really needed. Instead, I could use \box0\ here, and
% \box2\ below, however the code here would then have to be moved after
% the first line, because of the footnote to page 386 of \theTeXbook,
% and I do not think I should be writing code that is so obscure as to
% be documented in a footnote in an appendix called ``Dirty Tricks''!}
%
% This mechanism of grabbing an environment body does have the
% disadvantage (shared with the AMS alignment environments) that you
% can not make extension environments by code such as
%\begin{verbatim}
%\newenvironment{foo}{\begin{tabularx}{XX}}{\end{tabularx}}
%\end{verbatim}
% as the code is looking for a literal string \verb?\end{tabularx}? to stop
% scanning. One may avoid this problem by using
% \cs{tabularx} and \cs{endtabularx} directly in the definition:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\newenvironment{foo}{\tabularx{XX}}{\endtabularx}
%\end{verbatim}
% The scanner now looks for the end of the current environment (\verb?foo? in
% this example.) There are some restrictions on this usage, the
% principal one being that \cs{endtabularx} is the \emph{first} token of
% the `end code' of the environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabularx#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Allow \cs{tabularx} \cs{endtabularx} (but not \verb?\begin{tabularx}?
% \verb?\end{tabularx}?) to be used in \cs{newenvironment} definitions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\TX@{\@currenvir}%
{\ifnum0=`}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{setlength} lets you
% use the \Lpack{calc} package so you could use a width of, say \\
% \verb?(\textwidth-12pt)/2?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\TX@target{#1}%
\TX@typeout{Target width: #1 = \the\TX@target.}%
\toks@{}\TX@get@body}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endtabularx}
% This does not do very much\ldots
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\endtabularx\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@get@body}
% Place all tokens as far as the first \cs{end} into a token register.
% Then call \cs{TX@find@end} to see if we are at \verb?\end{tabularx}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\TX@get@body#1\end
{\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}\TX@find@end}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@find@end}
% If we are at \verb?\end{tabularx}?, call \cs{TX@endtabularx}, otherwise
% add \verb?\end{...}? to the register, and call \cs{TX@get@body} again.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@find@end#1{%
\def\@tempa{#1}%
\ifx\@tempa\TX@\expandafter\TX@endtabularx
\else\toks@\expandafter
{\the\toks@\end{#1}}\expandafter\TX@get@body\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@}
% The string \texttt{tabularx} as a macro for testing with \cs{ifx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@{tabularx}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now that all the parts of the table specification are stored in
% registers, we can begin the work of setting the table.
%
% The algorithm for finding the correct column widths is as follows.
% Firstly set the table with each \texttt{X} column the width of the
% final table. Assuming that there is at least one \texttt{X} column,
% this will produce a table that is too wide. Divide the excess width by
% the number of \texttt{X} columns, and reduce the column width by
% this amount. Reset the table. If the table is not now the correct
% width, a \cs{multicolumn} entry must be `hiding' one of the {\ttfamily
% X} columns, and so there is one less \texttt{X} column affecting
% the width of the table. So we reduce by 1 the number of X columns and
% repeat the process.
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@endtabularx}
% Although I have tried to make \texttt{tabularx} look like an
% environment, it is in fact a command, all the work is done by this
% macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@endtabularx{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Define the \texttt{X} column, with an internal version of the
% \cs{newcolumntype} command. The \cs{expandafter} commands enable
% \cs{NC@newcol} to get the \emph{expansion} of\\
% \verb?\tabularxcolumn{\TX@col@width}? as its
% argument. This will be the definition of an \texttt{X} column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\TX@newcol\expandafter{\tabularxcolumn{\TX@col@width}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Initialise the column width, and the number of \texttt{X} columns.
% The number of \texttt{X} columns is set to one, which means that
% the initial count will be one too high, but this value is decremented
% before it is used in the main loop.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\verb\TX@verb
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the values of all \LaTeX\ counters; the list
% \cs{cl@@ckpt} contains the names of all the \LaTeX\ counters that have
% been defined so far. We expand \cs{setcounter} at this point, as it
% results in fewer tokens being stored in \cs{TX@ckpt}, but the actual
% resetting of the counters occurs when \cs{TX@ckpt} is expanded after
% each trial run.
% Actually, use something equivalent to the expansion of the
% original definition of \cs{setcounter}, so that \verb?tabularx? works in
% conjunction with \file{calc.sty}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@elt##1{\global\value{##1}\the\value{##1}\relax}%
\edef\TX@ckpt{\cl@@ckpt}%
\let\@elt\relax
\TX@old@table\maxdimen
\TX@col@width\TX@target
\global\TX@cols\@ne
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeout some headings (unless this is disabled).
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@typeout@
{\@spaces Table Width\@spaces Column Width\@spaces X Columns}%
% \end{macrocode}%
% First attempt. Modify the \texttt{X} definition to count {\ttfamily
% X} columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@trial{\def\NC@rewrite@X{%
\global\advance\TX@cols\@ne\NC@find p{\TX@col@width}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Repeatedly decrease column width until table is the correct width,
% or stops shrinking, or the columns become two narrow.
% If there are no multicolumn entries, this will only take one attempt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\loop
\TX@arith
\ifTX@
\TX@trial{}%
\repeat
% \end{macrocode}
% One last time, with warnings back on (see appendix D)
% use \texttt{tabular*} to put it in a box of the right size, in case
% the algorithm failed to find the correct size.
%
% Locally make \cs{footnotetext} save its argument in a token
% register.
% \cs{toks@} contains the preamble specification,
% and possible optional argument, as well as the table body.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\let\@footnotetext\TX@ftntext\let\@xfootnotenext\TX@xftntext
\csname tabular*\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter\TX@target
\the\toks@
\csname endtabular*\endcsname}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the alignment is finished, and the \verb?}? has restored the original
% meaning of \cs{@footnotetext} expand the register \cs{TX@ftn} which will
% execute a series of\\
% \verb?\footnotetext[<num>]{<note>}? \\
% commands. We need to be careful about clearing the register as we may
% be inside a nested \texttt{tabularx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\expandafter}\the\TX@ftn
% \end{macrocode}
% Now finish off the \texttt{tabularx} environment. Note that we need
% \verb?\end{tabularx}? here as the \verb?\end{tabularx}? in the user's
% file is never expanded. Now use \cs{TX@} rather than \verb?tabularx?.
%
% We also need to finish off the group started by \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? in
% the macro \cs{tabularx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
\expandafter\end\expandafter{\TX@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@arith}
% Calculate the column width for the next try, setting the flag
% \cs{ifTX@} to false if the loop should be aborted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@arith{%
\TX@false
\ifdim\TX@old@table=\wd\@tempboxa
% \end{macrocode}
% If we have reduced the column width, but the table width has not
% changed, we stop the loop, and output the table (which will cause an
% over-full alignment) with the previous value of \cs{TX@col@width}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@col@width\TX@old@col
\TX@typeout@{Reached minimum width, backing up.}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise calculate the amount by which the current table is too wide.
% \begin{macrocode}
\dimen@\wd\@tempboxa
\advance\dimen@ -\TX@target
\ifdim\dimen@<\TX@delta
% \end{macrocode}
% If this amount is less than \cs{TX@delta}, stop. (\cs{TX@delta}
% should be non-zero otherwise we may miss the target due to rounding
% error.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@typeout@{Reached target.}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Reduce the number of effective \texttt{X} columns by one. (Checking
% that we do not get 0, as this would produce an error later.) Then
% divide excess width by the number of effective columns, and calculate
% the new column width. Temporarily store this value (times -1) in
% \cs{dimen@}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
\advance\TX@cols\m@ne
\fi
\divide\dimen@\TX@cols
\advance\dimen@ -\TX@col@width
\ifdim \dimen@ >\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% If the new width would be too narrow, abort the loop. At the moment
% too narrow, means less than 0\,pt!
%
% If the loop was aborted here and the X columns were left
% with the width of the previous run it may make the table far
% too wide as initial guesses are always too big. Force to
% \cs{TX@error@width} which defaults to be 1em.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@memwarn{X Columns too narrow (table too wide)\MessageBreak}%
\TX@col@width\TX@error@width\relax
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise save the old settings, and set the new column width. Set the
% flag to true so that the table will be set, and the loop will be
% executed again.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@old@col\TX@col@width
\TX@old@table\wd\@tempboxa
\TX@col@width-\dimen@
\TX@true
\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@error@width}
% If the calculated width is negative, use this instead.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@error@width{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@delta}
% Accept a table that is within \cs{hfuzz} of the correct width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@delta\hfuzz
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Initialise the \texttt{X} column. The definition can be empty here,
% as it is set for each \texttt{tabularx} environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcolumntype{X}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabularxcolumn}
% The default definition of \texttt{X} is \verb?p{#1}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabularxcolumn#1{p{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@newcol}
% A little macro just used to cut down the number of \cs{expandafter}
% commands needed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@newcol{\newcol@{X}[0]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@trial}
% Make a test run.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@trial#1{%
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Any extra commands. This is used on the first run to count the number
% of \texttt{X} columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
#1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Make \cs{footnotetext} gobble its arguments. Also locally
% clear \cs{TX@vwarn} so that the warning is generated by the {\ttfamily
% final} run, and does not appear in the middle of the table if
% \cs{tracingtabularx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@footnotetext\TX@trial@ftn
\let\TX@vwarn\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% Do not nest \texttt{tabularx} environments during trial runs. This
% would waste time, and the global setting of \cs{TX@cols} would break the
% algorithm.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\expandafter\tabularx\csname tabular*\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\endtabularx\csname endtabular*\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Dissable \cs{write}s during a trial run. This trick is
% from \theTeXbook.\footnote{Actually the trick does
% not work correctly, so it has been changed.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\write{\begingroup
\def\let{\afterassignment\endgroup\toks@}%
\afterassignment\let\count@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Turn off warnings (see appendix D). Also prevent them being turned
% back on by setting the parameter names to be registers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hbadness\@M
\hfuzz\maxdimen
\let\hbadness\@tempcnta
\let\hfuzz\@tempdima
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the table, and finish the hbox.
% \cs{toks@} contains the preamble specification,
% and possible optional argument, as well as the table body.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\tabular\the\toks@
\endtabular}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Reset all \LaTeX\ counters, by executing \cs{TX@ckpt}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@ckpt
% \end{macrocode}
% Print some statistics.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@typeout@{\@spaces
\expandafter\TX@align
\the\wd\@tempboxa\space\space\space\space\space\@@
\expandafter\TX@align
\the\TX@col@width\space\space\space\space\space\@@
\@spaces\the\TX@cols}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@align}
% Macro to improve the printing of the tracing info.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@align#1.#2#3#4#5#6#7#8#9\@@{%
\ifnum#1<10 \space\fi
\ifnum#1<100 \space\fi
\ifnum#1<\@m\space\fi
\ifnum#1<\@M\space\fi
#1.#2#3#4#5#6#7#8\space\space}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraybackslash}
% \verb?\\? hack.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\arraybackslash{\let\\\@arraycr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tracingtabularx}
% Print statistics on column and table widths.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tracingtabularx{%
\def\TX@typeout{\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}}%
\def\TX@typeout@##1{\typeout{(tabularx) ##1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@typeout}
% The default is to be to be quiet
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\TX@typeout\@gobble
\let\TX@typeout@\@gobble
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@ftn}
% A token register for saving footnote texts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\TX@ftn
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@ftntext}
% \begin{macro}{\TX@xftntext}
% Inside the alignment just save up the footnote text in a token
% register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\TX@ftntext#1{%
\edef\@tempa{\the\TX@ftn\noexpand\footnotetext
[\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname]}%
\global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\@tempa{#1}}}%
\long\def\TX@xftntext[#1]#2{%
\global\TX@ftn\expandafter{\the\TX@ftn\footnotetext[#1]{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@trial@ftn}
% On trial runs, gobble footnote texts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\TX@trial@ftn#1{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% This last section was added at Version 1.02. Previous versions
% documentented the fact that \cs{verb} did not work inside {\ttfamily
% tabularx}, but that did not stop people using it! This usually put
% \LaTeX\ into an irrecoverable error position, with error messages that
% did not mention the cause of the error. The `poor man's \cs{verb}' (and
% \cs{verb*}) defined here is based on page 382 of \theTeXbook. As
% explained there, doing verbatim this way means that spaces are not
% treated correctly, and so \cs{verb*} may well be useless, however I
% consider this section of code to be error-recovery, rather than a real
% implementation of verbatim.
%
% The mechanism is quite general, and any macro which wants to allow a
% form of \cs{verb} to be used within its argument may
% \verb?\let\verb=\TX@verb?. (Making sure to restore the real definition
% later!)
%
% \cs{verb} and \cs{verb*} are subject to the following restictions:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item Spaces in the argument are not read verbatim, but may be skipped
% according to \TeX's usual rules.
% \item Spaces will be added to the output after control words, even if
% they were not present in the input.
% \item Unless the argument is a single space, any trailing space,
% whether in the original argument, or added as in (2),
% will be omitted.
% \item The argument must not end with \verb?\?, so \verb?\verb|\|? is not
% allowed, however, because of (3), \verb?\verb|\ |? produces
% \verb?\?.
% \item The argument must be balanced with respect to \verb?{? and \verb?}?. So
% \verb?\verb|{|? is not allowed.
% \item A comment character like \verb?%? will not appear verbatim. It will
% act as usual, commenting out the rest of the input line!
% \item The combinations \verb=?`= and \verb?!`? will appear as
% {\ttfamily?`} and {\ttfamily!`} if the \texttt{cmtt} font is
% being used.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@verb}
% The internal definition of \cs{verb}. Spaces will be replaced by \verb?~?, so
% for the star-form, \cs{let} \verb?~? be \verb?\verb*| |?, which we obtain as
% \verb?\uppercase{*}?. Use \verb?{\ifnum0=`}\fi? rather than \cs{bgroup} to allow
% \verb?&? to appear in the argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\uccode`\*=`\ %
\uppercase{\gdef\TX@verb{%
\leavevmode\null\TX@vwarn
{\ifnum0=`}\fi\ttfamily\let\\\ignorespaces
\@ifstar{\let~*\TX@vb}{\TX@vb}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@vb}
% Get the `almost verbatim' text using \cs{meaning}. The `\verb?!?' is added to
% the front of the user supplied text, to ensure that the whole argument
% does not consist of a single \verb?{ }? group. \TeX\ would strip the outer
% braces from such a group. The `\verb?!?' will be removed later.
%
% Originally I followed Knuth, and had \verb?\def\@tempa{##1}?, however this
% did not allow \verb?#? to appear in the argument. So I changed
% this to to use a token register, and \cs{edef}. This allows \verb?#? appear,
% but makes each one appear twice!, so later we loop through, replacing
% \verb?##? by \verb?#?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@vb#1{\def\@tempa##1#1{\toks@{##1}\edef\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
\expandafter\TX@v\meaning\@tempa\\ \\\ifnum0=`{\fi}}\@tempa!}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@v}
% Strip the initial segment of the \cs{meaning}, including the `\verb?!?'
% added earlier.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@v#1!{\afterassignment\TX@vfirst\let\@tempa= }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% As explained above we are going to replace \verb?##? pairs by \verb?#?. To do
% this we need non-special \verb?#? tokens. Make \verb?*? into a parameter
% token so that we can define macros with arguments. The normal meanings
% will be restored by the \cs{endgroup} later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\*=\catcode`\#
\catcode`\#=12
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@vfirst}
% As a special case, prevent the first character from being dropped.
% This makes \verb?\verb*| |? produce \verb*? ?. Then call \cs{TX@v@}.
% This is slightly tricky as I have to ensure that an
% actual \verb?#? rather than a command \cs{let} to \verb?#? is passed on if the
% first character is \verb?#?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\TX@vfirst{%
\if\@tempa#%
\def\@tempb{\TX@v@#}%
\else
\let\@tempb\TX@v@
\if\@tempa\space~\else\@tempa\fi
\fi
\@tempb}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@v@}
% Loop through the \cs{meaning}, replacing all spaces by \verb?~?. If the last
% character is a space it is dropped, so that \verb?\verb*|\LaTeX|? produces
% \verb?\LaTeX? not \verb*?\LaTeX ?. The rewritten tokens are then further
% processed to replace \verb?##? pairs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\TX@v@*1 *2{%
\TX@v@hash*1##\relax\if*2\\\else~\expandafter\TX@v@\fi*2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@v@hash}
% The inner loop, replacing \verb?##? by \verb?#?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\TX@v@hash*1##*2{*1\ifx*2\relax\else#\expandafter\TX@v@hash\fi*2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% As promised, we now restore the normal meanings of \verb?#? and \verb?*?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\TX@vwarn}
% Warn the user the first time this \cs{verb} is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\TX@vwarn{%
\@warning{\noexpand\verb may be unreliable inside tabularx}%
\global\let\TX@vwarn\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% end Tabularx package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% At this point we had better stop anyone trying to load the several
% tabular-related packages (as effectively they are already loaded).
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{array}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{dcolumn}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{delarray}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{tabularx}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Fear's rules}
%
% Simon Fear disapproves of the default \LaTeX{} table rules and
% wrote the \Lpack{booktabs} package~\cite{BOOKTABS} to provide
% better horizontal rules. Like many typographers, he abhors vertical rules.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\bktabrule}
% The rules in this section are based on \verb?\hrule \@height#1? but this
% does not
% work for continuous tabulars. Provide a version of this that
% can be \cs{let} when necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bktabrule}[1]{%
\hrule \@height#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The following is taken almost verbatim from the \Lpack{booktabs} package,
% version~1.618, March 2003.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%% Booktabs package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% slightly modified by PRW %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%% by permission of Simon Fear %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
% Danie Els is now (2005) the official maintainer of the \Lpack{booktabs} package. He provided me with
% some updates to synchronize \Lpack{memoir}, \Lpack{booktabs} and support for \Lpack{colortbl} with \Lpack{booktabs}. I made the appropriate changes/extensions
% on 2005/09/03 as part of version 1.618 of \Lpack{memoir}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\CT@arc@}
% This supports the \Lpack{bookhands}/\Lpack{colortbl} package combination.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\providecommand*{\CT@arc@}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\heavyrulewidth}
% \begin{macro}{\lightrulewidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulewidth}
% \begin{macro}{\belowrulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\belowbottomsep}
% \begin{macro}{\aboverulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\abovetopsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrulekern}
% \begin{macro}{\defaultaddspace}
% First we set up some new dimensions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\heavyrulewidth
\newdimen\lightrulewidth
\newdimen\cmidrulewidth
\newdimen\belowrulesep
\newdimen\belowbottomsep
\newdimen\aboverulesep
\newdimen\abovetopsep
\newdimen\cmidrulesep
\newdimen\cmidrulekern
\newdimen\defaultaddspace
\heavyrulewidth=.08em
\lightrulewidth=.05em
\cmidrulewidth=.03em
\belowrulesep=.65ex
\belowbottomsep=\z@
\aboverulesep=.4ex
\abovetopsep=\z@
\cmidrulesep=\doublerulesep
\cmidrulekern=.5em
\defaultaddspace=.5em
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidla}
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidlb}
% \begin{macro}{\@aboverulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\@belowrulesep}
% \begin{macro}{\@thisruleclass}
% \begin{macro}{\@lastruleclass}
% \begin{macro}{\@thisrulewidth}
% And some internal counters and other things of no interest to the end user:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@cmidla
\newcount\@cmidlb
\newdimen\@aboverulesep
\newdimen\@belowrulesep
\newcount\@thisruleclass
\newcount\@lastruleclass
\@lastruleclass=0
\newdimen\@thisrulewidth
% \end{macrocode}
% which will be described as needed below.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\futurenonspacelet}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnslone}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnsltwo}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTfnslthree}
% Next we define a very useful macro (more-or-less straight from the
% \theTeXbook's Dirty Tricks chapter; documented there). Use
% \cs{futurenonspacelet} instead of \cs{futurelet} when looking for the next
% (non-space) token after a macro that has an argument. (After a macro
% without an argument, space is ignored anyway, so \cs{futurenonspacelet}
% wouldn't be needed.) This hack allows users to type white
% space between successive rule commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\futurenonspacelet#1{\def\@BTcs{#1}%
\afterassignment\@BTfnslone\let\nexttoken= }
\def\@BTfnslone{\expandafter\futurelet\@BTcs\@BTfnsltwo}
\def\@BTfnsltwo{\expandafter\ifx\@BTcs\@sptoken\let\next=\@BTfnslthree
\else\let\next=\nexttoken\fi \next}
\def\@BTfnslthree{\afterassignment\@BTfnslone\let\next= }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Full width rules}
%
% When we are not in a \texttt{longtable} environment, we can simply
% implement the full width rules as a \cs{hrule} in a \verb?\noalign{}?
% group. But within a \texttt{longtable}, the rule has to be drawn like a
% \verb?\cmidrule{1-\LT@cols}? (the rationale for this is explained in the
% \texttt{longtable} documentation).
% In order to allow for both, all the rule macros have to
% open a \cs{noalign} group immediately, while they work out whether
% they have been called within a \texttt{longtable}; if you don't do this,
% \TeX's underlying \cs{halign} process gets hiccups.
% I use \LaTeX's
% dirty trick (\verb?\ifnum=0`}?) to fool the parser that the bracket
% count is OK. The bracket really gets closed after all the skipping
% at the end of the \cs{@BTendrule} macro.
% The class 1 rules, and \cs{specialrule}, really only differ in the
% defaults for space above and
% below, and the width, passed to a common routine, \cs{@BTrule},
% described below. The spaces, \cs{@aboverulesep} and \cs{@belowrulesep},
% are set within the \cs{noalign} group, so are inherited by
% \cs{@BTrule}. Similarly, \cs{@BTrule} knows as much as it needs to
% about the routine that called it by examining the inherited
% \cs{@thisruleclass}. The optional width argument is parsed by
% \cs{@BTrule} after being set to default if absent.
%
% \begin{macro}{\toprule}
% \begin{macro}{\midrule}
% \begin{macro}{\bottomrule}
% \begin{macro}{\specialrule}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\toprule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=\abovetopsep
\global\@belowrulesep=\belowrulesep
\global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
\@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\heavyrulewidth]}}
\def\midrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=\aboverulesep
\global\@belowrulesep=\belowrulesep
\global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
\@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\lightrulewidth]}}
\def\bottomrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=\aboverulesep
\global\@belowrulesep=\belowbottomsep
\global\@thisruleclass=\@ne
\@ifnextchar[{\@BTrule}{\@BTrule[\heavyrulewidth]}}
\def\specialrule#1#2#3{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@aboverulesep=#2\global\@belowrulesep=#3\global\@thisruleclass=\tw@
\@BTrule[#1]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\addlinespace}
% An \cs{addlinespace} is essentially a zero-width rule with
% zero space above and argument (or default) space below. But because
% the rule is not actually drawn, but is just a \cs{vskip}, there is no
% need to check if we're in a longtable, so we don't need to call
% \cs{@BTrule} as for `real' rules. But we do share the \cs{@BTendrule}
% lookahead and flagsetting code (described below), and the \cs{vskip} is done there.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\addlinespace{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@ifnextchar[{\@addspace}{\@addspace[\defaultaddspace]}}
\def\@addspace[#1]{\global\@belowrulesep=#1\global\@thisruleclass=\tw@
\futurelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@BTrule}
% All the rules (except \cs{addlinespace}) share this code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@BTrule[#1]{%
\global\@thisrulewidth=#1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Save the width argument (if the user didn't give one, then the
% calling routine will have called \cs{@BTrule} with the default) in a global
% variable for later use when drawing the rule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@thisruleclass=\tw@\vskip\@aboverulesep\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Specialrules always insert specified space above. (Note: addlinespaces
% don't come here).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\z@\vskip\@aboverulesep\else
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\@ne\vskip\doublerulesep\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% After text (last rule class 0), precede the rule by \cs{aboverulesep};
% but if immediately after a
% previous rule, insert a \cs{doublerulesep}.
%
% Now we work out, by a very nasty hack, if we're within a
% \texttt{longtable}. It's easy if \cs{longtable} isn't even defined: then we
% can't be. But it is not enough just to check if \texttt{longtable} is
% loaded --- we might be within an ordinary table rather than a
% longtable. So we look to see if \cs{hline} has been re-defined
% from its \LaTeX\ definition to be the same as
% \cs{LT@hline}. (Longtable currently does this redefinition when it opens a
% \texttt{longtable} environment, but not globally, so it is
% cleared it when the environment closes.) Another
% package could potentially do this! And \texttt{longtable} might change the
% way it implements this! So, it is not entirely safe, but I have
% found no better way so far.
% We set up \cs{@BTswitch} to call \cs{@BTnormal} or \cs{@BLTrule}, as
% appropriate, then call it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\longtable\undefined\let\@BTswitch\@BTnormal\else
\ifx\hline\LT@hline\let\@BTswitch\@BLTrule
\else\let\@BTswitch\@BTnormal\fi\fi
\@BTswitch}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@BTnormal}
% This is when we're \emph{not} within a longtable. We are already in a
% \cs{noalign} group, all we need do is draw an \cs{hrule} and gobble any
% trailing spaces, then call the closing routine with \cs{@tempa} set
% equal to the next token in the document.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \def\@BTnormal{\hrule
% \@height \@thisrulewidth\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
\def\@BTnormal{%
%% \bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}
{\CT@arc@\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}}%
\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@BLTrule}
% This is for full width rule within a \texttt{longtable}. First we check if
% a kerning argument has been used; if so let \cs{@@BLTrule} read it,
% else call \cs{@@BLTrule} with an empty string:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@BLTrule{\@ifnextchar({\@@BLTrule}{\@@BLTrule()}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@@BLTrule}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@BLTrule(#1){\@setrulekerning{#1}%
\global\@cmidlb\LT@cols
% \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{@setrulekerning} routine parses the kerning argument tokens
% and sets global kerning widths accordingly (or to defaults, if user
% hasn't set them explicitly). The global assignment to \cs{@cmidlb}
% sets up the column count for the \cs{@cmidruleb} macro, which is
% shared with \verb?cmidrules?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Close the currently open \cs{noalign} group. Within a \texttt{longtable},
% rules are all to be drawn as leaders within a text box that is
% \cs{LT@cols} columns wide.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@cmidruleb
% \end{macrocode}
% Draw the rule. We share the \cs{@cmidruleb} code with ordinary \cs{cmidrule}s.
% \begin{macrocode}
\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% We have to open a new noalign immediately else \TeX{} will start a new
% text box where we don't want one. Then, after gobbling any
% unwanted white space, we call the closing routine.
% \begin{macrocode}
\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@BTendrule}
% We look one step ahead (token is in \cs{@tempa}) to see if another
% rule follows (shame on user!). If so, we set \cs{@lastruleclass} equal
% to \cs{@thisruleclass} (thus setting it up for the following rule). If
% there isn't a following rule, we clear \cs{@lastruleclass} (ie set it
% to zero), which isn't technically true since we have just drawn a
% rule, but sets it up correctly for the next rule encountered, which
% must be following some intervening text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@BTendrule{%
\ifx\@tempa\toprule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\midrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\bottomrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\cmidrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\specialrule\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\ifx\@tempa\addlinespace\global\@lastruleclass=\@thisruleclass
\else\global\@lastruleclass=\z@\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\@ne\relax\else\vskip\@belowrulesep\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Special subrules}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setrulekerning}
% The following code parses the trimming arguments (if there are any)
% for \cs{cmidrule} or a \cs{BLTrule}. The rule
% will be trimmed left and right by \cs{cmrkern@l} and \cs{cmrkern@l},
% which are zero by default, set to \cs{cmidrulekern} by the plain
% \verb?(lr)? arguments, or user set as in \verb?(r{.5em})?. We parse token by
% token through the arguments. The
% tokens \verb?r? and \verb?l? cause \cs{cmrkern@r} or \cs{cmrkern@l} to be set to
% \cs{cmidrulekern}. There is no lookahead to see if a width is the
% next token; this strategy is efficient for the plain commands,
% while inefficient for the qualified commands, but more importantly
% it is much easier to program. Tokens \verb?r? and \verb?l? also set
% \cs{cmrswitch} so that if the next token turns out to be
% \marg{wd} then the kerning will be done on the side
% currently specified. I have been too lazy to program an error
% message should one encounter tokens other than \verb?r?, \verb?l? or
% \marg{wd}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fixed bug in booktabs trim command by improving character comparison code in \cs{@setrulekerning} (mempatch v3.8)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@setrulekerning#1{%
\global\let\cmrkern@l\z@
\global\let\cmrkern@r\z@
\@tfor\@tempa :=#1\do
{\def\@tempb{r}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\global\let\cmrkern@r\cmidrulekern
\def\cmrsideswitch{\cmrkern@r}%
\else
\def\@tempb{l}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\global\let\cmrkern@l\cmidrulekern
\def\cmrsideswitch{\cmrkern@l}%
\else
\global\expandafter\let\cmrsideswitch\@tempa
\fi
\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cmidrule}
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidrule}
% \begin{macro}{\@@cmidrule}
% The \cs{cmidrule} re-uses \cs{@lastruleclass} in an entirely different
% way from the full width rules. (Maybe I should have used a
% different flag; it seemed efficient at the time \ldots). This
% is (left) set to one if you are in the middle of a row of
% \cs{cmidrules}, or starting a new one (with \cs{morecmidrules}).
% Otherwise, when \cs{@lastruleclass} is zero, we precede the
% rule with \cs{aboverulesep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cmidrule{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\@ifnextchar[{\@cmidrule}{\@cmidrule[\cmidrulewidth]}}
\def\@cmidrule[#1]{\@ifnextchar({\@@cmidrule[#1]}{\@@cmidrule[#1]()}}
\def\@@cmidrule[#1](#2)#3{\@@@cmidrule[#3]{#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@@cmidrule}
% The above is fiddling around to set defaults for missing optional
% arguments. We also pass to \cs{@@@cmidrule} in a different order,
% namely =[a-b]=\verb?{width required}= \verb?{kerning commands}= (this being
% the order in which the arguments are actually processed):
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@@cmidrule[#1-#2]#3#4{\global\@cmidla#1\relax
\global\advance\@cmidla\m@ne
\ifnum\@cmidla>0\global\let\@gtempa\@cmidrulea\else
\global\let\@gtempa\@cmidruleb\fi
\global\@cmidlb#2\relax
\global\advance\@cmidlb-\@cmidla
% \end{macrocode}
% This has set up a switch (\cs{@gtempa}) to call the relevant routine,
% \cs{@cmidrulea} or \cs{@cmidruleb}, depending on whether we start
% from column one or not.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\@thisrulewidth=#3
% \end{macrocode}
% That is, set per default or given argument. Then parse any trimming
% arguments to set, globally, \cs{cmrkern@r} and \cs{cmrkern@l} accordingly:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@setrulekerning{#4}
% \end{macrocode}
% Now insert space above if needed, close the \cs{noalign},
% then switch to appropriate rule drawing routine as determined
% above (\cs{let} to \cs{@gtempa}):
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@lastruleclass=\z@\vskip \aboverulesep\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}\@gtempa
% \end{macrocode}
% Having now drawn the rule,
% open another \cs{noalign}, and call the closing routine:
% \begin{macrocode}
\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@xcmidrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xcmidrule}
% In this closing routine, see if another \cs{cmidrule} follows;
% if so, backspace
% vertical so it will line up with the one you just drew,
% and setting \cs{@lastruleclass} to 1 will suppress
% adding space above the next. If a \cs{morecimdrules} follows,
% we add (positive) \cs{cmidrulesep} (and again set \cs{@lastruleclass}
% to one). Otherwise this is the last rule of the current group
% and we can just add \cs{belowrulesep}. Finally, we close the \cs{noalign}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xcmidrule{\ifx\@tempa\cmidrule\vskip-\@thisrulewidth
\global\@lastruleclass=\@ne\else
\ifx\@tempa\morecmidrules\vskip \cmidrulesep
\global\@lastruleclass=\@ne\else
\vskip \belowrulesep\global\@lastruleclass=\z@\fi\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidrulea}
% \begin{macro}{\@cmidruleb}
% This code (called below) actually draws the rules. They are drawn
% as boxes in text, rather than in a \cs{noalign} group, which permits
% the left and right kerning.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@cmidrulea{%
\multispan\@cmidla&\multispan\@cmidlb
%% \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill
\unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l{%
\CT@arc@\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill}%
\hskip \cmrkern@r\cr}
\def\@cmidruleb{%
\multispan\@cmidlb
%% \unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill
\unskip\hskip \cmrkern@l{%
\CT@arc@\leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill}%
\hskip \cmrkern@r\cr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\morecmidrules}
% This is really a dummy command; all the work is done above
% within the \cs{cmidrule} routine. We look one step ahead there
% to see if a \cs{morecmidrules} follows the current \cs{cmidrule},
% and if so set the flag. Otherwise, \cs{morecmidrules} itself
% does nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\morecmidrules{\noalign{\relax}}
%%%%%%%%%% end of Booktabs package code %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Ensure that the real \Lpack{booktabs} package can't get called.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Killed use of real booktabs package (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%\@memfakeusepackage{booktabs}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Input files into tabulars, and etex}
%
% M.J. Williams (CTT \textit{\cs{noalign} problem with \cs{input} and
% tabular in memoir class}, 28 Aug 2007) reported that using \cs{input} in a
% tabular resulted in errors. His example was:
% \begin{verbatim}
% ...
% \begin{tabular}{c|c} \hline
% 1 & 2 \\ \hline
% \input{data} \hline
% 5 & 6 \\ \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \end{verbatim}
% where \texttt{data.tex} contains the single line (and no newline) \\
% \verb?3 & 4 \\?
%
% Morten H{\o}gholm noted that the problem
% was caused by \Lpack{memoir}'s extension to \cs{input}
% and gave a solution that depends on processing via
% \texttt{etex} rather than \texttt{tex}.
%
% Here's Morten's fix. Quoting, in part:
% \begin{quotation}
% \Lpack{memoir} extends the file loading mechanism by providing
% \cs{AtBeginFile} and \cs{AtEndFile} whose arguments are executed as
% the names indicate. \ldots after inputting a file the storage bins are
% emptied. The problem [in your case] is that this emptying is an
% assignment and so starts a new tabular cell and \cs{hline} is only
% allowed after \verb?\\? or other \cs{hline}s.
%
% \ldots the tabular environment wraps each tabular cell in additional
% groups so one can do an explicit test for which type of group we are in.
% If tested to be in an align group \emph{and} in vertical mode it means
% TeX hasn't found something to start a new cell and
% then \cs{noalign} can be used.
% \end{quotation}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifetex
\renewcommand*{\killm@matf}[1]{%
\ifnum 6=\currentgrouptype
\ifvmode
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@firstoftwo
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\noalign
\fi
\fi
\@firstofone
{\@namelet{#1-m@mfb}\relax
\@namelet{#1-m@mfe}\relax
}%
}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Continuous tabulars}
%
% The standard \texttt{tabular} environment is wrapped inside a box
% (see \verb?\@tabular?),
% which means that it cannot break across pages. Equivalent environments
% are provided which are not boxed and so can continue across page
% boundaries.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctableftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\ctabrightskip}
% These skips are inserted at the left and right of continuous tabulars
% so that their horizontal location can be specified.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\ctableftskip \ctableftskip=\fill
\newskip\ctabrightskip \ctabrightskip=\fill
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctabular*}
% \begin{macro}{\@ctabularstar}
% This starts off the \texttt{ctabular*} continuous tabular environment.
% The default location is centered. NOTE: This is not for release.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\def\csname ctabular*\endcsname{%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@ctabularstar}{\@ctabularstar[c]}}
\def\@ctabularstar[#1]#2{\global\@curtab\@ne
\ctableftskip\fill
\ctabrightskip\fill
\if l#1% left
\ctableftskip\z@
\else
\if r#1% right
\ctabrightskip\z@
\fi
\fi
\setlength\dimen@{#2}%
\xdef\@halignto{to\the\dimen@}\NC@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctabular}
% \verb?\ctabular? is similar to \verb?\ctabular*? except that the
% width is known to be \verb?\hsize?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ctabular}[1][c]{\global\@curtab\@ne
\ctableftskip\fill
\ctabrightskip\fill
\if l#1% left
\ctableftskip\z@
\else
\if r#1% right
\ctabrightskip\z@
\fi
\fi
\gdef\@halignto{to\hsize}\NC@tabular}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\NC@tabular}
% \verb?\NC@tabular?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\NC@tabular}{%
\par
\addvspace{\topsep}
\col@sep\tabcolsep
\let\d@llarbegin\begingroup
\let\d@llarend\endgroup
\@NCtabarray}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@NCialign}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@NCialign}{\everycr{}\tabskip\ctableftskip\halign}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@NCtabarray}
% Effectively a modified version of \verb?\@array?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@NCtabarray}[1]{%
\@tempdima \ht\strutbox
\advance\@tempdima\extrarowheight
\setbox \@arstrutbox \hbox{\vrule
\@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
\@depth \arraystretch \dp\strutbox
\@width\z@}%
\begingroup
%% \@mkpream{@{\hspace{\@totalleftmargin}}#1@{}}%
\@mkpream{#1}%
\xdef\@preamble{\@NCialign \@halignto
\bgroup & \tabskip\z@
\@arstrut
\@preamble
\tabskip\ctabrightskip
\cr}%
\endgroup
\let\@sharp ##\let\protect\relax
\lineskip\z@
\baselineskip\z@
\let\\\@arraycr
\let\tabularnewline\\%
\let\par\@empty
\ctabsetlines
\@preamble
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endctabular}
% \begin{macro}{\endctabular*}
% End the environments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endctabular{%
\crcr \egroup
\gdef\@preamble{}%
\addvspace{\topsep}
\noindent}
\expandafter\let\csname endctabular*\endcsname=\endctabular
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Horizontal lines}
%
% The standard \cs{hline} can produce odd results when used with
% continuous tabulars, but \cs{hhline} or \cs{cline} are OK.
% I want a version of \cs{hline}
% that works with continuous tabulars and has an adjustable width
% (i.e., thickness). This will be based on a modified \cs{cline}
%
% For reference, here are the essentials of the kernel's definitions.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\hline{%
% \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth \futurelet
% \reserved@a\@xhline}
% \def\@xhline{%
% \ifx\reserved@a\hline
% \vskip\doublerulesep
% \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
% \fi
% \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
% \def\cline#1{\@cline#1\@nil}
% \def\@cline#1-#2\@nil{%
% \omit
% \@multicnt#1%
% \advance\@multispan\m@ne
% \ifnum\@multicnt=\@ne\@firstofone{&\omit}\fi
% \@multicnt#2%
% \advance\@multicnt-#1%
% \advance\@multispan\@ne
% \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill
% \cr
% \noalign{\vskip-\arrayrulewidth}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memcline}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@cline}
% This is a version of the kernel \cs{cline} code that provides
% a variable width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memcline}[2]{\m@m@cline[#1]#2\@nil}
\def\m@m@cline[#1]#2-#3\@nil{%
\omit
\@multicnt#2%
\advance\@multispan\m@ne
\ifnum\@multicnt=\@ne\@firstofone{&\omit}\fi
\@multicnt#3%
\advance\@multicnt-#2%
\advance\@multispan\@ne
\leaders\hrule\@height #1\hfill % <- variable \@height value
\cr
\noalign{\vskip- #1}} % <- variable \@height value
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memhline}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mhline}
% A version of \cs{hline}, based on \cs{memcline}, taking a
% rule width as argument. It draws a \cs{memcline} from the
% first to the last (\cs{@curtab}) column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memhline}[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\memcline{#1}{1-\@curtab}}
\newcommand*{\m@mhline}{\cline{1-\@curtab}}
% \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
% Fear's rules also do not play well within continuous tabulars.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@BTnormal}
% Special version of \cs{@BTnormal}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\m@m@BTnormal{%
\ifnum0=`{\fi} % closes the \noalign
\multispan{\@curtab} \leaders\bktabrule{\@thisrulewidth}\hfill\cr
\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
\futurenonspacelet\@tempa\@BTendrule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ctabsetlines}
% Continuous tabulars cannot use the standard horizontal lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\ctabsetlines{%
\let\hline\m@mhline
\let\@BTnormal\m@m@BTnormal}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
%
% \subsection{Automated tabulations}
%
%
% It can be convenient, especially while drafting a document, to have
% a list of items put into a tabular without having to mark the ends
% of the rows.
%
% The following is based on plain \TeX{} code given on pages 307--308 of
% \textit{TeX for the Impatient}~\cite{bk:Impatient}, which provides
% code for typesetting in columns.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\abovecolumnspenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@linestogo}
% \begin{macro}{\@cellstogo}
% \begin{macro}{\@cellsincolumn}
% \begin{macro}{\crtok}
% Counters and such.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\abovecolumnspenalty
\abovecolumnspenalty=10000
\newcount\@linestogo % lines remaining to be procesed
\newcount\@cellstogo % cells remaining in column or row
\newcount\@cellsincolumn % number of lines per column
\newtoks\crtok
\crtok = {\cr}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mincolumnwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\c@lleftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\c@lrightskip}
% More things
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\@mincolumnwidth
\let\c@lleftskip\hfil % left skip within a column
\let\c@lrightskip\hfil % right skip within a column
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\preautotab}
% \begin{macro}{\postautotab}
% Hooks into the auto tabulations.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\preautotab\relax
\let\postautotab\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\autocols}
% \cs{autocols}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{comma separated list}
% arranges the elements in the \meta{comma separated list} into \meta{num}
% columns, the elements filling each column before moving to the next.
% That is, the elements are ordered top to bottom and left to right.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\autocols}[5][0pt]{\par\begingroup
\ctabsetlines
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the table position
% \begin{macrocode}
\if l#2
\raggedright
\else
\if r#2
\raggedleft
\else
\centering
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the column position style
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\c@lleftskip\hfil
\let\c@lrightskip\hfil
\if l#4
\let\c@lleftskip\relax
\else
\if r#4
\let\c@lrightskip\relax
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Count the number of entries and the minimum width (max entry width)
% for the columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@mincolumnwidth\z@
\TX@cols=#3
\@curtab=#3
\@linestogo\z@
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{
\advance\@linestogo\@ne
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\@tempa}
\ifdim\@tempdima>\@mincolumnwidth
\@mincolumnwidth=\@tempdima
\fi
}
\advance\@mincolumnwidth\tabcolsep
\linespercol
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify what is to be done after every entry
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endcolumnactions{%
\global\advance\@linestogo\m@ne
\ifnum\@cellstogo<\tw@
\global\advance\TX@cols\m@ne
\ifnum\TX@cols>\z@\linespercol\fi
\the\crtok
\else
&\global\advance\@cellstogo\m@ne
\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Calculate the width of the columns
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim #1 > \z@
\TX@col@width=#1
\divide\TX@col@width \TX@cols
\else
\TX@col@width=\@mincolumnwidth
\fi
\penalty\abovecolumnspenalty
\noindent% usually not a paragraph
% \end{macrocode}
% Create most of the preamble by looping to add \cs{@cellsincolumn}-1 slots,
% then the last one which is different.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@preamble{}%
\begingroup
\let\@sharp\relax
\ifnum\@cellsincolumn>\@ne
\loop
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{%
\c@lleftskip\strut\@sharp\c@lrightskip} &}%
\advance\@cellsincolumn\m@ne
\ifnum\@cellsincolumn>\@ne
\repeat
\fi
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{\c@lleftskip\strut\@sharp\c@lrightskip}}%
\endgroup
\let\@sharp ##
% \end{macrocode}
% Start the \cs{valign}
% \begin{macrocode}
\tabskip\ctableftskip
%% \tabskip\z@
\valign \bgroup
\tabskip\z@
\@preamble
\tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr
% \end{macrocode}
% Add all the entries then finish off.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{
\@tempa\unskip\space\@endcolumnactions}%
\the\crtok \egroup \par \endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\linespercol}
% \cs{linespercol} calculates the maximum number of lines that go into
% a column, where there are \cs{TX@cols} columns and \cs{@linestogo}
% lines, so that the columns are balanced as well as possible. The result
% is \cs{@cellstogo}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\linespercol}{%
\@cellsincolumn=\@linestogo
\divide\@cellsincolumn \TX@cols
\@cellstogo=\@cellsincolumn
\multiply\@cellstogo \TX@cols
\@tempcnta=\@linestogo
\advance\@tempcnta -\@cellstogo
\ifnum \@tempcnta>\z@
\advance\@cellsincolumn \@ne
\fi
\global\@cellstogo=\@cellsincolumn}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\autorows}
% \cs{autorows}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{comma separated list}
% arranges the elements in the \meta{comma separated list} into \meta{num}
% columns, the elements filling each row before moving to the next.
% That is, the elements are ordered left to right and top to bottom.
% By default, each column is the same width, enough for the widest entry.
% If \meta{width} is a negative length (e.g., -1pt) the columns are set
% to their natural
% widths. If \meta{width} is positive (e.g., \cs{textwidth}), column widths
% are equal widths so that the overal width is \meta{width}.
% The sideways location of thre tabular is \meta{pos} (l, c, or r), and
% the column style id \meta{style} (l, c, or r).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\autorows}[5][0pt]{\par\begingroup
\ctabsetlines
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the table position
% \begin{macrocode}
\ctableftskip\fill
\ctabrightskip\fill
\if l#2
\ctableftskip\z@
\else
\if r#2
\ctabrightskip\z@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the column position style
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\c@lleftskip\hfil
\let\c@lrightskip\hfil
\if l#4
\let\c@lleftskip\relax
\else
\if r#4
\let\c@lrightskip\relax
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Count the number of entries and the minimum width (max entry width)
% for the columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\TX@cols=#3\relax
\@curtab=#3\relax
\@cellstogo = \TX@cols
\@mincolumnwidth\z@
\@linestogo\z@
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{%
\advance\@linestogo\@ne
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\@tempa}
\ifdim\@tempdima>\@mincolumnwidth
\@mincolumnwidth=\@tempdima
\fi}%
\advance\@mincolumnwidth\tabcolsep
% \end{macrocode}
% Specify what is to be done after every entry
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endcolumnactions{%
\global\advance\@linestogo\m@ne
\global\advance\@cellstogo\m@ne
\ifnum\@cellstogo<\@ne
\global\@cellstogo=\TX@cols
\the\crtok
\else
&
\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Calculate the width of the columns
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim #1>\z@
\TX@col@width=#1
\else
\TX@col@width=\hsize
\fi
\divide\TX@col@width \TX@cols
\ifdim #1=\z@
\TX@col@width=\@mincolumnwidth
\fi
\penalty\abovecolumnspenalty
\noindent % usually not a paragraph
\vskip -\z@ % don't know why we need this, but looks bad without it
% \end{macrocode}
% Create most of the preamble by looping to add \cs{@cellsincolumn}-1 slots,
% then the last one which is different.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@preamble{}%
\begingroup
\let\@sharp\relax
\ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
\loop
\ifdim #1<\z@
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip &}%
\else
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{%
\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip} &}%
\fi
\advance\TX@cols\m@ne
\ifnum\TX@cols>\@ne
\repeat
\fi
\ifdim #1<\z@
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip}%
\else
\g@addto@macro{\@preamble}{%
\hb@xt@ \TX@col@width{\strut\c@lleftskip\@sharp\c@lrightskip}}%
\fi
\endgroup
\let\@sharp ##
% \end{macrocode}
% Start the \verb?\halign?
% \begin{macrocode}
\tabskip\ctableftskip
\halign to \hsize \bgroup
\tabskip\z@
\@preamble
%% \tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr \preautotab
\tabskip\ctabrightskip\cr
% \end{macrocode}
% Add all the entries then finish off.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\@tempa:=#5\do{%
\@tempa\unskip\space\@endcolumnactions}%
%% \the\crtok \postautotab \the\crtok \egroup \endgroup \par
\the\crtok \egroup \endgroup \par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Floating objects}
%
% The file \file{latex.dtx} only defines a number of tools with
% which floating objects can be defined. This is done in the
% document class. It needs to define the following macros for each
% floating object of type \texttt{TYPE} (e.g., \texttt{TYPE} =
% figure).
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{\bslash fps@TYPE}]
% The default placement specifier for floats of type
% \texttt{TYPE}.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash ftype@TYPE}]
% The type number for floats of type \texttt{TYPE}. Each
% \texttt{TYPE} has associated a unique positive \texttt
% {TYPE} number, which is a power of two. E.g., figures might
% have type number 1, tables type number 2, programs type
% number 4, etc.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash ext@TYPE}]
% The file extension indicating the file on which the contents
% list for float type \texttt{TYPE} is stored. For example,
% \cs{ext@figure} = `lof'.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash fnum@TYPE}]
% A macro to generate the figure number for a caption. For
% example, \cs{fnum@TYPE} == `Figure \cs{thefigure}'.
%
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @makecaption}{\meta{num}}{\meta{text}}]
% A macro to make a caption, with \meta{num} the value produced
% by \cs{fnum@...} and \meta{text} the text of the caption. It
% can assume it's in a \cs{parbox} of the appropriate width.
% This will be used for \emph{all} floating objects.
%
% \end{description}
%
% The actual environment that implements a floating object such as
% a figure is defined using the macros \cs{@float} and \cs{end@float},
% which are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
%
% An environment that implements a single column floating object is
% started with \verb?\@float{TYPE}?\oarg{placement} of type
% \texttt{TYPE} with \meta{placement} as the placement specifier.
% The default value of \meta{PLACEMENT} is defined by \cs{fps@TYPE}.
%
% The environment is ended by \cs{end@float}. E.g., \cs{figure} ==
% \verb?\@float{figure}?, \cs{endfigure} == \cs{end@float}.
%
%
% \subsection{Floats}
%
% To define a float environment, say \Lenv{fenv}, the following macros must be defined:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \cs{fps@fenv} The default placement specifier (normally \verb?tbp?).
% \item \cs{ftype@fenv} The type number which is an integer and a power of 2.
% \item \cs{ext@fenv} The file extension for the contents list.
% \item \cs{c@fenv} A counter for the environment (for caption numbering).
% \item \cs{fnum@fenv} A macro to generate the caption `number'.
% \item \cs{l@fenv} A macro to produce an entry in a list of\ldots.
% \item \cs{flegtocfenv} A macro to write a \cs{namedlegend} title to a listof file.
% \item \cs{flegfenv} A macro to typeset the name of a \cs{namedlegend}.
% \item \cs{toclevel@fenv} Holding a bookmark level (required if the
% \Lpack{hyperref} package will be used).
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{newflo@tctr}
% A counter for the type number of a new float. Normally
% figures are of type 1, tables type 2, and the next float type is then 4, and so
% on.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{newflo@tctr}
\setcounter{newflo@tctr}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfloat}
% \cs{newfloat}oarg{within}\marg{fenv}\marg{ext}\marg{capname}
% creates the commands for a new float environment, \meta{fenv} (aka \texttt{X}),
% using \meta{ext} (aka \texttt{Z}) as the
% file extension and \meta{capname} for the caption name.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed setting of \cs{ftype@X} in
% \cs{newfloat} to correctly assign float numbers, courtesy Flavian
% Lambert (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfloat}[4][\@empty]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ftype@X}
% Define the float type, set it to the float counter, and double
% the counter afterwards.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% \@namedef{ftype@#2}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
%%% \addtocounter{newflo@tctr}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
\expandafter\edef\csname ftype@#2\endcsname{\the\c@newflo@tctr}%
\advance\c@newflo@tctr \c@newflo@tctr
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
% Create the counter for the caption, which must not have been previously
% defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{c@#2}{% counter is not defined
\ifx \@empty#1\relax
\newcounter{#2}
\else
\newcounter{#2}[#1]
\expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
\fi}{}
\setcounter{#2}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@X}
% \begin{macro}{\c@Zdepth}
% Define \cs{ext@X} for the file extension and set the new \verb?Zdepth?
% depth counter to 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ext@#2}{#3}% file extension
\@ifundefined{c@#3depth}{\newcounter{#3depth}}{}
\setcounter{#3depth}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fps@X}
% \begin{macro}{\fnum@X}
% \begin{macro}{\flegX}
% \begin{macro}{\flegtocX}
% \cs{fps@X} is the default float placement specification, \cs{fnum@X}
% typesets the caption name and number, and \cs{flegX} and \cs{flegtocX} are for
% named legends.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{fps@#2}{tbp} % position
\@namedef{fnum@#2}{#4~\@nameuse{the#2}} % caption naming
\@namedef{fleg#2}{#4} % legend naming
\@namedef{flegtoc#2}##1{} % legend name in ToC
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{X}
% \begin{environment}{X*}
% Finally define the new float environment, in both normal and starred
% forms. We also al an internal macro that can be used to globally
% adjust floats, e.g. making all tables in small size.
% We would like to be able to insert adjustments inside the
% floats. But the manner in which \cs{@float} works makes it
% impossible for us to simple insert this into the definitions of the
% floats.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{#2}{\@float{#2}}{\end@float}
\newenvironment{#2*}{\@dblfloat{#2}}{\end@dblfloat}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% This ends the definition of \cs{newfloat}.
% \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newfloat
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v3.6i}{2011/02/18}{Added this instead of inserting the
% adjustment code directly into the environment definitions}
% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat}
% In order to inject adjustment code into the core of the floats we
% will need to patch the code float macros a little.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\mem@old@xfloat\@xfloat
\def\@xfloat#1[#2]{\mem@old@xfloat{#1}[#2]\@nameuse{#1adjustment}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setfloatlocations}
% \cs{setfloatlocations}\marg{float}\marg{locs} sets the defualt locations
% for the \meta{float} class of floats (e.g., \texttt{figure}) to \meta{locs}
% (initially \texttt{tbp}). For tables you might want to use: \\
% \verb?\setfloatlocations{table}{htbp}?
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{setfloatlocations} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setfloatlocations}[2]{\@namedef{fps@#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/02/01}{Added \cs{setfloatadjustment}}
% \begin{macro}{\setfloatadjustment}
% \cs{setfloatadjustment}\marg{float}\marg{code} can be used to
% globally add internal adjustments to all floats of a certain
% type. For example to typeset the contents of all tables in
% \cs{small} use \verb|\setfloatadjustment{table}{\small}|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\setfloatadjustment[2]{\@namedef{#1adjustment}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
%
% To define subcaptions for use in a new float environment, say \texttt{fenv}, the
% following macros must be defined~\cite{SUBFIGURE}:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item A new counter \texttt{subfenv} for subcaption numbering.
% \item A new counter \texttt{extdepth}, where \texttt{ext} is the file extension
% for the contents list of \texttt{fenv}, for setting the contents depth.
% \item \cs{thesubfenv} for the formatting of the subcaption number.
% \item \cs{@thesubfenv} for typesetting the number.
% \item \cs{@@thesubfenv} for alternative label reference.
% \item \cs{p@subfenv} for prepending to the subcaption number when it is referenced.
% \item \cs{ext@subfenv} the file extension for the contents list.
% \item \cs{l@subfenv} for formatting the contents list entry.
% \item \cs{@makesubfloatcaption} for typesetting the subcaption.
% \item \cs{toclevel@subfenv} for hyperref bookmarks
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newsubfloat}
% \cs{newsubfloat}\marg{fenv} creates the commands for a new
% subfloat for \meta{fenv} (aka \texttt{X}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newsubfloat}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Call \verb?\newlistentry[X]{subX}{extX}{1}? to get most of the work done.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[#1]{sub#1}{\@nameuse{ext@#1}}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@subX}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\@thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\@@thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\p@subX}
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@subX}
% And now for the rest of the commands for subcaptions.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{@@thesubenv}
% to \cs{newsubfloat}}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{toclevel@subenv}
% to \cs{newsubfloat}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ext@sub#1}{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}
\@namedef{thesub#1}{(\alph{sub#1})}
\@namedef{@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}%
\if@tightsubcap\hskip\subfloatlabelskip\else\space\fi}
\@namedef{@@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}}
\@namedef{p@sub#1}{\csname the#1\endcsname}
\@namedef{toclevel@sub#1}{1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% By permission of Steven Douglas Cochran the class provides similar
% functionality as the \Lpack{subfigure} package~\cite{SUBFIGURE}.
% This requires some changes to be made to \cs{@float} and \cs{end@float}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifdonemaincaption}
% This is set TRUE after the \cs{(cont)caption} has been called in a float.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{if@contmaincaption} to
% \cs{ifdonemaincaption}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifdonemaincaption
\donemaincaptionfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@float}
% \begin{macro}{\@dbfloat}
% The kernel \cs{@float} and \cs{@dblfloat} macros are redefined to set
% \cs{ifdonemaincaption} to FALSE, and also to zero the subfloat
% counter, if it is defined.
% Ignasi Furi\`{o} reported\footnote{Private email from
% \texttt{ignasi.furio@uib.es}, 2003/10/17} that floats embedded in text
% created an extra space. This was caused by a missing \verb?%?.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Deleted spaces from \cs{@float} and
% \cs{@dblfloat} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldfloat\@float
\renewcommand{\@float}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
\@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}%
\@memoldfloat{#1}}
\let\@memolddblfloat\@dblfloat
\renewcommand{\@dblfloat}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
\@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}%
\@memolddblfloat{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\end@float}
% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat}
% The kernel \cs{end@float} and \cs{end@dblfloat} macros are redefined to
% dump out any subcaptions that have not yet been processed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldefloat\end@float
\def\end@float{%
\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldefloat}
\let\@memoldedblfloat\end@dblfloat
\def\end@dblfloat{%
\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldedblfloat}
% \end{macrocode}
% Unfortunately the \Lpack{fixltx2e} package, version 1.1h (current as of 2005/09/03) makes assumptions
% about \cs{end@float} which do not hold for memoir. The code has to be reverted back to that in version 1.0b of \Lpack{fixltx2e}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Dealt with incompatibilities between fixltx2e and memoir's \cs{end@dblfloat} (mempatch v3.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fixltx2e}{%
\def\end@dblfloat{%
\if@twocolumn
\@endfloatbox
\ifnum\@floatpenalty<\z@
\@largefloatcheck
\global\dp\@currbox1sp %
\@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
\fi
\ifnum\@floatpenalty=-\@Mii \@Esphack\fi
\else
\end@float
\fi}}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/02/01}{Added \cs{FloatBlock}}
% \subsubsection{Float blockage}
%
% This is basically a slightly modified copy of \cs{FloatBarrier} from
% the \Lpack{placeins} package by Donald Arseneau, renamed such that
% both can be used in the same document. We could have emulated the
% \Lpack{placeins} package, but people might use it with options, so,
% since the code is so short we just copy it. Kudos to Donald Arseneau.
% For more defaults see
% \cite{PLACEINS}.
% \begin{macro}{\FloatBlock}
% \begin{macro}{\FloatBlockAllowAbove}
% \begin{macro}{\FloatBlockAllowBelow}
% The two \cs{XAllowY} macros is our way of supporting the
% \Lpack{placeins} package options.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\mem@fb@botlist{\@botlist}
\def\mem@fb@topblock{\suppressfloats[t]}
\def\FloatBlock{\par\begingroup \let\@elt\relax
\edef\@tempa{\mem@fb@botlist\@deferlist\@dbldeferlist}%
\ifx\@tempa\@empty
\else
\ifx\@fltovf\relax % my indicator of recursion
\if@firstcolumn
\clearpage
\else
\null\newpage\FloatBlock
\fi
\else
\newpage \let\@fltovf\relax
\FloatBlock % recurse once only
\fi\fi \endgroup
\mem@fb@topblock}
\newcommand*\FloatBlockAllowAbove{\def\mem@fb@topblock{}}
\newcommand*\FloatBlockAllowBelow{\def\mem@fb@botlist{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setFloatBlockFor}
% This can be used to add \cs{FloatBLock} into various sectional
% macros. Supported: \cs{chapter} (when in article mode) and all
% sectional macros made using \cs{@startsection}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\setFloatBlockFor[1]{%
\@namedef{#1block}{\FloatBlock}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Margin floats}
%
% The next two constructions are inspired by \texttt{tufte-common.def}
% by Bil Kleb, Bill Wood, and Kevin Godby and provide a manner to
% insert figures or tables into the margin. Note that the
% \cs{setfloatadjustment} also applies here.
% \begin{macro}{\mem@margin@floatbox}
% Box to save the contents of a margin float in.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newsavebox{\mem@margin@floatbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% % \begin{environment}{mem@margin@float}
% \begin{environment}{marginfigure}
% \begin{environment}{margintable}
% \begin{macro}{\marginfloatmarginmacro}
% Since the two environments only differ in `name' a constructor is used.
% Since these margin floats are wrapped inside another type of float
% (\cs{marginpar}) they may cause problems when used combined with
% regular floats (the float order may be wrong). For that reason the
% margin float throws a \cs{FloatBlock} before issuing the \cs{marginpar}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\marginfloatmarginmacro{\marginpar}
\newenvironment{mem@margin@float}[2][-1.2ex]%
{\FloatBlock%
\begin{lrbox}{\mem@margin@floatbox}%
\begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
\def\@captype{#2}%
\hbox{}\vspace*{#1}%
\@nameuse{margin#2adjustment}%
\@nameuse{margin#2captionadjustment}%
\noindent%
}
{\end{minipage}%
\end{lrbox}%
\marginfloatmarginmacro{\usebox{\mem@margin@floatbox}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% The two environment is then just two applications of the
% constructor. The option can be used to move the margins float up and down.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{marginfigure}[1][-1.2ex]{%
\begin{mem@margin@float}[#1]{figure}}
{\end{mem@margin@float}}
\newenvironment{margintable}[1][-1.2ex]{%
\begin{mem@margin@float}[#1]{table}}
{\end{mem@margin@float}}
\setfloatadjustment{marginfigure}{\centering}
\setfloatadjustment{margintable}{\centering}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \begin{macro}{\setmarginfloatcaptionadjustment}
% Because of the very narrow margin area, it may be fruitful to
% reconfigure the caption style when used in a margin float. This can
% be done globally for all captions (e.g. if all floats are margin
% floats, or just for margin floats.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\setmarginfloatcaptionadjustment[2]{%
\@namedef{margin#1captionadjustment}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/02/06}{Added these two macros}
% \begin{macro}{\setmpjustification}
% \begin{macro}{\mpjustification}
% Can be just to use and configure a specialized justification. It
% follows the \verb?\marginpar? placement, and make use of the first
% argument when at the left of the text block and the other when at
% the right. It makes use of an internal setting from within
% \verb?\marginparmargin?, thus that need to have been executed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\setmpjustification[2]{%
\@namedef{mem@mp@justification}{%
\ifm@msetmp\else\@memerror{In order to use
\string\marginCmdAdjust,^^J%
please make sure to specify into which margin the^^J%
\string\marginpar\space should go, using \string\marginparmargin}{}\fi
\m@mwhich@margin{\m@mmpar@margin}%
\ifmemtortm #2 \else #1\fi}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Default value
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mpjustification{%
\@nameuse{mem@mp@justification}}
\setmpjustification{\raggedleft}{\raggedright}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Captions}
%
% The caption styling
% is accomplished by redefining the \cs{@makecaption}
% command. First, though, define and initialise the user-level commands.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@contcw}
% \begin{macro}{\if@conthang}
% \begin{macro}{\if@contindent}
% For use when checking caption width and captioning styles styles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@contcw
\newif\if@conthang
\newif\if@contindent
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captiondelim}
% \begin{macro}{\@contdelim}
% For the caption delimeter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captiondelim}[1]{\def\@contdelim{#1}}
\captiondelim{: }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\@contnfont}
% The font for the caption name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionnamefont}[1]{\def\@contnfont{#1}}
\captionnamefont{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captiontitlefont}
% \begin{macro}{\@conttfont}
% The font for the caption title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captiontitlefont}[1]{\def\@conttfont{#1}}
\captiontitlefont{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for the caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\captionstyle}[1]{\def\@contcstyle{#1}}
\captionstyle{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcshort}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcnom}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcshortstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for the caption.
%
% I had email from J{\o}rgen Larsen (\url{jl@dirac.ruc.dk}), 2003/04/09,
% asking for separate controls for the short and long captions. \\
% \cs{captionstyle}\oarg{short}\marg{normal}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Extended \cs{captionstyle} (from patch v1.5)}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/16}{Removed sporadic spaces}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\captionstyle}{%
\@ifnextchar[{\@memcshort}{\@memcnorm}}
\def\@memcshort[#1]#2{%
\def\@contcshortstyle{#1}%
\def\@contcstyle{#2}}
\def\@memcnorm#1{%
\def\@contcshortstyle{#1}%
\def\@contcstyle{#1}}
\captionstyle{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contcwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\captionwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\changecaptionwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\normalcaptionwidth}
% The macros for dealing with the caption width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\@contcwidth}
\newcommand{\captionwidth}[1]{\setlength{\@contcwidth}{#1}}
\captionwidth{\linewidth}
\newcommand{\changecaptionwidth}{\@contcwtrue}
\newcommand{\normalcaptionwidth}{\@contcwfalse}
\normalcaptionwidth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contindw}
% \begin{macro}{\hangcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\indentcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\normalcaption}
% The macros for hanging and indented captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\@contindw}
\newcommand{\hangcaption}{\@conthangtrue\@contindentfalse}
\newcommand{\indentcaption}[1]{\setlength{\@contindw}{#1}%
\@conthangfalse\@contindenttrue}
\newcommand{\normalcaption}{\@conthangfalse\@contindentfalse}
\normalcaption
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\precaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contpre}
% \begin{macro}{\postcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contpost}
% \begin{macro}{\midbicaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contmidbi}
% The macros for the pre- and post-caption text/commands, and
% for the mid-caption command for bilingual captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\precaption}[1]{\def\@contpre{#1}}
\precaption{}
\newcommand{\postcaption}[1]{\def\@contpost{#1}}
\postcaption{}
\newcommand{\midbicaption}[1]{\def\@contmidbi{#1}}
\midbicaption{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captiontitlefinal}
% \cs{captiontitlefinal}\marg{stuff} will put \meta{stuff} immediately
% at the end of a \cs{caption}'s title text but it will not appear
% in the LoF/LoT/etc. For example \\
% \verb?\captiontitlefinal{.}? \\
% The code was supplied by Frederic Connes.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{captiontitlefinal} (mempatch v4.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\captiontitlefinal}[1]{\def\@contfinal{#1}}
\captiontitlefinal{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abovecaptionskip}
% \begin{macro}{\belowcaptionskip}
% Vertical space above and below a caption. Make them sum to an
% integral number of lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\abovecaptionskip}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}
\newlength{\belowcaptionskip}
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\caption}
% For subfloat support, the (kernel) \cs{caption} macro needs to note that it
% has been called.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldcaption\caption
\def\caption{\donemaincaptiontrue\@memoldcaption}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memcaptioninfo}
% \verb?\memcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}{short}{long}?
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memcaptioninfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memcaptioninfo}[4]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
% For title referencing support, the (kernel) \cs{@caption} macro needs
% to store the title.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added braces around second argument of \cs{@memold@caption} (per Dan Luecking, mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memold@caption\@caption
\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
\M@gettitle{#2}%
\memcaptioninfo{#1}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{#2}{#3}%
\@memold@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
% This is a reimplementation of the kernel \cs{@makecaption} command.
% As well as including the caption typesetting commands it enables
% captions that include forced newlines (e.g., by \verb?\\?).
%
% The first part is due to
% Donald Arseneau\footnote{Email: \texttt{asnd@triumf.ca}} from postings
% to the \ctt{} newsgroup and Email discussions. The \cs{topskip} strut is
% used whenever the caption is the first part of the float. This means,
% among other things, that if a caption comes at the
% top of a page, then the first line of the caption will be aligned with
% the normal first line of a page. The \cs{abovecaptionskip} is only used
% when there is something above the caption in the current float.
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed \cs{@tempa} to \cs{@memtempa} in \cs{@makecaption}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/02/12}{Added extra centering code in \cs{@makecaption}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added separate short/long styles in \cs{@makecaption}
% (from patch v1.5)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{@contfinal} to \cs{@makecaption}
% (mempatch v4.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\let\@memtempa\relax
\ifdim\prevdepth>-99\p@ \vskip\abovecaptionskip
\else \def\@memtempa{\vbox to\topskip{}}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@contfnote}
% \begin{macro}{\@contfmark}
% The caption title will be typeset twice, firstly to measure its width
% and secondly to actually typeset it. To avoid problems caused by
% a footnote in the caption getting processed twice, we temporarily
% disable the expected relevant commands.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/20}{Provided the same for \cs{pagentote}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@contfnote\footnote \renewcommand{\footnote}[2][]{}
\let\@contfmark\footnotemark \renewcommand{\footnotemark}[1][]{}
\let\@contpnote\pagenote\renewcommand\pagenote[2][]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Now measure the width of the total caption, not forgetting to take account
% of the font specifications, and then restore the footnoting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim \@conttfont #2\@contfinal}
\let\footnote\@contfnote
\let\footnotemark\@contfmark
\let\pagenote\@contpnote
% \end{macrocode}
% If the caption is less than one
% line, then the whole caption needs to be centered on the page (otherwise
% the short caption may be typeset flushleft).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\linewidth \centering \fi
\if@contcw
% \end{macrocode}
% For typesetting at anything other than the normal width, put the caption
% into a \cs{parbox} of the specified width. This must be centered.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/06}{Align inner parbox at top
% line. Vertically centered parbox cause different spacing when
% \cs{changecaptionwidth} compared when it is not used.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\centering
\parbox[t]{\@contcwidth}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Henrik Holm\footnote{Email from \texttt{henrik@tele.ntnu.no} on
% 2002/02/10.} proposed adding the next line to center short, narrow captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\@contcwidth \centering \fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Hanging and indenting doesn't apply to short captions, so do these
% now.
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/06/25}{Short captions no longer hang or indent}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\linewidth
\@contpre
{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa
{\@contcshortstyle \@conttfont #2\@contfinal\par}
\else
\if@conthang
% \end{macrocode}
% For a hanging caption we have to measure the width of the caption name,
% then typeset the whole caption in a hanging paragraph.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed code for hangcaption in \cs{@makecaption}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}
\@contpre%
{\@contcstyle\hangindent=\wd\@tempboxa
\noindent\box\@tempboxa\@memtempa \@conttfont #2\@contfinal\par}
\else
\if@contindent
% \end{macrocode}
% An indented caption is similar, except the amount of indentation is
% kept in \cs{@contindw}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contpre%
{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa
{\@contcstyle\hangindent=\@contindw
\hangafter=\@ne\@conttfont #2\@contfinal\par}% <- v1.4
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% For the normal style, just typeset the caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contpre%
{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa
{\@contcstyle \@conttfont #2\@contfinal\par}
\fi
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finish off the typesetting by processing the post-text, and if not using
% the normal width then close off the \cs{parbox}, and lastly put in some
% vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contpost
\if@contcw
\par
} % end of the \parbox
\fi
\vskip\belowcaptionskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Continuation captions and legends}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contcaption}
% \cs{contcaption}\marg{text} is a user-level command.
% It is a simplified
% version of the normal \cs{caption} command as it doesn't have to deal
% with numbering or list of \dots entries.
%
% However,
% Brent Lievers\footnote{ (\texttt{lieversb@post.queensu.ca})
% in \ctt{} thread \textit{Figures}, 2003/11/14.} requested that \cs{label}
% should pick up the correct caption number after a \cs{contcaption}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Extended \cs{contcaption} (from patch v1.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contcaption}{%
\addtocounter{\@captype}{\m@ne}\refstepcounter{\@captype}%
\@contcaption\@captype}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@contcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcaption}
% \cs{@contcaption} is the workhorse for the \cs{contcaption} command. In turn,
% it uses the \cs{@makecaption} command (defined in the usual classes)
% to do most of its work. It
% uses the number of the previous \cs{caption} command in the same
% type of float and its implementation includes much of the code
% used in the \LaTeX{} \cs{@caption} command.
%
% First specify \cs{@@contcaption}\marg{type}\marg{title}
% to save some repetitive code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@@contcaption#1#2{%
\par
\begingroup
\@parboxrestore
\if@minipage
\@setminipage
\fi
\normalsize
\@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}\par
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for \cs{@contcaption}\marg{type}\marg{title}.
% It has to flush out any subcaptions at the
% appropriate time, as well as typesetting the caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@contcaption#1#2{%
\if@contbotsub
\@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
\@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
\else
\@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
\@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\memlegendinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\legend}
% The macro \cs{legend}\marg{text}is intended
% to be used in a float environment for an `anonymous' caption, but can be
% used anywhere.
%
% The implementation is similar to the \cs{caption} command but we have
% to eliminate printing of a delimeter.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{legend}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memlegendinfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memlegendinfo}[1]{}
\newcommand{\legend}[1]{%
\M@gettitle{#1}%
\memlegendinfo{#1}%
\par
\begingroup
\@parboxrestore
\if@minipage
\@setminipage
\fi
\normalsize
\captiondelim{\mbox{}}
\@makecaption{}{\ignorespaces #1}\par
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\namedlegend}
% \begin{macro}{\memnamedlegendinfo}
% \cs{namedlegend}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title} is like the
% \cs{caption} command except that it does not number the caption.
%
% \cs{memnamedlegendinfo}\marg{type}\marg{short-title}\marg{long-title}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{memnamedlegendinfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\namedlegend}{\@dblarg{\@legend\@captype}}
\newcommand{\memnamedlegendinfo}[3]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@legend}
% \cs{@legend}\marg{type}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title}
% is the workhorse for the \cs{namedlegend} command. In turn, it calls
% \cs{@makelegend}. It requires two commands to have been defined, namely
% \cs{flegtoctype} and \cs{flegtype}. The command \cs{flegtoctype}\marg{text}
% is responsible for writing a title text to the appropriate listof file.
% \cs{flegtype} is responsible for typeseting the name of the legend.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{M@gettitle} to \cs{@legend}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@legend#1[#2]#3{%
\M@gettitle{#2}%
\memnamedlegendinfo{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\par
\csname flegtoc#1\endcsname{#2}%
\begingroup
\@parboxrestore
\if@minipage
\@setminipage
\fi
\normalsize
\@makecaption{\csname fleg#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Non-float captions}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfixedcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\renewfixedcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\providefixedcaption}
% These commands are defined in terms of their \verb?\...command? counterparts.\\
% Call as \verb?\...fixedcaption?\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{env}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
\newcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
\newcommand{\renewfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
\renewcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
\newcommand{\providefixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
\providecommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Bilingual captions}
%
% The bilingual caption commands all use internal grouping so
% that any changes are kept local. This has the unfortunate side-effect
% that any \cs{label} command must be within the grouping otherwise the
% wrong number is picked up. To make the coding, if not necessarily the
% use, of the commands simpler, I have not used the traditional style
% of square brackets for optional caption text arguments. Instead, empty
% `required' arguments are used as the implementation means.
%
% \begin{macro}{\membitwonumcaptioninfo}
% \begin{macro}{\membionenumcaptioninfo}
% \begin{macro}{\membicaptioninfo}
% \verb?\membitwonumcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
% \hspace*{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
% \verb?\membionenumcaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
% \hspace*{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
% \verb?\membicaptioninfo{type}{\thetypenum}?\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\\
% \hspace{2in} \marg{name2}\marg{long2} \\
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/10}{Added \cs{membitwonumcaptioninfo},
% \cs{membitwonumcaptioninfo} and \cs{membicaptioninfo}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\membitwonumcaptioninfo}[7]{}
\newcommand{\membionenumcaptioninfo}[7]{}
\newcommand{\membicaptioninfo}[6]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bitwonumcaption}
% The 6 arguments are: optional label, short and long in language 1,
% name in
% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
% into the List of as numbered entries.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bitwonumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
\begingroup
\let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal \cs{caption} for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
{\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx \@empty #1\else
\label{#1}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Remove any extra spacing between the captions, and set the
% NAME for the second caption. Use a command to transfer
% the NAME to the renewal code to avoid circularity if
% for example, we are trying to redefine \cs{tablename} as
% \cs{tablename}. Decrement the caption counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#4}%
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
\addtocounter{\@captype}{-1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now repeat for the second language caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contmidbi
\@ifmtarg{#5}{\def\m@mscapii{#6}\caption{#6}}%
{\def\m@mscapii{#5}\caption[#5]{#6}}%
\membitwonumcaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
{\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{\m@mscapii}{#6}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bionenumcaption}
% The 6 arguments are: optional labelling,
% short and long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
% into the List of, but only the first is numbered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bionenumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
\begingroup
\let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal \cs{caption} for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
{\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx \@empty #1\else
\label{#1}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#4}%
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}
% \end{macrocode}
% Use a continuation caption for the second language, not forgetting
% to add the appropriate unnumbered text to the List.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@contmidbi
\contcaption{#6}%
\@ifmtarg{#5}{%
\def\m@mscapii{#6}%
\addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
{\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #6}}}{%
\def\m@mscapii{#5}%
\addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
{\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #5}}}%
\membionenumcaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
{\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{\m@mscapii}{#6}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bicaption}
% The 5 arguments are: optional labelling,
% short and long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and long in language 2.
% Only the first text is put into the List.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bicaption}[5][\@empty]{%
\begingroup
\let\memcaptioninfo\@gobblefour
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal \cs{caption} for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\def\m@mscapi{#3}\caption{#3}}%
{\def\m@mscapi{#2}\caption[#2]{#3}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx \@empty #1\else
\label{#1}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code and
% finally just use \cs{contcaption} for the
% second language.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#4}
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
\@contmidbi
\contcaption{#5}%
\membicaptioninfo{\@captype}{\@nameuse{the\@captype}}%
{\m@mscapi}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bicontcaption}
% The 3 arguments are long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and long in language 2.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bicontcaption}[3]{%
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{contcaption} for language 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\contcaption{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code and use \cs{contcaption} for the second
% language.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}%
\edef\@memtempc{#2}%
\expandafter\renewcommand\csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}%
\@contmidbi
\contcaption{#3}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Support for the \Lopt{subfigure} package functionality}
%
% Much of the code in this section is based on the \Lpack{subfigure}
% package code, by kind permission of its author, Steven Douglas Cochran.
% To try and avoid clashes with the real \Lpack{subfigure} code I have
% used different macro names, especially when I have copied the code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contsubcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for subcaptions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subcaptionstyle}[1]{\def\@contsubcstyle{#1}}
\subcaptionstyle{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@shortsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\if@hangsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\shortsubcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\hangsubcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\normalsubcaption}
% For dealing with short and hanging subcaptions.
% Analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure} \texttt{nooneline} and \texttt{hang} options.
% The default is normal subcaptions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@shortsubcap
\newif\if@hangsubcap
\newcommand*{\shortsubcaption}{\@shortsubcaptrue}
\newcommand*{\hangsubcaption}{\@hangsubcaptrue}
\newcommand*{\normalsubcaption}{\@shortsubcapfalse\@hangsubcapfalse}
\normalsubcaption
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subfloattopskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcaptopadj}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatbottomskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatlabelskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapmargin}
% These \cs{subfloat...} lengths are analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure}
% \cs{subfig...} lengths.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\subfloattopskip
\newskip\subfloatcapskip
\newskip\subfloatcaptopadj
\newskip\subfloatbottomskip
\newskip\subfloatlabelskip
\newdimen\subfloatcapmargin
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@tightsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\loosesubcaptions}
% \begin{macro}{\tightsubcaptions}
% Unlike the \Lpack{subfigure} package the class provides no options for
% subcaptions. These macros provide the \Lpack{subfigure} loose/tight
% option functions. Set the default to tight.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@tightsubcap
\newcommand{\loosesubcaptions}{%
\subfloattopskip = 10\p@
\subfloatcapskip = 10\p@
\subfloatcaptopadj = \z@
\subfloatbottomskip = 10\p@
\subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em
\subfloatcapmargin = 10\p@
\@tightsubcapfalse
}
\newcommand{\tightsubcaptions}{%
\subfloattopskip = 5\p@
\subfloatcapskip = \z@
\subfloatcaptopadj = 3\p@
\subfloatbottomskip = 5\p@
\subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em \@plus 0.07em \@minus 0.03em
\subfloatcapmargin = \z@
\@tightsubcaptrue
}
\tightsubcaptions
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionsize}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcapsize}
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionlabelfont}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcaplabelfont}
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionfont}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcapfont}
% These macros set the size and fonts for the subcaptions. Set the defaults
% to \cs{footnotesize}, and the normal roman font.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionsize}[1]{\def\@subcapsize{#1}}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionlabelfont}[1]{\def\@subcaplabelfont{#1}}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionfont}[1]{\def\@subcapfont{#1}}
\subcaptionsize{\footnotesize}
\subcaptionlabelfont{\normalfont}
\subcaptionfont{\normalfont}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contkeep}
% \begin{macro}{\@contset}
% \begin{macro}{\subconcluded}
% \cs{@contkeep} stores
% the current subfloat number in counter \verb?@contsubnum? and
% \cs{@contset} sets the subfloat number to the value of \verb?@contsubnum?.
% \cs{subconcluded} sets the subfloat number to zero.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{@contsubnum}
\newcommand{\@contkeep}{%
\setcounter{@contsubnum}{\value{sub\@captype}}}
\newcommand{\@contset}{%
\setcounter{sub\@captype}{\value{@contsubnum}}}
\newcommand{\subconcluded}{%
\setcounter{sub\@captype}{0}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@contbotsub}
% A flag indicating whether the subcaption is to be at the bottom or
% top of the subfloat; TRUE for the subcaption at the bottom.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@contbotsub
\@contbotsubtrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaption}
% \cs{subcaption}\oarg{list-entry}\marg{caption} is a generic
% subcaption. There is no \Lpack{subfigure} equivalent.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subcaption}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\ifdonemaincaption\else
\advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
\fi
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcap}
% This handles the optional argument to \cs{subcaption}. It sets \cs{@tempdima}
% to \cs{hsize} as later on \cs{@makesubfloatcaption} uses this.
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added \cs{@tempdima} to \cs{@memsubcap}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@memsubcap#1[#2]#3{%
\@tempdima=\hsize
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\ifx \@empty #2
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#3}{#3}%
\else
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\fi
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\egroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcaption}
% \cs{@memsubcaption}\marg{type}\marg{list-entry}\marg{caption}
% typesets a subcaption. This is a copy of the \Lpack{subfigure}
% \cs{@subcaption} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memsubcaption}[3]{%
\ifx \relax#2\relax \else
\bgroup
\let\label\@gobble
\let\protect\string
\def\@memsubcaplabel{\@nameuse{@@the#1}}%
\xdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{%
\@memsubfigcaptionlist,%
{\protect\numberline{\@memsubcaplabel}\noexpand{\ignorespaces #2}}}%
\egroup
\fi
\@makesubfloatcaption{\@nameuse{@the#1}}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\contsubcaption}
% \cs{contsubcaption}\oarg{caption} is the continued version of
% \cs{subcaption}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contsubcaption}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\@contset
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
{\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{subfloat}
% The \Lpack{subfigure} documentation suggests a way of defining a \Lenv{subfloat}
% environment. This is a trivial implementation because the \cs{subcaption}
% and \cs{contsubcaption} commands are provided by the class, and can be used
% within a \Lenv{subfloat}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subfloat}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubbody}
% \cs{subbottom}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subcaption}\marg{text}
% typesets a subcaption below the \meta{text}. Most of the work is
% performed by the \cs{@memsubbody} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subbottom}{%
\@contbotsubtrue
\@memsubbody}
\newcommand{\@memsubbody}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\ifdonemaincaption\else
\advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
\fi
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
\leavevmode
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubfig}%
{\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contsubbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcontsubbody}
% These are the continued versions of \cs{subbottom} and \cs{@memsubbody}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contsubbottom}{%
\@contbotsubtrue
\@memcontsubbody}
\newcommand{\@memcontsubbody}{%
\bgroup
\let\label=\memsub@label
\@contset
\refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
\leavevmode
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubfig}%
{\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subtop}
% \begin{macro}{\contsubtop}
% These are similar to \cs{subbottom} and \cs{contsubbottom} except that they
% put the subcaption on top of the \meta{text}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subtop}{%
\@contbotsubfalse
\@memsubbody}
\newcommand{\contsubtop}{%
\@contbotsubfalse
\@memcontsubbody}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Deleted \cs{@contsubfloat} as it was not used}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfig}
% This is a revised version of the \Lpack{subfigure} \cs{@subfigure} command
% --- just the called macro names are changed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@memsubfig[#1]{%
\@ifnextchar [%
{\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[#1]}%
{\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[\@empty #1][#1]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfloat}
% This is a modified version of the \Lpack{subfigure} \cs{@subfloat}
% command Essentially the \verb?\csname if#1topcap\endcsname? constructs are
% replaced by \cs{if@contbotsub}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@memsubfloat#1[#2][#3]#4{%
\@tempcnta=\@ne
\if@tightsubcap
\if@minipage
\@tempcnta=\z@
\else
\ifdim\lastskip=\z@
\@tempcnta=\@ne
\else
\@tempcnta=\tw@
\fi
\fi
\fi
\if@contbotsub
\def\subfig@top{\subfloattopskip}%
\def\subfig@bottom{\subfloatbottomskip}%
\else
\def\subfig@top{\subfloatbottomskip}%
\def\subfig@bottom{\subfloattopskip}%
\fi
\setbox\@tempboxa \hbox{#4}%
\@tempdima=\wd\@tempboxa
\vtop\bgroup
\vbox\bgroup
\ifcase\@tempcnta
\@minipagefalse
\or
\vspace{\subfig@top}
\or
\ifdim \lastskip=\z@ \else
\@tempskipb\subfig@top\@xaddvskip
\fi
\fi
\if@contbotsub
\box\@tempboxa\egroup
\ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\fi
\else
\ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
\@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\vskip\subfloatcapskip
\vskip\subfloatcaptopadj
\fi\egroup
\box\@tempboxa
\fi
\vspace{\subfig@bottom}
\egroup
\egroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% The following series of macros, from \Lpack{subfigure}, control the
% typesetting of the subcaptions.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}
% A copy of \cs{@subfigcaptionlist}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\memlistsubcaptions}
% A copy of \cs{listsubcaptions}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memlistsubcaptions}{%
\@ifstar
{\gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}%
{\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memlistsubcaptions}
% A copy of \cs{@listsubcaptions}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memlistsubcaptions}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{@captype}{}{%
\@ifundefined{ext@sub#1}{}{%
\@for \@tempa:=\@memsubfigcaptionlist \do {%
\ifx \@empty\@tempa\relax \else
\addcontentsline{\@nameuse{ext@sub#1}}{sub#1}{\@tempa}%
\fi}}}%
\gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makesubfloatcaption}
% This is a copy of \cs{@makesubfigurecaption}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@makesubfloatcaption}[2]{%
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
\@subcapsize
{\@subcaplabelfont #1}{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
\@tempdimb=-\subfloatcapmargin
\multiply\@tempdimb\tw@
\advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
\hss
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\@tempdimb
\memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
\else
\if@shortsubcap
\memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
\else
\box\@tempboxa
\fi
\fi
\hss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@caption}
% This is a copy of \cs{subfig@caption}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsubfig@caption}[2]{%
\if@hangsubcap
\sbox{\@tempboxa}{\@subcapsize\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
\addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-\wd\@tempboxa}%
\usebox{\@tempboxa}%
\memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{%
{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
\else
\memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{{\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@captionpar}
% This replaces \cs{subfig@captionpar}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsubfig@captionpar}[2]{%
\parbox[t]{#1}{\@subcapsize\@contsubcstyle #2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsub@label}
% These are copies of \cs{sub@label} and \cs{subref}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsub@label}{%
\@ifnextchar (%
{\sf@memsub@label}%
{\sf@memsub@label(Sub\@captype\space
\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}%
\@nameuse{thesub\@captype})}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sf@memsub@label}
% This is a copy of \cs{sf@sub@label}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\sf@memsub@label(#1)#2{%
\protected@edef\mem@currentlabelname{#1}%
\sf@@memsub@label{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sf@@memsub@label}
% This is an expanded copy of \cs{sf@@sub@label} processed after any packages may
% have been loaded.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{nameref}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The \Lpack{nameref} package is loaded.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{#1}%
{{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
{{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\@esphack}
}{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The \Lpack{hyperref} package is loaded, but not \Lpack{nameref}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{#1}%
{{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
{{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}%
{\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
{\@currentHref}{}}}%
\@esphack}
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Neither the \Lpack{hyperref} nor the \Lpack{nameref}
% package is loaded.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldlabel\label
\newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\@memoldlabel{#1}%
\protected@write\@auxout{}{%
\string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
{{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
{\thepage}}}%
\@esphack}
}{}%
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionref}
% This is a copy of the \cs{subref} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\subcaptionref}{%
\@ifstar{\ssc@ref}{\sc@ref}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ssc@ref}
% \begin{macro}{\sc@ref}
% The implementation of the starred and unstarred forms of \cs{subcaptionref}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ssc@ref}[1]{\ref{sub@#1}}
\newcommand*{\sc@ref}[1]{{\@subcaplabelfont\ref{sub@#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Side captions}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added all the code for side captions
% (mempatch v4.1)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscap@capbox}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscap@fbox}
% We need two save boxes, one to hold the caption and the other
% for the float material.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newsavebox{\m@mscap@capbox}
\newsavebox{\m@mscap@fbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecapsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidecapwidth}
% \cs{sidecapsep} is the space between the text and the caption, which
% is set in a box \cs{sidecapwidth} wide. These are initialized to
% the \cs{marginpar...} values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\sidecapsep
\sidecapsep=\marginparsep
\newdimen\sidecapwidth
\sidecapwidth=\marginparwidth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsidecaps}
% \cs{setsidecaps}\marg{sep}\marg{width} sets the \cs{sidecapsep} and
% \cs{sidecapwidth} (Ivars Finvers noted that the initial values don't change
% if the \cs{marginpar...} values change, such as at \cs{checkandfixthelayout}).
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{setsidecaps} (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setsidecaps}[2]{%
\setlength{\sidecapsep}{#1}\@memznegtest{\sidecapsep}%
\setlength{\sidecapwidth}{#2}\@memznegtest{\sidecapwidth}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@tempdima}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapraise}
% Lengths for internal use. \cs{m@m@tempdima} is meant for general
% temporary use.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\m@m@tempdima
\newdimen\m@mscapraise
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecapraise}
% Length to make (small) adjustments to the position of the caption wrt the float.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\sidecapraise
\sidecapraise \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsidecappos}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscappos}
% \cs{setsidecappos}\marg{pos}, where \meta{pos} is one of \texttt{t},
% \texttt{c}, or \texttt{b}, sets the vertical position of the caption
% in relation to the float and the result is saved as \cs{m@mscappos}.
% The default is \texttt{c}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setsidecappos}[1]{%
\def\m@mscappos{#1}\def\@tempb{t}%
\ifx\@tempb\m@mscappos
\else
\def\@tempb{b}%
\ifx\@tempb\m@mscappos
\else
\def\@tempb{c}%
\ifx\@tempb\m@mscappos
\else
\@memerror{Argument to \string\setsidecappos\space is not t or c or b.
\MessageBreak Set to c}{\@ehc}%
\def\m@mscappos{c}%
\fi
\fi
\fi}
\setsidecappos{c}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecapmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapmarg}
% \cs{sidecapmargin}\marg{margin}, where \meta{marg} is one of
% \texttt{left}, \texttt{right}, \texttt{inner}, or \texttt{outer},
% controls the margin where the caption will be put. The result
% is saved as \cs{m@mscapmarg} as a number. The default
% is \texttt{left}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidecapmargin}[1]{%
\def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{left}%
\ifx\@tempb\@tempa
\def\m@mscapmarg{0}% left
\else
\def\@tempb{right}%
\ifx\@tempb\@tempa
\def\m@mscapmarg{1}% right
\else
\def\@tempb{outer}%
\ifx\@tempb\@tempa
\def\m@mscapmarg{2}% outer
\else
\def\@tempb{inner}%
\ifx\@tempb\@tempa
\def\m@mscapmarg{3}% inner
\else
\@memerror{Unrecognized argument for \string\sidecapmargin}%
{\@ehc}%
\def\m@mscapmarg{-1}% error
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi}
\sidecapmargin{left}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifscapmargleft}
% \begin{macro}{\scapmarglefttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\scapmargleftfalse}
% \cs{ifscapmargleft} is TRUE the caption should be in the left hand margin,
% otherwise in the right hand margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifscapmargleft
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecapfloatwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapmainwidth}
% \cs{sidecapfloatwidth} is the width of the box holding the float.
% Note that this is a macro,
% not a length, so must be changed using \cs{renewcommand*}.
% The default is \cs{linewidth}. Later, \cs{m@mscapmainwidth} will be set
% to the current length specification from \cs{sidecapfloatwidth}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\sidecapfloatwidth{\linewidth}
\newdimen\m@mscapmainwidth
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscaplkern}
% \begin{macro}{\setm@mscaplkern}
% \cs{setm@mscaplkern} is a utility macro to calculate the kern
% (\cs{m@mscaplkern}) required when the caption is in the left margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\m@mscaplkern
\newcommand*{\setm@mscaplkern}{%
\m@mscaplkern=\sidecapwidth
\advance\m@mscaplkern \sidecapsep
\advance\m@mscaplkern \m@mscapmainwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecapstyle}
% \cs{sidecapstyle} is called just before the caption is set. It can
% be redefined to set different caption style parameters. The default
% is raggedleft for left margin captions and raggedright for right
% margin captions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidecapstyle}{%
%%% \captionnamefont{\bfseries}%
\ifscapmargleft
\captionstyle{\raggedleft}%
\else
\captionstyle{\raggedright}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecaption}
% The whole shebang is in the \texttt{sidecaption} environment but
% it is more convenient to specify this via macros rather than
% directly as an environment.
%
% \cs{sidecaption}\oarg{fortoc}\marg{title}\oarg{label} is what it
% looks like to the user, but internally further macros handle
% all the arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidecaption}{%
\@ifnextchar [{\@sidecaption}{\@sidecaption[]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sidecaption}
% \cs{@sidecaption}\oarg{fortoc}\marg{title} grabs the first
% two arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@sidecaption[#1]#2{%
\@ifnextchar [{\@@sidecaption{#1}{#2}}{\@@sidecaption{#1}{#2}[]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@scap@beforehook}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@scap@afterhook}
% Two hooks into the 'scap' internals. By default they do nothing, but
% can be used make say sidecaption align towards the spine in twosided
% documents. This is done by redefining \emph{before} to
% \verb+\checkoddpage\ifoddpage\else\raggedleft\fi+ and redefining
% \emph{after} to \verb+\par+. Note that since 'sidecontcaption',
% 'sidenamedlegend' and 'sidelegend' all share the same basic
% internals redefining the two hooks will affect those as well. The
% user might want to create their own special environment, say, like this:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \makeatletter
% \newenvironment{sidecaption*}{
% \renewcommand\@mem@scap@beforehook{\checkoddpage\ifoddpage\else\raggedleft\fi}
% \renewcommand\@mem@scap@afterhook{\par}
% \begin{sidecaption}}
% {\end{sidecaption}}
% \makeatother
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/21}{Added 'before' and 'after' hooks
% to shared sidecaption internals}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\@mem@scap@beforehook{}
\newcommand\@mem@scap@afterhook{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@sidecaption}
% \cs{@@sidecaption}\marg{fortoc}\marg{title}\oarg{label} is the
% last macro in the chain and handles all three arguments.
% This does all the work for \verb?\begin{sidecaption}?
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscap@fortoc}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscap@forcap}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscaplabel}
% First, save all the arguments as macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@sidecaption#1#2[#3]{%
\ifx\@empty#1\@empty
\def\m@mscap@fortoc{#2}%
\else
\def\m@mscap@fortoc{#1}%
\fi
\def\m@mscap@forcap{#2}%
\ifx\@empty#3\@empty
\def\m@mscaplabel{}%
\else
\def\m@mscaplabel{\@bsphack\label{#3}\@esphack}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Set the float width, calculate the left margin kern, and start
% a \texttt{minipage} to hold the float, saving it in box
% \cs{m@mscap@fbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@mscapstart@fbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapstart@fbox}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapend@fbox}
% \cs{m@mscapstart@fbox} is the macro that actually sets the float width,
% calculates the left margin kern, and starts the float's \texttt{minipage}.
% The macro \cs{m@mscapend@fbox} ends the box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mscapstart@fbox}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/21}{Added \cs{@mem@scap@beforehook}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@mem@scap@beforehook%
\setlength{\m@mscapmainwidth}{\sidecapfloatwidth}%
\setm@mscaplkern
\begin{lrbox}{\m@mscap@fbox}%
\begin{minipage}[c]{\m@mscapmainwidth}}
\newcommand*{\m@mscapend@fbox}{%
\end{minipage}%
\end{lrbox}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endsidecaption}
% \cs{endsidecaption} does the work for \verb?\end{sidecaption}?.
%
% Finish the float minipage, then increment the caption counter and
% call \cs{label} via \cs{m@mscaplabel}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endsidecaption{%
\m@mscapend@fbox
\refstepcounter\@captype
\m@mscaplabel
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the caption inside a minipage, saving it in box \cs{m@mscap@capbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begin{lrbox}{\m@mscap@capbox}%
\begin{minipage}[c]{\sidecapwidth}%
\sidecapstyle
\@caption\@captype[\m@mscap@fortoc]{\m@mscap@forcap}
\end{minipage}%
\end{lrbox}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Output the float and caption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@mscapopboxes}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapopboxes}
% Having determined how high the caption box must be raised with
% respect to the float box, output the boxes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mscapopboxes}{%
\m@mcalcscapraise
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the float (from box \cs{m@mscap@fbox}) then the caption (from
% box \cs{m@mscap@capbox}) kerning it to the left or right as
% appropriate.
% \begin{macrocode}
\usebox{\m@mscap@fbox}\m@mscapcheckside
\ifscapmargleft%
\rlap{\kern-\m@mscaplkern
\raisebox{\m@mscapraise}{\usebox{\m@mscap@capbox}}}%
\else%
\rlap{\kern\sidecapsep
\raisebox{\m@mscapraise}{\usebox{\m@mscap@capbox}}}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally, make \cs{m@mscapthisside} a no-op.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\m@mscapthisside{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/21}{Added \cs{@mem@scap@afterhook}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@mem@scap@afterhook%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mcalcscapraise}
% Calculate the amount the caption might have to be raised wrt the
% float. This depends on the position: \\
% \texttt{t:} raise by the difference in heights \\
% \texttt{c:} shouldn't have to do anything as the minipages are meant
% to center aligned \\
% \texttt{b:} lower by the difference in depths \\
%
% However, experiments showed that a little bit of tweaking might
% help. The final adjustment, \cs{sidecapraise} is controlled by
% the user.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mcalcscapraise}{%
\def\@tempb{t}%
\ifx\m@mscappos\@tempb
\settoheight{\m@m@tempdima}{\strut\usebox{\m@mscap@capbox}}%
\settoheight{\m@mscapraise}{\usebox{\m@mscap@fbox}}%
\advance\m@mscapraise -\m@m@tempdima
\advance\m@mscapraise 0.5ex
\else
\def\@tempb{b}%
\ifx\m@mscappos\@tempb
\settodepth{\m@m@tempdima}{\usebox{\m@mscap@fbox}}%
\settodepth{\m@mscapraise}{\strut\usebox{\m@mscap@capbox}}%
\advance\m@mscapraise -\m@m@tempdima
\else
\m@mscapraise=\z@
\advance\m@mscapraise 0.25ex
\fi
\fi
\advance\m@mscapraise \sidecapraise}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapcheckside}
% This macro determines whether the caption should be set in the
% left or right margin. In twocolumn documents the caption for a single
% column float is always set in the adjacent margin. Starred floats
% are treated as regular floats as in a onecolumn document.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mscapcheckside}{%
\if@twocolumn
\ifdim\hsize=\textwidth% float*
\m@mscapcheckregside
\else
\if@firstcolumn
\scapmarglefttrue
\else
\scapmargleftfalse
\fi
\fi
\else
\m@mscapcheckregside
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally apply any user's override.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@mscapthisside}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapcheckregside}
% This performs the margin calculation for onecolumn documents.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mscapcheckregside}{%
\if@twoside
\checkoddpage
\ifnum\m@mscapmarg<\@ne% % left
\scapmarglefttrue
\else
\ifnum\m@mscapmarg=\@ne% % right
\scapmargleftfalse
\else
\ifnum\m@mscapmarg=\tw@% % outer
\scapmarglefttrue
\ifoddpage
\scapmargleftfalse
\fi
\else% % inner
\scapmargleftfalse
\ifoddpage
\scapmarglefttrue
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
\else% oneside
\scapmarglefttrue
\ifnum\m@mscapmarg>\@ne
\ifnum\m@mscapmarg<\thr@@
\scapmargleftfalse
\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\overridescapmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mscapthisside}
% User macro to override the calculated caption margin. Call as either:\\
% \verb?\overridescapmargin{left}? or \verb?\overridescapmargin{right}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\overridescapmargin}[1]{%
\def\@tempb{#1}\def\@tempa{left}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\def\m@mscapthisside{\scapmarglefttrue}%
\else
\def\@tempa{right}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\def\m@mscapthisside{\scapmargleftfalse}%
\else
\@memerror{Argument to \string\overridescapmargin\space neither
left nor right}{\@ehc}%
\def\m@mscapthisside{}%
\fi
\fi}
\newcommand*{\m@mscapthisside}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for the other kinds of captions.
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecontcaption}
% \cs{sidecontcaption}\marg{title}\oarg{label} is for
% a continuation sidecaption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidecontcaption}{%
\@sidecontcaption}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sidecontcaption}
% \cs{@sidecontcaption}\marg{title} grabs the first
% argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@sidecontcaption#1{%
\@ifnextchar [{\@@sidecontcaption{#1}}{\@@sidecontcaption{#1}[]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@sidecontcaption}
% \cs{@@sidecontcaption}\marg{title}\oarg{label} is the
% last macro in the chain and handles all two arguments.
% This does all the work for \verb?\begin{sidecontcaption}?
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@sidecontcaption#1[#2]{%
\def\m@mscap@forcap{#1}%
\ifx\@empty#2\@empty
\def\m@mscaplabel{}%
\else
\def\m@mscaplabel{\@bsphack\label{#2}\@esphack}%
\fi
\m@mscapstart@fbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endsidecontcaption}
% \cs{endsidecontcaption} does the work for \verb?\end{sidecontcaption}?.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endsidecontcaption{%
\m@mscapend@fbox
\addtocounter{\@captype}{\m@ne}\refstepcounter\@captype
\m@mscaplabel
\begin{lrbox}{\m@mscap@capbox}%
\begin{minipage}[c]{\sidecapwidth}%
\sidecapstyle
\@contcaption\@captype{\m@mscap@forcap}
\end{minipage}%
\end{lrbox}%
\m@mscapopboxes}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidenamedlegend}
% \begin{macro}{\@sidenamedlegend}
% \cs{sidenamedlegend}\oarg{fortoc}\marg{title} is for
% a namedlegend sidecaption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidenamedlegend}{%
\@ifnextchar [{\@sidenamedlegend}{\@sidenamedlegend[]}}
\def\@sidenamedlegend[#1]#2{%
\@@sidenamedlegend{#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@sidenamedlegend}
% \cs{@@sidenamedlegend}\marg{fortoc}\marg{title} is the
% last macro in the chain and handles all arguments.
% This does all the work for \verb?\begin{sidenamedlegend}?
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@sidenamedlegend#1#2{%
\ifx\@empty#1\@empty
\def\m@mscap@fortoc{#2}%
\else
\def\m@mscap@fortoc{#1}%
\fi
\def\m@mscap@forcap{#2}%
\def\m@mscaplabel{}%
\m@mscapstart@fbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endsidenamedlegend}
% \cs{endsidenamedlegend} does the work for \verb?\end{sidenamedlegend}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endsidenamedlegend{%
\m@mscapend@fbox
\begin{lrbox}{\m@mscap@capbox}%
\begin{minipage}[c]{\sidecapwidth}%
\sidecapstyle
\@legend\@captype[\m@mscap@fortoc]{\m@mscap@forcap}
\end{minipage}%
\end{lrbox}%
\m@mscapopboxes}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidelegend}
% \cs{sidelegend}\marg{title} is for
% a legend sidecaption.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidelegend}{%
\@@sidelegend}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@sidelegend}
% \cs{@@sidelegend}\marg{title} is the
% last macro in the chain and handles all arguments.
% This does all the work for \verb?\begin{sidelegend}?
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@sidelegend#1{%
\def\m@mscap@forcap{#1}%
\m@mscapstart@fbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endsidelegend}
% \cs{endsidelegend} does the work for \verb?\end{sidelegend}?.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endsidelegend{%
\m@mscapend@fbox
\begin{lrbox}{\m@mscap@capbox}%
\begin{minipage}[c]{\sidecapwidth}%
\sidecapstyle
\legend{\m@mscap@forcap}
\end{minipage}%
\end{lrbox}%
\m@mscapopboxes}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Epigraphs}
%
% This code comes from the \Lpack{epigraph} package~\cite{EPIGRAPH}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforeepigraphskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterepigraphskip}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphrule}
% The several length commands, which can be changed by the user with
% \cs{setlength}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforeepigraphskip}
\setlength{\beforeepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
\newlength{\afterepigraphskip}
\setlength{\afterepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
\newlength{\epigraphwidth}
\setlength{\epigraphwidth}{.4\textwidth}
\newlength{\epigraphrule}
\setlength{\epigraphrule}{.4\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsize}
% The size of the font to be used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphsize}{\small}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphflush}
% \begin{macro}{\textflush}
% \begin{macro}{\sourceflush}
% The three commands to position epigraphs in the textblock and to position
% the components of the epigraph.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphflush}{flushright}
\newcommand{\textflush}{flushleft}
\newcommand{\sourceflush}{flushright}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphfontsize}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphposition}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphtextposition}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsourceposition}
% These are declarative forms of the above. It's a bit late now, but
% the previous macros should have been internal.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added some declarations for epigraphs.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphfontsize}[1]{\def\epigraphsize{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphposition}[1]{\long\def\epigraphflush{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphtextposition}[1]{\def\textflush{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphsourceposition}[1]{\def\sourceflush{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epirule}
% The internal command to draw a rule between text and source.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epirule}{\rule[.5ex]{\epigraphwidth}{\epigraphrule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epitext}
% The internal command to typeset the \meta{text}. Put it into a minipage of the
% right size and typeset per \cs{textflush}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{par} to \cs{@epitext} and
% \cs{@episource} (mempatch v4.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epitext}[1]{%
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\begin{\textflush} #1\par
% \end{macrocode}
% Draw a rule if it will be visible, otherwise add some extra vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\epigraphrule>\z@ \@epirule \else \vspace*{1ex} \fi
\end{\textflush}\end{minipage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@episource}
% The internal command for typesetting the \meta{source}, which is put
% into a minipage and typeset according to \cs{sourceflush}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@episource}[1]{%
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\begin{\sourceflush} #1\par
\end{\sourceflush}\end{minipage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraph}
% Having got the preliminaries out of the way, here's the user command
% for a single epigraph. This is set in a minipage to prevent breaking
% across a page. Position it according to \cs{epigraphflush}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraph}[2]{\vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}
{\epigraphsize\begin{\epigraphflush}\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
\end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
\vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\qitem}
% \begin{macro}{\qitemlabel}
% \cs{qitem} is the epigraph list version of \cs{item}.
% Set everything inside a minipage.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\qitem}[2]{{%
\raggedright\item \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
\end{minipage}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{qitemlabel} is needed for a list as well. It is not going to
% typeset anything.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\qitemlabel}[1]{\hfill}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{epigraphs}
% Now for the epigraph list. This is defined in terms of a \Lenv{list}
% environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{epigraphs}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Do the vertical space, set the font size, position according to
% \cs{epigraphflush}, and put everything into a minipage.
% \begin{macrocode}
\vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}\begin{\epigraphflush}
\epigraphsize
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
\list{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Make the list just fit the minipage (i.e., no indents).
% \begin{macrocode}
{\itemindent\z@ \labelwidth\z@ \labelsep\z@
\leftmargin\z@ \rightmargin\z@
\let\makelabel\qitemlabel}}%
{\endlist\end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
\vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Epigraphs before a chapter title}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epichapapp}
% \begin{macro}{\dropchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\undodrop}
% Commands to drop and restore positions of chapter titles. Dropping is
% accomplished by inserting vertical space before the \cs{@chapapp} command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\dropchapter}[1]{%
\let\@epichapapp\@chapapp
\renewcommand{\@chapapp}{\vspace*{#1}\@epichapapp}}
\newcommand{\undodrop}{\let\@chapapp\@epichapapp}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Placing an epigraph before a chapter title uses the scheme outlined
% by Piet van Oostrum~\cite{FANCYHDR}. This is to put a zero sized
% picture into the page header.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@epirhs}
% \begin{macro}{\if@epicenter}
% Two booleans for testing whether an epigraph is to be at the RH margin,
% centered, or at the LH margin. The default is RH margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@epirhs \@epirhstrue
\newif\if@epicenter \@epicentertrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epipos}
% This routine sets the \cs{if@epi...} booleans according to the value of
% \cs{epigraphflush}. If \cs{epigraphflush} is neither \texttt{center} nor
% \texttt{flushleft}
% then it defaults to \texttt{flushright}. We have to use this to be upward
% compatible with \cs{epigraphflush} being set by the user with \cs{renewcommand}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epipos}{
\long\def\@ept{flushleft}
\ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
\@epirhsfalse \@epicenterfalse
\else
\long\def\@ept{center}
\ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
\@epirhsfalse \@epicentertrue
\else
\@epirhstrue \@epicenterfalse
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphhead}
% \cs{epigraphhead}\oarg{distance}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} at
% \meta{distance} (a number, not a length) below the header at the
% page position specified by \cs{epigraphflush}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphhead}[2][95]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% We have to use \cs{def} instead of the normal \LaTeX{} definition commands
% as we will keep on
% (re)defining things. For reasons that are not fully clear to me \LaTeX{}
% doesn't seem to like me using a \cs{savebox} for storing the epigraph text,
% so I'll use a command instead.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@epitemp{\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}#2\end{minipage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Define an \texttt{epigraph} page style.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@epigraph{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
% \end{macrocode}
% There are three possible definitions for \cs{@oddhead} depending on the
% value of \cs{epigraphflush}. We call \cs{@epipos} to decide which one to do.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@epipos
\if@epirhs
\def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
\put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}
\end{picture}}
\else
\if@epicenter
\def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
\put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}
\end{picture}\hfil}
\else
\def\@oddhead{\begin{picture}(0,0)
\put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}
\end{picture}\hfil}
\fi
\fi
\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
\def\@oddfoot{\reset@font\hfil\thepage\hfil}
\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
% \end{macrocode}
% Make \texttt{epigraph} be the page style for this page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\thispagestyle{epigraph}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The above produces a \texttt{plain} pagestyle with the epigraph. Life is
% more complex if someone wants a fancy style with the epigraph. They
% will have to do some work, though.
%
% \begin{macro}{\the@epigraph}
% \begin{macro}{\@epidrop}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphforheader}
% \cs{the@pigraph} is a macro to store the contents of an epigraph, and \cs{@pidrop}
% stores the \meta{distance} number.
% \cs{epigraphforheader}\oarg{distance}\marg{text} defines the internal macros
% appropriately.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{the@epigraph}, \cs{@epidrop}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphforheader}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\the@epigraph}{}
\newcommand{\@epidrop}{95}
\newcommand{\epigraphforheader}[2][95]{%
\def\@epidrop{#1}\long\def\the@epigraph{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphpicture}
% \cs{epigraphpicture} puts \cs{the@epigraph} into a zero-sized picture at location
% \verb?(0,-\@epidrop)?. This can then be used as part of a fancy chapter header.
% The coding is similar to \cs{epigraphhead}.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphpicture}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphpicture}{%
\def\@epitemp{%
\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\the@epigraph\end{minipage}}%
\@epipos
\if@epirhs
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}%
\end{picture}%
\else
\if@epicenter
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}%
\end{picture}%
\else
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}%
\end{picture}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{The deprecated font commands}
%
% The class does not support the old font changing commands unless the
% \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memoldfonterr}
% \begin{macro}{\@memoldfontwarn}
% Macros for old font class error and warning. E.g., \\
% \verb?\@memoldfonterr{\tt}{\ttfamily}{\texttt}?
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{@memoldfonterr} and \cs{@memoldfontwarn}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Fiddled with the braces in \cs{@memoldfontwarn} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memoldfonterr}[3]{%
\@memerror{Font command \protect#1\space is not supported}{%
Use \protect#2, or \protect#3{...}, or the oldfontcommands option}}
\newcommand*{\@memoldfontwarn}[3]{%
\@memwarn{The \protect#1\space font command is deprecated.
\MessageBreak Use \protect#2{...} or {\protect#3... } instead}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Just give a single warning when an old font command is used following the
% \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Just issue a single warning for an old font
% (from patch v1.9)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@rmwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\rm}
% The old command for roman font.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{rm}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{More efficient coding of all the old font commands}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@rmwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\rm}{\textrm}{\rmfamily}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\@mem@rmwarn\gdef\@mem@rmwarn{}%
\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
\else
\def\rm{\@memoldfonterr{\rm}{\textrm}{\rmfamily}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@sfwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\sf}
% The old sans font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sf}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@sfwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sf}{\textsf}{\sffamily}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\@mem@sfwarn\gdef\@mem@sfwarn{}%
\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
\else
\def\sf{\@memoldfonterr{\sf}{\textsf}{\sffamily}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@ttwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\tt}
% The old typewriter font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{tt}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@ttwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\tt}{\texttt}{\ttfamily}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\@mem@ttwarn\gdef\@mem@ttwarn{}%
\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
\else
\def\tt{\@memoldfonterr{\tt}{\texttt}{\ttfamily}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@bfwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\bf}
% The old bold font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{bf}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@bfwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\bf}{\textbf}{\bfseries}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\@mem@bfwarn\gdef\@mem@bfwarn{}%
\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
\else
\def\bf{\@memoldfonterr{\bf}{\textbf}{\bfseries}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@itwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\it}
% The old italic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{it}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@itwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\it}{\textit}{\itshape}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\@mem@itwarn\gdef\@mem@itwarn{}%
\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
\else
\def\it{\@memoldfonterr{\it}{\textit}{\itshape}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@slwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\sl}
% The old slanted font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sl}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@slwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sl}{\textsl}{\slshape}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\@mem@slwarn\gdef\@mem@slwarn{}%
\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
\else
\def\sl{\@memoldfonterr{\sl}{\textsl}{\slshape}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@scwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\sc}
% The old small caps font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sc}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@scwarn{\@memoldfontwarn{\sc}{\textsc}{\scshape}}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\@mem@scwarn\gdef\@mem@scwarn{}%
\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
\else
\def\sc{\@memoldfonterr{\sc}{\textsc}{\scshape}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@calwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\cal}
% The old calligraphic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{cal}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@calwarn{%
\@memwarn{The \protect\cal\space font command is deprecated.
\MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathcal\space instead}}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@mem@calwarn\gdef\@mem@calwarn{}%
\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
\else
\def\cal{%
\@memerror{Font command \protect\cal\space is not supported}{%
Use \protect\mathcal, or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@mitwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\mit}
% The old math italic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{mit}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
\def\@mem@mitwarn{%
\@memwarn{The \protect\mit\space font command is deprecated.
\MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathnormal\space instead}}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@mem@mitwarn\gdef\@mem@mitwarn{}%
\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
\else
\def\mit{%
\@memerror{Font command \protect\mit\space is not supported}{%
Use \protect\mathnormal, or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\em}
% \begin{macro}{\eminnershape}
% \begin{macro}{\emph}
% The old emphasis font command (the original \cs{em} is defined in the
% kernel file \file{ltfssini.dtx}, coded here as \cs{@m@m@m}).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Redid coding for \cs{emph} and \cs{em}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Dont' deprecate \cs{em} and deleted \cs{@mem@emwarn} (mempatch v3.0)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Completely redid \cs{em} and \cs{emph}, matching latest fixltx2e package (mempatch v3.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\em}{%
\@nomath\em
\ifdim\fontdimen\@ne\font > \z@
\eminnershape
\else
\itshape
\fi}
\providecommand{\eminnershape}{\upshape}
\DeclareTextFontCommand{\emph}{\em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Cross Referencing} \label{sec:xref}
%
% \subsection{Label referencing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fref}
% \begin{macro}{\tref}
% \begin{macro}{\pref}
% These are named references to labeled figures, tables and pages.
% I find these
% useful to ensure consistency throughout the document --- I don't have
% to remember whether it is `see Figure ...' or `figure' or `Fig.' or \ldots.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fref}[1]{\figurerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand*{\tref}[1]{\tablerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand*{\pref}[1]{\pagerefname~\pageref{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Aref}
% \begin{macro}{\Bref}
% \begin{macro}{\Pref}
% \begin{macro}{\Cref}
% \begin{macro}{\Sref}
% These are named references to labeled Part, Chapter and Sectional
% divisions.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{Pref}, \cs{Cref} and \cs{Sref}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{Bref} (mempatch v4.9+)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/05/17}{Added \cs{Aref}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Aref}[1]{\appendixrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand*{\Bref}[1]{\bookrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand*{\Pref}[1]{\partrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand*{\Cref}[1]{\chapterrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand*{\Sref}[1]{\sectionrefname\ref{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Title referencing}
%
% This is based on DA's \Lpack{titleref} package~\cite{TITLEREF}.
% The following
% remarks are taken from that package.
%
%
% Titles for numbered sectioning units and for floats with captions are
% the same as the respective TOC, LOF, or LOT entry (even when no TOC is
% printed). When a short title is provided (\verb?\section[short]{long}?)
% it will be used for the \cs{titleref}. This is especially useful for
% figure captions. Unnumbered sections take their title reference from
% the printed title. Beware! This turns the title into a moving argument
% when it normally is not, and will cause weird errors if there are
% `fragile' commands present.
%
% Enumerated lists do not have titles and simply inherit the title of
% their section.
%
% The format of the title reference is controlled by the command
% \cs{theTitleReference}, which can be redefined with \cs{renewcommand}.
% It takes two parameters: the number and the title. The number is
% just the regular \cs{ref} and it is WRONG in unnumbered sections.
% Beware! The default definition is the unadorned title. You could
% do, for example, \\
% \verb?\renewcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#1\ \emph{#2}}?.
%
% The title of the current section is also available without \cs{label}:
% Use the command \cs{currenttitle} to generate a \cs{titleref} to the current
% section. If you have redefined \cs{theTitleReference} to print the number
% with the title, be aware that the two may not correspond: In a numbered
% list the number will show the current item but the title will show the
% current section, but in an unnumbered section the number will show
% some previous section number.
%
% The big problem with the \verb?[usetoc]? method is that \cs{titleref} will
% not refer to a \cs{label} which was given in the title or caption itself;
% the label must be placed after the sectioning command or the caption.
% If you make a title-reference to a label given in a title, you will get
% a warning message.
%
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added title referencing (from patch v1.4)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifheadnameref}
% \begin{macro}{\headnameref}
% \begin{macro}{\tocnameref}
% \cs{ifheadnameref}: FALSE use ToC entry, TRUE use header entry
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{headnameref} and \cs{tocnameref}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifheadnameref
\newcommand*{\headnameref}{\headnamereftrue}
\newcommand*{\tocnameref}{\headnamereffalse}
\tocnameref
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theTitleReference}
% \cs{theTitleReference}\marg{num}\marg{title} is the style for typesetting
% a referenced (number and) title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\label}
% This redefinition of \cs{label} is intended to work with other redirections
% of \cs{label}, if they record extra information in a similar way.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@mem@old@label\label
\def\label#1{\@bsphack\begingroup
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{\protect\M@TitleReference
{\@currentlabel}{\M@currentTitle}}%
\@mem@old@label{#1}%
\endgroup \@esphack}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@@gettitle}
% \cs{@mem@@gettitle}\marg{title} grabs a title text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@mem@@gettitle#1{\begingroup \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
\let\label\@mem@nestwarn
\let\index\@gobble \let\glossary\@gobble
\let\markboth\@gobbletwo \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
\let\markright\@gobble
\edef\@tempa{\noexpand\def\noexpand\M@currentTitle{#1}}%
\expandafter\endgroup\@tempa}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@nestwarn}
% \begin{macro}{\M@TitleReference}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@mem@nestwarn\@gobble
\let\M@TitleReference\@firstoftwo
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\titleref}
% \begin{macro}{\currenttitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@titleref}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@titlerefnolink}
% \cs{titleref}\marg{key} prints the title corresponding to
% \verb?\label{key}?. \cs{currenttitle} prints the latest title.
% \cs{titleref} extended to support a starred version that will not
% provide hyperlinks when using \Lpack{hyperref}. The
% \Lpack{hyperref} definition of \cs{@mem@titlerefnolink} is found
% in \Lpack{memhfixc}.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/18}{Extended \cs{titleref}, suggestion
% on ctt by martin@helios.de}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\@mem@titleref[1]{\begingroup
\let\numberline\@gobble
\let\M@TitleReference\@mem@theTR % interrupt recursion of \ref
\ref{#1}\endgroup}
\let\@mem@titlerefnolink\@mem@titleref
\DeclareRobustCommand\titleref{\@ifstar{\@mem@titlerefnolink}{\@mem@titleref}}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\currenttitle}{\begingroup
\let\numberline\@gobble
\theTitleReference\@currentlabel\M@currentTitle\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{verbatim}
% % \DeclareRobustCommand\@mem@nestwarn[1]{\@memwarn%
% % {Label \string"#1\string" was put in a title,\MessageBreak
% % so the \noexpand\titleref is incorrect}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macro}{\M@currentTitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\M@currentTitle\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@theTR}
% proper definition:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@mem@theTR{\let\M@TitleReference\@firstoftwo \theTitleReference}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\namerefon}
% \begin{macro}{\namerefoff}
% Named references has turned some arguments (e.g., \verb?\legend{text}?) into
% moving ones (Sven.Hartrumpf@FernUni-Hagen.de reported a problem but
% not a cause, March 2003). Not everyone needs named references.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\namerefon}{\let\M@gettitle\@mem@@gettitle}
\newcommand*{\namerefoff}{\let\M@gettitle\@gobble}
\namerefon
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Table of Contents, etc.}
%
% A \cs{section} command writes a
% \verb?\contentsline{section}?\marg{title}\marg{page} command
% on the \file{.toc} file, where \meta{title} contains the
% contents of the entry and \meta{page} is the page number. If
% sections are being numbered, then \meta{title} will be of the
% form \cs{numberline}\marg{num}\marg{heading} where
% \meta{num} is the number produced by \cs{thesection}. Other
% sectioning commands work similarly.
%
% A \cs{caption} command in a `figure' environment writes \\
% \verb?\contentsline{figure}{?\cs{numberline}\marg{num}\marg{caption}\verb?}?\marg{page} \\
% on the \file{.lof} file, where \meta{num} is the number produced
% by \cs{thefigure} and \meta{caption} is the figure caption. It
% works similarly for a `table' environment.
%
% The command \cs{contentsline}\marg{name} expands to
% \cs{l@}\meta{name}. So, to specify the table of contents, we must
% define \cs{l@chapter}, \cs{l@section}, \cs{l@subsection}, \ldots ; to
% specify the list of figures, we must define \cs{l@figure}; and so
% on. Most of these can be defined with the \cs{@dottedtocline}
% command, which works as follows. \\
% \cs{@dottedtocline}\marg{level}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth}\marg{title}\marg{page}
%
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{level}] An entry is produced only if\meta{level}
% $<=$ value of the \Lcount{tocdepth} counter. Note,
% \cs{chapter} is level 0, \cs{section} is level 1, etc.
% \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation from the outer left margin
% of the start of the contents line.
% \item[\meta{numwidth}] The width of a box in which the section
% number is to go, if \meta{title} includes a \cs{numberline}
% command.
% \end{description}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
% This command uses the following three parameters, which are set
% with a \cs{newcommand} (so em's can be used to make them depend upon
% the font).
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @pnumwidth}] The width of a box in which the
% page number is put.
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @tocrmarg}] The right margin for multiple
% line entries. One wants \cs{@tocrmarg} $\ge$ \cs{@pnumwidth}
% \item[\texttt{\bslash @dotsep}] Separation between dots, in mu
% units. Should be defined as a number like 2 or 1.7
% \end{description}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pnumwidth}{1.55em}
\newcommand{\@tocrmarg} {2.55em}
\newcommand{\@dotsep}{4.5}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocentryskip}
% \begin{macro}{\tocbaseline}
% \begin{macro}{\tocskip}
% We define two lengths and a utility command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\tocentryskip} \setlength{\tocentryskip}{1em}
\newlength{\tocbaseline} \setlength{\tocbaseline}{20pt}
\newcommand{\tocskip}[1]{%
\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{New List of \ldots}
%
% It is apparent that users want to do at least two things that are not
% readily provided by the standard classes: (a) change the appearance
% of the Table of Contents, etc., headings, and (b) create new List of\ldots.
% This class provides a means of creating new Lists whose headings are
% parameterized, thereby killing two birds with one stone.
%
% In the standard classes the tables of contents, figures etc. are always
% set in single-column style. In this class you can choose one- or two-column
% ToCs, etc.
% The titles are added to the ToC, unless the starred versions of the
% commands are used.
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/03/16}{Enabled two-column ToC, etc}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ensureonecol}
% \begin{macro}{\restorefromonecol}
% These two
% macros cooperate to switch from two-columns to one column, and back again.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/24}{Deleted \cs{ensuretwocol} and
% \cs{restorefromtwocol} as they were unused. BUT later reinstated them.}
% \begin{macro}{\onecoltocetc}
% \begin{macro}{\twocoltocetc}
% \begin{macro}{\doccoltocetc}
% These macros define \cs{ensureonecol} and \cs{restorefromonecol} such that
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \cs{onecoltocetc} ToCs, etc., will be set in one column (the default)
% \item \cs{twocoltocetc} ToCs, etc., will be set in two columns
% \item \cs{doccoltocetc} ToCs, etc., will be set in column(s) corresponding
% to the document's (onecolumn/twocolumn) option.
% \end{itemize}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/03/16}{Added \cs{onecoltocetc}, \cs{twocoltocetc}
% and \cs{doccoltocetc}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\onecoltocetc}{%
\def\ensureonecol{%
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
\else
\@restonecolfalse
\fi}%
\def\restorefromonecol{\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}}
\newcommand*{\twocoltocetc}{%
\def\ensureonecol{%
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecoltrue
\else
\@restonecolfalse\twocolumn
\fi}%
\def\restorefromonecol{\if@restonecol\else\onecolumn\fi}}
\newcommand*{\doccoltocetc}{%
\let\ensureonecol\relax
\let\restorefromonecol\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the default
% \begin{macrocode}
\onecoltocetc
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftparskip}
% The \cs{parskip} local to the ToC, etc, is set to the length \cs{cftparskip}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftparskip}
\setlength{\cftparskip}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newlistof}
% \cs{newlistof}\marg{listofcmmd}\marg{ext}\marg{listofname}
% creates the command \cs{listofcmmd} to typeset a new List of, where the
% external file has the extension \file{.ext} and the heading title is
% \meta{listofname}. The code for this is a heavily modified part
% of the \Lpack{tocloft} package.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newlistof}[3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% In the following, \texttt{X} stands for the value of \meta{listofcmmd} and
% \texttt{Z} stands for the value of \meta{ext}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@Z}
% \begin{macro}{\Zdepth}
% The file extension and listing depth, which is set to level~1.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{ext@#2}{#2}
\@ifundefined{c@#2depth}{\newcounter{#2depth}}{}
\setcounter{#2depth}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Zmark}
% The heading marks for the listing.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@mkboth} to \cs{markboth} in \cs{Zmark}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#2mark}{\markboth{#3}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\X}
% Typeset the listing title and entries,
% with both a normal and starred version.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/08/08}{changed such that it only use one
% internal macro}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/08/09}{chose a better name for the
% internal macro}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#1}{\@ifstar{\@nameuse{mem@#1}{01}}{\@nameuse{mem@#1}{00}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@X}
% \begin{macro}{\cftZbeforelisthook}
% \begin{macro}{\cftZafterlisthook}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/08/08}{introduced \cs{mem@X} to replace
% \cs{@starZ} and \cs{@plainZ}}
% In earlier version of the class, we used two macros \cs{@starZ}
% and \cs{@plainZ}, to reduce code we now only use one, the argument
% of it takes care of differentiating between the stuff that are
% different. Two hooks is added just before and after importing the
% list file contents.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/14}{added the before and after hooks}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{cft#2beforelisthook}{}%
\@namedef{cft#2afterlisthook}{}%
\@namedef{mem@#1}##1{%
\ensureonecol
\par
\begingroup
\@nameuse{@#2maketitle}
\if##1
\ifmem@em@starred@listof\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#3}
\fi
\fi
\parskip\cftparskip
\@nameuse{cft#2beforelisthook}%
\@starttoc{#2}%
\@nameuse{cft#2afterlisthook}%
\endgroup
\restorefromonecol}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@Zmaketitle}
% This macro typesets the title.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} to \cs{@Zmaketitle}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Slight changes to \cs{@Zmaketitle}
% (mempatch v4.6)}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/01}{Made sure \cs{parskip} is zero in the
% title, otherwise a non-zero \cs{parskip} might cause it to be placed
% incorrectly}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{@#2maketitle}{%
\@nameuse{#2headstart}
{\parindent\z@
\parskip\z@
%%%% \parskip\cftparskip
\interlinepenalty\@M
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added printZnonum to \cs{newlistof}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{print#2nonum}%
\@nameuse{print#2title}{#3}%
\@nameuse{#2mark}%
\thispagestyle{chapter}%
\@nameuse{after#2title}
}
\@afterheading}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Zheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\afterZtitle}
% The macros \cs{Zheadstart} and \cs{afterZtitle}
% control what goes before and after the title. They
% default to the corresponding macros for chapters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{#2headstart}{\chapterheadstart}
\@namedef{after#2title}{\afterchaptertitle}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printZnonum}
% This typesets something before the title and defaults
% to \cs{printchapternonum}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} macro}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{print#2nonum}{\printchapternonum}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printZtitle}
% The title is typeset by the macro \cs{printZtitle}\marg{title}
% which defaults to \cs{printchaptertitle}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{print#2title}##1{\printchaptertitle{##1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% This is the end of the definition of \cs{newlistof}.
% \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newlistof
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmem@em@starred@listof}
% \begin{macro}{\KeepFromToc}
% The class handles the created `new lists' a little different than
% other classes. We automatically add it to the main table of
% contents. This us usually what one wants. If not, one can always
% use the starred version. But in some cases other packages will use
% \cs{tableofcontents} to typeset their own `list of\dots', in which
% case it becomes a little hard to add a star. Therefore we add a
% switch that can be used to emulate the starred list of. After the
% macro \cs{KeepFromToc} the memoir created (non-starred) `list of'
% will behave as their starred counterpart.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/08/08}{LM: added \cs{KeepFromToc}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmem@em@starred@listof
\newcommand\KeepFromToc{\mem@em@starred@listoftrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% Tip: use \cs{KeepFromToc} as an environment, i.e.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begin{KeepFromToc}
% \listoffigures
% \end{KeepFromToc}
% \end{verbatim}
% to locally remove a list from the TOC.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc}
% A list of macro calls \cs{@starttoc} to read the appropriate file. I have
% changed the kernel definition to allow a file to be read multiple times
% by delaying killing the file until the end of the document.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{@starttoc}}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2009/11/23}{Removed infelicity in \cs{@starttoc}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@starttoc}[1]{%
\begingroup\makeatletter
\@input{\jobname.#1}%
\if@filesw
\AtEndDocument{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If a ToC, or other ListOf, is called more than once then we have to stop
% opening yet another, redundant, output file. The check against \cs{relax}
% seems to meet the requirement.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifx\csname tf@#1\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
\immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
\fi
}%
\fi
\@nobreakfalse
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Table of Contents}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
% These macros request that \LaTeX{} produces a table of
% contents. The ToC heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{tableofcontents}{toc}{\contentsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The List of Figures and List of Tables are defined later.
%
%
%
% \subsection{List entries}
%
% Each command in the body of the text that makes an entry in the ToC,
% or LoF or LoT needs an addtional macro to format the entry, as described
% above. Users often want to change the formatting of the entries but
% it is not immediately obvious how to do that.
%
% I have borrowed and modified more of the code from the \Lpack{tocloft}
% package to enable easy creation and modification the formatting of the
% entries.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setpnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\setrmarg}
% User commands for setting \cs{@pnumwidth} and \cs{@tocrmarg}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setpnumwidth}[1]{\renewcommand{\@pnumwidth}{#1}}
\newcommand*{\setrmarg}[1]{\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftdot}
% \begin{macro}{\cftdotfill}
% In the default ToC, a dotted line can be used to provide a leader between
% a title and the page number. The definition of this leader is buried
% in the \cs{@dottedtocline} command. The \cs{cftdotfill}\marg{sep}
% command provides a parameterised version of the leader code, where
% \meta{sep} is the separation between the dots in mu units.
% The symbol used for the `dots' in the leader is given by the value
% of \cs{cftdot}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\cftdot}{.}
\providecommand{\cftdotfill}[1]{%
\leaders\hbox{$\m@th\mkern #1 mu\hbox{\cftdot}\mkern #1 mu$}\hfill}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftnodots}
% \cs{cftdotsep} holds the default dot separation.
% If the kerns in \cs{cftdotfill} are large enough, then no dots will
% be printed. \cs{cftnodots} should be `large enough'.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Changed \cs{cftnodots} from 10,000 to 2,000 for
% 17pt option and pdflatex}
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\cftdotsep}{4.5}
\newcommand{\cftnodots}{2000}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for the trickier bits regarding the typesetting of the ToC
% entries.
%
% A \file{.toc} (also \file{.lof} and \file{.lot}) file consists
% of a list of \\
% \cs{contentsline}\marg{kind}\marg{title}\marg{page} \\
% commands, where \meta{kind} is the kind of heading (e.g., \texttt{part} or
% \texttt{section} or \texttt{figure}), \meta{title} is the title text
% (including the number),
% and \meta{page} is the page number. The entries are inserted into the
% file by calling the \\
% \cs{addcontentsline}\marg{file}\marg{kind}\marg{title} \\
% command, where \meta{file} is the file extension (e.g., \texttt{toc}, \texttt{lot})
% and the other arguments are the same as for the \cs{contentsline}
% command. (Arbitrary stuff may also be put into the file via the
% \cs{addtocontents}\marg{file}\marg{text} command).
% The typesetting of the \cs{contentsline} entries is performed by
% commands of the form \cs{l@kind}. The sectioning and captioning commands
% call \cs{addcontentsline} to insert their titles into the \file{.toc}
% etc., files.
%
% For the purposes at hand it is generally impossible to treat
% the typesetting
% of a title and its number separately, as both are bundled into the
% \meta{title} argument within \cs{contentsline}. They could be handled
% separately if the \cs{contentsline} command was suitably modified. If
% this was done, then the \cs{addtocontentsline} command would also need
% to be changed which would then require the sectioning and captioning
% commands to be modified as well. This is certainly possible, but would
% cause problems if any other package also modified the sectioning or
% captioning commands, and there are several packages which do this.
%
% I provide modified versions of the \cs{l@kind} commands.
% Essentially, my new definitions
% consist of inlined versions of the code for \cs{@dottedtocline}.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftparfillskip}
% The \cs{l@kind} commands modify (locally) the value of \cs{parfillskip}.
% \cs{cftparfillskip} is a copy of the default \theTeXbook{}
% \cs{parfillskip} definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftparfillskip}{\parfillskip=0pt plus1fil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cftn@me}
% Lars Madsen suggested that macros like \cs{cftfigurename} be added
% to entries in the LoF, and so on.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{@cftn@me} (Lars Madsen mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@cftn@me}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
% \begin{macro}{\numberlinehook}
% The purpose of the \cs{numberline}\marg{secnum} command is to typeset
% \meta{secnum} left justified in a box of width \cs{@tempdima}. I redefine
% it to add three additional parameters, namely \cs{@cftbsnum},
% \cs{@cftasnum} and \cs{@cftasnumb}
% (see \file{ltsect.dtx} for the original
% definition).
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added \cs{numberlinehook}}
% We also add a hook, that initially does nothing, but
% might be redefined to record say withs of \meta{secnum}s.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\numberlinehook[1]{}
\renewcommand*{\numberline}[1]{%
\numberlinehook{#1}%
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@cftn@me\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cftbsnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnumb}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@cftbsnum}{}
\newcommand{\@cftasnum}{}
\newcommand{\@cftasnumb}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newlistentry}
% \cs{newlistentry}\oarg{within}\marg{counter}\marg{ext}\marg{level-1}
% creates a set of commands for typesetting a new kind of entry in a List of.
% \meta{counter} is the name of the counter for the entry and must be
% the same as the name
% of the entry (e.g., \texttt{subsection}). The optional \meta{within} is the
% name of a counter within which \texttt{counter} is defined. The file extension
% for the List of is \meta{ext} and \meta{level-1} is one less than the
% level of the entry in the List of.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{cftXname} to \cs{newlistentry}
% (mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/17}{Added bidi support to \cs{newlistentry}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newlistentry}[4][\@empty]{%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% In the following, \texttt{X} is used as the value of \meta{counter} and
% \texttt{Z} as the value of \meta{ext}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
% \begin{macro}{\theX}
% Check if \meta{within} and \meta{counter} have been defined. It is
% an error if \meta{within} has not been defined. \meta{counter}
% will be created if it has not been previously defined.
% Set the default counter values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{c@#2}{% check & set the counter
\ifx \@empty#1\relax
\newcounter{#2}
\else
\newcounter{#2}[#1]%
\expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
\fi}{}
\setcounter{#2}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% That finishes off the error checking. No matter what the result, the
% rest of the new commands are defined.
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@X}
% \cs{l@X}\marg{title}\marg{page} typesets the entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{l@#2}##1##2{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Only typeset if the \cs{Zdepth} is greater than \meta{level-1}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \@nameuse{c@#3depth} > #4\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Add some vertical space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\vskip \@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}
% \end{macrocode}
% Start a group to keep paragraphing changes local. Set the \cs{leftskip}
% to the entry's indentation.
% \begin{macro}{\cftwhatismyname}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added \cs{cftwhatismyname}}
% \cs{cftwhatismyname} locally stores the type of toc entry. Useful
% for hooks into general macros like \verb?\numberline?.
% \begin{macrocode}
{%\leftskip \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax
\newcommand*\cftwhatismyname{#2}%
\memRTLleftskip \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Set the \cs{rightskip} to \cs{@tocrmarg} to leave room for the page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% \rightskip \@tocrmarg
\memRTLrightskip \@tocrmarg
% \end{macrocode}
% Ensure that the last line of an entry will be filled. Setting \cs{parfillskip}
% to a negative value prevents `overfull box' messages.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% \parfillskip -\rightskip
\parfillskip -\memRTLrightskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the paragraph's indentation to the entry's indentation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\parindent \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax\@afterindenttrue
% \end{macrocode}
% Try and prevent breaks between lines in a multiline entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\interlinepenalty\@M
% \end{macrocode}
% Make sure we have left vertical mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\leavevmode
% \end{macrocode}
% Our version of \cs{numberline} expects that the width of the number box
% is in \cs{@tempdima}, and that the three macros \cs{@cftbsnum},
% \cs{@cftaqsnum}, and \cs{@cftasnumb} are defined. We set all these to
% the values for this entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\@nameuse{cft#2font}\@nameuse{cft#2name}}%
\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}%
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftbsnum\csname cft#2presnum\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnum\csname cft#2aftersnum\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnumb\csname cft#2aftersnumb\endcsname
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftn@me\csname cft#2name\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Arrange that the (entry number and) first line of the title is set at
% the current indent, and that any subsequent lines will be further
% indented.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% \advance\leftskip\@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
\advance\memRTLleftskip\@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\memRTLleftskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Print the (number and) title, prohibiting any breaking.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\@nameuse{cft#2font}##1}\nobreak
% \end{macrocode}
% Print the leader and the page number, and then close the group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{cft#2fillnum}{##2}}
\fi
}% end of \l@#2
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now define all the layout commands used by \cs{l@X}. The default
% values of these print the entry in a normal font with a dotted
% line between the title and the page number.
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforeXskip}
% The skip before the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\newlength\csname cftbefore#2skip\endcsname
\setlength{\@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}}{\z@ \@plus .2\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXnumwidth}
% The indent and width for the number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2indent\endcsname
\expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2numwidth\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the default values for the indent and numwidth depending on
% the entry's level. A level of 1 corresponds to a figure entry
% (no indent, and space for a number like N.N).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase #4\relax % 0 (level 1)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{0em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{2.3em}
\or % 1 (level 2)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{2.3em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{3.2em}
\or % 2 (level 3)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{5.5em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{4.1em}
\or % 3 (level 4)
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{8.5em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{5.0em}
\else % anything else
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{10.5em}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{6.0em}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXname}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXafterpnum}
% And the remaining commands; the only ones that are not null are for the
% dotsep, the font and the leader
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{cft#2font}{\normalfont}
\@namedef{cft#2name}{}
\@namedef{cft#2presnum}{}
\@namedef{cft#2aftersnum}{}
\@namedef{cft#2aftersnumb}{}
\@namedef{cft#2dotsep}{\cftdotsep}
\@namedef{cft#2leader}{\normalfont\cftdotfill{\@nameuse{cft#2dotsep}}}
\@namedef{cft#2pagefont}{\normalfont}
\@namedef{cft#2afterpnum}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@X}
% The hyperref package needs a command \cs{toclevel@X}, holding
% the \meta{level-1} value.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{toclevel@#2}{#4}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftXformatpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXformatpnumhook}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXfillnum}
% Typeset the leader and page number. We add a hook into the formating
% of the page number. This might later be used to record the widths of
% the numbers used. It will be given the page number as its
% argument. Does nothing by default.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{cftXformatpnum} (Dan Leucking
% mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added hook into page number formatter}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{cft#2formatpnumhook}##1{}
\@namedef{cft#2formatpnum}##1{%
\@nameuse{cft#2formatpnumhook}{##1}%
\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\@nameuse{cft#2pagefont}##1}}
\@namedef{cft#2fillnum}##1{%
{\@nameuse{cft#2leader}}\nobreak
%%% \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{%
%%% \hfil\@nameuse{cft#2pagefont}##1}
\@nameuse{cft#2formatpnum}{##1}%
\@nameuse{cft#2afterpnum}\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% This ends the definition of \cs{newlistentry}.
% \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newlistentry
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftsetindents}
% \cs{cftsetindents}\marg{entry}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth} sets
% the \textit{indent} and \textit{numwidth} for entry \meta{entry}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftsetindents}[3]{%
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1indent}}{#2}
\setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1numwidth}}{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookname}
% If you want a book entry in the ToC like: \\
% BOOK I Title ... \\
% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftbookname}{BOOK~}? \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftbookname}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\l@book}
% \begin{macro}{\booknumberline}
% \begin{macro}{\booknumberlinehook}
% Now for the ToC entry.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{l@book} and supports (mempatch v4.4)}
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Deleted \cs{space} from \cs{booknumberline}
% and \cs{partnumberline}
% (per Lars Henrik Gam Madsen mempatch v5.1)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{Added bidi support to \cs{l@book}}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added hook into the book numberline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftbookbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
\addvspace{\cftbeforebookskip}}
\newcommand*{\l@book}[2]{%
\ifnum\c@tocdepth >-3\relax
\cftbookbreak
\begingroup
{%\leftskip \cftbookindent\relax
\memRTLleftskip \cftbookindent\relax
%%% \rightskip \@tocrmarg
\memRTLrightskip \@tocrmarg
%%% \parfillskip -\rightskip
\parfillskip -\memRTLrightskip
\parindent \cftbookindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
\interlinepenalty\@M
\leavevmode
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\cftbookfont\cftbookname}%
\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\cftbooknumwidth}%
\let\@cftbsnum \cftbookpresnum
\let\@cftasnum \cftbookaftersnum
\let\@cftasnumb \cftbookaftersnumb
%%% \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
\advance\memRTLleftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\memRTLleftskip
{\cftbookfont #1}%
\cftbookfillnum{#2}}
\nobreak
\global\@nobreaktrue
\everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
\endgroup
\fi}
\newcommand*\booknumberlinehook[1]{}
\newcommand{\booknumberline}[1]{%
\booknumberlinehook{#1}%
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
\cftbookname\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}%%\space}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforebookskip}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbooknumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookaftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookaftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookafterpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookfillnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookformatpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftbookformatpnumhook}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added hook into \cs{cftbookformatpnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftbeforebookskip}
\setlength{\cftbeforebookskip}{2.25em \@plus\p@}
\newdimen\cftbookindent
\setlength{\cftbookindent}{0em}
\newdimen\cftbooknumwidth
\setlength{\cftbooknumwidth}{1.5em}
\newcommand*{\cftbookfont}{\large\bfseries}
\newcommand*{\cftbookpresnum}{}
\newcommand*{\cftbookaftersnum}{}
\newcommand*{\cftbookaftersnumb}{}
\newcommand*{\cftbookleader}{%
\large\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftbookdotsep}}
\newcommand*{\cftbookdotsep}{\cftnodots}
\newcommand*{\cftbookpagefont}{\large\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftbookafterpnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftbookfillnum}[1]{%
{\cftbookleader}%
%%%% {\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss {\cftbookpagefont #1}}}%
\cftbookformatpnum{#1}%
\cftbookafterpnum\par}
\newcommand{\cftbookformatpnumhook}[1]{}
\newcommand{\cftbookformatpnum}[1]{%
\cftbookformatpnumhook{#1}%
\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss {\cftbookpagefont #1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartname}
% If you want a part entry in the ToC like: \\
% PART I Title ... \\
% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftpartname}{PART~}? \\
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftpartname}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftpartname}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
% Can't use \cs{newlistentry} for \cs{l@part} because of the initial penalty
% and the final \cs{nobreak} code.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{cftpartbreak}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{Added bidi support to \cs{l@part}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftpartbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
\addvspace{\cftbeforepartskip}}
\newcommand*{\l@part}[2]{%
\ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
\cftpartbreak
\begingroup
{%\leftskip \cftpartindent\relax
\memRTLleftskip \cftpartindent\relax
%%% \rightskip \@tocrmarg
\memRTLrightskip \@tocrmarg
%%% \parfillskip -\rightskip
\parfillskip -\memRTLrightskip
\parindent \cftpartindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
\interlinepenalty\@M
\leavevmode
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\cftpartfont\cftpartname}%
\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\cftpartnumwidth}%
\let\@cftbsnum \cftpartpresnum
\let\@cftasnum \cftpartaftersnum
\let\@cftasnumb \cftpartaftersnumb
%%% \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
\advance\memRTLleftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\memRTLleftskip
{\cftpartfont #1}%
\cftpartfillnum{#2}}
\nobreak
\global\@nobreaktrue
\everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
\endgroup
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@part}
% Needed if the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{toclevel@part} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\toclevel@part}{-1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partnumberline}
% \begin{macro}{\partnumberlinehook}
% \cs{partnumberline} is a special version of \cs{numberline} output by \cs{part}.
% Its default definition is identical to \cs{numberline}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{partnumberline}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added a space after the number in
% \cs{partnumberline} (mempatch v4.4)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added hook into part numberline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\partnumberlinehook[1]{}
\newcommand{\partnumberline}[1]{%
\partnumberlinehook{#1}%
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
\cftpartname\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}%%\space}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforepartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartafterpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartformatpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartformatpnumhook}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfillnum}
% These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Part entries.
% They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{cftpartnumwidth} to cater for
% use of \cs{numberline} in the ToC}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{cftpartformatpnum} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added hook into \cs{cftpartformatpnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftbeforepartskip}
\setlength{\cftbeforepartskip}{2.25em \@plus\p@}
\newlength{\cftpartindent}
\setlength{\cftpartindent}{0em}
\newlength{\cftpartnumwidth}
\setlength{\cftpartnumwidth}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\cftpartfont}{\large\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftpartpresnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartaftersnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartaftersnumb}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartleader}{%
\large\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftpartdotsep}}
\newcommand{\cftpartdotsep}{\cftnodots}
\newcommand{\cftpartpagefont}{\large\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftpartafterpnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftpartformatpnumhook}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\cftpartformatpnum}[1]{%
\cftpartformatpnumhook{#1}%
\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss {\cftpartpagefont #1}}}
\newcommand{\cftpartfillnum}[1]{%
{\cftpartleader}%
{\cftpartformatpnum{#1}}%
\cftpartafterpnum\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftchaptername}
% If you want a chapter entry in the ToC like: \\
% Chapter 1. A title ... \\
% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftchaptername}{\chaptername~}? \\
% \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftchapteraftersnum}{.}? \\
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftchaptername}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftchaptername}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapapp}
% Generic chapter/appendix ToC entry typesetting.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{l@chapapp}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{ADded bidi support to \cs{l@chapapp}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@chapapp}[3]{%
\ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
\cftchapterbreak
\vskip \cftbeforechapterskip
{%\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
\memRTLleftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
%%% \rightskip \@tocrmarg
\memRTLrightskip \@tocrmarg
%%% \parfillskip -\rightskip
\parfillskip -\memRTLrightskip
\parindent \cftchapterindent\relax
\@afterindenttrue
\interlinepenalty\@M
\leavevmode
\let\@cftbsnum \cftchapterpresnum
\let\@cftasnum \cftchapteraftersnum
\let\@cftasnumb \cftchapteraftersnumb
\def\@chapapp@head{#3}%
\settowidth{\@tempdima}{\cftchapterfont\@chapapp@head}%
\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\cftchapternumwidth}%
%%% \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
\advance\memRTLleftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\memRTLleftskip
{\cftchapterfont #1}\nobreak
\cftchapterfillnum{#2}}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
% \cs{l@chapter}\marg{title}\marg{page} typesets the ToC entry for
% a \texttt{chapter} heading. It is a parameterised copy of the default
% \cs{l@chapter}
% (see \file{classes.dtx} for the original definition). Can't use
% \cs{newlistentry} for this because of the intial penalty.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak} to \cs{l@chapter}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Defined \cs{l@chapter} in terms of \cs{l@chapapp} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@chapter}[2]{%
\l@chapapp{#1}{#2}{\cftchaptername}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@chapter}
% Needed if the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{toclevel@chapter} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\toclevel@chapter}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftappendixname}
% If you want a appendixed chapter entry in the ToC like: \\
% Appendix A A title ... \\
% then \verb?\renewcommand*{\cftappendixname}{\appendixname~}? \\
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{cftappendixname}, courtesy Danie Els (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftappendixname}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@appendix}
% Similar to \cs{l@chapter} but for an appendix.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{l@apendix} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@appendix}[2]{%
\l@chapapp{#1}{#2}{\cftappendixname}}
\newcommand{\toclevel@appendix}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapternumberline}
% \begin{macro}{\chapternumberlinehook}
% \cs{chapternumberline} is a special version of \cs{numberline} output by
% \cs{chapter}.
% It's default definition is identical to \cs{numberline}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{chapternumberline}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{@chapapp@head} to \cs{chapternumberline} (mempatch v3.12)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added hook into chapter numberline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\chapternumberlinehook[1]{}
\newcommand{\chapternumberline}[1]{%
\chapternumberlinehook{#1}%
\hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@chapapp@head\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}%
\@cftasnumb}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforechapterskip}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapternumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterafterpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterformatpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterformatpnumhook}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfillnum}
% These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Chapter entries.
% They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{cftchapterformatpnum} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{added hook into \cs{cftchapterformatpnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}
\setlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}{1.0em \@plus\p@}
\newlength{\cftchapterindent}
\setlength{\cftchapterindent}{0em}
\newlength{\cftchapternumwidth}
\setlength{\cftchapternumwidth}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftchapterpresnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnumb}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapterleader}{%
\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftchapterdotsep}}
\newcommand{\cftchapterdotsep}{\cftnodots}
\newcommand{\cftchapterpagefont}{\bfseries}
\newcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{}
\newcommand{\cftchapterformatpnumhook}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\cftchapterformatpnum}[1]{%
\cftchapterformatpnumhook{#1}%
\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\cftchapterpagefont #1}}
\newcommand*{\cftchapterfillnum}[1]{%
{\cftchapterleader}\nobreak
\cftchapterformatpnum{#1}%
\cftchapterafterpnum\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterbreak}
% Another parameter for \cs{l@chapter}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftchapterbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
% \cs{l@section}\marg{title}\marg{page} typesets the ToC entry for
% a \cs{section} heading. Similarly \cs{l@subsection} and \cs{l@subsubsection}
% for \cs{subsection} and \cs{subsubsection} entries, and so on.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Used \cs{newlistentry} for pararaph and
% subparagraph (from patch v1.7)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Corrected (sub)paragraph ToC indents (mempatch v2.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{section}{toc}{0}
\cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{2.3em}
\newlistentry[section]{subsection}{toc}{1}
\cftsetindents{subsection}{3.8em}{3.2em}
\newlistentry[subsection]{subsubsection}{toc}{2}
\cftsetindents{subsubsection}{7.0em}{4.1em}
\newlistentry[subsubsection]{paragraph}{toc}{3}
\cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.0em}{5.0em}
\newlistentry[paragraph]{subparagraph}{toc}{4}
\cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.0em}{6.0em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The typesetting for Figures and Tables is defined later.
%
%
%
% \subsection{Support for the \Lpack{subfigure} package}
%
% The code for supporting the \Lpack{subfigure} package is, in all
% essentials, the same as that for the figure and table captions; only the
% names are changed. However, the code need only be executed if the
% \Lpack{subfigure} package is actually loaded.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cftl@subfigtab}
% This command redefines the \cs{l@subfigure} and \cs{l@subtable} commands.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Made \cs{@cftl@subfigtab} a no-op (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@cftl@subfigtab}{
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subtable}
% \cs{l@subfigure}\marg{title}\marg{page} typesets the LoF entry for
% a subfigure caption heading, and \cs{l@subtable} does the same for subtables.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[figure]{subfigure}{lof}{1}
\cftsetindents{subfigure}{2.3em}{2.5em}
\newlistentry[table]{subtable}{lot}{1}
\cftsetindents{subtable}{2.3em}{2.5em}}
\renewcommand*{\@cftl@subfigtab}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Call the \Lpack{subfigure} package setup code only if the
% \Lopt{subfigure} package has been used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{subfigure}{\@cftl@subfigtab}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Switching page numbering}
%
% It can, at times, be useful to be able to have ToC entries that have
% no printed page numbers.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
% The user level command for switching off page numbers is
% \cs{cftpagenumbersoff}\marg{entry} where \meta{entry} is the
% name of the entry.
% The macro redefines the \cs{cftXfillnum} command so that there is no leader
% and the page number is ignored.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumbersoff}[1]{%
\@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
\cftparfillskip\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumberson}
% \cs{cftpagenumberson}\marg{entry} is the user level command for
% reversing the corresponding \cs{cftpagenumbersoff}.
% The macro defines the \cs{cftXfillnum} command to correspond to
% the default definition.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Modified \cs{cftpagenumberson} to use \cs{cftXformatpnum}
% (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumberson}[1]{%
\@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
\@nameuse{cft#1leader}\nobreak
\@nameuse{cft#1formatpnum}{##1}%
\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Chapter precis}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecis}
% The command \cs{chapterprecis}\marg{text} typesets
% \meta{text} at the point where it is called, and also adds \meta{text}
% to the \file{.toc} file. It is expects to be called immediately after
% a \cs{chapter} command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecis}[1]{%
\chapterprecishere{#1}
\chapterprecistoc{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecishere}
% \cs{chapterprecishere}\marg{text} typesets \meta{text}. It expects
% to be called immediately after a \cs{chapter} command.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Parameterised \cs{chapterprecishere}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecishere}[1]{%
\prechapterprecis #1\postchapterprecis}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prechapterprecis}
% \begin{macro}{\prechapterprecisshift}
% \begin{macro}{\precisfont}
% \begin{macro}{\postchapterprecis}
% The \cs{pre...} and \cs{post...} macros put code before and after
% \cs{chapterprecishere} text. By
% default \cs{prechapterprecis} adds some (negative) space (defined by
% \cs{prechapterprecisshift} whose value depends on whether or not the
% \Lopt{article} option is used, as discovered by Lars Madsen) and starts a
% quote environment using the \cs{precisfont}. \cs{postchapterprecis} ends
% the quote environment.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{prechapterprecis} and
% \cs{postchapterprecis}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{prechapterprecisshift} and
% \cs{precisfont} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\prechapterprecisshift
\ifartopt
\prechapterprecisshift=0pt
\else
\prechapterprecisshift=-2\baselineskip
\fi
\newcommand*{\precisfont}{\normalfont\itshape}
\newcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
\vspace*{\prechapterprecisshift}%
\begin{quote}\precisfont}
\newcommand*{\postchapterprecis}{\end{quote}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\precistocfont}
% Font for typesetting chapter precis in the ToC.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistocfont}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\precistocfont}{\normalfont\itshape}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\precistocformat}
% Macro for adding extra formatting to the precis toc text, formatting
% that has nothiing to do with font. The default is \cs{noindent}.
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/06/09}{Added \cs{precistocformat}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\precistocformat}{\noindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecistoc}
% \begin{macro}{\precistoctext}
% \cs{chapterprecistoc}\marg{text} effectively adds \meta{text} to
% the \file{.toc}
% file. The \meta{text} will be typeset within the same margins as the
% the title text of a \cs{chapter} heading, using the \cs{precistocfont} font.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistoctext}}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{Added bidi support to \cs{precistoctext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecistoc}[1]{%
\addtocontents{toc}{\precistoctext{#1}}}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\precistoctext}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Start a group to localize changes to the paragraphing. Set the
% left margin to the chapter indent plus the chapter number width.
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/01/20}{Added a \cs{nopagebreak}, though
% this only disencourage a page break}
% \begin{macrocode}
{%\nopagebreak\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
\nopagebreak\memRTLleftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
%%% \advance\leftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
\advance\memRTLleftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Set the right hand margin to \cs{@tocrmarg}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% \rightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
\memRTLrightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Typeset \meta{text} using an italic font, then ensure that the paragraph
% is finished (to use the local skips). Finally close the group and we
% are done.
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/06/09}{Added \cs{precistocformat}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\precistocformat\precistocfont #1\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Adding things to the ToC}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftlocalchange}
% \cs{cftmakelocalchange}\marg{file}\marg{pnumwidth}\marg{tocrmarg}
% makes an entry into \meta{file} to change the \cs{@pnumwidth} and
% the \cs{@tocrmarg} values.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftlocalchange}[3]{%
\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\setpnumwidth{#2} \protect\setrmarg{#3}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftaddtitleline}
% \cs{cftaddtitleline}\marg{file}\marg{kind}\marg{title}\marg{page}
% adds a \cs{contentsline} entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftaddtitleline}[4]{%
\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftaddnumtitleline}
% \cs{cftaddnumtitleline}\marg{file}\marg{kind}\marg{num}\marg{title}\marg{page}
% adds a \cs{contentsline} entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftaddnumtitleline}[5]{%
\addtocontents{#1}%
{\protect\contentsline{#2}{\protect\numberline{#3}%
{\protect\ignorespaces #4}}{#5}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftinsertcode}
% \begin{macro}{\cftinserthook}
% \begin{macro}{\cftinsert}
% This is a generalisation of a suggestion by Lars Madsen (private email,
% 2007/12/14).
%
% \cs{cftinsertcode}\marg{id}\marg{code} creates a hook to be executed in
% a `List of'. Since we use \cs{@nameuse} it does not matter if the hook
% does not exist
%
% \cs{cftinserthook}\marg{list}\marg{id} inserts the hook \meta{id} into the
% \meta{list} `List of' file (in the form of \cs{cftinsert}\marg{id}).
%
% Use like this:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \cftinsertcode{A}{%
% \renewcommand*{\cftchapterfont}{\normalfont\scshape}
% ...
% }
% \cftinsertcode{F}{...}
% \cftinsertcode{G}{...}
% ...
% \frontmatter
% \tableofcontents
% \cftinserthook{lof}{G}
% \listoffigures
% \chapter{...}
% ...
% \mainmatter
% \cftinserthook{lof}{F}
% \cftinserthook{toc}{A}
% \chapter{...}
% ...
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{cftinsert} and friends (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cftinsert}[1]{\@nameuse{cftinsert#1}}
\newcommand{\cftinsertcode}[2]{\@namedef{cftinsert#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\cftinserthook}[2]{%
\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\cftinsert\protect{#2\protect}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{ToC and divisional numbering}
%
% Commands are provided, based on the \Lpack{tocvsec2} package, for changing
% the section numbering level and the ToC entry level.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setclcnt}
% Helper macro to set a sectioning-related counter. Use as
% \cs{@setclcnt}\marg{sec}\marg{counter} to set \Lcount{counter}
% to the level of \meta{sec}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added book to \cs{@setclcnt} and friends
% (mempatch v4.4)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/29}{PW: Replaced \cs{if@tempswa} with
% \cs{@setclcntok} in \cs{@setclcnt} to avoid bad clashes with other uses}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@setclcnt}[2]{%
\def\@setclcntok{0}% = false
\nametest{#1}{none}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{-10}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}% = true
\fi
\nametest{#1}{book}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{-2}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{part}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{-1}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{chapter}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{0}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{section}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{1}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsection}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{2}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsubsection}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{3}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{paragraph}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{4}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subparagraph}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{5}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{all}%
\ifsamename
\setcounter{#2}{50}%
\def\@setclcntok{1}%
\fi
%% \if@tempswa\else
\ifnum \@setclcntok = 0\relax
\@memerror{%
Unknown document division name (#1)
}{%
I'll ignore it.
Type \space <return> and I'll continue.\MessageBreak
If you haven't mistyped the name then use
\protect\setcounter\space instead.}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\settocdepth}
% \cs{settocdepth}\marg{sec} is the user command for setting
% \Lcount{tocdepth} in the \file{.toc} file to the value corresponding to
% \meta{sec}.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{settocdepth} to use \cs{changetocdepth}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added book to ToC depth setting (mempatch v4.4)}.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/29}{PW: Replaced \cs{if@tempswa} with
% \cs{@chtocdok} in \cs{settocdepth} to avoid bad clashes with other uses}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\settocdepth}[1]{%
\def\@chtodok{0}% false
\nametest{#1}{none}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-10}}%
\def\@chtodok{1}% true
\fi
\nametest{#1}{book}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-2}}%
\def\@chtodok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{part}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-1}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{chapter}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{0}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{section}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{1}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsection}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{2}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subsubsection}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{3}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{paragraph}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{4}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{subparagraph}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{5}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
\nametest{#1}{all}%
\ifsamename
\addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{50}}%
\def\@chtocdok{1}%
\fi
% \if@tempswa
\ifnum\@chtocdok=1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% The next bit is from Heiko Oberdiek (CTT {\itshape Re: Memoir, \verb?\settocdepth?
% and pdflatex \verb?=>? problem with PDF bookmarks}, 2006/07/21) as
% \Lpack{hyperref} needs \verb?\tocdepth? set in the body not just in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{toclevel@#1}{%
\@memwarn{Unknown toclevel for #1}%
}{%
\setcounter{tocdepth}{\@nameuse{toclevel@#1}}%
}
\else
\@memerror{%
Unknown document division name (#1)
}{%
I'll ignore it.
Type \space <return> and I'll continue.}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@none}
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@all}
% Couple of extras for hypperef to cater for \texttt{all} and \texttt{none}
% as `division levels'.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{toclevel@none} and \cs{toclevel@all}
% (mempatch v4.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\toclevel@none}{-10}
\newcommand*{\toclevel@all}{50}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changetocdepth}
% Changes the \texttt{tocdepth} counter. Make it robust as it will be written
% to the *.toc file.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{changetocdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetocdepth}[1]{\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxtocdepth}
% \cs{maxtocdepth}\marg{sec} can be used to initialise \Lcount{tocdepth}
% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}. This can only be used
% between the end of the preamble and the \cs{tableofcontents} command.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maxtocdepth}[1]{%
\@setclcnt{#1}{tocdepth}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxsecnumdepth}
% \cs{maxsecnumdepth}\marg{sec} can be used to initialise
% \Lcount{secnumdepth}
% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added maxsecnumdepth counter and modified \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{maxsecnumdepth}
\newcommand{\maxsecnumdepth}[1]{%
\@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}\@setclcnt{#1}{maxsecnumdepth}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumdepth}
% \cs{setsecnumdepth}\marg{sec} is the user command for setting
% \Lcount{secnumdepth} to the value for \meta{sec}. In the preamble it sets
% both the \Lcount{secnumdepth} and \Lcount{maxsecnumdepth} to \meta{sec}
% while in the body it only sets \Lcount{secnumdepth}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Extended \cs{setsecnumdepth} to make it more
% intuitive (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsecnumdepth}[1]{%
\ifx\@nodocument\relax% after the preamble
\@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}%
\else
\@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}%
\@setclcnt{#1}{maxsecnumdepth}%
\fi}
\setsecnumdepth{section}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Bibliography}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibindent}
% The \Lopt{open} bibliography uses an indentation of \cs{bibindent}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\bibindent
\setlength\bibindent{1.5em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibitemsep}
% The vertical separation between items in the bibliography list.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{bibitemsep} (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\bibitemsep}
\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\itemsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\biblistextra}
% A hook into the \texttt{bibitemlist}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{biblistextra} (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\biblistextra}{\itemsep=\bibitemsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{bibitemlist}
% The \texttt{thebibliography} environment starts a new document division.
% Internally it tweaks some typesetting aspects; principally it
% uses \cs{sloppy} because good linebreaking is hard in a bibliography,
% and \verb?\sfcode`\.=1000\relax? causes a full stop not to produce an
% end-of-sentence space. The implementation of the environment is
% based on the generic \texttt{list} environment, and uses the \cs{c@enumiv}
% count for the labels. The following code is extracted from the
% \Lpack{book} class, plus some additions.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{biblistextra} to bibitemlist (from patch v1.7)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{bibitemlist}[1]{%
\typeout{bibitemlist}
\list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
\leftmargin\labelwidth
\advance\leftmargin\labelsep
\@openbib@code
\usecounter{enumiv}%
\let\p@enumiv\@empty
\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}%
\biblistextra}%
\sloppy
\clubpenalty4000
\@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
\widowpenalty4000%
\sfcode`\.\@m}%
{\def\@noitemerr
{\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
% The default is for \cs{newblock} to provide a small space.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newblock}{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@openbib@code}
% This a an empty hook. It will be modified if the \Lopt{openbib}
% option is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@openbib@code\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setbiblabel}
% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
% This is the user command for setting the label for a \cs{bibitem}.
% The following sets the default definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setbiblabel}[1]{%
\renewcommand*{\@biblabel}[1]{#1}}
\setbiblabel{[#1]\hfill}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memb@bchap}
% \begin{macro}{\@memb@bsec}
% In a \ctt{} thread \textit{memoir, natbib, and chapterbib} in January 2003
% there was a discussion on how to get all three to work together.
% Donald Arseneau suggested that \cs{bibsection} be used as a `standard'
% way of controlling the sectioning command of a bibliography. Here is
% an implementation of that idea.
%
% \cs{@memb@bchap} is a copy of memoir's original code for the start
% of the \texttt{thebibliography} environment which used a \cs{chapter*}
% title. \cs{@memb@bsec} is the much simpler version for a \cs{section} title.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added support code for implementing \cs{bibsection}
% (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memb@bchap}{%
\chapter*{\bibname}%
\bibmark
\ifnobibintoc\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}%
\fi
\prebibhook}
\newcommand{\@memb@bsec}{\section{\bibname}\prebibhook}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
% Normally treat the bibliography heading as a chapter.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added \cs{bibsection} to replace memoir's
% original code for the bibliography (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bchap}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
% The definition of the \texttt{thebibliography} environment in this class is not
% quite the same as in the standard classes!
%
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of thebibliography}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Replaced initial code in the bibliography
% environment by \cs{bibsection} (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
\bibsection
\begin{bibitemlist}{#1}}{\end{bibitemlist}\postbibhook}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnobibintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\bibintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\nobibintoc}
% Flag to control whether or not to add the bibliography title to the ToC,
% and declarations to set the flag.
% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnobibintoc}, etc.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnobibintoc
\newcommand*{\bibintoc}{\nobibintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\nobibintoc}{\nobibintoctrue}
\bibintoc
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prebibhook}
% \begin{macro}{\postbibhook}
% These two macros are called just before starting the bib items and just
% after finishing them. By default they do nothing but can be changed
% by the user to give, say, some introductory information.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prebibhook}{}
\newcommand{\postbibhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
% The output of the \cs{cite} command is produced by this macro. The default
% is used. The \Lpack{cite} package is a good way of changing this.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \renewcommand*{\@cite}[1]{[#1]}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Use with the \Lpack{natbib} and \Lpack{chapterbib} packages}
%
% The \Lpack{natbib} package~\cite{NATBIB} uses its own definition for
% the \texttt{thebibliography} environment, which knows nothing about adding
% the Bibliography to the ToC. The following makes appropriate changes
% to \Lpack{natbib} code to support the class.
%
% The \Lpack{chapterbib} package by Donald Arseneau also may make changes
% to the \texttt{thebibliography} environment --- perhaps memoir's version
% or natbib's version.
%
% As packages get loaded after classes, I have to try and patch any
% non-memoir modifications at begin document time.
% The fixes have to be firstly for \Lpack{natbib}
% and only after those can \Lpack{chapterbib} be considered.
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added internal support for the natbib package}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Changed code supporting natbib (patch 1.3)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{Added code supporting chapterbib (patch 1.3)}
% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
% \begin{macro}{\endthebibliography}
% Natbib provides \cs{bibsection} for titling the bibliography. I also have
% to extend the end of the \texttt{thebibliography} environment to cater for
% \cs{postbibhook}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% natbib is loaded
% \end{macrocode}
% As \Lpack{natbib} is used, change \cs{endthebibliography} to the class
% definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\addtodef{\endthebibliography}{}{\vskip-\lastskip\postbibhook}
\@ifpackagewith{natbib}{sectionbib}{% with sectionbib option
% \end{macrocode}
% \Lpack{natbib}'s \Lopt{sectionbib} option is used,
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bsec}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The \Lopt{sectionbib} option is not used, so we have a chapter title.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bchap}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Finished with any \Lpack{natbib} related changes.
% \begin{macrocode}
{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now deal with \Lpack{chapterbib} if necessary.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifpackagewith{chapterbib}{sectionbib}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \Lpack{chapterbib} is used with its \Lopt{sectionbib} option. This is the
% only case to worry about. Kill \Lpack{chapterbib}'s \cs{sectionbib} macro
% which it calls at begin document to do its patch, then make sure
% the class definition is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\sectionbib}[2]{}
\renewcommand{\bibsection}{\@memb@bsec}}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% And we've finished with this bunch of \cs{AtBeginDocument} code.
% \begin{macrocode}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{The index}
%
% I allow for a single column index as well as the default double column.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonecolindex}
% TRUE for a one column index.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added one column index}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifonecolindex
\onecolindexfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\onecolindex}
% \begin{macro}{\twocolindex}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{onecolindex} and \cs{twocolindex}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\onecolindex}{\onecolindextrue}
\newcommand*{\twocolindex}{\onecolindexfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{theindex}
% The environment \texttt{theindex} can be used for indices. It makes an
% index with two columns, with each entry a separate paragraph. At
% the user level the commands \cs{item}, \cs{subitem} and \cs{subsubitem}
% are used to produce index entries of various levels. When a new
% letter of the alphabet is encountered an amount of \cs{indexspace}
% white space can be added.
%
%
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of theindex}
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Changed Index pagestyle to chapter}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Make \cs{indexcolsep} work, courtesy of hazydirk (mempatch v3.11)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{clearforchapter} to theindex
% environment (Erik Quaeghebeur, mempatch v4.4)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added an indextitlepagestyle (Lars Madsen
% mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{theindex}{%
\clearforchapter
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecolfalse
\else
\@restonecoltrue
\fi
\ifonecolindex
\onecolumn
\chapter*{\indexname}
\preindexhook
\else
\setlength{\columnseprule}{\indexrule}%
\setlength{\columnsep}{\indexcolsep}%
\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}
\preindexhook]%
\fi
\indexmark
\ifnoindexintoc\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
\fi
\thispagestyle{indextitlepagestyle}\parindent\z@
\parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
\let\item\@idxitem}%
{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\twocolumn\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@indextitlepagestyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\aliaspagestyle{indextitlepagestyle}{chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnoindexintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\indexintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\noindexintoc}
% Flag to control whether or not to add the index title to the ToC,
% and declarations to set the flag.
% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnoindexintoc}, etc.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnoindexintoc
\newcommand*{\indexintoc}{\noindexintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\noindexintoc}{\noindexintoctrue}
\indexintoc
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexcolsep}
% \begin{macro}{\indexrule}
% These two lengths control the column separation and the thickness
% of the inter-column rule.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{indexcolsep} and \cs{indexrule}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\indexcolsep} \setlength{\indexcolsep}{35pt}
\newlength{\indexrule} \setlength{\indexrule}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\preindexhook}
% A macro that is called between the index heading and the start of the
% two columns. The user can modify it to add something.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\preindexhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@index}
% Format the index entry in the table of contents.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\l@index}{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{0pt}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@idxitem}
% \begin{macro}{\subitem}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubitem}
% Thsee macros are used to format the entries in the index.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@idxitem} {\par\hangindent 40\p@}
\newcommand{\subitem} {\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
\newcommand{\subsubitem}{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexspace}
% The amount of white space that is inserted between `letter
% blocks' in the index.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\indexspace}{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeindex}
% \begin{macro}{\index}
% \begin{macro}{\specialindex}
% \begin{macro}{\makememindexhook}
% This is a modified version of the kernel \cs{makeindex} to allow for
% multiple indexes. It also defines \cs{index} (which is a modified version
% of the standard \cs{index}) and \cs{specialindex}.
%
% \cs{makememindexhook} is a null op but can be redefined to add extra code
% into \cs{makeindex}. For example, to incorporate \Lpack{ledmac}'s
% \cs{edindex} into the scheme:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand*{\makememindexhook}{%
% \def\edindex{\@bsphack%
% \@ifnextchar [{\l@d@index}{\l@d@index[\jobname]}}}
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Indexing macros completely redone and extended}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/12}{Added the \cs{makememindexhook} to \cs{makeindex}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Modified \cs{makeindex} for \cs{nofiles}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\makememindexhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\makeindex}{}
\renewcommand*{\makeindex}[1][\jobname]{%
\if@filesw
\def\index{\@bsphack%
\@ifnextchar [{\@index}{\@index[\jobname]}}
\def\specialindex{\@bsphack\@spindex}%
\makememindexhook
\expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@idxfile\endcsname
\expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1@idxfile\endcsname #1.idx\relax
\typeout{Writing index file #1.idx }%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% Initially define, but emasculate, \cs{index} and \cs{specialindex} which are
% defined properly by the user calling \cs{makeindex}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\index}[2][\jobname]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
\newcommand{\specialindex}[3]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
% The command to read an \file{ind} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\printindex}[1][\jobname]{\@input@{#1.ind}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifreportnoidxfile}
% \begin{macro}{\reportnoidxfile}
% \begin{macro}{\ignorenoidxfile}
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowindexmark}
% \begin{macro}{\showindexmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\hideindexmarks}
% Two booleans to control reporting on unknown \file{idx} files and
% displaying indexed items in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifreportnoidxfile
\newcommand*{\reportnoidxfile}{\reportnoidxfiletrue}
\newcommand*{\ignorenoidxfile}{\reportnoidxfilefalse}
\ignorenoidxfile
\newif\ifshowindexmark
\newcommand*{\showindexmarks}{\showindexmarktrue}
\newcommand*{\hideindexmarks}{\showindexmarkfalse}
\hideindexmarks
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@index}
% \verb?\@index[file]? is first stage of \cs{index}, handling the \file{idx} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@index[#1]{%
\@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
{\ifreportnoidxfile
\@memwarn{Undefined index file #1}%
\fi
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@nowrindex}%
{\def\@idxfile{#1}%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@wrindexm@m}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@nowrindex}
% Called when there is no \file{idx} file to throw away the indexed item.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@nowrindex}[1]{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi\endgroup\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrindexm@m}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexhyp}
% The next stage in index processing is \verb?\@wrindexm@m{item}?,
% which writes the \file{idx} file name
% and indexed item to the \file{aux} file. The \cs{@@wrindexhyp} macro
% provides hyperlinks in case the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrindexm@m}[1]{\@@wrindexhyp#1||\\}
\def\@@wrindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\ifx\\#2\\%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
\else
\def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
\ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
\else
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}{\thepage}}%
\fi
\fi
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hyperpage}
% \begin{macro}{\hyperlink}
% These are defined in the \Lpack{hyperref} package but we need them.
% Other hyperstuff is only used if the package itself is used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hyperpage}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\hyperlink}[2]{#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexm@m}
% The macro \verb?\@@wrindexm@m{file}{item}{page}? has been written into
% the \file{aux} file. It is normally defined so that it calls
% \verb?\@@@wrindexm@m{item}{page}? to finally write to the \file{idx} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@wrindexm@m}[1]{\begingroup
\def\@idxfile{\@nameuse{#1@idxfile}}
\@sanitize
\@@@wrindexm@m}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@@wrindexm@m}
% \cs{@@@wrindexm@m}\marg{item}\marg{page} writes the \cs{indexentry} to
% the \file{idx} file. This file is read both at the beginning and end of
% a document so \cs{@@@wrindexm@m} must be disabled for one of these reads
% otherwise the index entries will be doubled up. Initially I disabled it
% after the first read. It eventually dawned on me that this meant two
% LaTeX runs to update the \file{idx}. Enabling it for the second read
% means that the \file{idx} file is updated at the end of each run.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Made \cs{@@@wrindexm@m} obey \cs{nofiles}}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{\cs{@@@wrindexm@m} now reads the aux
% file at the end of the document}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@@wrindexm@m}[2]{\endgroup}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\def\@@@wrindexm@m#1#2{%
\if@filesw
\immediate\write \@idxfile{\string\indexentry{#1}{#2}}%
\fi
\endgroup}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spindex}
% Now do similar things for \cs{specialindex}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@spindex}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
{\ifreportnoidxfile
\@memwarn{Undefined index file #1}%
\fi
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@nowrindex}%
{\def\@idxfile{#1}%
\def\@sptheidx{#2}%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\@wrspindex}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrspindex}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrspindex}[1]{\@@wrspindexhyp#1||\\}
\def\@@wrspindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\ifx\\#2\\%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
{#1|hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}%
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\else
\def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
\ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
{#1|#2hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}%
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\else
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}%
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\fi
\fi
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hyperspindexpage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\hyperspindexpage(#1)#2{\hyperlink{page.#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmemhyperindex}
% \begin{macro}{\memhyperindextrue}
% \begin{macro}{\memhyperindexfalse}
% Flag to turn off \cs{hyperindexfalse} hyperrefing the index (apparently
% \Lpack{xindy} can't cope with this. Email from Frederic Connes, 2005/07/13:
% \begin{verbatim}
% ...You use |hyperspindex(\thepage) which xindy doesn't
% recognise as a valid markup-locref. And I don't know how
% to add it because xindy only accepts one argument in
% markup-locref (if the number is not a page number, it will
% still point to a page with that number) so replacing it
% with |hyperpage won't work. ...
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% The default is \cs{memhyperindextrue}. Setting \cs{memhyperindexfalse}
% prohibits a hyper index --- setting whatever option in \Lpack{hyperref}
% to disable hyper indexing will (probably) not work as far as \Lpack{xindy}
% is concerned.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/04}{Added \cs{ifmemhyperindex}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmemhyperindex
\memhyperindextrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mxindy}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mxindytrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mxindyfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\xindyindex}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
% Use \cs{xindyindex} when you are going to use the xindy program rather
% than makeindex. hyperrefed entries won't work with xindy.
% The code was supplied by Frederic
% Connes\footnote{\texttt{frederic@connes.org}} in an email to me on
% 2006/01/08.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{xindyindex} (Frederic Connes
% mempatch v4.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mxindy
\m@mxindyfalse
\newcommand*{\xindyindex}{\m@mxindytrue}
\def\@@wrspindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\ifx\\#2\\%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
\ifm@mxindy{#1}\else{#1|hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}\fi
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\else
\def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
\ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}%
\ifm@mxindy{#1|#2}\else{#1|#2hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}\fi
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\else
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}%
{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\fi
\fi
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexhyp}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
% If the \Lpack{hyperref} package is not being used, or \cs{ifmemhyperindex}
% is false, there is no need
% to clutter up the index files.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/28}{Declutter index files if hyperref is not used}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed spaces in non-hyperref index files (mempatch v2.3).
% Reported by Michael W. Daniels.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{}{\memhyperindexfalse}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the \Lpack{hyperref} package is not being used, or a hyperindex
% is not required, simplify!
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifmemhyperindex\else
\def\@@wrindexhyp#1||\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1}{\thepage}}%
\endgroup
\@esphack}%
\def\@@wrspindexhyp#1||\\{%
\ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1}{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
\endgroup
\@esphack}%
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\see}
% \begin{macro}{\seename}
% \begin{macro}{\seealso}
% \begin{macro}{\alsoname}
% These definitions are taken from the \Lpack{makeidx} package.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\see}[2]{\emph{\seename} #1}
\newcommand*{\seename}{see}
\newcommand*{\seealso}[2]{\emph{\alsoname} #1}
\newcommand*{\alsoname}{see also}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\citeindexfile}
% For the \Lpack{natbib} package, and possibly other packages that do
% some special indexing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\citeindexfile}{\jobname}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
\def\NAT@index{\index[\citeindexfile]{\NAT@idxtxt}}}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next part of the code is essentially the \Lpack{showidx} package.
% I tried putting index entries into marginpars but too many on a page
% led to the `too many floats' problem.
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@indexbox}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\indexmarkstyle
\indexmarkstyle{\normalfont\footnotesize\ttfamily}
\newinsert\@indexbox
\dimen\@indexbox\maxdimen
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\@\active
\expandafter\gdef\csname\string @sanitizeat\endcsname
{\def @{\char`\@}}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@showidx}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@showidx}[1]{%
\insert\@indexbox{%
\@sanitizeat
\the\indexmarkstyle
\hsize\marginparwidth
\hangindent\marginparsep \parindent\z@
\everypar{}\let\par\@@par \parfillskip\@flushglue
\lineskip\normallineskip
\baselineskip .8\normalbaselineskip\sloppy
\raggedright \leavevmode
\vrule \@height .7\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
#1\relax
\vrule \@height \z@ \@depth .3\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
}%
\ifhmode\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@leftidx}
% \begin{macro}{\@rightidx}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@leftidx}{\hskip-\marginparsep \hskip-\marginparwidth}
\newcommand{\@rightidx}{\hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mkidx}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mkidx}{\vbox to \z@{%
\rlap{%
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn \@leftidx \else \@rightidx \fi
\else
\if@twoside
\ifodd\c@page \@rightidx \else \@leftidx \fi
\else
\@rightidx
\fi
\fi
\box\@indexbox
}%
\vss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Page bottom}
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\flushbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@texttop}
% These kernel macros need changing because of the new \cs{@indexbox}
% marginal insert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\raggedbottom}{%
\def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@ plus.0001fil}%
\let\@texttop\@mkidx}
\renewcommand{\flushbottom}{%
\let\@textbottom\relax
\let\@texttop\@mkidx}
\let\@texttop\@mkidx
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Widows and sloppybottom}
%
% There was a discussion \textit{widow handling?} on CTT in
% May 2006. \texttt{ivowel@gmail.com} wrote
% \begin{quote}
% in experimenting with raggedbottom, widowpenalty, and clubpenalty,
% I think that I have not found a solution that strikes me as
% particularly desirable. I think what I would really like is that
% widows (i.e., left-over single lines that begin on the following
% page) are resolved not by pushing one extra line from the same
% paragraph also onto the next page, but by stretching the
% \cs{textheight} to allow this one extra at the bottom of the
% same page.
% \end{quote}
% Donald Arseneau, as he so often does, came up with a solution he
% termed \cs{sloppybottom}. Here is a generalised version.
%
% \begin{macro}{\sloppybottom}
% \cs{sloppybottom} allows an extra line on a page to save a widow.
% You must increase the \cs{topskip} (by 60 percent is reasonable) and this
% will push the text lower on the page. Run \cs{checkandfixthelayout}
% after the change. For example:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \setlength{\topskip}{1.6\topskip}
% \checkandfixthelayout
% \sloppybottom
% ...
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{sloppybottom} (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sloppybottom}{%
\def\@textbottom{\vskip \z@ \@plus.0001fil \@minus .95\topskip}%
\topskip=1\topskip \@plus 0.625\topskip \@minus .95\topskip
\def\@texttop{\vskip \z@ \@plus -0.625\topskip \@minus -0.95\topskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Glossaries}
%
% Standard LaTeX provides little and insufficient support for
% glossaries, just a \cs{makeglossary} and \cs{glossary} commands.
% This class does somewhat better. The code follows along the lines
% of that for indexes.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added glossary code}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonecolglossary}
% \begin{macro}{\onecolglossarytrue}
% \begin{macro}{\onecolglossaryfalse}
% TRUE for a one column glossary, otherwise its two column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifonecolglossary
\onecolglossarytrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\onecolglossary}
% \begin{macro}{\twocolglossary}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{onecolglossary} and \cs{twocolglossary}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\onecolglossary}{\onecolglossarytrue}
\newcommand*{\twocolglossary}{\onecolglossaryfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{theglossary}
% The environment \texttt{theglossary} is used for glossaries.
% It makes a glossary with one or two columns, headed by a chapter-like
% title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{theglossary}{%
\if@twocolumn
\@restonecolfalse
\else
\@restonecoltrue
\fi
\ifonecolglossary
\onecolumn
\chapter*{\glossaryname}
\preglossaryhook
\else
\setlength{\columnseprule}{\glossaryrule}
\setlength{\columnsep}{\glossarycolsep}
\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\glossaryname}
\preglossaryhook]%
\fi
\glossarymark
\ifnoglossaryintoc\else
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\glossaryname}
\fi
\thispagestyle{chapter}\parindent\z@
\parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
\begintheglossaryhook}%
{\atendtheglossaryhook\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\twocolumn\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\begintheglossaryhook}
% \begin{macro}{\atendtheglossaryhook}
% Two vacuous macros called as the last thing by \verb?\begin{theglossary}?
% and the first thing by \verb?\end{theglossary}? These could be used,
% for example, to insert another kind of environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\begintheglossaryhook}{}
\newcommand*{\atendtheglossaryhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\preglossaryhook}
% A vacuous macro called after the title is set and before the listing
% starts. The user can modify it to, for example, add some explanatory
% text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\preglossaryhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnoglossaryintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\noglossaryintoc}
% Flag and declarations to control whether or not the glossary
% title is added to the ToC. Default is to put the title
% in the ToC.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnoglossaryintoc
\newcommand*{\glossaryintoc}{\noglossaryintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\noglossaryintoc}{\noglossaryintoctrue}
\glossaryintoc
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossarycolsep}
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryrule}
% When the glossary is two column these lengths control the
% column separation and the width of a rule between the columns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\glossarycolsep \glossarycolsep=35\p@
\newdimen\glossaryrule \glossaryrule=0\p@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryspace}
% Vertical space between `letter blocks' in the glossary.
% Note that this is a macro, not a length.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossaryspace}{%
\par \vskip 1.0\onelineskip \@plus 5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeglossary}
% The preamble command to set up a glossary. Output is to the
% \file{\#1.glo} file. We need the \cs{providecommand} in case \cs{nofiles}
% has been called before the class. \cs{makeglossary} sets up several
% file-specific macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\makeglossary}{}
\renewcommand*{\makeglossary}[1][\jobname]{%
\makememglossaryhook
\@namedef{memglsact#1}{@}% actual
\@namedef{memglsnx#1}{}% no ref
\@namedef{memglsn#1}{\thepage}% num by page
\@namedef{memglsnf#1}{|memjustarg}% no special number format
\if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1memglofile\endcsname
\expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1memglofile\endcsname #1.glo\relax
\typeout{Writing glossary file #1.glo }%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makememglossaryhook}
% A vacuous macro called at the start of the \cs{makeglossary} code.
% It is redefinable to do something useful.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\makememglossaryhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossary}
% The user command for a raw glossary item. The full calling
% sequence looks like: \\
% \cs{glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc} \\
% but most is accomplished by lower level macros. It calls
% \cs{@glossary} to handle the first optional argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\glossary{\@bsphack%
\@ifnextchar [{\@glossary}{\@glossary[\jobname]}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@glossary}
% \cs{@glossary}\oarg{file} handles the first of the \cs{glossary} optional
% arguments, even though the calling sequence looks like: \\
% \cs{@glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}. \\
% It calls \cs{@@glossary} to handle the second optional argument
% and the rest.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glossary[#1]{%
\@ifnextchar ({\@@glossary[#1]}{\@@glossary[#1]()}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@glossary}
% The base macro for \cs{glossary}. Its real calling sequence is: \\
% \cs{@@glossary}\oarg{file}\parg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}. \\
% Provided the glossary output file has been set up it calls
% \cs{@wrglom@m} to write the data, otherwise it throws away its
% arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@glossary[#1](#2)#3#4{%
\@ifundefined{#1memglofile}{%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
\endgroup
\@esphack%
}{%
\def\memglofile{#1}%
\begingroup
\@sanitize
% \end{macrocode}
% Use the correct key, \meta{key} if given, otherwise \meta{term}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@empty#2\@empty
\@wrglom@m{#3}{#3}{#4}%
\else
\@wrglom@m{#2}{#3}{#4}%
\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrglom@m}
% \cs{@wrglom@m}\marg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc} writes its three arguments,
% plus the \meta{ref} and the \meta{num} to the \file{aux} file as the
% arguments to the \cs{@@wrglom@m} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrglom@m}[3]{%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\@@wrglom@m{\memglofile}{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@nameuse{memglsnx\memglofile}}{\@nameuse{memglsn\memglofile}}}%
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrglom@m}
% The calling sequence looks like: \\
% \cs{@@wrglom@m}\marg{file}\marg{key}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num} \\
% but is actually really only \\
% \cs{@@wrglom@m}\marg{file} \\
% It saves the output file identifier in \cs{memglofile} and
% \meta{file} as \cs{m@mgf}, then calls \cs{memwritetoglo}
% to handle the remaining `arguments'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@wrglom@m}[1]{\begingroup
\def\memglofile{\@nameuse{#1memglofile}}%
\def\m@mgf{#1}%
\@sanitize
\memwritetoglo}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memwritetoglo}
% \begin{macro}{\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}
% \cs{memwritetoglo}\marg{key}\marg{name}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num}
% will, at an appropriate time write the raw glossary data to the
% appropriate \file{glo} file.
%
% The \file{aux} file is read twice, once as one of the initial
% actions at the start of the \texttt{document} environment, and again
% at the end of the \texttt{document} environment. The raw glossary
% data must only be written once from the \file{aux} to the \file{glo} file.
% Initially \cs{memwritetoglo} is defined to do nothing, then, after the
% \file{aux} file has been read at the beginning is redefined to do
% its writing.
%
% The Makeindex program expects its input to be like: \\
% \verb?\glosaryentry{key@data}{num}?
% Very cunningly the raw data is fed to the \file{glo}
% file looking like: \\
% \verb?\glossaryentry{key@{\memgloterm{term} \memglodesc{desc} \memgloref{ref}}{num}? \\
% which as far as Makeindex is concerned is simply: \\
% \verb?\glosaryentry{key@{data}}{num}? \\
% (note where all the braces are).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memwritetoglo}[5]{\endgroup}
\newcommand{\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}[5]{%
\immediate\write \memglofile{\string\glossaryentry{#1\@nameuse{memglsact\m@mgf}
{\string\memgloterm{#2}}{\string\memglodesc{#3}}
{\string\memgloref{#4}}\@nameuse{memglsnf\m@mgf}}{#5}}%
\endgroup}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\let\memwritetoglo\@ctualm@mwritetoglo}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossactual}
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossref}
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossnum}
% \begin{macro}{\changeglossnumformat}
% There are internal macros that are file-dependant, their names
% being constructed from the file name plus a fixed name. The
% \cs{makeglossary} command initializes these but the user may well need
% to change them. In the macros below, \texttt{...actual} refers to the
% actual character in a Makeindex configuration file (default \texttt{@}),
% \texttt{...ref} to the \meta{ref} glossary argument, \texttt{...num}
% to the meta{num} argument (default \cs{thepage}) and \texttt{...numformat}
% to the Makeindex encapsulating command. Example uses are:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \changeglossactual[file]{?}
% \changeglossref[file]{\thepage}
% \changeglossnum[file]{\thesection}
% \changeglossnumref[file]{|textbf}
% \end{verbatim}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\changeglossactual}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsact#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\changeglossref}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsnx#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\changeglossnum}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsn#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\changeglossnumformat}[2][\jobname]{%
\@namedef{memglsnf#1}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\glossitem}
% The final sorted glossary data is in the form: \\
% \cs{glossitem}\marg{term}\marg{desc}\marg{ref}\marg{num} \\
% The definition here does little.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glossitem}[4]{#1 #2 #3 #4\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memgloterm}
% \begin{macro}{\memglodesc}
% \begin{macro}{\memgloref}
% \begin{macro}{\memglonum}
% These are wrappers round the \meta{term}, \meta{desc}, \meta{ref} and
% \meta{num} elements in the final data. They are vacuous to start with.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memgloterm}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\memglodesc}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\memgloref}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\memglonum}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printglossary}
% \cs{printglossary}\oarg{file} inputs the glossary \file{gst} file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\printglossary}[1][\jobname]{\@input@{#1.gls}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Notes/Marginalia}
%
%
% \subsection{A simple interface for specifying locations}
%
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{added}
%
% The \Lpack{memoir} class as of December 2009 supports \cs{marginpar},
% \cs{sidepar}, and \cs{sidebar} for placing information in a margin.
% The means of specifying in which margin the information should be put
% is different for each of these. Here a consistent location interface
% is provided for all marginalia.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@msetm@argin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mm@argin}
% A workhorse macro for setting a margin placement code. The argument
% may be one of: left, right, outer, or inner, with \cs{m@mm@argin} defined
% as the corresponding codes of 0, 1, 2, or 3. An unkown argument is coded
% as a negative number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@msetm@argin}[1]{%
\def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{left}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\def\m@mm@argin{0}%
\else
\def\@tempb{right}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\def\m@mm@argin{1}%
\else
\def\@tempb{outer}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\def\m@mm@argin{2}%
\else
\def\@tempb{inner}%
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
\def\m@mm@argin{3}%
\else
\def\m@mm@argin{-1}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmemtortm}
% \begin{macro}{\memtortmtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\memtortmfalse}
% A flag set TRUE if the marginalia is to be moved to the right of the text
% and FALSE if it is to be moved to the left of the text.
% \begin{macrocode}
% MEM-TO-RighT-Margin
\newif\ifmemtortm
\memtortmtrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mwhich@margin}
% \cs{m@mwhich@margin}\marg{code} sets \cs{ifmemtortm} TRUE or FALSE depending
% on the value of \meta{code} (0 to 3), and other factors.
% \begin{description}
% \item[Two column document] If the first column, to the left, otherwise
% to the right, irrespective the document being
% one- or two-side.
% \item[One sided document] If code = 0 (left), to the left, otherwise
% (code = 1 (right), 2 (outer), 3 (inner)) to the right.
% \item[Two sided document] depends on whether a recto or verso page:
% \begin{description}
% \item[Recto (odd) page] right if code = 1 (right) or 2 (outer), otherwise
% left.
% \item[Verso (even) page] left if code = 0 (left) or 2 (outer), otherwise
% right.
% \end{description}
% \end{description}
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mwhich@margin}[1]{%
\memtortmtrue
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn% left
\memtortmfalse
\else% right
\memtortmtrue
\fi
\else
\if@twoside
\checkoddpage
\ifcase #1\relax% 0 left
\memtortmfalse
\or% 1 right
\memtortmtrue
\or% 2 outer
\ifoddpage
\memtortmtrue
\else
\memtortmfalse
\fi
\or% 3 inner
\ifoddpage
\memtortmfalse
\else
\memtortmtrue
\fi
\fi% end ifcase
\else% oneside
\ifnum #1=\z@% 0 left, all else right
\memtortmfalse
\else
\memtortmtrue
\fi
\fi% end if@twoside
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Marginpars}
%
% A \cs{marginpar} is a kind of floating object --- you can't control
% exactly where it will go. There is one problem with the kernel
% definition of \cs{marginpar} in that sometimes a \cs{marginpar} may
% end up on the wrong side of the page. The following is an attempt
% to fix that using the odd/even page check provided as part of
% the class.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar}
% The part of the code for \cs{marginpar} that deals with deciding which
% side of the page it should be printed on is \cs{@addmarginpar}, buried
% away in the kernel's \texttt{output} routine. A couple of minor changes are made
% to the kernel code. The first is at the beginning where I have added
% the \cs{checkoddpage} page checking code.
% \changes{v1.618033988d}{2010/02/26}{fixed twoside -> left marrgin
% bug, reported by Frank Wikstr\"om, on private email}
% In the new margin placement syntax, there is a new syntax: always
% left, in twoside mode. This cannot be implemented using the normal
% marginpar placement controls, so we have to add our own.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@addmarginpar{%
\checkoddpage
% \end{macrocode}
% Continue with the kernel code. The twocolumn stuff in the new syntax
% scheme is the same as in the kernel.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@next\@marbox\@currlist{\@cons\@freelist\@marbox
\@cons\@freelist\@currbox}\@latexbug\@tempcnta\@ne
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.618033988d}{2010/02/26}{added as a part of the above
% mentioned fix}
% Here we add the new stuff. We make use of the fact that we have
% hidden all the page checking in \verb?\m@mwhich@margin?, and we only
% fire it of if we know \verb?\marginparmargin? have been used (via
% \verb?\ifm@msetmp?).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@msetmp%
% \@tempcnta > 0 => right side of page
% \@tempcnta < 0 => left side of page
\m@mwhich@margin{\m@mmpar@margin}% set left or right margin
\ifmemtortm%
\@tempcnta\@ne\relax%
\else%
\@tempcnta\m@ne\relax%
\fi%
\else%
\if@mparswitch
% \end{macrocode}
% The next line, reading \\
% \verb?\ifodd\c@page \else\@tempcnta\m@ne \fi? \\
% is where the odd/even page checking is done in the kernel code. I
% replace it with my code, and then continue with the kernel.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifoddpage \else \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi%
\fi%
\if@reversemargin \@tempcnta -\@tempcnta \fi%
\fi%
\fi%
\ifnum\@tempcnta <\z@ \global\setbox\@marbox\box\@currbox \fi
\@tempdima\@mparbottom
\advance\@tempdima -\@pageht
\advance\@tempdima\ht\@marbox
\ifdim\@tempdima >\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% The next line in the kernel reads: \\
% \verb?\@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page \thepage\space moved}? \\
% I have changed the warning message to give the user an indication
% of the severity of the move. Then follow the kernel on to the end.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page
\thepage\space moved by \the\@tempdima}%
\else
\@tempdima\z@
\fi
\global\@mparbottom\@pageht
\global\advance\@mparbottom\@tempdima
\global\advance\@mparbottom\dp\@marbox
\global\advance\@mparbottom\marginparpush
\advance\@tempdima -\ht\@marbox
\global\setbox \@marbox
\vbox {\vskip \@tempdima
\box \@marbox}%
\global \ht\@marbox \z@
\global \dp\@marbox \z@
\kern -\@pagedp
\nointerlineskip
\hb@xt@\columnwidth
{\ifnum \@tempcnta >\z@
\hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep
\else
\hskip -\marginparsep \hskip -\marginparwidth
\fi
\box\@marbox \hss}%
\nointerlineskip
\hbox{\vrule \@height\z@ \@width\z@ \@depth\@pagedp}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Marginpar -- margin interface}
%
% The `standard' method of specifying the desired margin for a \cs{marginpar}
% consists of the two macros \cs{normalmarginpar} and \cs{reversemarginpar},
% whose effects depend on whether the document is one- or two-sided, whether
% the page is recto or verso, and if it is set in one- or two-columns.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@msetmp}
% \begin{macro}{m@msetmptrue}
% \begin{macro}{m@msetmpfalse}
% TRUE if the macro \cs{marginparmargin} has been called.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@msetmp
\m@msetmpfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\marginparmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mmpar@margin}
% The user command for specifying the desired margin for \cs{marginpar}s.
% The code is stored as \cs{m@mmpar@margin}, and \cs{setmpbools} is called to
% convert to the regular \cs{marginpar} booleans.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\marginparmargin}[1]{%
\m@msetmptrue
\m@msetm@argin{#1}%
\ifnum\m@mm@argin<\z@
\@memwarn{Bad \string\marginparmargin\space argument `#1'\MessageBreak
set to `outer'}%
\gdef\m@mmpar@margin{2}% set as outer
\else
\global\let\m@mmpar@margin\m@mm@argin
\fi
\setmpbools}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setmpbools}
% Given \cs{m@mmpar@margin}, \cs{setmpbools} sets the corresponding
% \cs{marginpar} location booleans.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setmpbools}{%
\if@twoside
\@mparswitchtrue
\else
\@mparswitchfalse
\fi
\ifcase\m@mmpar@margin\relax% 0 left
\@reversemargintrue% \sideparswitchfalse \reversesidepartrue
\or% 1 right
\@reversemarginfalse% \sideparswitchfalse \reversesideparfalse
\or% 2 outer
\@reversemarginfalse% \sideparswitchtrue \reversesideparfalse
\or% 3 inner
\@reversemargintrue% \sideparswitchtrue \reversesidepartrue
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@msetmpcodes}{%
\if@mparswitch% 2 sided
\if@reversemargin% inner
\def\m@mmpar@margin{3}%
\else% outer
\def\m@mmpar@margin{2}%
\fi
\else% 1 sided
\if@reversemargin% left
\def\m@mmpar@margin{0}%
\else% right
\def\m@mmpar@margin{1}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{A fixed marginpar}
%
%
% Introduce a non-floating marginpar.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{sidepar} and supports for a fixed
% marginpar (from patch v1.8)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parnopar}
% From \theTeXbook{} Exercise 14.15. It creates an `invisible' end/start paragraph,
% and may be used for getting \TeX{} to try a pagebreak.
%
% Roman Eisle (email 2008/09/05) found a problem with the original
% definition as its effects continued on: \\
% \verb?\newcommand{\parnopar}{\parfillskip=0pt\par\parskip=0pt\noindent}? \\
% and he supplied the fix used below.
%
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/24}{Changed \cs{parnopar} to limit its effect
% to a single instance}
% \changes{v3.6e}{2010/08/17}{made \cs{parnopar} sit inside a group}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\parnopar}{{\parfillskip=0pt\par\parskip=0pt\noindent}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifreversesidepar}
% \begin{macro}{\ifsideparswitch}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added footnote explaining the default}
% Analogues of \cs{marginpar} controls.\footnote{Note that for some
% now forgotten reason the default placement of the \cs{sidepar} is
% reversed in comparison to say \cs{marginpar}. As not to change
% existing documents, we have left the default like this.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifreversesidepar
% \reversesideparfalse
\reversesidepartrue
\newif\ifsideparswitch
\sideparswitchfalse
\if@twoside \sideparswitchtrue \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added}
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@msetsp}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msetsptrue}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msetspfalse}
% \begin{macrocode}
%% true if \sideparmargin used
\newif\ifm@msetsp
\m@msetspfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added}
% \begin{macro}{\sideparmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mspar@margin}
% User command for specifing the margin for \cs{sidepar}s.
% The numeric code is stored in \cs{m@mspar@margin}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sideparmargin}[1]{%
\m@msetsptrue
\m@msetm@argin{#1}%
\ifnum\m@mm@argin<\z@
\@memwarn{Bad \string\sideparmargin\space argument `#1'\MessageBreak
set to `outer'}%
\gdef\m@mspar@margin{2}% set as outer
\else
\global\let\m@mspar@margin\m@mm@argin
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msidepar@left}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msidepar@right}
% Move a \cs{sidepar} into the left/right margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@msidepar@left}{%
\@tempdimc\marginparwidth
\advance\@tempdimc\marginparsep
\kern-\@tempdimc}
\newcommand*{\m@msidepar@right}{%
\@tempdimc\columnwidth
\advance\@tempdimc\marginparsep
\kern\@tempdimc}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added}
% \begin{macro}{\setspbools}
% Given the \cs{m@mspar@margin} code, calculates the corresponding
% \cs{sidepar} location booleans.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setspbools}{%
\ifcase\m@mspar@margin\relax% 0 left
\sideparswitchfalse \reversesidepartrue
\or% 1 right
\sideparswitchfalse \reversesideparfalse
\or% 2 outer
\sideparswitchtrue \reversesideparfalse
\or% 3 inner
\sideparswitchtrue \reversesidepartrue
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added}
% \begin{macro}{\setspcode}
% Given the \cs{sidepar} location booleans, sets up the corresponding
% \cs{m@mspar@margin} numeric codes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setspcode}{%
\ifsideparswitch
\ifreversesidepar
\def\m@mspar@margin{3}% inner
\else
\def\m@mspar@margin{2}% outer
\fi
\else
\ifreversesidepar
\def\m@mspar@margin{0}% left
\else
\def\m@mspar@margin{1}% right
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added}
% \begin{macro}{\sideparfont}
% \begin{macro}{\sideparform}
% The font to be used for \cs{sidepar}s and the alignment for it.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/04}{Changed default font}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{added \cs{sideparform}}
% The \cs{sideparform} holds code that will set the text flush against
% the edge of the text.\footnote{One might consider redefining this
% using the \cs{RaggedRight} and \cs{RaggedLeft} macros from the
% ragged2e package.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sideparfont}{\normalfont\normalsize}
\newcommand*{\sideparform}{\ifmemtortm\raggedright\else\raggedleft\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidepar}
% \begin{macro}{\@sidepar}
% \begin{macro}{\sideparvshift}
% \cs{sidepar}\oarg{left}\marg{right} (per \cs{marginpar}).
% Sidepars had a nasty habit of moving up or down depending on whether
% characters in the sidepar and the main text line have ascenders and/or
% descenders. The length \cs{sideparvshift} was provided to
% enable adjustments. This is Dan Luecking's modified version of my
% original code
% (CTT \textit{Re: sidepars drift up a point}, 2006/04/11) which does a much
% better job,
% and the default for \cs{sideparvshift} is now 0pt.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Fixed \cs{sidepars} from moving up and down
% (mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Normalised font in \cs{@sidepar}
% (mempatch v4.9)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{\cs{@sidepar} changed to fit the
% interface just added}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{added \cs{sideparform}}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/29}{The inserted text should have the same
% baseline stretch as the rest of the page notes.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidepar}{\@dblarg{\@sidepar}}
\long\def\@sidepar[#1]#2{\leavevmode\@bsphack\strut\vadjust{%
\checkoddpage
\ifm@msetsp% \sideparmargin used
%%%% \setspbools
\else% \sideparmargin not used, set the \m@mspar@margin code
\setspcode
\fi
\rlap{\kern-\parindent
\m@mwhich@margin{\m@mspar@margin}% set left or right margin
\ifmemtortm
\m@msidepar@right
\else
\m@msidepar@left
\fi
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{%
\begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\sideparform\sideparfont%
\ifmemtortm #2\else #1\fi
\end{minipage}%
\vss}%
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\sideparvshift% default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox
\kern-\ht0
\box0 \vss}}}%
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Vertical shift for sidepar to align with text line
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sideparvshift}
\setlength{\sideparvshift}{0pt}
%%%% \setlength{\sideparvshift}{-2.08ex}% seems to work for all font sizes
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Sidebars}
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/19}{Added experimental code for sidebars}
%
% On 2002/10/22 Donald Arseneau posted the following code to \ctt{} for adding
% sidebars to plain TeX.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newinsert\sideins
% \skip\sideins=0pt
% \count\sideins=0
% \dimen\sideins=2in
%
% \def\sidebarvsep{25pt}
% \def\sidebarhsep{15pt}
%
% \let\mainpagecontents\pagecontents
%
% \def\sidecontents{%
% \ifvoid\sideins\else
% {\advance\hsize\sidebarhsep
% \moveright\hsize \vtop to0pt{%
% \vskip-\sidebarvsep \vskip\topskip % offset by difference
% \unvbox\sideins \vss}%
% }\fi}
% \def\pagecontents{\sidecontents\mainpagecontents}
% \long\def\sidebar#1{
% \insert\sideins{%
% \splittopskip\sidebarvsep\relax
% \hsize 1.5in \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt \it
% \noindent \vbox to \sidebarvsep{}\ignorespaces #1%
% \ifhmode \unskip\strut\fi \par
% }%
% }
%
% \end{verbatim}
%
% The following started off (2002/03/19) as my attempt to rewrite the above
% into a form suitable for LaTeX, and this class in particular.
%
% Donald Arseneau came up with some improvements to my sidebar code.
% The impetus
% for this came from a CTT thread, \textit{whitespace after my command},
% 2006/11/30 and earlier. In email to me on 2006/11/30 he said:
% \begin{quotation}
% For \Lpack{memoir} \cs{sidebar}, it seems the rules are expanding
% to fill the space for the sidebar, so here is my suggested change
% to \cs{sidecontents}.
%
% It occurs to me that a separate \cs{sidetsep} (or \cs{sidetopsep})
% would be more valuable than having an explicit 1\cs{onelineskip}.
%
% I grouped common code into two macros, and altered \cs{sidebarform} too.
% \end{quotation}
%
% Since then we have been going back and forth, with the result that
% practically all the complex code is Donald's.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Major rewrite of \cs{sidebar} code
% (mempatch v4.6 and v4.9)}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\sideins}
% Create a new insert called \cs{sideins}, which also creates a corresponding
% skip, count, dimen, and box. \\
% \verb?\skip\sideins? is the extra vertical space to allow on the page for
% the insert, \\
% \verb?\count\sideins? is the magnification factor for page breaking, \\
% \verb?\dimen\sideins? is the maximum insertion size (height) per page, \\
% and the inserted material will be in \verb?\box\sideins? when a page is output.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\sideins
\skip\sideins=0pt
\count\sideins=0
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebartopsep}
% Separation at the top of a sidebar.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sidebartopsep}
\setlength{\sidebartopsep}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsidebarheight}
% The macro \cs{setsidebarheight}\marg{length} sets the total
% height of sidebars on a page to \meta{length}.
% This is an interface for controlling \verb?\dimen\sideins? properly,
% taking account of \cs{topskip} and the sidebar font size (and therefore
% should be invoked \emph{after} declaring \cs{sidebarfont}).
%
% Note that \cs{sidebartopsep} is \emph{not} included as part of the
% allocated height.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsidebarheight}[1]{%
\setlength{\dimen\sideins}{#1}%
\advance\dimen\sideins-\topskip
\advance\dimen\sideins\ht\strutbox}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarhsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarvsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarwidth}
% The length \cs{sidebarhsep} is the gap between the typeblock and the sidebar.
% \cs{sidebarvsep} is the vertical gap between sidebars on a page.
% The maximum number of sidebar lines on a page is
% \verb?1 + (\dimen\sideins - \sidebarvsep)?, assuming \verb?\dimen\sideins?
% is defined in terms of \cs{onelineskip}.
% The width of the sidebar is \cs{sidebarwidth}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sidebarhsep}
\newlength{\sidebarvsep}
\newlength{\sidebarwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarfont}
% The font for typesetting the contents of a sidebar.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{Added a default for \cs{sidebarfont}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebarfont}{\normalfont\normalsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsidebars}
% \cs{setsidebars}\marg{hsep}\marg{width}\marg{vsep}\marg{topsep}\marg{font}\marg{height}
% sets the main \cs{sidebar} parameters. A \verb?*? argument means leave the
% setting as is.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{setsidebars} (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setsidebars}[6]{%
\nametest{#1}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidebarhsep}{#1}\@memznegtest{\sidebarhsep}%
\fi
\nametest{#2}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidebarwidth}{#2}\@memznegtest{\sidebarwidth}%
\fi
\nametest{#3}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidebarvsep}{#3}\@memnegtest{\sidebarvsep}%
\fi
\nametest{#4}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidebartopsep}{#4}%
\fi
\nametest{#5}{*}\ifsamename\else
\def\sidebarfont{#5}%
\fi
\nametest{#6}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setsidebarheight{#6}%
\ifdim\dimen\sideins>\z@\else
%%%% \@memerror{\protect\sidebarheight\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
\@memwarn{\protect\sidebarheight\space is zero or negative}%
\fi
\fi}
\setsidebars{\marginparsep}% sidebarhsep
{\marginparwidth}% sidebarwidth
{\onelineskip}% sidebarvsep
{0pt}% sidebartopsep
{\normalsize\normalfont}% sidebarfont
{\textheight}% sidebarheight
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarform}
% \cs{sidebarform} sets the `raggedness' in a sidebar. The current definition
% is less ragged than \cs{raggedright}. Examples:
% \begin{verbatim}
% for flushleftright \renewcommand{\sidebarform}{}
% for raggedleft \renewcommand{\sidebarform}{\raggedleft}
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{sidebarform} (from patch v1.5)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{Added bidi support to \cs{sidebarform}}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{changed to make the text flush
% against the text}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebarform}{%\rightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em}
%\memRTLrightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em
\ifmemtortm\raggedright\else\raggedleft\fi%
% \ifmemtortm\memRTLrightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em\else\memRTLleftskip=\z@ \@plus 2em\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifsidebaroneside}
% Flag for oneside.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/04/05}{Added \cs{ifsidebaroneside}}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/07}{flaged as deprecated, the macro
% is not used at all, kept just to ensure that documents does not
% crash, TO BE DELETED}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifsidebaroneside
\if@twoside\sidebaronesidefalse\else\sidebaronesidetrue\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msidebar@margin}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/07}{removed the mention of
% \cs{sidebaroneside}, as it is deprecated}
% \cs{sidebarmargin}\marg{side} sets the side where sidebars will be printed.
% Valid arguments are: left, right, outer, or inner.
%
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added \cs{sidebarmargin} (mempatch v3.2)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Changed to match new general interface}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidebarmargin}[1]{%
\m@msetm@argin{#1}%
\ifnum\m@mm@argin<\z@
\@memwarn{Bad \string\sidebarmargin\space argument `#1'\MessageBreak
set to `outer'}%
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{2}% set as outer
\else
\global\let\m@msidebar@margin\m@mm@argin
\fi}
%%%% default outer
\gdef\m@msidebar@margin{2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@sideb@left}
% \begin{macro}{\m@sideb@right}
% Code used later to put sidebars into the desired margin.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{m@sideb@left} and \cs{m@sideb@right}
% (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@sideb@left}{%
\@tempdimc \sidebarwidth
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\kern-\@tempdimc}
\newcommand*{\m@sideb@right}{%
\@tempdimc \columnwidth% or \hsize
\advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
\kern\@tempdimc}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecontents}
% This locates the horizontal position of a sidebar. On two column
% pages it is put in the margin next to the column where \cs{sidebar}
% is called, otherwise it is put in the outer (foredge) margin, except
% for the oneside option when it is put into the right hand margin.
% This can be separately controlled via \cs{ifsidebaroneside}.
% Emanuele Vicentini\footnote{\texttt{emanuelevicentini@yahoo.it},
% private email, 2004/04/05}
% suggested to code for the oneside option.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/04/05}{Changed \cs{sidecontents} for oneside option}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Changed \cs{sidecontents} for \cs{sidebarmargin}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Modified \cs{sidecontents} (mempatch v4.6)}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/15}{changed to use
% \cs{m@mwhich@margin} for determining wheter to move right ot left}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidecontents}{\hbox to \z@{%
\m@mwhich@margin{\m@msidebar@margin}%
\ifmemtortm
\m@sideb@right
\else
\m@sideb@left
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% DA and I have gone to and fro on the next bit of code trying to get
% the top alignment correct.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \vtop to0pt{%
% \vskip\onelineskip
% \unvbox\sideins \vss}%
% \end{verbatim}
% DA has the last word.
% \begin{macrocode}
\vtop to0pt{%
\normalsize\normalfont\sidebarfont% select font so we know the strut size
\vskip\topskip \vskip-\ht\strutbox
\vskip\sidebartopsep% extra vertical shift
\unvbox\sideins \vss}%
\hss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebar}
% \cs{sidebar}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} into a sidebar.
%
% Florence Henry (\texttt{florence.henry@obspm.fr}) in the thread
% \textit{Of memoir, sidebar, and justification}, 2003/04/02, pointed
% out that \texttt{itemize} in a \cs{sidebar} could overflow. DA gave the
% solution hint.
%
% DA says that having stacked insertions position properly is difficult.
% Here he uses the size of the strut to regulate both the height and the
% depth of each insertion (much as for footnotes). The following is his
% code and commentary.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Revised \cs{sidebar}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{DA's rewrite of \cs{sidebar} (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebar}[1]{%
\insert\sideins{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Begin the insertion with settings. The height of the strut box
% (dependant on the font) will determine the top alignment both initially
% and after a page break. The setting for maximum depth does not control
% anything; see the code further on instead.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{removed
% \cs{normalfont}\cs{normalsize}, as these are now in the \cs{sidebarfont}}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/29}{the text should have the same baseline
% stretch as the rest of the page notes.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\hsize\sidebarwidth
\@parboxrestore
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{Added margin placement check
% inside \cs{sidebar}}
% Even though the margin placement is handled inside
% \cs{sidecontents}, there are some timming issues such that
% \cs{ifmemtortm} is executed too late for \cs{sidebar}s internals to
% make use of it. Fixed by adding the margin check to \cs{sidebar} as well.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@mwhich@margin{\m@msidebar@margin}%
\sidebarform\sidebarfont
\splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox % doesn't do anything useful
% \end{macrocode}
% Allow a free split at the top (so this whole insertion moves
% to the next page if it does not fit).
% \begin{macrocode}
\allowbreak
% \end{macrocode}
% Control the (vertical) positioning of non-split entries. Footnotes (and
% previous versions of \cs{sidebar}) us a strut at the beginning of the text,
% but we will allow a baseline-skip to perform the same function. This
% method also introduces a \cs{parskip} when the paragraph begins, so we
% counteract that. (The problem with an initial strut is that it messes'
% up entries that begin with vertical space.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\prevdepth=\dp\strutbox % supersedes a "top-strut"
\vskip-\parskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the user's sidebar entry:
% \begin{macrocode}
#1%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the entry ended still in a paragraph, take the chance to insert a
% final strut; then end the paragraph.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifvmode\else
\unskip\@finalstrut\strutbox
\fi\par
% \end{macrocode}
% Explicitly force the effect of \cs{maxdepth} (\cs{splitmaxdepth}),
% but using the depth of the strut in the r\^{o}le of \cs{maxdepth}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\prevdepth>\dp\strutbox \prevdepth=\dp\strutbox \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now control how adjacent entries abut (whether or not a final strut got
% inserted) and how an entry fits at the bottom of the page. Use \cs{vskip}s
% to move from the text bottom to where a strut would bottom out,
% but insert an allowed breakpoint at the baseline position
% (so that the entry baseline may match the page's baseline). Finally
% insert the extra separation between entries.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\prevdepth>99\p@
\nobreak
\vskip-\prevdepth
\allowbreak
\vskip\dp\strutbox
\fi
\vskip\sidebarvsep}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Footnotes}
%
% For my reference, in case I want to fiddle with it even more
% than I have already done so, here is the kernel code (from \file{ltfloat.dtx})
% for footnotes.
% \DescribeMacro{\footins}
% The insert for footnotes.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newinsert\footins
% \skip\footins=\bigskipamount
% \count\footins=1000
% \dimen\footins=8in
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnoterule}
% Draws the rule separating footnotes from the main text. It is executed
% after a \cs{vspace} of \verb?\skip\footins? and should take no vertical
% space.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width 2in \kern 2.6\p@}
%
% \@definecounter{footnote}
% \def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}
% \@definecounter{mpfootnote}
% \def\thempfootnote{\itshape\@alph\c@mpfootnote}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@makefnmark}
% Generates the footnote marker from \cs{@thefnmark}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
%
% \DeclareRobustCommand*\textsuperscript[1]{%
% \@textsuperscript{\selectfont#1}}
% \def\@textsuperscript#1{%
% {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
%
% \newdimen\footnotesep
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnote}
% \cs{footnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text} is what the user uses for footnoting.
% It defines \cs{@thefnmark} and calls \cs{@footnotemark} and
% \cs{@footnotetext} to do the work.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
% \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnote}
% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnote}.
% It defines \cs{@thefnmark} and calls \cs{@footnotemark} and
% \cs{@footnotetext} to do the work.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@xfootnote[#1]{%
% \begingroup
% \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \endgroup
% \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotetext}
% \cs{@footnotetext}\marg{text} sets up for typeseting the footnote
% (at the bottom of the page). It calls \cs{@makefntext}\marg{text}
% to actually do the typesetting (\cs{@makefntext} has to be supplied
% by a class or package).
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@footnotetext#1{%
% \insert\footins{%
% \reset@font\footnotesize
% \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
% \splittopskip\footnotesep
% \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
% \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
% \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
% \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
% \color@begingroup
% \@makefntext{%
% \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
% \color@endgroup}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnotemark}
% \cs{footnotemark}\oarg{num} the user uses this to produce just a
% footnote mark in the text.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnotemark{%
% \@ifnextchar[\@xfootnotemark
% {\stepcounter{footnote}%
% \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
% \@footnotemark}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnotemark}
% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnotemark}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@xfootnotemark[#1]{%
% \begingroup
% \c@footnote #1\relax
% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
% \endgroup
% \@footnotemark}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotemark}
% Typesets the mark in the main text, via \cs{@makefnmark}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@footnotemark{%
% \leavevmode
% \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
% \@makefnmark
% \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
% \relax}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnotetext}
% \cs{footnotetext}\oarg{num}\marg{text} is user view for creating a footnote
% without a marker in the main text.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\footnotetext{%
% \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext
% {\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \@footnotetext}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@xfootnotetext}
% Handles the optional \meta{num} argument to \cs{footnotetext}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@xfootnotenext[#1]{%
% \begingroup
% \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
% \endgroup
% \@footnotetext}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfn}
% \DescribeMacro{\thempfn}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@mpfn{footnote}
% \def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% And from \file{ltboxes.dtx} for the \texttt{minipage} environment.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfn}
% \DescribeMacro{\thempfn}
% \DescribeMacro{\@footnotetext}
% When setting up
% the environment, it includes:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@
% \let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@mpfootnotetext}
% Later it defines \cs{@mpfootnotetext}\marg{text} as the minipage version
% of \cs{@footnotetext}.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
% \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
% \unvbox\@mpfootins
% \reset@font\footnotesize
% \hsize\columnwidth
% \@parboxrestore
% \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
% \csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
% \color@begingroup
% \@makefntext{%
% \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
% \color@endgroup}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% That completes the kernel extracts.
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
% Usually, footnotes are separated from the main body of the text
% by a small rule. This rule is drawn by the macro \cs{footnoterule}.
% We have to make sure that the rule takes no vertical space (see
% \file{plain.tex}) so we compensate for the natural heigth of the
% rule of 0.4pt by adding the right amount of vertical skip.
%
% To prevent the rule from colliding with the footnote we first add
% a little negative vertical skip, then we put the rule and make
% sure we end up at the same point where we begun this operation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{%
\kern-3\p@
\hrule width .4\columnwidth
\kern 2.6\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% And just to make sure that we are using memoir's font-dependent
% skips:
% \begin{macrocode}
\skip\footins=\bigskipamount
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
% Footnotes are numbered per chapter. The counter is predefined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The footnote mechanism of \LaTeX{} calls the macro \cs{@makefntext}
% to produce the actual footnote. The macro gets the text of the
% footnote as its argument and should use \cs{@thefnmark} as the mark
% of the footnote. The macro \cs{@makefntext} is called when
% effectively inside a \cs{parbox} of width \cs{columnwidth} (i.e.,
% with \cs{hsize} = \cs{columnwidth}).
%
% An example of what can be achieved is given by the following piece
% of \TeX{} code.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
% \@setpar{\@@par
% \@tempdima = \hsize
% \advance\@tempdima-10pt
% \parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}%
% \par
% \parindent 1em\noindent
% \hbox to \z@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
% \end{verbatim}
% The effect of this definition is that all lines of the footnote
% are indented by 10pt, while the first line of a new paragraph is
% indented by 1em. To change these dimensions, just substitute the
% desired value for `10pt' (in both places) or `1em'. The mark is
% flushright against the footnote.
%
% The standard classes use a simpler macro, in which the
% footnote text is set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no
% indentation except on the first line of a paragraph, and the
% first line of the footnote. Thus, all the macro must do is set
% \cs{parindent} to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs
% and put the proper indentation before the mark.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{%
% \parindent 1em%
% \noindent
% \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% This class provides a configurable specification.
%
% Normally, if two or more footnotes are sequentially applied: \\
% \verb?...text\footnote{first}\footnote{second}...? \\
% the markers in the text run together
% (e.g., \ldots text\textsuperscript{12}).
% The class provides a separator between the markers
% (e.g., \ldots text\textsuperscript{1,2}).
% The underlying ideas for this are from the \Lpack{ledmac}
% package~\cite{LEDMAC},
% which in turn got them from the \Lpack{footmisc} package~\cite{FOOTMISC}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added footnote separator (from patch v1.5)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multfootsep}
% The separator between multiple footnote markers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\multfootsep}{\textsuperscript{\normalfont,}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multiplefootnotemarker}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mmf@prepare}
% \cs{m@mmf@prepare} is a pair of self-cancelling kerns.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\multiplefootnotemarker}{3sp}
\newcommand*{\m@mmf@prepare}{%
\kern-\multiplefootnotemarker
\kern\multiplefootnotemarker\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mmf@check}
% If \cs{m@mmf@check} recognises the last kern as \cs{multiplefootnotemarker}
% it typesets \cs{multfootsep}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mmf@check}{%
\ifdim\lastkern=\multiplefootnotemarker\relax
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\unkern
\multfootsep
\spacefactor\@x@sf\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@footnotemark}
% We have to modify the kernel's % \cs{@footnotetext} and
% \cs{@footnotemark}
% to implement the separator.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Stop body font changes leaking into footnotes (mempatch v3.7)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Keep single spacing in footnotes (mempatch v4.6)}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{Made the 'single spacing' configurable.}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/20/22}{\cs{@footnotetext} is redefined later
% on, so the \cs{m@mold@footnotetext} needs to be moved, we also
% remove this version of \cs{@footnotetext} such that people do
% not mistake this for the `real' \cs{@footnotetext}}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\@footnotemark}{%
\leavevmode
\ifhmode
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\m@mmf@check
\nobreak
\fi
\@makefnmark
\m@mmf@prepare
\ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@multiple@marker}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/07}{We copy the code above into a utility
% macro to be used else where} This code is rather handy, so we
% make an internal macro to reuse it later (for page notes).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mem@multiple@marker}[1]{%
\leavevmode
\ifhmode
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\m@mmf@check
\nobreak
\fi
#1%
\m@mmf@prepare
\ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% %
% \begin{macro}{\footmarkwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\footmarksep}
% \begin{macro}{\footparindent}
% The mark is typset right justified in a box with width \cs{footmarkwidth}.
% Second and later lines of the text are offset \cs{footmarksep} from the
% end of the box. Paragraphs in footnotes are indented by \cs{parindent}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\footmarkwidth}
\newlength{\footmarksep}
\newlength{\footparindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\footscript}
% The marker is typeset according to \cs{footscript}\marg{marker}. This
% can be specified by the user via \cs{footmarkstyle}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\footmarkstyle}[1]{\def\footscript##1{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makefootmarkhook}
% A vacuous macro that the user can redefine to do something useful?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makefootmarkhook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footfootmark}
% This macro typesets the footnote marker.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footfootmark}{%
\ifdim\footmarkwidth < \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\llap{\hb@xt@ -\footmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
\hspace*{-\footmarkwidth}}%
\else
\ifdim\footmarkwidth = \z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Positive width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hb@xt@\footmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makefootmark}
% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
% The class version of \cs{@makefntext}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makefootmark}[1]{%
\leavevmode
\parindent \footparindent\noindent
\leftskip\footmarksep\relax
\advance\leftskip \footmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
\makefootmarkhook\relax
\footfootmark #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% In the thread \textit{memoir and footnote.sty trouble}, 2003/04/02,
% Patrik Nyman (\texttt{patrik.nyman@orient.su.se}) noted that in order
% to stop \file{footnote.sty} (from \texttt{mdwtools}) barfing my original \\
% \verb?\newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{\makefootmark{#1}}? \\
% had to be changed.
% \changes{v1.4}{2004/11/22}{Revised \cs{@makefntext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{\makefootmark #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% All that now remains for the footer part is to set the defaults.
% \begin{macrocode}
\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-1.8em}
\setlength{\footparindent}{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
% The footnote markers that are printed in the text to point to the
% footnotes should be produced by the macro \cs{@makefnmark}. We use
% the default definition for it.
% \begin{macrocode}
%\renewcommand\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{%
% \normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footref}
% Sometimes it is desireable to reference a footnote more than
% once.
% If a footnote is labelled (e.g., \verb?\footnote{text\label{fn}}?) then
% the macro \cs{footref}\marg{fn} will print the footnote marker.
% The code is essentially a much simplified version of \cs{footnotemark}
% from \file{ltfloat.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Added \cs{footref}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footref}[1]{%
\begingroup
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}%
\endgroup
\@footnotemark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The following code for footnotes that can include verbatims is based
% on Jeremy Gibbons \textit{`Footnotes with verbatim material'}
% in the column \textit{`Hey --- it works'} (edited by Jeremy Gibbons),
% TeX and TUG NEWS, vol 2 no. 4, p 9, October 1993. I have updated
% the basic code so that it works for LaTeX2e.
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbfootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\@xverbfootnote}
% \cs{verbfootnote} is just like \cs{footnote} except that it can contain
% verbatim material.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbfootnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xverbfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
\@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}}
\def\@xverbfootnote[#1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
\endgroup
\@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbfootnotetext}
% This is the secret ingredient. It is based on the \cs{footnote} macro
% in \theTeXbook{} page 363, which somehow manages to read an argument
% with verbatims. As Knuth says that it is subtle and involves trickery,
% don't expect me to even try to explain anything.
%
% I'm not at all sure about the color bits, though!
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed colors in \cs{verbfootnote} (mempatch v2.3)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@verbfootnotetext{%
\insert\footins\bgroup
\footnotesize
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\splittopskip\footnotesep
\splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
%%%% \color@begingroup
\@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
\futurelet\next\fo@t
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fo@t}
% \begin{macro}{\f@@t}
% \begin{macro}{\f@t}
% \begin{macro}{\@foot}
% Guess what these do.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{m@mmf@prepare} to \cs{@foot} to
% implement the multifootnotemark separator (noted by zarko, CTT 2005/01/15)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
\else \let\next\f@t\fi \next}
\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
\def\f@t#1{%
\color@begingroup
#1\@foot
\color@endgroup}
\def\@foot{%
\strut\egroup
%%%% \color@endgroup
\m@mmf@prepare
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbmpfootnotetext}
% Footnotes in minipages are a little different, so another
% version of \cs{...footnotetext}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@verbmpfootnotetext{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
\reset@font\footnotesize
\unvbox\@mpfootins
\bgroup
\hsize\columnwidth
\@parboxrestore
\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
}
\futurelet\next\fo@t
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% To get the \cs{verbfootnote} to work in a \texttt{minipage} we have to use
% \cs{@verbmpfootnotetext} instead of \cs{@verbfootnotetext}. There is
% a nice hook in the kernel \texttt{minipage} code for this.
%
% As of version 1.61803 the following code is placed earlier. \\
% \verb?\def\@minipagerestore{\let\@verbfootnotetext\@verbmpfootnotetext}?
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Major extensions for footnotes}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%% major extension to footnoting
% \end{macrocode}
%
% This all requires modifications to the output routine's \cs{@makecol},
% which will be done later.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setfootnoterule}
% Per Starb\"{a}ck found (CTT \textit{feetbelowfloat in memoir}, 2006/11/24)
% that \cs{feetbelowfloat} did not affect anything when \cs{raggedbottom}
% is in effect.
%
% \cs{setfootnoterule}\oarg{vfill}\marg{uplift}\marg{width}\marg{thickness}
% defines the \cs{footnoterule}. Memoir's default setting is \\
% \verb?\setfootnoterule{3pt}{0.4\columnwidth}{\normalrulethickness}? \\
% To force footnotes to the bottom after a \cs{raggedbottom} use \\
% \verb?\setfootnoterule[\vfill]{3pt}{0.4\columnwidth}{\normalrulethickness}?
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{setfootnoterule} (memptatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setfootnoterule}[4][]{%
\def\footnoterule{\kern -#2\relax #1\relax
\hrule width #3\relax
\kern #2\kern-#4}}
\setfootnoterule{3pt}{0.4\columnwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% All sorts of extra kinds of footnotes.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeet}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetins}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetinshook}
% These macros are hooks into \cs{@makecol}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Fixed memoir/listings spacing problem (from Cartsten Heinz, mempatch v2.3)}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Set \cs{boxmaxdepth} in \cs{extrafeetins} (mmempatch v3.1)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeet}{\extrafeetins}
\newcommand*{\extrafeetins}{%
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
\unvbox\@outputbox
\ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\@footstartv@r\@footgroupv@r\fi
\extrafeetinshook}}
\newcommand{\extrafeetinshook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdodoreinextrafeet}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetreinshook}
% Hooks into \cs{@reinserts} for multiple footnote kinds.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mdodoreinextrafeet}{%
\ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\insert\footinsv@r{\unvbox\footinsv@r}\fi
\extrafeetreinshook}
\newcommand{\extrafeetreinshook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\foottextfont}
% \begin{macro}{\footinsdim}
% \begin{macro}{\@preamfntext}
% General macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\foottextfont}{\footnotesize}
\newlength{\footinsdim}
\setlength{\footinsdim}{8in} % standard for \dimen\footins
\newcommand{\@preamfntext}{%
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\floatingpenalty \@MM
\splittopskip=\footnotesep
\splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
\@parboxrestore}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% We are going to change some of the kernel footnote macros
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
% \begin{macro}{\@plainmpfootnotetext}
% \changes{v1.6180}{2006/06/12}{Stop font changes leaking into footnotes.
% The v1.618 change was too early}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable'}
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@mpfootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootins
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\foottextfont \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\reset@font%
\@makefntext{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces{\foottextfont #1}%
\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Save our revised version of \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/22}{\cs{m@mold@mpfootnotetext} renamed to \cs{@plainmpfootnotetext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@plainmpfootnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% We also to patch the minipage environment. We can use
% \cs{@minipagerestore} for the \texttt{begin} part (done earlier),
% but have to
% modify \cs{endminipage}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetminihook}
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}{%
\extrafeetminihook}
\newcommand{\extrafeetminihook}{}
%%%%\renewcommand{\@minipagerestore}{\m@mdoextrafeetmini}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetendmini}
% \begin{macro}{\extrafeetendminihook}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\extrafeetendmini}{%
\ifvoid\@mpfootinsv@r\else
\vskip\skip\@mpfootins
\normalcolor\footnoterule\mp@footgroupv@r
\fi
\extrafeetendminihook}
\newcommand{\extrafeetendminihook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdoextrafeetendmini}
% \begin{macro}{\endminipage}
% This is our patched version of \cs{endminipage}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mdoextrafeetendmini}{\extrafeetendmini}
\def\endminipage{%
\par
\unskip
\ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
\vskip\skip\@mpfootins
\normalcolor
\footnoterule
\unvbox\@mpfootins
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeetendmini
\@minipagefalse
\color@endgroup
\egroup
\expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainfootnotes}
% The declaration for standard footnotes; easy, just use the saved
% versions of \cs{@footnotetext} and \cs{@mpfootnotetext}.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/22}{\cs{m@mold@footnotetext} renamed
% \cs{@plainfootnotetext} and \cs{m@mold@mpfootnotetext} as \cs{@plainmpfootnotetext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainfootnotes}{%
\let\@footnotetext\@plainfootnotetext
\let\@mpfootnotetext\@plainmpfootnotetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for lots of somewhat tedious code, interspersed with complex
% `Dirty Tricks' type things.
%
% Robert Schlicht~\footnote{Private email, 2004/03/12,
% (\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net})} [RS] has provided valuable help in tuning
% up the code.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfootnoteseries}
% \cs{newfootnoteseries}\marg{series} creates the set of macros required
% for footnote code (see the kernel code presented earlier).
% The created macros have \meta{series} appended to their name.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added skip setup to \cs{newfootnoteseries}}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/24}{Use \cs{newcounter} instead of \cs{newcount}
% in \cs{newfootnoteseries}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfootnoteseries}[1]{%
\expandafter\newinsert\csname footins#1\endcsname% -> \footins#1
\expandafter\skip\csname footins#1\endcsname \bigskipamount%
%%% - > \skip\footins#1 % [RS]
\newcounter{footnote#1}% -> \c@footnote#1
\@nameuse{c@footnote#1} \z@% -> \c@footnote#1=0
\global\@namelet{p@footnote#1} \@empty% -> \p@footnote#1
\@namedef{thefootnote#1}{\arabic{footnote#1}}% -> \thefootnote#1
\@namedef{foottextfont#1}{\foottextfont}% -> \foottextfont#1
\m@makefootnote{#1}% -> \footnote#1
\m@make@xfootnote{#1}% -> \@xfootnote#1
\m@make@footnotetext{#1}% -> \@footnotetext#1
\m@makefootnotemark{#1}% -> \footnotemark#1
\m@make@xfootnotemark{#1}% -> \@xfootnotemark#1
\m@make@footnotemark{#1}% -> \@footnotemark#1
\m@makefootnotetext{#1}% -> \footnotetext#1
\m@make@xfootnotenext{#1}% -> \@xfootnotenext#1
\m@make@mpfn{#1}% -> \@mpfn#1
\m@makethempfn{#1}% -> \thempfn#1
\m@make@makefnmark{#1}% -> \@makefnmark#1
\m@makefootref{#1}% -> \footref#1
\m@makefootfootmark{#1}% -> \footfootmark#1
\m@makemakefootmark{#1}% -> \makefootmark#1
\m@makefootmarkstyle{#1}% -> \footmarkstyle#1
\@namedef{@makefntext#1}##1{\@nameuse{makefootmark#1} ##1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}% -> \@footstart#1
\m@make@footgroup{#1}% -> \@footgroup#1
\expandafter\newinsert\csname @mpfootins#1\endcsname% -> \@mpfootins#1
\newcounter{mpfootnote#1}% -> \c@mpfootnote#1
\global\@namelet{p@mpfootnote#1}\@empty
\@namedef{thempfootnote#1}{\itshape\alph{mpfootnote#1}}%
\m@make@mpfootnotetext{#1}% -> \@mpfootnotetext#1
% \end{macrocode}
% Reset the counter per chapter, except for articles.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/03/14}{Added chapter reset for footnote series [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt\else% [RS]
\expandafter\@cons\csname cl@chapter\endcsname {{footnote#1}}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Add the footnote to the (re)insert hooks.
% \begin{macrocode}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetinshook}{%
\ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else
\@nameuse{@footstart#1}\@nameuse{@footgroup#1}\fi}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetreinshook}{%
\ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}}\fi}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetendminihook}{%
\ifvoid\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\else
\vskip\skip\@mpfootins
\normalcolor\footnoterule\@nameuse{mp@footgroup#1}\fi}
\g@addto@macro{\extrafeetminihook}{%
\@namedef{@mpfn#1}{mpfootnote#1}
\@namedef{thempfn#1}{\@nameuse{thempfootnote#1}}
\csname c@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\z@
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@t@mp \csname @mpfootnotetext#1\endcsname
\expandafter\let \csname @footnotetext#1\endcsname \@t@mp}
\g@addto@macro{\@mem@extranofeet}{% % [RS]
\ifvoid\@nameuse{footins#1}\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi}
\plainfootstyle{#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnote}
% \cs{m@makefootnote}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnote<series>}
% \changes{v1.4}{2004/01/21}{In \cs{m@makefootnote} changed \cs{advance}
% to \cs{stepcounter} to make change global}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootnote}[1]{
\@namedef{footnote#1}{\@ifnextchar[
{\@nameuse{@xfootnote#1}}{%\advance \@nameuse{c@\@mpfn#1} by \@ne
\stepcounter{\@mpfn#1}%
\@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnote}
% \cs{m@make@xfootnote}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnote<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnote}[1]{
\@namedef{@xfootnote#1}[##1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@mpfn#1\endcsname ##1\relax
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@footnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footnotetext<series>}
% \changes{v1.6180339a}{2008/08/07}{Removed a space from
% \cs{m@make@footnotetext} and \cs{m@make@mpfootnotetext}
% (courtesy David Wilson)}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\hsize\columnwidth
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@makefntext#1}{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}% <- v1.6180339a
\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mpfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@mpfootnotetext<series>}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@makefntext#1}{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}% <- v1.6180339a
\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnotemark}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/24}{Changed \cs{advance} to \cs{stepcounter}
% in \cs{m@makefootnotemark}}
% \cs{m@makefootnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnotemark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootnotemark}[1]{
\@namedef{footnotemark#1}{%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@nameuse{@xfootnotemark#1}}
{%\advance\@nameuse{c@footnote#1} by \@ne%
\stepcounter{footnote#1}%
\@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}%
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnotemark}
% \cs{m@make@xfootnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnotemark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnotemark}[1]{%
\@namedef{@xfootnotemark#1}[##1]{%
\begingroup
\@nameuse{c@footnote#1} ##1\relax
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footnotemark}
% \cs{m@make@footnotemark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footnotemark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footnotemark}[1]{%
\@namedef{@footnotemark#1}{%
\leavevmode
\ifhmode
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\m@mmf@check
\nobreak
\fi
\@nameuse{@makefnmark#1}%
\m@mmf@prepare
\ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
\relax}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootmarkstyle}
% \cs{m@makefootmarkstyle}\marg{series} creates \cs{footmarkstyle<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootmarkstyle}[1]{%
\@namedef{footmarkstyle#1}##1{%
\@namedef{footscript#1}####1{##1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootnotetext}
% \cs{m@makefootnotetext}\marg{series} creates \cs{footnotetext<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namedef{footnotetext#1}{%
\@ifnextchar[ {\@nameuse{@xfootnotenext#1}}%
{\@name@p@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@xfootnotenext}
% \cs{m@make@xfootnotenext}\marg{series} creates \cs{@xfootnotenext<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@xfootnotenext}[1]{
\@namedef{@xfootnotenext#1}[##1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@mpfn#1\endcsname ##1\relax
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\@nameuse{thempfn#1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotetext#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpfn}
% \cs{m@make@mpfn}\marg{series} creates \cs{@mpfn<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpfn}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mpfn#1}{\@nameuse{footnote#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makethempfn}
% \cs{m@makethempfn}\marg{series} creates \cs{thempfn<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makethempfn}[1]{%
\@namedef{thempfn#1}{\@nameuse{thefootnote#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@makefnmark}
% \cs{m@make@makefnmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{@makefnmark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@makefnmark}[1]{%
\@namedef{@makefnmark#1}{%
\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootref}
% \cs{m@makefootref}\marg{series} creates \cs{footref<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootref}[1]{%
\@namedef{footref#1}##1{%
\begingroup
\@name@unresp@xdef{@thefnmark#1}{\ref{##1}}%
\endgroup
\@nameuse{@footnotemark#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makefootfootmark}
% \cs{m@makefootfootmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{footfootmark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makefootfootmark}[1]{%
\@namedef{footfootmark#1}{%
\ifdim\footmarkwidth < \z@
\llap{\hb@xt@ -\footmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}%
{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
\hspace*{-\footmarkwidth}}%
\else
\ifdim\footmarkwidth = \z@
{\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
\else
\hb@xt@\footmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\@nameuse{footscript#1}%
{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}%
\fi
\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makemakefootmark}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/23}{Removed extraneous space from \cs{m@makemakefootmark}}
% \cs{m@makemakefootmark}\marg{series} creates \cs{makefootmark<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makemakefootmark}[1]{%
\@namedef{makefootmark#1}##1{%
\leavevmode
\parindent \footparindent\noindent
\leftskip\footmarksep\relax
\advance\leftskip \footmarkwidth
\null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
\makefootmarkhook\relax
\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}##1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@footgroup}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footgroup<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@makemp@footgroup}
% \cs{m@makemp@footgroup}\marg{series} creates \cs{mp@footgroup<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@makemp@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@footstart}
% \cs{m@make@footstart}\marg{series} creates \cs{@footstart<series>}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@footstart}[1]{%
\@namedef{@footstart#1}{%
\vskip\bigskipamount
\leftskip=\z@
\rightskip=\z@
\footnoterule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainfootstyle}
% \cs{plainfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies a plain (normal) footnote
% style for \meta{series}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@footnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}%
\m@make@mpfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@makemp@footgroup{#1}%
\@nameuse{footmarkstyle#1}{\textsuperscript{##1}}
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=1000\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now the basic code for footnote declarations (we will be
% using \texttt{footnotev@r} instead of the regular \texttt{footnote}).
%
% \begin{macro}{\footinsv@r}
% Define the new \cs{footinsv@r} insert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\footinsv@r
\skip\footinsv@r\bigskipamount
\count\footinsv@r=1000 % no magnifcation
\dimen\footinsv@r=\footinsdim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Create a new \verb?v@r? footnote series.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@make@footstart{v@r}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@footgroupv@r}
% Initialise the \texttt{footgroup} for the series to do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@footgroupv@r}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% And also for minipages:
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootinsv@r}
% \begin{macro}{\mp@footgroupv@r}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\@mpfootinsv@r
\newcommand{\mp@footgroupv@r}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \Lpack{ledmac} package style footnotes (see \file{ledmac.dtx} for
% more detailed explanations).
%
% The two- and three-column notes use a macro \cs{m@mrigidbalance}
% to split text into a number of columns. This is based on \theTeXbook,
% page 397.
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@k}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@h}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\m@m@k \newdimen\m@m@h
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mrigidbalance}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdosplits}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msplitoff}
% \cs{m@mrigidbalance}\marg{box}\marg{num}\marg{length} splits a
% \meta{box} (of text) into \meta{num} columns with \meta{length}
% space between the top baseline and the top of the \cs{vbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mrigidbalance}[3]{\setbox0=\box#1 \m@m@k=#2 \m@m@h=#3
\@@line{\splittopskip=\m@m@h \vbadness=\@M \hfilneg
\valign{##\vfill\cr\m@mdosplits}}}
\newcommand*{\m@mdosplits}{\ifnum\m@m@k>0 \noalign{\hfil}\m@msplitoff
\global\advance\m@m@k-1\cr\m@mdosplits\fi}
\newcommand*{\m@msplitoff}{\dimen0=\ht0
\divide\dimen0 by\m@m@k \advance\dimen0 by\m@m@h
\setbox2 \vsplit0 to \dimen0
\unvbox2 }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Two column footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\twocolumnfootnotes}
% Declaration for two column footnotes. This causes the standard
% \cs{footnote} and friends to internally use the \verb?v@r? series,
% which here produces two column footnotes.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{twocolumnfootnotes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\twocolumnfootnotes}{%
\@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}% % [RS]
\let\@footnotetext\@twocolfootnotetext
\dimen\footinsv@r=2\footinsdim
\count\footinsv@r=500\relax
\m@make@twocol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\@footgroupv@r\@twocol@footgroupv@r
\let\@mpfootnotetext\@mptwocolfootnotetext
\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mptwocol@footgroupv@r}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@twocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@twocolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the two column version of
% \cs{@footnotetext} for the \verb?v@r? series.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Added missing percent to \cs{@twocolfootnotetext} (mempatch v3.1)}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@twocolfootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@preamtwofmt}
% Give each column 0.45 of the textwidth.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@preamtwofmt}{%
\hsize .45\hsize
\parindent=\z@
\tolerance=5000\relax
\raggedright
\leavevmode}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@twocolfootfmt}
% \cs{@twocolfootfmt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@twocolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@preamtwofmt
{\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mptwocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@mptwocolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the two column version
% of \cs{@mpfootnotetext} for the \verb?v@r? series for minipages.
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mptwocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\foottextfont
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\twocolumnfootstyle}
% \cs{twocolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies a two column footnote
% style for \meta{series}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\twocolumnfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@twocolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@twocolfootfmt{#1}%
\m@make@twocol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@twocolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@mptwocolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@twocol@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mptwocol@footgroup#1}}%
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=2\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=500\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@twocolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@twocolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@twocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@twocolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@twocolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mptwocolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mptwocolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mptwocolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@twocolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocolfootfmt}
% \cs{m@make@twocolfootfmt}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@twocolfootfmt}\meta{series}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@twocolfootfmt} [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@twocolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@namedef{@twocolfootfmt#1}##1{%
\@preamtwofmt
{\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@twocol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@twocol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@twocol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@twocol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@twocol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{footins#1}}{\tw@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mptwocol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mptwocol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mptwocol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}{\tw@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Three column footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolumnfootnotes}
% Declaration for three column footnotres.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{threecolumnfootnotes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\threecolumnfootnotes}{%
\@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}% % [RS]
\let\@footnotetext\@threecolfootnotetext
\dimen\footinsv@r=3\footinsdim
\count\footinsv@r=333\relax
\m@make@threecol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\@footgroupv@r\@threecol@footgroupv@r
\let\@mpfootnotetext\@mpthreecolfootnotetext
\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mpthreecol@footgroupv@r}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@threecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@threecolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the three column version of
% \cs{@footnotetext}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@threecolfootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@preamthreefmt}
% Give each column 0.3 of the text width.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@preamthreefmt}{%
\hsize .3\hsize
\parindent=\z@
\tolerance=5000\relax
\raggedright
\leavevmode}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@threecolfootfmt}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@threecolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@preamthreefmt
{\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpthreecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\marg{text} is the three column version of
% \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mpthreecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\foottextfont
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolumnfootstyle}
% \cs{threecolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies three column footnote style
% for \meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\threecolumnfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@threecolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@threecolfootfmt{#1}%
\m@make@threecol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@footstart{#1}%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@threecolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@mpthreecolfootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@threecol@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mpthreecol@footgroup#1}}%
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=3\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=333\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@threecolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@threecolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@threecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@threecolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@threecolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mpthreecolfootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpthreecolfootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mpthreecolfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\color@begingroup
\@nameuse{@threecolfootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecolfootfmt}
% \cs{m@make@threecolfootfmt}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@threecolfootfmt}\meta{series}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@threecolfootfmt} [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@threecolfootfmt}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@threecolfootfmt#1}##1{%
\@preamthreefmt
{\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\strut\par}\allowbreak}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@threecol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@threecol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@threecol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@threecol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@threecol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{footins#1}}{\thr@@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mpthreecol@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpthreecol@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mpthreecol@footgroup#1}{{%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1} \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\m@mrigidbalance{\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}}{\thr@@}{\splittopskip}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Paragraphed footnotes}
%
% Paragraphed footnotes are based on \theTeXbook, page 398ff, in the
% Dirty Tricks appendix. It does a lot of box manipulations.
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@munvxh}
% \cs{m@munvxh}\marg{vbox}: unvbox, extract the last line, and unhbox it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@munvxh}[1]{%
\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox#1%
\global\setbox1=\lastbox}%
\unhbox1
\unskip
\unskip
\unpenalty
\hskip\m@mipn@skip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mungebox}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mungebox}{%
\setbox0=\hbox{\m@munvxh0}%
\dp0=\z@
\ht0=\footfudgefactor\wd0
\box0
\penalty0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mipn@skip}
% \begin{macro}{\m@minterparanoteglue}
% These are `inter-para-note-skip' and `inter-parafootnote' glue, for
% paragraphed footnotes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\m@mipn@skip
\newcommand*{\m@minterparanoteglue}[1]{%
{\foottextfont\global\m@mipn@skip=#1\relax}}
\m@minterparanoteglue{1em plus.4em minus.4em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mmakehboxofhboxes}
% Make an hbox of hboxes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mmakehboxofhboxes}{\setbox0=\hbox{}%
\loop
\unpenalty
\setbox2=\lastbox
\ifhbox2
\setbox0=\hbox{\box2\unhbox0}
\repeat}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mremovehboxes}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mremovehboxes}{\setbox0=\lastbox
\ifhbox0{\m@mremovehboxes}\unhbox0 \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footfudgefiddle}
% TeX uses \verb?\footfufgefactor? to estimate the space required for
% paragraphed footnotes. If it underestimates then the notes approach,
% or cover, the footer. \verb?\footfudgefiddle? can be changed (upward) from
% its default to improve matters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\footfudgefiddle}{64}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphfootnotes}
% Declaration for paragraphed footnotes.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Made [RS] change to \cs{paragraphfootnotes}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paragraphfootnotes}{%
\@namedef{foottextfontv@r}{\foottextfont}% % [RS]
\let\@footnotetext\@parafootnotetext
\dimen\footinsv@r=\footinsdim
\count\footinsv@r=1000\relax
\m@make@para@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\@footgroupv@r\@para@footgroupv@r
\let\@mpfootnotetext\@mpparafootnotetext
\m@make@mppara@footgroup{v@r}%
\let\mp@footgroupv@r\@mppara@footgroupv@r
{\foottextfont
\dimen0=\baselineskip
\multiply\dimen0 by 1024
\divide\dimen0 by \hsize \multiply\dimen0 by \footfudgefiddle
\xdef\footfudgefactor{\expandafter\strip@pt\dimen0 }}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@parafootnotetext}
% \cs{@parafootnotetext}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
% \cs{@footnotetext}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@parafootnotetext}[1]{\insert\footinsv@r{
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@parafootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@parafootfmt}
% \cs{@parafootfmt}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
% \cs{@footfmt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@parafootfmt}[1]{%
\parindent=\z@
\parfillskip=0pt \@plus 1fil
{\footfootmark\strut {\foottextfont #1}\penalty-10}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpparafootnotetext}
% \cs{@mpparafootnotetext}\marg{text} is a paragraph version of
% \cs{@mpfootnotetext}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mpparafootnotetext}[1]{%
\global\setbox\@mpfootinsv@r\vbox{%
\unvbox\@mpfootinsv@r
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\foottextfont
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@parafootfmt{#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphfootstyle}
% \cs{paragraphfootstyle}\marg{series} specifies paragraphed footnote style
% for \meta{series}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paragraphfootstyle}[1]{%
\m@make@parafootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@mpparafootnotetext{#1}%
\m@make@parafootfmt{#1}%
\m@make@para@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@mppara@footgroup{#1}%
\m@make@para@footstart{#1}%
\@namelongdef{@footnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@parafootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namelongdef{@mpfootnotetext#1}##1{%
\@nameuse{@mpparafootnotetext#1}{##1}}%
\@namedef{@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@para@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{mp@footgroup#1}{\@nameuse{@mppara@footgroup#1}}%
\@namedef{@footstart#1}{\@nameuse{@para@footstart#1}}%
\expandafter\dimen\csname footins#1\endcsname=\footinsdim
\expandafter\count\csname footins#1\endcsname=1000\relax
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\dimen0=\baselineskip
\multiply\dimen0 by 1024
\divide\dimen0 by \hsize \multiply\dimen0 by 64
\xdef\footfudgefactor{\expandafter\strip@pt\dimen0 }}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@parafootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@parafootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@parafootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@parafootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@parafootnotetext#1}##1{%
\insert\@nameuse{footins#1}{
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\@preamfntext
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote#1\endcsname \@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@nameuse{@parafootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mpparafootnotetext}
% \cs{m@make@mpparafootnotetext}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mpparafootnotetext}\meta{series}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mpparafootnotetext}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@mpparafootnotetext#1}##1{%
\global\setbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@mpfootnote#1\endcsname\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}%
\setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
\color@begingroup
\noindent \@nameuse{@parafootfmt#1}{##1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\m@mungebox}\m@mmf@prepare}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@parafootfmt}
% \cs{m@make@parafootfmt}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@parafootfmt}\meta{series}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Removed space from \cs{m@make@parafootfmt} [RS]}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@parafootfmt}[1]{%
\@namelongdef{@parafootfmt#1}##1{%
\parindent=\z@
\parfillskip=0pt \@plus 1fil
{\@nameuse{footfootmark#1}\strut
{\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}##1}\penalty-10}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@para@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@para@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@para@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@para@footgroup#1}{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{footins#1}
\m@mmakehboxofhboxes
\setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \m@mremovehboxes}%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\noindent\unhbox0\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@mppara@footgroup}
% \cs{m@make@mppara@footgroup}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@mppara@footgroup}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@mppara@footgroup}[1]{%
\@namedef{@mppara@footgroup#1}{%
\unvbox\@nameuse{@mpfootins#1}
\m@mmakehboxofhboxes
\setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \m@mremovehboxes}%
\@nameuse{foottextfont#1}%
\noindent\unhbox0\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@make@para@footstart}
% \cs{m@make@para@footstart}\marg{series} creates
% \cs{@para@footstart}\meta{series}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@make@para@footstart}[1]{%
\@namedef{@para@footstart#1}{%
\vskip\bigskipamount
\leftskip=\z@
\rightskip=\z@
\parindent=\z@
\vskip\skip\@nameuse{footins#1}%
\footnoterule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Nasty insert bits}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Put \cs{@makecol} and associated code
% into new section `Nasty insert bits' (mempatch various)}
%
% \cs{sidebar} is implemented as a new kind of \cs{insert} and the
% extended footnotes are also implemented via new kinds of \cs{insert}s.
% New \cs{insert}s mean that the kernel's \cs{@makecol} must be revised
% to cater for them. As this is part of the output process it is nasty to
% do.
%
% Before v1.61803 \cs{@makecol} got (re)defined at several points in the
% code. Here is what I hope is the final version od \cs{@makecol} and
% associated code after having resolved and combined all the changes.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mem@nofoot}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@testifnofoot}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@extranofoot}
% These are from [RS] as \cs{@doclearpage} should check for more than
% just \cs{footins} being void. Note that this covers all current
% class defined inserts, including sidebars.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Added \cs{if@mem@nofoot},
% \cs{@mem@testifnofoot}, and
% \cs{@mem@extranofoot}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@mem@nofoot
\newcommand*{\@mem@testifnofoot}{%
\@mem@nofoottrue
\ifvoid\footins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\ifvoid\sideins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\@mem@extranofeet}
\newcommand*{\@mem@extranofeet}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memold@doclearpage}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@doclearpage}
% \begin{macro}{\@doclearpage}
% I thought that I could get away with using the kernel's
% \cs{@doclearpage} but [RS] discovered that I couldn't.
% \changes{v1.62}{2004/03/14}{Redid \cs{@doclearpage} using [RS] code}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\memold@doclearpage\@doclearpage
\newcommand{\mem@doclearpage}{%
\@mem@testifnofoot
\if@mem@nofoot
\setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
\xdef\@deferlist{\@toplist\@botlist\@deferlist}%
\global\let\@toplist\@empty
\global\let\@botlist\@empty
\global\@colroom\@colht
\ifx \@currlist\@empty
\else
\@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
\global\let\@currlist\@empty
\fi
\@makefcolumn\@deferlist
\@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@opcol\@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn
\xdef\@dbldeferlist{\@dbltoplist\@dbldeferlist}%
\global\let\@dbltoplist\@empty
\global\@colht\textheight
\begingroup
\@dblfloatplacement
\@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist
\@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage
\@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist}%
\endgroup
\else
\vbox{}\clearpage
\fi
\fi
\else
\setbox\@cclv\vbox{\box\@cclv\vfil}%
\@makecol\@opcol
\clearpage
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% Replace the kernel's \cs{@doclearpage}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\@doclearpage{\mem@doclearpage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecolfloats}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecoltext}
% These two macros contain code common to versions of \cs{@makecol}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@m@makecolfloats}{%
\xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
\global\let\@midlist\@empty
\@combinefloats}
\newcommand*{\m@m@makecoltext}{%
\ifvbox\@kludgeins
\@makespecialcolbox
\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht{%
\@texttop
\dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
\unvbox \@outputbox
\vskip -\dimen@
\@textbottom}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@makecolintro}
% A hook into the revised \cs{@makecol}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@m@makecolintro}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mopfootnote}
% (footnote) code for possible use in \cs{@makecol}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mopfootnote}{\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
\@tempdima\dp\@cclv
\unvbox\@cclv
\vskip-\@tempdima
\vskip \skip\footins
\color@begingroup
\normalcolor
\footnoterule
\unvbox \footins
\color@endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mopfootnotebf}
% (footnote) code in support of footnotes below floats.
% Problem with original code noted by J{\o}rgen Larsen (\url{jl@ruc.dk})
% on 2008/05/24.
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Added \cs{m@mopfootnotebf}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mopfootnotebf}{%
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
\unvbox\@outputbox
\vskip\skip\footins
\color@begingroup
\normalcolor
\footnoterule
\unvbox \footins
\color@endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mopsidebar}
% (sidebar) code for possible use in \cs{@makecol}.
% From DA's latest sidebar fixes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mopsidebar}{%
\ifvoid\sideins\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\sidecontents
\unvbox\@outputbox}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecol}
% DA's latest version of \cs{@makecol} (giving the standard
% footnote order (bottom floats after footnotes)) putting the sidebar
% insert after the others (from mempatch v4.9).
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\mem@makecol{%
\m@m@makecolintro
\ifvoid\footins
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\else
\m@mopfootnote
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeet
\m@m@makecolfloats
\m@mopsidebar
\m@m@makecoltext
\global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecolbf}
% A version of \cs{@makecol} which puts footnotes at the bottom of the page
% (after any bottom floats).
% \changes{v1.618033}{2008/06/02}{Used \cs{m@mopfootnotebf} instead of
% \cs{m@mopfootnote} in \cs{mem@makecolbf}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\mem@makecolbf{%
\m@m@makecolintro
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\m@m@makecolfloats
\ifvoid\footins\else
\m@mopfootnotebf
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeet
\m@mopsidebar
\m@m@makecoltext
\global\maxdepth \@maxdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecoldblf}
% A version of \cs{@makecol} which is a placeholder to fix the doublefloat
% problem.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\mem@makecoldblf{%
\m@m@makecolintro
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\m@m@makecolfloats
\m@mopsidebar% <- added
\ifvoid\footins
\else
\m@mopfootnote
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeet
\m@m@makecoltext
\global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\feetabovefloat}
% \begin{macro}{\feetbelowfloat}
% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
% declarations to put footnotes above bottom floats (standard \LaTeX)
% or at the bottom of the page
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\feetabovefloat}{\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecol}}
\newcommand{\feetbelowfloat}{\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecolbf}}
\feetabovefloat
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@reinserts}
% DA's final version from last patch.
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/06/30}{THere is a newer version further down
% the code}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \gdef\@reinserts{%
% \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
% \m@mdodoreinextrafeet
% \ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludgeins{\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi
% \ifvoid\sideins\else\insert\sideins{\unvbox\sideins}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Added section about side footnotes}
% \subsection{Side footnotes} \label{sec:sidefootnotes}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Extension to the regular footnote}
%
% The code here enables the regular \cs{footnote} to be set in the
% margin. It is based on Robin Fairbairns' \Lpack{footmisc} package.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mfnmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesatfoot}
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesinmargin}
% Declarations for regular footnotes to be set as normal at the foot
% of the page, or in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mfnmargin
\newcommand*{\footnotesatfoot}{\m@mfnmarginfalse}
\newcommand*{\footnotesinmargin}{\m@mfnmargintrue}
\footnotesatfoot
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/01/25}{Remember that we actually have
% several \cs{@footnotetext} in memoir, might be an idea to clean this
% up at some point/daleif}
% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mold@footnotetext}
% Change \cs{@footnotetext} to enable footnotes to be put into the margin
% by using \cs{marginpar}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@footnotetext}[1]{%
\ifm@mfnmargin% use marginpar
% \end{macrocode}
% Use \cs{marginpar} for placing the footnote.
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\marginpar{%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font
\foottextfont
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{\ignorespaces#1}%
\color@endgroup}%
\else% regular feet
% \end{macrocode}
% This is the original code for \cs{@footnotetext}.
% \changes{v1.618033988c}{2010/02/20}{sporadic spaces removed, error
% reported on texlive mailinglist}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\insert\footins{%
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\reset@font
\foottextfont
\@preamfntext
\hsize\columnwidth
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@makefntext{%
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces{\foottextfont #1}%
\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
\color@endgroup}%
\fi%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% Need to save this version of \cs{@footnotetext}, it is
% used within \cs{plainfootnotes}.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/10/22}{Moved \cs{m@mold@footnotetext} to this
% location, and renamed it to \cs{@plainfootnotetext}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@plainfootnotetext\@footnotetext
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Bottom aligned side footnotes}
%
% The code for the bottom aligned marginal footnotes is based partly on
% the \cs{sidebar} code and code from David Salomon, 'Output Routines:
% Examples and Techniques. Part III: Insertions', \textit{TUGboat},
% 11, 4, pp 588--605, Nov 1990.
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msidefoot@margin}
% \cs{sidefootmargin} is the user command for setting the side for
% side footnotes (stored as \cs{m@msidefoot@margin}). The default
% is \texttt{outer}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidefootmargin}[1]{%
\m@msetm@argin{#1}%
\ifnum\m@mm@argin<\z@
\@memwarn{Bad \string\sidefootmargin\space argument `#1'\MessageBreak
set to `outer'}%
\gdef\m@msidefoot@margin{2}% set as outer
\else
\global\let\m@msidefoot@margin\m@mm@argin
\fi}
\sidefootmargin{outer}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootins}
% As for any non-main text matter we need an insert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\sidefootins
\skip\sidefootins=0pt
\count\sidefootins=0\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootadjust}
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootheight}
% \begin{macro}{\setsidefootheight}
% The length \cs{sidefootadjust} can be used for fine control over the
% vertivcal position of the base of the column of side footnotes.
% The length \cs{sidefootheight}
% is the height of the column and is best set by the \cs{setsidefootheight}
% macro, which takes the desired height as its argument and sets the height
% of the \cs{sidefootins} \cs{insert}. The height is
% initially set to the \cs{textheight}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sidefootadjust}
\setlength{\sidefootadjust}{0pt}
\newlength{\sidefootheight}
\newcommand*{\setsidefootheight}[1]{%
\setlength{\dimen\sidefootins}{#1}%
\advance\dimen\sidefootins -\topskip
\advance\dimen\sidefootins \ht\strutbox
\setlength{\sidefootheight}{\dimen\sidefootins}}
\setsidefootheight{\textheight}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefoothsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootvsep}
% The horizontal space between the text block and side footnotes
% (\cs{sidefoothsep}),
% the width of the column of notes (\cs{sidefootwidth}),
% and the vertical space between consecutive side footnotes
% (\cs{sidefootvsep}).
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{removed \cs{sidefootfont}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sidefoothsep}
\newlength{\sidefootvsep}
\newlength{\sidefootwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsidefeet}
% The macro \cs{setsidefeet}\marg{hsep}\marg{width}\marg{vsep}\marg{adj}\marg{font}\marg{height}
% sets the specifications for the side footnotes. An `*' means `use
% the current
% value'.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{changed \cs{sidefootfont} to
% \cs{sidefoottextfont}}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setsidefeet}[6]{%
\nametest{#1}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidefoothsep}{#1}\@memznegtest{\sidefoothsep}%
\fi
\nametest{#2}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidefootwidth}{#2}\@memznegtest{\sidefootwidth}%
\fi
\nametest{#3}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidefootvsep}{#3}\@memznegtest{\sidefootvsep}%
\fi
\nametest{#4}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setlength{\sidefootadjust}{#4}%
\fi
\nametest{#5}{*}\ifsamename\else
\def\sidefoottextfont{#5}%
\fi
\nametest{#6}{*}\ifsamename\else
\setsidefootheight{#6}%
\ifdim\dimen\sidefootins>\z@\else
\@memerror{\protect\sidefootheight\space is zero or negative}{\@ehd}%
\fi
\fi}
\setsidefeet{\marginparsep}{\marginparwidth}%
{\onelineskip}{0pt}%
{\normalfont\footnotesize}{\textheight}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootform}
% Set the sidefootnotes raggedy right
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidefootform}{\rightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@sideft@left}
% \begin{macro}{\m@sideft@right}
% Macros placing the sidefootnotes at the left and the right respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@sideft@left}{%
\@tempdimc \sidefootwidth
\advance\@tempdimc\sidefoothsep
\kern-\@tempdimc}
\newcommand*{\m@sideft@right}{%
\@tempdimc \columnwidth% or \hsize
\advance\@tempdimc\sidefoothsep
\kern\@tempdimc}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mdownsf}
% A length used in the vertical positioning of sidefootnotes.
% (Perhaps one of the \cs{@tempdim} lengths could be used instead?)
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\m@mdownsf}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootcontents}
% The essence of the sidefootnote task. This first positions the column
% to the left or the right and then tries to make the bottom of the
% column align with the bottom of the textblock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidefootcontents}{\hbox to \z@{%
\m@mwhich@margin{\m@msidefoot@margin}%
\ifmemtortm
\m@sideft@right
\else
\m@sideft@left
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now the fun part. The general idea is to measure the height of the insert's
% contents, subtract this from the specified height of the insert,
% and move the contents down by that amount.
% The code below seems to work except when sidefootnotes
% spill over to the following page; also, like \cs{sidebar},
% they are out of vertical alignment when on a \cs{chapter} page.
% I haven't found a way to automatically
% adjust for these, which is why the \cs{sidefootadjust} length is
% there to enable manual adjustment.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{changed \cs{sidefootfont}
% to \cs{sidefoottextfont}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\vtop to 0pt{% original
\normalsize\normalfont\sidefoottextfont
\vskip\topskip \vskip-\ht\strutbox
\vskip\sidefootadjust% use this for minor vertical adjustment
\m@mdownsf=\dimen\sidefootins
\advance\m@mdownsf-\ht\sidefootins
\advance\m@mdownsf-\dp\sidefootins
% \end{macrocode}
% Here's where the fiddling occurs, arrived at by a mixture of theory and
% experiment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\m@mdownsf>\sidefootvsep
\advance\m@mdownsf\sidefootvsep
\advance\m@mdownsf 0.5\ht\strutbox
\fi
\vskip\m@mdownsf% --- basically works
\unvbox\sidefootins%
\vss}%
\hss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mopsidefoot}
% If there are any sidefeet then add them to the output.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mopsidefoot}{%
\ifvoid\sidefootins\else
\setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
\sidefootcontents
\unvbox\@outputbox}
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecol}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecolbf}
% \begin{macro}{\@reinserts}
% \begin{macro}{\@mem@extranofeet}
% \begin{macro}{@mem@testifnofoot}
% Revise these to cater for the new sidefoot insert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\mem@makecol{
\m@m@makecolintro
\ifvoid\footins
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\else
\m@mopfootnote
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeet
\m@m@makecolfloats
\m@mopsidebar
\m@mopsidefoot
\m@m@makecoltext
\global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{v1.618033988b}{2010/02/17}{a bf was missing in \cs{m@mopfootnotebf}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\mem@makecolbf{
\m@m@makecolintro
\setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
\m@m@makecolfloats
\ifvoid\footins
\else
\m@mopfootnotebf
\fi
\m@mdoextrafeet
\m@mopsidebar
\m@mopsidefoot
\m@m@makecoltext
\global \maxdepth \@maxdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/06/30}{There should not be an \cs{else} on the
% kludge line}
% \changes{v3.6f}{2010/08/22}{There should not be an \cs{else} on the
% kludge line, then remember to remove it}
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\@reinserts{%
\ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
\m@mdodoreinextrafeet
\ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludgeins{\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi
\ifvoid\sideins\else\insert\sideins{\unvbox\sideins}\fi
\ifvoid\sidefootins\else\insert\sidefootins{\unvbox\sidefootins}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The easy way of extending the \cs{clearpage} code is by:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand*{\@mem@extranofeet}{%
% \ifvoid\sidefootins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
% but as so many other changes have to be made it's probably better to
% leave that alone and change \cs{@mem@testifnofoot} directly.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\@mem@testifnofoot}{%
\@mem@nofoottrue
\ifvoid\footins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\ifvoid\footinsv@r\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\ifvoid\sideins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\ifvoid\sidefootins\else\@mem@nofootfalse\fi
\@mem@extranofeet}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The sidefootnote macros}
%
% The macros here are essentially a copy of the ones for \cs{footnote}.
% I have not done anything about sidefootnotes in minipages, as I can't
% imagine a use for them while simultaneously making the final appearance
% looking good.
%
% The usual counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{sidefootnote}
\renewcommand{\thesidefootnote}{\@arabic\c@sidefootnote}
\@addtoreset{sidefootnote}{chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% By using: \\
% \verb?\letcountercounter{sidefootnote}{footnote}? \\
% the same counter will be used for both footnotes and sidefootnotes.
% This can be reverted to separate counters by; \\
% \verb?\unletcounter{sidefootnote}?
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefoottextfont}
% The font for the sidefootnotes.
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/06}{\cs{sidefoottextfont} is already
% defined by the initial issuing of \cs{setsidefeet}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%\newcommand*{\sidefoottextfont}{\normalfont\footnotesize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The remainder of the code is a copied from that for \cs{footnote}
% but with the appropriate variables for \cs{sidefootnote}s
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sidempfn}
% \begin{macro}{\thesidempfn}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sidempfn}{sidefootnote}
\newcommand*{\thesidempfn}{\thesidefootnote}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makesidefnmark}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@makesidefnmark}{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{%
\normalfont\@thesidefnmark}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@preamsidefntext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@preamsidefntext}{%
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\floatingpenalty \@MM
\splittopskip=\footnotesep
\splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
\@parboxrestore}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sidefootnotetext}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/05}{changed \cs{sidefootfont}
% to \cs{sidefoottextfont}}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/19}{made 'single spacing' configurable}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@sidefootnotetext}[1]{\insert\sidefootins{%
\hsize\sidefootwidth
\@parboxrestore
\def\baselinestretch{\m@m@footnote@spacing}%
\sidefootform \normalsize\normalfont\sidefoottextfont
\splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
\splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
\allowbreak
\prevdepth=\dp\strutbox
\vskip-\parskip
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
\csname p@sidefootnote\endcsname\@thesidefnmark}%
\color@begingroup
\@makesidefntext{{\sidefoottextfont #1}}%
\color@endgroup
\ifvmode\else
\unskip\@finalstrut\strutbox
\fi
\par
\ifdim\prevdepth>\dp\strutbox \prevdepth=\dp\strutbox\fi
\ifdim\prevdepth>99\p@
\nobreak
\vskip-\prevdepth
\allowbreak
\vskip\dp\strutbox
\fi
\vskip\sidefootvsep}%
\m@mmf@prepare}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sidefootnotemark}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sidefootnotemark}{%
\leavevmode
\ifhmode
\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}%
\m@mmf@check
\nobreak
\fi
\@makesidefnmark
\m@mmf@prepare
\ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidefootnote}{\@ifnextchar[
\@xsidefootnote{\stepcounter\@sidempfn
\protected@xdef\@thesidefnmark{\thesidempfn}%
\@sidefootnotemark\@sidefootnotetext}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xsidefootnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xsidefootnote[#1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@sidempfn\endcsname #1\relax
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@thesidefnmark{\thesidempfn}%
\endgroup
\@sidefootnotemark\@sidefootnotetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootnotemark}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidefootnotemark}{%
\@ifnextchar[
\@xsidefootnotemark
{\stepcounter{sidefootnote}%
\protected@xdef\@thesidefnmark{\thesidefootnote}%
\@sidefootnotemark}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xsidefootnotemark}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xsidefootnotemark[#1]{%
\begingroup
\c@sidefootnote #1\relax
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@thesidefnmark{\thesidefootnote}%
\endgroup
\@sidefootnotemark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidefootnotetext}{%
\@ifnextchar[
\@xsidefootnotetext
{\protected@xdef\@thesidefnmark{\thesidempfn}%
\@sidefootnotetext}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xsidefootnotetext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xsidefootnotetext[#1]{%
\begingroup
\csname c@\@sidempfn\endcsname #1\relax
\unrestored@protected@xdef\@thesidefnmark{\thesidempfn}%
\endgroup
\@sidefootnotetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootscript}
% \begin{macro}{\makesidefootmarkhook}
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootfootmark}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sidefootmarkstyle}[1]{\def\sidefootscript##1{#1}}
\newcommand*{\makesidefootmarkhook}{}
\newcommand*{\sidefootfootmark}{%
\ifdim\sidefootmarkwidth < \z@
\llap{\hb@xt@ -\sidefootmarkwidth{%
\hss\normalfont\sidefootscript{\@thesidefnmark}}%
\hspace*{-\sidefootmarkwidth}}%
\else
\ifdim\sidefootmarkwidth = \z@
{\normalfont\sidefootscript{\@thesidefnmark}}%
\else
\hb@xt@\sidefootmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\sidefootscript{\@thesidefnmark}}%
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makesidefootmark}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/04}{Made \cs{makesidefootmark} long
% as the similar \cs{footnote} command, otherwise one cannot make side
% footnotes containign several paragraphs}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makesidefootmark}[1]{%
\leavevmode
\parindent \sidefootparindent\noindent
\leftskip\sidefootmarksep\relax
\advance\leftskip \sidefootmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
\makesidefootmarkhook\relax
\sidefootfootmark #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makesidefntext}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@makesidefntext}[1]{\makesidefootmark #1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Final layout.
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootmarkwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootmarksep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidefootparindent}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/04}{changed the defaults for
% \cs{sidefootmarkwidth} and \cs{sidefootmarksep} to zero, from 1em
% and -1em, looks better with the narrow margins}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sidefootmarkwidth}
\setlength{\sidefootmarkwidth}{0em}
\newlength{\sidefootmarksep}
\setlength{\sidefootmarksep}{0em}
\newlength{\sidefootparindent}
\setlength{\sidefootparindent}{1em}
\sidefootmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{End notes}
%
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19+}{Reimplemented page notes}
% This used to be a copy of the \Lpack{pagenote} package, with minor
% amendments. But it turned out that the implementation used by
% \Lpack{pagenote} at that time, had a few serious flaws. In this
% implementation we will instead turn to the trick used by the
% \Lpack{endnotes} package to overcome the same problem.
% For the sake of history, let us summarise what the actual problem
% was. Basically the command \cs{pagenote}\marg{text} would write an
% entry to an external file in the following format
% \begin{verbatim}
% \noteentry{nom}{id}{text}{pagenum}
% \end{verbatim}
% and when typesetting the page notes, this file would be read into
% the document and \cs{noteentry} would typeset each page note. The
% main problem here is \verb|{text}| which is written verbatimly to
% the external file, but it is written on a single line!, thus an
% input like this
% \begin{verbatim}
% \pagenote{Test%
% test}
% \end{verbatim}
% would give us the entry
% \begin{verbatim}
% \noteentry{num}{id}{Test%test}{pagenum}
% \end{verbatim}
% oops! This is what we will solve using inspiration from
% \Lpack{endnotes}, kudos to John Lavagnino.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mpnpageopt}
% \begin{macro}{\ifm@mpncontopt}
% We need two flags for the options.
% \cs{m@mpnpageoptfalse} means that page numbers are not available and
% \cs{m@mpncontopt} means that note numbers are reset at each \cs{chapter}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifm@mpnpageopt
\m@mpnpageoptfalse
\newif\ifm@mpncontopt
\m@mpncontoptfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@pagenote}
% \begin{macro}{\thepagenote}
% We need a counter for the notes. This is the default definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{pagenote}[chapter]
\renewcommand{\thepagenote}{\arabic{pagenote}}
\setcounter{pagenote}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notepageref}
% \begin{macro}{\continuousnotenums}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{Removed references to pagenote package}
% Let the user change the default options. \cs{notepageref} makes
% page numbers available in the typeset list of page note and
% \cs{continuousnotenums} means that notes will be numbered
% continuously throughout the document.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\notepageref}{\m@mpnpageopttrue}
\@onlypreamble\notepageref
\newcommand*{\continuousnotenums}{%
\counterwithout{pagenote}{chapter}
\renewcommand{\thepagenote}{\arabic{pagenote}}}
\@onlypreamble\continuousnotenums
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmempagenotes}
% Need to check if notes are required.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmempagenotes
\mempagenotesfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makepagenote}
% This sets up the note file. At the end it emasculates itself so it can only
% be used once.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\makepagenote}{%
\newwrite\@notefile
\immediate\openout\@notefile=\jobname.ent
\mempagenotestrue
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pagenote}
% Make sure that this has a useful definition.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{Made \cs{pagenote} robust}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/01}{Removed \cs{@sanitize}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\pagenote{\@bsphack\begingroup
% \@sanitize
\m@m@wrpnote}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{Added the redefinition of \cs{mem@footto@pagenote}}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@footto@pagenote}
% The same as for \cs{pagenote} but here we use a special version of
% the writing macro that will ignore the optional argument. This will
% internally be used when the user ask for foot notes to be turned
% into page notes.
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/03/01}{Removed \cs{@sanitize}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\mem@footto@pagenote{\@bsphack\begingroup
% \@sanitize
\def\mem@pn@step{01}%
\m@m@wrpnote}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% At the end we make sure \cs{makepagenote} can only do something once.
% \begin{macrocode}
\typeout{Writing note file \jobname.ent}%
\let\makepagenote\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\immediate@protected@write}
% We might have to do some immediate writes. This is an immediate
% version of the kernel \cs{protected@write}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\immediate@protected@write}[3]{%
\begingroup
#2%
\let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
\edef\reserved@a{\immediate\write#1{#3}}%
\reserved@a
\endgroup
\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@pnwrite}
% In the old implementation we used \cs{immediate@protected@write}
% unless the user asked for page numbers in the notes, the new
% implementation use the same writing method for all cases, for easy
% of notation we collect it in a macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@m@pnwrite}[3]{\immediate\write#1{#3}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pnchap}
% \begin{macro}{\pnschap}
% Redefine these for different subheadings in the notes list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pnchap}{\f@rtoc}
\newcommand*{\pnschap}{\f@rbdy}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\c@pagenoteshadow}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@pn@step}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@pn@lastkern}
% Utilities, a counter to provide us with a unique name for each page
% note, a toggle macro and a length to hold a lastkern (because
% someone may hide it from us).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{pagenoteshadow}
\setcounter{pagenoteshadow}{0}
\newcommand\mem@pn@step{00} % i.e. true
\newlength\mem@pn@lastkern
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@wrpnote}
% This writes the note information to the note file. If the optional argument
% is empty it increments the
% note counter and calls \cs{notenumintext} to handle its appearance in
% the body text. We write an entry of the following design
% \begin{verbatim}
% \startnoteentry{notenumber}{id}{auto label key}
% macro:->text
% \endnoteentry
% \end{verbatim}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/05/25}{Made \cs{m@m@wrpnote} match the effect
% described in memman regarding the optional argument.}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{Changed the internal implementation}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@m@wrpnote}[2][]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If \Lpack{hyperref} is loaded it issues a whatisit and thus
% hide/reset the last kern, which is needed for the algorithm used for
% the multiple notes in a row feature (adding commas). So we start by
% storing the last kern, and refstep a shadow counter such that we
% can generate more or less unique label keys.
% \begin{macrocode}
\mem@pn@lastkern=\lastkern%
\refstepcounter{pagenoteshadow}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the user asks for it enable page back refs, we use labels and
% references for this (bonus: automatic support for hyperlinks if
% \Lpack{hyperref} is available).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@mpnpageopt%
\phantomsection%
\label{pagenote\thepagenoteshadow-\thesheetsequence}%
\fi%
% \end{macrocode}
% Next we want to be able to reuse this macro just for writing the
% entry to disk, no writing a marker in the text (think replacement
% for \cs{footnotetext}), we use the toggle for this and also remember
% to re-insert the code needed for comma separated multiple markers
% \begin{macrocode}
\if\mem@pn@step%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\refstepcounter{pagenote}%
% this enables the ^{1,2} feature
\ifdim\mem@pn@lastkern=\multiplefootnotemarker%
\m@mmf@prepare% rerun
\fi%
\mem@multiple@marker{\notenumintext{\thepagenote}}%
}{}%
\fi%
% \end{macrocode}
% Check if this is the first note in a division, and if so indicate this
% in the file.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/25}{Added \cs{pagenotesubheadstarred}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifm@mpn@new@chap
\global\m@mpn@new@chapfalse
\addtonotes{\string\pagenotesubhead{\@chapapp}{\thechapter}{\pnchap}}%
\fi
\ifm@mpn@new@schap
\global\m@mpn@new@schapfalse
\addtonotes{\string\pagenotesubheadstarred{\@chapapp}{}{\pnschap}}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Next we write to the notes file. Instead of writing everything as a
% macro with arguments, we will use three writes. One to start a new
% entry with a few (non-text) arguments, then the text itself, and
% finally an end of entry marker macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@m@pnwrite\@notefile{}%
{\string\startnoteentry{\thepagenote}{#1}%
{pagenote\thepagenoteshadow-\thesheetsequence}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Store the text in a temp macro, change the endline char to force a
% line break at any space in the text, this also helps with line
% length limits on inputs. Getting the newline stuff to work require
% \verb|\immediate\write| which we defined earlier. We then write the
% text `verbatimly' using the trick that \Lpack{endnotes} makes use
% of: \cs{meaning}, works quite nicely.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\next{#2}%
\begingroup%
\newlinechar='40%
\m@m@pnwrite\@notefile{}{\meaning\next}%
\endgroup%
% \end{macrocode}
% Remember to also write a marker that ends the entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\m@m@pnwrite\@notefile{}%
{\string\endnoteentry}%
\endgroup
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagenote}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@footto@pagenote}
% The user command to generate a note. It is given substance
% by \cs{makepagenote}. Supplied with a special version used if the
% user asks for all footnotes to be turned into page notes.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{Added \cs{mem@footto@pagenote}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\pagenote{\@bsphack\begingroup \@sanitize\m@m@pagenote}
\let\mem@footto@pagenote\pagenote
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@pagenote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@m@pagenote}[2][]{\endgroup\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagetofootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\foottopagenote}
% \begin{macro}{\memsavefootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\memsavepagenote}
% Let the user change pagenotes to footnotes, or vice-versa. In either
% case the optional argument is ignored.
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/07}{\cs{footnote} should be long}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/09}{because of the way
% \cs{pagenote} is defined, we cannot redefine \cs{footnote} to have
% any arguments, we need to go another route}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/09}{Added a check for the race condition}
% We have a race condition, if both \cs{pagetofootnote} and
% \cs{makepagenote} is issued in the same document,
% \cs{pagetofootnote} need to come last.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pagetofootnote}{%
\let\memsavepagenote\pagenote
\renewcommand{\pagenote}[2][]{\footnote{##2}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Basic idea is, if pagenotes mode is on when \cs{pagetofootnote} is
% issued, everything is fine. Else we test at end document (because
% \cs{makepagenote} can go anywhere).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifmempagenotes\else%
\AtEndDocument{%
\ifmempagenotes%
\@memerror{The use of \string\pagetofootnote\space before
\string\makepagenote\space^^Jdoes not make
sense. \string\makepagenote\space make some redefinitions that
are not picked up if \string\pagetofootnote\space is issued
before \string\makepagenote
}{}
\fi
}
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Next the more challenging one. We make the footnote counter act as
% the page note counter, this ensure that \cs{footnotemark} still work
% when the user ask to have footnotes converted into page
% notes. \cs{footnotetext} is the same as the page note writer macro,
% but without writing the marker, here we use the special page note macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\foottopagenote}{%
\let\memsavefootnote\footnote
% now also \footnotemark work
\letcountercounter{footnote}{pagenote}
% and this takes care of \footnotetext
\renewcommand\footnotetext[2][]{\mem@footto@pagenote{##2}}
\renewcommand{\footnote}[2][]{\pagenote{##2}}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtonotes}
% \cs{addtonotes}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} into the notes file.
% \changes{v3.6i}{2011/02/18}{\cs{addtonotes} need \cs{immediate@protected@write}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\addtonotes}[1]{\ifmempagenotes
\IfFileExists{\jobname.ent}{\immediate@protected@write\@notefile{}{#1}}{\mempnofilewarn}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notenumintext}
% \begin{macro}{\notenuminnotes}
% \cs{notenumintext}\marg{notenum} typesets \meta{notenum} (in the
% body text).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\notenumintext}[1]{%
\textsuperscript{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{notenuminnotes}\marg{notenum} typesets \meta{notenum} (i.e. the
% very first item when typesetting a note).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\notenuminnotes}[1]{%
{\normalfont #1.}\space}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\noteentry}
% \changes{v3.6}{2010/12/14}{explanation was wrong}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{removed}
% \cs{noteentry}\marg{notenum}\marg{id}\marg{text}\marg{pagenum}
% typesets a note. This macro is not used anymore.
% \begin{macrocode}
%\newcommand{\noteentry}[4]{} % not used any more!
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\idtextinnotes}
% \cs{idtextinnotes}\marg{id text} typesets the note's \meta{id text}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\idtextinnotes}[1]{%
[#1]\space}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\noteidinnotes}
% \cs{noteidinnotes}\marg{notenum}\marg{id} is used to typeset the note
% identification (in the note listing). It is set so that it typesets the
% \meta{id} if it is not empty, otherwise it sets the \meta{notenum}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\noteidinnotes}[2]{%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{%
\notenuminnotes{#1}}{\idtextinnotes{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pageinnotes}
% \begin{macro}{\printpageinnotes}
% \begin{macro}{\printpageinnoteshyperref}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{Changed to match new implementation}
% \cs{pageinnotes}\marg{key} calls
% \cs{printpageinnotes}\marg{key} to typeset the originating
% page number (in the note), but only if the \cs{notepageref} declaration
% has been used. Remember we provide an automatically generated label
% key, thus we use \cs{pageref} to get the page number. We provide a
% \Lpack{hyperref} version which is automatically used whenever
% \Lpack{hyperref} is loaded.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pageinnotes}[1]{%
\ifm@mpnpageopt \printpageinnotes{#1}\fi}
\newcommand*{\printpageinnotes}[1]{%
(\pagerefname\ \pageref{#1})\space}
\newcommand\printpageinnoteshyperref[1]{%
(\hyperref[#1]{\pagerefname\ \pageref*{#1}})\space}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\noteinnotes}
% \cs{noteinnotes}\marg{text} is used to typeset the note's text
% (in the note list). This macro is not used any more, but doesn't do
% any harm to leave it here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\noteinnotes}[1]{#1} % not used anymore!
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prenoteinnotes}
% \begin{macro}{\postnoteinnotes}
% These are called immediately before and after the note information is
% typeset.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prenoteinnotes}{\par\noindent}
\newcommand{\postnoteinnotes}{\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prenotetext}
% \begin{macro}{\postnotetext}
% Thise two macros are executed just before and just after the note
% text. Does nothing by default.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\prenotetext{}
\newcommand\postnotetext{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notesname}
% \begin{macro}{\notedivision}
% Heading for note list.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\notesname}{Notes}
\newcommand*{\notedivision}{\chapter{\notesname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/14}{typo}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/19}{There is no reason to use two macros to
% implement a starred and non starred version in this case.}
% \begin{macro}{\printpagenotes}
% \begin{macro}{\printpagenotes*}
% User commands to print the note file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\printpagenotes}{\@ifstar{\mem@printpagenotes{00}}{\mem@printpagenotes{01}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mempnofilewarn}
% Warning when the notes file does not exist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\mempnofilewarn}{%
\ClassWarning{memoir}{There is no .ent file}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\startnoteentrystart}
% \begin{macro}{\endnoteentryend}
% Two utility macros making it easier for the user to change the order.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\startnoteentrystart[3]{%
\prenoteinnotes%
\noteidinnotes{#1}{#2}%
\pageinnotes{#3}%
\prenotetext%
}
\def\endnoteentryend{\postnotetext\postnoteinnotes}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@make@gt@safe}
% Macro copied from \Lpack{endnotes}, in the notes file, the text
% begins with \verb|macro:->|, but some languages make \verb|>|
% active. For more information see the \Lpack{endnotes}
% implementation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@make@gt@safe{%
\edef\@tempa{`\string >}%
\ifnum\catcode\@tempa=12%
\let\@ResetGT\relax%
\else%
\edef\@ResetGT{\noexpand\catcode\@tempa=\the\catcode\@tempa}%
\@makeother\>%
\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@printpagenotes}
% \begin{macro}{\startnoteentry}
% \begin{macro}{\ednoteentry}
% The internal macro for printing the list of page notes. The two
% macros \cs{startnoteentry} and \cs{endnoteentry} are also defined here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\mem@printpagenotes[1]{%
\ifmempagenotes
\notedivision
\IfFileExists{\jobname.ent}{%
\begingroup
\mem@make@gt@safe%
\def\startnoteentry####1####2####3####4>{%
\begingroup
\@ResetGT
\startnoteentrystart{####1}{####2}{####3}%
}
\def\endnoteentry{\endnoteentryend\endgroup}
\immediate\closeout\@notefile
\input{\jobname.ent}%
\if#1\immediate\openout\@notefile=\jobname.ent\fi%
\endgroup
}{%
\mempnofilewarn
}%
\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sprintpagenotes}
% Macro implementing \cs{printpagenotes*}. Removed
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/20}{Removed}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcommand*{\@sprintpagenotes}{%
% \ifmempagenotes
% \notedivision
% \IfFileExists{\jobname.ent}{%
% \immediate\closeout\@notefile
% \input{\jobname.ent}%
% \immediate\openout\@notefile=\jobname.ent%
% }{%
% \mempnofilewarn
% }%
% \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@printpagenotes}
% Macro implementing \cs{printpagenotes}. Removed
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/20}{Removed}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcommand*{\@printpagenotes}{%
% \ifmempagenotes
% \notedivision
% \IfFileExists{\jobname.ent}{%
% \immediate\closeout\@notefile
% \input{\jobname.ent}%
% }{%
% \mempnofilewarn
% }
% \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagenotesubhead}
% \begin{macro}{\pagenotesubheadstarred}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2011/01/25}{Added \cs{pagenotesubheadstarred}}
% The section heading before each set of notes. \\
% \cs{pagenotesubhead}\marg{chaptername}\marg{number}\marg{title}
% The \cs{pagenotesubheadstarred} macro is used for unnumbered
% devisions. By default it is the same as \cs{pagenotesubhead}, but
% the user can change this. For example it may look odd with an title
% like this: >>Chapter Title<< when there is no number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pagenotesubhead}[3]{%
\section*{#1 #2 #3}}
\newcommand\pagenotesubheadstarred{\pagenotesubhead}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Change marks} \label{sec:vct}
%
% When preparing a manuscript it normally goes through
% several iterations. The commands provided may be used to identify
% changes made to a document during its life cycle.
%
% The code for this part of the class is based on the version
% controls in the \Lpack{iso} class~\cite{ISOCLASS}.
%
% \subsection{Print control}
%
% Members of the development group often need to see the changes
% between document versions, while the general public does not.
% \begin{macro}{\ifchangemarks}
% This controls the appearence of the version controls defined
% below.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifchangemarks\changemarksfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% The marks only work properly when the \Lopt{draft} option
% is in effect. Also, the command \cs{changemarkstrue} must be
% put in the document preamble.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changemarks}
% \begin{macro}{\nochangemarks}
% More user friendly version of \cs{changemarks(true/false)}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{changemarks} and \cs{nochangemarks}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\changemarks}{\changemarkstrue}
\newcommand*{\nochangemarks}{\changemarksfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\v@rid}
% This acts as an alias for \cs{marginpar} when both \cs{ifchangemarks} is
% true and the \Lopt{draft} option is in effect, otherwise it throws
% away its two arguments.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to \cs{v@rid}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\v@rid}[2]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\ifdraftdoc
\marginpar[#1]{#2}%
\fi\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Change marking}
%
% The following commands flag changes in the typeset document. Each of
% the commands takes one parameter which is intended to be a
% `change number' or comment for tracking purposes. A symbol and
% the \meta{change-id} is put into the margin near where the command
% is given. The marking commands should be attached to some word or
% punctuation mark in the text otherwise extraneous spaces may creep
% into the final document.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to changemarks}
% \begin{macro}{\added}
% \cs{added}\marg{change-id}
% Flags, with the symbol $\oplus$, that something has been added
% to the manuscript.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\added}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\v@rid{\small$\oplus$ #1}{\small$\oplus$ #1}%
\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\deleted}
% \cs{deleted}\marg{change-id}
% Flags, with the symbol $\neq$, that something has been deleted
% from the manuscript.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\deleted}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\v@rid{\small$\neq$ #1}{\small$\neq$ #1}%
\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changed}
% \cs{changed}\marg{change-id}
% Flags, with the symbol $\Leftrightarrow$, that something
% has been changed in the text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\changed}[1]{%
\@bsphack
\ifchangemarks
\v@rid{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}%
\fi
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Trimming marks}
%
% The \Lopt{showtrims} options prints trimming marks at the corners
% of the logical page. The code for this comes from ideas gleaned
% from Martin Schr\"{o}der's \Lpack{everyshi} package~\cite{EVERYSHI}
% and Melchior Franz's \Lpack{crop} package~\cite{CROP}.
% The implementation and any errors are mine.
%
% The implementation up to October 2002 was limited to putting a cross
% at the page corners. The manual directed users to the \Lpack{crop}
% packge if they wanted anything more. In October 2002 the implementation
% was substantially extended. The background to this is below.
%
% Before the release of version 1.7 of \Lpack{crop} in May 2002 its
% author asked me to make some changes to \Lpack{memoir} that would be
% helpful to him, and I did so. Later he told me that the changes were
% unnecessary and I reverted to the original \Lpack{memoir} code.
%
% On 2002/10/06 Peter Heslin (\url{peter.heslin@ucd.ie}) started a
% thread on \url{comp.text.tex} titled `Incompatibility of memoir.cls
% and crop.sty' in which he said that \Lpack{memoir} and \Lpack{crop}
% did not seem to work together. The following are some snippets from
% that thread, identified by the various proponents.
% \begin{description}
% \item[crop] Ah, yes. It cannot work with all those \cs{settrims} etc.
% crop.sty does only respect \verb?\stock{width,height}?,
% but none of the other memoir specific trim marks stuff \ldots
%
% \item[crop] \ldots I'm not a memoir expert. crop.sty respects all the
% usual LaTeX paper dimensions and simply puts the marks around the
% page. It works with all standard classes and the KOMA classes. memoir
% seems to do things completely differently \ldots
%
% Sorry, but I'm afraid I have to pass the problem to the memoir
% author. \ldots
%
% \item[memoir] I will try and take a look at the problem but I'm
% not a crop expert --- I've never used it. However it seems odd to
% me that crop doesn't work with memoir. Memoir provides a different
% interface for specifying the page layout but then translates everything
% to the standard length variables. \ldots
%
% \item[crop] You've just taken code from it \verb?...:->?
%
% crop doesn't have its own idea at all. It just uses that of DEK
% and LaTeX, which says, that the reference point of the output box
% in the output routine is assumed 1 inch to the left [later corrected
% to right] and 1 inch down
% from the upper left (virtual) paper corner.
%
% \item[crop] With other words: crop changes \cs{hoffset} and \cs{voffset},
% in order to center the logical (virtual) page on the physical sheet
% of paper, in the middle of the crop marks. The length macros
% \cs{evensidemargin} and \cs{oddsidemargin} are unchanged and refer still
% to the logical page (modulo 1 inch).
%
% The memoir class, in contrast (mis)uses the LaTeX margins
% \cs{even(odd)sidemargin} for that purpose.
%
% Thus, the meaning of \cs{even(odd)sidemargin} is different
% in both packages.
% \end{description}
%
% Given all the above I concluded that \Lpack{crop} would remain
% as it was, and that in order to satisfy Peter Heslin I would have
% to extend the trimming marks. The following was originally limited to
% extensions
% asked for by Peter Heslin.
%
% \begin{macro}{\showtrimsoff}
% \begin{macro}{\showtrimson}
% Switch trimming marksoff and on. Requested by James Hunt on CTT
% \textit{Are crop marks needed on every page?}, February 2006.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{showtrimsoff} and \cs{showtrimson}
% (mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showtrimsoff}{\showtrimsfalse}
\newcommand*{\showtrimson}{\showtrimstrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimmark}
% This is a cross
% in a zero sized picture for marking the corner of a logical page. Up to
% version 1.0 the macro used \cs{setlength} for adjusting the \cs{unitlength}
% but Henrik Holm\footnote{Message to \ctt{} on 2002/01/04
% (\texttt{h.holm@spray.no})} discovered that if the \Lpack{calc} package
% is used then LaTeX complains about a missing number.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/04}{Removed \cs{setlength} from \cs{trimmark}. Stops
% problem with the calc package.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimmark}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1cm
\thinlines
\put(-2,0){\line(1,0){4}}
\put(0,-2){\line(0,1){4}}
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictl}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictr}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbl}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbr}
% `L' shaped trim marks for four corners.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ltrimpictl}, \cs{Ltrimpictr}, \cs{Ltrimpicbl}
% and \cs{Ltrimpicbr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictl}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
\put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictr}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
\put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbl}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
\put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbr}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
\put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Ftrimpicbl}
% Frame the page.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ftrimpictl}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Ftrimpicbl}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\unitlength 1pt
\thinlines
\put(0,0){\framebox(\strip@pt\paperwidth,\strip@pt\paperheight){}}
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktl}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktr}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbl}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbr}
% The trimming marks used for corner display.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktl}, \cs{tmarktr}, \cs{tmarkbl}
% and \cs{tmarkbr}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tmarktl}{\trimmark}
\newcommand*{\tmarktr}{\trimmark}
\newcommand*{\tmarkbl}{\trimmark}
\newcommand*{\tmarkbr}{\trimmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktm}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkml}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkmr}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbm}
% The trimming marks used for mid-side display.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktm}, \cs{tmarkml}, \cs{tmarkmr}
% and \cs{tmarkbm}}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/11/13}{Fill in these four macros. Easier
% for users to define them to do nothing, than coming up with the code}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tmarktm}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(0,2){\line(0,1){10}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\tmarkml}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){10}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\tmarkmr}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(2,0){\line(1,0){10}}
\end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\tmarkbm}{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\unitlength 1mm
\thinlines
\put(0,-12){\line(0,1){10}}
\end{picture}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimXmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\trimLmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\trimFrame}
% \begin{macro}{\trimNone}
% These are declarations for the different kinds of trimming marks.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{trimXmarks}, \cs{trimLmarks},
% \cs{trimFrame} and \cs{trimNone}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimXmarks}{%
\let\tmarktl\trimmark
\let\tmarktr\trimmark
\let\tmarkbl\trimmark
\let\tmarkbr\trimmark}
\newcommand*{\trimLmarks}{%
\let\tmarktl\Ltrimpictl
\let\tmarktr\Ltrimpictr
\let\tmarkbl\Ltrimpicbl
\let\tmarkbr\Ltrimpicbr}
\newcommand*{\trimFrame}{%
\let\tmarktl\null
\let\tmarktr\null
\let\tmarkbl\Ftrimpicbl
\let\tmarkbr\null}
\newcommand*{\trimNone}{%
\let\tmarktl\relax
\let\tmarktr\relax
\let\tmarkbl\relax
\let\tmarkbr\relax
\let\tmarktm\relax
\let\tmarkml\relax
\let\tmarkmr\relax
\let\tmarkbm\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\trimmarkscolor}
% This positions four marks (\cs{trimmark}) at the corners of a
% logical page. It is basically a \cs{vbox} with zero height and width.
%
% Bastiaan Niels Veelo reported (2003/07/11) odd things (e.g., some
% macros ignored) when changing trim marks. Turns out to be related
% to the use of \cs{protect}. The macro \cs{trimmarkscolor} can be
% used to change the color of the trimmarks. Despite its name, it is
% not a color but just an empty macro.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to work properly with the oneside option}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to use \cs{tmarktl}, etc.,
% instead of four \cs{trimmark}s}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Fiddled \cs{protect} in \cs{trimmaks}
% (from patch v1.7)}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/05}{Added \cs{trimmarkscolor}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\trimmarkscolor{}
\newcommand*{\trimmarks}{%
\vbox to \z@{\vskip-1in \vskip\trimtop % top of logical page
\hb@xt@\z@{\hskip-1in
\ifodd\c@page
\hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
\else
\if@twoside
\hskip\trimedge % left of logical page
\else
\hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
\fi
\fi
\vbox to \paperheight{%
\let\protect\relax % <- v1.4 addition
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\trimmarkscolor\tmarktl\hfil\tmarktm\hfil\tmarktr}%
\vfil
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\trimmarkscolor\tmarkml\hfil\tmarkmr}%
\vfil
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\trimmarkscolor\tmarkbl\hfil\tmarkbm\hfil\tmarkbr}}%
\hss}%
\vss}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Quark marks}
%
% William Adams (2006/08/28) supplied the following code to use trim marks
% along the style of Quark Xpress.
%
% \begin{macro}{\registrationColour}
% \begin{macro}{\quarkmarks}
% Trim marks on the style of Quark Express.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{quarkmarks} (mempatch v4.6)}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12/05}{Added \cs{normalfont} such that font
% changes going over a page break does not effect the quarks
% text. Reported by Rasmus Villemoes.}
% \changes{v3.6j}{2011/02/28}{Typo hsip -> hskip, reported by Alex Ball}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\registrationColour}[1]{#1}
\newcommand*{\quarkmarks}{%
\renewcommand*{\tmarktl}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(-36,0){\line(1,0){24}}
\put(0,12){\line(0,1){24}}
\put(3,27){\normalfont\ttfamily\fontsize{8bp}{10bp}\selectfont\jobname\ \
\today\ \ \printtime\ \ Page \thepage}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\tmarktm}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(-24,24){\line(1,0){48}}
\put(0,12){\line(0,1){24}}
\put(0,24){\oval(12,12)}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\tmarktr}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(12,0){\line(1,0){24}}
\put(0,12){\line(0,1){24}}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\tmarkmr}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(12,0){\line(1,0){24}}
\put(24,-24){\line(0,1){48}}
\put(24,0){\oval(12,12)}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\tmarkbr}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(12,0){\line(1,0){24}}
\put(0,-36){\line(0,1){24}}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\tmarkbm}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(-24,-24){\line(1,0){48}}
\put(0,-36){\line(0,1){24}}
\put(0,-24){\oval(12,12)}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\tmarkbl}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(-36,0){\line(1,0){24}}
\put(0,-36){\line(0,1){24}}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\tmarkml}{\registrationColour{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
\setlength{\unitlength}{1bp}\thicklines
\put(-36,0){\line(1,0){24}}
\put(-24,-24){\line(0,1){48}}
\put(-24,0){\oval(12,12)}
\end{picture}}}
\renewcommand*{\trimmarks}{%
%% \special{papersize=\the\stockwidth,\the\stockheight}
{%
\vbox to \z@{\vskip-1in \vskip\trimtop % top of logical page
\hb@xt@\z@{\hskip-1in
\ifodd\c@page
\hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
\else
\if@twoside
\hskip\trimedge % left of logical page
\else
\hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
\fi
\fi
\vbox to \paperheight{%
\let\protect\relax % <- v1.4 addition
% \end{macrocode}
% We remember to add \cs{trimmarkscolor}
% \changes{v3.6h}{2010/12.05}{added \cs{trimmarkscolor}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\trimmarkscolor\tmarktl\hfil\tmarktm\hfil\tmarktr}%
\vfil
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\trimmarkscolor\tmarkml\hfil\tmarkmr}%
\vfil
\hb@xt@\paperwidth{\trimmarkscolor\tmarkbl\hfil\tmarkbm\hfil\tmarkbr}}%
\hss}%
\vss}}%
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Any marks are put onto the pages by adding to the \cs{shipout}
% routine.
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@oldshipout}
% Keep a copy of the current version of \cs{shipout} in \cs{mem@oldshipout}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\mem@oldshipout\shipout
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipi}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipii}
% Effectively these will add the \cs{trimmarks} to the box holding
% the contents of the page. Note that any \cs{makeindex} must come
% \emph{before} \Lpack{pagesel} (and \Lpack{selectp}) package.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Changed \cs{mem@shipii} for the pagesel package,
% courtesy James Szinger (mempatch v311)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{ifshowtrims} to \cs{mem@shipii}
% (mempatch v4.5)}
% \changes{v1.6180339f}{2009/06/24}{Added Dan Luecking's fix to
% \cs{mem@shippii} to cater for another merry hyperref change!}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2009/11/13}{Replaced Dans fix with a fix from
% Heiko Oberdiek}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\mem@shipi}{%
\ifvoid\@cclv\expandafter\aftergroup\fi\mem@shipii}
\newcommand*\mem@shipii{%
\ifvoid\@cclv
\mem@oldshipout\box\@cclv
\else
\ifshowtrims
% \end{macrocode}
% Heiko Oberdiek responded to a problem reported by Rolf
% Niepraschk. The earlier implementation might cause the output box to
% be shifted. Heikos explanation (in response to the line
% \verb?\mem@oldshipout\vbox{\trimmarks\ifvbox\@cclv\unvbox\else\box\fi\@cclv}?) :
% \begin{verbatim}
% In vertical mode (\mem@oldshipout\vbox{...}) TeX puts
% interline skip between two boxes (\trimmarks and \@cclv),
% here \linekskip (1pt) is put inbetween causing the
% shift downwards.
% \end{verbatim}
% Heiko also provided the fix used below. Actually Heikos fix also
% fixes a problem that might cause glue settings to disappear.
% \begin{macrocode}
\mem@oldshipout\vbox{%
\trimmarks
\nointerlineskip
\box\@cclv
}%
\else
\mem@oldshipout\box\@cclv
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\shipout}
% Our new version of \cs{shipout}, which is only needed for the
% \Lopt{showtrims} option. This adds \cs{mem@shipi} to the page box
% which then calls the original version of \cs{shipout}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifshowtrims
\renewcommand*{\shipout}{\afterassignment\mem@shipi\setbox\@cclv=}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Verbatims, boxes, and files}
%
% All the code in this section was added for version 1.2 of the class.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Section `Verbatims, boxes and files' added}
%
% \subsection{Modified version of the verbatim package}
%
% Much of this is from the \Lpack{verbatim} package code~\cite{VERBATIM}.
% Unless indicated otherwise, the code and commentary is from that
% package.
%
%
% \subsubsection{Preliminaries}
%
% \begin{macro}{\every@verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\afterevery@verbatim}
% The hook (i.e., token register) \cs{every@verbatim}
% is initialized to \meta{empty}.
%
% PW added the \cs{afterevery@verbatim} hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\every@verbatim
\every@verbatim={}
\newtoks\afterevery@verbatim
\afterevery@verbatim={}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makeother}
% \cs{@makeother} takes as argument a character and changes
% its category code to $12$ (other).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makeother#1{\catcode`#112\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vobeyspaces}
% The macro \cs{@vobeyspaces} causes spaces in the input
% to be printed as spaces in the output.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\ =\active%
\def\x{\def\@vobeyspaces{\catcode`\ \active\let \@xobeysp}}
\expandafter\endgroup\x
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xobeysp}
% The macro \cs{@xobeysp} produces exactly one space in
% the output, protected against breaking just before it.
% (\cs{@M} is an abbreviation for the number $10000$.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@line}
% We use a newly defined token register called \cs{verbatim@line}
% that will be used as the character buffer.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\verbatim@line
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% PW. I have extended the original \Lpack{verbatim} package code to handle
% TABs within verbatims. Normally TeX replaces a TAB by either a single space or
% ignores it altogether. For this purpose I have bits of code from the \Lpack{moreverb}
% package~\cite{MOREVERB} for handling TABs.
%
% \textit{Code and commentary from moreverb.}
%
% We define a few auxiliary macros and counters for expanding tabs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\tab@position
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xobeytab}
% \cs{@xobeytab} puts enough spaces in to get to the next nominal
% tab stop
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xobeytab{%
\loop
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\@xobeysp}%
\advance\tab@position-1
\ifnum\tab@position>0 \repeat
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vobeytabs}
% \cs{@vobeytabs} initialises use of \cs{@xobeytab}. Needs to be
% executed within a group, as mustn't be allowed to leak out into the
% wide world.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\gdef\@vobeytabs{\catcode`\^^I\active\let^^I\@xobeytab}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@tabexpand}
% \cs{verbatim@tabexpand}\marg{body of line}\cs{@nil} processes every
% character of a line by tail recursion, counting the characters and
% juggling things when a tab is encountered.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@tabexpand#1{%
\ifx#1\@nil
\the\toks@
\expandafter\par
\else
\ifx#1\@xobeytab
\@xobeytab
\else
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We can safely put \cs{@xobeysp} into the token register, since it
% does precisely what we need
% \begin{macrocode}
\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}%
\advance\tab@position\m@ne
\fi
\ifnum\tab@position=0 \tab@position\tab@size \fi
\expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{End of code and commentary from moreverb.}
%
% PW. Some macros for turning tabbing on and off.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabson}
% \begin{macro}{\tabsoff}
% \begin{macro}{\@maybeobeytabs}
% \cs{tabson} turns tabbing on, and \cs{tabsoff} turns it off. Default
% is no tabbing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ift@bs
\newcommand{\tabson}[1][4]{%
\ifnum\@ne > #1\relax
\tabsoff
\else
\t@bstrue
\def\tab@size{#1\relax}%
\def\@maybeobeytabs{\@vobeytabs}%
\fi
}
\newcommand{\tabsoff}{%
\t@bsfalse
\def\tab@size{\z@}%
\def\@maybeobeytabs{}%
}
\tabsoff
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabverbatim@processline}
% Process a line with TABs (extracted from \Lpack{moreverb}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabverbatim@processline{\tab@position\tab@size
\toks@{}%
\expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand\the\verbatim@line\@nil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notabverbatim@processline}
% Processes a line ignoring TABs (this is the original \Lpack{verbatim}
% package definition of \cs{verbatim@processline}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\notabverbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{We are now back to the \Lpack{verbatim} code.}
%
% The following four macros are defined globally in a way suitable for
% the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments.
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@startline}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@addtoline}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
% \cs{verbatim@startline} initializes processing of a line
% by emptying the character buffer (\cs{verbatim@line}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@startline{\verbatim@line{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{verbatim@addtoline} adds the tokens in its argument
% to our buffer register \cs{verbatim@line} without expanding
% them.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@addtoline#1{%
\verbatim@line\expandafter{\the\verbatim@line#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Processing a line inside a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
% environment means printing it.
% Ending the line means that we have to begin a new paragraph.
% We use \cs{par} for this purpose. Note that \cs{par}
% is redefined in \cs{@verbatim} to force \TeX{} into horizontal
% mode and to insert an empty box so that empty lines in the input
% do appear in the output.
% (PW changed next line from \\
% \verb?\def\verbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}?
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@processline{\notabverbatim@processline}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@finish}
% As a default, \cs{verbatim@finish} processes the remaining
% characters.
% When this macro is called we are facing the following problem:
% when the \verb?\end{verbatim}?
% command is encountered \cs{verbatim@processline} is called
% to process the characters preceding the command on the same
% line. If there are none, an empty line would be output if we
% did not check for this case.
%
% If the line is empty \verb?\the\verbatim@line? expands to
% nothing. To test this we use a trick similar to that on p.\ 376
% of the \TeX{}book, but with \verb?$?\ldots\verb?|$? instead of
% the \verb?!? tokens. These \verb?$? tokens can never have the same
% category code as a \verb?$? token that might possibly appear in the
% token register \cs{verbatim@line}, as such a token will always have
% been read with category code $12$ (other).
% Note that \cs{ifcat} expands the following tokens so that
% \verb?\the\verbatim@line? is replaced by the accumulated
% characters
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@finish{\ifcat$\the\verbatim@line$\else
\verbatim@processline\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
% We start by defining the macro \cs{verbatim@font} that is
% to select the font and to set font-dependent parameters.
% Then we go through \cs{verbatim@nolig@list} to avoid
% certain ligatures.
% \cs{verbatim@nolig@list} is a macro defined in the \LaTeXe{} kernel
% to expand to
% \begin{verbatim}
% \do\`\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\'\do\-
% \end{verbatim}
% All the characters in this list can be part of a ligature in some
% font or other.
%
% PW. This is the original version which I'm going to replace.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\verbatim@font{\normalfont\ttfamily
% \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
% \let\do\do@noligs
% \verbatim@nolig@list}
% \end{verbatim}
% Actually the kernel defines the macro \verb+\@noligs+ which just
% runs the last two lines of the \verb+\verbatim@font+ above. As other
% package may add stuff to \verb+\@noligs+, we will use that instead.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimfont}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mverbfont}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
% User level handle for changing the font used for verbatim text.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/09/10}{Changed the last two lines of
% \cs{verbatim@font} into using \cs{@noligs} instead. This fixes
% problem with upquote.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setverbatimfont}[1]{\def\m@mverbfont{#1}}
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}
\def\verbatim@font{\m@mverbfont
\hyphenchar\font\m@ne
\@noligs}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim}
% The macro \cs{@verbatim} sets up things properly.
% First of all, the tokens of the \cs{every@verbatim} hook
% are inserted.
% Then a \texttt{trivlist} environment is started and its first
% \cs{item} command inserted.
% Each line of the \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
% environment will be treated as a separate paragraph.
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{Added bidi support to \cs{@verbatim}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@verbatim{\the\every@verbatim
\trivlist \item \relax
% \end{macrocode}
% The following extra vertical space is for compatibility with the
% \LaTeX kernel: otherwise, using the \Lpack{verbatim} package changes
% the vertical spacing of a \texttt{verbatim} environment nested within a
% \texttt{quote} environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% The paragraph parameters are set appropriately:
% the penalty at the beginning of the environment,
% left and right margins, paragraph indentation, the glue to
% fill the last line, and the vertical space between paragraphs.
% The latter space has to be zero since we do not want to add
% extra space between lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty
%%% \leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@
\memRTLleftskip\@totalleftmargin\memRTLrightskip\z@
\parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% There's one point to make here:
% the \texttt{list} environment uses \TeX's \cs{parshape}
% primitive to get a special indentation for the first line
% of the list.
% If the list begins with a \texttt{verbatim} environment
% this \cs{parshape} is still in effect.
% Therefore we have to reset this internal parameter explicitly.
% We could do this by assigning $0$ to \cs{parshape}.
% However, there is a simpler way to achieve this:
% we simply tell \TeX{} to start a new paragraph.
% As is explained on p.~103 of the \TeX{}book, this resets
% \cs{parshape} to zero.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@par
% \end{macrocode}
% We now ensure that \cs{par} has the correct definition,
% namely to force \TeX{} into horizontal mode
% and to include an empty box.
% This is to ensure that empty lines do appear in the output.
% Afterwards, we insert the \cs{interlinepenalty} since \TeX{}
% does not add a penalty between paragraphs (here: lines)
% by its own initiative. Otherwise a \texttt{verbatim} environment
% could be broken across pages even if a \cs{samepage}
% declaration were present.
%
% However, in a top-aligned minipage, this will result in an extra
% empty line added at the top. Therefore, a slightly more
% complicated construct is necessary.
% One of the important things here is the inclusion of
% \cs{leavevmode} as the first macro in the first line, for example,
% a blank verbatim line is the first thing in a list item.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\par{%
\if@tempswa
\leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
\else
\@tempswatrue
\ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
\fi}%
% \end{macrocode}
% But to avoid an error message when the environment
% doesn't contain any text, we redefine \cs{@noitemerr}
% which will in this case be called by \cs{endtrivlist}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@noitemerr{\@warning{No verbatim text}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we call \cs{obeylines} to make the end of line character
% active,
% \begin{macrocode}
\obeylines
% \end{macrocode}
% change the category code of all special characters,
% to $12$ (other).
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\do\@makeother \dospecials
% \end{macrocode}
% and switch to the font to be used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@font
% \end{macrocode}
% To avoid a breakpoint after the labels box, we remove the penalty
% put there by the list macros: another use of \cs{unpenalty}!
% \begin{macrocode}
\everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
% \end{macrocode}
% PW added next code at end of \cs{@verbatim}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\wrapright\the\afterevery@verbatim}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim*}
% Now we define the toplevel macros.
% \cs{verbatim} is slightly changed:
% after setting up things properly it calls
% \cs{verbatim@start}.
% This is done inside a group, so that \cs{verbatim} can be used
% directly, without \cs{begin}.
%
% PW. The following is the original code, but I want a version of
% \texttt{verbatim} that recognises TABs.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \def\verbatim{%
% \begingroup\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
% \verbatim@start}
% \end{macrocode}
% \cs{verbatim*} is defined accordingly.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup\@verbatim\verbatim@start}
% \def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup}
% \expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname=\endverbatim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% PW. My code for these is a modified version of the original \Lpack{verbatim}
% code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}
\@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@verbatim\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim*}
% To end the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*}
% environments it is only necessary to finish the
% \texttt{trivlist} environment started in \cs{@verbatim} and
% close the corresponding group, and handle\footnote{Noted by
% Zarko Cucej (\url{zarko.cucej@uni-mb.si}).} following (non-) paragraph,
% by using \cs{@doendpe}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@doendpe} to \cs{endverbatim}
% (from patch v1.8)}
% \changes{v2.0a}{2004/03/01}{Refixed \cs{endverbatim}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}
\@namelet{endverbatim*}\endverbatim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% For abnormal \cs{parskip}s the NTG class included the following, but I'm
% not sure if it is relevant here, but if it is just how it should be included.
% \begin{verbatim}
% From NTG, where it is a \cs{def}
% \providecommand*{\verbatim}{%
% \topsep=-0.5\parskip
% \@verbatim
% \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces \@xverbatim}
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{comment} environment}
%
% The \cs{comment} macro is similar to \cs{verbatim*}.
% However, we do not need to switch fonts or set special
% formatting parameters such as \cs{parindent} or \cs{parskip}.
% We need only set the category code of all special characters
% to $12$ (other) and that of \verb?^^M? (the end of line character)
% to $13$ (active).
% The latter is needed for macro parameter delimiter matching in
% the internal macros defined below.
% In contrast to the default definitions used by the
% \cs{verbatim} and \cs{verbatim*} macros,
% we define \cs{verbatim@addtoline} to throw away its argument
% and \cs{verbatim@processline}, \cs{verbatim@startline},
% and \cs{verbatim@finish} to act as no-ops.
% Then we call \cs{verbatim@}.
% But the first thing we do is to call \cs{@bsphack} so that
% this environment has no influence whatsoever upon the spacing.
%
% PW: This is the original code for the \texttt{comment} environment,
% which I'm going to change.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\comment{\@bsphack
% \let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
% \let\verbatim@startline\relax
% \let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
% \let\verbatim@processline\relax
% \let\verbatim@finish\relax
% \verbatim@}
% \end{verbatim}
% \cs{endcomment} is very simple: it only calls
% \cs{@esphack} to take care of the spacing.
% The \cs{end} macro closes the group and therefore takes care
% of restoring everything we changed.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \let\endcomment=\@esphack
% \end{verbatim}
%
% PW: The remainder of this section is my code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupcomment}
% \cs{setupcomment} does all the \cs{let}s in the original \cs{comment} code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupcomment}{%
\let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
\let\verbatim@startline\relax
\let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
\let\verbatim@processline\relax
\let\verbatim@finish\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The macros below do no checking to see if something has (not) been defined
% previously. It's `user beware' time.
%
% \begin{macro}{\newcomment}
% \cs{newcomment}\marg{name} creates a new comment environment called
% \meta{name}. This is a generalisation of the original comment code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newcomment}[1]{%
\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{\@bsphack\setupcomment\verbatim@}%
\expandafter\let\csname end#1\endcsname=\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\commentsoff}
% \cs{commentsoff}\marg{name} switches off the \meta{name} comment
% environment by defining the relevent macros to do nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\commentsoff}[1]{%
\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{}%
\expandafter\def\csname end#1\endcsname{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\commentson}
% \cs{commentson}\marg{name} switches on the \meta{name} comment
% environment. It has to do the same things as \cs{newcomment} does,
% so let \cs{newcomment} do the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\commentson}[1]{\newcomment{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We had better supply the \texttt{comment} environment, as promised.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcomment{comment}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% PW: That is the end of my changes and extensions to the original
% \texttt{comment} environment code.
%
%
% \subsubsection{The main loop}
%
% Here comes the tricky part:
% During the definition of the macros we need to use the special
% characters \verb?\?, \verb?{?, and \verb?}? not only with their
% normal category codes,
% but also with category code $12$ (other).
% We achieve this by the following trick:
% first we tell \TeX{} that \verb?\?, \verb?{?, and \verb?}?
% are the lowercase versions of \verb?!?, \verb?[?, and \verb?]?.
% Then we replace every occurrence of \verb?\?, \verb?{?, and \verb?}?
% that should be read with category code $12$ by \verb?!?, \verb?[?,
% and \verb?]?, respectively,
% and give the whole list of tokens to \cs{lowercase},
% knowing that category codes are not altered by this primitive!
%
% But first we have ensure that
% \verb?!?, \verb?[?, and \verb?]? themselves have
% the correct category code!
% To allow special settings of these codes we hide their setting in
% the macro \cs{vrb@catcodes}. If it is already defined our new
% definition is skipped.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{vrb@catcodes}%
{\def\vrb@catcodes{%
\catcode`\!12\catcode`\[12\catcode`\]12}}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% This trick allows us to use this code for applications where other
% category codes are in effect.
%
% We start a group to keep the category code changes local.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\vrb@catcodes
\lccode`\!=`\\ \lccode`\[=`\{ \lccode`\]=`\}
% \end{macrocode}
% We also need the end-of-line character \verb?^^M?,
% as an active character.
% If we were to simply write \verb?\catcode`\^^M=\active?
% then we would get an unwanted active end of line character
% at the end of every line of the following macro definitions.
% Therefore we use the same trick as above:
% we write a tilde \verb?~? instead of \verb?^^M? and
% pretend that the
% latter is the lowercase variant of the former.
% Thus we have to ensure now that the tilde character has
% category code $13$ (active).
% \begin{macrocode}
\catcode`\~=\active \lccode`\~=`\^^M
% \end{macrocode}
% The use of the \cs{lowercase} primitive leads to one problem:
% the uppercase character `\texttt{C}' needs to be used in the
% code below and its case must be preserved.
% So we add the command:
% \begin{macrocode}
\lccode`\C=`\C
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we start the token list passed to \cs{lowercase}.
% We use the following little trick (proposed by Bernd Raichle):
% The very first token in the token list we give to \cs{lowercase} is
% the \cs{endgroup} primitive. This means that it is processed by
% \TeX{} immediately after \cs{lowercase} has finished its operation,
% thus ending the group started by \cs{begingroup} above. This avoids
% the global definition of all macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\lowercase{\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@start}
% The purpose of \cs{verbatim@start} is to check whether there
% are any characters on the same line as the \verb?\begin{verbatim}?
% and to pretend that they were on a line by themselves.
% On the other hand, if there are no characters remaining
% on the current line we shall just find an end of line character.
% \cs{verbatim@start} performs its task by first grabbing the
% following character (its argument).
% This argument is then compared to an active \verb?^^M?,
% the end of line character.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@start#1{%
\verbatim@startline
\if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
% \end{macrocode}
% If this is true we transfer control to \cs{verbatim@}
% to process the next line. We use
% \cs{next} as the macro which will continue the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise, we define \cs{next} to expand to a call
% to \cs{verbatim@} followed by the character just
% read so that it is reinserted into the text.
% This means that those characters remaining on this line
% are handled as if they formed a line by themselves.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \def\next{\verbatim@#1}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we call \cs{next}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@}
% The three macros \cs{verbatim@}, \cs{verbatim@@},
% and \cs{verbatim@@@} form the ``main loop'' of the
% \texttt{verbatim} environment.
% The purpose of \cs{verbatim@} is to read exactly one line
% of input.
% \cs{verbatim@@} and \cs{verbatim@@@} work together to
% find out whether the four characters
% \cs{end} (all with category code $12$ (other)) occur in that
% line.
% If so, \cs{verbatim@@@} will call
% \cs{verbatim@test} to check whether this \cs{end} is
% part of \verb?\end{verbatim}? and will terminate the environment
% if this is the case.
% Otherwise we continue as if nothing had happened.
% So let's have a look at the definition of \cs{verbatim@}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@#1~{\verbatim@@#1!end\@nil}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Note that the \verb?!? character will have been replaced by a
% \verb?\? with category code $12$ (other) by the \cs{lowercase}
% primitive governing this code before the definition of this
% macro actually takes place.
% That means that
% it takes the line, puts \cs{end} (four character tokens)
% and \cs{@nil} (one control sequence token) as a
% delimiter behind it, and
% then calls \cs{verbatim@@}.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@}
% \cs{verbatim@@} takes everything up to the next occurrence of
% the four characters \cs{end} as its argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@@#1!end{%
% \end{macrocode}
% That means: if they do not occur in the original line, then
% argument \verb?#1? is the
% whole input line, and \cs{@nil} is the next token
% to be processed.
% However, if the four characters \cs{end} are part of the
% original line, then
% \verb?#1? consists of the characters in front of \cs{end},
% and the next token is the following character (always remember
% that the line was lengthened by five tokens).
% Whatever \verb?#1? may be, it is verbatim text,
% so \verb?#1? is added to the line currently built.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@addtoline{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The next token in the input stream
% is of special interest to us.
% Therefore \cs{futurelet} defines \cs{next} to be equal
% to it before calling \cs{verbatim@@@}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\futurelet\next\verbatim@@@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@@}
% \cs{verbatim@@@} will now read the rest of the tokens on
% the current line,
% up to the final \cs{@nil} token.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@@@#1\@nil{%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the first of the above two cases occurred, i.e.\ no
% \cs{end} characters were on that line, \verb?#1? is empty
% and \cs{next} is equal to \cs{@nil}.
% This is easily checked.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\next\@nil
% \end{macrocode}
% If so, this was a simple line.
% We finish it by processing the line we accumulated so far.
% Then we prepare to read the next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise we have to check what follows these \cs{end}
% tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Before we continue, it's a good idea to stop for a moment
% and remember where we are:
% We have just read the four character tokens \cs{end}
% and must now check whether the name of the environment (surrounded
% by braces) follows.
% To this end we define a macro called \cs{@tempa}
% that reads exactly one character and decides what to do next.
% This macro should do the following: skip spaces until
% it encounters either a left brace or the end of the line.
% But it is important to remember which characters are skipped.
% The \cs{end}\meta{optional spaces}\verb?{? characters
% may be part of the verbatim text, i.e.\ these characters
% must be printed.
%
% Assume for example that the current line contains
% \begin{verbatim*}
% \end {AVeryLongEnvironmentName}
%\end{verbatim*}
% As we shall soon see, the scanning mechanism implemented here
% will not find out that this is text to be printed until
% it has read the right brace.
% Therefore we need a way to accumulate the characters read
% so that we can reinsert them if necessary.
% The token register \cs{@temptokena} is used for this purpose.
%
% Before we do this we have to get rid of the superfluous
% \cs{end} tokens at the end of the line.
% To this end we define a temporary macro whose argument
% is delimited by \verb?\end\@nil? (four character tokens
% and one control sequence token) to be used below
% on the rest of the line, after appending a \cs{@nil} token to it.
% (Note that this token can never appear in \verb?#1?.)
% We use the following definition of
% \cs{@tempa} to get the rest of the line (after the first
% \cs{end}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tempa##1!end\@nil{##1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% We mentioned already that we use token register
% \cs{@temptokena}
% to remember the characters we skip, in case we need them again.
% We initialize this with the \cs{end} we have thrown away
% in the call to \cs{@tempa}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@temptokena{!end}%
% \end{macrocode}
% We shall now call \cs{verbatim@test}
% to process the characters
% remaining on the current line.
% But wait a moment: we cannot simply call this macro
% since we have already read the whole line.
% Therefore we have to first expand the macro \cs{@tempa} to insert
% them again after the \cs{verbatim@test} token.
% A \verb?^^M? character is appended to denote the end of the line.
% (Remember that this character comes disguised as a tilde.)
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\next{\expandafter\verbatim@test\@tempa#1\@nil~}%
% \end{macrocode}
% That's almost all, but we still have to
% now call \cs{next} to do the work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi \next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@test}
% We define \cs{verbatim@test} to investigate every token
% in turn.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@test#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% First of all we set \cs{next} equal to \cs{verbatim@test}
% in case this macro must call itself recursively in order to
% skip spaces.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\next\verbatim@test
% \end{macrocode}
% We have to distinguish four cases:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item The next token is a \verb?^^M?, i.e.\ we reached
% the end of the line. That means that nothing
% special was found.
% Note that we use \cs{if} for the following
% comparisons so that the category code of the
% characters is irrelevant.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
% \end{macrocode}
% We add the characters accumulated in token register
% \cs{@temptokena} to the current line. Since
% \cs{verbatim@addtoline} does not expand its argument,
% we have to do the expansion at this point. Then we
% \cs{let} \cs{next} equal to \cs{verbatim@}
% to prepare to read the next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item A space character follows.
% This is allowed, so we add it to \cs{@temptokena}
% and continue.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \if\noexpand#1
\@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \item An open brace follows.
% This is the most interesting case.
% We must now collect characters until we read the closing
% brace and check whether they form the environment name.
% This will be done by \cs{verbatim@testend}, so here
% we let \cs{next} equal this macro.
% Again we will process the rest of the line, character
% by character.
% The characters forming the name of the environment will
% be accumulated in \cs{@tempc}.
% We initialize this macro to expand to nothing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \if\noexpand#1\noexpand[%
\let\@tempc\@empty
\let\next\verbatim@testend
% \end{macrocode}
% Note that the \verb?[? character will be a \verb?{? when
% this macro is defined.
% \item Any other character means that the \cs{end} was part
% of the verbatim text.
% Add the characters to the current line and prepare to call
% \cs{verbatim@} to process the rest of the line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
\def\next{\verbatim@#1}%
\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{enumerate}
% The last thing this macro does is to call \cs{next}
% to continue processing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@testend}
% \cs{verbatim@testend} is called when
% \cs{end}\meta{optional spaces}\verb?{? was seen.
% Its task is to scan everything up to the next \verb?}?
% and to call \cs{verbatim@@testend}.
% If no \verb?}? is found it must reinsert the characters it read
% and return to \cs{verbatim@}.
% The following definition is similar to that of
% \cs{verbatim@test}:
% it takes the next character and decides what to do.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@testend#1{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Again, we have four cases:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item \verb?^^M?: As no \verb?}? is found in the current line,
% add the characters to the buffer. To avoid a
% complicated construction for expanding
% \cs{@temptokena}
% and \cs{@tempc} we do it in two steps. Then we
% continue with \cs{verbatim@} to process the
% next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\@tempc}%
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\let\next\verbatim@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item \verb?}?: Call \cs{verbatim@@testend} to check
% if this is the right environment name.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand]%
\let\next\verbatim@@testend
% \end{macrocode}
% \item \verb?\?: This character must not occur in the name of
% an environment. Thus we stop collecting characters.
% In principle, the same argument would apply to other
% characters as well, e.g., \verb?{?.
% However, \verb?\? is a special case, since it may be
% the first character of \cs{end}. This means that
% we have to look again for
% \cs{end}\marg{environment name}
% Note that we prefixed the \verb?!? by a \cs{noexpand}
% primitive, to protect ourselves against it being an
% active character.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand!%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\@tempc}%
\def\next{\verbatim@!}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \item Any other character: collect it and continue.
% We cannot use \cs{edef} to define \cs{@tempc}
% since its replacement text might contain active
% character tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempc\expandafter
{\@tempc#1}\fi\fi\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{enumerate}
% As before, the macro ends by calling itself, to
% process the next character if appropriate.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@testend}
% Unlike the previous macros \cs{verbatim@@testend} is simple:
% it has only to check if the \cs{end}\marg{...}
% matches the corresponding \cs{begin}\marg{...}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@@testend{%
% \end{macrocode}
% We use \cs{next} again to define the things that are
% to be done.
% Remember that the name of the current environment is
% held in \cs{@currenvir}, the characters accumulated
% by \cs{verbatim@testend} are in \cs{@tempc}.
% So we simply compare these and prepare to execute
% \cs{end}\marg{current environment}
% macro if they match.
% Before we do this we call \cs{verbatim@finish} to process
% the last line.
% We define \cs{next} via \cs{edef} so that
% \cs{@currenvir} is replaced by its expansion.
% Therefore we need \cs{noexpand} to inhibit the expansion
% of \cs{end} at this point.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@tempc\@currenvir
\verbatim@finish
\edef\next{\noexpand\end{\@currenvir}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Without this trick the \cs{end} command would not be able
% to correctly check whether its argument matches the name of
% the current environment and you'd get an
% interesting \LaTeX{} error message such as:
% \begin{verbatim}
%! \begin{verbatim*} ended by \end{verbatim*}.
%\end{verbatim}
% But what do we do with the rest of the characters, those
% that remain on that line?
% We call \cs{verbatim@rescan} to take care of that.
% Its first argument is the name of the environment just
% ended, in case we need it again.
% \cs{verbatim@rescan} takes the list of characters to be
% reprocessed as its second argument.
% (This token list was inserted after the current macro
% by \cs{verbatim@@@}.)
% Since we are still in an \cs{edef} we protect it
% by means of\cs{noexpand}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\noexpand\verbatim@rescan{\@currenvir}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the names do not match, we reinsert everything read up
% to now and prepare to call \cs{verbatim@} to process
% the rest of the line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
\expandafter{\@tempc]}%
\let\next\verbatim@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally we call \cs{next}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\next}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@rescan}
% In principle \cs{verbatim@rescan} could be used to
% analyse the characters remaining after the \verb?\end{...}?
% command and pretend that these were read
% ``properly'', assuming ``standard'' category codes are in
% force.\footnote{Remember that they were all read with
% category codes $11$ (letter) and $12$ (other) so
% that control sequences are not recognized as such.}
% But this is not always possible (when there are unmatched
% curly braces in the rest of the line).
% Besides, we think that this is not worth the effort:
% After a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*} environment
% a new line in the output is begun anyway,
% and an \verb?\end{comment}? can easily be put on a line by itself.
% So there is no reason why there should be any text here.
% For the benefit of the user who did put something there
% (a comment, perhaps)
% we simply issue a warning and drop them.
% The method of testing is explained in Appendix~D, p.\ 376 of
% the \TeX{}book. We use \verb?^^M? instead of the \verb?!?
% character used there
% since this is a character that cannot appear in \verb?#1?.
% The two \cs{noexpand} primitives are necessary to avoid
% expansion of active characters and macros.
%
% One extra subtlety should be noted here: remember that
% the token list we are currently building will first be
% processed by the \cs{lowercase} primitive before \TeX{}
% carries out the definitions.
% This means that the `\texttt{C}' character in the
% argument to the \cs{@warning} macro must be protected against
% being changed to `\texttt{c}'. That's the reason why we added the
% \verb?\lccode`\C=`\C? assignment above.
% We can now finish the argument to \cs{lowercase} as well as the
% group in which the category codes were changed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@rescan#1#2~{\if\noexpand~\noexpand#2~\else
\@warning{Characters dropped after `\string\end{#1}'}\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The \cs{verbatiminput} command}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@in@stream}
% We begin by allocating an input stream (out of the 16 available
% input streams).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newread\verbatim@in@stream
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@readfile}
% The macro \cs{verbatim@readfile} encloses the main loop by calls to
% the macros \cs{verbatim@startline} and \cs{verbatim@finish},
% respectively. This makes sure
% that the user can initialize and finish the command when the file
% is empty or doesn't exist. The \texttt{verbatim} environment has a
% similar behaviour when called with an empty text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@readfile#1{%
\verbatim@startline
% \end{macrocode}
% When the file is not found we issue a warning.
% \begin{macrocode}
\openin\verbatim@in@stream #1\relax
\ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
\typeout{No file #1.}%
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% At this point we pass the name of the file to \cs{@addtofilelist}
% so that its appears appears in the output of a \cs{listfiles}
% command.
% In addition, we use \cs{ProvidesFile} to make a log entry in the
% transcript file and to distinguish files read in via
% \cs{verbatiminput} from others.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@addtofilelist{#1}%
\ProvidesFile{#1}[(verbatim)]%
% \end{macrocode}
% While reading from the file it is useful to switch off the
% recognition of the end-of-line character. This saves us stripping
% off spaces from the contents of the line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
\expandafter\verbatim@read@file
\expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
\closein\verbatim@in@stream
\fi
\verbatim@finish
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@file}
% All the work is done in \cs{verbatim@read@file}. It reads the input
% file line by line and recursively calls itself until the end of
% the file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@read@file{%
\read\verbatim@in@stream to\next
\ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% For each line we call \cs{verbatim@addtoline} with the contents of
% the line. \hskip0pt plus 3cm\penalty0\hskip0pt plus -3cm
% \cs{verbatim@processline} is called next.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
\verbatim@processline
% \end{macrocode}
% After processing the line we call \cs{verbatim@startline} to
% initialize all before we read the next line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@startline
% \end{macrocode}
% Without \cs{expandafter} each call of \cs{verbatim@read@file} uses
% space in \TeX's input stack.\footnote{A standard \TeX\ would
% report an overflow error if you try to read a file with more than
% ca.\ 200~lines. The same error occurs if the first line of code
% in \S 390 of \textsl{``TeX: The Program''\/} is missing.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\verbatim@read@file
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatiminput}
% \cs{verbatiminput} first starts a group to keep font and category
% changes local.
% Then it calls the macro \cs{verbatim@input} with additional
% arguments, depending on whether an asterisk follows.
%
% PW. I added the TAB checking code.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatiminput{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@ifstar{\verbatim@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
{\verbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@input}
% \cs{verbatim@input} first checks whether the file exists, using
% the standard macro cs{IfFileExists} which leaves the name of the
% file found in \cs{@filef@und}.
% Then everything is set up as in the \cs{verbatim} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@input#1#2{%
\IfFileExists {#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% Then it reads in the file, finishes off the \texttt{trivlist}
% environment started by \cs{@verbatim} and closes the group.
% This restores everything to its normal settings.
% \begin{macrocode}
\verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the file is not found a more or less helpful message is
% printed. The final \cs{endgroup} is needed to close the group
% started in \cs{verbatiminput} above.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{That completes my borrowings from \Lpack{verbatim}.}
%
% The next bunch of code implements wrapping verbatim lines so they, hopefully,
% stay within the typeblock.
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatimindent}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatimbreakchar}
% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimbreak}
% The length \cs{verbatimindent} is the distance continuation lines are indented
% from the left margin. \cs{verbatimbreakchar} is the character to indicate
% a wrapped line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\verbatimindent}
\setlength{\verbatimindent}{3em}
\newcommand*{\verbatimbreakchar}{\char`\%}
\newcommand*{\setverbatimbreak}{%
\vspace*{-\baselineskip}%
\def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}%
{\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedwrap}
% \begin{macro}{\wrappingon}
% \begin{macro}{\wrapright}
% \begin{macro}{\wrappingoff}
% \cs{wrappingon} and \cs{wrappingoff} enable/prohibit wrapping. The
% default is \cs{wrappingoff}.
%
% The macro
% \cs{wrapright} is used to set paragraph skips; without raggedright the
% lines
% may break at the first space \emph{outside} the text area. However,
% Paul (\url{paulaugust2003@yahoo.com}) found that wrapped verbatims
% in a list (e.g., \texttt{itemize}) were not indented although regular
% verbatims were indented. \cs{raggedwrap} is a variation on \cs{raggedright}
% (\cs{leftskip} is set to \cs{@totalleftmargin} instead of 0pt), and seems
% to have fixed the problem with the original code which used
% \cs{raggedright}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{raggedwrap} (mempatch v4.4)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/18}{Added bidi support to \cs{raggedwrap}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\raggedwrap}{%
\@rightskip\@flushglue
%%% \rightskip\@rightskip
\memRTLrightskip\@rightskip
%%% \leftskip\@totalleftmargin
\memRTLleftskip\@totalleftmargin
\parindent\ragrparindent}
\newcommand*{\wrappingon}{%
\def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}%
{\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
\def\wrapright{\raggedwrap}}
\newcommand*{\wrappingoff}{%
\def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }%
\def\wrapright{}}
\wrappingoff
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Writing and boxing verbatim}
%
% This bunch of code is from the \Lpack{moreverb} package.
%
% \begin{environment}{verbatimoutput}
% \verb?\begin{verbatimoutput}?\marg{filename} writes all text in its body to a
% file, the name of which it is given as an argument. (The code was
% written by Rainer Sch\"opf but the environment was called
% \verb?verbatimwrite?). In the code below, uncommenting \\
% \verb?\catcode`\^^I=12? \\
% will result in TABs being written as \verb?^^I?.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Changed name verbatimwrite to
% verbatimoutput (but neither were mentioned in the manual)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite \verbatim@out
\def\verbatimoutput#1{%
\@bsphack
\immediate\openout \verbatim@out #1
\let\do\@makeother\dospecials
\catcode`\^^M\active %% \catcode`\^^I=12
\def\verbatim@processline{%
\immediate\write\verbatim@out
{\the\verbatim@line}}%
\verbatim@start}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endverbatimoutput{%
\immediate\closeout\verbatim@out
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \begin{environment}{fboxverbatim}
% \texttt{fboxverbatim} puts the contents of a verbatim environment
% in a framing box. (PW: This was originally called \texttt{boxedverbatim}).
%
% (Written by Victor Eijkhout.)
%
% Bug fix (supplied by David Carlisle) 1995/12/28, marked
% \verb+%%%DPC%%%+
%
% First, redefine `processline' to produce only a line as wide
% as the natural width of the line
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fboxverbatim{\begingroup%
\tabsoff %% PW otherwise box fills the width
\def\verbatim@processline{%
{\setbox0=\hbox{\the\verbatim@line}%
\hsize=\wd0 \the\verbatim@line\par}}%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now save the verbatim code in a box
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\@minipagetrue%%%DPC%%%
\@tempswatrue%%%DPC%%%
\setbox0=\vbox\bgroup \verbatim
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% At the end of the environment, we (umm) simply have to stick the
% results into a frame.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endfboxverbatim{%
\endverbatim
\unskip\setbox0=\lastbox %%%DPC%%%
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Now everything's in the box, so we can close it\dots
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\egroup
% \end{macrocode}
%
% To change the code for centering, the next line needs a spot of
% hacking.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\fbox{\box0}% <<<=== change here for centering,...
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \subsection{The shortvrb package}
%
% The following is the \Lpack{shortvrb} package code (from \texttt{doc.dtx}
% by Frank Mittelbach). It has been so useful to me that I wanted
% to include it in the class.
%
% CODE AND COMMENTARY IS BY FRANK MITTELBACH
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeShortVerb}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\MakeShortVerb#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@shortvrbinfo{Made }{#1}%
\add@special{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Then the character's current catcode is stored in \verb?\cc\?\meta{c}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter
\xdef\csname cc\string#1\endcsname{\the\catcode`#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% The character is spliced into the definition using the same trick as
% used in \cs{verb} (for instance), having activated \verb?~? in a group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\~\active \lccode`\~`#1%
\lowercase{%
% \end{macrocode}
% The character's old meaning is recorded in \verb?\ac\?\meta{c} prior to
% assigning it a new one.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\expandafter\let
\csname ac\string#1\endcsname~%
\gdef~{\verb~}}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Finally the character is made active.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\catcode`#1\active
% \end{macrocode}
% If we suspect that \meta{c} is already a short reference, we tell
% the user. Now he or she is responsible if anything goes wrong\,\dots
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@shortvrbinfo\@empty{#1 already}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\DeleteShortVerb}
% Here's the means of undoing a \cs{MakeShortVerb}, for instance in a
% region where you need to use the character outside a verbatim
% environment. It arranges for \cs{dospecials} and \cs{@sanitize} to be
% altered appropriately, restores the saved catcode and, if necessary,
% the character's meaning (as stored by
% \cs{MakeShortVerb}). If the catcode wasn't stored in
% \verb?\cc\?\meta{c} (by \cs{MakeShortVerb}) the command is silently
% ignored.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\DeleteShortVerb#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@shortvrbinfo{Deleted }{#1 as}%
\rem@special{#1}%
\global\catcode`#1\csname cc\string#1\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
% We must not forget to reset \verb?\cc\?\meta{c}, otherwise the check in
% \cs{MakeShortVerb} for a repeated definition will not work.
% \begin{macrocode}
\global \expandafter\let \csname cc\string#1\endcsname \relax
\ifnum\catcode`#1=\active
\begingroup
\catcode`\~\active \lccode`\~`#1%
\lowercase{%
\global\expandafter\let\expandafter~%
\csname ac\string#1\endcsname}%
\endgroup \fi \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@shortvrbinfo}
% Helper function for info messages.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@shortvrbinfo#1#2{%
\ClassInfo{memoir}{%
#1\expandafter\@gobble\string#2 a short reference
for \string\verb}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\add@special}
% This helper macro adds its argument to the
% \cs{dospecials} macro which is conventionally used by verbatim macros
% to alter the catcodes of the currently active characters. We need
% to add \verb?\do\?\meta{c} to the expansion of \cs{dospecials} after
% removing the character if it was already there to avoid multiple
% copies building up should \cs{MakeShortVerb} not be balanced by
% \cs{DeleteShortVerb} (in case anything that uses \cs{dospecials} cares
% about repetitions).
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\add@special#1{%
\rem@special{#1}%
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter
{\dospecials \do #1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Similarly we have to add \verb?\@makeother\?\meta{c} to \cs{@sanitize}
% (which is used in things like \cs{index} to re-catcode all special
% characters except braces).
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@sanitize\expandafter
{\@sanitize \@makeother #1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rem@special}
% The inverse of cs{add@special} is slightly trickier. \cs{do} is
% re-defined to expand to nothing if its argument is the character of
% interest, otherwise to expand simply to the argument. We can then
% re-define \cs{dospecials} to be the expansion of itself. The space
% after \verb?=`##1? prevents an expansion to \cs{relax}!
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\rem@special#1{%
\def\do##1{%
\ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\do\noexpand##1\fi}%
\xdef\dospecials{\dospecials}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Fixing \cs{@sanitize} is the same except that we need to re-define
% \cs{@makeother} which obviously needs to be done in a group.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\def\@makeother##1{%
\ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\@makeother\noexpand##1\fi}%
\xdef\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% END OF MITTELBACH CODE AND COMMENTARY.
%
% \subsection{General verbatim boxing and line numbering}
%
% A while ago I wrote a package that I never released. Here it is
% now, updated and improved. The package was based on code originally
% posted to \ctt{} by Donald Arseneau on 13 July 2000.
%
% This is DA's posted code.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \RequirePackage{verbatim}
% \def\boxverbflag{14 }
%
% \def\boxedverbatim{%
% \fboxsep=1em
% \def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
% \vrule\vbox{\advance\hsize-.8p@ \@@line
% {\strut\kern\fboxsep\the\verbatim@line\hss}%
% \kern\fbozsep}\vrule\par}%
% \@verbatim % but make some replacement settings
% % \ifdim\@totalleftmargin>\fboxsep \fboxsep\@totalleftmargin \fi
% \leftskip\x@skip \rightskip\z@skip
% \interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
% \parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
% \lineskip-\fboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
% \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
% \boxverb@toprule
% \verbatim@start}
%
% \def\endboxedverbatim{\hrule\endtrivlist}
%
% \@namefdef{boxedverbatim*}{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
% \@namefdef{endboxedverbatim*}{\hrule\endtrivlist}
%
% \output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
%
% \def\boxverb@toprule{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@
% \@@line{\vrule height2\fboxsep \hss \vrule}}
%
% \def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
% \ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
% \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
% \null \kern-.7\topskip \boxverb@toprule
% \fi\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
% That's the end of DA's posted code
%
% I have extended this to provide:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim
% \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim input
% \item Normally each `page' is boxed, but start/end rules can be switched off
% at page boundaries
% \item A heading can be put at the start of `continuation' pages
% \item Lines of verbatim text can be numbered
% \item Can be `downgraded' to normal verbatim environment
% \end{itemize}
%
% OK, on to the main code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxverbflag}
% \begin{macro}{\bvboxsep}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverbflag{14 }
\newlength{\bvboxsep} % user can change this
\setlength{\bvboxsep}{1em}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvperpage % start/end lines on every page of multipage verbatim
\bvperpagetrue
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopofpage}
% \begin{macro}{\b@vtop}
% Can use \cs{bvtopofpage} to put a heading above continued verbatims.
% For example \\
% \verb?\bvtopofpage{\begin{center}\normalfont (Continued)\end{center}}? \\
% It only works for \cs{bvperpagetrue}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvtopofpage}[1]{%
\long\def\b@vtop{#1}}
\def\b@vtop{} % used in \boxverb@split for heading
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@memfbvline}
% \begin{macro}{\c@bvlinectr}
% Counter for adjusting the starting line number for boxed verbatims
% and for the line number itself..
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{memfbvline}
\c@memfbvline=\z@
\newcounter{bvlinectr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setbvlinenums}
% \cs{setbvlinenums}\marg{firstline}\marg{startnumsat} sets the first line
% number to \meta{firstline} and the first line number to be printed is
% \meta{startnumsat}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{setbvlinenums} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setbvlinenums}[2]{%
\c@bvlinectr #1\relax \advance\c@bvlinectr \m@ne
\ifnum\z@<\linemodnum% we are printing line numbers
\@tempcnta #2\relax
\divide\@tempcnta\linemodnum
\multiply\@tempcnta\linemodnum
\c@memfbvline #2\relax
\advance\c@memfbvline-\@tempcnta
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theb@vlinenumber}
% \begin{macro}{\resetbvlinenumber}
% \cs{resetbvlinenumber} reinitializes the line numbering.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{theb@vlinenumber} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\theb@vlinenumber{\getthelinenumber{bvlinectr}{memfbvline}}
\newcommand*{\resetbvlinenumber}{\setcounter{bvlinectr}{0}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdocount}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumlength}
% Increment line number if counting. A line number is printed in
% a space width \cs{bvnumlength}, which is given a temporary value here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\b@vdocount{\ifbvcountlines\stepcounter{bvlinectr}\fi}
\newlength{\bvnumlength}
%% \settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}
\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\normalfont 999}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountinside}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersinside}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersoutside}
% Flag and commands for positioning the numbers. Default is to print
% them inside the box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvcountinside % TRUE if line numbers inside box
\bvcountinsidetrue
\newcommand*{\bvnumbersinside}{\bvcountinsidetrue}
\newcommand*{\bvnumbersoutside}{\bvcountinsidefalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdoinside}
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdooutside}
% Print numbers inside (outside) the box.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\b@vdoinside{%
\ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside%
\makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{%
\vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}%
\fi\fi}
\def\b@vdooutside{%
\ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside\else%
\llap{\makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{%
\vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}}%
\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@m@mline}
% \cs{@@line} is defined as \verb?\def\@@line{\hb@xt@\hsize}? and I need
% an equivalent for \cs{linewidth} instead of \cs{hsize} for use in
% \cs{setupboxverb@line}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{@@m@mline} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@@m@mline}{\hb@xt@\linewidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupboxverb@line}
% Use a macro for the first main part of DA's code for \cs{boxedverbatim},
% adding lots of hooks.
%
% Per Starb\"{a}ck had problems with the combination of \texttt{adjustwidth}
% with \texttt{boxedverbatim} (see CTT \textit{Re: [memoir] adjustwidth +
% boxedverbatim}, 2007/02/10) and Lars Madsen came up with a suggestion to
% use \cs{linewidth} instead of \cs{hsize}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{hsize} to \cs{linewidth} in
% \cs{setupboxverb@line} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupboxverb@line}{%
\par
\ifbvperpage
\output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
\b@vdocount%
\bvleftsidehook\vbox{\advance% \hsize-.8\p@ \@@line % changed to \linewidth
\linewidth-.8\p@ \@@line
{\b@vdooutside\strut\kern\bvboxsep%
\b@vdoinside%
\ift@bs
\tabverbatim@processline
\else
\the\verbatim@line
\fi
\hss}%
\kern\bvboxsep}\bvrightsidehook\par}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupbox@verb}
% Use a macro for the second main part of DA's code, and integrate it
% with the other verbatim codes (e.g., include \cs{@maybeobeytags}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupbox@verb}{%
\leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip
\interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
\parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
\lineskip-\bvboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs
\boxverb@toprule}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\endboxedverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim*}
% \begin{macro}{\endboxedverbatim*}
% Given the two macros above, we can write a briefer version of DA's
% \cs{boxedverbatim(*)}.
% As noted by Zarko Cucej\footnote{\url{zarko.cucej@uni-mb.si}}, have to handle
% a following (no-) paragraph.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added \cs{@doendpe} to \cs{endboxedverbatim}
% (from patch v1.8)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxedverbatim{\begingroup
\let\@@line\@@m@mline% new from mempatch v4.9
\setupboxverb@line
\@verbatim
\setupbox@verb
\verbatim@start}
\def\endboxedverbatim{\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}
\@namedef{boxedverbatim*}{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
\@namelet{endboxedverbatim*}\endboxverbatim
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverb@toprule{\bvtoprulehook
\@@line{\bvleftsidehook \bvtopmidhook \bvrightsidehook}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvendofpage}
% \cs{bvendofpage}\marg{spec} sets the boxed verbatim `end of page' to \meta{spec}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Added \cs{bvendofpage} (mempatch v2.3d)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Changed \cs{bvendofpage} to include width}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bvendofpage}[1]{%
\def\boxverb@botpage{#1}}
%%%%\bvendofpage{\hrule\kern-.4pt}
\bvendofpage{\hrule width\linewidth\kern-.4pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxverb@split}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
\ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
%%%% \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
\setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\boxverb@botpage}%
\null \kern-.7\topskip \b@vtop \boxverb@toprule
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtoprulehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvendrulehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvleftsidehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvrightsidehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopmidhook}
% The new hooks, for the top, bottom, left and right of the box.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{linewidth} to \cs{bvtoprulehook} and
% \cs{bvendrulehook} (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\bvtoprulehook{\hrule width\linewidth \nobreak\vskip-.1\p@}
\def\bvendrulehook{\hrule width\linewidth}
\def\bvleftsidehook{\vrule}
\def\bvrightsidehook{\vrule}
\def\bvtopmidhook{\rule{0\p@}{2\bvboxsep} \hss}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatiminput}
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim@input}
% \cs{boxedverbatiminput}\marg{filename} read in filename contents as verbatim
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\boxedverbatiminput}{\begingroup
\@ifstar{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble
\boxedverbatim@input\relax}%
{\boxedverbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxedverbatim@input#1#2{%
\setupboxverb@line
\IfFileExists{#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
\setupbox@verb
\verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}%
\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
{\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Some prepackaged boxing styles.
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvbox}
% Original (default) boxing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvbox}{%
\bvperpagetrue%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nobvbox}
% No boxing
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\nobvbox}{%
\bvperpagefalse%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopandtail}
% Head and foot horizontal lines only
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvtopandtail}{%
\bvperpagefalse%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvsides}
% Side vertical lines only
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvsides}{%
\bvperpagefalse%
\renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\vskip 3ex}%
\renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
\renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{The framed package}
%
% The following code is the \Lpack{framed} package~\cite{FRAMED}
% by Donald Arseneau.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Updated framed code to v0.8a of the package}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Updated framed code to v0.95 of the package}
%
% \begin{macro}{\framed}
% \begin{macro}{\endframed}
% \begin{macro}{\shaded}
% \begin{macro}{\endshaded}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\framed\relax \let\endframed\relax
\let\shaded\relax \let\endshaded\relax
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Way back when DA sent me a pre-release copy of v0.6 of his \Lpack{framed}
% package~\cite{FRAMED}.
% We also discussed good ways of embedding it into the class. One result
% being that I defined some some items \cs{AtBeginDocument}, but this is
% no longer required as DA has changed \Lpack{framed} to cooperate
% with memoir. We continue to have sporadic email conversations about the
% interaction of \Lpack{memoir} and \Lpack{framed}.
%
% Here is a modified version of \file{framed.sty}. In particular
% I moved some of DA's description of the code into the general commentary
% instead of comments within the code.
%
% \begin{verbatim}
% framed.sty v 0.95 2007/10/04
% Copyright (C) 1992-2007 by Donald Arseneau (asnd@triumf.ca)
% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
% provided that this notice is left intact.
%
%====================== Begin Instructions =======================
%
% framed.sty
% ~~~~~~~~~~
% Create framed, shaded, or differently highlighted regions that can
% break across pages. The environments defined are
% framed -- ordinary frame box (\fbox) with edge at margin
% shaded -- shaded background (\colorbox) bleeding into margin
% snugshade -- similar
% leftbar -- thick vertical line in left margin
% to be used like
% \begin{framed}
% copious text
% \end{framed}
%
% But the more general purpose of this package is to facilitate the
% creation of environments that enable page breaking
% within arbitrary decorations using a simple new-environment definition
% incorporating \FrameCommand and
% \begin{MakeFramed}{settings} ... \end{MakeFramed}
%
% The "framed" environment uses "\fbox" as its "\FrameCommand" with
% the additional settings \fboxrule=\FrameRule and \fboxsep=\FrameSep.
% You can change these lengths (using \setlength) and you can change
% the definition of \FrameCommand to use much fancier boxes.
%
% In fact, the "shaded" environment just redefines \FrameCommand to be
% \colorbox{shadecolor} (and you have to define the color "shadecolor":
% \definecolor{shadecolor}...).
%
% A page break is allowed, and even encouraged, before the framed
% environment. If you want to attach some text (a box title) to the
% frame, then the text should be inserted by \FrameCommand.
%
% The contents of the framed regions are restricted:
% Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
% (Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
% This package will not work with the page breaking of multicol.sty,
% or other systems that perform column-balancing.
%
% The MakeFramed environment does the work. Its "settings" argument
% should contain any adjustments to the text width (applied to \hsize,
% and using the "\width" of the frame itself) as well as a "restore"
% command -- \@parboxrestore or \FrameRestore or something similar;
% as an example, the snugshade environment shows how to suppress excess
% spacing within the box, copying the code from minipage.
%
% Expert commands:
% \MakeFramed, \endMakeFramed: the "MakeFramed" environment
% \FrameCommand: command to draw the frame around its argument
% \FrameRestore: restore some text settings, but fewer than \@parboxrestore
% \FrameRule: length register; \fboxrule for default "framed".
% \FrameSep: length register; \fboxsep for default "framed".
% \FrameHeightAdjust: macro; height of frame above baseline at top of page
%
% This is still a `pre-production' version because I can think of many
% features/improvements that should be made. Nevertheless, starting
% with version 0.5 it should be bug-free.
%
% ToDo:
% Test more varieties of list
% Improve and correct documentation
% Propagation of \marks
% Handle footnotes (how??) floats (?) and marginpars.
% Stretchability modification.
%======================== End Instructions ========================
%
% \ProvidesPackage{framed}[2007/10/04 v 0.95:
% framed or shaded text with page breaks]
%
% \newenvironment{framed}% using default \FrameCommand
% {\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
% {\endMakeFramed}
%
% \newenvironment{shaded}{%
% \def\FrameCommand{\fboxsep=\FrameSep \colorbox{shadecolor}}%
% \MakeFramed {\FrameRestore}}%
% {\endMakeFramed}
%
% \newenvironment{leftbar}{%
% \def\FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
% \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
% {\endMakeFramed}
%
% \newenvironment{snugshade}{%
% \def\FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
% \MakeFramed {\FrameRestore\@setminipage}}%
% {\par\unskip\endMakeFramed}
%
% \end{verbatim}
%
% Now for the package code.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\chardef\FrameRestore=\catcode`\| % for debug
\catcode`\|=\catcode`\% % (debug: insert space after backslash)
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeFramed}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\MakeFramed#1{\par
% \end{macrocode}
% measure added width and height; call result \cs{width} and \cs{height}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fb@sizeofframe\FrameCommand
\let\width\fb@frw \let\height\fb@frh
% \end{macrocode}
% insert pre-penalties and skips
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\skip@\lastskip
\if@nobreak\else
\penalty9999 % updates \page parameters
\ifdim\pagefilstretch=\z@ \ifdim\pagefillstretch=\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% not infinitely stretchable, so encourage a page break here
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\@tempa{\the\skip@}%
\ifx\@tempa\zero@glue \penalty-30
\else \vskip-\skip@ \penalty-30 \vskip\skip@
\fi\fi\fi
\penalty\z@
% \end{macrocode}
% Give a stretchy breakpoint that will always be taken in preference
% to the \cs{penalty} 9999 used to update page parameters. The cube root
% of 10000/100 indicates a multiplier of 0.21545, but the maximum
% calculated badness is really 8192, not 10000, so the multiplier
% is 0.2301.
% \begin{macrocode}
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.5\baselineskip
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\height
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\skip@
\advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\topsep
\vskip-\skip@ \penalty 1800 \vskip\skip@
\fi
\addvspace{\topsep}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% clear out pending page break
% \begin{macrocode}
\penalty\@M \vskip 2\baselineskip \vskip\height
\penalty9999 \vskip -2\baselineskip \vskip-\height
\penalty9999 % updates \pagetotal
|\message{After clearout, \pagetotal=\the\pagetotal,
| \pagegoal=\the\pagegoal. }%
\fb@adjheight
\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
#1% Modifications to \hsize (can use \width and \height)
\textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endMakeFramed}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\endMakeFramed{\par
\kern\z@
\hrule\@width\hsize\@height\z@
\penalty-100 % put depth into height
\egroup
% {\showoutput\showbox\@tempboxa}%
\begingroup
\fb@put@frame\FrameCommand\FirstFrameCommand
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fb@put@frame}
% \cs{fb@put@frame}\marg{nosplit}\marg{split}
% takes the contents of \cs{@tempboxa} and puts all,
% or a piece,
% of it on the page with a frame (\cs{FrameCommand}, \cs{FirstFrameCommand},
% \cs{MidFrameCommand}, or \cs{LastFrameCommand}). It recurses until all of
% \cs{@tempboxa} has been used up. (\cs{@tempboxa} must have zero depth.) \\
% \meta{nosplit} = attempted framing command, if no split \\
% \meta{split} = framing command if split.
%
% First iteration: Try to fit with \cs{FrameCommand}. If it does not fit,
% split for \cs{FirstFrameCommand}.
%
% Later iteration: Try to fit with \cs{LastFrameCommand}. If it does not
% fit, split for \cs{MidFrameCommand}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fb@put@frame#1#2{\relax
\ifdim\pagegoal=\maxdimen \pagegoal\vsize \fi
\ifinner
\fb@putboxa#1%
\fb@afterframe
\else
\dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % natural space left on page
\ifdim\dimen@<2\baselineskip % Too little room on page
| \message{Page has only \the\dimen@\space room left; eject. }%
\eject \fb@adjheight \fb@put@frame#1#2%
\else % there's appreciable room left on the page
\fb@sizeofframe#1%
| \message{\string\pagetotal=\the\pagetotal,
| \string\pagegoal=\the\pagegoal,
| \string\pagestretch=\the\pagestretch,
| \string\pageshrink=\the\pageshrink,
| \string\fb@frh=\fb@frh. \space}
| \message{Box of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space + \fb@frh}%
\begingroup % temporarily set \dimen@ to be...
\advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink % maximum space available on page
\advance\dimen@-\fb@frh\relax % space available for frame's contents
\expandafter\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% expand \cs{ifdim}, then restore \cs{dimen@} to real room left on page
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim\dimen@>\ht\@tempboxa % whole box does fit
| \message{fits in \the\dimen@. }%
% \end{macrocode}
% Use vsplit anyway to capture the marks \\
% !!!???!!! MERGE THIS WITH THE else CLAUSE!!!
% \begin{macrocode}
\fb@putboxa#1%
\fb@afterframe
\else % box must be split
| \message{must be split to fit in \the\dimen@. }%
% \end{macrocode}
% update frame measurement to use \cs{FirstFrameCommand}
% or \cs{MidFrameCommand}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fb@sizeofframe#2%
\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% simulate frame and flexiblity of the page:
\vskip \fb@frh \@plus\pagestretch \@minus.8\pageshrink
\kern137sp\kern-137sp\penalty-30
\unvbox\@tempboxa}%
\edef\fb@resto@set{\boxmaxdepth\the\boxmaxdepth
\splittopskip\the\splittopskip}%
\boxmaxdepth\z@ \splittopskip\z@
| \message{Padded box of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space split
| to \the\dimen@}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Split box here
% \begin{macrocode}
\setbox\tw@\vsplit\@tempboxa to\dimen@
| \toks99\expandafter{\splitfirstmark}%
| \toks98\expandafter{\splitbotmark}%
| \message{Marks are: \the\toks99, \the\toks98. }%
\setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}% natural-sized
| \message{Natural height of split box is \the\ht\tw@, leaving
| \the\ht\@tempboxa\space remainder. }%
% \end{macrocode}
% If the split-to size $>$ (\cs{vsize}-\cs{topskip}), then set box to full size
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\advance\dimen@\topskip
\expandafter\endgroup
\ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal
| \message{Frame is big -- Use up the full column. }%
\dimen@ii\pagegoal
\advance\dimen@ii -\topskip
\advance\dimen@ii \FrameHeightAdjust\relax
\else % suspect this is wrong:
% \end{macrocode}
% If the split-to size $>$ feasible room-on-page, rebox it smaller.
% \begin{macrocode}
\advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink
\ifdim\ht\tw@>\dimen@
| \message{Box too tall; rebox it to \the\dimen@. }%
\dimen@ii\dimen@
\else % use natural size
\dimen@ii\ht\tw@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Re-box contents to desired size \cs{dimen@ii}
% \begin{macrocode}
\advance\dimen@ii -\fb@frh
\setbox\tw@\vbox to\dimen@ii \bgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% remove simulated frame and page flexibility:
% \begin{macrocode}
\vskip -\fb@frh \@plus-\pagestretch \@minus-.8\pageshrink
\unvbox\tw@ \unpenalty\unpenalty
\ifdim\lastkern=-137sp % whole box went to next page
| \message{box split at beginning! }%
% need work here???
\egroup \fb@resto@set \eject % (\vskip for frame size was discarded)
\fb@adjheight
\fb@put@frame#1#2% INSERTED ???
\else % Got material split off at the head
\egroup \fb@resto@set
\ifvoid\@tempboxa % it all fit after all
| \message{box split at end! }%
\setbox\@tempboxa\box\tw@
\fb@putboxa#1%
\fb@afterframe
\else % it really did split
| \message{box split as expected. Its reboxed height
| is \the\ht\tw@. }%
\ifdim\wd\tw@>\z@
\wd\tw@\wd\@tempboxa
% \end{macrocode}
% PW: the next line was: \\
% \verb?\centerline{#2{\box\tw@}}% ??? \centerline bad idea? \\
% but I have changed it as follows so that \cs{centerline} can be changed
% from elsewhere if useful.
% \begin{macrocode}
\memfblineboxtwo{#2{\box\tw@}}% ??? \centerline bad idea? \\
\else
| \message{Zero width means likely blank.
| Don't frame it (guess)}%
\box\tw@
\fi
\hrule \@height\z@ \@width\hsize
\eject
\fb@adjheight
\fb@put@frame\LastFrameCommand\MidFrameCommand
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memfblineboxtwo}
% \begin{macro}{\memfblineboxa}
% PW: this is an addition of mine. There is a question mark against the
% use of \cs{centerline} within the \Lenv{framed} code. I have
% created these two macros which are used in the code instead of
% \cs{centerline}, so that those parts of the code can be easily altered.
% are used instead
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memfblineboxtwo}[1]{\centerline{#1}}
\newcommand{\memfblineboxa}[1]{\centerline{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fb@putboxa}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fb@putboxa#1{%
\ifvoid\@tempboxa
%%%% PackageWarning{framed}{Boxa is void -- discard it. }%
\@memwarn{Boxa is void -- discard it. }%
\else
| \message{Frame and place boxa. }%
| %{\showoutput\showbox\@tempboxa}%
%%%%%%% \centerline{#1{\box\@tempboxa}}%
\memfblineboxa{#1{\box\@tempboxa}}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fb@afterframe}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fb@afterframe{%
\nointerlineskip \null %{\showoutput \showlists}
\penalty-30 \vskip\topsep \relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fb@frw}
% \begin{macro}{\fb@frh}
% \begin{macro}{\fb@sizeofframe}
% \cs{fb@sizeofframe}\marg{framecommand} measures width and height added by
% frame (\meta{framecommand}) and call the results \cs{fb@frw} and \cs{fb@frh}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\fb@frw
\newdimen\fb@frh
\def\fb@sizeofframe#1{\begingroup
\setbox\z@\vbox{\vskip-5in \hbox{\hskip-5in
#1{\hbox{\vrule \@height 4.7in \@depth.3in \@width 5in}}}%
\vskip\z@skip}%
| \message{Measuring frame addition for \string#1 in \@currenvir\space
| gives ht \the\ht\z@\space and wd \the\wd\z@. }%
%{\showoutput\showbox\z@}%
\global\fb@frw\wd\z@ \global\fb@frh\ht\z@
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fb@adjheight}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\fb@adjheight{%
\vbox to\FrameHeightAdjust{}% get proper baseline skip from above.
\penalty\@M \nointerlineskip
\vskip-\FrameHeightAdjust
\penalty\@M} % useful for tops of pages
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\zero@glue}
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\zero@glue{\the\z@skip}
\catcode`\|=\FrameRestore
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FrameCommand}
% \begin{macro}{\FrameRule}
% \begin{macro}{\FrameSep}
% \begin{macro}{\FirstFrameCommand}
% \begin{macro}{\MidFrameCommand}
% \begin{macro}{\LastFrameCommand}
% Provide configuration commands:
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand\FrameCommand{%
\setlength\fboxrule{\FrameRule}\setlength\fboxsep{\FrameSep}%
\fbox}
\@ifundefined{FrameRule}{\newdimen\FrameRule \FrameRule=\fboxrule}{}
\@ifundefined{FrameSep} {\newdimen\FrameSep \FrameSep =3\fboxsep}{}
\providecommand\FirstFrameCommand{\FrameCommand}
\providecommand\MidFrameCommand{\FrameCommand}
\providecommand\LastFrameCommand{\FrameCommand}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FrameHeightAdjust}
% Height of frame above first baseline when frame starts a page:
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand\FrameHeightAdjust{6pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FrameRestore}
% \cs{FrameRestore} has parts of \cs{@parboxrestore}, performing a similar but
% less complete restoration of a default layout. See how it is used in the
% "settings" argument of \cs{MakeFrame}. Though not a parameter, \cs{hsize}
% should be set to the desired total line width available inside the
% frame before invoking \cs{FrameRestore}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\FrameRestore{%
\let\if@nobreak\iffalse
\let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
\let\-\@dischyph
\let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
% \message{FrameRestore:
% \@totalleftmargin=\the \@totalleftmargin,
% \rightmargin=\the\rightmargin,
% \@listdepth=\the\@listdepth. }%
% \end{macrocode}
% Test if we are in a list (or list-like paragraph)
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \ifdim\@totalleftmargin>\z@ 1\fi
\ifdim\rightmargin>\z@ 1\fi
\ifnum\@listdepth>0 1\fi 0>\z@
% \message{In a list: \linewidth=\the\linewidth,
% \@totalleftmargin=\the\@totalleftmargin,
% \parshape=\the\parshape, \columnwidth=\the\columnwidth,
% \hsize=\the\hsize,
% \labelwidth=\the\labelwidth. }%
% \end{macrocode}
% Now try to propagate changes of width from \cs{hsize} to list parameters.
% This is deficient, but a more advanced way to indicate modification to text
% dimensions is not (yet) provided; in particular, no separate left/right
% adjustment. (PW. I have provided a macro for the next few lines as I think
% that I may have a reason to allow them to be easily changed).
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% \@setminipage % snug fit around the item
%%% \advance\linewidth-\columnwidth \advance\linewidth\hsize
%%% \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
\memfblistfixparams
\else % Not in list
\linewidth=\hsize
%\message{No list, set \string\linewidth=\the\hsize. }%
\fi
\sloppy}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memfblistfixparams}
% An extract of some code from \cs{FrameRestore}.
% Try to propagate changes of width from \cs{hsize} to list parameters.
% This is deficient, but a more advanced way to indicate modification to text
% dimensions is not (yet) provided; in particular, no separate left/right
% adjustment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memfblistfixparams}{%
\@setminipage % snug fit around the item
\advance\linewidth-\columnwidth \advance\linewidth\hsize
\parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% I have moved the following from the start of the \Lpack{framed}
% package to here.
%
% \begin{environment}{framed}
% \begin{environment}{shaded}
% \begin{environment}{leftbar}
% \begin{environment}{snugshade}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{framed}% using default \FrameCommand
{\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
\newenvironment{shaded}{%
\def\FrameCommand{\fboxsep=\FrameSep \colorbox{shadecolor}}%
\MakeFramed {\FrameRestore}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
\newenvironment{leftbar}{%
\def\FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
\newenvironment{snugshade}{%
\def\FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
\MakeFramed {\FrameRestore\@setminipage}}%
{\par\unskip\endMakeFramed}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% As the package used \cs{newenvironment} it will
% burp if it is used with the class. There are two options: either
% prevent \Lpack{framed} from being loaded, or kill the environments
% if it is loaded. I'm going for the latter as Donald will be updating
% his package at some point and author's may want to use it before it's
% updated here.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginPackage{framed}{%
\let\framed\relax \let\endframed\relax
\let\shaded\relax \let\endshaded\relax
\let\leftbar\relax \let\endleftbar\relax
\let\snugshade\relax \let\endsnugshade\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{qframe}
% This is from an email to me from DA shortly after he released \Lpack{framed}
% v 0.95.
% \begin{quote}
% A frame more like a simple parbox.
% Notably useful for use
% inside a single list item --- the frame matches the text of the other
% items.
% \end{quote}
% He actually called it \Lenv{pframe} and said that something similar
% could be in a later version of \Lpack{framed}.
%
% I have found it useful for framing \Lenv{quote} or \Lenv{adjustwidth}
% environments, or similar. Hence the name, from
% `\textit{q}uote \textit{frame}'.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added the qframe environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{qframe}{%
\def\FrameCommand##1{\fboxrule=\FrameRule\fboxsep=\FrameSep
\hskip\@totalleftmargin\fbox{##1}% There is no \@totalrightmargin, so...
\hskip-\linewidth \hskip-\@totalleftmargin \hskip\columnwidth}%
\MakeFramed{\advance\hsize-\width
\advance\hsize \FrameSep
\@totalleftmargin\z@ \linewidth=\hsize}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}
% And here is my corresponding version for \Lenv{shaded}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added the qshade environment}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{qshade}{%
\def\FrameCommand##1{\fboxsep=\FrameSep
\hskip\@totalleftmargin
\hskip -1\FrameSep
\colorbox{shadecolor}{##1}%
\hskip-\linewidth \hskip-\@totalleftmargin
\hskip -1\FrameSep
\hskip\columnwidth}%
\MakeFramed{\advance\hsize-\width
\advance\hsize 3\FrameSep
\@totalleftmargin\z@ \linewidth=\hsize}}%
{\endMakeFramed}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{The newfile package}
%
% The following code is from the \Lpack{newfile} package.
% To try and avoid name clashes with other packages, each internal macro
% in this package includes the character string `\verb?stre@m?'.
%
% \begin{macro}{\newoutputstream}
% \cs{newoutputstream}\marg{stream} creates a new output stream called \meta{stream}.
% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
% TeX permits no more than 16 output streams.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newoutputstream}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}%
{\expandafter\newwrite\csname #1outstre@m\endcsname
\csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
\csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
\fi
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
\fi
}%
{\@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is already defined}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newinputstream}
% \cs{newinputstream}\marg{stream} creates a new input stream called \meta{stream}.
% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
% TeX permits no more than 16 input streams.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newinputstream}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{#1instre@m}%
{\expandafter\newread\csname #1instre@m\endcsname
\csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
\csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
\fi
\expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
\global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
\fi
}%
{\@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is already defined}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Some checking macros will be useful as some of the checks occur in
% multiple places.
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfStreamOpen}
% \cs{IfStreamOpen}\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code}\marg{FALSE code}
% checks if stream \meta{stream} is currently open.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\IfStreamOpen}[3]{%
\csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname#2\else#3\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandopen}
% \cs{instre@mandopen}\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an input stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instre@mandopen}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
\@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is not open}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandclosed}
% \cs{instre@mandclosed}\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an input stream and is closed (not open).
% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instre@mandclosed}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
\@memwarn{Input stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandopen}
% \cs{outstre@mandopen}\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an output stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\outstre@mandopen}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
\@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is not open}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandclosed}
% \cs{outstre@mandclosed}\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an output stream and is closed (not open).
% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\outstre@mandclosed}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
\@memwarn{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
{\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
\@memwarn{Output stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openoutputfile}
% \cs{openoutputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called
% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
% writing. However, if the \cs{nofiles} command has been given the
% file is \emph{not} attached to the stream. No more than one file can be
% attached to a stream at any given time.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\openoutputfile}[2]{%
\outstre@mandclosed{#2}{%
\global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
\if@filesw
\immediate\openout\@nameuse{#2outstre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
\fi
\global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
\@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\closeoutputstream}
% \cs{closeoutputstream}\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\closeoutputstream}[1]{%
\outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
\@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
\immediate\closeout\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}%
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openinputfile}
% \cs{openinputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called
% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
% reading. The file is added to the list of files.
% No more than one file can be attached to a stream at
% any given time.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openinputfile}[2]{%
\IfFileExists{#1}{% file exists
\instre@mandclosed{#2}{%
\@addtofilelist{#1}%
\global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
\immediate\openin\@nameuse{#2instre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
\global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
\@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}}}%
{% file not found
\typeout{No file #1.}
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\closeinputstream}
% \cs{closeinputstream}\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\closeinputstream}[1]{%
\instre@mandopen{#1}{%
\@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
\immediate\closein\@nameuse{#1instre@m}%
\global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{writeverbatim}
% \verb?\begin{writeverbatim}?\marg{stream} writes the contents of
% the environment as verbatim text to the given \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\writeverbatim#1{%
\@bsphack
\let\do\@makeother\dospecials
\catcode`\^^M\active
\def\verbatim@processline{%
\immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{\the\verbatim@line}}%
\verbatim@start}
\def\endwriteverbatim{\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtostream}
% \cs{addtostream}\marg{stream}\marg{text} writes \meta{text} to the
% given \meta{stream}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\addtostream}[2]{%
\@bsphack
\outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
{\let\protect\string
\immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{#2}%
}}%
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstre@mnoteof}
% \begin{macro}{\checkstre@mnoteof}
% \cs{checkstre@mnoteof}\marg{stream} sets \cs{ifstre@mnoteof} to TRUE if
% \meta{stream} is not at the end of the file (i.e., it is the opposite
% of \cs{ifeof}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifstre@mnoteof
\newcommand{\checkstre@meof}[1]{%
\stre@mnoteoftrue\ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}\stre@mnoteoffalse\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\readstream}
% \cs{readstream}\marg{stream} reads the contents of
% the given \meta{stream} as \cs{input} text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\readstream#1{
\instre@mandopen{#1}{%
\loop \checkstre@meof{#1} \ifstre@mnoteof
\read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
\temptokstre@m
\repeat
}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\readaline}
% \cs{readaline}\marg{stream} reads what TeX considers to be one line
% from the given \meta{stream} as \cs{input} text.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\readaline#1{
\instre@mandopen{#1}{%
\ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}
\@memwarn{No more to read from stream #1}
\else
\read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
\temptokstre@m
\fi}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\readverbatim}
% \cs{readverbatim}\marg{stream} reads the contents of
% the given \meta{stream} as verbatim text.
%
% The read verbatim code is a slight variation on code from the
% \Lpack{verbatim} package. Most of the setup is done by the macros
% \cs{stre@mverb@input}\marg{setup}\marg{stream} and
% \cs{verbatim@readstre@m}\marg{stream}. Finally, \cs{verbatim@read@file}
% is a \Lpack{verbatim} package macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\readverbatim{\begingroup
\ift@bs
\def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
\fi
\@ifstar{\stre@mverb@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
{\stre@mverb@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stre@mverb@input}
% \begin{macro}{\@verbinstre@m}
% \cs{stre@mverb@input}\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is a stream
% version of \cs{verbatim@input}. It defines \cs{@verbinstre@m}
% to be \meta{stream}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stre@mverb@input}[2]{%
\IfStreamOpen{#2}%
{\@verbatim #1\relax
\def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}
\verb@readstre@m\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
{\@memwarn{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verb@readstre@m}
% \cs{verb@readstre@m} is the stream analogue to \cs{verbatim@readfile}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verb@readstre@m}{%
\verbatim@startline
\expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
\expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
\expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
\verbatim@finish}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@stre@m}
% \cs{verbatim@read@stre@m} is the analogue to \cs{verbatim@readfile}.
% It gets its input from the stream \cs{@verbinstre@m}, which is defined
% in the \cs{stre@mverb@input} macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verbatim@read@stre@m}{%
\read\@verbinstre@m to\next
\ifeof\@verbinstre@m
\else
\expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
\verbatim@processline
\verbatim@startline
\expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\readboxedverbatim}
% \cs{readboxedverbatim}\marg{stream} is the equivalent of
% \cs{readverbtim} except that it generates a boxed verbatim.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\readboxedverbatim}{\begingroup
\@ifstar{\stre@mbvin\relax}%
{\stre@mbvin{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stre@mbvin}
% \cs{stre@mbvin}\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is the workhorse for
% \cs{readboxedverbatim}, and in its turn it uses \cs{verb@readstre@m}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stre@mbvin}[2]{%
\IfStreamOpen{#2}%
{\setupboxverb@line
\@verbatim #1\relax
\def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}%
\setupbox@verb
\verb@readstre@m\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
{\@memwarn{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{Utilities}
%
%
% \subsection{Extra `provide' commands}
%
% \begin{macro}{\provideenvironment}
% Works like \cs{providecommand} but for environments.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/04}{Added \cs{provideenvironment} and supports}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\provideenvironment}{\@star@or@long\m@mprovenv}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovenv}
% This checks if the environment has been defined. If not it calls
% the kernel code for \cs{newenvironment} otherwise it calls code to
% discard arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mprovenv}[1]{\@ifundefined{#1}%
{\new@environment{#1}}% % create new environment
{\@memwarn{Environment `#1' already defined}%
\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}
% \cs{m@mgobbleoptsandtwo} gobbles the \verb?[opt][opt]{begin}{end}? arguments to
% \cs{provideenvironment}. It is actually more general than that as it will
% gobble any sequence of any number of optional arguments followed by
% two required arguments. If there are no optional arguments it disposes
% of the two required ones, otherwise it calls a recursive procedure to
% discard any number of optionals, then two required ones.
%
% \cs{m@mgobbleoptandtwo} recursively discards optional arguments, then finally
% two required arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}{%
\@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}
\def\m@mgobbleoptandtwo[#1]{%
\@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\providecounter}
% Works like the other \cs{provide...} commands, but for counters.
% Code is based on \cs{newcounter} in \file{ltcounts.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providecounter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\providecounter}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{c@#1}%
{\newcounter{#1}}%
{\@memwarn{Counter `#1' already defined}%
\@ifnextchar[{\m@mgobbleopt}{}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleopt}
% Gobble an optional argument.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{m@mgobbleopt}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\m@mgobbleopt[#1]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\providelength}
% Works like the other \cs{provide...} commands, but for lengths.
% Code is based on \cs{provide@command} in \file{ltdefns.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providelength}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\providelength}[1]{%
\begingroup
\escapechar\m@ne\xdef\@gtempa{{\string#1}}%
\endgroup
\expandafter\@ifundefined\@gtempa
{\newlength{#1}}%
{\@memwarn{Length #1 already defined}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newloglike}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnewlog}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mnewlogs}
% For defining a new log-like math function.
% \verb?\newloglike{\fun}{string}? or \verb?\newloglike*{\fun}{string}?.
% The starred version is for functions with limits (like an integral sign).
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{newloglike}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newloglike}{\@ifstar{\m@mnewlogs}{\m@mnewlog}}
\newcommand*{\m@mnewlogs}[2]{%
\newcommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}}}
\newcommand*{\m@mnewlog}[2]{%
\newcommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}\nolimits}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\provideloglike}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovlogs}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovlog}
% The provide version of \cs{newloglike}.
% \changes{v1.6}{2004/01/28}{Added \cs{provideloglike}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\provideloglike}{\@ifstar{\m@mprovlogs}{\m@mprovlog}}
\newcommand*{\m@mprovlogs}[2]{%
\providecommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}}}
\newcommand*{\m@mprovlog}[2]{%
\providecommand*{#1}{\mathop{\operator@font #2}\nolimits}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Changing counters}
%
% In LaTeX, a new counter called, say `ctr', is created by the command
% \verb?\newcounter{ctr}[within]?. If the optional within argument is given
% the the counter `ctr' is reset to zero each time the counter `within'
% changes. The command \cs{thectr} typesets the value of the counter ctr.
% This is automatically defined by \cs{newcounter} and is initialised
% to typeset arabic numerals. Sometimes it may be desireable to change
% the counter definitions.
%
% The following code is based on the \Lpack{chngcntr} package~\cite{CHNGCNTR}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@removefromreset}
% This code uses David Carlisle's \cs{@removefromreset} command as
% specified in the remreset package~\cite{REMRESET}.
% It is provided here as a convenience to the user, and with
% David Carlisle's permission.
%
% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\@removefromreset}[2]{{%
\expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\@removefromreset
\def\@elt##1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname c@##1\endcsname\@removefromreset
\else
\noexpand\@elt{##1}%
\fi}%
\expandafter\xdef\csname cl@#2\endcsname{%
\csname cl@#2\endcsname}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ifbothcntrs}
% This is called as \\
% \cs{@ifbothcntrs}\marg{cntr}\marg{within}\marg{code when both are counters}.
% This tests if both \meta{cntr} and \meta{within} are counters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@ifbothcntrs}[3]{%
\@ifundefined{c@#1}{% counter undefined
\@memerror{#1 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
{% else counter is defined
\@ifundefined{c@#2}{% within undefined
\@memerror{#2 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
{% else both counter and within are defined
#3}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin}
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin*}
% \begin{macro}{\@csinstar}
% \begin{macro}{\@csin}
% It is sometimes desireable to change a counter that has been defined
% by \verb?\newcounter{ctr}? to act as though it had been defined as
% \verb?\newcounter{ctr}[within]?. The command
% \verb?\counterwithin{ctr}{within}? accomplishes this. By default,
% it also redefines the \cs{thectr} command so that it typesets values
% in the style \verb?\thewithin.\arabic{ctr}?. The starred version of the
% command suppresses the redefinition of \cs{thectr}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\counterwithin}{\@ifstar{\@csinstar}{\@csin}}
\newcommand{\@csinstar}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\@csin}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}%
\@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}.\arabic{#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout}
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout*}
% \begin{macro}{\@csoutstar}
% \begin{macro}{\@csout}
% Likewise, the command \verb?\counterwithout{ctr}{within}? changes a
% counter that has been created by \verb?\newcounter{ctr}[within]? to act
% as though it had been created by \verb?\newcounter{ctr}?. By default it
% also redefines the \cs{thectr} command so that it just typesets an arabic
% numeral. The starred version of the command suppresses the redefinition
% of \cs{thectr}.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/03}{Deleted chngctr from \cs{@csoutstar} (mempatch v3.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\counterwithout}{\@ifstar{\@csoutstar}{\@csout}}
\newcommand{\@csoutstar}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\@csout}[2]{%
\@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}%
\@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any number of \verb?\counterwithin{ctr}{...}? and \verb?\counterwithout{ctr}{...}?
% commands can be issued for a given counter, ctr, if you wish to toggle
% between the two styles. The current value of ctr is unaffected by
% \cs{counterwithin} and \cs{counterwithout}. If you want to change the value
% after one of these commands, use \verb?\setcounter{ctr}{...}?, and to change
% the typeseting style use \verb?\renewcommand{\thectr}{...}?.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\letcountercounter}
% \begin{macro}{\c@m@morig@ctr}
% \begin{macro}{\unletcounter}
% At times it is handy to `let' one counter act as if it was a
% different counter. Say you have two constructions, each with their
% own counter A and B, now you want them to cooperate, counting in
% unison. This can be done using the \verb?\letcountercounter?.
%
% \medskip
%
% \cs{letcountercounter}\marg{counterA}\marg{counterB} \cs{let}s
% (make the same) \meta{counterA} to \meta{counterB}. The
% original of \meta{counterA} is kept in \cs{c@m@morig@ctr}\meta{counterA}.
%
% \cs{unletcounter}\marg{counterA} restores \meta{counterA} to its un\cs{let}
% condition.
%
% The code is based on Donald Arseneau's `Re: \cs{let}, \cs{csname} and
% \cs{endcsname}', CTT, 2004/12/08. The long version, where \cs{xp}
% is actually \cs{expandafter} is along the lines of:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \xp\xp\xp\let\xp\csname\xp c@#1\xp\endcsname\csname c@#2\endcsname
% \end{verbatim}
% which employs 6 \cs{expandafter}s. DA's version uses only 2. The technique
% can be applied to other kinds of \cs{let}s.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\letcountercounter}[2]{%
\expandafter\let\csname c@m@morig@ctr#1\expandafter\endcsname%
\csname c@#1\endcsname
\expandafter\let\csname c@#1\expandafter\endcsname%
\csname c@#2\endcsname}
\newcommand*{\unletcounter}[1]{%
\expandafter\let\csname c@#1\expandafter\endcsname%
\csname c@m@morig@ctr#1\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Odd/even page checking}
%
% It is difficult to check robustly if the current page is odd or even.
% This code, which is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package~\cite{CHNGPAGE},
% provides a method that has proved (so far) to be robust.
% It works by writing out a label and on the next LaTeX run checks
% the page reference for the label.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifoddpage}
% \begin{macro}{\oddpagetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\oddpagefalse}
% \begin{macro}{\ifstrictpagecheck}
% \begin{macro}{\strictpagechecktrue}
% \begin{macro}{\strictpagecheckfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\strictpagecheck}
% \begin{macro}{\easypagecheck}
% The boolean \cs{ifoddpage} is TRUE if the checked page is odd. The
% boolean \cs{ifstrictpagecheck} is for turning on (TRUE) and off (FALSE)
% the strictest method of page checking.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{strictpagecheck} and \cs{easypagecheck}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifoddpage
\newif\ifstrictpagecheck
\strictpagecheckfalse
\newcommand*{\strictpagecheck}{\strictpagechecktrue}
\newcommand*{\easypagecheck}{\strictpagecheckfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@cp@cntr}
% \begin{macro}{\cplabel}
% The counter \verb?cp@cntr? is used to make unique labels, which start
% with \cs{cplabel}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{cp@cntr}
\newcommand{\cplabel}{^_}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkoddpage}
% This is the user level command to check for odd/even page. It does
% a robust check for \cs{strictpagecheck} otherwise the simple minded
% check. It sets \cs{ifoddpage} to TRUE if the page is odd, otherwise
% it sets it to FALSE.
%
% This is now fixed so that it should work for non-arabic page numbering.
% It uses a new label/pageref variant based on the page counter value, not
% its printed representation. This also gets rid of worrying about hyperref!!
% The problem was discovered by Bastiaan Niels Veelo
%
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Complete rewrite of odd page checking
% (from patch v1.6)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\checkoddpage}{%
\oddpagefalse%
\ifstrictpagecheck%
\stepcounter{cp@cntr}\pmemlabel{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}%
\@memcnta=\pmemlabelref{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}\relax
\ifodd\@memcnta\oddpagetrue\fi
\else
\ifodd\c@page\oddpagetrue\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\thepmemc@@page}
% The value of the page counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\thepmemc@@page{\the\c@page}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pmemprotected@write}
% \cs{pmemprotected@write} is a modified version of the kernel's
% \cs{protected@write}.
%
% This version of the macro was provided by Romano Giannetti
% (\url{romano@dea.icai.upco.es}) on 15 July 2003.
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\pmemprotected@write#1#2#3{%
\begingroup
\let\thepmemc@@page\relax
#2%
\let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
\edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
\reserved@a
\endgroup
\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabel}
% A version of \cs{label} that uses \cs{pmemprotected@write}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmemlabel}[1]{\@bsphack
\pmemprotected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\newpmemlabel{#1}{\thepmemc@@page}}%
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newpmemlabel}
% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabelref}
% We have to be able to cope with a particular label
% not (yet) being in the the \file{.aux} file when we come to check
% the page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newpmemlabel}[2]{{\global\@namedef{m@#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\pmemlabelref}[1]{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname m@#1\endcsname\relax
0%
\else
\csname m@#1\endcsname
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Checking for empty arguments}
%
% Like page checking, testing for an empty macro argument is more
% difficult than it might appear at first sight.
%
% The following code is from the \Lpack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{IFMTARG}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ifmtarg}
% \begin{macro}{\@ifnotmtarg}
% \cs{@ifmtarg}\marg{arg}\marg{code when empty}\marg{code when arg not empty} \\
% \cs{@ifnotmtarg}\marg{arg}\marg{code when arg not empty} \\
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\Q=3
\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
\long\gdef\@ifnotmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@firstofone\@gobble\@nil}
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Some example uses:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\isempty}[1]{%
% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}{\typeout{NO}}}
% \newcommand{\isnotempty}[1]{%
% \@ifnotmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}}
%
% \isempty{} -> YES \isnotempty{} ->
% \isempty{ } -> YES \isnotempty{ } ->
% \isempty{A} -> NO \isnotempty{A} -> YES
% \isempty{ A } -> NO \isnotempty{ A } -> YES
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% \subsection{Changing the page layout in the document}
%
% You should not do this, but\ldots
%
% The following code is essentially from the \Lpack{chngpage}
% package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ch@ngetext}
% This macro sets the page output parameters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\ch@ngetext}{%
\setlength{\@colht}{\textheight}\setlength{\@colroom}{\textheight}%
\setlength{\vsize}{\textheight}\setlength{\columnwidth}{\textwidth}%
\if@twocolumn%
\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep \divide\columnwidth\tw@%
\@firstcolumntrue%
\fi%
\setlength{\hsize}{\columnwidth}%
\setlength{\linewidth}{\hsize}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changetext}
% \cs{changetext}\marg{H}\marg{W}\marg{E}\marg{O}\marg{G}
% adds the given lengths to 5 main bits of the page layout. An empty
% argument means `no change'.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetext}[5]{%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{}{\addtolength{\textheight}{#1}}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{}{\addtolength{\textwidth}{#2}}%
\@ifmtarg{#3}{}{\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{#3}}%
\@ifmtarg{#4}{}{\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{#4}}%
\@ifmtarg{#5}{}{\addtolength{\columnsep}{#5}}%
\ch@ngetext}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any given change lasts until another \cs{changetext} command is given.
% A \cs{changetext} command should only be issued between two paragraphs.
%
% \cs{changetext} should not be used by anyone unless they really
% know what they are doing. If you really know what you are doing
% then you should know enough not to use it.
%
% \begin{macro}{\changepage}
% Change the page layout, but DON'T.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{changepage} to match chngpage.sty}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\changepage}[9]{%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{}{\addtolength{\textheight}{#1}}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{}{\addtolength{\textwidth}{#2}}%
\@ifmtarg{#3}{}{\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{#3}}%
\@ifmtarg{#4}{}{\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{#4}}%
\@ifmtarg{#5}{}{\addtolength{\columnsep}{#5}}%
\ch@ngetext
\@ifmtarg{#6}{}{\addtolength{\topmargin}{#6}}%
\@ifmtarg{#7}{}{\addtolength{\headheight}{#7}}%
\@ifmtarg{#8}{}{\addtolength{\headsep}{#8}}%
\@ifmtarg{#9}{}{\addtolength{\footskip}{#9}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Temporarily changing the text width}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth}
% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth*}
% \verb?\begin{adjustwidth}?\marg{left}\marg{right}
% adds the given lengths to the left and right hand margins. A positive
% value will shorten the text and a negative value will widen it. The
% starred version of the environment will cause the
% margin changes to switch between odd and even pages.
%
% This code is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced optional arg of adjustwidth by adjustwidth*}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{adjustwidth}[2]{%
\begin{list}{}{%
\topsep\z@%
\listparindent\parindent%
\parsep\parskip%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
}
\item[]}{\end{list}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{adjustwidth*}[2]{%
\begin{list}{}{%
\topsep\z@%
\listparindent\parindent%
\parsep\parskip%
\checkoddpage
\ifoddpage % odd numbered page
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
\else % even numbered page
\@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#2}}%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}%
{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#1}}%
\fi
}
\item[]}{\end{list}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% The environments only work for complete paragraphs.
%
% \subsection{Centering text}
%
% \begin{macro}{\calccentering}
% This macro calculates the amount to be added to the spine margin
% (and subtracted from the foredge margin)
% in order to center the textblock. Call as \\
% \verb?\calccentering{\length}? and it sets \cs{length}
% to the required value. Then use as \\
% \verb?\begin{adjustwidth*}{\length}{-\length}...?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\calccentering}[1]{
#1 = \paperwidth
\advance #1 by -\textwidth
\divide #1 by \tw@
\advance #1 by -\spinemargin}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{vplace}
% \verb?\begin{vplace}?\oarg{decimal number} centers its body vertically. The
% optional argument \meta{decimal number} increases ($>1.0$) or decreases
% ($<1.0$) the space above the body with respect to the space below.
% This is more robust than the method proposed in the manual.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added vplace environment (mempatch v4.4)}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/08/27}{Both should be \cs{vspace*}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{vplace}[1][1]{%
\par\vspace*{\stretch{#1}}%
}{%
\vspace*{\stretch{1}}%
\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Moving from the current page}
%
% Much of this code is taken from the \Lpack{nextpage} package~\cite{NEXTPAGE}.
%
% Clear to next page is \cs{clearpage}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartoevenpage}
% \cs{cleartoevenpage}\oarg{text} clears to the next even
% numbered page,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cleartoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\clearpage%
\ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Move to the next page without flushing floats is \cs{newpage}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\movetoevenpage}
% \cs{movetoevenpage}\oarg{text} moves to the next even
% numbered page without flushing floats,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\movetoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\newpage%
\ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Clear to next odd numbered page is \cs{cleardoublepage}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartooddpage}
% \cs{cleartooddpage}\oarg{text} clears to the next odd
% numbered page,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cleartooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\clearpage%
\ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\movetooddpage}
% \cs{movetooddpage}\oarg{text} moves to the next odd
% numbered page without flushing floats,
% putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\movetooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
\newpage%
\ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Example uses: \\
% \begin{verbatim}
% \cleartooddpage % same as \cleardouble page
% \cleartooddpage[\thispagestyle{empty}] % No headings on the skipped page
% \cleartoevenpage % go to next even numbered page
% Next example puts text on a skipped page
% \cleartoevenpage[\vspace*{\hfill}THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK\vspace*{\hfill}]
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Needing space at the bottom of a page}
%
% \begin{macro}{\needspace}
% \cs{needspace}\marg{length} checks if the is \meta{length} amount
% of vertical space left on the page. If there is not it will start
% a new page. The code is a variant of code thought of for the
% \Lpack{needspace} package~\cite{NEEDSPACE}.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added patch v1.4 versions of needspace macros}
% \changes{v3.6g}{2010/09/09}{Added a \cs{vskip0pt} at the end to make
% it work better with \cs{section} and friends}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\needspace}[1]{\begingroup\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
\vskip\z@\@plus\dimen@\penalty -100\vskip\z@\@plus-\dimen@
\vskip\dimen@\penalty 9999\vskip-\dimen@\vskip\z@skip\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Needspace}
% \begin{macro}{\Needspace*}
% \cs{Needspace} and \cs{Needspace*} are more robust versions of \cs{needspace},
% which depends on penalties. If either \cs{needspace} or \cs{Needspace}
% produce a short page it will be ragged bottom, even if \cs{flushbottom}
% is in effect. The \cs{Needspace*} version honours the \cs{...bottom}
% declaration.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\Needspace}{\@ifstar{\M@sneedsp@}{\M@needsp@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\M@sneedsp@}
% \begin{macro}{\M@needsp@}
% These implement \cs{Needspace*} and \cs{needspace} respectively.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\M@sneedsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
\dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
\ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
\break
\fi\endgroup}
\newcommand{\M@needsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
\dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
\ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
\ifdim \dimen@ii>\z@
\vfil
\fi
\break
\fi\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Overlong lines}
%
% LaTeX provides \cs{fussy} and \cs{sloppy} to control the amount of slack
% in a line while trying to make justified lines. Their definitions are:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\fussy{%
% \emergencystretch\z@
% \tolerance 200%
% \hfuzz .1\p@
% \vfuzz\hfuzz}
% \def\sloppy{%
% \tolerance 9999%
% \emergencystretch 3em%
% \hfuzz .5\p@
% \vfuzz\hfuzz}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macro}{\midsloppy}
% Somewhere between \cs{fussy} and \cs{sloppy}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{midsloppy} and midsloppypar
% (mempatch v4.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\midsloppy}{%
\tolerance 5000%
\hbadness 4000%
\emergencystretch 1.5em%
\hfuzz .1\p@
\vfuzz\hfuzz}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{midsloppypar}
% A paragraph form of \cs{midsloppy}; equivalent to \verb?\par \midsloppy ... \par}?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{midsloppypar}{\par\midsloppy}{\par}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsection{Text spacing commands}
%
% While we're at it, new text spacing commands to supplement
% the kernel's \\
% \verb?\, (\thinspace) = 3/18 em?
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Extra text spacing macros from patch v1.4}
% \begin{macro}{\medspace}
% \begin{macro}{\:}
% Medium space \verb?\: (\medspace) = 4/18 em?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\medspace}{\kern .22222em }
\DeclareRobustCommand{\:}{%
\relax\ifmmode\mskip\medmuskip\else\medspace\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\!}
% Negative thin space (- 3/18 em).
% Patrik Nyman (private email 2003/10/06) pointed out I had missed
% the final \verb?\fi? !!!!.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\!}{%
\relax\ifmmode\mskip-\thinmuskip\else\negthinspace\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Fractions and subscripts}
%
%
% Styles for fractions like 3/4.
%
% \begin{macro}{\slashfracstyle}
% \cs{slashfracstyle} based on the kernel \cs{textsuperscript} macro
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{slashfrac} and supports (from patch v1.4)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\slashfracstyle}[1]{%
{\m@th\ensuremath{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont #1}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\slashfrac}
% \cs{slashfrac} based on TeXbook exercise 11.6
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\slashfrac}[2]{\leavevmode
\raise.5ex\hbox{\slashfracstyle{#1}}\kern-.13em/%
\kern-.15em\lower.25ex\hbox{\slashfracstyle{#2}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textsubscript}
% \begin{macro}{\@textsubscript}
% \cs{textsubscript}, for text subscripts, based on the kernel
% \cs{textsuperscript} macro.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Added \cs{textsubscript} and supports
% (from patch v1.5)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\textsubscript}[1]{%
\@textsubscript{\selectfont#1}}
\newcommand*{\@textsubscript}[1]{%
{\m@th\ensuremath{_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Numbers to names}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% number formatting
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The macros here convert an integer number in the range 0--2147483647
% (TeX's maximum) into
% the natural language name of the number.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/16}{Much extended numbers to names (patch v1.2)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\iflowernumtoname}
% A flag for lowercasing the initial letters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iflowernumtoname
\lowernumtonamefalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpriornum}
% \begin{macro}{\ifminusnumber}
% \begin{macro}{\ifnotnumtonameallcaps}
% \begin{macro}{\ifmakeordinal}
% Some new booleans
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpriornum
\newif\ifminusnumber
\newif\ifnotnumtonameallcaps
\newif\ifmakeordinal
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\namenumberand}
% \begin{macro}{\namenumbercomma}
% \begin{macro}{\lcminusname}
% \begin{macro}{\ucminusname}
% \begin{macro}{\minusname}
% Some macros representing characters/words for number formatting.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\namenumberand}{ and }
\newcommand*{\namenumbercomma}{, }
\newcommand*{\lcminusname}{minus }
\newcommand*{\ucminusname}{Minus }
\let\minusname\lcminusname
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fnumbersep}
% \begin{macro}{\tensunitsep}
% \begin{macro}{\nthstring}
% \begin{macro}{\iststring}
% \begin{macro}{\iindstring}
% \begin{macro}{\iiirdstring}
% \begin{macro}{\tiethstring}
% \begin{macro}{\teenstring}
% More characters/words for formatting
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fnumbersep}{,}
\newcommand*\tensunitsep{-}
\newcommand*{\nthstring}{th} % nth
\newcommand*{\iststring}{st} % 1st
\newcommand*{\iindstring}{nd} % 2nd
\newcommand*{\iiirdstring}{rd} % 3rd
\newcommand*{\tiethstring}{tieth} % tieth
\newcommand*{\teenstring}{teen} % teen
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordscript}
% How to format the ordinal string
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ordscript}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mten}
% An internal shorthand for 10
% \begin{macrocode}
\chardef\m@mten=10 % shorthand for 10
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@ism@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@xsm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@csm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@ksm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@xksm@mctr}
% Counters for digits (units to ten thousands) in a number
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{ism@mctr} % units
\newcounter{xsm@mctr} % tens
\newcounter{csm@mctr} % hundreds
\newcounter{ksm@mctr} % thousands
\newcounter{xksm@mctr} % ten thousands
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@cksm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@msm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@xmsm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@cmsm@mctr}
% \begin{macro}{\c@bsm@mctr}
% Counters for digits (hundred thousands to billions) in a number
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{cksm@mctr} % hundred thousands
\newcounter{msm@mctr} % millions
\newcounter{xmsm@mctr} % ten millions
\newcounter{cmsm@mctr} % hundred millions
\newcounter{bsm@mctr} % billions
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@workm@mctr}
% A `work' counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{workm@mctr}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numdigits}
% \cs{numdigits}\marg{number} splits the \meta{number} into individual digits.
% It sets \cs{minusnumbertrue} if the number is negative, otherwise it is false.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numdigits}[1]{%
\setcounter{ism@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{xsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{csm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{ksm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{xksm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{cksm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{msm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{xmsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{cmsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{bsm@mctr}{0}%
\setcounter{workm@mctr}{#1}%
\minusnumberfalse
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr < \z@ % negative
\minusnumbertrue
\c@workm@mctr = -\c@workm@mctr
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \m@ne % units
\c@ism@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@ism@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % tens
\c@xsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@xsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % hundreds
\c@csm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@csm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % thousands
\c@ksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@ksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % ten thousands
\c@xksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@xksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % hundred thousands
\c@cksm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@cksm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % millions
\c@msm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@msm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % ten millions
\c@xmsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@xmsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@ % hundred millions
\c@cmsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@cmsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\fi
\ifnum \c@workm@mctr > \z@% billions
\c@bsm@mctr = \c@workm@mctr
\divide \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\multiply \c@workm@mctr by \m@mten
\advance \c@bsm@mctr by -\c@workm@mctr
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\form@tnumber}
% \cs{form@tnumber}\marg{number} formats \meta{number} as digits.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\form@tnumber}[1]{%
\numdigits{#1}%
\ifminusnumber-\fi
\priornumfalse
\ifnum \c@bsm@mctr > \z@ % billions
\priornumtrue
\thebsm@mctr\fnumbersep
\fi
\ifpriornum % hundred millions
\thecmsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thecmsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % ten millions
\thexmsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thexmsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % millions
\themsm@mctr\fnumbersep
\else
\ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\themsm@mctr\fnumbersep
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % hundred thousands
\thecksm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thecksm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % ten thousands
\thexksm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thexksm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % thousands
\theksm@mctr\fnumbersep
\else
\ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\theksm@mctr\fnumbersep
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % hundreds
\thecsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@csm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thecsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\ifpriornum % tens
\thexsm@mctr
\else
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
\priornumtrue
\thexsm@mctr
\fi
\fi
\theism@mctr} % units
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cardinal}
% \cs{cardinal}\marg{number} prints \meta{number} unformatted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cardinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\let\fnumbersep\relax
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fcardinal}
% \cs{fcardinal}\marg{number} prints \meta{number} formatted.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fcardinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordinal}
% \cs{ordinal}\marg{number} prints \meta{number} as an unformatted ordinal.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ordinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\let\fnumbersep\relax
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\let\ordstring\nthstring
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr=\@ne\else
\ifcase \c@ism@mctr
\or \let\ordstring\iststring% 1st
\or \let\ordstring\iindstring% 2nd
\or \let\ordstring\iiirdstring% 3rd
\fi
\fi
\ordscript{\ordstring}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fordinal}
% \cs{fordinal}\marg{number} prints \meta{number} as a formatted ordinal.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fordinal}[1]{%
\begingroup
\form@tnumber{#1}%
\let\ordstring\nthstring
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr=\@ne\else
\ifcase \c@ism@mctr
\or \let\ordstring\iststring% 1st
\or \let\ordstring\iindstring% 2nd
\or \let\ordstring\iiirdstring% 3rd
\fi
\fi
\ordscript{\ordstring}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next, tedious, code is for translating numbers into names.
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNameo}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamec}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamem}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamemm}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamemmm}
% Names of major numbers: $0$, $10^{2}$, $10^{3}$, $10^{6}$, and $10^{9}$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNameo{\iflowernumtoname z\else Z\fi ero}
\newcommand*\nNamec{\iflowernumtoname h\else H\fi undred}
\newcommand*\nNamem{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi housand}
\newcommand*\nNamemm{\iflowernumtoname m\else M\fi illion}
\newcommand*\nNamemmm{\iflowernumtoname b\else B\fi illion}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamei}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameiii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameiv}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamev}
% These are the names for numbers 1 to 5.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamei{\iflowernumtoname o\else O\fi ne}
\newcommand*\nNameii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wo}
\newcommand*\nNameiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hree}
\newcommand*\nNameiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi our}
\newcommand*\nNamev{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ive}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamevi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamevii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameviii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameix}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamex}
% These are the names for numbers 6 to 10.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamevi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix}
\newcommand*\nNamevii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even}
\newcommand*\nNameviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ight}
\newcommand*\nNameix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine}
\newcommand*\nNamex{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi en}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiv}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexv}
% These are the names for numbers 11 to 15.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexi{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi leven}
\newcommand*\nNamexii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi welve}
\newcommand*\nNamexiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hir\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi our\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\teenstring}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexviii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexix}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexx}
% These are the names for numbers 16 to 20.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexvi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexvii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine\teenstring}
\newcommand*\nNamexx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wenty}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexxx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexl}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamel}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxx}
% These are the names for numbers 30 to 70.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexxx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hirty}
\newcommand*\nNamexl{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi orty}
\newcommand*\nNamel{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ifty}
\newcommand*\nNamelx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ixty}
\newcommand*\nNamelxx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi eventy}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxxx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexc}
% These are the names for numbers 80 to 90.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamelxxx{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ighty}
\newcommand*\nNamexc{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi inety}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\unitnumbername}
% Get the name of a unit (0 -- 9).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\unitnumbername}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nNameo\or
\nNamei\or
\nNameii\or
\nNameiii\or
\nNameiv\or
\nNamev\or
\nNamevi\or
\nNamevii\or
\nNameviii\or
\nNameix\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\teennumbername}
% Get the name of a 'teen number (10 -- 19)
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\teennumbername}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nNamex\or
\nNamexi\or
\nNamexii\or
\nNamexiii\or
\nNamexiv\or
\nNamexv\or
\nNamexvi\or
\nNamexvii\or
\nNamexviii\or
\nNamexix\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tensnumbername}
% Get the name of a tens number (20 -- 90)
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tensnumbername}[2]{%
\ifnum #1=\@ne
\teennumbername{#2}\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\else
\ifcase #1
\or
\or \nNamexx
\or \nNamexxx
\or \nNamexl
\or \nNamel
\or \nNamelx
\or \nNamelxx
\or \nNamelxxx
\or \nNamexc
\fi
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\ifnum #2 > \z@ \tensunitsep\unitnumbername{#2}\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Names of small ordinals. The use of \cs{nthstring} instead of `th' saves
% some tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nthNameo{\nNameo\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamei{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi irst}
\newcommand*\nthNameii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi econd}
\newcommand*\nthNameiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hird}
\newcommand*\nthNameiv{\nNameiv\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamev{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamevi{\nNamevi\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamevii{\nNamevii\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNameviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNameix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi in\nthstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi welf\nthstring}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\unitordinalname}
% Get the ordinal name of a unit (0 -- 9)
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\unitordinalname}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nthNameo\or
\nthNamei\or
\nthNameii\or
\nthNameiii\or
\nthNameiv\or
\nthNamev\or
\nthNamevi\or
\nthNamevii\or
\nthNameviii\or
\nthNameix\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\teenordinalname}
% Get the ordinal name of a 'teen number (10 -- 19). Using \cs{nthstring}
% instead of `th' to save some tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\teenordinalname}[1]{%
\ifcase #1 \nNamex\nthstring\or
\nNamexi\nthstring\or
\nthNamexii\or
\nNamexiii\nthstring\or
\nNamexiv\nthstring\or
\nNamexv\nthstring\or
\nNamexvi\nthstring\or
\nNamexvii\nthstring\or
\nNamexviii\nthstring\or
\nNamexix\nthstring\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tensordinalname}
% Get the ordinal name of a tens number (20 -- 90)
% (Mathew Dafilis (\texttt{mpd@swin.edu.au}) sent Email on 2003/11/14
% saying that \cs{ordinaltoname} didn't work for 20, 30, etc. He was
% correct. It is now fixed.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tensordinalname}[2]{%
\ifnum #1=\@ne
\teenordinalname{#2}\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\else
\ifnum #2> \z@
\ifcase #1
\or
\or \nNamexx
\or \nNamexxx
\or \nNamexl
\or \nNamel
\or \nNamelx
\or \nNamelxx
\or \nNamelxxx
\or \nNamexc
\fi
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\tensunitsep\unitordinalname{#2}
\else
\ifcase #1
\or
\or \nthNamexx
\or \nthNamexxx
\or \nthNamexl
\or \nthNamel
\or \nthNamelx
\or \nthNamelxx
\or \nthNamelxxx
\or \nthNamexc
\fi
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The names of tens ordinals. The use of \cs{tiethstring} instead
% of `tieth' saves somes tokens.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nthNamexx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wen\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexxx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hir\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexl{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi or\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamel{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi if\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamelx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamelxx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamelxxx{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi igh\tiethstring}
\newcommand*\nthNamexc{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine\tiethstring}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\n@me@number}
% \cs{n@me@number}\marg{number} is an internal macro to convert a
% \meta{number} to names.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\n@me@number}[1]{%
\begingroup
\numdigits{#1}%
\ifminusnumber\minusname\fi
\priornumfalse
%% billions
\ifnum \c@bsm@mctr > \z@
\unitnumbername{\thebsm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamemmm
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% hundred millions
\ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
\unitnumbername{\thecmsm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% tens/units millions
\ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cmsm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\tensnumbername{\thexmsm@mctr}{\themsm@mctr}%
\priornumtrue
\else
\ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cmsm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\unitnumbername{\themsm@mctr}%
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\priornumtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifnum \c@cmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamemm
\else
\ifnum \c@xmsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamemm
\else
\ifnum \c@msm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamemm
\fi
\fi
\fi
%% hundred thousands
\ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
\unitnumbername{\thecksm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% tens/units thousands
\ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cksm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\tensnumbername{\thexksm@mctr}{\theksm@mctr}%
\priornumtrue
\else
\ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum
\ifnum\c@cksm@mctr>\z@\namenumberand\else\namenumbercomma\fi
\fi
\unitnumbername{\theksm@mctr}%
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi
\priornumtrue
\fi
\fi
\ifnum \c@cksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamem
\else
\ifnum \c@xksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamem
\else
\ifnum \c@ksm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\space\fi
\nNamem
\fi
\fi
\fi
%% hundreds
\ifnum \c@csm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumbercomma\fi
\unitnumbername{\thecsm@mctr}\space
\ifnotnumtonameallcaps\lowernumtonametrue\fi\nNamec
\priornumtrue
\fi
%% tens/units
\ifmakeordinal
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\tensordinalname{\thexsm@mctr}{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifnum \c@ism@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\unitordinalname{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifpriornum\nthstring\else\unitordinalname{\theism@mctr}\fi
\fi
\fi
\else % not ordinal
\ifnum \c@xsm@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\tensnumbername{\thexsm@mctr}{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifnum \c@ism@mctr > \z@
\ifpriornum\namenumberand\fi
\unitnumbername{\theism@mctr}%
\else
\ifpriornum\else\unitnumbername{\theism@mctr}\fi
\fi
\fi
\fi % end ifmakeordinal
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Made all \cs{(num/ordinal)toname} robust}
% \begin{macro}{\numtoname}
% Lowercase all names
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\numtoname}[1]{%
\makeordinalfalse
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonametrue%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numtoName}
% Uppercase first letter of first name (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\numtoName}[1]{%
\makeordinalfalse
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\NumToName}
% Uppercase first letter of all names (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\NumToName}[1]{%
\makeordinalfalse
\notnumtonameallcapsfalse%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordinaltoname}
% Lowercase all ordinal names
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\ordinaltoname}[1]{%
\makeordinaltrue
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonametrue%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ordinaltoName}
% Uppercase first letter of first ordinal name (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\ordinaltoName}[1]{%
\makeordinaltrue
\notnumtonameallcapstrue%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\OrdinalToName}
% Uppercase first letter of all ordinal names (all else lowercase).
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\OrdinalToName}[1]{%
\makeordinaltrue
\notnumtonameallcapsfalse%
\lowernumtonamefalse%
\n@me@number{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{A fix for two column headings}
%
%
% This is from a posting by Donald Arseneau to \ctt{} on 23 April 2001 to fix
% a problem --- `When I use \verb?\onecolumn\chapter...? its headline
% is printed lower on the page than for two-column chapters'
%
% DA and I had previously discussed this in relation to the Index
% and I had put a hack into the \Lpack{tocbibind} package to fix the Index.
%
% Donald posted the following.
%
% \cs{vspace*} gives bad spacing after a pagebreak and \cs{@makechapterhead}
% starts with \cs{vspace*}.
% The biggest problem is the definition of \cs{@topnewpage}, which is used
% for the two-column spanning text. Here is a redefinition:
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added DA's redefinition of \cs{@topnewpage}}
% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def \@topnewpage [#1]{%
\@nodocument
\@next\@currbox\@freelist{}{}%
\global \setbox\@currbox
\vbox {%
\break
\prevdepth\z@
\begingroup
\normalcolor
\hsize\textwidth
\@parboxrestore
\col@number \@ne
#1%
\vskip -\dbltextfloatsep
\endgroup
\null % ordinary \baselineskip
\vskip -\topskip
}%
\begingroup %% \showbox\@currbox
\splitmaxdepth\maxdepth \splittopskip\topskip
\setbox\@tempboxa \vsplit\@currbox to \z@
\endgroup %% \showbox\@currbox
\ifdim \ht\@currbox>\textheight
\ht\@currbox \textheight
\fi
\global \count\@currbox \tw@
\@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
\advance \@tempdima -\dbltextfloatsep
\global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
\ifx \@dbltoplist \@empty
\else
\@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
\let \@dbltoplist \@empty
\fi
\@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
\global \@dbltopnum \m@ne
\ifdim \@colht<2.5\baselineskip
\@latex@warning@no@line {Optional argument of \noexpand\twocolumn
too tall on page \thepage}%
\@emptycol
\if@firstcolumn
\else
\@emptycol
\fi
\else
\global \vsize \@colht
\global \@colroom \@colht
\@floatplacement
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The original version of \cs{@topnewpage} is in \file{ltouput.dtx}, line 159.
%
% \subsection{Time of day}
%
% William Adams (2006/08/28) supplied a basis for
% \cs{printime}, which he needed for \cs{quarkmarks} but I have used one
% from \textit{TeX for the Impatient}
% as it saves some counters.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{printime} and friends (mempatch v4.6)}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mcalchm}
% Calculate the hours and minutes from \cs{time}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mcalchm}{%
\count0 = \time \divide \count0 by 60\relax
\count2 = \count0\relax% the hour
\count4 = \time \multiply\count0 by 60\relax
\advance\count4 by -\count0\relax% the minute
\ifnum\count4<10 \toks1 = {0}% make a leading zero
\else \toks1 = {}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hmpunct}
% \begin{macro}{\amname}
% \begin{macro}{\pmname}
% User format controls for \cs{printtime}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% punctuation, am and pm for \printtime
\newcommand*{\hmpunct}{:}% hours minutes separator
\newcommand*{\amname}{am}% ante meridiem
\newcommand*{\pmname}{pm}% post meridiem
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printtime}
% \begin{macro}{\printtime*}
% Print the time of day as 24 hour clock or 12 hour clock
% \cs{printtime} prints the time par 24 hour clock and \cs{printtime*}
% per 12 hour clock.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\printtime}{%
\@ifstar{\m@msprtime}{\m@mprtime}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprtime}
% \begin{macro}{\m@msprtime}
% These implement time printing: \cs{m@mprtime} as 24 hour clock and
% \cs{m@msprtime} as 12 hour clock
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\m@mprtime}{\begingroup
\m@mcalchm
\number\count2\hmpunct\the\toks1 \number\count4
\endgroup}
\newcommand*{\m@msprtime}{\begingroup
\m@mcalchm
\def\@mpm{\pmname}%
\ifnum\count2<1\relax% early in the morning
\count2=12\relax
\ifnum\count4>0\relax% not midnight
\def\@mpm{\amname}%
\fi
\else
\ifnum\time<721\relax% noon or earlier
\def\@mpm{\amname}%
\else
\ifnum\time>779\relax% 1300 hrs or later
\advance\count2 by -12\relax
\fi
\fi
\fi
\number\count2\hmpunct\the\toks1 \number\count4\ \@mpm
\endgroup}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Sequential sheet (page) numbers}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@sheetsequence}
% Peter Heslin asked for the ability to add a sequential page number
% (1 for the first page, N for the last page, no matter what value
% the page counter has) to the trimming marks.
%
% \cs{c@sheetsequence} is a new counter for pages starting at the
% beginning and independent
% of the standard page counter. This should not be reset by anything.
% The counter increment has to be added to the output routine.
%
% This may also be useful for page N of M numbering.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added sheetsequence counter.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{sheetsequence}
\setcounter{sheetsequence}{1}
\renewcommand{\thesheetsequence}{\@arabic\c@sheetsequence}
\g@addto@macro{\@outputpage}{\stepcounter{sheetsequence}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@lastsheet}
% \begin{macro}{\c@lastpage}
% While we're at it, might as well provide for lastpage and lastsheet counters
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lastsheet and lastpage functions.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{lastsheet}
\setcounter{lastsheet}{0}
\newcounter{lastpage}
\setcounter{lastpage}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dol@stsheet}
% \begin{macro}{\dol@stpage}
% These two macros write the values of lastsheet and lastpage to the
% \file{aux} file. They have to be called at the end of the document
% after a \cs{clearpage} to flush out any floats.
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/02/27}{In \cs{dol@stpage} use the page counter value,
% not \cs{thepage} otherwise problems with
% non-arabic page numbers (patch 1.1)}
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/21}{In \cs{dol@stpage} use the sheet counter value,
% not \cs{thesheetsequence} otherwise problems
% if (e.g., hangul.sty) \cs{@arabic} is redefined}
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/02}{Made \cs{dol@stsheet} and \cs{dol@stpage}
% obey \cs{nofiles}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Made \cs{dol@stsheet} and \cs{dolastpage}
% use \cs{memsetcounter} instead of \cs{setcounter}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\dol@stsheet}{%
\if@filesw
\addtocounter{sheetsequence}{-1}%
\immediate\write\@auxout%
{\string\memsetcounter{lastsheet}{\the\c@sheetsequence}}%
\stepcounter{sheetsequence}%
\fi}
\newcommand{\dol@stpage}{%
\if@filesw
\addtocounter{page}{-1}%
\immediate\write\@auxout%
{\string\memsetcounter{lastpage}{\the\c@page}}%
\stepcounter{page}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% I originally used this: \\
% \verb?\AtEndDocument{\clearpage\dol@stsheet\dol@stpage}?
% but following the CTT thread \textit{AtEndDocument produces unwanted page
% break}, 2004/03/11, and in particular Dan Luecking's response I now
% try as hard as possible to do it right at the end, but even this is not
% 100\% reliable. The only way to ensure reliability is to modify the kernel
% \verb?\enddocument? which doesn't seem to be a particularly wise thing
% to do.
% \changes{v1.61}{2004/03/14}{Changed location of calls to \cs{dol@stsheet}
% and \cs{dol@stpage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\AtEndDocument{\clearpage\dol@stsheet\dol@stpage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Leaves per gathering}
%
% Traditionally books are assembled in terms of gatherings, or signatures,
% with perhaps 8 or 16 pages (or leaves) per grouping (a leaf has two pages,
% recto and one verso). At the request of Alan Ristow code for this has
% been included in the class.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifcntrmod}
% \begin{macro}{\ifnotcntrmod}
% \begin{macro}{\iscntrmod}
% \cs{iscntrmod}\marg{counter}\marg{number} returns \cs{cntrmod(true|false)}
% and \cs{notcntrmod(false|true)} if \meta{counter} is a multiple of
% \meta{number}.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{iscntrmod}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifcntrmod
\newif\ifnotcntrmod
\newcommand*{\iscntrmod}[2]{
\@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}%
\@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
\divide\@tempcnta #2\relax
\multiply\@tempcnta #2\relax
\advance\@tempcntb-\@tempcnta
\ifnum\@tempcntb=0\relax
\cntrmodtrue
\notcntrmodfalse
\else
\cntrmodfalse
\notcntrmodtrue
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memensuresigpages}
% Ouput enough (empty) pages to make up a complete final signature.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{@memensuresigpages}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memensuresigpages}{%
\ifnum\@mempagespersig<\@ne
\else
\iscntrmod{sheetsequence}{\@mempagespersig}
\ifcntrmod
\else
\clearpage
\pagestyle{empty}
\mbox{}
\loop
\iscntrmod{sheetsequence}{\@mempagespersig}
\ifnotcntrmod
\clearpage
\pagestyle{empty}
\mbox{}
\repeat
\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\leavespergathering}
% \cs{leavespergathering}\marg{num} is the user command for specifying that
% there must be \meta{num} leaves per gathering (2\meta{num} pages per
% gathering). For \meta{num} more than one the total number of pages output
% is exactly divisible by 2\meta{num}. \meta{num} less than two (the default)
% has no effect.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{leavespergathering}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\leavespergathering}[1]{\@memcnta=#1\relax
\ifnum\@memcnta<\tw@
\def\@mempagespersig{-1}%
\else
\multiply\@memcnta \tw@
\edef\@mempagespersig{\@memcnta}%
\fi}
\leavespergathering{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Finally, make sure that the requested number of pages is output.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{\@memensuresigpages}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Initialization} \label{sec:init}
%
% \subsection{Words and phrases}
%
% This document class is for documents prepared in the English language.
% To prepare a version for another language, various English words
% and phrases must
% be replaced. The English elements that require replacement are
% defined below in command names.
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
% \begin{macro}{\listfigurename}
% \begin{macro}{\listtablename}
% \begin{macro}{\bookname}
% \begin{macro}{\partname}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptername}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixtocname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpagename}
% \begin{macro}{\bibname}
% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
% \begin{macro}{\glossaryname}
%
% This list is for titles of document sections.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\abstractname}{Abstract}
\newcommand*{\contentsname}{Contents}
\newcommand*{\listfigurename}{List of Figures}
\newcommand*{\listtablename}{List of Tables}
\newcommand*{\bookname}{Book}
\newcommand*{\partname}{Part}
\newcommand*{\chaptername}{Chapter}
\newcommand*{\appendixname}{Appendix}
\newcommand*{\appendixtocname}{Appendices}
\newcommand*{\appendixpagename}{Appendices}
\newcommand*{\bibname}{Bibliography}
\newcommand*{\indexname}{Index}
\newcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
% \begin{macro}{\figurerefname}
% \begin{macro}{\tablerefname}
% \begin{macro}{\pagename}
% \begin{macro}{\pagrefename}
%
% These are the names and phrases used for general elements.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\figurename}{Figure}
\newcommand*{\tablename}{Table}
\newcommand*{\figurerefname}{Figure}
\newcommand*{\tablerefname}{Table}
\newcommand*{\pagename}{page}
\newcommand*{\pagerefname}{page}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bookrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\partrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixrefname}
% More names for referencing.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{partrefname}, \cs{chapterrefname}
% and \cs{sectionrefname}}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Added \cs{bookrefname} (mempatch v4.9+)}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/05/17}{Added \cs{appendixrefname}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bookrefname}{Book~}
\newcommand*{\partrefname}{Part~}
\newcommand*{\chapterrefname}{Chapter~}
\newcommand*{\sectionrefname}{\S}
\newcommand*{\appendixrefname}{Appendix~}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Date}
%
% \begin{macro}{\today}
% This macro uses the \TeX\ primitives \cs{month}, \cs{day} and \cs{year}
% to provide the date of the \LaTeX-run.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\today}{\ifcase\month\or
January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
\space\number\day, \number\year}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Two column mode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
% This gives the distance between two columns in two column mode.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnsep{10\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
% This gives the width of the rule between two columns in two
% column mode. We have no visible rule.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The page style and counters}
% We use the page style \pstyle{headings} by
% default and arabic page numbering. But if the \verb?article?
% class option is in effect, we will use the \pstyle{plain} style
% which is the default in the \verb?article? class.
% \changes{v3.6d}{2010/05/13}{When emulating the article class the
% plain page style should used instead of headings}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt
\pagestyle{plain}
\else
\pagestyle{headings}
\fi
\pagenumbering{arabic}
% \end{macrocode}
% We set the sectional counters to zero, the \verb?tocdepth? to
% one (sections and above listed), the \verb?secnumdepth? to
% two (sections and above numbered), and \cs{maxsecnumdepth} to
% the same.
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added initialisation of \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{part}{0}
\setcounter{chapter}{0}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
\maxsecnumdepth{section}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Set the \cs{linenumberfrequency} to zero to prohibit line numbering
% and also set the font for line numbers. Can now set the final space
% for boxed verbatim line numbers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\linenumberfrequency{0}
\linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Single or double sided printing}
%
%
% Unless the \Lopt{twoside} wasn't specified, We do not try to make
% each page of equal height.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
\else
\raggedbottom
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% When the \Lopt{twocolumn} option was specified we call
% \cs{twocolumn} to activate this mode. We try to make each column as
% long as the others, but call \cs{sloppy} to make our life easier.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\twocolumn
\sloppy
\flushbottom
% \end{macrocode}
% Normally we call \cs{onecolumn} to initiate typesetting in one
% column.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\onecolumn
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Floats}
%
% Here are the implementations of the figure and table environments
% and their accompanying List of\ldots
%
% \begin{environment}{figure}
% \begin{environment}{figure*}
% This is the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
% \verb?*? is used for double column figures. We use \cs{newfloat} to set it.
% In this class figures are numbered per chapter, but we need to change
% the default definition of \cs{thefigure} if a figure
% is in a pre-numbered chapter.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% figure float}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Killed \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% figure float}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newfloat[chapter]{figure}{lof}{\figurename}
%%% \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
\renewcommand{\thefigure}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@figure}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures*}
% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of figures.
% The LoF heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% list of figures}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Killed \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% listoffigures}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{listoffigures}{lof}{\listfigurename}
%%% \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@figure}
% \cs{l@figure}\marg{title}\marg{page} typesets the LoF entry for
% a \cs{figure} caption heading.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% figure listentry}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{figure}{lof}{0}
\cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{2.3em}
%% \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{table}
% \begin{environment}{table*}
% The definition for tables is almost identical.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% table float}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Killed \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% table float}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newfloat[chapter]{table}{lot}{\tablename}
%%% \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
\renewcommand{\thetable}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@table}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
% \begin{macro}{\listoftables*}
% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of tables.
% The LoT heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% list of tables}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Killed \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% list of tables}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{listoftables}{lot}{\listtablename}
%%% \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@table}
% \cs{l@table}\marg{title}\marg{page} typesets the LoT entry for
% a \cs{table} caption heading.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new
% table listentry}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{table}{lot}{0}
\cftsetindents{table}{0em}{2.3em}
%% \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The \Lpack{subfigure} package defines \verb?lofdepth? and \verb?lotdepth?
% counters. If is not used, then we have to define them. The \Lpack{subfig}
% package replaced \Lpack{subfigure} in 2005, and this only defined
% the counters if they were not previously defined. It now seems sensible
% to ignore any use of the \Lpack{subfigure} package. This makes life a lot
% simpler.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Ignore subfig(ure) package re \cs{lofdepth}
% and \cs{lotdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%%\AtBeginDocument{%
%%% \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}%
%%% {\newcounter{lofdepth}\setcounter{lofdepth}{1}}{}
%%% \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}%
%%% {\newcounter{lotdepth}\setcounter{lotdepth}{1}}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
%
% The \Lopt{article} option requires changes to the default chapterstyle,
% and the numbering of floats, etc.
%
% Emanuele Vicentini (2003/07/21) suggested making \cs{maketitle} more
% closely match the real article's appearance.
% Alan Budden\footnote{\texttt{alan.s.budden@bristol.ac.uk}} commented
% on 2003/12/18 that the equation counter should be continuous.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Added footnote and chaptername changes to the article option}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/11/22}{Added some resets of maketitle macros to
% the article option (from patch v1.7)}
% \changes{v1.4}{2003/12/18}{Added equation counter to article resets}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt
\chapterstyle{article}
\counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
\counterwithout{table}{chapter}
\counterwithout{footnote}{chapter}
\counterwithout{equation}{chapter}
\renewcommand{\chaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\maketitlehookb}{%
\vskip -1.5\topsep\vskip -1.5\partopsep}
\renewcommand{\maketitlehookc}{%
\vskip -1.5\topsep\vskip -1.5\partopsep}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
%
% This should be done last as it makes various changes to the defaults.
%
% \begin{macro}{\msdoublespacing}
% \begin{macro}{\mssinglespacing}
% These do nothing unless the \Lopt{ms} option is used; then they change
% the \cs{baselinestretch}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\msdoublespacing}{}
\newcommand{\mssinglespacing}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifmsdoc
\renewcommand{\msdoublespacing}{%
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}\large\normalsize}
\renewcommand{\mssinglespacing}{%
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.0}\large\normalsize}
\renewcommand{\familydefault}{cmtt}
\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmtt}
\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{cmtt}
\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{m}
\renewcommand{\itdefault}{n}
\renewcommand{\sldefault}{n}
\renewcommand{\scdefault}{n}
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}
\@twocolumnfalse
\onecolumn
\sloppy
\@twosidefalse
\raggedbottom
\pagestyle{plain}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Emulated packages}
%
% Many of the `emulations' are extensions and integration of package
% facilities. In some cases an `emulated' package just won't work with the
% class, so I've added it here to prevent it from being loaded. In any case,
% most of the packages are mine.
% \changes{v1.6180339}{2008/07/23}{Added dates to emulated packages}
% \changes{v1.61803398d}{2010/02/13}{Emulated tocvsec2, used the date
% from the other lines, tocvsec2 provides the same macros as memoir}
% \begin{macrocode}
\EmulatedPackage{abstract}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{appendix}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{array}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{booktabs}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{ccaption}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{changepage}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{chngcntr}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{chngpage}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{crop}
\EmulatedPackage{dcolumn}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{delarray}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{enumerate}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{epigraph}[2008/07/23]
%%%%%\EmulatedPackage{framed}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{ifmtarg}[2008/07/23]
\ifm@mifetex\EmulatedPackage{ifetex}[2008/07/23]\fi
\ifm@mifluatex\EmulatedPackage{ifluatex}[2008/07/23]\fi
\ifm@mifpdf\EmulatedPackage{ifpdf}[2008/07/23]\fi
\ifm@mifxetex\EmulatedPackage{ifxetex}[2008/07/23]\fi
\EmulatedPackage{index}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{makeidx}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{moreverb}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{mparhack}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{needspace}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{newfile}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{nextpage}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{pagenote}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{parskip}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{patchcmd}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{setspace}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{shortvrb}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{showidx}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{tabularx}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{titleref}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{titling}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{tocbibind}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{tocloft}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{tocvsec2}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{verbatim}[2008/07/23]
\EmulatedPackage{verse}[2008/07/23]
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Interaction with the \Lpack{caption} package}
%
% Although the author of the \Lpack{caption} package has, over the years,
% made it work
% with many other classes he has not extended it to either recognise
% or work with the memoir
% class. Some authors want to use the \Lpack{caption} package, hence\ldots
%
% Kill changes to the caption macros when the \Lpack{caption} package is used.
% The \Lpack{caption} package checks the definitions of the \cs{@makecaption},
% \cs{caption} and \cs{@caption} macros. These need to be identical to the
% definitions in the standard classes for the package to disbelieve that
% the \Lpack{memoir} class is being used.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
% \begin{macro}{\caption}
% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Killed memoir's captioning when the caption
% package is used (mempatch v4.9).}
% \begin{macrocode}
%%% revert changes to captioning macros if the caption package is used.
\AtBeginPackage{caption}{
\ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{%
You are using the caption package with the memoir \MessageBreak
class. This may cause unexpected or inconsistent \MessageBreak
results if you use any of memoir's captioning facilities}
\long\def\@makecaption##1##2{%
\vskip\abovecaptionskip
\sbox\@tempboxa{##1: ##2}%
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
##1: ##2\par
\else
\global \@minipagefalse
\hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
\fi
\vskip\belowcaptionskip}
\def\caption{%
\ifx\@captype\@undefined
\@latex@error{\noexpand\caption outside float}\@ehd
\expandafter\@gobble
\else
\refstepcounter\@captype
\expandafter\@firstofone
\fi
{\@dblarg{\@caption\@captype}}%
}
\long\def\@caption##1[##2]##3{%
\par
\addcontentsline{\csname ext@##1\endcsname}{##1}%
{\protect\numberline{\csname the##1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces ##2}}%
\begingroup
\@parboxrestore
\if@minipage
\@setminipage
\fi
\normalsize
\@makecaption{\csname fnum@##1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces ##3}\par
\endgroup}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Interaction with the \Lpack{float} package}
%
% The \Lpack{float} package also defines \cs{newfloat}, so kill memoir's
% version when the \Lpack{float} package gets used.
% \changes{v1.61803}{2008/01/30}{Killed \cs{newfloat} when float package is
% used (mempatch v4.9)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginPackage{float}{\let\newfloat\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Patch file}
%
% At the suggestion of Danie Els (\texttt{DanieEls@sun.ac.za}), Dan Leucking
% (\texttt{luecking@uark.edu}) and others, input a patch file, if one exists,
% as the final act. (This is preferable to my series of \file{memfixa.sty},
% \file{memfixb.sty} packages, and so on, for each release of the class.)
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added input of mempatch.sty}
% \changes{v1.6180339c}{2008/12/26}{Added the two missing arguments when inputting
% mempatch.sty (courtesy of Wilhelm Muller)}
% \changes{v1.61803398}{2009/07/27}{PW: changed call to mempatch, which I think
% restores Lars' v1.6180339h change}
% \begin{macrocode}
\IfFileExists{mempatch.sty}{%
\RequirePackage{mempatch}}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The end of the class definitions.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Glossary Makeindex style file}
%
% Here is the basic style (configuration) file for Makeindex
% for use with the default glossary setup.
% \changes{v1.618}{2005/09/25}{Added basic.gst file}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*gst>
%%%%% basic.gst basic makeindex glossary configuration file for memoir
%%%%% Output style parameters
preamble "\\begin{theglossary}"
postamble "\n\\end{theglossary}\n"
group_skip "\n\\glossaryspace\n"
item_0 "\n\\glossitem"
delim_0 "{\\memglonum{"
encap_suffix "}}}"
%%% Input style parameters
keyword "\\glossaryentry"
%</gst>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The end of the configuration file code
%
% \bibliographystyle{alpha}
% \begingroup
% \raggedright
% \begin{thebibliography}{GMSN94A}
%
%
% \bibitem[ABH90]{bk:Impatient}
% Paul W.~Abrahams, Karl Berry and Kathryn A.~Hargreaves.
% \newblock \emph{TeX{} for the Impatient}.
% \newblock
% Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1990.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in \texttt{info/impatient})
%
% \bibitem[Ars01a]{TITLEREF}
% Donald Arseneau.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Titleref} package (version 3.1)}.
% \newblock April 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTN as
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/titleref.sty})
%
% \bibitem[Ars01b]{CHAPTERBIB}
% Donald Arseneau.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Chapterbib} package (version 1.9)}.
% \newblock September 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTN as
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/chapterbib.sty})
%
% \bibitem[Ars03]{FRAMED}
% Donald Arseneau.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Framed} package (version 0.8a)}.
% \newblock July 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN as
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/misc/framed.sty})
%
% \bibitem[Ars05]{PLACEINS}
% Donald Arseneau.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{Placeins} package (version 2.2)}.
% \newblock May 2005.
% \newblock (Available from CTN as
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/placeins/placeins.sty})
%
%
% \bibitem[ArWi00]{IFMTARG}
% Donald Arseneau and Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The ifmtarg package}.
% \newblock March, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
%
% \bibitem[Car94]{DELARRAY}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{delarray} package}.
% \newblock March 1994.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
%
% \bibitem[Car98a]{ENUMERATE}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The enumerate package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Car98b]{REMRESET}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The remreset package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/carlisle})
%
% \bibitem[Car99]{TABULARX}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{tabularx} package}.
% \newblock January 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Car01]{DCOLUMN}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The \Lpack{dcolumn} package}.
% \newblock May 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Coc02]{SUBFIGURE}
% Steven Douglas Cochran.
% \newblock \emph{The subfigure package}.
% \newblock March, 2002.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure})
%
% \bibitem[Dal99]{NATBIB}
% Patrick W. Daly.
% \newblock \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References}.
% \newblock May, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/natbib})
%
% \bibitem[Dow00]{PATCHCMD}
% Michael J. Downes
% \newblock \emph{The patchcmd package}.
% \newblock July 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/patchcmd})
%
% \bibitem[Fai98]{MOREVERB}
% Robin Fairbairns.
% \newblock \emph{The moreverb package}.
% \newblock December, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/moreverb})
%
% \bibitem[Fai03]{FOOTMISC}
% Robin Fairbairns.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{footmisc} --- a portmanteau package for
% customising footnotes in LaTeX}.
% \newblock February 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/footmisc})
%
%
% \bibitem[Fea03]{BOOKTABS}
% Simon Fear.
% \newblock \emph{Publication quality tables in \LaTeX}.
% \newblock March, 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/booktabs})
%
% \bibitem[Fra00]{CROP}
% Melchior Franz.
% \newblock \emph{The crop package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/crop})
%
%
% \bibitem[GMS94]{GOOSSENS94}
% Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin.
% \newblock {\em The LaTeX Companion}.
% \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1994.
%
%
%
% \bibitem[Knu84]{bk:knuth}
% Donald E. Knuth.
% \newblock \emph{The \TeX{}book}.
% \newblock
% Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1984.
%
%
% \bibitem[KWG]{TUFTE}
% Bil Kleb, Bill Wood, and Kevin Godby.
% \newblock \emph{Tufte LaTeX}.
% \newblock December 2009.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/tufte-latex/})
%
% \bibitem[Lam94]{bk:lamport}
% Leslie Lamport.
% \newblock \emph{\LaTeX\ --- A Document Preparation System}.
% \newblock
% Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
%
% \bibitem[LMB99]{CLASSES}
% Leslie Lamport, Frank Mittelbach and Johannes Braams.
% \newblock \emph{Standard Document Classes for LaTeX version 2e}.
% \newblock September, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN as
% \texttt{/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx})
%
% \bibitem[MC98]{ARRAY}
% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's tabular and array
% environment}
% \newblock May 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Oos96]{FANCYHDR}
% Piet van Oostrum.
% \newblock \emph{Page layout in LaTeX}.
% \newblock June, 1996.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr})
%
%
% \bibitem[Rah01]{NAMEREF}
% Sebastian Rahtz.
% \newblock \emph{Section name references in LaTeX}.
% \newblock January 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})
%
% \bibitem[Rah02]{HYPERREF}
% Sebastian Rahtz.
% \newblock \emph{Hypertext marks in LaTeX}.
% \newblock March 2002.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})
%
%
% \bibitem[Sch98]{EVERYSHI}
% Martin Schr\"{o}der.
% \newblock \emph{The everyshi package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/ms})
%
% \bibitem[SRR01]{VERBATIM}
% Rainer Sch\"{o}pf, Bernd Raichle and Chris Rowley.
% \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's verbatim and verbatim*
% environments}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Wil99]{TOCVSEC2}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocvsec2 package}.
% \newblock January, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00a]{EPIGRAPH}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The epigraph package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/epigraph})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00b]{ISOCLASS}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{LaTeX files for typesetting ISO standards}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/isostds/iso})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00c]{NEXTPAGE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The nextpage package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00d]{NEEDSPACE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The needspace package}.
% \newblock March, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01a]{ABSTRACT}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The abstract package}.
% \newblock February, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/abstract})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01b]{CHNGPAGE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The chngpage package}.
% \newblock February, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01c]{APPENDIX}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The appendix package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/appendix})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01d]{CCAPTION}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The ccaption package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01e]{CHNGCNTR}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The chngcntr package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01f]{HANGING}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The hanging package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/hanging})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01g]{TITLING}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The titling package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/titling})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01h]{TOCBIBIND}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocbibind package}.
% \newblock April, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01i]{TOCLOFT}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocloft package}.
% \newblock April, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01j]{VERSE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{Typesetting simple verse with LaTeX}.
% \newblock August, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/verse})
%
%
% \bibitem[Wil03]{LEDMAC}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{\Lpack{ledmac}: A presumptuous attempt to port EDMAC and
% TABMAC to LaTeX}.
% \newblock August 2003.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in
% \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/ledmac})
%
% \bibitem[Wil07]{GLISTER07}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock `Glisterings' \emph{TUGboat}, 28(2):229--232,
% \newblock 2007.
%
% \bibitem[Wil08]{GLISTER08}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock `Glisterings' \emph{TUGboat}, 29(2):324--327,
% \newblock 2008.
%
%
%
%
%
% \end{thebibliography}
% \endgroup
%
%
% \Finale
%
\endinput
%% \CharacterTable
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%%